- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi Electric
- Monitor
- GOT2000 Series
- User's Manual
Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual PDF
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
-GT27 model -GT25 model -GT25 open frame model -GT25 wide model -GT25 rugged model -GT23 model -GT21 model -GT21 wide model -Handy GOT -GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Be sure to read these instructions before using this product.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full
attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING Some failures of the GOT, communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off.
Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch.
An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a
serious accident. Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident.
An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device
that displays and outputs serious warning.
Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
When the GOT backlight has a failure, the GOT status will be as follows. Failure to observe this
instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
[GT27, GT25, GT23]
The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), the display section dims, and inputs by a touch switch are
disabled.
[GT2105-Q]
The POWER LED blinks (orange/blue), and the display section dims. However, inputs by a touch
switch are still available.
[GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
The display section dims. However, inputs by a touch switch are still available.
Even if the display section dims, inputs by a touch switch may still be available. This may cause an
unintended operation of the touch switch.
For example, if an operator assumes that the display section has dimmed because of the screen save
function and touches the display section to cancel the screen save, a touch switch may be activated.
The GOT backlight failure can be checked with a system signal of the GOT. (This system signal is not
available on GT2107-W, GT2104-R, GT2104-P, and GT2103-P.)
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
1
2
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING The display section of the GOT is an analog-resistive type touch panel.
When multiple points of the display section are touched simultaneously, an accident may occur due to
incorrect output or malfunction.
[GT27]
Do not touch three points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may cause an
accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.
[GT25,GT23,GT21]
Do not touch two points or more simultaneously on the display section. Doing so may operate the
switch located around the center of the touched point, or may cause an accident due to an incorrect
output or malfunction.
When programs or parameters of the controller (such as a PLC) that is monitored by the GOT are
changed, be sure to reset the GOT, or turn on the unit again after shutting off the power as soon as
possible.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
If a communication fault (including cable disconnection) occurs during monitoring on the GOT,
communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative.
For bus connection (GT27 and GT25 only): The GOT becomes inoperative. Power on the PLC CPU
again to reestablish communication.
For other than bus connection: The GOT becomes inoperative.
A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the
system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT
communication fault will occur.
Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction.
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the GOT and the system against
unauthorized access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from unreliable
networks and devices via network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private
networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving GOT trouble and
system trouble by unauthorized access, DoS attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting
vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS) state.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main-circuit, power or other wiring.
Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart.
Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction.
Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver.
Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section.
When the GOT connects to an Ethernet network, the IP address setting is restricted according to the
system configuration.
[GT27, GT25, GT23]
When a GOT2000 series model and a GOT1000 series model are on an Ethernet network, do not set
the IP address 192.168.0.18 for the GOTs and the controllers on this network.
Doing so can cause IP address duplication at the GOT startup, adversely affecting the communication
of the device with the IP address 192.168.0.18.
The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
[GT21]
Setting the IP address (192.168.3.18) in the following system configurations can cause IP address
duplication at GOT startup, adversely affecting communications of the device whose IP address is
192.168.3.18.
The operation at IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system.
When multiple GOTs connect to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the GOTs and the controllers in the network.
When one GOT connects to the Ethernet network:
Do not set the IP address (192.168.3.18) for the controllers other than the GOT in the network.
When using the Ethernet interfaces, set an IP address for each interface to access a different
network.
Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT.
Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they
communicate with the GOT.
When the GOT is subject to shock or vibration, or some colors appear on the screen of the GOT, the
screen of the GOT might flicker.
WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the GOT main unit to/from the panel.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the option unit onto/from the GOT. (GT27,GT25 Only)
3
4
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual.
Not doing so can cause an electric shock, fire, malfunction or product damage or deterioration.
When mounting the GOT to the control panel, tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque
range with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
[GT27, GT25-W, GT2512-S, GT2510-V, GT2508-V, GT23, GT2107-W]
Specified torque range (0.36 N.m to 0.48 N.m)
[GT2505-V, GT2105-Q]
Specified torque range (0.30 Nm to 0.50 Nm)
[GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
Specified torque range (0.20 Nm to 0.25 Nm)
Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the
GOT.
When mounting a unit on the GOT, tighten the mounting screws in the following specified torque
range.
[GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W)]
When loading the communication unit or option unit other than wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to
the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range
(0.36 N.m to 0.48 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
When loading the wireless LAN unit to the GOT, fit it to the side interface of GOT and tighten the
mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 N.m to 0.14 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver
No.1.
When the GOT is installed vertically, its side interface is positioned on the bottom.
To prevent the falling of the wireless LAN communication unit from the side interface, install or remove
the unit while holding it with hands.
[GT25-W]
When mounting the wireless LAN communication unit on the GOT, fit it to the wireless LAN
communication unit interface and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range (0.10 Nm
to 0.14 Nm) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.1.
[GT2103-P]
When mounting the SD card unit on the GOT, fit it to the side of the GOT and tighten the tapping
screws in the specified torque range (0.3 N.m to 0.6 N.m) with a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2.
Under tightening can cause the GOT to drop, short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a drop, failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
When closing the USB environmental protection cover, note the following points to ensure the IP
rating.
[GT27, GT25 (except GT25-W and GT2505-V)]
Push the [PUSH] mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT.
[GT2512-WX, GT2510-WX, GT2507-W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W]
Push the USB mark on the latch firmly to fix the cover to the GOT.
[GT2105-Q]
Tighten the lower fixing screws of the cover in the specified torque range (0.36 Nm to 0.48 Nm) to fix
the cover to the GOT.
[MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Remove the protective film of the GOT.
When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film, the film may not be removed.
In addition, for the models equipped with the human sensor function, using the GOT with the
protective film may cause the human sensor not to function properly.
For GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, and GT2508F-V, attach an environmental protection sheet dedicated to
the open frame model (sold separately) to the display section.
Or, attach a user-prepared environmental protection sheet.
Not doing so may damage or soil the GOT or cause foreign matter to enter the GOT, resulting in a
failure or malfunction.
When installing the supplied fittings on GT2512F-S, GT2510F-V, or GT2508F-V, tighten screws in the
specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 1.0 Nm).
Meld studs on the control panel to fasten the fittings.
The studs must have strength adequate to withstand a tightening torque of 0.9 Nm or more.
Make sure that no foreign matter such as welding waste is at and around the bases of the studs.
Tighten nuts on the studs in the specified torque range (0.8 Nm to 0.9 Nm) with a wrench for M4
nuts.
Undertightening a screw or nut may cause the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or malfunction.
Overtightening a screw or nut may damage it or the GOT, causing the GOT to drop, short-circuit, or
malfunction.
Do not operate or store the GOT in the environment exposed to direct sunlight, rain, high temperature,
dust, humidity, or vibrations.
Although GT2507T-W is ruggedized for environments such as UV rays, temperatures and
vibrations,its operation is not guaranteed in all conditions and environments.
Make sure to use or store the GOT in an appropriate environment.
When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals, use the protective cover for oil.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT.
Do not operate the GOT with its display section frozen.
The water droplets on the display section may freeze at a low temperature.
Touch switches and other input objects may malfunction if the display section is frozen.
5
6
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock, product damage or malfunctions.
After installation, wiring, or other work, make sure to attach the back cover to the Handy GOT before
turning on the power and starting operation.
Not doing so may cause an electrical shock.
The Handy GOT is designed to operate on DC power.
Supply power to the power supply, operation switch, and emergency stop switch within the
specifications.
Not doing so may cause a fire or failure.
Correctly wire the 24 V DC power cable (terminal) of the Handy GOT and [+]/[-] of the DC power
supply equipment as shown in this manual.
Not doing so may cause a failure.
Ground the FG terminal of the Handy GOT with a ground resistance of 100 or less by using a drain
wire that has a cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 or more.
Do not use common grounding with higher voltage systems.
Failure to observe these instructions may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
When making a connection cable or installing wiring, make sure that no chips or wire offcuts enter the
Handy GOT.
Not doing so may cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
CAUTION When grounding the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section, note the following
points.
Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction.
[GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q]
Make sure to ground the FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section solely for the
GOT (ground resistance: 100 or less, ground cable diameter: 1.6 mm or more). (GT2705-V, GT25-
W, GT2505-V, GT2107-W, and GT2105-Q do not have the LG terminal.)
[GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
Make sure to ground the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section with a ground resistance of
100 or less. (For GT2104-PMBLS and GT2103-PMBLS, grounding is unnecessary.)
When tightening the terminal screws, use the following screwdrivers.
[GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q]
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver No. 2.
[GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
For the usable screwdrivers, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware)
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.
[GT27, GT25, GT23]
Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)
For a terminal processing of a wire to the GOT power supply section, use the following terminal.
[GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q]
Use applicable solderless terminals for terminal processing of a wire and tighten them with the
specified torque.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
[GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
Connect a stranded wire or a solid wire directly, or use a rod terminal with an insulation sleeve.
Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal
arrangement of the product.
Not doing so can cause a fire or failure.
Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the following specified torque range.
[GT27, GT25, GT23, GT2107-W, GT2105-Q]
Specified torque range (0.5 Nm to 0.8 Nm)
[GT2104-R, GT2104-P, GT2103-P]
Specified torque range (0.22 Nm to 0.25 Nm)
Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT.
Not doing so can cause a fire, failure or malfunction.
Some models have an ingress prevention label on their top to prevent foreign matter, such as wire
offcuts, from entering the GOT during wiring.
Do not peel this label during wiring.
Before starting system operation, be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation.
Plug the communication cable into the GOT interface or the connector of the connected unit, and
tighten the mounting screws and the terminal screws in the specified torque range.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
Plug the QnA/ACPU/Motion controller(A series) bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector
of the connected unit until it "clicks".
After plugging, check that it has been inserted snugly.
Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault.
When you use the Handy GOT, run the connected cable in ducts or clamp the cable.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
7
8
[TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING Before testing the operation of a user-created screen (such as turning on or off a bit device, changing
the current value of a word device, changing the set value or current value of a timer or counter, and
changing the current value of a buffer memory), thoroughly read the manual to fully understand the
operating procedure.
During the test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant
operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
WARNING When power is on, do not touch the terminals.
Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction.
Correctly connect the battery connector.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or throw the battery into the fire.
Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, or ignite, resulting in injury and fire.
Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening, always switch off the power externally in all
phases.
Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction.
Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit.
[STARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
[TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit.
Doing so can cause a failure, malfunction, injury or fire.
Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly.
Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure.
The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped.
Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling, motion or accidental
pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
When unplugging the cable connected to the unit, do not hold and pull from the cable portion.
Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable
connection fault.
Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock.
A module damage may result.
Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit.
Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery.
If the battery is dropped or given an impact, dispose of it without using.
Before touching the unit, always touch grounded metals, etc. to discharge static electricity from
human body, etc.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction.
Use the battery manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Use of other batteries may cause a risk of fire or explosion.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before replacing the battery or using the dip
switch of the terminating resistor.
Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction by static electricity.
Before cleaning the GOT, be sure to turn off the power.
Before cleaning, check the following items.
(1) Ensure that there are no problems with the installation condition of the GOT to the control panel.
(2) Ensure that there are no damages on the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable).
If the environmental protection sheet peels or the cleaning solution enters between the sheet and the
display section during cleaning, stop the cleaning immediately.
In such a case, do not use the GOT.
CAUTION For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required.
However, the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period
of use elapses.When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs,
execute the touch panel calibration.
When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs, other object may be
activated.
This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction.
9
10
[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]
WARNING If the SD card is removed from drive A of the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the GOT may
stop processing data for about 20 seconds.
The GOT cannot be operated during this period.The functions that run in the background including a
screen updating, alarm, logging, scripts, and others are also interrupted.Before removing the SD card,
check the following items.
[GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)]
Before removing the SD card, check that the SD card access LED is off.
[GT2505-V, GT25HS-V]
Make sure to turn off the SD card access switch before removing the SD card.
Not doing so may damage the SD card or files.
[GT21]
Disable the SD card access in the GOT utility, and then check that the SD card access LED is off
before removing the SD card.
Do not remove the data storage from the file server (drive N) that is being accessed by the GOT, or
the system operation may be affected.
Before removing the data storage, check the relevant system signal to make sure that the data
storage is not being accessed.
[PRECAUTIONS FOR USING A DATA STORAGE]
CAUTION If the data storage is removed from the GOT while being accessed by the GOT, the data storage and
files may be damaged.
Before removing the data storage from the GOT, check the SD card access LED, system signal, or
others to make sure that the data storage is not accessed.
Turning off the GOT while it accesses the SD card results in damage to the SD card and files.
When using the GOT with an SD card inserted, check the following items.
[GT27, GT25, GT23(Excluding GT2505-V and GT25HS-V)]
After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to close the SD card cover.
Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.
[GT2505-V, GT25HS-V]
After inserting an SD card into the GOT, make sure to turn on the SD card access switch.
Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.
[GT21]
After inserting an SD card into the SD card unit, make sure to enable the SD card access in the GOT
utility.
Otherwise, data cannot be read or written.
When removing the SD card from the GOT, make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop
out.
Not doing so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
When inserting a USB device into a USB interface of the GOT, make sure to insert the device into the
interface firmly.
Not doing so may cause the USB device to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.(GT27,
GT25, and GT2107-W)
Before removing the data storage from the GOT, follow the procedure for removal on the utility screen
of the GOT. After the successful completion dialog is displayed, remove the data storage by hand
carefully.
Not doing so may cause the data storage to drop from the GOT, resulting in a failure or break.
11
12
[PRECAUTIONS FOR USE]
CAUTION When you operate the Handy GOT while holding it, slide your hand through the hand strap on the
back of the GOT to prevent falling.
The hand strap length is adjustable.
When you remove a cable from the Handy GOT, do not pull the cable portion.
Doing so may damage the unit or cable, or cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault.
Do not drop or strike the Handy GOT.
Doing so may damage the GOT.
When you carry or operate the Handy GOT, hold its body.
Carrying or operating the Handy GOT while holding its cable may damage the unit or cable.
Determine whether to use the emergency stop switch of the Handy GOT according to your risk
assessment.
If you use a parallel circuit (to avoid entering the emergency stop status while the Handy GOT is
removed), the system may not conform to the safety standards.
Check the safety standards required for your system before use.
If the Handy GOT is exposed to any impact beyond the general specifications, chattering may occur in
the emergency stop switch for its structural reasons.
Check that your use conditions are proper.
Do not touch the edges of the touch panel (display section) repeatedly.
Doing so may result in a failure.
Do not turn off the GOT while data is being written to the storage memory (ROM) or SD card.
Doing so may corrupt the data, rendering the GOT inoperative.
The GOT rugged model uses the environmental protection sheet (not replaceable) with UV protection
function on the front surface.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the touch panel or the liquid crystal display panel
that may be caused by ultraviolet rays.
Note that if the rugged model is exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, the front
surface may turn yellow.
If the rugged model is likely to be exposed to ultraviolet rays for an extended period of time, it is
recommended to use a UV protective sheet (option).
[PRECAUTIONS FOR REMOTE CONTROL]
[PRECAUTIONS FOR EXCLUSIVE AUTHORIZATION CONTROL]
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING Remote control is available through a network by using GOT functions, including theSoftGOT-GOT
link function, the remote personal computer operation function, the VNC server function, and the GOT
Mobile function.
If you remotely operate control equipment using such functions, the field operator may not notice the
remote operation, leading to an accident.
In addition, a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment,
and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases.
Before using the above functions to perform remote control, fully grasp the circumstances of the field
site and ensure safety.
When operating the server (GOT) of the GOT Mobile function to disconnect a client, notify the
operator of the client about the disconnection beforehand.
Not doing so may cause an accident.
WARNING Before using the GOT network interaction function to prevent simultaneous operations from multiple
pieces of equipment, make sure you understand the function.
You can enable or disable the exclusive authorization control of the GOT network interaction function
for each screen. (For all screens, the exclusive authorization control is disabled by default.)
Properly determine the screens for which the exclusive authorization control is required, and set the
control by screen.
A screen for which the exclusive authorization control is disabled is operable simultaneously from
multiple pieces of equipment. Make sure to determine the operation period for each operator, fully
grasp the circumstances of the field site, and ensure safety to perform operations.
CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the battery directive in the EU
member states.)
13
14
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations.
(Refer to GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) for details of the regulated models.)
Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and/or relevant unit(s) in the manner they will not be
exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this
manual, as they are precision devices.
Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail.Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation.
When fumigants that contain halogen materials such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine are
used for disinfecting and protecting wooden packaging from insects, they cause malfunction when
entering our products.
Please take necessary precautions to ensure that remaining materials from fumigant do not enterour
products, or treat packaging with methods other than fumigation (heat method).Additionally, disinfect
and protect wood from insects before packing products.
MEMO
15
16
CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Manuals for GT Works3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
CHAPTER 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 37
1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.2 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.3 Languages Available for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 41
2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Online module change screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[Product information list] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
[Create file] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CHAPTER 3 DEVICE MONITOR 55
3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Devices that can be monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Displaying the monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Names of each section of monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Destination path setting ([Connect]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Entering devices ([Register]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Deleting a device ([Delete]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Screen transition (common operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4 Entry Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.5 Batch Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
C O
N T
E N
T S
CHAPTER 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 111
4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.3 Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting ladder data storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reading comment files from data storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Program update check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setting the security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
User authentication function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4.4 Setting Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . 142
Switching comment display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Display in the sequence program monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4.8 Find/Replace Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Device/Contact/Coil search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Factor search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.9 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
How to operate device test window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
CHAPTER 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 187
5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
5.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting SFC data storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Reading comment files from SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Setting Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
17
18
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Displayed contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.7 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CHAPTER 6 NETWORK MONITOR 227
6.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Network information that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
6.3 Operations for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
6.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Line monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Detailed monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Other station monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Other station communication status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Other station data link status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Other station parameter status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Other station CPU operation status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Other station CPU RUN status monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Other station loop status monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
CHAPTER 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 277
7.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
7.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
System configuration screen layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Setting method for other station monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Monitor Menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Present Value Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
SFC Error History screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Error List screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Error List Designated-Axis screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Positioning Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Servo Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Present Value History Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
C O
N T
E N
T S
Parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
7.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHAPTER 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 307
8.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Setting method for other station monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Testing of the intelligent function module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Specifying the module to be monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Monitor screen configuration and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
CHAPTER 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 349
9.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
9.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
9.3 Operations of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Servo amplifier monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Monitor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Alarm function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Diagnostics function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Test operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
9.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
CHAPTER 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 399
10.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
10.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
19
20
Setting storage location for backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Security and password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Trigger backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Network batch backup/restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Progress screen (backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Data list (restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Progress screen (restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Controller list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Controller selection screen (Restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Individual restoration screen (Restoration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
CHAPTER 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 465
11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
11.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
11.3 Operation for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
11.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
11.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
CHAPTER 12 LOG VIEWER 473
12.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
12.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
GOT side settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
12.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Screen transition when [View logged device] is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Screen transition when [Manage log file] is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
How to operate target setting window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
How to operate target selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
How to operate Main Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
How to operate file selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Data log viewer screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Legend display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Upper and lower limit values setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Cursor position information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Selecting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Searching data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
C O
N T
E N
T S
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
CHAPTER 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 505
13.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
13.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
13.3 Operation for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Searching from the monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
13.4 Common Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Information and key functions displayed on the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
13.5 Switching the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Switching comment/no-comment display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
13.6 Search Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Device search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Contact point search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Coil search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Step search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Ladder end search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Defect search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
13.7 Test Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Displaying the test menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
13.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
CHAPTER 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 535
14.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
14.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Readable motion SFC programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Displayable character codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
14.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Setting motion SFC program storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
14.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
SFC diagram monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Detailed program window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Active step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Program batch monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Communication setting window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Password input window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
21
22
CHAPTER 15 FX LIST EDITOR 555
15.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
15.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Key arrangement and a list of key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Selection and operation of modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Sequence program display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Searching commands and devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Writing commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Changing operands, set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Deleting commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Sequence program all clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
PLC diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
List monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Action for an incorrect key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
15.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
CHAPTER 16 R MOTION MONITOR 585
16.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
16.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
16.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
16.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Setting procedure for monitoring other stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Monitor menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Present value monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Motion error history monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Error list designated-axis screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Positioning monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Servo monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Present value history monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Hard copy output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
CHAPTER 17 CNC MONITOR 615
17.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
17.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
C O
N T
E N
T S
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
17.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
17.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
CHAPTER 18 CNC DATA I/O 625
18.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
18.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
18.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
18.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
CHAPTER 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 647
19.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
19.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
19.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
19.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
CHAPTER 20 CNC MONITOR 2 659
20.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
20.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
20.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
20.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
CNC monitor 2 screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Key input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
20.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
CHAPTER 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 675
21.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
21.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
21.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
21.4 Display Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
CHAPTER 22 iQSS UTILITY 691
22.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
22.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
23
24
22.3 Preparing profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
22.4 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
22.5 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
iQSS utility screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Device list information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Monitoring information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Parameter information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
22.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
CHAPTER 23 DRIVE RECORDER 711
23.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
23.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
23.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
[Open] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
[Select drive] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
[File storage destination] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
[Folder name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
[File name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
[Select channel] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
[Select station] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
[Input station No.] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
[Input N/W No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
[Input PLC No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
[Select connection destination (servo)] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
[Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
[Instantaneous monitor] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
[Parameter] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
[System configuration] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
[Trigger setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
23.5 [Graph waveform] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
[Graph setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
[Collection, trigger setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
23.6 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
CHAPTER 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 767
24.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
24.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
Station types and transition to extended functions available for the target modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Supported diagnostics items and station types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
24.3 Operations for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
C O
N T
E N
T S
24.4 Operation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Network configuration diagram screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
[Select Diagnostics Destination] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
[Legend] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Communication status monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
[Error Details] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
[Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
[Network Event History] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
[Station information list] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
CHAPTER 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 809
25.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
25.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
25.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
25.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Servo network configuration diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
System Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Alarm Display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Create file screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
25.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
CHAPTER 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 837
26.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
26.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
26.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
26.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
System configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
[Program List] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
[Program Editor] screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
26.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
CHAPTER 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 853
27.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
27.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
27.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
27.4 Operating Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
27.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
25
26
CHAPTER 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 873
28.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
28.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
28.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
28.4 [Graph waveform] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
[Display axis setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
[Display axis setting] window (detail setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
[Copy setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
[Graph setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
[Parameter Display] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
28.5 [Setting, management] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
[Select channel] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
[Select station] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
[Input station No.] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
[Input N/W No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
[Input PLC No.] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
[Via (motion) setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
[Collection, trigger setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
[Measurement axis setting] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
[Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
[Copy setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
[Open] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
[Select drive] window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
[Import] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
[File storage destination] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
[Folder name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
[File name] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
[Memo] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
CHAPTER 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 929
29.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
29.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Devices and range that can be monitored. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Readable motion SFC programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Displayable character codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
29.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Setting motion SFC program storage location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
29.4 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
SFC diagram monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
Detailed program window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Active step list window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
C O
N T
E N
T S
Program batch monitor window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
Communication setting window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Password input window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
CHAPTER 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 949
30.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
30.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952
Restrictions depending on the access privilege of the account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Access range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
30.3 Operations for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Screen transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
[Connection setting] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
[Logon] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
30.5 View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
[Image view] screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
[Graphic view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
[Composite view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
[Parameter view] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Graphic edit view screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Displayed window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Hard copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977
REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .984
27
28
INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal (GOT).
Before using the product, read this manual carefully and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the
GOT for correct use.
Manuals for GT Works3
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons
Manuals for GT Works3 The electronic manuals related to this product are installed together with the screen design software.
If you need the printed manuals, consult your local sales office.
Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
e-Manual
e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated
tool.
e-Manual has the following features:
Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals.
Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual.
Hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures.
Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked.
Screen design software-related manuals
Connection manuals
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GT Works3 Installation Instructions PDF
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual SH-081220ENG
(1D7ML9)
e-Manual
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 SH-080862ENG
(1D7MB2)
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Version1 SH-081228ENG PDF
e-Manual
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081197ENG
(1D7MJ8)
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081198ENG PDF
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081199ENG PDF
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) For
GT Works3 Version1
SH-081200ENG PDF
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series Handy GOT Connection Manual For GT Works3 Version1 SH-081867ENG
(1D7MS9)
e-Manual
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (2 Connection) for GT Works3 Version1 JY997D52301 PDF
e-Manual
GT SoftGOT2000 manuals
GOT2000 series user's manuals
GOT SIMPLE series user's manuals
Manuals related to GT Works3 add-on projects
Manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000) Refer to the Help and manuals for GT Designer3 (GOT1000).
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual SH-081201ENG PDF
e-Manual
MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client Operating Manual SH-082174ENG PDF
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Hardware) SH-081194ENG
(1D7MJ5)
PDF, e-Manual
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility) SH-081195ENG
(1D7MJ6)
PDF, e-Manual
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor) SH-081196ENG
(1D7MJ7)
PDF, e-Manual
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GOT SIMPLE Series User's Manual JY997D52901 PDF
e-Manual
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
Format
GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual
(Fundamentals)
SH-082072ENG
(1D7MV1)
PDF, e-Manual
GT Works3 Add-on License for GOT2000 Enhanced Drive Control (Servo) Project Data Manual
(Screen Details)
SH-082074ENG
(1D7MV3)
PDF, e-Manual
29
30
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Model Icons The following shows the abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons used in this manual.
GOT
GOT2000 series
Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon
Available Unavailable
GT27 GT27-X GT2715-X GT2715-XTBA, GT2715-XTBD
GT27-S GT2712-S GT2712-STBA, GT2712-STWA, GT2712-STBD, GT2712-STWD
GT2710-S GT2710-STBA, GT2710-STBD
GT2708-S GT2708-STBA, GT2708-STBD
GT27-V GT2710-V GT2710-VTBA, GT2710-VTWA, GT2710-VTBD, GT2710-VTWD
GT2708-V GT2708-VTBA, GT2708-VTBD
GT2705-V GT2705-VTBD
GT25 All GT25 models
GT25-W GT2512-WX GT2512-WXTBD, GT2512-WXTSD
GT2510-WX GT2510-WXTBD, GT2510-WXTSD
GT2507-W GT2507-WTBD, GT2507-WTSD
GT2507T-W GT2507T-WTSD
GT25-S GT2512-S GT2512-STBA, GT2512-STBD
GT2512F-S GT2512F-STNA, GT2512F-STND
GT25-V GT2510-V GT2510-VTBA, GT2510-VTWA, GT2510-VTBD, GT2510-VTWD
GT2510F-V GT2510F-VTNA, GT2510F-VTND
GT2508-V GT2508-VTBA, GT2508-VTWA, GT2508-VTBD, GT2508-VTWD
GT2508F-V GT2508F-VTNA, GT2508F-VTND
GT2505-V GT2505-VTBD
GT25HS-V
Handy GOT
GT2506HS-V GT2506HS-VTBD
GT2505HS-V GT2505HS-VTBD
GT23 GT23-V GT2310-V GT2310-VTBA, GT2310-VTBD
GT2308-V GT2308-VTBA, GT2308-VTBD
GOT SIMPLE series
GOT1000 series, GOT900 series, and GOT800 series
GT21 All GT21 models
GT21-W GT2107-W GT2107-WTBD, GT2107-WTSD
GT21-Q GT2105-Q GT2105-QTBDS, GT2105-QMBDS
GT21-R GT2104-R GT2104-RTBD
GT21-P GT2104-P GT2104-PMBD
GT2104-PMBDS
GT2104-PMBDS2
GT2104-PMBLS
GT2103-P GT2103-PMBD
GT2103-PMBDS
GT2103-PMBDS2
GT2103-PMBLS
GT SoftGOT2000 GT SoftGOT2000 Version1
Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon
Available Unavailable
GS21 GS21-W-N GS2110-WTBD-N
GS2107-WTBD-N
GS21-W GS2110-WTBD
GS2107-WTBD
Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon
Available Unavailable
GOT1000 Series GOT1000 Series
GOT900 Series GOT-A900 Series, GOT-F900 Series
GOT800 Series GOT-800 Series
Abbreviations and generic terms Description Meaning of icon
Available Unavailable
31
32
Communication unit
Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Bus connection unit GT15-QBUS
GT15-QBUS2
GT15-ABUS
GT15-ABUS2
GT15-75QBUSL
GT15-75QBUS2L
GT15-75ABUSL
GT15-75ABUS2L
Serial communication unit GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE
MELSECNET/H communication unit GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13
CC-Link IE TSN communication unit GT25-J71GN13-T2
CC-Link IE Controller Network
communication unit
GT15-J71GP23-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15-J71GF13-T2
CC-Link communication unit GT15-J61BT13
Wireless LAN communication unit GT25-WLAN
Serial multi-drop connection unit GT01-RS4-M
Connection conversion adapter GT10-9PT5S
Field network adapter unit GT25-FNADP
Ethernet communication unit GT25-J71E71-100
RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter GT14-RS2T4-9P
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Printer unit GT15-PRN
Video input unit GT27-V4-Z (A set of GT16M-V4-Z and GT27-IF1000)
RGB input unit GT27-R2
GT27-R2-Z (A set of GT16M-R2-Z and GT27-IF1000)
Video/RGB input unit GT27-V4R1-Z (A set of GT16M-V4R1-Z and GT27-IF1000)
RGB output unit GT27-ROUT
GT27-ROUT-Z (A set of GT16M-ROUT-Z and GT27-IF1000)
Digital video output unit GT27-VHOUT
Multimedia unit GT27-MMR-Z (A set of GT16M-MMR-Z and GT27-IF1000)
Video signal conversion unit GT27-IF1000
External I/O unit GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR
Sound output unit GT15-SOUT
SD card unit GT21-03SDCD
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
SD card NZ1MEM-2GBSD
NZ1MEM-4GBSD
NZ1MEM-8GBSD
NZ1MEM-16GBSD
L1MEM-2GBSD
L1MEM-4GBSD
Battery GT11-50BAT
GT15-BAT
Protective sheet GT27-15PSGC
GT25-12WPSGC
GT25-12PSGC
GT25-10WPSGC
GT25-10PSGC
GT25-08PSGC
GT21-07WPSGC
GT25T-07WPSVC
GT25-05PSGC
GT25-05PSGC-2
GT21-05PSGC
GT21-04RPSGC-UC
GT21-03PSGC-UC
GT21-04PSGC-UC
GT27-15PSCC
GT25-12WPSCC
GT25-12PSCC
GT25-10WPSCC
GT25-10PSCC
GT25-08PSCC
GT25-05PSCC
GT25-05PSCC-2
GT25-12PSCC-UC
GT25-10PSCC-UC
GT25-08PSCC-UC
GT21-07WPSCC
GT21-05PSCC
GT21-04RPSCC-UC
GT21-04PSCC-UC
GT21-03PSCC-UC
GT16H-60PSC
GT14H-50PSC
Antibacterial/antiviral protective sheet GT25-12PSAC
GT25-10PSAC
GT25-08PSAC
Environmental protection sheet GT25F-12ESGS
GT25F-10ESGS
GT25F-08ESGS
Protective cover for oil GT20-15PCO
GT20-12PCO
GT20-10PCO
GT20-08PCO
GT21-12WPCO
GT21-10WPCO
GT21-07WPCO
GT25T-07WPCO
GT25-05PCO
GT25-05PCO-2
GT05-50PCO
GT21-04RPCO
GT10-30PCO
GT10-20PCO
USB environmental protection cover GT25-UCOV
GT25-05UCOV
GT21-WUCOV
33
34
Software
Software related to GOT
Software related to iQ Works
Stand GT15-90STAND
GT15-80STAND
GT15-70STAND
GT05-50STAND
GT25-10WSTAND
GT21-07WSTAND
GT25T-07WSTAND
Attachment GT15-70ATT-98
GT15-70ATT-87
GT15-60ATT-97
GT15-60ATT-96
GT15-60ATT-87
GT15-60ATT-77
GT21-04RATT-40
Panel-mounted USB port extension GT14-C10EXUSB-4S
GT10-C10EXUSB-5S
Connector conversion box GT16H-CNB-42S
GT16H-CNB-37S
GT11H-CNB-37S
Emergency stop switch guard cover GT16H-60ESCOV
GT14H-50ESCOV
Wall-mounting attachment GT14H-50ATT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT Works3 SW1DND-GTWK3-J, SW1DND-GTWK3-E, SW1DND-GTWK3-C
GT Designer3 Version1 Screen design software GT Designer3 for GOT2000 and GOT1000 series
GT Designer3 Screen design software for GOT2000 series included in GT Works3
GT Designer3(GOT2000)
GT Designer3(GOT1000) Screen design software for GOT1000 series included in GT Works3
Speech synthesis license GT Works Text to Speech License (SW1DND-GTVO-M)
Add-on license GT Works3 add-on license for GOT2000 enhanced drive control (servo) project data (SW1DND-GTSV-MZ)
GENESIS64 Advanced GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-APP)
GENESIS64 Basic SCADA GENESIS64 server application (GEN64-BASIC)
GENESIS64 Generic term of GENESIS64 Advanced and GENESIS64 Basic SCADA
GOT Mobile function license for GT
SoftGOT2000
License required to use the GOT Mobile function with GT SoftGOT2000 (SGT2K-WEBSKEY-)
GT Simulator3 Screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT2000, GOT1000, and GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2000 GOT2000 compatible HMI software GT SoftGOT2000
GT OPC UA Client MELSOFT GT OPC UA Client (SW1DNN-GTOUC-MD)
GT Converter2 Data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Classic Screen design software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series
GT Designer2 Screen design software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 and GOT900 series
DU/WIN Screen design software FX-PCS-DU/WIN for GOT-F900 series
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
iQ Works iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works
MELSOFT Navigator Integrated development environment software included in SW DND-IQWK(iQ Platform compatible
engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
( represents a version.)
MELSOFT iQ AppPortal SWDND-IQAPL-M type integrated application anagement software
( represents a version.)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Other software
License key (for GT SoftGOT2000)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GX Works3 SW DND-GXW3-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software
( represents a version.)
GX Works2 SW DNC-GXW2-E (-EA, -EAZ) type programmable controller engineering software
( represents a version.)
Controller simulator GX Simulator3 Simulation function of GX Works3
GX Simulator2 Simulation function of GX Works2
GX Simulator SWD5C-LLT-E (-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software package
(SW5D5C-LLT (-V) or later versions)
( represents a version.)
GX Developer SWD5C-GPPW-E (-EV)/SWD5F-GPPW (-V) type software package
( represents a version.)
GX LogViewer SWDNN-VIEWER-E type software package
( represents a version.)
MI Configurator Configuration and monitor tool for Mitsubishi Electric industrial computers (SWDNNMICONF-M)
( represents a version.)
PX Developer SWD5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control
( represents a version.)
MT Works2 Motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2(SWDNDMTW2-E)
( represents a version.)
MT Developer SWRNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series
( represents a version.)
CW Configurator Setting/monitoring tools for the C Controller module and MELSECWinCPU(SWDND-RCCPU-E)
( represents a version.)
MR Configurator2 SWDNC-MRC2-E type servo configuration software
( represents a version.)
MR Configurator MRZJW-SETUP type servo configuration software
( represents a version.)
FR Configurator2 Inverter setup software (SW DND-FRC2-E)
( represents a version.)
FR Configurator Inverter setup software (FR-SW-SETUP-WE)
( represents a version.)
NC Configurator2 CNC parameter setting support tool (FCSB1221)
NC Configurator CNC parameter setting support tool
FX Configurator-FP Parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSCH (SWD5CFXSSCE)
( represents a version.)
FX Configurator-EN-L FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)
FX Configurator-EN FX3U-ENET type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5C-FXENET-E)
RT ToolBox2 Robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)
RT ToolBox3 Robot program creation software (3F-14C-WINE)
MX Component MX Component Version(SWD5C-ACT-E, SWD5C-ACT-EA)
( represents a version.)
MX Sheet MX Sheet Version(SWD5C-SHEET-E, SWD5C-SHEET-EA)
( represents a version.)
CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool CPU module logging configuration tool (SW1DNN-LLUTL-E)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License key GT27-SGTKEY-U
35
36
Others
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
IAI IAI Corporation
AZBIL Azbil Corporation
OMRON OMRON Corporation
KEYENCE KEYENCE CORPORATION
KOYO EI KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
JTEKT JTEKT CORPORATION
SHARP Sharp Corporation
SHINKO Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.
CHINO CHINO CORPORATION
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA CORPORATION
SHIBAURA MACHINE SHIBAURA MACHINE CO.,LTD.
PANASONIC Panasonic Corporation
PANASONIC IDS Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co., Ltd.
HITACHI IES Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
HITACHI Hitachi, Ltd.
HIRATA Hirata Corporation
FUJI FUJI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
MURATEC Muratec products manufactured by Murata Machinery, Ltd.
YASKAWA YASKAWA Electric Corporation
YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation
RKC RKC INSTRUMENT INC.
ALLEN-BRADLEY Allen-Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CLPA CC-Link Partner Association
GE GE Intelligent Platforms, Inc.
HMS HMS Industrial Networks
LS IS LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
MITSUBISHI INDIA Mitsubishi Electric India Pvt. Ltd.
ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.
SCHNEIDER Schneider Electric SA
SICK SICK AG
SIEMENS Siemens AG
SCHNEIDER EJH Schneider Electric Japan Holdings Ltd.
PLC Programmable controller manufactured by its respective company
Control equipment Control equipment manufactured by its respective company
Temperature controller Temperature controller manufactured by its respective company
Indicating controller Indicating controller manufactured by its respective company
Controller Controller manufactured by its respective company
TSN Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class B (Synchronized Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link
Partner Association
General-purpose Switch CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) hub certified by CC-Link Partner Association
1
Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000.
Page 37 Each Function and Related Manuals
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
Page 40 Languages Available for Each Function
1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals The following lists other manuals relevant to each function.
Function Related manual Description
System launcher GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the system launcher from the utility
Enabling or disabling the online module change
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the system launcher
How to install a system application (extended function)
Device monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the device monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the device monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)
Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the sequence program monitor from the
utility
Configuring the sequence program monitor settings,
including the ladder data save destination and
automatically reading of a sequence program
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the sequence program
monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Network monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the network monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the network monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Q Motion monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the Q motion monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the Q motion monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
How to write special data
Intelligent unit monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the intelligent module monitor from the
utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the intelligent module
monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
How to write special data
Servo amplifier monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the servo amplifier monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the servo amplifier
monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
How to write special data
Backup/restoration GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to display the backup/restoration screen from the
utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to display the backup/restoration
screen
Setting the backup data save destination, trigger
backup, and others
How to install a system application (extended function)
LOG Viewer GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the log viewer from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the log viewer
How to install a system application (extended function)
FX Ladder monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the FX ladder monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the FX ladder monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals 37
38
Q motion SFC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the Q motion SFC monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the Q motion SFC
monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
FX List editer GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the FX ladder monitor from the FX list
editor
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the FX list editor
How to install a system application (extended function)
R Motion monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the R motion monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the R motion monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
How to write special data
CNC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
CNC data I/O GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC data I/O from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC data I/O
How to install a system application (extended function)
CNC machining program edit GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC machining program edit from the
utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC machining
program edit
How to install a system application (extended function)
CNC monitor 2 GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CNC monitor 2 from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CNC monitor 2
How to install a system application (extended function)
iQSS utility GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the iQSS utility from the utility
Specifying a drive to save profile data
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the iQSS utility
How to install a system application (extended function)
Drive recorder GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the drive recorder from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the drive recorder
How to install a system application (extended function)
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network
diagnostics
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
Network diagnostics from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-
Link IE Field Network diagnostics
How to install a system application (extended function)
Motion program editor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the motion program editor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the motion program
editor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Motion program I/O GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the motion program I/O from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the motion program I/O
How to install a system application (extended function)
Servo amplifier graph GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the servo amplifier graph from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the servo amplifier graph
How to install a system application (extended function)
R motion SFC monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the R motion SFC monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the R motion SFC
monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Vision sensor monitor GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility) How to start the vision sensor monitor from the utility
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual Setting a touch switch to start the vision sensor monitor
How to install a system application (extended function)
Function Related manual Description
1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.1 Each Function and Related Manuals
1
Required for Each Function The following shows system applications (extended functions) required for each function.
Function Required system application (extended function)
System launcher [System Launcher]
Device monitor [Device monitor]
[GOT Platform Library]
Sequence program moniotr (Ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(Ladder)]
[GOT Platform Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library]
Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(iQ-R Ladder)]
[GOT Platform Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library (Additional/MELSEC iQ-R)]
Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) [Sequence Program Monitor(iQ-F Ladder)]
[GOT Platform Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library (Additional/MELSEC iQ-F)]
Sequence program monitor (SFC) [Sequence Program Monitor(SFC)]
[GOT Platform Library]
[GOT Function Expansion Library]
Network monitor [Network monitor]
Q motion monitor [Q motion monitor]
Intelligent module monitor [Intelligent module monitor]
Servo amplifier monitor [Servo amplifier monitor]
Backup/restoration [Backup/Restoration]
MELSEC-L troubleshooting [MELSEC-L Troubleshooting Function]
Log viewer [Log Viewer]
FX ladder monitor [FX Ladder Monitor]
Q motion SFC monitor [Q Motion SFC Monitor]
[GOT Platform Library]
FX list editor [FX list editor]
R motion monitor [R motion monitor]
CNC monitor [CNC Monitor]
CNC data I/O [CNC Data I/O]
[GOT Platform Library]
CNC machining program edit [CNC Machining Program Edit]
[GOT Platform Library]
CNC monitor 2 [CNC Monitor 2]
[GOT Platform Library]
iQSS utility [iQSS Utility]
Drive recorder [Drive Recorder]
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics]
Motion program editor [Motion Program Editor]
Motion program I/O [Motion Program Input/Output]
[GOT Platform Library]
Servo amplifier graph [Servo amplifier graph]
R motion SFC monitor [R Motion SFC Monitor]
[GOT Platform Library]
Vision sensor monitor [Vision sensor monitor]
1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.2 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function 39
40
1.3 Languages Available for Each Function Languages available for each function are shown in the following table.
:Displayed :Not displayed Eng.:Displayed in English
*1 For further information, refer to the following. Page 142 Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)
*2 The display language used for the monitor screen depends on the setting of the CNC parameter (#1043 lang). *3 The language used to display profile data depends on the language version of the data. *4 When data is read from a file, the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen displays the data in the same language as the file.
Function Japanese English Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditinal)
Korean
Utility function
System launcher
Device monitor
Sequence program monitor
(Ladder)
Sequence program monitor
(iQ-R ladder)
Sequence program monitor
(iQ-F ladder)
File name, Title, Comment,
Note, Statement
Other than the above *1
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
Network monitor
Q motion monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.
Intelligent module montor Eng. Eng. Eng.
Servo amplifier monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.
Backup/restoration
Log viewer
FX ladder monitor
Q motion SFC monitor
FX list editor
R motion monitor Eng. Eng. Eng.
CNC monitor *2
CNC data I/O Eng. Eng.
CNC machining program edit Eng. Eng.
CNC monitor 2 *2 Eng. Eng.
iQSS utility *3
Drive recorder *4
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
Motion program editor
Motion program I/O Eng. Eng.
Servo amplifier graph
R motion SFC monitor
Vision sensor monitor
1 FUNDAMENTALS OF MONITOR 1.3 Languages Available for Each Function
2
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000.
Page 41 Features
Page 42 Specifications
Page 45 Operations for Display
Page 48 Operating Procedure
2.1 Features The system launcher enables the following functions for the devices connected to the GOT.
Displaying the status of a module
Starting the extended functions applicable to a module
Replacing a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line (Online module change)
Displaying the product information of a module.
Outputting the product information of a module to a file.
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.1 Features 41
42
2.2 Specifications Page 42 System configuration
Page 44 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the system launcher.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Target controller
*1 The online module change is not available. *2 CRnD-700, CR750-Q, CR751-Q, and CR800-D do not support the system launcher.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
For the connection type between the GOT and each controller, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Controller
MELSEC iQ-R series *1
QCPU (Q mode)
LCPU
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) *1
Motion CPU (Q series)
CNC C80
CNC C70
Robot controller *2
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connect ion
Direct CPU connect ion (Serial)
Serial commu nication connect ion
Ethernet connecti on (using Ethernet port built in the CPU)
Ethernet connectio n (using Ethernet module)
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection
CC-Link IE TSN connecti on
CC-Link IE Controll er connect ion, CC- Link IE Field connect ion
CC-Link connecti on
ID G4
System
launcher
Displaying the
status of
modules
Starting
extended
functions
Online module
change
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications
2
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the system launcher to the GOT.
To use an extended function compatible with the system launcher, write the package data that contains the corresponding
system application (extended function) to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Extended function compatible with the system launcher The following table shows the extended functions that can be started from the system launcher.
*1 The CPU number setting is not transferred. Only the channel of the connected controller is in its selected state.
Online module change To enable the online module change, configure the setting in [System Launcher] of [Ext. func. set] in the utility.
Set [Online module change] to [Effective].
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Extended function
Device monitor
Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)
Sequence program monitor (SFC)
Network monitor
Q motion monitor
R motion monitor
Intelligent module monitor
Backup/restoration *1
Q motion SFC monitor
CNC monitor
CNC data I/O
CNC machining program edit
CNC monitor 2
iQSS utility
Drive recorder
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
System launcher (servo network)
Servo amplifier graph
R motion SFC monitor
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications 43
44
Precautions
Display of the system configuration diagram The system configuration diagram has two types: the system configuration diagram for the system launcher and the one for
the extended function.
When you select a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the system launcher
appears.
When you select a module unsupported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended function
used appears if it is available.
For the screen transition of the system configuration diagram for the extended function, refer to the extended function used.
When the system application (extended function) for the system launcher is not installed on the GOT, even though you select
a module supported by the system launcher, the system configuration diagram for the extended function used appears.
Precautions for online module change When you replace a module of a PLC while the PLC is on line, the target module stops its operation.
Check that the operations of the PLC are not affected, and then replace the module.
The following shows the applicable modules.
QCPU(Q mode)
Input module, Output module, Input/Output module, Analog input module, Analog output module, Temperature input module,
Temperature control module, Loop control module, Pulse input module
For the details of the online module change, refer to the following.
Manual of the CPU or module used
When displaying with GT SoftGOT2000 In the case of GT SoftGOT2000, target screens in the following table are displayed according to the following conditions:
The screens are displayed so that they fit with the GOT screen resolution and orientation set in GT Designer3.
If the screens fit both in vertical display and horizontal display, they are displayed horizontally.
Any screens other than the target screens are displayed in the same way as the GOT2000 series.
The following shows the sizes of the target screens displayed with GT SoftGOT2000.
*1 If the GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3 is higher than the resolution of the target screen, the target screen will be displayed at the center of the GT SoftGOT2000 screen. In that case, the margin around the target screen will be filled with black.
*2 This setting is available only when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used.
Target screen*1
GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3
Horizontal (X)
480 600 640 to 767 768 to 799 800 to 1023
1024 to 1279
1280 to 1920
[System
configuration]
screen
[Online
module
change]
screen
Vertical (Y) 480 to 599 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
600 to 767 VGA
(vertical)*2 - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
768 to 799 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
800 to 1023 WVGA
(vertical)*2 SVGA
(vertical)*2 SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1024 to 1200 - - SVGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1280 - - - - WXGA
(vertical)*2 - -
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.2 Specifications
2
2.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the system launcher screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Display System Configuration screen.
Perform one of the following operations.
Starting from the special function switch (System launcher) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [System launcher] from the main menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Starting from the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
Touch the device icon on the system configuration screen of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and
touch [System Launcher] from the displayed context menu.
3. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the system launcher.
Set the channel number of the PLC connected to the GOT.
When the channel number is not set, touching the [] key closes the [Select channel] window and sets the channel number to
[1].
4. The system configuration screen appears.
To change the connection destination, touch the select channel key on the system configuration screen.
Page 48 Operating Procedure
[Select channel] window
Select channel key
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display 45
46
Starting the drive recorder by using the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics You can start the system launcher from the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics by selecting [System
Launcher] from the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
For the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following.
Page 786 Context menu
Touch the equipment icon. Select the system launcher.
Network configuration diagram (CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics) Context menu
[] key
The [System Configuration] screen appears.
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display
2
Screen transition
*1 Only the system launcher (servo network) function is supported.
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
System application (extended function)
[] key
[] key
[] key
At the second and subsequent startups, or at a startup when a connection destination is specified on the user-created monitor screen
[Select channel] window
Select channel key
[Legend] key
Select a module.
At the first startup (when no connection destination is specified on the user-created monitor screen)
Select [Online module change].
Select an extended function.
Extended function selection screen
[] key or [End] key
Select the system configuration diagram. Select the return key.*1
Select a connection destination.
[Cancel] key or return key
Start
[Save] key
[OK] key or [] key
[] key [Product info. list] key
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.3 Operations for Display 47
48
2.4 Operating Procedure This section explains screen operations for the system launcher.
The display screen of the system launcher differs depending on the GOT used.
Page 48 System configuration screen
Page 50 Online module change screen
Page 52 [Product information list] window
Page 53 [Create file] window
System configuration screen The following explains the structure of the system configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen
after the system launcher is started.
1)Module status display
Displays the information about [CPU No.], [Model], [Points], and [Start I/O] of the modules.
When an RQ extension base unit is connected, the system configuration screen for MELSEC iQ-R series appears.
Select a module to display the function list window.
2)Select channel key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
3)[] key
Exits the system configuration screen and returns the screen to a screen from which the system launcher was started.
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up or down one stage.
5)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
6)[Total num of bases]
The number of base units displayed in the system configuration diagram.
When the monitoring target is the LCPU, [Total num of blocks] is displayed.
7)Message display
If communication with the connected PLC cannot be established, [Communication error] appears.
9)
Function list
4)
2)1) 3)
8)
8)
4)
5)
6)
Knob
7)
10) 11) 12)
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure
2
8)Display list key (only for MELSEC iQ-R series)
Displays the detailed information of each module on the target base unit.
The following shows the display items.
[Error No.]
Displays an error number (hexadecimal) for the module with the error.
[Network info. (port 1)]
Displays the network information of port 1.
[Network info. (port 2)]
Displays the network information of port 2.
[IP address (port 1)]
Displays the IP address of port 1.
[IP address (port 2)]
Displays the IP address of port 2.
[Module sync. status]
Displays the synchronization status between the modules.
In synchronization: [ON]
In preparation: [OFF]
With an error: [ERR]
9)[Legend] key
Displays the [case] window.
10)[Product info. list] key
Displays the [Product information list] window.
For the details, refer to the following.
Page 52 [Product information list] window
11)[Save] key
Displays the [Create file] window.
For the details, refer to the following.
Page 53 [Create file] window
[] key
Exits the [case] window and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
Legend display area
Lists the descriptions of the icons appearing on the system configuration diagram.
[] key
[] key
Legend display area
Legend display area
QCPU,LCPU
MELSEC iQ-R series
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 49
50
12)CPU operation status (only for MELSEC iQ-R series)
Displays the operation status of each CPU.
Running: [RUN]
Stopped: [STOP]
Paused: [PAUSE]
Being initialized: [INIT]
Being reset: [-]
Online module change screen The following shows the procedure of the online module change.
1. Check the following items, and then touch the [Execute] key.
The message [Exchange module selection completed] is displayed in [Status].
The lamp of [Execute module change] is on in [Operation].
The Y signal of the target module is off.
2. The confirmation dialog for the module change appears.
Touch the [OK] key, and then check the following items.
The message [Module replaceable] is displayed in [Status].
The lamp of [Check installation] is on in [Operation].
To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or [Cancel] key and
then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.
3. Replace the target module, and then touch the [Execute] key.
4. When the module is correctly mounted, the following appears.
The message [Module change completed] is displayed in [Status].
The lamp of [Restart module control] is on in [Operation].
To cancel the operation and return the screen to the system configuration screen, touch the return key or [Cancel] key and
then touch the [OK] button in a dialog appearing immediately after the cancellation.
5. Touch the [Execute] key. When the module control is properly restarted, the screen returns to the system configuration
screen.
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure
2
The following explains the structure of the [Online module change] screen and the function of the keys displayed on the
screen.
1)[Module name]
Displays the module name.
2)[Start I/O]
Displays the module start I/O.
3)[Status]
Displays the status of [Operation].
4)[Operation]
Displays the items executed in the actual operation.
The lamp of the item to be executed is on.
5)[Status/guidance]
Displays the procedure or precautions for [Operation].
6)[Execute] key
Executes the item whose lamp is on in [Operation].
7)Return key, [Cancel] key
Exits the [Online module change] screen and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
Cancels the operation during the module change and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
7)
6) 7)
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 51
52
[Product information list] window Product information of the modules is listed.
For MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series, the power supply module is not displayed.
Information that cannot be acquired is displayed with [-].
1)Base unit display area
Displays the selected base unit.
2)Select base unit key
Switches the current base unit to the base unit in the upper or lower level.
3)[] key
Closes the [Product information list] window, and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
4)Level number
Displays the level of the selected base unit out of all base units.
5)[slot]
Displays the slot number of a module.
6)[Model name]
Displays the model of a module.
7)[Ver]
Displays the firmware version of a module.
8)[Production information] (MELSEC iQ-R series)
Displays the production information of a module.
For an RQ extension base unit, the first five digits of the serial number and the firmware version are displayed.
9)[Serial No.] (MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series)
Displays the serial number of a module.
10)[Production number] (MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series)
Displays the production number of a module.
When CPU No. 1 is a Universal model QCPU with function version B01 or earlier, [-] is displayed.
1) 2) 3)
4)
5) 6) 9) 7) 10)
1) 2) 3)
4)
5) 6) 7) 8)
MELSEC iQ-R series MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure
2
[Create file] window Product information of the modules is saved to a CSV file in the selected language in the selected drive.
The file is saved in Unicode with BOM.
1)[] key
Closes the [Create file] window, and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
2)[Select drive]
Select the drive to save the CSV file.
The [Create file] window displays accessible drives only.
A folder named SYSLAN is automatically created in the selected drive.
3)[Select language]
Select the language for the CSV file.
The following shows the selectable items.
[Japanese]
[English]
[Chinese (Simplified)]
[Chinese (Traditional)]
[Korean]
4)[File path]
Displays the path where a CSV file is to be saved.
The drive in the path has been selected in [Select drive].
The file is automatically named as shown below.
If a same-name file already exists, touch the [OK] key to display the [Checked] dialog.
5)[OK] key
Creates a CSV file.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Selected drive
SYSLAN
UnitList_CC-NN-SS_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.CSV
Year Month
Date Hour
Minute SecondChannel No.
Network No. Station No.
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure 53
54
MEMO
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER 2.4 Operating Procedure
3
3 DEVICE MONITOR
Page 55 Features
Page 58 Specifications
Page 76 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
Page 100 Entry Monitor
Page 102 Batch Monitor
Page 104 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
Page 107 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
Page 109 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
For using the device monitor function on GT21, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3.1 Features The device monitor function monitors and changes the devices of a PLC CPU or an intelligent module.
Using this function, you can troubleshoot the system and streamline maintenance.
Monitoring devices on four dedicated screens The device monitor function comprises four monitors: entry monitor, batch monitor, T/C monitor, and BM monitor. You can
monitor any device according to the application.
Entry monitor Monitors the devices registered by the user.
Page 100 Entry Monitor
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features 55
56
Batch monitor Monitors the devices starting from the one specified by the user in a batch.
Page 102 Batch Monitor
TC (timer, counter) monitor Monitors the current values, set values, contacts, and coils of timers, retentive timers, and counters of the PLC CPU in a
batch.
Page 104 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
BM (buffer memory) monitor Monitors the buffer memories of the intelligent module in a batch.
Page 107 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features
3
Switching between the full mode and quad mode The full mode and the quad mode can be switched using the screen switching button as needed.
The GOT in the full mode displays one monitor screen to display many devices at once.
The GOT in the quad mode divides one screen into four windows to display four monitor screens.
Page 80 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
Changing device values using the test operation The following values can be changed by the test operation.
Current values of word devices and bit devices
Current values and set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers
Current values of buffer memories
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
Switching the display format and displaying device comments The display format of device values can be switched among binary, decimal, and hexadecimal formats.
Device comments can be displayed on the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
Monitoring other stations You can monitor other stations in the data link system, network system, and CC-Link system containing the GOT (or GOT-
connected station).
For the details of the connection types that can be monitored, refer to the following.
Page 58 System configuration
Switching the display languages and supporting multiple languages Monitor screens are displayed with the language set in the function setting of the utility.
The full mode and the quad mode can be switched.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.1 Features 57
58
3.2 Specifications Page 58 System configuration
Page 61 Devices that can be monitored
Page 75 Access range
Page 75 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the names of controllers and connection types that can be monitored using the device monitor function.
For the details of the communication units cables used for each connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU. (The test operation is not available.) *2 If the number in the DATE column on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B, set values of timers, counters, and retentive timers cannot be
monitored. *3 The BM monitor is not supported. *4 The T/C monitor is not supported. *5 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the CPU access the control system CPU.
The MELSEC redundant setting of the GOT is enabled. The operation mode of the PLC CPU is set to the redundant mode.
*6 The local monitor is not supported.
Controller Model
RCPU *4*6 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU,
R08PCPU *5, R16PCPU *5, R32PCPU *5, R120PCPU *5,
R08PSFCPU *7, R16PSFCPU *7, R32PSFCPU *7, R120PSFCPU *7,
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU
C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R series) *6 R12CCPU-V
MELSEC iQ-F *4*6 FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ
QCPU (Q mode) Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU,
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU,
Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU,
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
C Controller module (Q series) *6 Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG
QSCPU *1*6 QS001CPU
LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT, L02SCPU
QnACPU *2*6 Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QnASCPU *2*6 Q2ASCPU, Q2SCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1
FXCPU *3*6 FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC, FX3S
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) *6 R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
Motion CPU (Q series) *6 Q172CPU *3, Q173CPU *3, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN,
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU,
Q172DCPU, Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU, Q173DCPU-S1,
Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU,
Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1,
Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1,
MR-MQ100
Robot controller *6 CRnQ-700(Q172DRCPU), CRnD-700,
CR800-R(R16RTCPU) *3*4, CR800-D *3*4, CR800-Q(Q172DSRCPU)
CNC C80 *6 R16NCCPU *3*4
MELDAS C70 *6 Q173NCCPU
MELDAS C6/C64 *6 FCA C6, FCA C64
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
*7 Mount a SIL2 function module (R6PSFM) and a redundant function module (R6RFM) next to a SIL2 process CPU on the base unit.
Connection type The device monitor function can be used for the following connection types.
: Available, : Not available
*1 The GOT is connected as an intelligent device station. *2 The GOT is connected to the CC-Link system via AJ65BT-G4-S3 or AJ65BT-R2N. *3 Not available for the following models.
Q172CPU, Q173CPU Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU
*4 Only available for the following models. Q170MCPU(-S1) Q170MSCPU(-S1)
*5 Only available for FX3U(C).
Function Controller Direct CPU connection (Serial)
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
CC-Link connection
ID *1 G4 *2
Device
monitor
RnCPU
CPU with built-in CC-Link IE
(RnENCPU)
Process CPU (RnPCPU)
Safety CPU (RnSFCPU)
C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R
Series)
MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) Basic model
QCPU
High Performance
model QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
(main base)
Redundant CPU
(extension base)
Universal model
QCPU
C Controller module (Q Series)
QSCPU
LCPU
QnACPU
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
Motion CPU (Q Series) *3 *4
CNC C80
CNC C70
MELDAS C6/C64
Robot controller CRnQ-700
CRnD-700
FXCPU *5
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 59
60
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the device monitor to the GOT.
To use an extended function compatible with the device monitor, write the package data that contains the applicable system
application (extended function) to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware To display device comments on the device monitor, the data storage such as an SD card or USB memory is required.
For the display of device comments, refer to the following.
Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Devices that can be monitored Devices that can be monitored differ depending on the monitor type and the controller used.
Page 61 Entry monitor
Page 65 Batch monitor
Page 69 TC monitor
Page 71 BM monitor
Page 72 Test operation
Entry monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the entry monitor.
PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)
*2 FX5UJCPU is not supported.
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B)
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link (SB)
GOT bit register (GB)
Safety input relay (SAX)
Safety output relay (SAY)
Safety link relay (SAB)
Safety internal relay (SAM)
Safety Special relay (SASM)
SFC block (BL) *2
Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 61
62
Word device
: Available, : Not available
*1 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Data register (D)
Special data register (SD)
Link register (W)
Timer (current value) (TN)
Counter (current value) (CN)
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
Long timer (current value) (LTN)
Long counter (current value) (LCN)
Long retentive timer (current value)
(LSN)
Link special register (SW)
File register (R)
Extension file register (ZR)
Index register (Z)
Index register (32 bits) (LZ)
Link register (for writing) (Ww) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Link register (for reading) (Wr) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Motion device (#)
GOT data register (GD)
GOT special register (GS)
Safety timer (SAT)
Safety Counter (SAC)
Safety retentive timer (SAST)
Safety special relay (SASM)
Safety data register (SAD)
Safty special register (SAS)
Safety link register (SAW)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Other than PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B) *1
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link
(SB)
GOT bit register
(GB)
Safety input relay
(SAX)
Safety output relay
(SAY)
Safety link relay
(SAB)
Safety internal relay
(SAM)
Safety Special relay
(SASM)
SFC block (BL)
Step relay (block)
(BLS)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 63
64
Word device
: Available, : Not available
*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Data register (D)
Special data register
(SD)
Link register (W) *1
Timer (current value)
(TN)
Counter (current
value) (CN)
Retentive timer
(current value) (SN)
Long timer (current
value) (LTN)
Long counter
(current value) (LCN)
Long retentive timer
(current value) (LSN)
Link special register
(SW)
File register (R)
Extension file
register (ZR)
Index register (Z)
Index register (32
bits) (LZ)
Link register (for
writing) (Ww)
*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Link register (for
reading) (Wr)
*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Motion device (#)
GOT data register
(GD)
GOT special register
(GS)
Safety timer (SAT)
Safety Counter
(SAC)
Safety retentive
timer (SAST)
Safety special relay
(SASM)
Safety data register
(SAD)
Safty special register
(SAS)
Safety link register
(SAW)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Batch monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the batch monitor.
PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)
*2 FX5UJCPU is not supported.
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B)
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link (SB)
GOT bit register (GB)
Safety input (SAX)
Safety output (SAY)
Safety link relay (SAB)
Safety internal relay (SAM)
SFC block (BL) *2
Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 65
66
Word device
: Available, : Not available
*1 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Data register (D)
Special data register (SD)
Link register (W)
Timer (current value) (TN)
Counter (current value) (CN)
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
Long timer (current value) (LTN)
Long counter (current value) (LCN)
Long retentive timer (current value)
(LSN)
Link special register (SW)
File register (R)
Extension file register (ZR)
Index register (Z)
Index register (32 bits) (LZ)
Link register (for writing) (Ww) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Link register (for reading) (Wr) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1
Motion device (#)
GOT data register (GD)
GOT special register (GS)
Safety timer (SAT)
Safety counter (SAC)
Safety retentive timer (SAST)
Safety special relay (SASM)
Safety data register (SAD)
Safety special relay (SAS)
Safety link register (SAW)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Other than PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B) *1
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link
(SB)
GOT bit register
(GB)
Safety input (SAX)
Safety output (SAY)
Safety link relay
(SAB)
Safety internal relay
(SAM)
SFC block (BL)
Step relay (block)
(BLS)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 67
68
Word device
: Available, : Not available
*1 The device can be monitored when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Data register (D)
Special data register
(SD)
Link register (W) *1
Timer (current value)
(TN)
Counter (current
value) (CN)
Retentive timer
(current value) (SN)
Long timer (current
value) (LTN)
Long counter
(current value) (LCN)
Long retentive timer
(current value) (LSN)
Link special register
(SW)
File register (R)
Extension file
register (ZR)
Index register (Z)
Index register (32
bits) (LZ)
Link register (for
writing) (Ww)
*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Link register (for
reading) (Wr)
*2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Motion device (#)
GOT data register
(GD)
GOT special register
(GS)
Safety timer (SAT)
Safety counter
(SAC)
Safety retentive
timer (SAST)
Safety special relay
(SASM)
Safety data register
(SAD)
Safety special relay
(SAS)
Safety link register
(SAW)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
TC monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the TC monitor.
PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
Word device
: Available, : Not available
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Timer (contact) (TT)
Timer (coil) (TC)
Counter (contact) (CT)
Counter (coil) (CC)
Retentive timer (contact) (SS)
Retentive timer (coil) (SC)
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Timer (current value) (TN)
Timer (set value)
Counter (current value) (CN)
Counter (set value)
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
Timer (set value)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 69
70
Other than PLC CPU Bit device
: Available, : Not available
Word device
: Available, : Not available
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Timer (contact) (TT)
Timer (coil) (TC)
Counter (contact)
(CT)
Counter (coil) (CC)
Retentive timer
(contact) (SS)
Retentive timer (coil)
(SC)
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Timer (current value)
(TN)
Timer (set value)
Counter (current
value) (CN)
Counter (set value)
Retentive timer
(current value) (SN)
Timer (set value)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
BM monitor The following lists the devices that can be monitored on the BM monitor.
PLC CPU Word device
: Available, : Not available
Other than PLC CPU Word device
: Available, : Not available
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Buffer memory (intelligent function
module) (BM)
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Buffer memory
(intelligent function
module) (BM)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 71
72
Test operation The following lists the devices for which the test operation can be performed.
PLC CPU Bit device
: Writable, : Not writable
*1 When specifying a device, use a single string of BLnSm. (n: 0 to 319, m: 0 to 511)
*2 FX5UJCPU is not supported.
Word device
: Writable, : Not writable
*1 The current value of the index register (Z) cannot be changed. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B)
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link (SB)
GOT bit register (GB)
SFC block (BL) *2
Step relay (block) (BLS) *1 *2
Device RnCPU RnPCPU RnENCPU
RnSFCPU MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU (Q mode) QSCPU LCPU QnA CPU
FXCPU
Data register (D)
Special data register (SD)
Link register (W)
Timer (current value) (TN)
Timer (set value)
Counter (current value) (CN)
Counter (set value)
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
Timer (set value)
Long timer (current value) (LTN)
Long counter (current value) (LCN)
Long retentive timer (current value)
(LSN)
Link special register (SW)
File register (R)
Extension file register (ZR)
Index register (Z) *1
Index register (32 bits) (LZ)
Buffer memory (intelligent function
module) (BM)
Link register (for reading) (Wr) *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Motion device (#)
GOT data register (GD)
GOT special register (GS)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Other than PLC CPU Bit device
: Writable, : Not writable
*1 The test operation can be performed when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected.
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Internal relay (M)
Latch relay (L)
Annunciator (F)
Link relay (B) *1
Special relay (SM)
Special relay for link
(SB)
GOT bit register
(GB)
SFC block (BL)
Step relay (block)
(BLS)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 73
74
Word device
: Writable, : Not writable
*1 The test operation can be performed when Q24DHCCPU-V or Q24DHCCPU-VG is connected. *2 Can be monitored only when the host station is monitored with the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station).
Device C Controller module Motion CPU CNC Robot controller
MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series MELSEC iQ-R series
Q series C80 C70, MELDAS C6/C64
CRnQ- 700
CRnD -700
CR 800-R
CR 800-D
Data register (D)
Special data register
(SD)
Link register (W) *1
Timer (current value)
(TN)
Timer (set value)
Counter (current
value) (CN)
Counter (set value)
Retentive timer
(current value) (SN)
Timer (set value)
Link special register
(SW)
File register (R)
Extension file
register (ZR)
Index register (Z)
Index register (32
bits) (LZ)
Buffer memory
(intelligent function
module) (BM)
Link register (for
reading) (Wr)
*2 *2 *2 *2
Motion device (#)
GOT data register
(GD)
GOT special register
(GS)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications
3
Access range When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in the MELSECNET/H network system, only the master station can be
monitored.
The access range other than the above is the same as the one for when the GOT is connected with a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
Precautions
Monitoring word devices by 32 bits When word devices are monitored by 32 bits (two words), those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored.
Devices with 16 bits (one-word) of data remaining are not monitored.
If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number, the last device number of the specified controller will not be
displayed.
Changing the set values of timers and counters of the QnACPU and displaying device comments For only QnACPUs whose number in the DATE column on the rating plate is [9707B] or later, the set values of timers (T) and
counters (C) can be changed and device comments can be displayed.
Monitoring local devices using multiple software When monitoring local devices, do not monitor the devices of the same PLC CPU simultaneously using multiple software
(including GT Designer3 and GX Works2). Otherwise the local devices cannot be monitored properly.
D11129 D11130 D11131 D11132 D11133 D11134 D11135 (Device name)
Unit of the monitor display Nothing is displayed.
PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER
DATE 9707 B
Manufacture year and month Function version
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.2 Specifications 75
76
3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens This section describes the operations that are common to the monitor screens.
Page 76 Displaying the monitor screen
Page 79 Names of each section of monitor screen
Page 80 Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens])
Page 84 Entering devices ([Register])
Page 86 Deleting a device ([Delete])
Page 87 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
Page 98 Screen transition (common operation)
Displaying the monitor screen This section describes the flow until the device monitor screen is displayed after the device monitor (system application
(Extended function)) is installed in the GOT.
The display method of the device monitor screen differs between for the first time and later.
Displaying the device monitor screen for the first time Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1. Start the device monitor.
The following two methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
2. The communication setting window appears.
Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
3. The [Device monitor] window appears.
Displaying the device monitor screen for the second time and later Follow the procedure described below to display the device monitor screen.
1. Start the device monitor.
The following three methods are provided for starting the device monitor.
Using the special function switch (device monitor) set for the project
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) placed on the monitor screen.
For the setting method of the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
If the project has not been written into the GOT yet, start the device monitor from the Utility.
Starting the device monitor from the utility
Display the utility screen and select the [Monitor] tab and [Device Monitor].
For the display method of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Touching [Device monitor] on the [MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
When [MELSEC-L troubleshooting] is used, touch the [Device monitor] button.
Page 465 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
2. The screen display depends on how the device monitor is started.
When the device monitor is started using the special function switch (device monitor) for which [Specify the destination to
connect the screen of Device Monitor] is set
The device monitor screen of the specified controller is displayed.
When the device monitor is started using the special function switch (device monitor) for which [Specify the destination to
connect the screen of Device Monitor] is not set or from the utility screen
The [History] dialog appears.
Select the monitor history to be recovered and touch the [OK] key.
If you want to change the monitor target, touch the [Cancel] button.
The communication setting dialog appears.
Select the connection destination and communication driver of the controller to be monitored.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 77
78
3. The [Device monitor] screen appears.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Names of each section of monitor screen
1)Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2)Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3)Screen switch key
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4)[Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5)Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6)Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
7)Scroll key
Scrolls the monitor device display up and down.
8)Message display
Displays error messages.
9)Sub menu key
Use this key to register a device, execute test operation, or switch the display format on each monitor screen.
Keys to be displayed vary depending on the monitor category.
1) 2)
6)
3) 4)
8) 9)
5)
7)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 79
80
Display format of the monitor screen ([One large screen], [4 screens]) In the device monitor, the screen display format can be switched between the full mode and the quad mode.
How to switch the display format To switch the display format from the full mode to the quad mode, touch the [4 screens] key.
To switch the display format from the quad mode to the full mode, touch the [One large screen] key.
[4 screens] button
[One large screen] button
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Destination path setting ([Connect])
Setting procedure for the destination path 1. Touch the [Connect] key on a device monitor screen.
2. The communication setting dialog appears.
Set the destination path with referring to the following.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
[Connect] key
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 81
82
Communication setting dialog Configure the communication setting with the monitor target when starting monitor in this dialog.
Screen display
1)CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2)Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection: [0]
Ethernet connection: [1] to [239]
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (host loop), [1] to [255] (specified loop)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [239]
CC-Link IE Field Network: [1] to [239]
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]
3)Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The setting range differs depending on the connection type.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection: [FF] (host station)
Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (control station), [1] to [64] (normal station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120]
CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [120] (local station)
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station)
4)CPU No. input area
Set the CPU No. of the multiple CPUs.
This setting can be configured only the multiple CPUs are monitored.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
5)CH No. selection key
Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
6)Keys
Keys for operations in the communication setting window are displayed.
5) 6)
3)
2)1) 2)
When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input
4)
1)
3) 4)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Key functions
1)CH No. selection key
Select the CH No. for connecting the monitor target.
2)[] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
3)Input area move key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
4)[Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the
communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
5)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
6)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
3)
2)
1)
4) 5) 6)
2)
3)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 83
84
Entering devices ([Register]) Enter devices to be monitored for all monitor categories.
Entering procedure for the monitor device The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the entry procedure for the monitor device.
1. Display the window for entering the device by either of following operations in each monitor.
Touching the [Register] key
Touching the monitor device display area
When using other than the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed only when no device is entered.
When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed even when a device is entered.
2. The window for entering the device appears.
Set the destination with referring to the following.
Page 85 Window for entering the device
3. When a password is not set for a sequence program, touch the [ENTER] key to enter the specified device.
When a password is set for the sequence program, the dialog for canceling the password appears when the [ENTER] is
touched.
Inputting the correct password enters the specified device.
[Register] button
Monitor device display area
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
4. When using the entry monitor, the window for entering the device is displayed successively.
After entering the device, close the dialog with the [] key.
Window for entering the device The display contents of the window for entering the device differ depending on the monitor category.
1)Device display area
Set a device to be entered when using the entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor.
2)Memory address display area
Set the memory address to be entered when using the BM monitor.
3)Input keys for device and memory address
Use these keys to input a device or a memory address.
4)[] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
5)Character type switch key
Switches the character type of the key.
[a-z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (lowercase).
[A-Z] key: Switches the character type to alphabetic characters (uppercase).
[Sign] key: Switches the character type to symbol.
6)Input area move key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
Use this key only when using the BM monitor.
7)[Enter] key
Enters the device input in the device display area or the memory address area.
8)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
9)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Entry device
[x] key
Entry monitor, batch monitor, and TC monitor BM monitor
3) 3)
9)
6)
5)
9)8) 7) 7)
4) 4)
8)
1) 2)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 85
86
Deleting a device ([Delete]) Delete a device entered in the entry monitor.
How to delete a device 1. Touch a device to be deleted in the entry monitor.
2. Touch the [Delete] key.
3. The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected device.
Touch a device to be deleted.
1.
2. Touch the [Delete] key.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all]) Delete all the registered devices entered in the entry monitor at a time.
How to delete devices at a time 1. Touch the [Delete all] key in the entry monitor.
2. The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [OK] key to delete all the selected devices.
Touch the [Delete all] key.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 87
88
Test operation for the monitor device ([Test]) Test devices.
Operating procedure of the test This subsection takes a test operation of the D100 device as an example to describe the test operation procedure.
1. Touch the [Test] key in each monitor.
2. The confirmation dialog appears.
Touch the [Yes] key to switch the mode to the test mode.
3. When switching the device value display format, touch the corresponding device value display format.
Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function (such as turning ON or OFF bit device, changing the word device current value, changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter, and changing the buffer memory current value), read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method. During quick test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system. False output or malfunction can cause an accident.
WARNING
[Test] key
Display format of the device value
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
4. Touch a device targeted to the test operation.
5. A dialog for setting the device value according to the device display format appears.
Set the device value with referring to the following.
After setting the device value, touch the [ENTER] key.
Page 90 Dialogs for setting the device value
6. The set value is reflected in the device.
The device to be tested
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 89
90
Ending the test mode To end the test mode, touch the [Test] key.
Dialogs for setting the device value The display contents of the dialogs for setting the device value differ depending on the device display format.
1)Device value display area
Set the device value to be input.
2)Device value input key
Use this key to input the device value.
3)[] key
Closes the window for entering the device.
4)[DEX/HEX] key
Switches the key type between the decimal and hexadecimal.
5)[FIX/EXP] key
Switches the display format of the device value display area between the exponential representation (EXP) and the floating
point representation (FIX).
6)[+/-] key
Switches positive and negative of the input value.
7)[Enter] key
Determines the device input area input in the device value display area.
8)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
9)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Test] key
For decimal number For binary or hexadecimal number For real number
2)
3)
2) 2)
3) 3)
4) 4) 5)
6) 6)7) 7) 7)8) 8) 8) 9)9)9)
1) 1)1)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Display format dialog
1)[Data size]
Represents the data formats of the device.
The following shows the selectable items.
[16bit(W)]
[32bit(D)]
[64bit(L)]
2)[Data type]
Represents the displayable display formats for the device value.
The following shows the selectable items.
[Signed decimal(K)]
[Unsigned decimal(K+)]
[Hexadecimal(HEX)]
[Binary(BIN)]
[Floating(EXP)]
[Fixed(FIX)]
3)[Cancel] key
Closes the display format dialog without reflecting the settings.
4)[OK] key
Closes the display format dialog after reflecting the settings.
1)
2)
3)
4)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 91
92
Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout]) Switch the displayed number of device columns and display or non-display of the comments.
Procedure for switching the display The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1. Touch the [Layout] key in the entry monitor.
2. The display item dialog appears.
Set the display format and touch the [OK] key.
1)[Number of columns]
Represents the number of the columns of the devices.
2)[Display comments]
Switches whether to display or hide the device comments.
3)[Cancel] key
Closes the display item dialog without reflecting the settings.
4)[OK] key
Closes the display item dialog after reflecting the settings.
3. The display items are switched.
[Layout] key
1)
2)
3)
4)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor]) Monitor local devices.
Scan time while the GOT is using the local device monitor
When the GOT is using the local device monitor, the scan time for the PLC increases.
Monitoring procedure of local devices The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the switch procedure for the display.
1. Touch the [Local monitor] key in each monitor.
2. The program list dialog appears.
Select the target file for the local device monitor and touch the [Cancel] key.
1)Program file list
Represents the program file list of the local device monitor target.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2)[Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3)[OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.
[Local monitor] key
1)
2)
3)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 93
94
3. The confirmation dialog appears.
Touching the [OK] key starts the local device monitor.
Touching the [Cancel] key cancels the local device monitor.
Ending the local device monitor To end the local device monitor, touch the [Local monitor] key.
[Local monitor] key
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
File switching for comment display ([Change comment]) The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
This function cannot be used with the BM monitor.
Comment files which can be displayed when connected to the RCPU, MELSEC iQ-F, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), robot controller (MELSEC iQ-R series), or CNC C80 The device comments can be displayed on monitor screens by storing comment files into the data storage using the GX
Works3 function of writing data to a memory card.
Comment file storage destination Comment files for all the controllers or specified controllers in the SEQCMNT folder can be used for the device monitor.
Comment files for all the controllers can be commonly used for all the connected controllers.
Comment files for specified controllers can be used when a CPU having the channel number, network number, station
number, and CPU number of the folders storing the comment files is connected.
The SEQDAT folder stores temporary files used for the device monitor. (User access is prohibited.)
Precautions for comment files The file extension of comment files is ".DCM".
One-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used in a comment file name.
The number of characters used for a comment file name excluding the extension is within 60 for comment files for all the
controllers and 38 for comment files for specified controllers.
Only comment files output from FX5CPU projects can be used for the FX5CPU.
Comment files output from any project can be used for the RCPU and CNC C80.
GX Works3
SEQCMNT
SEQDAT (user access prohibited)
CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)
NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239)
STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number. (000 to 120, 255 (host station))
CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No. (00 to 04)
Comment files are output to the memory card by the write function of GX Works3.
xxxxxxxx.DCM
xxxxxxxx.DCM
Comment files for all the controllers
xxxxxxxx.DCM
xxxxxxxx.DCM
Comment files for specified controllers
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 95
96
Comment files which can be displayed when connected to a device other than the RCPU, MELSEC iQ-F, Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), robot controller (MELSEC iQ- R series), or CNC C80
Comment file types With the device monitor, comment files used for the sequence program monitor (Ladder) can be displayed.
The following lists the types of comment file that can be displayed.
Common comment files
Comment files of the monitored program (when the local device monitor or T/C monitor is used)
All comment files stored in the data storage connected to the GOT (when the local device monitor or T/C monitor is not
used)
Comment files specified by the parameter of the PLC (when a QCPU, LCPU, or QnACPU is connected)
Comment files specified by [Comment File Used in a Command] of the PC parameter in GX Works2 or GX Developer
Display of comment files in a GX Developer-format project Comment files in a GX Developer-format project also can be used for displaying device comments.
In this case, store the comment files into the data storage as shown below.
Project folder of GX Developer
Resources
Others
xxxxxxxx.WCD
xxxxxxxx.WCD
Comment files
SEQCMNT
CHxx: "xx" indicates a channel No. (01 to 04)
NETxxx: "xxx" indicates a network No. (000 to 239)
STxxx: "xxx" indicates a station number. (000 to 120, 255 (host station))
CPUxx: "xx" indicates a CPU No. (00 to 04)
SJIS
ASCII
GB
Big5
KS
Store each file into the folder whose name and the character code of the file to be stored correspond.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
Procedure for switching The entry monitor is taken here as an example to describe the procedure for switching comment files.
1. Touch the [Comment] key.
2. The comment file list dialog appears.
Select the comment file to display and touch the [Change] key.
1)[Comment list]
Lists the comment files displayed with the device monitor.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2)[Cancel] key
Closes the comment file list dialog.
3)[OK] key
Closes the comment file list dialog and displays the selected comment file.
When four screens are displayed and a comment file is set for one of the four screens, the comment file is also set for other
screens connected to the same monitor target and no comment file is set for.
3. The comment file on display is switched.
[Change comment] key
1)
2)
3)
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 97
98
Screen transition (common operation)
Starting the device monitor from the special function switch (device monitor)
Touch the special function switch (device monitor) on the monitor screen.
1. Display the utility.1.
2. Touch the [Devie monitor] in the [Monitor] tab.
First-time startup From the second-time startup
Touch the [Device monitor] on the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
1.
Starting the device monitor from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
Set the communication
path in the communication
setting dialog.
In the monitor history list, select the past monitor entry to use.[Cancel]
[OK]
The device monitor starts. (Example. Entry monitor)
[One large screen]
[4 screens]
[TC Monitor]
[Series]
[BM Monitor]
[End] Screens that started the device monitor Utility screen User-created screen MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
Program list *1
[ENTER]
Display format
[Connect]
[Local monitor]
[Change comment]
[Layout][Register]
Device entry
Comment file list
Display items
Program list
Communication setting
Display format
*1
*1
*1
Starting the device monitor from the utility
*2
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens
3
*1 When a password or keyword is set for the controller, the password entry dialog appears. *2 When [Specify the destination to connect the screen of Device Monitor] of the special function switch (device monitor) has been set, the
device monitor screen of the specified controller is displayed.
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the device monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special function
switch (System launcher).
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The device monitor is started. (Example: Entry monitor)
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed System configuration screen
[] key
[End] key
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.3 Operations Common to the Monitor Screens 99
10
3.4 Entry Monitor The entry monitor is a function that registers the devices to monitor beforehand and monitors only the registered devices.
Screen display and the key function
1)Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2)Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Series], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4)[Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5)Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6)Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Item Description
Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.
Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.
Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
1)
6)
5)
7)
2)
3) 4)
10)9)8) 14)13)12)11) 15)
Device name
Bit device
Device comment
Device number Device value
Device name
Word device
Device comment
Device value Device value
Display format
0 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.4 Entry Monitor
3
7)Message display
Displays error messages.
8)[Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
Page 85 Window for entering the device
9)[Delete] key
Deletes a selected registered device.
Page 86 Deleting a device ([Delete])
10)[Delete all] key
Deletes all the registered devices.
Page 87 Deleting devices at a time ([Delete all])
11)[Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
12)[Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
13)[Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
14)[Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
15)[Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device.
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
: Bit ON
: Bit OFF
Display format Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
[W]: Word (16 bits)
[D]: Double-word (32 bits)
[L]: Longword (64 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
[K]: Signed decimal
[K+]: Unsigned decimal
[HEX]: Hexadecimal
[BIN]: Binary
[EXP]: Exponential notation
[FIT]: Decimal representation
The display format can be changed when touched.
Item Description
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.4 Entry Monitor 101
10
3.5 Batch Monitor The device monitor is a function that specifies the start device in a range of devices and monitors the start and the following
successive devices in a batch.
Screen display and the key function
1)Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2)Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [TC monitor], and [BM monitor].
3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4)[Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5)Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6)Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Item Description
[Previous Device] Displays the devices preceding those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
[Next Device] Displays the devices following those on display. (Displays another part of the range.)
Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.
If a bit device is the target, the status is indicated as shown below.
: Bit ON
: Bit OFF
1)
6)
5)
7)
2)
3) 4)
10)9)8) 13)12)11)
Device name
Bit device
Device comment
Device number Device value
Device name
Word device
Device comment
Device number Device value
Display format
2 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.5 Batch Monitor
3
7)Message display
Displays error messages.
8)[Register] key
Registers the start device of monitor targets.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
Page 85 Window for entering the device
9)[test] key
Carries out a test operation.
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10)[Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11)[Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
12)[Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
13)[Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.
Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device.
Display format Represents the display format of the device value.
The display format can be changed when touched.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
[W]: Word (16 bits)
[D]: Double-word (32 bits)
[L]: Longword (64 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
[K]: Signed decimal
[K+]: Unsigned decimal
[HEX]: Hexadecimal
[BIN]: Binary
[EXP]: Exponential notation
[FIT]: Decimal representation
Item Description
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.5 Batch Monitor 103
10
3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) The TC monitor is a function that monitors only timers (T) and counters (C).
At the start of the TC monitor, the program list dialog appears.
Select the target program for monitoring and start monitoring.
1)Program file list
Lists program files that can be the targets for the TC monitor.
A file can be selected by touching the file name.
2)[Cancel] key
Closes the program list dialog without starting the local device monitor.
3)[OK] key
Starts the local device monitor of the selected program.
Screen display and the key function
1)Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2)Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], and [BM monitor].
3)Screen switching key ([4 screen], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4)[Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
1)
2)
3)
1)
6)
5)
7)
2)
3) 4)
10)9)8) 14)13)12)11)
4 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
3
5)Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6)Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Item Description
Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.
Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.
Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
Device value (current value) Displays the current value of the monitor device.
Device value (set value) Displays the set value of the monitor device.
Display format Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
[W]: Word (16 bits)
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
[K]: Signed decimal
[HEX]: Hexadecimal
The display format can be changed when touched.
Contact, coil display Indicates the status of the contact or coil.
Device name Device comment
Device number
Device value (current value) Device value (set value) Display format
Contact, coil display
: Bit ON : Bit OFF Contact
Coil : Bit ON : Bit OFF
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters) 105
10
7)Message display
Displays error messages.
8)[Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
Page 85 Window for entering the device
9)[Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10)[Layout] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11)[Change comment] key
The comment file to be displayed can be switched.
Touch the key to display the comment file list dialog.
Page 95 File switching for comment display ([Change comment])
12)[Local monitor] key
Starts or ends the local device monitor.
Page 93 Monitoring local devices ([Local monitor])
13)[Change target] key
Changes the program to be monitored.
14)[Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
6 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.6 TC Monitor (Monitoring Timers and Counters)
3
3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) The BM monitor is a function that monitors the buffer memory of special function modules.
Screen display and the key function
1)Monitor category display
Displays a monitor category of the monitor screen that is currently displayed.
2)Monitor category change key
Use this button to select a monitor category.
Select from [Selected], [Series], and [TC monitor].
3)Screen switching key ([4 screens], [One large screen])
Switches the screen display between the full screen display and the quad screen display.
4)[Exit] key
Exits the device monitor.
5)Monitor target display
Displays the channel No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitor target.
6)Monitor device display area
Displays the monitor device display area.
Item Description
Device name Displays the device name of the monitor device.
Device number Displays the device number of the monitor device.
Device comment Displays the device comment set for the monitor device.
Device value Displays the device value of the monitor device.
1)
6)
5)
7)
2)
3) 4)
10)9)8) 11)
Device name
Word device
Device comment
Device number Device value
Display format
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory) 107
10
7)Message display
Displays error messages.
8)[Register] key
Registers devices.
Displays the device entry window when touched.
Page 85 Window for entering the device
9)[Test] key
Carries out a test operation.
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
10)[Layput] key
Changes the display of items.
The display of the following items can be changed.
Number of the columns of the devices to be displayed
Comments (can be switched between displaying and hiding)
Page 92 Switching the display (number or columns, comment display) ([Layout])
11)[Connect] key
Switches the monitor target for the device monitor.
Touch the key to display the communication setting dialog.
Page 82 Communication setting dialog
Display format Represents the display format of the device value.
The character on the left represents the data range of the device.
[W]: Word (16 bits)
[D]: Double-word (32 bits)
[L]: 64 bits
The character string on the right represents the display format of the device value.
[K]: Signed decimal
[K+]: Unsigned decimal
[HEX]: Hexadecimal
[BIN]: Binary
[EXP]: Exponential notation
[FIT]: Decimal representation
The display format can be changed when touched.
Item Description
8 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.7 BM Monitor (Monitoring Buffer Memory)
3
3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions The following table lists error messages displayed when the device monitor is carried out and describes the corresponding
corrective actions.
Error message Explanation Action
Failed to communicate with CPU. Communication with the target PLC for
monitoring cannot be established.
Check the connection (a connector disconnection, a break in a
cable) between the PLC and GOT.
Check if the PLC has caused an error.
Refer to the following to check if a network error has occurred.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Monitor)
A device has exceeded a specified device
range.
Because the data range was changed to
one with a larger number of bits, a device
that has exceeded the range is included in
the targets for display.
Change the data rage back in the previous number of bits.
The number of the target devices for
monitoring has exceeded its maximum.
The number of the target devices for the
registration for monitoring is larger than its
maximum.
The number of the target devices for monitoring beyond its
maximum cannot be registered.
Delete unnecessary registered devices before registering.
Displaying device comments has failed. No device comment file exists. Create a device comment file.
Local device monitoring has failed. The target program for local device
monitoring does not exist or has been
deleted.
Start the local device monitor again and select a program from the
alternatives in the list.
Failed to write the value to the device. The target device for writing a value does
not exist or the target device is outside the
range.
Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
A device that cannot be monitored exists. A device outside the range is included in
those on display.
Change the display position of devices.
The device range has been changed. During GOT startup, the parameter of the
PLC was changed then a device on display
has fallen outside the range.
Restart the GOT.
Writing a TC set value has failed. The target program for writing a timer or
counter setting value does not exist or has
been deleted.
Start the TC monitor again and select a program from the
alternatives in the list.
The device that has been specified as a
security condition is invalid.
The device that has been specified as a
device test authorization device for the
system security setting does not exist or is
outside the device range.
Check the range of devices with the parameter of the PLC.
Check the device test authorization device for the system
security setting.
Reading a comment file has failed. If drive A has been specified in the GOT
setup as the destination for saving data:
The SD card slot cover on the GOT is
open.
No stored comment file exists on the SD
card or USB memory that has been
connected to the GOT.
Close the SD card slot cover and select the comment file again.
In the comment file list dialog, select an existing comment file.
Obtaining the program name has failed. No program has been written to the PLC
CPU.
To the PLC, write a PC parameter and sequence program that are
consistent with each other.
No program is in execution. In using the TC monitor, there is no
program being scanned.
Start to scan a program.
3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 109
11
MEMO
0 3 DEVICE MONITOR 3.8 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
4
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY)
Page 111 Features
Page 116 Specifications
Page 128 Display Operation
Page 142 Setting Display Format
Page 143 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Page 149 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
Page 155 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
Page 173 Find/Replace Operation
Page 179 Test Operation
Page 181 Error Messages and Corrective Action
This chapter describes the following functions.
4.1 Features With the sequence program monitor (ladder display), the GOT monitors a sequence program of a controller in the ladder
format. The program is editable, and the current device values of the program are changeable.
The following shows features of the sequence program monitor (ladder display).
Editing sequence programs on the GOT Sequence programs are editable in the ladder format by using the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (ladder display).
PLC read screen
Page 143 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Ladder monitor screen
Page 149 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
Ladder editor screen
Page 155 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
Function Target CPU Remarks
Sequence program monitor (Ladder) QCPU, LCPU The explanation common to the functions shown on the left is referred to as the
explanation of the sequence program monitor (ladder display).Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) RCPU
Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) FX5CPU
X10
Touch a position to input a contact.
Y22
The contact (Always OFF) is input.
SM401X10
Y22
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 111
11
Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages The following are available.
Switching whether to display or hide device comments
Switching languages for file names of sequence programs, comments, and others
Switching device comment display Whether to display or hide device comments used in sequence programs can be switched.
Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)) Preparing a comment file created in either of the following character codes enables character code switching of the header
and comment of a file following the language switching in the utility.
SJIS
GB
Big5
KS
ASCII
When comment files created in each character code are stored in a data storage, you can switch the language to display a
comment, regardless of the language selected in the utility.
Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)) When the system language is switched in the utility, the comment is switched accordingly.
When comment files created in each language are written to the RCPU, you can switch the language to display a comment,
regardless of the language selected in the utility.
Switching languages (for the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)) When the system language is switched in the utility, the comment is switched accordingly.
When comment files created in each language are written to the FX5CPU, you can switch the language to display a comment,
regardless of the language selected in the utility.
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features
4
Displaying registered ladder blocks is available On the Ladder registration monitor window, displaying registered ladder blocks is available.
Page 154 Ladder registration monitor window
21
85
87
90
M12
Y43
Y44
21
Ladder registration monitor window
M12
Y43
Y44
Y45
Y46
Y6F
Y70
Y71
Y72
M13
M110
M111
M112
90 Y72
M112
24
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 113
11
Enhanced interaction with objects (one-touch ladder jump function)
Interaction with the special function switch The automatic PLC read or the device automatic search can be executed at startup of the sequence program monitor (ladder
display) by the following method. Place a special function switch on a user-created screen, specify the search file and search
device in the special function switch setting, and then touch the special function switch.
Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment error without
fail by simple operations, reducing time to stop the error.
Example) Coil searching by touching a special function switch
Interaction with the alarm display (user) or simple alarm display The sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be started to search for a device having an alarm by the following
method. Select an alarm in the alarm display, and touch a key code switch (Display ladder (Ladder Editor)).
Touch the special function button of error process
The sequence program monitor (ladder display) starts and searches for coil "M53" automatically.
(User-created screen)
Operation flow screen
Home position
Lifter down Lifter down
Hand close
Lifter up Lifter up
Forward Back
Hand open
"Forward operation M54" was not turned on since the lifter upper-end sensor (X10) was not turned on.
Lifter lower end
X13
X10
M52 M54
M53
M53
M53 M55 M54
M54
Lifter upper end Lifter up
Lifter up
Forward
Hand close
Ladder Search Device: M53
Special function switch setting
(Ladder monitor screen)
Ladder Search Mode: Coil
M12
X13
Y43
Occurred Comment
09/8/1 13:30:14 Fuse error
Temp. error09/8/1 14:46:49
Y44
Y45
Y46
(User-created screen) (Ladder monitor screen)
The sequence program monitor (ladder display) starts and searches for the device of alarm automatically.
The search result is displayed.
Select an alarm and touch the key code switch.
Key code switch setting
Code setting: FFBD : Sequence program monitor (ladder) FFBA : Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) FFC3 : Sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)
Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features
4
Reading program files and comment files The program files and comment files read from the RCPU, FX5CPU, QCPU, or LCPU are stored in a data storage mounted
on the GOT. Therefore, the startup time and the read time are shortened from the next startup.
Comment files written to an SD card with GX Works3 The comment files written to an SD card with GX Works3 can be used for displaying device comments by storing them in the
data storage in the GOT.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.1 Features 115
11
4.2 Specifications
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the sequence program monitor (ladder display).
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 A sequence program that has 260 k steps or more cannot be read. *2 To write a sequence program containing the following instructions to a PLC CPU, the PLC CPU must have a serial number starting with
10102 or later in the first 5 digits.
A sequence program containing the following instruction cannot be written to a PLC CPU.
*3 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) can be monitored. *4 The function version must be A2 or later. *5 This model can be monitored only when its operation mode is the process mode. *6 The safety program of the PLC CPU cannot be edited. *7 The device test is not supported. *8 The ladder editor and device test are not supported. *9 While the safety device is being monitored, the safety program cannot be read.
Controller Model
RCPU *10*11*12*13*14*15 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU *1, R120CPU *1,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU *1, R120ENCPU *1,
R08PCPU *5, R16PCPU *5, R32PCPU *1*5, R120PCPU *1*5,
R08SFCPU *6*7*9, R16SFCPU *6*7*9, R32SFCPU *1*6*7*9, R120SFCPU *1*6*7*9
FX5CPU *16 FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ *17
QCPU (Q mode) Basic model Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
High Performance model Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU
Universal model *2 Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU,
Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU *1, Q100UDEHCPU *1,
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU
LCPU L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P, L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P,
L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
Motion CPU (Q series) *3 Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
CNC C70 *4 Q173NCCPU
CNC C80 *8 R16NCCPU-S1
Instruction
DBKCMP=(P), DBKCMP<>(P), DBKCMP>(P), DBKCMP>=(P), DBKCMP<(P), DBKCMP<=(P),
DBK+(P), DBK-(P),
DFMOV(P),
SFTBR(P), SFTBL(P), SFTWR(P), SFTWL(P),
MEAN(P), DMEAN(P),
STRINS(P), STRDEL(P),
POW(P), POWD(P), LOG10(P), LOG10D(P),
SCL(P), DSCL(P), SCL2(P), DSCL2(P),
LDDT=, ANDDT=, ORDT=, LDDT<>, ANDDT<>, ORDT<>, LDDT>, ANDDT>, ORDT>, LDDT>=, ANDDT>=, ORDT>=, LDDT<, ANDDT<, ORDT<, LDDT<=,
ANDDT<=, ORDT<=, LDTM=, ANDTM=, ORTM=, LDTM<>, ANDTM<>, ORTM<>, LDTM>, ANDTM>, ORTM>, LDTM<=, ANDTM<=, ORTM<=, LDTM<,
ANDTM<, ORTM<, LDTM>=, ANDTM>=, ORTM>=,
LDPI, LDFI, ANDPI, ANDFI, ORPI, ORFI,
CCOM(P)
Instruction
TYPERD
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
*10 The following instructions cannot be displayed.
*11 Only the RnPCPU supports the following instructions.
*12 Only the RnSFCPU does not support the following instructions.
*13 The following instructions are not available to R00CPU.
*14 The following instructions are not available to R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
*15 The following instructions are not available to RnSFCPU and RnPCPU.
*16 The following instructions cannot be displayed.
*17 The following instructions are not available to FX5UJ.
Instruction
LD=_U, LD<>_U, LD>_U, LD>=_U, LD<_U, LD<=_U,
AND=_U, AND<>_U, AND>_U, AND>=_U, AND<_U, AND<=_U,
OR=_U, OR <>_U, OR >_U, OR >=_U, OR <_U, OR <=_U,
LDD=_U, LDD<>_U, LDD>_U, LDD>=_U, LDD<_U, LDD<=_U,
ANDD=_U, ANDD<>_U, ANDD>_U, ANDD>=_U, ANDD<_U, ANDD<=_U,
ORD=_U, ORD<>_U, ORD>_U, ORD>=_U, ORD<_U, ORD<=_U,
DI, EI, COM, M.DDRD, MP.DDRD, M.DDWR, MP.DDWR, M.GINT, MP.GINT, M.BITWR, MP.BITWR, M.CHGA, MP.CHGA,
M.CHGAS, MP.CHGAS, M.CHGT, MP.CHGT, M.CHGV, MP.CHGV, M.CHGVS, MP.CHGVS, M.MCNST, MP.MCNST,
M.SFCS, MP.SFCS,
QMSEND
Instruction
S.IN, S.OUT1, S.OUT2, S.MOUT, S.DUTY, S.BC, S.PSUM, S.PID, S.2PID, S.PIDP, S.SPI, S.IPD, S.BPI, S.R, S.PHPL,
S.LLAG, S.I, S.D, S.DED, S.HS, S.LS, S.MID, S.AVE, S.LIMIT, S.VLMT1, S.VLMT2, S.ONF2, S.ONF3, S.DBND, S.PGS,
S.SEL, S.BUMP, S.AMR, S.FG, S.IFG, S.FLT, S.SUM, S.TPC, S.ENG, S.IENG, S.ADD, S.SUB, S.MUL, S.DIV, S.SQR,
S.ABS, S.>, S.<, S.=, S.>=, S.<=, S.AT1
Instruction
LD Sn/BLm\Sn, LDI Sn/BLm\Sn, AND Sn/BLm\Sn, ANI Sn/BLm\Sn, OR Sn/BLm\Sn, ORI Sn/BLm\Sn, LD BLm, LDI BLm,
AND BLm, ANI BLm, OR BLm, ORI BLm, MOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, MOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, DMOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn,
DMOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, BMOV K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, BMOVP K4Sn/BLm\K4Sn, SET BLm, RST BLm, PAUSE BLm,
RSTART BLm, SET Sn/BLm\Sn, RST Sn/BLm\Sn, BRSET, D.DDRD, DP.DDRD, D.DDWR, DP.DDWR, D.GINT, DP.GINT
Instruction
SP.FREAD, SP.FWRITE, LOGTRG, LOGTRGR
Instruction
DBOPEN, DBOPENP, DBCLOSE, DBCLOSEP, DBINSERT, DBINSERTP, DBUPDATE, DBUPDATEP, DBSELECT,
DBSELECTP, DBDELETE, DBDELETEP, DBIMPORT, DBIMPORTP, DBEXPORT, DBEXPORTP, DBTRANS,
DBTRANSP, DBCOMMIT, DBCOMMITP, DBROLBAK, DBROLBAKP
Instruction
CMP, CMPP, CMP_U, CMPP_U, DCMP, DCMPP, DCMP_U, DCMPP_U, ZCP, ZCPP, ZCP_U, ZCPP_U, DZCP, DZCPP,
DZCP_U, DZCPP_U, SFTR, SFTRP, SFTL, SFTLP, WSFR, WSFRP, WSFL, WSFLP, SMOV, SMOVP, DSWAP, DSWAPP,
ECMP, ECMPP, EDCMP, EDCMPP, EZCP, EZCPP, EDZCP, EDZCPP, CCD, CCDP, SERMM, SERMMP, DSERMM,
DSERMMP, BON, BONP, DBON, DBONP, SQRT, SQRTP, DSQRT, DSQRTP, CRC, CRCP, TCMP, TCMPP, TZCP,
TZCPP, HOURM, DHOURM, SP.SLMPSND, SP.FTPPUT, SP.FTPGET, PID
Instruction
LD=_U, LD<>_U, LD>_U, LD>=_U, LD<_U, LD<=_U,
AND=_U, AND<>_U, AND>_U, AND>=_U, AND<_U, AND<=_U,
OR=_U, OR<>_U, OR>_U, OR>=_U, OR<_U, OR<=_U,
LDD=_U, LDD<>_U, LDD>_U, LDD>=_U, LDD<_U, LDD<=_U,
ANDD=_U, ANDD<>_U, ANDD>_U, ANDD>=_U, ANDD<_U, ANDD<=_U,
ORD=_U, ORD<>_U, ORD>_U, ORD>=_U, ORD<_U, ORD<=_U,
TRAN (for FX5U and FX5UC), RBFM (for FX5UJ), WBFM (for FX5UJ)
Instruction
$MOV_WS, $MOVP_WS, WS2SJIS, WS2SJISP, SJIS2WS, SJIS2WSP, SJIS2WSB, SJIS2WSBP,
LD S/BL\S, LDI S/BL\S, AND S/BL\S, ANI S/BL\S, OR S/BL\S, ORI S/BL\S,
LD BL, LDI BL, AND BL, ANI BL, OR BL, ORI BL, MOV KnS/BL\KnS, MOVP KnS/BL\KnS,
DMOV KnS/BL\KnS, DMOVP KnS/BL\KnS, BMOV KnS/BL\KnS, BMOVP KnS/BL\KnS,
SET BL, RST BL, SET S/BL\S, RST S/BL\S, OUT S/BL\S, ZRST S/BL\S, ZRSTP S/BL\S, TRAN,
SP.FDELETE, SP.FCOPY, SP.FMOVE, SP.FRENAME, SP.FSTATUS, SP.FTPGET, G.SLMPSND, GP.SLMPSND, G.CCPASETX, GP.CCPASETX
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 117
11
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 The LCPU does not support the connection type. *2 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2. *3 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later. *4 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *5 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection. *6 Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are not available. *7 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *8 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *9 Ladder editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system applications (extended functions) for the sequence program monitor (ladder
display) to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware The following hardware is required.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Function Connection form between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection *1
Direct CPU connection (serial) *2
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *9
MELSECNET/H connection *1, MELSECNET/ 10 connection *1*3
CC-Link IE controller connection *1*4, CC-Link IE field connection *5*6
CC-Link connection
ID *7 G4 *8
sequence
program
monitor
(ladder)
Monitors and
edits a sequence
program in the
ladder format in
a controller, or
changes current
device values of
the program.
Hardware
Data Storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
Devices and range that can be monitored The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.
When RCPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)
Device *1 Device range Program display
Device monitor display
Search operation
Device comment display
Input RCPU: X0 to X2FFF, DX0 to DXFFF
CNC C80: X0 to X1FFF
Output RCPU: Y0 to Y2FFF, DY0 to DYFFF
CNC C80: Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay Rn(EN)CPU: M0 to M161882111
RnPCPU: M0 to M94773247
RnSFCPU: M0 to M94674943
CNC C80: M0 to M61439
Latch relay RCPU: L0 to L32767
CNC C80: L0 to L1023
Link relay Rn(EN)CPU: B0 to B9A61FFF
RnPCPU: B0 to B5A61FFF
RnSFCPU: B0 to B5A49FFF
CNC C80: B0 to BDFFF
Timer Rn(EN)CPU: T0 to T8993439
RnPCPU: T0 to T5265151
RnSFCPU: T0 to T5259711
CNC C80: T0 to T2047
Long timer Rn(EN)CPU: LT0 to LT2529407
RnPCPU: LT0 to LT1480831
RnSFCPU: LT0 to LT1479295
Retentive timer Rn(EN)CPU: ST0 to ST8993439
RnPCPU: ST0 to ST5265151
RnSFCPU: ST0 to ST5259711
CNC C80: ST0 to ST127
Long retentive timer Rn(EN)CPU: LS0 to LS2529407
RnPCPU: LS0 to LS1480831
RnSFCPU: LS0 to LS1479295
Counter Rn(EN)CPU: C0 to C8993439
RnPCPU: C0 to C5265151
RnSFCPU: C0 to C5259711
CNC C80: C0 to C512
Long counter Rn(EN)CPU: LC0 to LC4761215
RnPCPU: LC0 to LC2787391
RnSFCPU: LC0 to LC2784543
Data register Rn(EN)CPU: D0 to D10117631
RnPCPU: D0 to D5923327
RnSFCPU: D0 to D5917183
CNC C80: D0 to D8191
Link register Rn(EN)CPU: W0 to W9A61FF
RnPCPU: W0 to W5A61FF
RnSFCPU: W0 to W5A49FF
CNC C80: W0 to W2FFF
Annunciator RCPU: F0 to F32767
CNC C80: F0 to F2047
Edge relay RCPU: V0 to V32767
CNC C80: V0 to V511
File register Rn(EN)CPU: R0 to 32767, ZR0 to ZR10027007
RnPCPU: R0 to R32767, ZR0 to ZR5832703
RnSFCPU: R0 to R32767, ZR0 to ZR5832703
CNC C80: R0 to R32767
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 119
12
*1 For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 Device cannot be replaced. *3 The range of the monitoring-supported devices for the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is U3E0 to 3\G524287 (number of
devices: 512K). *4 Searches for the device that exactly matches the specified device.
Link special relay Rn(EN)CPU: SB0 to SB9A61FFF
RnPCPU: SB0 to SB5A61FFF
RnSFCPU: SB0 to SB5A49FFF
CNC C80: SB0 to SB3FF
Link special register Rn(EN)CPU: SW0 to SW9A61FF
RnPCPU: SW0 to SW5A61FF
RnSFCPU: SW0 to SW5A49FF
CNC C80: SW0 to SW3FF
Step relay RCPU: S0 to S16383
Index register RCPU: Z0 to Z23
Long index register RCPU: LZ0 to LZ11
Special relay RCPU:SM0 to SM4095
Special register RnSFCPU: SD0 to SD4095
CNC C80: SD0 to SD4095
Function input RCPU: FX0 to FXF
Function output RCPU: FY0 to FYF
Function register RCPU: FD0 to FD4
Link direct device RCPU: J\
Module access device RCPU: U\, U3En\
CPU buffer memory
access device
RCPU: U3E0 to 3\G0 to 268435455 *3 *4
CPU buffer memory
access device (fixed-
cycle communication
area)
RCPU: U3E0 to 3\HG0 to 12287 *4
Nesting RCPU: N0 to N14
Pointer RCPU: P0 to P32767 *2
Interrupt pointer RCPU: I0 to l1023 *2
SFC block device RCPU: BL0 to BL319, BL\S
Network No. specification
device
RCPU: J0 to J255
I/O No. specification
device
RCPU: U0 to U1FF, U3E0 to U3E3
Module refresh device RCPU: RD0 to RD1048575
Safety input relay RnSFCPU: SA\X0 to SA\X2FFF
Safety output relay RnSFCPU: SA\Y0 to SA\Y2FFF
Safety link relay RnSFCPU: SA\B0 to SA\B9BFFF
Safety internal relay RnSFCPU: SA\M0 to SA\M638975
Safety timer RnSFCPU: SA\T0 to SA\T35487
Safety counter RnSFCPU: SA\C0 to SA\C35487
Safety retentive timer RnSFCPU: SA\ST0 to SA\ST35487
Safety special relay RnSFCPU: SA\SM0 to SA\SM4095
Safety data register RnSFCPU: SA\D0 to SA\D39935
Safety special register RnSFCPU: SA\SD0 to SA\SD4095
Safety link register RnSFCPU: SA\W0 to SA\W9BFF
Device *1 Device range Program display
Device monitor display
Search operation
Device comment display
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
When FX5CPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)
*1 For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 Device cannot be replaced. *3 Searches for the device that exactly matches the specified device. *4 When SFC is set to "Use" in the SFC program setting of the CPU parameter, it can be used only for SFC control instructions.
For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Program Design)
*5 The following shows the instructions restricted when the step relay (S) is used.
Device *1 Device range Program display Device monitor display
Search operation Device comment display
Input X0 to 1777, DX0 to 1777
Output Y0 to 1777, DY0 to 1777
Internal relay M0 to 32767
Latch relay L0 to 32767
Link relay B0 to 7FFF
Timer T0 to 1023
Retentive timer ST0 to 1023
Counter C0 to 1023
Long counter LC0 to 1023 *3
Data register D0 to 7999
Link register W0 to 7FFF
Annunciator F0 to 32767
File register R0 to 32767
Link special relay SB0 to 7FFF
Link special register SW0 to 7FFF
Step relay *4*5 S0 to 4095
Index register Z0 to 23
Long index register LZ0 to 11 *3
Special relay SM0 to 9999
Special register SD0 to 11999
Module access device U\
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 4095 *2
Interrupt pointer I0 to 177 *2
SFC block device BL0 to BL31
Step relay (block) BL0\S0 to BL31\S511
Instruction Instruction name Restrictions on the display Editing restrictions
Output instruction Out (except for the timer,
counter, and annunciator)
OUT [OUT Sn] is displayed.
"[ ]" indicates the conductive status.
-
Contact instruction Pulse operation start
Pulse series connection
Pulse parallel connection
LDP, LDF, ANDP,
ANDF, ORP, ORF
When the program is editable, the ladder block that
contains instructions displays only the first step
number of the ladder block as an error block.
When a step relay (S) is used for an instruction, the
step relay (S) is not targeted for a device search.
Programs cannot be
edited using the step
relay (S).
Pulse NOT operation start
Pulse NOT series connection
Pulse NOT parallel
connection
LDPI, LDFI, ANDPI,
ANDFI, ORPI, ORFI
Relational operation
instruction
Comparing 16-bit binary data LD, AND, OR
Comparing 32-bit binary data LDD, ANDD, ORD
Structuring
instruction
FOR to NEXT FOR When the program is editable, the ladder block that
contains instructions displays only the first step
number of the ladder block as an error block.
For the programs that cannot be edited, the display
differs depending on the ladder structure.
Master control
instruction
Setting of the master control
instruction
MC When a step relay (S) is used for an instruction, the
step relay (S) is not targeted for a device search.
-
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 121
12
When QCPU or LCPU is connected (: Possible, : Impossible)
*1 The GOT can monitor local devices. For applicable devices and device ranges, refer to manual of the PLC CPU. *2 The extended data register and extended link register are applicable to Universal model QCPU only. *3 Device cannot be replaced.
Device *1 Device range Program display Device monitor display Search operation
Input X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF
Output Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF
Internal relay *1 M0 to 8191 to 61439
Latch relay L0 to 32767
Link relay *2 B0 to 1FFF to EFFF
Timer T0 to 32767
Retentive timer ST0 to 32767
Counter C0 to 32767
Data register D0 to 12287
Link register W0 to 1FFF
Annunciator F0 to 32767
Edge relay V0 to 2047
File register R0 to 32767
ZR0 to 4849663
Extended data register *2 D0 to 4910079
Extended link register *2 W0 to 4AEBFF
Link special relay SB0 to 7FFF
Link special register SW0 to 7FFF
Index register Z0 to 19
Special relay SM0 to 2047
Special register SD0 to 2047
Function input FX0 to F
Function output FY0 to F
Function register FD0 to 4
Link direct device J\
Module access device J\
U3En\
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 8191 *3
Interrupt pointer I0 to 255 *3
SFC block device BL0 to 319
SFC transition device TR0 to 511, BL\TR
Network No. specification device J0 to 255
I/O No. specification device U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3
Macro instruction argument device VD0 to
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Precautions for sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Operation while the sequence program monitor (Ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations with the GOT during sequence program monitor (Ladder) startup.
Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (Ladder) to run improperly.
Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (Ladder), make sure to back up the program with the
backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program.
Page 399 BACKUP/RESTORATION
Precautions for the online program change Precautions for the online program change are the same as the online program change with GX Works2/GX Developer,
except the followings.
For details of precautions on the online program change, refer to the followings.
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
GX Developer Version8 Operating Manual
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
The following items are the difference between GX Works2/GX Developer online program change.
Online program change is not available for programs other than program memories.
Online program change cannot be executed with the pointer at the top.
Do not execute the online program change simultaneously from multiple points.
Online program change is not available by file unit.
No option setting is available for preventing from executing the fall instruction.
Online program change is not available when the reserved area is exceeded by the change.
Execute Write to PLC when the reserved area is exceeded.
The setting whether to transfer or not to the program memory cannot be changed after the writing is completed.
When the online program change to the universal model QCPU is executed, all the program cache memory information is
transferred at once, after the online program change.
If the setting of GOT days and time is February 29th when using the Q00JCPU, Q01CPU or Q00CPU, the online program
change cannot be executed.
Change days and time of the GOT to something other than February 29th and execute the online program change again.
Precautions for creating the program The sequence program monitor (ladder) is not available for the program which uses labels.
When using the sequence program monitor (ladder), create the program in the simple project which does not use labels.
Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor.
Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more
Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works2 or GX Developer, the block may be displayed with 25
lines or more on the GOT.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 123
12
Precautions for sequence program monitor (iQ-R Ladder)
Operation while the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations on the GOT while the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) is running.
Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) to run improperly.
Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), make sure to back up the program with
the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program.
Page 399 BACKUP/RESTORATION
Files and programs that cannot be displayed on the ladder display The ladder display does not support the following files and programs.
File protected with a security key
File protected with a block password
Ladder block that includes structured text or inline structured text
Files that include the output instruction using one of the following labels
Timer, retentive timer, counter, long timer, long retentive timer, long counter
Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor.
Program consisting of multiple program blocks
Program other than the ladder program
Program using a label
Program using an inline ST
Program using an MC/MCR instruction
Program using a statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters
Program using a character string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte characters
Program using a note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters
Program using a peripheral statement or note
Program using a line feed in a statement, note, or character string constant
Program using the special character ($") in a character string constant
Safety program
Program using an FB or FUN
Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more
Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works3, the block may be displayed with 25 lines or more on
the GOT.
Unreadable programs The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) cannot read the sequence program files, if the files use notes for the
instructions that start with "M." or "MP." to access other CPU modules.
Display of programs using FBs or FUNs The ladder monitor screen displays programs that FBs or FUNs, while the programs look differently in GX Works3.
The programs contained in FBs or FUNs do not display.
In the location where an FB or FUN is used, a function block call statement or function call statement appears.
The following shows FBs or FUNs that are displayed as a call instruction.
Subroutine type function block (created by users)
Standard function block
Function block and function included in the application library or MELSOFT Library (Sample library)
Function (created by users)
Standard function
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
Display of programs using labels The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) does not display label names.
Available constants Only the constants available for QCPU are editable with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder).
The constants available for QCPU are as follows.
K: Decimal constant
H: Hexadecimal constant
E: Real number
"": Character string
When GX Works3 displays a ladder program using constants other than the above, the constants are displayed as they are.
If you edit the constants with the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and then GX Works3 reads the program, the
display and settings of the constants are changed to those available for QCPU.
When $" is included in a character string constant When $" is included in a character string constant, $" and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder monitor
screen and the ladder editor screen.
When a line feed character is included When a line feed character is included in a note or statement, the line feed character and subsequent characters are not
displayed on the ladder editor screen.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 125
12
Precautions for sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder)
Operation while the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) is running Do not perform the following operations on the GOT while the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) is running.
Doing so may cause the stored data to be deleted, or the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) to run improperly.
Opening the SD card cover (when an SD card is used)
Installing/removing the data storage (SD card or USB memory)
Backup Before editing a sequence program with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), make sure to back up the program with
the backup/restoration function so that you can restore the original program.
Page 399 BACKUP/RESTORATION
Files and programs that cannot be displayed on the ladder display The ladder display does not support the following files and programs.
File protected with a security key
File protected with a block password
Ladder block that includes structured text or inline structured text
Files that include the output instruction using one of the following labels
Timer, retentive timer, counter, long counter
Programs that cannot be edited The following programs cannot be edited with the ladder editor.
Program consisting of multiple program blocks
Program other than the ladder program
Program using a label
Program using an inline ST
Program using an MC/MCR instruction
Program using a statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters
Program using a character string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte characters
Program using a note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters
Program using a peripheral statement or note
Program using a line feed in a statement, note, or character string constant
Program using the special character ($") in a character string constant
Program using an FB or FUN
Program consisting of ladder blocks with 25 lines or more
Even if a ladder block is displayed with 24 lines or less on GX Works3, the block may be displayed with 25 lines or more on
the GOT.
Display of programs using FBs or FUNs The ladder monitor screen displays programs that FBs or FUNs, while the programs look differently in GX Works3.
The programs contained in FBs or FUNs are not displayed.
In the location where an FB or FUN is used, a function block call statement or function call statement appears.
The following shows FBs or FUNs that are displayed as a call instruction.
Function block (created by users, user library) *1
Standard function block
Module function block *1
Function block and function included in the application library or MELSOFT Library (Sample library) *1
Function (created by users, user library)
Standard function
*1 For a macro type, the function block is displayed by selecting whether to display the program that uses the function block. For details, refer to the following. Page 148 Display in the sequence program monitor
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications
4
Display of programs using labels The sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) does not display label names.
Available constants Only the constants available for QCPU are editable with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder).
The constants available for QCPU are as follows.
K: Decimal constant
H: Hexadecimal constant
E: Real number
"": Character string
When GX Works3 displays a ladder program using constants other than the above, the constants are displayed as they are.
If you edit the constants with the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder) and then GX Works3 reads the program, the
display and settings of the constants are changed to those available for QCPU.
When $" is included in a character string constant When $" is included in a character string constant, $" and subsequent characters are not displayed on the ladder monitor
screen and the ladder editor screen.
When a line feed character is included When a line feed character is included in a note or statement, the line feed character and subsequent characters are not
displayed on the ladder editor screen.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.2 Specifications 127
12
4.3 Display Operation This section explains how to display the operation screen for the sequence program monitor (ladder display) after the GOT is
turned on.
1. Power on the GOT.
2. Display the sequence program monitor (ladder display) screen.
The display methods include the following two types.
Using the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (ladder display)) set in the project
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq.program monitor(Ladder)] from the main menu.
Touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor] from the Main Menu.
To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor (iQ-R Ladder)] from the main
menu.
To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), touch [Monitor] [Seq. program monitor (iQ-F Ladder)] from the utility
main menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel No., network No., station number, and CPU number in the communication setting dialog.
Page 146 Communication setting window
4. Read data from the PLC and display the program list window.
Page 147 Program list window
Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because sequence programs and comment files are
stored in a data storage with the sequence program monitor (ladder display).
5. Select a program to be displayed from the program list and display the ladder monitor screen.
Page 149 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
6. Display the ladder editor screen from the edit menu of the ladder monitor screen.
Page 155 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
For how to start the sequence program monitor (ladder display) using the one-touch ladder jump function, refer to the
following.
Page 129 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For the changing screens for the security setting, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting the security
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function By using a special function switch, alarm display (user), or others, you can start the sequence program monitor (ladder
display) to automatically read sequence program files or search for a device.
The following shows objects which can use the One-touch Ladder Jump function.
Before executing the automatic PLC read Setting the automatic PLC read
When reading a sequence program file or a comment file from controllers, the automatic PLC read have to be set on GT
Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility.
For the setting of automatic PLC read, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Specifying an automatic PLC read file
With the special function switch or alarm display (user), the target sequence program of automatic PLC read can be specified.
However, the operation differs depending on the automatic PLC read setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000) or in the utility.
Object
Special function switch, alarm display (user), simple alarm display
Automatic PLC read setting of GT Designer3/utility
File name specification in objects
Operation
Done Done The specified sequence program file is read automatically.
None All sequence program files are read automatically.
None Done No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file of the specified file name among the
sequence program files read in the GOT exists, it is executed.
None No sequence program file is read.
To search automatically, if a sequence program file read in the GOT exists, it is executed to all
files.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 129
13
Starting from the special function switch To start the sequence program monitor (Ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings: [Sequence
Program Monitor (Ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected.
To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings:
[Sequence Program Monitor (iQ-R ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected.
To start the sequence program monitor (iQ-F ladder), touch a special function switch that has the following settings:
[Sequence Program Monitor (iQ-F ladder)] is selected for [Switch Action], and [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is selected.
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
(: Set, : Not set)
*1 When [Specify Search Device] is selected, set [Ladder Search Device] and [Ladder Search Mode]. The setting of PLC station number is included in the [Ladder Search Device] setting.
*2 When [Specify Connected Station] is selected, set [CH No.] and [Network]. If [Other] in [Network] is selected, also set [Net No.], [Station No.] and [CPU Machine].
Operations for searching a device with specifying the file name
Operations for searching a device without specifying the file name
Operations for searching a connected station with specifying the file name
Operations for setting a connected station without specifying the file name
Operations for the special function switch when not using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
When the [Use One-touch Ladder Jump] is not selected, the operation for touching the special function switch
is the same as when starting from the utility.
Page 128 Display Operation
Setting Operation for touching the special function switchSearch Method Specify Search File
Specify Search Device *1 Operations for searching a device with
specifying the file name
Operations for searching a device without
specifying the file name
Specify Connected Station *2 Operations for searching a connected station
with specifying the file name
Operations for setting a connected station
without specifying the file name
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence program
file)
Automatic search for Ladder
Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program files)
Automatic search for Ladder
Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence program
file)
Ladder monitor screen
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
PLC read screen
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
Starting from the alarm display (user) The sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be started to search for a device having an alarm by the following
method.
Select an alarm in an alarm display (user) and touch a key code switch ([Display Ladder (Ladder Editor)]).
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the user alarm observation.
For the setting items for user alarm observation, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
(: Set, : Not set)
*1 The setting of PLC station number is included in the target device.
Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode and file name
Operations for setting the Ladder Search Mode
Starting from the simple alarm display By selecting an alarm in the simple alarm display and touching the key code switch (setting the key code of the [Display ladder
(Ladder Editor)]), the sequence program monitor (ladder) can be started and the device of alarm can be coil-searched.
For the simple alarm display, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Ladder search setting *1 Operation for touching the key code switchLadder Search Mode Specify Search File
Operations for setting the Ladder Search
Mode and file name
Operations for setting the Ladder Search
Mode
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(The set sequence program
file)
Automatic search for Ladder
Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program files)
Automatic search for Ladder
Search Device
(Coil/Factor)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
Starting the sequence program
monitor (ladder display)
Automatic PLC read
(All sequence program files)
Automatic search for Ladder
Search Device
(Coil)
Ladder monitor screen
(The search result is
displayed.)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 131
13
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
*1 Only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Start
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
Password input window
PLC read screen
Communication setting window
Ladder registration monitor window
Device test window
Factor search window
Program list window
Ladder monitor screen
Ladder editor screen
Jump window Device search window
Comment file list window*1
Replace device window *1
Change open/close cantact window
Verify result window *1
Remote operation window *1
Copy program memory data into ROM window
Enter ladder program window
*1
*1
Display format window
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
Changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
For changing screens when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function, refer to the following.
Page 129 Start operation when using the One-touch Ladder Jump function
Changing screens when setting the security
For changing screens when setting the security, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting the security
Setting ladder data storage location The ladder data (sequence programs and device comments) used for the sequence program monitor (ladder display) can be
stored in a selected drive.
Only the A drive (standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available for storing ladder data.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 133
13
Reading comment files from data storage
Sequence program monitor (Ladder) The sequence program monitor (Ladder) uses the comment files that are stored in the data storage in the GOT.
Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.
1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage.
When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.
2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the monitored controller
with a hierarchy as shown below.
Assign numbers to "*" marks.
(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder name is ST255.)
3. In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing comment files by character code.
Item Folder name
CH No. CH**
Network No. NET***
Station No. ST***
CPU No. CPU**
Item Folder name
Folder for SJIS code SJIS
Folder for GB code GB
Folder for Big5 code Big5
Folder for KS code KS
Folder for ASCII code ASCII
Channel No.
Network No.
Station No.
CPU No.
CPU No.
For storing comments with KS code
For storing comments with ASCII code
For storing comments with GB code
For storing comments with SJIS code
For storing comments with Big5 code
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
4. Copy a comment file (.wcd) in the saved project.
When the GX Works2 project is used, the creation method of a comment file (.wcd) differs depending on whether the project
used can be or cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
Project that can be saved in the GX Developer format
A comment file (.wcd) is created when the project is saved in the GX Developer format.
Project that cannot be saved in the GX Developer format
Export the project by using [Write IC Memory Card] of GX Works2, and change the extension of the comment file from [.qcd]
to [.wcd].
5. Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the data storage.
Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.
6. Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.
Restrictions on using comment files
If the comments of a comment file stored in the data storage are displayed, the comments that are assigned to
the bits of word devices cannot be displayed.
Displaying comments in a language different from the language of the utility
Store the comment file corresponding to the language to display comments in the data storage.
Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 135
13
Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder) The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder) use the comment files that are stored in the data storage in
the GOT.
The following shows the characters and the number of characters usable for the name of a comment file.
One-byte alphanumeric characters
Symbols
When the comment files are used for all the controllers: 60 one-byte characters or less
When the comment files are used for a specified controller: 38 one-byte characters or less
Procedure for using comment files stored in data storage The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a data storage.
1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a data storage.
When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.
2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU number of the monitored controller
with a hierarchy as shown below.
Assign numbers to "*" marks.
(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder name is ST255.)
3. When the comment files are used for a specified controller, store the comment files (.DCM) and SourceInfo.CAB in the
CPU number folder corresponding to the monitored controller.
When the comment files are used for all the controllers, store the comment files (.DCM) and SourceInfo.CAB directly under
the [SEQCMNT] folder.
4. Install the data storage with the comment file on the GOT.
Displaying comments in a language different from the language of the utility
Store the comment file corresponding to the language to display comments in the data storage.
Switch comment files on the Ladder monitor screen for displaying the comments in appropriate language.
Item Folder name
CH No. CH**
Network No. NET***
Station No. ST***
CPU No. CPU**
Channel No.
Network No.
Station No.
CPU No.
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
Program update check The GOT checks if there is any difference between sequence program files read in the GOT and sequence programs stored
in controllers, while the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
Only the sequence program monitor (Ladder) supports the program update check.
Specification of the program update check
Check criterion The updated dates and times of sequence program files are compared.
Check timing The program update is checked when the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen are displayed.
After that, it is checked in a five minutes cycle while the Ladder monitor screen is displayed and in a two minutes cycle while
the Ladder Editor screen is displayed.
Operations for the program update check
No
Display the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen.
Are the updated dates and times of a target
to be compared the same as those of a sequence program file, acquired
from controllers?
If the updated dates and times of sequence programs are different, the following dialog box is displayed.
Yes
Touch the [OK] button.
The updated dates and times of sequence program files read in the GOT are set as targets to be compared.
The updated dates and times acquired from controllers are set as targets to be compared.
While the Ladder monitor screen is displayed : Wait for five minutes While the Ladder editor screen is displayed : Wait for two minutes
Touch the [Cancel] button.
The updated dates and times of sequence program files in controllers are acquired.
The PLC Read Screen is displayed with sequence program files different in their dates and times selected in the File list (target controller).
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 137
13
Setting the security The device test window and Ladder editor screen displays can be limited by passwords.
Specification of the security setting
Security types
The restriction types above can be used together.
Setting method for security To configure the security settings, select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [Security] from the menu of GT
Designer3 to display the [Environmental Setting] window, and select the [Functional Operation Security] tab.
The following shows the setting method for each security type.
For the setting of the [Environmental Setting] dialog, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Changing screens when setting the security
Type Description
Restriction by bit devices The changing screens is restricted by the Authorization Device.
The changing screens is authorized when the Authorization Device is ON.
Restriction by a password The changing screens is restricted by a Password.
When changing screens, the security password input dialog box is displayed.
Type Setting method
Restriction by bit devices Select the [Authorization Device] check box of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display]
and set bit devices.
Restriction by a password Set [Password] of [Device Test Operation] or [Ladder Editor Screen Display].
Perform the operation to switch to the device test window or Ladder editor screen.
Yes
Is the Authorization Device set?
Is the Authorization Device ON?
Is the password set?
Yes
The security password input dialog box is displayed. Input a password.
Is the password correct?
Yes
The device test window or Ladder editor screen is displayed.
An error message is displayed.
Touch the key.
No
No
An error message is displayed.
No
No
Yes
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
perations for the security password input dialog box
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Device test password/Ladder editor password)
2) Password input area Set the password.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the security password input window.
Key Function
[X] Closes the security password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Verifies the password set in the password input area.
1) 2)
3)
3)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 139
14
User authentication function The user authentication function restricts the operation of the PLC CPU by an unauthenticated user.
Only the safety CPU (RnSFCPU) is supported.
Specifications of the user authentication function
Operations that requires the user authentication When the following operations are performed, the user authentication is required.
User authentication method For the user authentication, enter or specify the following items.
User name
Password
Access level
Operations
Connecting GX Works3 to the PLC CPU with the following methods:
Connecting to the PLC CPU on the specify connection destination dialog
Connecting to the PLC CPU with the one-touch ladder jump function
Restarting the sequence program monitor (Ladder) or the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)
Selecting a file in the file list of the PLC CPU
Reading a file from the PLC CPU
Writing a file to the PLC CPU
Touch [Recommend]
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation
4
Screen transition when the authentication function is used
Operations on the user authentication (PLC) window
No. Item Description
1) [User name] Enter a user name to be authenticated.
2) [Password] Enter a password.
3) [Access level] Select an access level.
4) Message display area Displays messages.
5) [Cancel] key Cancel the user authentication.
6) [OK] key Execute the user authentication on the entered contents.
Touch the [OK] key.
Enter or specify the user name, password, and access level.
User authentication
The authentication succeeds.
The GOT determines the necessity of user authentication.
The user authentication dialog is displayed.
The operation is performed.
Necessary
Touch the [] key.
The screen before the operation or the connection destination setting screen is displayed.
The operation that requires the user authentication is to be performed.
The authentication fails.
Not necessary
1)
2)
3)
4) 6)
5)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.3 Display Operation 141
14
4.4 Setting Display Format On the sequence program monitor (ladder display) screen, you can change the display format of word device values, switch
the display language, change the display mode of sequence programs, and so on.
Switching languages of sequence programs (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) You can switch the display language (Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, or Korean) of the sequence
program monitor (ladder display) at monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
Page 134 Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Page 136 Sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder)
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each character
code.
Switching comment display mode For the sequence program monitor (ladder display), whether to display comments, statements, and notes is selectable on the
ladder monitor screen or ladder editor screen.
Page 153 Display menu
Page 166 Display menu
The display color of the device comment differs depending on the contact position.
The following shows the display colors.
Language Comment file
Japanese Comment files with SJIS code
Simplified Chinese Comment files with GB code
Traditional Chinese Comment files with Big5 code
Korean Comment files with KS code
Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code
Contact position Display color of the device comment
Odd number line Light blue
Even number line Purple
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.4 Setting Display Format
4
4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads sequence programs and comment files used for the sequence program monitor
(ladder display).
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
Displayed contents This section explains the structure of the PLC read screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen after the
sequence program monitor (ladder display) is started.
No. Item Description
1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2) Target controller Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
3) Keys Keys for operations on the PLC read screen.
4) Target drive list (target controller) Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive
name.
5) File list (target controller) Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in
the target drive list (target controller).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For program files, only sequence program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
Page 144 Password input window
6) Target drive list (GOT) Displays the drive set for [Data save location] in the sequence program monitor settings. (Only the A drive
(standard SD card) or B drive (USB drive) is available.)
For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list (GOT), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive name.
7) File list (GOT) Displays the program types, file names, titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in
the target drive list (GOT).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
When the connection destination is an RCPU, the program files and comment files read from the RCPU are
displayed only. Other files in the same drive are not displayed.
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list (target
controller) is canceled.
8) Total file size Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9) Number of selected files Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
10) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
1) 5) 2)
3)
3)
3)7)10)
8)
6)
4)
3)
9)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 143
14
Password input window
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input. (Program password, comment password, parameter
password, safety parameter password or FB/FUN password)
2) Password input area Set the password.
3) File name Displays the file name.
4) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b)
No. Description
[X] Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[Sign] Switches the key type to the symbol.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Verifies the password set in the password input area.
When the password verification for the first file is successful, the password verification for the other files is automatically
executed with the same password.
1) 2)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
3)
3)
4)
1) 2)
3)
3)
4)
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
Key Function
[Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
[Select CPU] Displays the communication setting window.
Page 146 Communication setting window
[X] Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder) startup
screen.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Recommend] This key can be used when program files are displayed in the target drive list (connection destination).
Touching the key selects all the sequence program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected
sequence program files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key selects a
file as shown below.
For sequence program files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target controller).
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT).
For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT).
If you have stored files directly in the SEQCMNT folder in the data storage, all the files are selected.
[Proceed] Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the data storage displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
When the connection destination is an RCPU, data is read from the data storage.
The file written into the data storage on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
After writing, among files other than comment files in the data storage, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT) are
deleted. Then, the program list window appears.
If you have stored files directly in the SEQCMNT folder in the data storage, the files are not deleted.
Page 147 Program list window
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 145
14
Communication setting window
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.
3) Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4) CPU No. input area Set the CPU No.
5) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.
6) Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
[X] Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed,
the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
1) 3) 4) 2) 1) 3) 4) 2)
5) 5)
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4
Program list window Displaying the read sequence programs in a list is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
*1 The execution status is not displayed when the CNC C80 is connected.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Sequence program file list Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read sequence programs.
The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs. *1
A touched sequence program file is highlighted.
The execution status is not displayed when the FX5CPU is connected.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
[X] Closes the Program List window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
[Display] Displays the sequence program file selected in the sequence program file list on the Ladder monitor screen.
Page 149 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
2)1)
3)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 147
14
Display in the sequence program monitor In the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) (iQ-F ladder), whether the programs can be displayed depends on the status
of the read source sequence program file.
*1 Touch [Proceed] in the [PLC Read] screen to display the following dialog.
*2 If a program is read from CNC C80, it cannot be displayed even if [Yes] is selected.
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the program will not be displayed because the block password
setting cannot be checked and thus whether the program file can be displayed is not determined correctly.
No security key has been set for the function block file in the read source drive.
No block passwords has been set for the function block in the read source drive.
Multiple function blocks have been defined in the function block file.
A function block is used in the function block file.
Status of the read source sequence program file Display in the sequence program monitorUse of function block or
function (except the standard function)
Use of security keys for the function block files and function files
Use of macro type function block files
Use of block passwords for the macro type function block files
Used Used Used/unused Used/unused Cannot be displayed
Used Unused Used Used Cannot be displayed
Used Unused Used Unused Whether the program can be
displayed depends on the
selection in the dialog shown
below.*1
[Yes]: Can be displayed*2
[No]: Cannot be displayed
Used Unused Unused - Can be displayed
Unused - - - Can be displayed
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4
4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen On the Ladder monitor screen, the GOT displays the read sequence program.
The following describes how to operate the Ladder monitor screen.
Displayed contents The following describes the configuration of the Ladder monitor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
No. Item Description
1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2) Target controller Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed sequence program.
4) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
5) Keys Keys for operations on the Ladder monitor screen.
6) Ladder display area *1 Displays the read sequence program.
By touching a device, it is selected and surrounded with a green frame.
The following shows the conductive status
When contacts, coils, and outputs are the selection status, touching the area displays the device search
window.
Page 173 Device/Contact/Coil search
Displaying the first step number
When the Ladder registration monitor window is opened, the first step number of registerable ladder
blocks is highlighted. Touching the area registers the specified ladder block in the window. (For the Factor
mode, it is not registered even if it is touched.)
Page 154 Ladder registration monitor window
7) Current device value display area Displays the current value of the displayed word device.
Touch this area to change the display format.
Page 150 Display format window
8) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
5)
7) 5)
8)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 5)6)
Non-conductive status
Contact
Coil
Instruction*2
Conductive status
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 149
15
*1 The following shows the numbers of rows and contacts that are displayable in the ladder display area.
*2 The conductive status of the following instructions is displayed only on the screen. SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, FF, DELTA, DELTAP, MC
Display format window
GOT When comments are displayed When comments are not displayed
Maximum number of displayed lines
Maximum number of displayed contacts
Maximum number of displayed lines
Maximum number of displayed contacts
GT27-X 6 11 13 11
GT27-S, GT25-S 4 11 9 11
GT27-V, GT25-V, GT25HS-V 3 11 7 11
Item Function
[Data size] Select the data type of a device.
[16bit(W)]
[32bit(D)]
[64bit(L)]
Fixed to [16bit(W)] for the timer, counter, retentive timer, safety timer, safety counter, and safety retentive timer.
Fixed to [32bit(D)] for the long timer, long counter, long retentive timer, and long index register.
[Data type] Select a display format of the device.
[Signed decimal(K)]
[Hexadecimal(HEX)]
[Floating(EXP)]
[Fixed(FIX)]
The selectable display formats depend on the data type.
[16bit(W)]: [Signed decimal(K)], [Hexadecimal(HEX)]
[32bit(D)]: [Signed decimal(K)], [Hexadecimal(HEX)], [Floating(EXP)], [Fixed(FIX)]
[64bit(L)]: [Floating(EXP)], [Fixed(FIX)]
[Cancel] Closes the display format window without reflecting the settings.
[OK] Closes the display format window after reflecting the settings.
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
4
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the Ladder monitor screen.
Key Function
[Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder monitor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
[Device test] Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
Page 179 Test Operation
[Edit] Displays the Edit menu. Touching [Start editing] displays the Ladder editor screen.
Page 155 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
[Find] Displays the Find menu.
Page 152 Find menu
[Display] Displays the Display menu.
Page 153 Display menu
[Monitoring mode] Displays the Monitoring Mode menu.
Page 154 Monitoring Mode menu
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.
If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/hidden.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 151
15
Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder monitor screen.
Edit menu
Find menu
Key Function Reference section
[Start editing] Switches to the Ladder editor screen. Page 155 How to
Operate Ladder Editor
Screen
Key Function Reference section
[Jump] Displays the jump window. Page 165 Jump window
[Find device] Displays the device search window. Page 173 Device/
Contact/Coil search
[Find contact] Displays the device search window Page 173 Device/
Contact/Coil search
[Find coil] Displays the device search window Page 173 Device/
Contact/Coil search
[Factor search] Displays the Factor window. Page 175 Factor search
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
4
Display menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
Key Function Reference section
[Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area. Page 142 Switching
comment display mode[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change] Displays the comment file list window. Page 167 Comment file
list window
[Change comment column] *1 Displays the change comment column window. Page 168 Change
comment column window
[Device Monitor] Displays the window for the device monitor. Page 55 DEVICE
MONITOR
[Ladder registration monitor] Displays the Ladder registration monitor window. Page 154 Ladder
registration monitor window
[Delete all registered ladder] Deletes all registered ladder blocks in the Ladder registration monitor window. Page 154 Ladder
registration monitor window
[Program list] Displays the program list window Page 147 Program list
window
[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 171 PLC
diagnosis window
[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 143 How to
Operate PLC Read Screen
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen 153
15
Ladder registration monitor window Displaying or deleting the registered ladder blocks is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
Monitoring Mode menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).
Monitoring local devices When the GOT monitors local devices, the scan time increases.
When local devices are displayed on the screen, touching the [local device monitor] key cancels the display of local
devices.
When the Ladder monitor screen is switched to other screen, or the displayed program is switched to other program, the
GOT cancels the display of local devices.
No. Item Description
1) Ladder display area A ladder block selected on the Ladder monitor screen is added as the last registered ladder block on the
Ladder registration monitor window.
Touching the first step number displays the dialog box to delete the ladder block. (For the Factor mode, it
is not deleted even if it is touched.)
2) Keys Keys for operations in the Ladder registration monitor window shown in (b).
Item Description
[X] Closes the Ladder registration monitor window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one column.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
Key Function Reference section
Local device monitor *1 Displays local devices monitored by the GOT. Page 154 Monitoring
local devices
2)1)
2)
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.6 How to Operate Ladder Monitor Screen
4
4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen On the Ladder editor screen, editing sequence programs, finding devices, and displaying comments are available.
The following describes how to operate the Ladder editor screen.
Displayed contents
Ladder editor screen The following describes the configuration of the Ladder editor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
No. Item Description
1) PLC name Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2) Target controller Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3) Drive name Displays the drive of the controller for the displayed sequence program.
4) Program name Displays the file name of the displayed program.
5) Number of steps Displays the number of steps for the displayed sequence program.
6) Keys Keys for operations on the Ladder editor screen.
7) Ladder display area Displays the read sequence program as follows.
By touching a contact, coil, statement, or note, the item is highlighted and the Ladder input window is
displayed.
Page 156 Enter ladder program window
Touch [Show comments] from the [Display] menu to display the comments, statements or notes.
Touch [Hide comments] from the [Display] menu to hide the comments, statements or notes.
Displays the first step number of ladder blocks.
Touching the first step number of ladder blocks highlights the touched position, and displays the Enter ladder
program window.
Page 156 Enter ladder program window
Displays the device comment in the comment display mode.
The display methods of the device comment are as follows.
VGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 8-column
SVGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 8-column
XGA: One-byte characters in 4-row and 12-column
8) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
6)
7) 6)
8)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 155
15
Displaying the Ladder editor screen when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the Ladder editor screen can be limited.
For the security setting, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting the security
Enter ladder program window Editing sequence programs is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Types of statements and notes that can be entered
Statements and notes that can be entered are integrated statements and notes.
Peripheral statements and notes cannot be entered.
(If the * is entered at the start of statements and notes, an error occurs.)
No. Item Description
1) Ladder symbol display area Displays the ladder symbol selected in the ladder display area.
2) Text display area Displays devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes selected in the Ladder symbol display area.
The cursor is displayed at the position to be input.
The cursor can be moved with the touch operation.
If devices, sequence programs, statements, and notes are not fully displayed in the display area, move the
cursor to the border of the side where the display was cut, and touch the cursor to scroll the displayed
contents.
Only one-byte alphanumeric characters can be input for statements and notes.
If characters other than one-byte alphanumeric characters input on GX Works2/GX Developer are deleted
on the GOT, they cannot be input again.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the Enter ladder program window shown in (b).
1)
1)
3)
3)
3)
(Reduced size)
2)
2)
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Key functions
Key Function
[X] Closes the Enter ladder program window. The displayed contents are not reflected.
Touch the key to input a normally open contact.
Touch the key to input a normally closed contact.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a leading edge pulse rejection.
Touch the key to input a trailing edge rejection.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse.
Touch the key to input a coil.
Touch the key to input an application instruction.
Touch the key to input a vertical line.
Touch the key to delete a vertical line.
Touch the key to input a horizontal line.
Touch the key to delete a ladder.
[Insert row] Inserts one row in the specified position.
[Delete row] Deletes the specified row.
[Insert column] Inserts one column in the specified position.
[Delete column] Deletes the specified column.
[ENT] Reflects the displayed contents, and closes the Enter ladder program window.
Reduces the size of the Enter ladder program window.
Changes the Enter ladder program window from the reduced size to the default size.
[Cap] Switches the alphabetic characters between the uppercase and the lowercase.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 157
15
Inputting or deleting ladders
Inputting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Inputting a contact (X0))
1. Touch a position to input a contact (X0).
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch the key.
The ladder symbol corresponding to the touched key is displayed on the ladder symbol display area.
Input X0 in the text display area, and touch the [ENT] key.
4. The contact (X0) is input.
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Deleting contacts or instructions
(Operation example: Deleting a contact (X0))
1. Touch a contact (X0) to be deleted.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch the [X] key.
Touch the end position of the contact (X0).
4. The contact (X0) is deleted.
Touch an end position.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 159
16
Inputting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Inputting a vertical line)
1. Touch a position to input a vertical line.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch the key.
Touch the end position to input the vertical line.
4. The vertical line is input.
Touch an end position.
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Deleting vertical lines or horizontal lines
(Operation example: Deleting a vertical line)
1. Touch a position to delete a vertical line.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch key.
Touch the end position to delete the vertical line.
4. The vertical line is deleted.
Touch an end position.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 161
16
Inputting rows and columns
(Operation example: Inputting a row)
1. Touch a position to insert a row.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch the [Insert row] key.
The Enter ladder program window is closed, and the row is inserted.
Deleting rows and columns
(Operation example: Deleting a row)
1. Touch a position to delete a row.
2. The Enter ladder program window appears.
3. Touch the [Delete row] key.
The Enter ladder program window is closed, and the row is deleted.
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Key functions The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the Ladder editor screen.
Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the Ladder editor screen.
Edit menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).
Key Function
[Back] Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the Ladder editor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
[Edit] Displays the Edit menu.
Page 163 Edit menu
[Find/Replace] Displays the Find/Replace menu.
When the Find/Replace menu is displayed, touching the key closes the menu.
Page 165 Find/Replace menu (only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder))
[Convert] Displays the Convert menu.
Page 166 Convert menu
[Display] Displays the Display menu.
Page 166 Display menu
[Online] Displays the Online menu.
Page 169 Online menu
[X] Exits the sequence program monitor (ladder display) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (ladder
display) startup screen.
The comment and note of the touched line can be displayed/hidden.
If the touched line is the first line in the ladder block, the statement of the touched ladder block can be displayed/hidden.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Key Function Reference section
[Undo] *1 Undoes the last edit operation.
The GOT can be returned to the state right after the last but one conversion, write during
RUN, Replace Device or Change open/close contact.
-
[Redo] *1 Redoes the operation which was undone using the [Undo] key. -
[Restore program to the state after
conversion]
Restores the edited ladder to the state just after conversion. -
[Check program] *1 Executes the program check to check if programs have consistency or double coils do not
exist.
-
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 163
16
Deleting ladders which are not converted
When deleting ladders which are not converted, a dialog box is displayed.
When touching the [OK] button in the dialog box, the ladders which are not converted are deleted, as well as
the operation history. Therefore, the [Undo] and [Redo] keys do not operate.
Also, touch the [Cancel] button to return to the previous screen.
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Find/Replace menu (only for the sequence program monitor (Ladder))
Jump window
Displayed contents
Key functions
Key Function Reference section
[Jump] Displays the jump window. Page 165 Jump window
[Find device] Displays the device search window. Page 173 Device/Contact/Coil search
[Find contact] Displays the device search window. Page 173 Device/Contact/Coil search
[Find coil] Displays the device search window. Page 173 Device/Contact/Coil search
[Replace device] Displays the replace device window. Page 177 Replace device (Supported by the
sequence program monitor (ladder) only)
[Change open/close contact] Displays the change open/close contact window. Page 178 Change open/close cantact (Supported
by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only)
No. Item Description
1) Jump destination step number input
area
Displays the input step number.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the jump window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
[X] Closes the jump window.
[Enter] Displays a row that includes the input step number on the center of the ladder display area.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
2)
2)
1)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 165
16
Convert menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).
Precautions for the online change
For the precautions for the online change, refer to the following.
Page 123 Precautions
Instruction Manual of the controller to use
Display menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder). *2 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
Key Function Reference section
[Convert] Convert the editing program to the execution program. -
[Convert (Online change)] *1 Convert the editing program to the execution program and execute the online change to
controllers.
-
Key Function Reference section
[Hide comments] Hides the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area. Page 123 Precautions
[Show comments] Displays the comments, statements or notes in the ladder display area.
[Comment change] Displays the comment file list window. Page 167 Comment file list window
[Switch comment column] *2 Displays the change comment column window. Page 168 Change comment column
window
[Program list] Displays the program list window Page 147 Program list window
[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 171 PLC diagnosis window
[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 143 How to Operate PLC Read
Screen
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Comment file list window The GOT displays the comment file list.
For the sequence program monitor (Ladder)
For the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder)
No. Item Description
1) Comment file list Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment files, and
common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed.
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2) [X] Closes the Comment file list window.
3) Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
4) [Apply changes] Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the file
selected from the comment file list.
No. Item Description
1) Comment file list Among comment files stored in the data storage, the file names and titles of the comment files, and
common comment files used for the displayed sequence program are displayed.
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2) Message display area Displays messages.
3) [Cancel] Closes the Comment file list window.
4) Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
5) [Changes] Closes the Comment file list window and displays the ladder display area with the comments of the file
selected from the comment file list.
2)
1)
4)
3)
3)
1)
5)
4)
4)
2)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 167
16
Change comment column window The GOT displays the comment column list of the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).
Comment title
When the comment titles displayed on the comment column list cannot be acquired, the numbers of the
comment columns are displayed.
No. Item Description
1) Comment column list Displays the comment titles of the multiple comments display setting of GX Works3.
To change the comment columns, select the comment column to use.
Only one comment column can be selected.
2) Message display area Displays messages.
3) [Cancel] Closes the change comment column window.
4) [OK] Closes the change comment column window, and displays the ladder display area with the comment
column selected on the comment column list.
3)
1)
4)2)
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
Online menu
*1 Not supported by the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) and (iQ-F ladder).
Key Function Reference section
[PLC read] Displays the PLC read screen. Page 143 How to
Operate PLC Read Screen
[Write to PLC] Checks the edited sequence program, and writes the program into the PLC CPU.
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status, and write the program into the PLC CPU.
To execute the online change, execute it using the [Convert (Online change)] in the
[Convert] menu.
Page 166 Convert menu
-
[Verify with PLC] *1 Verifies the sequence program displayed on the ladder display area and the program in
the PLC CPU.
If the programs do not match, the Verify result window is displayed.
Page 170 Verify result
window
[PLC diagnosis] *1 Displays the PLC diagnosis screen. Page 171 PLC
diagnosis window
[Remote operation] *1 Displays the Remote operation window. Page 172 Remote
operation window
[Write the program memory to ROM] *1 Displays the Copy program memory data into ROM window. Page 172 Copy
program memory data into
ROM window
[Start monitor] Displays the Ladder monitor screen. Page 149 How to
Operate Ladder Monitor
Screen
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 169
17
Verify result window Displaying the result of the program verification with the PLC is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Verification result display area Displays the unmatched items.
Up to 100 items are displayed. The program verification is stopped when unmatched items are more than
100.
2) Program name display area Displays the file name of the verified program.
3) Unmatched item count display area Displays the number of unmatched items displayed on the Verify result window.
4) Keys Keys for operations in the Verify result window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
[X] Closes the Verify result window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
2)
4)1)
3)
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
PLC diagnosis window Displays the PLC diagnosis screen.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Error No. Displays the error number of the destination PLC found by PLC diagnosis.
Displays [No errors exist.] when no error occurs.
2) Error contents Displays the message corresponding to the error number of the destination PLC.
3) Occurrence date and time Displays the error occurrence date and time when an error occurs in the destination PLC.
4) Program name Displays the program name when the error in the destination PLC is a program error.
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
5) Step No. Displays the sequence step number highlighted in yellow when the error in the destination PLC is a
program error.
By touching the sequence step number where an error occurs, the PLC diagnosis dialog box will be closed
and the screen will be switched to the ladder display.
The screen jumps to sequence step number where the error occurs and the area of error is highlighted in
a red rectangle.
If the error is not a program error, [----] is displayed.
Key Function
[X] Closes the PLC diagnosis window.
2)
4)
1)
3)
5)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen 171
17
Remote operation window Changing the operation status of the PLC CPU by using the remote operation is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Copy program memory data into ROM window Writing data in the program memory into a ROM is available.
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
No. Item Description
1) Operation Select an operation (RUN or STOP key), and touch the [Execute] key.
RUN: The PLC CPU becomes the remote RUN status.
STOP: The PLC CPU becomes the remote STOP status.
2) STOP RUN operation Set the status of devices and signals when executing the remote RUN.
Device memory
Do not clear: The PLC CPU operates device values prior to the remote STOP.
Clear all except latch: Clears all device values to zero except the latched devices.
Clear all: Clears all device values to zero.
Signal flow
Save: Keeps signals prior to the remote STOP, and outputs the signals.
Turn OFF: Turns off the signal.
Turn ON: Turns on the signal.
3) [Execute] Executes the remote RUN or STOP.
No. Item Description
1) Target Touch the target ROM.
Standard ROM: Set the standard ROM in the PLC CPU as the target.
IC card (ROM): Set the IC memory card (Flash card) inserted in the PLC CPU as the target.
2) [Execute] Touching the key writes data in the program memory into the target ROM.
3)
1)
2)
2)
1)
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.7 How to Operate Ladder Editor Screen
4
4.8 Find/Replace Operation
Device/Contact/Coil search Ladder blocks including the set devices are searched.
They can be searched continuously in multiple sequence program files.
1. Execute any of the following operations to display the device search window.
Touch the [Find] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder monitor screen.
Touch the [Find/Replace] [Find device]/[Find contact]/[Find coil] menu on the Ladder editor screen.
2. Set a device to be searched and touch the / /[Enter] key
Displayed screen
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Device input area Set a device to be searched.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the ladder monitor screen, ladder editor screen, Ladder
registration monitor window.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the device search window shown in (b).
Key Function
[X] Closes the device search window.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.
Searches the input device in descending order of the step number.
Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the selected device.
[Enter] Searches the input device in ascending order of the step number.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen or Ladder editor screen, the search starts from the selected device.
However, the search starts always from the start of the program in the following conditions.
When searching for the first time after the device search window is displayed.
When starting to search consecutively after searching
1)
2)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
1)
2)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 173
17
3. The ladder block which has the searched device is displayed and the device is surrounded with a green frame.
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation
4
Factor search The contact point that affected the set device status (ON/OFF) is searched backwards in ladder blocks.
1. Touch the [Find] [Factor] menu from the Ladder monitor screen to display the factor search window.
2. Set a device to be searched, and touch the [Enter] key
Displayed screen
Key functions
The following shows the target instructions and coils for Factor search.
No. Item Description
1) Device input area Set a device to be searched.
Bit device words cannot be specified.
Also, by selecting a device on the Ladder monitor screen, the device can be input.
2) Keys Keys for operations in Factor search window.
Key Function
[X] Closes the Factor search window.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet.
[Enter] By touching the key, the Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed. The
search starts from the last step.
If the device is selected on the Ladder monitor screen, the search starts from the selected device.
When the search is executed, ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window are deleted.
Instruction, coil Target of the search operation
Instruction LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
Coil OUT, OUTH
1)
2)
1)
2)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 175
17
3. The Factor search window is closed and the Ladder registration monitor window is displayed.
The sequence programs displayed on the ladder monitor screen are searched. Then, the factor ladder blocks for the set
device are registered in order.
The ladder blocks newly registered are always displayed in the Ladder monitor window during the factor search.
The factor devices are highlighted.
For the Ladder registration monitor window, refer to the following.
Page 154 Ladder registration monitor window
4. The message [Factor search is completed.] is displayed in the message area when the search is completed.
When closing the Ladder registration monitor window, the factor search mode is released.
Cancellation of the factor search
When there are multiple factor contacts
The message [Factor search was aborted because there were multiple factor contact points.] is displayed in
the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When continuing the factor search based on the interrupted result, execute the factor search based on one of
the found contacts.
When the ladder blocks registered in the Ladder registration monitor window exceed 100
The message [Factor search was aborted because the number of ladder blocks exceeded 100.] is displayed
in the message area on the ladder monitor screen.
When restarting the factor search, proceed the factor search based on the contact of the 100th ladder block.
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation
4
Replace device (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) The device replacement is available only in the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Replace device] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Replace device window.
2. Set the current device and new device, and touch the [Enter] key.
Displayed screen
Key functions
3. All the old devices in the sequence programs displayed on the Ladder editor screen are replaced with new devices.
No. Item Description
1) Current device display area Set a current device.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
2) New device display area Set a new device.
The device can be input also by selecting a device on the Ladder editor screen.
3) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Replace device window.
Key Function
[X] Closes the Replace device window.
Touching the key after inputting a current device moves the cursor to the new device display area.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Replaces the current device to the new device.
1) 2)
1) 2)
3)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
3)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation 177
17
Change open/close cantact (Supported by the sequence program monitor (ladder) only) The normally open/close contact switching is supported by the sequence program monitor (Ladder).
1. Touch the [Find/Replace] [Change open/close cantact] menu on the Ladder editor screen to display the Change open/
close cantact window.
2. Set the device to change the contact and touch the [Enter] key.
Displayed screen
Key functions
3. The contacts of devices in the sequence program displayed in the Ladder editor screen are changed from A to B or B to
A.
No. Item Description
1) Device input area Set a device for changing a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
The item can be set also by selecting in the ladder editor screen.
2) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the Change open/close cantact window.
Key Function
[X] Closes the Change open/close cantact window.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Changes a normally open contact or a normally closed contact.
1) 1)
2) 2)
(For alphabet input) (For numerical input)
8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.8 Find/Replace Operation
4
4.9 Test Operation In the device test mode, device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
Page 151 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Displaying the device test window when setting the security
By setting the security on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the display of the device test window can be limited.
For the security setting, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting the security
Touching a device displays the device test window.
When touching bit devices
A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
How to operate device test window
Bit devices
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section
Ladder monitor screen Page 151 Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Device Displays the selected device.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
Key Function
[X] Closes the device test window.
[ON] Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
[OFF] Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
1)
2)
2)
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.9 Test Operation 179
18
Word devices
Displayed screen
The following table shows the displayed contents.
Key functions
No. Item Description
1) Device Displays the selected device.
2) Device value input area Set the value to be written into the selected device.
3) Input mode Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number. HEX: hexadecimal number)
4) Keys Keys for operations in the device test window shown in (b).
Key Function
[X] Closes the device test window.
[DEC/HEX] Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
[Enter] Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
1) 2) 3)
4)
1) 2) 3)
4)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC)) (Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
0 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.9 Test Operation
4
4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section explains the error messages displayed when the sequence program monitor (ladder display) is executed, and the
corrective actions.
Error messages for data-storing destination access
Error message Description Corrective action
File access error. Please check the [drive
name] drive.
No data storage is inserted in the GOT.
The SD card cover is opened.
A data storage with a format error is
inserted in the GOT.
The data storage has insufficient free space
for writing a file.
The folder for the sequence program
monitor (ladder display) in the data storage
is write-protected.
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for
the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data
storage.
Failed to write the (file name) to the [drive
name] drive. Please check the [drive
name] drive.
No data storage is inserted in the GOT.
The SD card cover is opened.
A data storage with a format error is
inserted in the GOT.
The data storage has insufficient free space
for writing a file.
The folder for the sequence program
monitor (ladder display) in the data storage
is write-protected.
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for
the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data
storage.
The [drive name] drive has insufficient free
space. The file cannot be saved.
The data storage has insufficient free space
for writing a file.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
The file (file name) is broken. The file is
unselected.
The read file in the data storage is corrupted. Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
The file (file name) is broken. Perform PLC
Read and read the file again.
The temporary file used on the Ladder
editor screen or the Ladder monitor screen
in the data storage is corrupted.
The writing of files into data storage is failed
due to an insufficient capacity of data
storage.
Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
Delete unnecessary files in the data storage. Or insert a data
storage with a larger free space.
The file (file name) is broken. Please read
the file in the program list again.
The temporary file used on the Ladder editor
screen or the Ladder monitor screen in the
data storage is corrupted.
Select the program displayed in the Program list window again.
The file (file name) is broken. When searching for devices in an undisplayed
program, a file in the data storage is
corrupted.
Read the file from the PLC CPU again.
Failed to check program. Please check the
[drive name] drive.
The GOT cannot access the temporary file in
the data storage during a program check.
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for
the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data
storage.
Failed to verify with PLC. Please check the
[drive name] drive.
The GOT cannot access the temporary file in
the data storage during the PLC program
verification.
Insert a data storage without a format error in the GOT.
Close the SD card cover.
Delete files in the data storage.
Insert a data storage with a large capacity.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the folder that is used for
the sequence program monitor (ladder display) in the data
storage.
Parameter file is corrupted.
Please restart the ladder editor.
The parameter file in the data storage is
corrupted.
Exit the sequence program monitor (ladder display), and then
start the function again.
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 181
18
Error messages for communication
Error message Description Corrective action
Failed to communicate with CPU. The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder display).
Failed to communicate with CPU. The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU,
and make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
Check if the PLC CPU supports the sequence program
monitor (ladder display).
Failed to get the information of CPU
because of bad connection.
The GOT cannot communicate with the PLC
CPU.
Check the line status between the GOT and the PLC CPU, and
make the GOT communicate with the PLC CPU.
Failed to get the information. The GOT cannot communicate with the
PLC CPU.
A file with faulty file name is selected.
Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC
CPU.
Select the file after changing the message display language to
one which can display the file name in the utility.
Change the file name with GX Works2/GX Developer.
The CPU protect switch is ON. Turn OFF
the protect switch.
The system protect switch of the PLC CPU
is on.
The PLC CPU is in the boot process.
Turn off the system protect switch of the PLC CPU.
Wait until the boot process of the PLC CPU is completed.
The CPU is not in STOP mode. Please
change the CPU to STOP mode.
Any operation that the PLC CPU cannot
execute during running is performed.
Set the PLC CPU to the STOP status.
CPU drive error. Please confirm the drive
status.
The target drive does not function. Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
The specified file does not exist in the
CPU. Please confirm the file in the drive.
The specified file does not exist in the PLC
CPU.
Check files in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
The specified file in the CPU is invalid.
Please confirm the file in the drive.
The specified file in the PLC CPU is
corrupted.
Delete the specified file by using GX Works2/GX Developer, and
then create the file again.
The file cannot be accessed while it is
being accessed by other connected
equipment or it is being transferred.
Other GOTs or GX Works2/GX Developer
access the connected PLC CPU.
The QCPU transfers program files from the
program cache memory to the program
memory.
Access the file when other devices do not access the
connected PLC CPU.
Access the file after QCPU completes the transference from
the program cache memory to the program memory.
The data cannot be written to the specified
CPU because the total data size may
exceed the drive capacity.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU runs out
of space.
Reduce the capacity of the file to be written.
The specified file is invalid. The specified file in the PLC CPU is
corrupted.
Format the target drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer, and
then write the specified file.
There is no consecutive free space in the
drive of the specified CPU. Please clean
up the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU does not
have consecutive free space.
Execute [Arrange PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX Developer.
Failed to write data to the specified CPU.
Please check if the target flash ROM has
an error or not.
An error occurs when writing/deleting data to/
from the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
Check the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
The specified file does not exist. The specified drive or file does not exist in the
PLC CPU.
Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive exists.
The specified CPU drive has an error.
Please check the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU is faulty. Execute [Format PLC memory] with GX Works2/GX
Developer.
If the specified drive is the flash ROM, write data to the PLC
(flash ROM) again.
The specified file is under processing. The specified drive of the PLC CPU is in use. Execute the same operation later.
Invalid password. The password to access the specified file is
incorrect.
Input the correct password.
The specified CPU drive is write-
protected.
Data is written to the write-protect drive of the
PLC CPU.
Cancel the write-protect setting for the specified drive of the PLC
CPU.
Too many files are being accessed at the
same time.
Other devices are accessing too many files in
the PLC CPU at the same time.
Reduce the number of files being accessed by other devices.
The specified CPU drive cannot be
accessed.
The specified drive does not exist in the PLC
CPU.
Read data from the PLC, and specify a drive that exists in the
PLC CPU.
Failed to access the specified CPU drive.
Please check the drive status.
No memory card is inserted in the specified
drive of the PLC CPU.
The memory card is faulty.
Insert a memory card in the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
Format the memory card in the specified drive by using GX
Works2/GX Developer.
2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
4
The specified CPU drive has an error.
Please check the drive status.
The specified drive in the PLC CPU does not
function.
Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
The specified CPU drive is not formatted. The specified drive of the PLC CPU is not
formatted.
Format the specified drive by using GX Works2/GX Developer.
CPU memory card is not inserted. No memory card is inserted in the specified
drive of the PLC CPU.
Insert a memory card in the specified drive.
The type of the CPU memory card is
wrong. Please check the memory card.
An unsupported memory card is inserted in
the specified drive of the PLC CPU.
No memory card is inserted in the specified
drive of the PLC CPU.
The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
Insert a supported memory card in the specified drive.
The program memory of QnUDVCPU cannot be written to the
ROM.
The CPU is write protected. Please
remove the protection.
The PLC CPU is write-protected. Cancel the write-protect setting for the PLC CPU.
The specified CPU drive cannot be used.
Please check the drive.
The specified drive of the PLC CPU does not
exist.
Read data from the PLC, and check if the specified drive exists.
PLC types of the program (file name) and
the connected PLC are not the same.
Perform PLC Read and read the data
again.
The PLC CPU type of the program file stored
in the data storage differs from the connected
PLC CPU type.
Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU.
The program before modification on the
GOT and the program being registered on
the CPU do not match. Please perform
PLC Read and read the program again.
When a program is written into the PLC, the
target file does not exist in the PLC CPU, or
the type of the program differs from that of the
target file.
Read a program file that exists in the PLC CPU
Failed to write the value to the device. The GOT cannot write device values to the
PLC CPU with the device test.
Read the program being displayed from the PLC again.
Parameter file is corrupted. The ladder
editor cannot be used.
The GOT cannot read parameters from the
PLC CPU.
Write the parameters to the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/GX
Developer.
The file has invalid date or timestamp.
Please check the GOT clock data.
The date of the GOT is wrong.
PC writing or online change is executed to
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, or Q01CPU when the
date of the GOT is Feb. 29th.
Set the date of the GOT properly.
When executing PC writing or online change to the Q00JCPU,
Q00CPU, or Q01CPU, set the date of the GOT other than
Feb. 29th.
Communication of the online debug
function failed.
Communication of the online debug function
failed.
Execute after registering the online debug function (online
change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/GX
Developer.
Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.
Specified contents of the online debug
function are invalid.
Specified contents of the online debug
function are invalid.
Execute after registering the online debug function (online
change, trace, monitor with conditions, etc.) in GX Works2/GX
Developer.
Execute after confirming the communication path such as
communication cables.
An error occurred when verifying the
specified program and the program in the
CPU.
Please read the file again.
The sequence program after modification of
the online change operation differs from the
program before modification.
Execute the online change after executing PLC read to equalize
the sequence program of the GOT and PLC CPU by PLC read.
END instruction cannot be written to a
CPU module while the module is running.
The END instruction is inserted or deleted by
the online change.
Check the contents of the specified sequence program file.
Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
Reserved area for online change is
insufficient.
Online change cannot be performed.
The file capacity is exceeded by the online
change.
Check the capacity of the specified sequence program file.
Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
There are instructions that cannot be
handled in the CPU.
An instruction, which is not compatible with
the CPU type set in the project, exists in the
sequence program executing the online
change.
Check if the PLC CPU type is correct.
Check the sequence program and delete the invalid
instruction.
The step to be written is invalid. The step to be written is invalid.
The start position of the online change was
not specified with a correct program step
No.
Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
Check if the GX Works2/GX Developer is compatible with the
CPU type and CPU version set in the project.
The instruction that was written during
online change is invalid.
The instruction of the online change is wrong. Execute the online change again.
Write the program after setting the PLC CPU to the stop
status.
Error message Description Corrective action
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 183
18
Error messages for editing
The number of blocks to be written by
online change is invalid.
Block size error (The number of the online
change is invalid.)
Check the number of the block for the online change.
The specified file is too large to read. A program file exceeding 260k steps was
read.
Split the program to sections within 260k steps.
The parameter file cannot be read. The
ladder editor function cannot be used.
No parameter file exists. Write the parameter file using the peripheral software of the PLC
CPU.
The function is not supported by the
specified CPU version.
The function that is not supported by the
specified PLC CPU is used.
The program memory of QnUDVCPU is
written to the ROM.
The executed function cannot be used.
The specified file can not be accessed. The specified file is protected with a
security key.
The specified file is protected with a block
password.
The executed function cannot be used.
Delete programs from the PLC CPU, initialize the memory, and
then write the project data again.
Please wait for a while and execute again. A password to access the specified file is
incorrectly iput for the specified times, the
PLC CPU locks out the access.
Wait for a while, and input the correct password.
The program (file name) is not supported
by the sequence program monitor.
A program that includes instructions or
labels unsupported by the sequence
program monitor is read.
A file that includes the output instruction
that uses any label of the timer, retentive
timer, counter, long timer, long retentive
timer, or long counter is specified.
Input the correct instruction.
Modify the program so that unsupported labels will not be
used.
Error message Description Corrective action
The instruction is incorrect. The input instruction is incorrect.
The instruction inapplicable to the
sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)
has been input.
The instruction unavailable for the RCPU is
input.
Input the correct instruction.
Edit the program with the MELSOFT application supported by
the PLC CPU, and write it to the PLC CPU.
The specified device is not available. The input device name is incorrect. Input the correct device name.
The device number is out of range. The device number outside the range is input. Input the correct device number.
Too many rows are being edited. Data
cannot be entered.
On the edited ladder, 49 or more rows are
input.
Delete rows to be 48 or less per edited ladder.
The ladder block is too large. Data cannot
be entered.
On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are input. Delete rows to be 24 or less per ladder block.
The edit position is incorrect. A specified position is incorrect to input a
ladder.
A space of a specified position is too narrow
to input a ladder.
A start position and end position are not
specified in the same column to input a
vertical line.
An end position is specified in an upper row
of the start position to input a vertical line.
A start position and end position are not
specified in the same row to input a
horizontal line.
A start position and end position are not
specified in the same row to delete a
ladder.
Input a ladder in a correct position.
Insert columns, and then input a ladder.
Specify a correct end position for a vertical line or horizontal
line, and then input the line.
Specify a correct end position, and then delete a ladder.
The data being edited is too large. Too many ladders are not converted. The data
cannot be converted.
Reduce the ladders which are not converted before conversion.
Line statements exist in the ladder
program and the data cannot be edited.
Please delete the line statements from the
ladder program.
A vertical line that overlaps an interlinear
statement is input.
Delete the interlinear statement, and then input a vertical line.
PI devices exist in the ladder program and
the data cannot be edited. Please delete
the PI devices from the ladder program.
A vertical line that overlaps a pointer or
interrupt pointer is input.
Delete the pointer or interrupt pointer, and then input a vertical
line.
Error message Description Corrective action
4 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
4
Error messages for conversion
There is a ladder block which cannot be
displayed in the ladder program. Data
cannot be edited.
On a ladder block, 25 or more rows are
edited.
An incomplete ladder block is edited.
Edit the ladder block in 24 rows or less by using GX Works2/
GX Developer, and then write the program into the PLC CPU.
Write the program into the PLC CPU by using GX Works2/GX
Developer again because the program may be corrupted.
Statements should be 64 characters or
less.
A statement with 65 characters or more was
entered.
Enter statements with 64 characters or less.
Notes should be 32 characters or less. A note with 33 characters or more was
entered.
Enter notes with 32 characters or less.
Conversion (online change) failed due to
communication error.
The GOT fails to communicate with the PLC
during conversion (online change).
Check the communication setting.
Check cables.
Verify with PLC.
Operate the GOT for reading the program from the PLC.
Peripheral statements cannot be entered. A peripheral statement was entered. Delete the peripheral statement.
Peripheral notes cannot be entered. A peripheral note was entered. Delete the peripheral note.
Cannot edit because NOP is in selected
range.
A ladder block in the edit area including NOP
was edited.
Exclude NOP from the edit area.
Delete NOP with the MELSOFT application, and write the
program to the PLC CPU.
Unusable command is specified. The instruction inapplicable to the
sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder)
has been input.
The instruction unavailable for the RCPU is
input.
Edit the program with the MELSOFT application, and write it to
the PLC CPU.
The program is not editable. The following programs, which cannot be
edited, were edited.
Multiple program blocks are defined.
The program language is other than the
ladder.
The label is used.
The inline structured text is used.
The MC/MCR instruction is used.
The statement that exceeds 64 one-byte
characters is used.
The note that exceeds 32 one-byte
characters is used.
The text string constant that exceeds 32
one-byte characters is used.
The peripheral statement/note is used.
The line feed is used in the statement/note/
text string constant.
The special character ($") is used in the text
string constant.
The target program is a safety program.
An FB or FUN is used.
Perform the following operations with the MELSOFT application,
and write the program to the PLC CPU.
Define one program block.
Change the program language to the ladder.
Delete the label.
Delete the inline structured text.
Delete the MC/MCR instruction.
Delete the statement that exceeds 64 one-byte characters.
Delete the note that exceeds 32 one-byte characters.
Delete the text string constant that exceeds 32 one-byte
characters.
Delete the peripheral statement/note.
Delete the line feed in the statement/note/text string constant.
Delete the special character ($") in the text string constant.
Edit the safety program with the MELSOFT application.
Delete the FB or FUN.
Error message Description Corrective action
The data being edited is too large.
Please reduce the data being edited.
Too many ladders are not converted. The data
cannot be converted.
Reduce the ladders which are not converted before conversion.
There is a ladder which cannot be
converted.
Correct the ladder at the cursor position.
When a ladder block is converted, the ladder
block is not completed.
Complete the ladder block, and then convert the ladder block.
The ladder block is too large to convert.
Please reduce the size of the ladder block.
Too large ladder blocks are not converted.
The data cannot be converted.
Delete or split the ladder block before conversion.
Adding/deleting ladder blocks is not
allowed.
The number of ladder blocks in the edit area
is different before and after the edit.
Edit the program so that the total number of ladder blocks and
line statements in the edit area is the same before and after the
edit, and then convert it.
Error message Description Corrective action
4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 185
18
Error messages for file selection
Error messages for user authentication
Error message Description Corrective action
You cannot select programs other than
ladder programs.
A program that is not a ladder program is
selected.
Use the sequence program monitor (SFC) to monitor SFC
programs.
Use GX Works2 or GX Developer to monitor SFC programs.
The specified file is too large to read. A program file having 260k steps or more is
selected.
Split the program.
Function blocks or functions that cannot
be displayed in the sequence program are
used.
A security key or block password is set for
the function blocks or functions.
A macro type function block file exists in the
reading drive of the program file.
Delete the security key or block password set for the function
block or function.
Delete the macro type function block file in the reading drive of
the program file.
Error message Description Corrective action
User authentication with PLC is not
completed.
Sequence program monitor cannot be
used.
Do you want to reset the connection status
with the PLC and display the PLC Read
screen?
The user authentication is cancelled when the
sequence program monitor is restarted.
Execute the user authentication.
User authentication with PLC is not
completed.
Sequence program monitor cannot be
used.
The user authentication is cancelled when GX
Works3 is connected to the PLC CPU.
Execute the user authentication.
User authentication with PLC is not
completed.
This function cannot be used.
The user authentication is cancelled when GX
Works3 is connected to the PLC CPU.
Execute the user authentication.
The user name or password does not
match.
An incorrect user name or password is used
for the authentication request to the PLC
CPU.
Input the correct user name and password.
The access level does not match. An incorrect access level is specified to the
user name used for the authentication request
to the PLC CPU.
Specify the correct access level.
You cannot log on because the number of
logged-on users exceeds the limit.
The user authentication cannot be executed
because the number of log-on users exceeds
the limit.
Reduce the number of log-on users.
Please wait for a while and execute again. The user authentication fails more than the
specified times.
Wait for a while, and execute the user authentication.
6 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) 4.10 Error Messages and Corrective Action
5
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
Page 187 Features
Page 190 Specifications
Page 194 Operations for Display
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
Page 211 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
Page 224 Test Operation
Page 226 Error Messages and Corrective Action
5.1 Features With the sequence program monitor (SFC), the GOT can monitor SFC programs of controllers, and changing device values of
the programs is available.
The function improves the efficiency in troubleshooting and maintenance of PLC systems with SFC programs.
The following shows features of the sequence program monitor (SFC).
Displaying SFC programs in SFC diagram format The GOT can monitor SFC programs of the PLC CPU and display the programs in the SFC diagram format (MELSAP3 or
MELSAP-L format).
The following screens are displayed with the sequence program monitor (SFC).
PLC read screen
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Block list screen
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
SFC diagram monitor screen
Page 211 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
SFC diagram monitor screen
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.1 Features 187
18
Touching a step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen displays an enlarged operation output/transition
condition sequence program.
Switching display formats, device comment display, and languages The following are available.
Switching the display formats of device values
Switching whether to display or hide device comments
Switching languages for file names of SFC programs, comments, and others
Switching display formats On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the display formats for the current values of word devices can be switched between
decimal and hexadecimal numbers.
Switching device comment display Whether to display or hide device comments used in SFC programs can be switched.
Switching languages Block titles, file titles and comments can be displayed in the language set for the language switching in the GOT utility with
comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code.
With a SD card storing comment files created with the SJIS code, KS code, GB code, and/or ASCII code, comments can be
displayed in the language corresponding to any character code in the SD card, regardless of the language set in the GOT
utility.
8 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.1 Features
5
Interaction with ladder monitor function By only selecting a device on the SFC diagram monitor screen and starting the ladder monitor, the GOT can search and
display the device in a ladder program.
Page 218 [Display] menu
The function is useful for searching for a device used within both a SFC program and a ladder program in the ladder program.
Example) Outputting a signal by using a ladder program including an interlock condition, instead of using an SFC program
Sequence program monitor (SFC) Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
10 10 X1
Y22
Searching in ladder program
PLC CPU
Sensor
X1 OFF
GOT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Monitor screen
Check the active step with the sequence program monitor (SFC).
Finding that the machine stops
Checking that the machine operation command (M10) is on
Touching M10 and starting the Sequence program monitor (Ladder)
Finding out that Y22 (machine operation) is off because X1 is off
Finding out that the machine stops because the door is open (X1 is off)
Door
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.1 Features 189
19
5.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration for the sequence program monitor (SFC).
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 For creating a multiple CPU system with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and/or Q25HCPU, use CPUs with the function version B or later.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*2 Indicates the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. *3 Indicates CC-Link IE Field Network connection. *4 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *5 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *6 The Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU are not available. *7 Sequence program monitor (SFC) cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter. *8 The LCPU does not support the connection type. *9 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2.
Controller
QCPU (Q mode) *1
LCPU
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection *8
Direct CPU connection (Serial) *9
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *7
MELSECNET/H connection *8, MELSECNET/ 10 connection *1*8
CC-Link IE controller connection *2*8, CC-Link IE field connection *3
CC-Link connection
ID *4 G4 *5
Sequence
program
monitor
(SFC)
Monitors SFC
programs.
*6*7
0 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.2 Specifications
5
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the sequence program monitor (SFC) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware The following hardware is required.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Hardware
Data storage (Such as an SD card and USB memory)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.2 Specifications 191
19
Devices and range that can be monitored The device range varies depending on the CPU to be used.
(: Possible, : Impossible)
*1 When a ZZ device is used, "ZZ" can be displayed.
Device Device range Program display Device monitor display
Search operation
Input X0 to 1FFF, DX0 to FFF
Output Y0 to 1FFF, DY0 to FFF
Internal relay M0 to 61439
Latch relay L0 to 32767
Link relay B0 to FFFF
Timer T0 to 32767
Retentive timer ST0 to 32767
Counter C0 to 32767
Data register D0 to 12287
Link register W0 to 1FFF
Annunciator F0 to 32767
Edge relay V0 to 2047
File register R0 to 32767
ZR0 to 4184063
Extended data register D0 to 4212223
Extended link register W0 to 4045FF
Link special relay SB0 to 7FF
Link special register SW0 to 7FF
Step relay S0 to 8191, BLS
Index register Z0 to 19 *1
Special relay SM0 to 2047
Special register SD0 to 2047
Function input FX0 to F
Function output FY0 to F
Function register FD0 to 4
Link direct device J
Module access device U
U3En
Nesting N0 to 14
Pointer P0 to 4095
Interrupt pointer I0 to 255
SFC block device BL0 to 319
SFC transition device TR0 to 511, BLTR
Network No. specification device J0 to 255
I/O No. specification device U0 to 1FF
3E0 to 3E3
Macro instruction argument device VD0 to
2 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.2 Specifications
5
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Precautions for operations during sequence program monitor (SFC) startup Do not operate the following with the GOT during the sequence program monitor (SFC) startup.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the sequence program monitor (SFC) to operate incorrectly.
Opening and closing of the SD card cover
Inserting or removing a SD card
Precautions for devices The GOT cannot search for indexing devices.
The GOT cannot monitor local devices.
Precautions for file names (program names) of comment files to be read Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names (program names).
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.2 Specifications 193
19
5.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the operation screen for the sequence program monitor (SFC) after the GOT is turned on.
The GOT must have the GOT Platform Library and GOT Function Expansion Library (system applications (extended
functions)) installed on it.
Starting the sequence program monitor (SFC) 1. Turn on the GOT.
Display the sequence program monitor (SFC) screen.
The display methods include the following two types.
Starting from the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Using the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (SFC)) set in the project
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
2. Set the channel No., network No., station number, and CPU number in the communication setting dialog.
Page 205 Communication setting window
3. Read data from the PLC and display the program list window.
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
Reading data from the PLC is not required when the GOT is restarted, because SFC programs and comment files are stored
in an SD card with the sequence program monitor (SFC).
4. Select a program in the program list to display the block list screen.
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
Alternatively, display the block list screen with the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (SFC)) for which [Block
List] is selected for [Display Screen] in the switch setting.
Communication setting window
4 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display
5
5. Select a block on the block list screen to display the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Page 211 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
Alternatively, display the SFC diagram monitor screen with the special function switch (Sequence program monitor (SFC)) for
which [SFC Diagram] is selected for [Display Screen] in the switch setting.
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display 195
19
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
Communication setting window
Active block list window
Active step list window
Step No./transition condition No. search window
Bit devices Zoom window
Sequence program monitor (ladder)
Step list window
Device/contact/coil search window
Comment file list window
Password input window
PLC Read Screen
Program list window
Block List Screen
SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
6 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display
5
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the sequence program monitor (SFC) from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a
special function switch (System launcher).
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
2 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The sequence program monitor (SFC) starts.
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed System configuration screen
[] key
[End] key
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display 197
19
Setting SFC data storage location
Setting SFC data storage location The selected drive of the GOT (SD card) can store up to 512 files of SFC data (SFC programs, device comments) used for the
sequence program monitor (SFC).
SFC data are stored in the storage location that stores ladder data for the ladder monitor function.
Only drive A (standard SD card) or drive B (USB drive) is usable for storing SFC data.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Reading comment files from SD card The sequence program monitor (SFC) uses comment files stored in a SD card installed in the GOT.
Procedure for using comment files stored in SD cards The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a SD card.
For how to store comment files in a SD card on the PLC read screen, refer to the following.
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of GOT utility 1. Create a SEQCMNT folder in a SD card.
When the SEQCMNT folder already exists, creating a new SEQCMNT folder is not required.
8 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display
5
2. In the SEQCMNT folder, create folders for CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the monitored controller
with a hierarchy as shown below.
Assign numbers to "*" marks.
(When the CH No. is 1, the folder name is CH01. When the monitor target is the host station, the folder name is ST255.)
3. In the CPU No. folder, create folders for storing comment files by character code.
4. Copy a comment file (.wcd) in the saved project.
When the GX Works2 project is used, the creation method of a comment file (.wcd) differs depending on whether the project
used can be or cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
Project that can be saved in the GX Developer format
A comment file (.wcd) is created when the project is saved in the GX Developer format.
Project that cannot be saved in the GX Developer format
Export the project by using [Write IC Memory Card] of GX Works2, and change the extension of the comment file from [.qcd]
to [.wcd].
Item Folder name
CH No. CH**
Network No. NET***
Station No. ST***
CPU No. CPU**
Item Folder name
Folder for SJIS code SJIS
Folder for KS code KS
Folder for GB code GB
Folder for ASCII code ASCII
Channel No. Network No. Station No. CPU No.
CPU No.
For storing comments with KS code
For storing comments with ASCII code
For storing comments with SJIS code
For storing comments with GB code
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display 199
20
5. Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the SD card.
(Example: Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder.)
6. Install the SD card with the comment file on the GOT.
Switch comment files on the SFC diagram monitor screen for displaying the comments in an appropriate language.
Comment character code Storage folder name
SJIS code SJIS
KS code KS
GB code GB
ASCII code ASCII
0 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display
5
Setting Display Format The display format of word device values displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen, language, the display mode of SFC
programs, and others can be set.
Switching languages of SFC programs Languages (Japanese/Korean/Simplified Chinese) of comments to be displayed on the sequence program monitor (SFC)
screens can be switched during monitoring.
For switching languages, comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance.
Page 198 Reading comment files from SD card
The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with each character
code.
Setting display mode of SFC programs The display mode of SFC programs on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be set.
Page 218 [Display] menu
The MELSAP-L program display mode is available regardless of the read SFC program format (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L).
In the MELSAP-L program display mode, operation output/transition condition sequence programs are displayed as [?????]
when the GOT displays a SFC program with the MELSAP3 format.
The following shows how the GOT displays sequence programs with and without the MELSAP-L program display mode.
Setting zoom comment display mode Whether to display or hide comments and notes in the zoom window can be set.
Page 223 Monitoring Mode menu
Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers The display formats of word device values on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be switched between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.
Page 218 [Display] menu
Language Comment file
Japanese Comment files with SJIS code
Korean Comment files with KS code
Simplified Chinese Comment files with GB code
Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code
Item With MELSAP-L program display mode Without MELSAP-L program display mode
Displayed operation output/transition condition
sequence program
The GOT displays a sequence program on the
SFC diagram monitor screen.
The GOT displays a sequence program in the
zoom window by touching a step or transition
condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display 201
20
Setting automatic scroll mode The automatic scroll can be switched between enabled or disabled states.
In the automatic scroll mode, the GOT displays active steps on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically scrolling the
screen when all the following conditions are satisfied.
No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The displayed block has an active step.
For setting the automatic scroll mode, refer to the following.
Page 218 [Display] menu
For the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.
Page 211 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
An active step in the block is displayed by automatically scrolling the screen.
The step status becomes inactive.
2 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.3 Operations for Display
5
5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen On the PLC read screen, the GOT reads SFC programs and comment files used for the sequence program monitor (SFC)
from the PLC.
The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen.
Displayed contents
PLC read screen The following describes the configuration of the PLC read screen displayed after the sequence program monitor (SFC) starts
and key functions on the screen.
1)PLC name
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2)Target controller
Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU.
3)Keys
Keys for the operations on the PLC read screen (Touch input)
Page 206 Key functions
4)Target drive list (target controller)
Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list.
Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list (target controller).
For the drive that stores files selected in the file list (target controller), [*] is displayed to the left of the drive name.
5)File list (target controller)
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive
list (target controller).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For program files, only SFC program files in the program memory can be selected.
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (GOT), the file selection in the file list (GOT) is canceled.
When a password is set for the selected file, the password input window appears.
Page 204 Password input window
6)Target drive list (GOT)
Lists the names of the drives to which data is saved.
An asterisk (*) is placed before the name of the drive that stores the files displayed in the file list (GOT).
2)
3)
1)
3)
3)
9)
3)7)10)
4)
6)
8)
5)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 203
20
7)File list (GOT)
Displays the program types, file names/titles, sizes, dates, and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive
list (GOT).
(The date and time show those of updated files.)
A file to be read can be selected from the file list. (The selected file is highlighted.)
For selecting the file name selected in the file list (target controller), the file selection in the file list (target controller) is
canceled.
8)Total file size
Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
9)Number of selected files
Displays the total number of files selected in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT).
10)Message display area
Displays error messages and others.
Password input window After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically for the following files with the
same password.
(The password input window is not displayed.)
1)Password type
Displays the type of the password to be input.
Program password
Comment password
2)Password input area
Set the password.
3)File name
Displays the file name.
4)Keys
Keys for operations in the password input window shown in (b) (Touch input)
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
4 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
5
Communication setting window
1)CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2)Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
3)Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4)CPU No. input area
Set the CPU No.
5)CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
6)Keys
Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Page 206 Key functions
Program list window
1)SFC program file list
Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read SFC programs.
The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs.
2)Keys
Keys for operations in the program list window shown in (b). (Touch input)
2)3)2)3)
(When the CH No. is input)
1) 4)
5)
(When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)
1) 4)
6)
6) 6)
1)
2)
2)
2)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 205
20
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen.
PLC read screen The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the PLC read screen.
1)[Back]
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
2)[Select CPU]
Displays the communication setting window.
Page 205 Communication setting window
3)Exit key
Exits the sequence program monitor (SFC) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (SFC) startup screen.
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up or down.
5)[Recommend] key
Available only when [0:Program Memory] is selected from the target drive list (target controller).
Touching the key selects all the SFC program files, common comment files, and comment files for the selected SFC program
files in the file list (target controller).
When files with the same name are displayed in the file list (target controller) and file list (GOT), touching the key selects a file
as shown below.
For SFC program files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (target controller).
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT).
For comment files
When the updated dates and times differ between the files, touching the key selects the latest file.
When the updated dates and times are the same between the files, touching the key selects the file in the file list (GOT).
6)[Proseed] key
Writes the file selected in the file list (target controller) into the SD card displayed in the target drive list (GOT).
The file written into the SD card on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder.
After writing, among files other than comment files in the SD card, files that are not selected in the file list (GOT) are deleted.
Then, the program list window appears.
Page 205 Program list window
1) 3)
6)5)
4)
2)
6 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
5
Password input window The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the password input dialog.
1)Cancel key
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
2)Numeric key
Switches the key type to the value.
3)Symbol key
Switches the keys to symbol keys.
4)Alphabet key (uppercase)
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
5)Alphabet key (lowercase)
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
6)Delete all key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
7)Delete key
Deletes an input value or character.
8)Enter key
Authenticates the password set in the password input area.
1)
2) 5)
6) 7) 8)
4)
3)
(Alphabet input) (Numeric input)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 207
20
Communication setting window The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the communication setting dialog.
1)Close key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target isnot set, the
communication setting window does not close.
2)Cursor keys
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
3)Enter key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the
communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4)Delete key
Deletes an input value or character.
5)Delete all key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Program list window The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the program list window.
1)Cancel key
Closes the program list window.
2)Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
3)[Display] key
Displays the blocks of the SFC program file selected in the SFC program file list on the block list screen.
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
2)
1)
3) 4) 5)
1)
3)
2)
8 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.4 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
5
5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen On the block list screen, the GOT displays blocks within the read SFC program in a list.
The following describes how to operate the block list screen.
Displayed contents The following describes the configuration of the block list screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1)PLC name
Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU.
2)Target controller
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
3)Program name
Displays the file name (without the extension) of the displayed program.
4)Keys
The keys used for the operations on the block list screen.
5)Block list
Displays the block numbers and block titles in the displayed program.
The block numbers are not displayed with no block.
Active blocks are highlighted.
Selecting a block title displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Page 211 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
6)Block information list
Displays block information for each block.
When devices are set for the block information, the set devices are displayed in the corresponding cells.
7)Message display area
Displays error messages and others.
1) 3)2)
6)
4)
7)
5)
4) 4)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen 209
21
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the block list screen.
1)[Back] key
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the block list screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
2)[Device Test] key
Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
Page 224 Test Operation
3)[Display] menu
Displays menus used for operations on the block list screen.
Page 210 [Display] menu
4)Exit key
Exits the sequence program monitor (SFC) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (SFC) startup screen.
5)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up and down.
Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the block list screen.
[Display] menu
1)[Comment change]
Displays the comment file list window.
Page 220 Comment file list window
2)[Program List]
Displays the program list window.
Page 208 Program list window
3)[PLC Read]
Displays the PLC read screen.
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
4)
5)
2)1) 3)
2)
1)
3)
0 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.5 How to Operate Block List Screen
5
5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen On the SFC diagram monitor screen, the GOT monitors and displays data of the block selected on the block list screen in the
SFC diagram.
The following describes how to operate the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Displayed contents
SFC diagram monitor screen The following describes the configuration of the SFC diagram monitor screen, menus and key functions on the screen.
1)Target controller
Displays the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the target PLC CPU as shown below.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
2)Program name
Displays the file name of the displayed program.
3)Block No.
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
4)Block title
Displays the block title of the displayed block.
5)Keys
Keys for the operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen
6)Block switching tab
Displays the block No. of the block displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Touching a tab displays the corresponding block data in the SFC diagram display area.
Tabs displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.
7)Block information display area
Displays the block information of the displayed block.
When the displayed block is in any status of the block information, the corresponding device is highlighted.
When the block information is set, the set devices are displayed.
8)Column No.
Displays the column numbers.
9)Row No.
Displays the row numbers.
1) 11)
5)
5)9)
5)
2)3) 4)
6) 7) 8)
10)
12) 13) 14)
Step status display Active : Inactive :
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 211
21
10)SFC diagram display area
Displays a SFC program in the SFC diagram format.
Step display
*1 An operation output sequence program is displayed only in the MELSAP-L program display mode. Page 218 [Display] menu
Touching a step displays the zoom window.
Page 213 Zoom window
Touching a step with a jump destination block No. displays a block switching tab, and then the jump destination block data is
displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Transition condition display
*2 A transition condition sequence program is displayed only in the MELSAP-L program display mode. Page 218 [Display] menu
Touching a transition condition displays the zoom window.
Page 213 Zoom window
11)Device current value display area
Displays the current values of word devices displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
12)Message display area
Displays error messages and others.
13)Automatic scroll status display area
Displays [Scrolling automatically] with the automatic scroll mode.
Nothing is displayed without the automatic scroll mode.
14)Number of active steps
Displays the number of active steps in the displayed block.
Touching the item displays the active step list window.
Page 221 Active step list window
Display mode at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen The display mode state at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen differs depending on the SFC program format.
For the display mode of SFC programs, refer to the following.
Page 201 Setting display mode of SFC programs
SFC program format State at the first display
MELSAP3 format Without MELSAP-L program display mode
MELSAP-L format With MELSAP-L program display mode
Step No. Step Operation output sequence program*1
Comment
Jump destination block No.
Transition condition No. Transition condition Transition condition sequence program*2
Comment
2 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
Comment display at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen The following shows the order of comment files to be used at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen after reading
data from the PLC. (When the SD card has no comment file, no comment is displayed.)
Zoom window The GOT can display operation output/transition condition sequence programs in the ladder format.
1)Type
For displaying operation output sequence program
The step number and step comment are displayed.
For displaying transition condition sequence program
The transition condition number and transition condition comment are displayed.
2)Ladder program display area
Displays an operation output/transition condition sequence program.
Comments and notes are displayed in the zoom comment display mode.
Page 218 [Display] menu
3)Keys
The keys used for the operations on the zoom window
Priority order Comment files used for SFC diagram monitor screen
1 Comment files by program within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
2 Common comment files within the SEQCMNT folder in the SD card
3 Comment files by program within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
4 Common comment files within the SEQDAT folder in the SD card
ON/OFF status display of contacts and coils ON :
OFF :
1)
2) 3)
3)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 213
21
Key functions The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the SFC diagram monitor screen.
SFC diagram monitor screen
1)[Back] key
Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the SFC diagram monitor screen appears.
The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user-created monitor screen.
2)[Device] key
Sets the device test mode.
Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode.
Page 224 Test Operation
3)[Search] menu
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Page 215 [Search] menu
4)[Display] menu
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Page 218 [Display] menu
5)[Monitoring Mode] menu
Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Page 223 Monitoring Mode menu
6)Exit key
Exits the sequence program monitor (SFC) and returns the screen to the sequence program monitor (SFC) startup screen.
7)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up, down, left, or right.
Zoom window
1)Cancel key
Closes the zoom window.
2)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up and down.
1) 2) 3) 5)4)
6)
7)
2)
1)
4 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
[Search] menu
1)[Device Search]
Displays the device search dialog.
Page 216 Device/contact/coil search window
2)[Step No. Search]
Displays the step No. search dialog.
Page 217 Step No./transition condition No. search window
3)[Transiton No. Search]
Displays the transition condition No. search dialog.
Page 217 Step No./transition condition No. search window
4)[Condition Search]
Displays the contact search dialog.
Page 216 Device/contact/coil search window
5)[Coil Search]
Displays the coil search dialog.
Page 216 Device/contact/coil search window
6)[Step List]
Displays the step list window.
Page 218 Step list window
7)[Block List]
Displays the block list screen.
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
2)
1)
3)
5)
4)
6)
7)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 215
21
Device/contact/coil search window The GOT can search for devices in a SFC program.
1)Device input area
Set a device to be searched.
2)Delete all key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
3)Delete key
Deletes an input value or character.
4)Numeric character key
Switches the key type to the value.
5)Enter key
Searches for the set device.
6)Search key
Searches for the set device in an upward or downward direction.
When the set device is searched for across multiple blocks, the search is conducted in descending or ascending order of
block numbers.
When the set device is found and the MELSAP-L program display mode is canceled, the zoom window displays the step or
the transition condition where the set device is used.
7)Alphabet key
Switches the key type to the alphabet.
6)
1) 2)
3)
2)
3)
7)
6)
1)
5)
4)
5)
(For alphabet input ) (For numerical input)
6 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
Step No./transition condition No. search window The GOT can search for steps and transition conditions in a block.
1)Block No. input area
Set the block No. of the block to be searched.
The GOT searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
2)Step No./transition condition No. input area
Set the step No. or transition condition No. of the step or transition condition to be searched.
3)Cursor keys
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
4)Enter key
When the cursor is in the block No. input area
Moves the cursor to the step No./transition condition No. input area.
When the cursor is in the step No./transition condition No. input area
Searches for a step or transition condition in the set block.
When the searched step or transition condition is found, the step No./transition condition No. search window closes and the
GOT displays data of the step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(The step or transition condition is highlighted.)
5)Delete key
Deletes an input value or character.
6)Delete all key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
1) 2)
4) 3)
1) 2)
6)
5) 4) 3)
6)
5)
(Step No. search window) (Transition condition No. search window)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 217
21
Step list window The GOT displays steps in a block.
1)Block No.
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
2)[Active Step List] key
Displays the active step list window.
Page 221 Active step list window
3)Step list
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the steps in the displayed block.
Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
(Active steps are highlighted.)
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
[Display] menu
1)[MELSAP-L Program Display]
Sets the MELSAP-L program display mode.
Touching the key in the MELSAP-L program display mode cancels the MELSAP-L program display mode.
Page 201 Setting display mode of SFC programs
2)
3)
1)
4)
2)
1)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
8 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
2)[Comment Display in Zoom Window]
Sets the zoom comment display mode.
Touching the key in the zoom comment display mode cancels the zoom comment display mode.
Page 201 Setting zoom comment display mode
3)[Comment change]
Displays the comment file list window.
Page 220 Comment file list window
4)[Automatic Scroll]
Sets the automatic scroll mode.
Touching the key in the automatic scroll mode cancels the automatic scroll mode.
Page 202 Setting automatic scroll mode
5)[Active Step List]
Displays the active step list window.
Page 221 Active step list window
6)[Active Block List]
Displays the active block list window.
Page 222 Active block list window
7)[Program List]
Displays the program list window.
Page 205 Program list window
8)[PLC Read]
Displays the PLC read screen.
Page 203 How to Operate PLC Read Screen
9)[Ladder Monitor]
Starts the sequence program monitor (ladder).
Touching the key with a device selected can automatically search for the device with the sequence program monitor (ladder).
For the automatic search with the sequence program monitor (ladder), settings for automatically reading sequence programs
are required.
For settings for automatically reading sequence programs, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 219
22
Comment file list window The GOT displays the comment file list.
1)Comment file list
Among comment files stored in the SD card, the file names and titles of the comment files and common comment files used
for the displayed SFC program are displayed.
For switching comments, select a comment file to be used.
For hiding comments, select [Do not display comments].
A selected comment file is highlighted.
2)Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
3)[Apply Changes] button
Closes the comment file list window and displays the SFC diagram monitor screen with the comments of the file selected from
the comment file list.
1) 2)
3)
0 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
Active step list window The GOT displays active steps in the displayed block.
1)Block No.
Displays the block No. of the displayed block.
2)[Step List] key
Displays the step list window.
3)Active step list
Displays the step numbers and step comments of the active steps in the displayed block.
Selecting a step searches for the step, and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Precautions for active step list window
When the statuses of steps change, the displayed contents of the active step list in the active step list window
change. Therefore, selecting a step may be difficult depending on the frequency of the step status change.
When selecting a step is difficult, select a step from the step list in the step list window.
Page 218 Step list window
1)
2)
3) 4)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 221
22
Active block list window The GOT displays active blocks in the read SFC program.
1)[Block List] key
Displays the block list screen.
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
2)Active block list
Displays the block numbers and block titles of active blocks in the read SFC program.
Selecting a block displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
3)Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Precautions for active block list window
When the statuses of blocks change, the displayed contents of the active block list in the active block list
window change. Therefore, selecting a block may be difficult depending on the frequency of the block status
change.
When selecting a block is difficult, select a block from the block list on the block list screen.
Page 209 How to Operate Block List Screen
1)
2) 3)
2 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen
5
Monitoring Mode menu
1)[16-bit integer (DEC)]
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16-bit decimal numbers.
Page 201 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
2)[16-bit integer (HEX)]
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16-bit hexadecimal numbers.
Page 201 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
3)[32-bit integer (DEC)]
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit decimal numbers.
Page 201 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
4)[32-bit integer (HEX)]
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit hexadecimal numbers.
Page 201 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
5)[32-bit real number]
Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32-bit floating-point numbers with the exponential
representation.
Page 201 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
2)
1)
3)
4)
5)
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.6 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 223
22
5.7 Test Operation In the device test mode of the sequence program monitor (SFC), device values can be changed on the screen.
For setting the device test mode, refer to the following.
Page 210 Key functions
Page 214 Key functions
The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode.
Touching a device displays the device test window.
When touching bit devices
A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window.
When touching word devices
The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device.
How to operate device test window
Bit devices
1)Device
Displays the selected device.
2)[ON] button
Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
3)[OFF] button
Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU.
Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section
Block information list on the block list screen Page 209 Displayed contents
SFC diagram display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen Page 211 How to Operate SFC
Diagram Monitor ScreenDevice current value display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen
Ladder program display area in the zoom window Page 214 SFC diagram
monitor screen
1)
3)2)
4 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.7 Test Operation
5
Word devices
1)Device
Displays the selected device.
2)Device value input area
Set the value to be written into the selected device.
3)Input mode
Displays the current input mode. (DEC: decimal number, HEX: hexadecimal number)
4)Input mode switching key
Switches the input modes. (DEC, HEX)
5)Enter key
Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU.
6)Delete key
Deletes an input value or character.
7)Delete all key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
6)
7)
1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
6)
7)
(Monitoring mode : 16-bit integer (DEC)) (Monitoring mode : 32-bit integer (HEX))
5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.7 Test Operation 225
22
5.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action The following shows the error messages for the sequence program monitor (SFC) and the corrective actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
Failed to write the value to the device. In the device test mode, the GOT fails to write
the value into the device of the PLC CPU.
(1) Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC CPU.
(2) Check if the target device is writable with prameters of the
target PLC CPU.
Failed to communicate with CPU. The GOT cannot communicate with the target
PLC CPU.
Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC CPU.
File access error. Confirm the SD card. A file access error occurs. (1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.
(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16.
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the SD
card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
Failed to get the information. The GOT cannot communicate with the
PLC CPU.
A file with faulty file name is selected.
Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC
CPU.
Select the file after changing the message display language to
one which can display the file name in the utility.
Change the file name with GX Developer.
Failed to save files because of an
insufficient capacity of SD card.
The SD card has insufficient space for storing
files.
(1) Delete files in the SD card.
(2) Install a large capacity SD card.
The file(file name) is broken. The file is
unselected.
The file read from the SD card is broken. (1) Do not select broken files.
(2) Overwrite the broken file with the unbroken file.
Failed to write (file name) to SD card. The GOT fails to write the file into the SD card. (1) When no SD card is installed, install a SD card.
(2) When the SD card access switch is off, turn on the switch.
(3) Check if folders and files within the SEQDAT folder in the SD
card are writable. When the folders and files are not writable,
make sure that the folders and files are writable.
(4) Check if the SD card is formatted with FAT16.
When the SD card is not formatted with FAT16, format the SD
card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT.
Change the Data save location of Q/QnA
ladder monitor to A: or B:
The sequence program monitor (SFC) is
started with [Data save location] is set to a
drive other than [A: Built-in SD card] and
[B:Memory card] in the sequence program
monitor (ladder) setting.
Set [Data save location] to [A: Built-in SD card] or [B:Memory
card] in the sequence program monitor (ladder) setting of the
GOT utility.
The ladder block is too big to display. The GOT cannot display a sequence program
in the zoom window because the program has
a ladder block with 25 or more lines.
Split the ladder block.
The specified block does not exist.
Confirm the program.
The GOT cannot display the specified block
data in the SFC diagram because the
specified block does not exist.
Correct the program with GX Developer and operate the GOT
for reading the file from the PLC.
The file(file name) is broken. Perform PLC
Read and read the file again.
The GOT cannot display the program file data
on the block list screen or SFC diagram
monitor screen because the program file is
broken.
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
The device range has been changed.
Please read the file again.
The GOT cannot read the target device values
of the sequence program monitor (SFC)
because the device range is changed in the
PLC parameter setting during the sequence
program monitor (SFC).
Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC.
Cannot read programs other than SFC
program.
The program file specified by a key on the
block list screen or the SFC diagram monitor
screen is not a SFC program.
Specify a SFC program by a key on the block list screen or the
SFC diagram monitor screen.
6 5 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) 5.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
6
6 NETWORK MONITOR
Page 227 Features
Page 229 Specifications
Page 236 Operations for display
Page 239 Operation Procedures
Page 276 Error Message and Corrective Action
6.1 Features The network monitor function enables the GOT to monitor and display the status of the following networks.
MELSECNET/H
MELSECNET/10
MELSECNET(II)
CC-Link IE TSN
CC-Link IE Controller Network
CC-Link IE Field Network
Selectable from detailed monitoring or other station monitoring for a desired network by the line monitor The line monitor enables you to monitor the status of all network lines connected to the host station.
In addition, you can also perform detailed monitoring of a desired network and monitoring of other stations by touch input on
the line monitor.
Monitoring available for the detailed network information with the detailed monitor The detailed network information of the host station is displayed on the dedicated monitor screen.
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.1 Features 227
22
Monitoring available for other stations status with the other station monitor You can monitor the following status of other stations connected to the network.
Communication status of each station
Data link status of each station
Parameter status of each station
CPU action status of each station
CPU RUN status of each station
Loop status of each station
Other station monitor menu
Other station communication status monitor
8 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.1 Features
6
6.2 Specifications Page 229 System configuration
Page 231 Network information that can be monitored
Page 234 Access range
Page 234 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the network monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 When a redundant system is configured, the network monitor is not supported.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
RCPU : Available, : Unavailable
*1 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *2 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection. *3 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *4 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
Controller Model
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
R08PCPU *1, R16PCPU *1, R32PCPU *1, R120PCPU *1
R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU
QCPU (Q mode) Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU,
Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDCPU, Q06UDCPU,
Q13UDCPU, Q26UDCPU,
Q10UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU,
Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
LCPU L02CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connec tion
Direct CPU connec tion (serial)
Serial communica tion connection
Ethernet connection
MELSEC NET/H connection , MELSEC NET/10 connection
CC-Link IE TSN connection
CC-Link IE controller connection *1, CC-Link IE field connection *2
CC- Link connec tion
ID *3
G4 *4
Network
monitor
Monitors the statuses of
the following networks.
CC-Link IE TSN
CC-Link IE controller
network
CC-Link IE field
network
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications 229
23
When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), Motion CPU (Q series), QnACPU, or Motion CPU (A series)
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *2 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection. *3 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *4 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *5 When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10, use a QCPU and a network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-
25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, or QJ71BR11) of function version B or a later version. *6 Network monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
When the GOT is connected to an ACPU/QCPU (A mode) : Available, : Unavailable
*1 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *2 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *3 Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is AnUCPU and a MELSECNET/10 network module is used.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the sequence program monitor (SFC) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connec tion
Direct CPU connec tion (serial)
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *6
MELSEC NET/H connection, MELSEC NET/10 connection *5
CC-Link IE controller connection *1, CC-Link IE field connection *2
CC- Link connec tion
ID *3
G4 *4
Network
monitor
Monitors the statuses of the
following networks.
MELSECNET/H network
MELSECNET/10 network
MELSECNET(II) network
CC-Link IE controller network
CC-Link IE field network
*4
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection
Direct CPU connection (serial)
Computer link connection
Ethernet connection
MELSECNET/ 10 connection
CC-Link connection
ID *1 G4 *2
Network
monitor
Monitors the statuses of the
following networks.
MELSECNET/H network
MELSECNET/10 network
MELSECNET(II) network
*3
0 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications
6
Network information that can be monitored The network information that can be monitored with the network monitor and the link types are as follows.
: Can be monitored, : Cannot be monitored
Function Network Informatio n
MELSEC NET(II) MELSEC NET/10 MELSEC NET/H
CC-Link IE TSN CC-Link IE controller network
CC-Link IE field network
master station
local station
control station
normal station
remote master station
master station
local station
control station
normal station
master station
local station
Line monitor Network
category
display
Network
number
display
Station
number
display
Host
operation
mode
Host loop
line status
Loopback
execution
status
Link scan
time display
Data link
system loop
status
Host
communicat
ion status
*1
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications 231
23
Detailed
monitor
Host
inform
ation
Host
number
Host
Network
number
Group
number
Control
station
inform
ation
Specified
control
station
Current
control
station
Communica
tion
information
Sub-control-
station link
Remote-I/O-
master-
station
station
number
Data
link
inform
ation
Total of
linked
stations
Largest
connected
stations
Largest
data-linked
station
*5
Communica
tion status
Causes of
interrupted
communicat
ion
Causes of
data link
stoppage
Consta
nt link
scan
Constant
link scan
BWY
receive
BWY from
the master
station
BW
receive
BW from the
master
station in
the higher
loop
Function Network Informatio n
MELSEC NET(II) MELSEC NET/10 MELSEC NET/H
CC-Link IE TSN CC-Link IE controller network
CC-Link IE field network
master station
local station
control station
normal station
remote master station
master station
local station
control station
normal station
master station
local station
2 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications
6
Detailed
monitor
Loopb
ack
Forward
loop status
*2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Reverse
loop status
*2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loopback
station
(forward
loop)
*2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loopback
station
(reverse
loop)
*2 *2 *2 *3 *3
Loop
switching
frequency
*2 *2 *2
PORT1
Loop
*4
PORT2
Loop
*4
Loop Back
Sta.1
*4
Loop Back
Sta.2
*4
Loop
Switching
Host
status
Parameter
settings
Designation
of reserved
station
Communica
tions mode
Designation
of
transmissio
n
*2 *2 *2
Transmissio
n status
*2 *2 *2
Other station
monitor
Communica
tion status
of each
station
Communica
tions status
of each
station
*5
Parameter
status of
each station
CPU action
status of
each station
*5
CPU RUN
status of
each station
*5
Loop status
of each
station
*2 *2 *2
Function Network Informatio n
MELSEC NET(II) MELSEC NET/10 MELSEC NET/H
CC-Link IE TSN CC-Link IE controller network
CC-Link IE field network
master station
local station
control station
normal station
remote master station
master station
local station
control station
normal station
master station
local station
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications 233
23
*1 Monitoring is only possible when connected to a MELSECNET(II) local station. *2 Monitoring is possible only when using a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 loop system. *3 The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
"Forward loop" for the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, and MELSECNET(II) networks refers to "OUT-side loop" for the CC-Link IE Controller Network. "Reverse loop" for the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, and MELSECNET(II) networks refers to "IN-side loop" for the CC-Link IE Controller Network.
*4 Monitoring is possible only when using a loopback function. *5 Monitoring is possible only when communication is performed in the multicast mode.
Access range In the bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection, or Ethernet connection, only the host
station can be monitored.
In MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection, only the control station can be monitored.
In the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) or CC-Link IE Field Network connection, only the master station can be
monitored.
In CC-Link connection (via G4), only the host and master stations can be monitored.
When the GOT is connected to the remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system, no stations can be monitored.
The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Station monitored as the host The station monitored as the host differs depending on the connection type.
When the network monitor cannot be displayed correctly The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly in the following cases.
When the network module is performing offline testing The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly during offline testing.
Set the network module mode to online.
When the network parameter has been changed The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is changed.
Restart the network monitor.
When there is a network parameter error The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when there is a network parameter error.
Review the network parameter.
When the network parameter is not set The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is not set.
Be sure to set the network parameter when monitoring the network with the GOT.
Connection type Station monitored as the host
Bus connection
Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection
Connected station (target)
Ethernet connection Station set as the host with the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
MELSECNET/H connection,
MELSECNET/10 connection,
CC-Link IE controller network connection
Control station
CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station)
CC-Link connection (Via G4)
CC-Link IE field network connection
CC-Link IE TSN connection
Master station
4 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications
6
When changing the head addresses on CPU side to which refresh parameter is set The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly if the SB and SW head addresses of the CPU side are changed when
refresh parameter is set in the network parameter.
To monitor the network with the GOT, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side to default.
However, for CC-Link IE field network connection, set the SB and SW head addresses on CPU side according to the position
where the network module is installed.
When monitoring the network status of MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE Field Network Even if the status of a network module on MELSECNET/H, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Controller Network, or CC-Link IE
Field Network is being monitored, the status of a network module on MELSECNET/10 is displayed in the following cases.
The normal station has been started due to a communication error (cable disconnection, etc.)
The monitor target is the remote master station.
When monitoring the network status of MELSECNET(II) When connected to a QnACPU and the master station of the MELSECNET(II), monitoring cannot be done with the keyword
being defined.
When the CPU type of the connection target of the GOT is AnNCPU or AnACPU Even when using the network module of the MELSECNET/10, the network information that can be monitored is the content of
the MELSECNET(II).
Display of loop status for CC-Link IE Field Network In ring topology with CC-Link IE field network, if an error occurs in a local module which is not directly connected to a master
module and the network comes into loopback status, information cannot be acquired from the master station.
Therefore, in the above case, the loop status cannot be displayed on the line monitor normally.
Installation position of the network module
1st 2nd 3rd 4th
0000 0200 0400 0600
Master station Local station
GOT
Error The loop status can be displayed normally.
GOT
Error
The loop status cannot be displayed normally.
When an error occurs in a local station which is directly connected to a master station
When an error occurs in a local station which is not directly connected to a master station
Master station Local station
Local station
Local station
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.2 Specifications 235
23
6.3 Operations for display This section explains how to display the network monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the network monitor screen by one of the following methods.
Starting from the special function switch (Network monitor) set in the project data
For information on how to set special function switches, refer to the following
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Network monitor] from the Main Menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of thecontroller targeted to the network.
After the GOT is turned on, the communication setting window is displayed automatically only at the first startup of the
network monitor.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the network monitor screen.
Page 239 Operation Procedures
4. The network monitor startup.
The network monitor starts after a channel number is selected.
Communication setting window
6 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.3 Operations for display
6
Changing screens
Line monitor
Detailed monitor
Communication setting window
Touch the [Ch: ] key
Touch a module.
Touch a box. (Select a box)
Other station monitor screen
Other station monitor menu screen
(Select a menu item)
[End] key
[End] key [End] key
[End] key
[RET] key
[RET] key
[RET] key
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.3 Operations for display 237
23
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the network monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special function
switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed System configuration screen
[] key
The network monitor is started.
[End] key
8 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.3 Operations for display
6
6.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the network monitor screen.
The display screen of the network monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
Page 239 Line monitor
Page 244 Detailed monitor
Page 263 Other station monitor
Page 264 Other station communication status monitor
Page 266 Other station data link status monitor
Page 268 Other station parameter status monitor
Page 270 Other station CPU operation status monitor
Page 272 Other station CPU RUN status monitor
Page 274 Other station loop status monitor
Line monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the line monitor.
Display contents and keys functions
Displayed contents This section describes the line monitor screen configuration and the function of keys displayed on the screen after starting the
network monitor.
1)[Mode]
This shows the operation mode of the host.
The following shows the display items.
[On-line]
[Off-line]
[Test]
[Test] is only displayed when using MELSECNET(II).
When using a system other than MELSECNET(II), [Off-line] is displayed even during testing of the forward or reverse loop.
1)
5) 4) 3) 2)
7)
6)
8)
9)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 239
24
2)[F-loop]
This shows the status of the F-loop (Forward loop).
The following shows the display items.
[OK]
[NG]
The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
3)[R-loop]
This shows the status of the R-loop (Reverse loop).
The following shows the display items.
[OK]
[NG]
The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below.
4)[Loop back]
This shows whether the loopback was executed or not.
The following shows the display items.
[Executed]
[Not executed]
5)[Link scan time]
This shows the link scan time required for the control station and the normal station, for the remote master station and the
remote I/O station, and for the master station and all the sub-stations.
The following shows the display items.
6)Communication status
This shows the communication status of the host.
The status of only a local station in the MELSECNET(II) network is displayed.
The following shows the display items.
7)Network name
This shows the network category, network number, and station number.
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) network systems
CC-Link IE controller network CC-Link IE field network
Forward loop OUT-side loop PORT1-side loop
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, MELSECNET(II) network systems
CC-Link IE controller network CC-Link IE field network
Reverse loop IN-side loop PORT2-side loop
Item Description
[Maximum] The maximum value of link scan time
[Minimum] The minimum value of link scan time
[Current] The current value of link scan time
Item Description
[P-MTR WAIT] Ready to receive parameters from the master station
[Cyclic com] Normal communication
[Com. suspension] Communication is suspended because the host is disconnected
0 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
8)Loop status
For the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network systems, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
F indicates the forward loop and R indicates the reverse loop.
For the MELSECNET(II)network system, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
F indicates the forward loop and R indicates the reverse loop.
For CC-Link IE TSN, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
For the CC-Link IE controller network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
Forward loop: OK Reverse loop: OK
R F
Forward loop: OK Reverse loop: NG
R F
Forward loop: NG Reverse loop: OK
R F
Loopback in execution
R
F
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus (OK)
Forward loop: NG Reverse loop: NG
R F
MELSECNET/10 coaxial bus (NG)
Data link in execution in forward loop
R F
Data link in execution in reverse loop.
R F
Loopback is performed in the forward, reverse loop direction.
R
F
Loopback is performed in the forward loop direction only
R
F
Loopback is performed in the reverse loop direction only.
R
F Data link is not available.
R F
Normal status (star topology, line topology)
Error status (star topology, line topology)
Normal status Loopback in execution All stations with errors
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 241
24
For the CC-Link IE field network, the loop status is displayed as shown below.
9)[Number of installed network modules]
This shows the number of installed network modules.
When the GOT target is AnACPU or AnNCPU
"MELSECNET(II)" is displayed even if a MELSECNET/10 network module is installed.
In addition, if there is a master station and local station, module 1 of the line monitor is displayed as "Master station"
Network module Display on the GOT
1st module 2nd module Module 1 Module 2
Local station Master station Master station Local station
Normal status (ring topology) Loopback in execution on PORT1side (ring topology)
Loopback in execution on PORT2 side (ring topology)
Error status (ring topology) Normal status (star topology, line topology)
Error status (star topology, line topology)
PORT2
PORT1
PORT2
PORT1
2 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions
1)[Ch: 1] key
Displays the communication setting window.
2)Monitoring target CPU
The monitoring target CPU is changeable by switching the CPU number only when the CPU is in the multiple CPU system.
The CPU number is displayed according to the number of mounted CPU modules.
3)[END] key
Exits the line monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
4)Detailed monitor
Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the module displayed on the current monitor screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
5)Other station monitor
Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current monitor screen.
This key is effective for each screen.
6)Module display switching key
Switches the module display.
1)
5)
4)
3)2)
6)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 243
24
Detailed monitor This section describes the detailed monitor and the common operations used when executing the line monitor.
Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H or MELSECNET/10 Control station/normal station This section describes the contents of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys. All these are displayed and
used when the host acts as the control station/normal station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10.
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[Ctrl St Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's #] Indicates the station number of the host.
[Network #] Indicates the network number.
[Group #] Indicates the group number.
Item Description
[Spc Ctrlr Sta] Indicates the station number of the station that is specified as a control station.
[Curr Ctrl Sta] Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the control station.
[Com Info] Indicates whether the host is communicating with the control station or the sub-control station.
[SubCtrl Sta Com] Indicates whether there is a sub-control station link.
[Rmt I/OMstSt] Displays the station number of the remote I/O master station for X/Y communication block1 and block 2.
Displays "None" when there is no setting.
This is not displayed when the CPU type of the GOT connection target is AnNCPU or AnACPU
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Indicates the maximum number of the communication stations that is defined with common parameters.
[Largest Nrm Sta] Indicates the maximum station number of the station performing a communication in a normal condition.
[Largest DL-Sta] Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is data-linked.
1)
5)
4)
3)
2)
6)
4 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
4)[Constant LS]
The following shows the display items.
5)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
[---] is displayed for all the items when coaxial bus connection is established.
6)[TsSt' Sta]
The following shows the display items.
[Com Status] Shows the current communications status of the host.
[D-Link in prog]
[D-Link Stop (A)]
[D-Link Stop (H)]
[B-Pass excut]
[Disconnection]
[Loop test]
[Set Conf. test]
[Sta Odr. Conf.]
[Com. test]
[Offline test]
[Reset. in prgr.]
[Causes of Ssp] Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Offline]
[Offline Test]
[Line error]
[Disconnection]
[Initialize]
[Others (error codes)]
[Causes of Stop] Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Stop disignat]
[No common para]
[Host Para error]
[Host CPU error]
[Com. suspension]
[Others (error codes)]
Item Description
[Constant LS] Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
Item Description
[FLoop] Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[RLoop] Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[FLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the forward loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
[RLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
[# of Loop Switching] Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched.
Item Description
[Parameter Setting] Displays [Common Param], [Common+Specif], [Default Param], or [Default+Specif].
[Reserved Sta] Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
[Communication Mode] Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
[Transmission Mode] Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
[Transmission Stat] Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans.
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
Item Description
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 245
24
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was executed.
1) 2)
6 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 remote master station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the host acts
as the remote master station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10.
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[Ctrl St Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Sations #] Indicates the station number of the host.
[Network #] Indicates the network number.
[Group #] "---" is displayed.
Item Description
[Spc Ctrl Sta] "---" is displayed.
[Curr Ctrl Sta] "---" is displayed.
[Com Info] "---" is displayed.
[SubCtrl-Sta Com] "---" is displayed.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is set by common parameters.
[Largest Nrm Sta] Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is connected in a normal condition.
[Largest DL-Sta] Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is performing data link.
[Com Status] Shows the current communications status of the host.
[D-Link in prog]
[D-Link Stop (A)]
[D-Link Stop (H)]
[B-Pass excut]
[Disconnection]
[Loop test]
[Set Conf. test]
[Sta Odr. Conf.]
[Com. test]
[Offline test]
[Reset. in prgr]
1)
5)
4)
3)
2)
6)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 247
24
4)[Constant LS]
The following shows the display items.
5)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
[---] is displayed for all the items when coaxial bus connection is established.
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
6)[TsSt' Sta]
The following shows the display items.
[Causes of Ssp] Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Offline]
[Offline Test]
[Line error]
[Disconnection]
[Initialize]
[Others (error codes)]
[Causes of Stop] Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Stop disignat]
[No common para]
[Host Para error]
[Host CPU error]
[Com. suspension]
[Others (error codes)]
Item Description
[Constant LS] Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans.
Item Description
[FLoop] Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[RLoop] Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[FLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the forward loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
[RLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop.
Displays "---" when the loopback is operating normally.
[# of Loop Switching] Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched.
Item Description
[Parameter Setting] "---" is displayed.
[Reserved Sta] Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/None)
[Communication Mode] Indicates either "Normal mode" or "Constant LS."
[Transmission Mode] Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
[Transmission Stat] Indicates either "Normal Trans" or "Multiple Trans."
"---" is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established.
Item Description
8 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
1) 2)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 249
25
Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) master station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the host acts
as the master station on the MELSECNET(II).
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's #] This shows the station number of the host.
[This Station's] Indicates the category of the host.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is defined by common parameters.
Item Description
[FLoop] Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[NG]
[RLoop] Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[NG]
[FLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the forward loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "F" is displayed.
[RLoop Back Station] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop.
When loopback is normal, "---" is displayed.
When there is no loopback station, "R" is displayed.
[# of Loop Switching] Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched.
1) 3)
2)
0 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
1) 2)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 251
25
Display contents and keys functions: acting as a MELSECNET(II) local station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the host acts
as the local station on the MELSECNET(II).
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[Com status]
The following shows the display items.
4)[BWY From Master]
The following shows the display items.
5)[BW From Hostmaster]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's #] Indicates the station number of the host.
[This Station's] Indicates the category of the host.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked, which is defined by common parameters.
Item Description
[Com status] This shows the communication status of the host.
[Parameter wait]
[Cyclic comm]
[Com. suspension]
Item Description
[BWY From Master] This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station.
OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
Item Description
[BW From Hostmaster] This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master station of a dual-layer system.
OK: Data is being received by cyclic communication.
NG: Unable to receive because the host is disconnected, etc.
1) 6)
2)
4)
5)
3)
2 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
6)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
Item Description
[FLoop] Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[NG]
[RLoop] Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host.
[Normal]
[NG]
[FLoop Back Station] "---" is displayed.
[RLoop Back Station] "---" is displayed.
[# of Loop Switching] "---" is displayed.
1) 2)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 253
25
Display contents and keys functions when using the master station or local station on CC-Link IE TSN. This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on-screen keys when the host
station acts as the master station or local station on CC-Link IE TSN.
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[CtrlSt Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's#] Displays the host station number.
[NetWork#] Displays the network number of the host station.
[Group#] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Spc Ctrl Sta] [---] is displayed.
[Curr Ctrl Sta] [---] is displayed.
[Com Info] [---] is displayed.
[SubCtrl Sta Com] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for common parameters.
[Largest Nrm Sta] [---] is displayed.
[Largest DL-Sta] Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data link.
[0] is displayed for a local station communicating in the unicast mode.
[Com Status] [---] is displayed.
[Cause of Ssp] [---] is displayed.
[Cause of Stop] Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Monitoring Time Up]
[No Slave Sta.]
[Parameter not Received]
[Host Reserved Station Setting]
[Station No. Unassigned]
[Parameter Error]
[Parameter Communicating]
[CPU Module Err]
[Ring connection]
1) 4)
2)
3)
5)
6)
4 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
4)[Constant LS]
The following shows the display items.
5)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
In the following cases, "---" is displayed for all items.
Coaxial bus connection
Line/star topology
6)[TsSt' Sta]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[Constant LS] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[PORT1 Loop] [---] is displayed.
Shows the status of the PORT1 loop lines when a master station is monitored.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[PORT2 Loop] [---] is displayed.
Shows the status of the PORT1 loop lines when a master station is monitored.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[Loop Back Sta.1] [---] is displayed.
Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback when a master station is monitored.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[Loop Back Sta.2] [---] is displayed.
Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback when a master station is monitored.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[#of Loop Switching] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Parameter Setting] [---] is displayed.
[Reserved Sta] Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
[Communication Mode] [---] is displayed.
[Transmission Mode] [---] is displayed.
[Transmission Stat] [---] is displayed.
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 255
25
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
1) 2)
6 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Display contents and keys functions when monitoring CC-Link IE controller network This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the GOT
monitors a control station or normal station on the CC-Link IE controller network set as the host station.
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[CtrlSt Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's#] Displays the host station number.
[NetWork#] Displays the network number of the host station.
[Group#] Displays the group number.
Item Description
[Spc Ctrl Sta] Displays the station number set as the control station.
[Curr Ctrl Sta] Displays the station number of the station currently operating as the control station.
[Com Info] Displays whether the GOT communicates with the control station or sub-control station.
[SubCtrl Sta Com] [---] is displayed.
[RmtI/OMstSta] Displays the station numbers of the I/O master stations for block 1 and block 2.
[None] is displayed with no setting.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for common parameters.
[Largest Nrm Sta] Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating normally.
[Largest DL-Sta] Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data link.
[Com Status] Displays the current communication status of the host station.
[D-Link in prog.]
[D-Link stopped]
[B-Pass excut]
[B-Pass stopped]
[Offline test]
[Offline]
1) 4)
2)
3)
5)
6)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 257
25
4)[Constant LS]
The following shows the display items.
5)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.
[---] is displayed for all the items when coaxial bus connection is established.
6)[TsSt' Sta]
The following shows the display items.
[Cause of Ssp] Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Cable disconnct]
[Wrong cable]
[Checking cables]
[Disconnct/retrn]
[Offline mode]
[Offline test]
[Self-check mode]
When the station is in the hardware test mode, self-loopback test mode, circuit test mode, or station-to-
station test mode, [Offline test] is displayed.
[Cause of Stop] Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Stop disignat]
[D-Link time up]
[Testing line]
[Param not rcvd]
[ Invlid Host No.]
[Set Rsvd Sta.]
[Dup Host No.]
[Dup CtrlSta No.]
[Sta No. not set]
[Invlid NTWK No.]
[Host Para error]
[Params in comm.]
[CPU stop error]
[CPU pwr stp err]
Item Description
[Constant LS] Displays the set contact link scan time.
Item Description
[OUT Loop] Displays the OUT-side loop line status of the host station.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[All Sta. NG]
[IN Loop] Displays the IN-side loop line status of the host station.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[All Sta. NG]
[OUT Loop Back Sta.] Displays the station number of the OUT-side loopback station.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[IN Loop Back Sta.] Displays the station number of the IN-side loopback station.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[#of Loop Switching] Displays the accumulated number of switching loops.
Item Description
[Parameter Setting] Displays [No parameters], [Common Param], [Unique param], or [Common+unique].
[Reserved Sta] Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.
[Communication Mode] Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
[Transmission Mode] [---] is displayed.
[Transmission Stat] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
8 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
1) 2)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 259
26
Display contents and keys functions when monitoring a master/local station on the CC- Link IE field network This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on-screen keys when the GOT
monitors a master station or local station on the CC-Link IE field network set as the host station.
Displayed contents
1)[TsSt' Info]
The following shows the display items.
2)[CtrlSt Info]
The following shows the display items.
3)[D-Link Info]
The following shows the display items.
Item Description
[This Station's#] Displays the host station number.
[NetWork#] Displays the network number of the host station.
[Group#] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Spc Ctrl Sta] [---] is displayed.
[Curr Ctrl Sta] [---] is displayed.
[Com Info] [---] is displayed.
[SubCtrl Sta Com] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Total of L-Sta] Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for common parameters.
[Largest Nrm Sta] Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating normally.
[Largest DL-Sta] Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data link.
[Com Status] Displays the current communication status of the host station.
[D-Link in prog.]
[B-Pass excut]
[B-Pass stopped]
[Offline test]
[Offline]
[Cause of Ssp] Displays the reason for the interrupted communication.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Cable disconnct]
[Disconnct/retrn]
[Offline mode]
[Offline test]
When the station is in the hardware test mode, offline test mode, or self-loopback test mode, [Offline test] is
displayed.
1) 4)
2)
3)
5)
6)
0 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
4)[Constant LS]
The following shows the display items.
5)[LoopBK Info]
The following shows the display items.s
In the following cases, "---" is displayed for all items.
Coaxial bus connection
Line/star topology
6)[TsSt' Sta]
The following shows the display items.
[Cause of Stop] Displays the reason for the interrupted data link.
This indicates [Normal] if communications are normal.
[Stop disignat]
[D-Link time up]
[No Slave Sta.]
[Param not rcvd]
[Invlid Host No.]
[Set Rsvd Sta.]
[Dup Host No.]
[Dup Master Sta.]
[Sta No. not set]
[Host Para error]
[Params in comm.]
[Station Type]
[CPU stop error]
[Ring connection]
Item Description
[Constant LS] Displays the set contact link scan time.
Item Description
[PORT1 Loop] Shows the status of the PORT1-side loop.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[PORT2 Loop] Shows the status of the PORT2-side loop.
[Normal]
[LoopBK Trans]
[D-Link Impo]
[Loop Back Sta.1] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[Loop Back Sta.2] Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback.
[---] is displayed with normal loopbacks.
[#of Loop Switching] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
[Parameter Setting] [---] is displayed.
[Reserved Sta] Displays whether a reserved station exists or not.Indicates the availability of a reserved station. (Have/
None)
[Communication Mode] Displays [Normal Mode] or [Constant LS].
[Transmission Mode] [---] is displayed.
[Transmission Stat] [---] is displayed.
Item Description
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 261
26
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the detailed monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
1) 2)
2 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Other station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other station
monitor.
Display contents and keys functions: other station monitor menu This section describes the other station monitor menu screen and the function of on-screen keys. The menu screen for the
other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the host monitor screen.
By this other station monitor menu, each of the other station monitor can be specified.
Displayed contents
1)[COM STA]
Switches to the communication status monitor for other stations.
Page 264 Other station communication status monitor
This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) local station is selected using the line monitor.
2)[D-Link]
Switches to the data link status monitor for other stations.
Page 266 Other station data link status monitor
This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station is selected using the line monitor.
3)[P-MTR]
Switches to the parameter status monitor for other stations.
Page 268 Other station parameter status monitor
This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET(II) local station is selected using the line monitor.
4)[CPU OP]
Switches to the CPU operation status monitor for other stations.
Page 270 Other station CPU operation status monitor
This cannot be selected when a remote I/O station is selected using the line monitor.
5)[CPU RUN]
Switches to the CPU RUN status monitor for other stations.
Page 272 Other station CPU RUN status monitor
This cannot be selected when a remote I/O station is selected using the line monitor.
6)[Loop]
Switches to the loop status monitor for other stations.
Page 274 Other station loop status monitor
The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor
3)
4)1)
2)
5)
6)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 263
26
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the line monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started.
Other station communication status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station communication status
monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the screen configuration of the other station communication status monitor and the function of keys
displayed on it.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
Displayed contents
1)Maximum number of communication stations
Displays the communication status by station number.
The following shows the display items.
[OK]
[ERR]
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
1) 2)
3)
1)
2)
4 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
2)Communication error station
Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
3)Reserved station
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station communication status
monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station communication statuses monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was
started.
3)Display switching key
Switches the screen display of stations.
The screen display is switched between the screen for station 1 to 80 and the screen for station 81 to 120.
1) 2)
3)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 265
26
Other station data link status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station data link status monitor
is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the screen configuration of the other station data link status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) master station or local station.
Displayed contents
1)Station number
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network, the station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of
station numbers in the network.
2)Data link status display
Status Description
[OK] Displayed when data link is performed.
[OK] is displayed also for the following stations.
Unused station number
Reserved station
Local station on CC-Link IE TSN with which unicast communications are performed
[NO] Displayed when data link is not performed.
1)
2)
6 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station data link status monitor
screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station data link status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started.
3)Display switching key
Switches the screen display of stations.
The screen display is switched between the screen for station 1 to 80 and the screen for station 81 to 120.
1) 2)
3)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 267
26
Other station parameter status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station data link status monitor
is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the screen configuration of the other station parameter status monitor and the function of on-screen
keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
Displayed contents
1)Parameter status display
Displays the parameter status by station number.
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE field network, station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of station numbers in the
network.
2)Parameter communication station
Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted.
Only [Parameter Err Sta.] is displayed when connecting to a MELSECNET(II) master station.
3)Faulty station
Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
4)Reserved station
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
3)
1)
4)
2)
8 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station parameter status monitor
screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started.
3)Display switching key
Switches the screen display of stations.
The screen display is switched between the screen for station 1 to 80 and the screen for station 81 to 120.
1) 2)
3)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 269
27
Other station CPU operation status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station CPU operation status
monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the screen configuration of the other station CPU operation status monitor and the function of on-
screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
Displayed contents
1)Station number
The station number displayed does not indicate the station number in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
For CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network, the station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of
station numbers in the network.
2)CPU operation status
Status Description
[OK] Displayed when the CPU operates normally.
[OK] is displayed also for the following stations.
Unused station number
Reserved station
Local station on CC-Link IE TSN with which unicast communications are performed
[ERR] Displayed when the CPU does not operate normally.
[ERR] is displayed also for a stopped station.
[----] Displayed for a MELSECNET(II) local station.
2)
1)
0 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station CPU operation status
monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station CPU operation status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started.
3)Display switching key
Switches the screen display of stations.
The screen display is switched between the screen for station 1 to 80 and the screen for station 81 to 120.
1) 2)
3)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 271
27
Other station CPU RUN status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station CPU RUN status
monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor and the function of on-screen keys.
This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I/O network system.
Displayed contents
1)Station number
Up to 64 stations are displayed regardless of the number of stations in a network.
For CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network, the station number 1 to 120 are displayed regardless of the number of
station numbers in the network.
2)CPU operation status
Status Description
[RUN] Displayed when the CPU operates normally.
[RUN] is displayed also for the following stations.
Unused station number
Local station on CC-Link IE TSN with which unicast communications are performed
[STOP] Displayed for a stopped CPU.
[DOWN] [DOWN] is displayed for a communication error station.
[----] Displayed for the following stations.
Reserved station
Station beyond the maximum number of communication stations
MELSECNET(II) local station
2)
1)
2 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station CPU RUN status monitor
screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started.
3)Display switching key
Switches the screen display of stations.
The screen display is switched between the screen for station 1 to 80 and the screen for station 81 to 120.
1) 2)
3)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 273
27
Other station loop status monitor This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the other station loop status monitor is
executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the screen configuration of the other station loop status monitor and the function of on-screen keys.
The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions.
When a local station on the MELSECNET(II)network system is selected using the line monitor
When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used
When a station on the CC-Link IE controller network or CC-Link IE field network is selected using the line monitor.
Displayed contents
1)Loop status display
The F-loop (forward loop) status and the R-loop (reverse loop) status are displayed.
2)Station number display
The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network, rather the maximum number of
communication stations.
3)Faulty station display
Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted.
4)Reserved station display
Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations.
2)
1)
4)
3)
4 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures
6
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the other station loop status monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns to the other station monitor.
2)[END] key
Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started.
1) 2)
6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.4 Operation Procedures 275
27
6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action The following shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle them.
Error message Contents of error Action to take
Communication channel setup error There is no channel for communication. Set the channel number in the Communication
Settings of the utility.
Can not Communication Communication could not be established with the
PLC CPU.
Check the connections between the controller
and the GOT for disconnected connectors and
cables.
Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
Key Word error A keyword has been set in the parameter when
monitoring the MELSECNET(II) master station of
the QnACPU.
Release the set keyword.
6 6 NETWORK MONITOR 6.5 Error Message and Corrective Action
7
7 Q MOTION MONITOR
Page 277 Features
Page 279 Specifications
Page 281 Operations for Display
Page 285 Operation Procedures
Page 306 Error Messages and Corrective Action
7.1 Features The Q motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the Motion CPU.
The following are the features of the Q motion monitor.
Various servo monitoring on multiple monitor screens The Q motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens, on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of patterns.
(Display examples)
Present Value Monitor
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
Page 289 Present Value Monitor screen
Error List
Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
Page 293 Error List screen
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.1 Features 277
27
Positioning Monitor
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
Page 297 Positioning Monitor screen
Error List Designated-Axis
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
Page 295 Error List Designated-Axis screen
Servo parameter setting by writing operation Write example: Changing the setting of the auto tuning function
1. By performing writing from the parameter setting screen, write the servo parameter setting (basic parameters/adjustment
parameters) to the Motion CPU.
2. To change a servo parameter setting, enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the automatically
displayed key window, and write it to the Motion CPU.
Parameter setting screen Parameter setting window appears
Change the auto tuning mode from "1" to "2".
Parameter setting screen
Parameter setting is changed.
8 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.1 Features
7
7.2 Specifications Page 279 System configuration
Page 280 Access range
Page 280 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the Q motion monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 To use Q172CPU or Q173CPU, its serial number must be as shown below. For the bus connection and the direct CPU connection (serial), use a Q172CPU that is serial numbered K******* or later, or a Q173CPU that is serial numbered J******* or later. For connection types other than the bus connection and the direct CPU connection (serial), use a Q172CPU that is serial numbered N******* or later, or a Q173CPU that is serial numbered M******* or later.
*2 When using the OS (SV13 or SV22) with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN, install the following version. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial)) SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial))
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
When the GOT is connected to a QCPU (Q mode), QnACPU, or Motion CPU : Available, : Unavailable
*1 Indicates the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. *2 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *3 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *4 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the Q motion monitor cannot be used.
Controller
Motion CPU (Q series) *1*2
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection
Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *4
MELSECNET/ H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection
CC-Link IE controller connection *1
CC-Link connection
ID *2 G4 *3
Servo
monitor
Monitors the
present value,
positioning error
and other servo-
related items on a
variety of monitor
screens.
Parameter
settings
Changes the
setting of the
servo parameter.
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.2 Specifications 279
28
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the Q motion monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Required special data Write the package data, which contains the Q motion monitor data, to the GOT.
The available memory space of the user area for writing varies depending on the Q motion monitor data to be used.
For the Q motion monitor data size and how to write the data to the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Servo amplifiers whose parameter can be set The Q motion monitor allows you to set the parameter of servo amplifiers shown below.
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Main OS software package for Motion CPU The only Main OS software package that can be used is SV13 or SV22.
When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU, after parameter entry, set the switch on the CPU to STOP and RUN
again, or reset the CPU.
Motion CPU Servo amplifier
Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN MR-H-B, MR-J-B, MR-J2-B, MR-J2S-B, MR-J2M, MR-J2-03B5
Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004
Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q172DCPU-S1,
Q173DCPU-S1, Q170MCPU
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W
Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MSCPU,
Q170MSCPU-S1
MR-J3-B, MR-J3-BS, MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080W, MR-J4-B,
MR-J4W-B, MR-J4-B-RJ
0 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.2 Specifications
7
7.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the Q motion monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the Q motion monitor screen by one of the following methods.
Starting from the special function switch (Q motion monitor) set in the project data
For information on how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Motion monitor] from the main menu.
For information on to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the controller monitoring the Q motion.
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the Q motion monitor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [Ch: ] key on the Q motion monitor
screen.
Page 285 Operation Procedures
4. Start the Q motion monitor.
The system configuration screen appears after the channel No. is selected.
Touch a Motion CPU to monitor.
Touching the [Parameter Set.] key displays the parameter setting screen.
Touching the [Motion Monitor] key displays the monitor menu.
Communication setting window
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.3 Operations for Display 281
28
5. Touch the [Parameter Set.] key to display the parameter setting screen.
When you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), enter the password.
Page 302 Parameter setting screen
Select the servo parameter to be set.
Change the servo parameter setting and write the new servo parameter to the Motion CPU.
6. Display the Q motion monitor screen.
Select an item on the menu to display the selected monitor function.
[Present Value Mon.]
Page 289 Present Value Monitor screen
[SFC Error History]
Page 291 SFC Error History screen
[Error List]
Page 293 Error List screen
[Error List Axis]
Page 295 Error List Designated-Axis screen
[Positioning Monitor]
Page 297 Positioning Monitor screen
[Servo Monitor]
Page 299 Servo Monitor screen
[Present Value Hist.]
Page 300 Present Value History Monitor screen
2 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.3 Operations for Display
7
Changing screens
At next startup, the last exited screen is displayed.
However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted due to an installation of the OS, turning the
GOT power from off to on, or a reset.
When the function is started with a special function switch to which a connection destination different from the one at the last
exit is set, the system configuration screen appears.
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Communication setting window
System Configuration screen (Select the Motion CPU to be monitored.)
Monitor menu screen
Monitor screen of selected function Parameter setting screen
Password input key window
(Menu selection)
[END] key
[END] key
[Ch:] key
[Motion Monitor] key
[Sys. Conf] key
[Parameter Set.] key
[Sys. Conf] key
[END] key
[END] key
[Mon. Menu] key
[END] key
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.3 Operations for Display 283
28
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the Q motion monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special function
switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Starting from the special function switch of a system application (Extended function) that has a system configuration screen
When the system application set as a connection destination of the special function switch supports the system launcher
function, the system launcher switching notification dialog appears at the first startup, and the system configuration screen of
the system launcher function appears.
At the second or later startup, the set function screen appears when the system application is started from the user-created
screen.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the set connection destination does not support the system launcher function, a dialog appears at the
startup and the system configuration screen of the set connection destination appears.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The Q motion monitor is started. (Example: Monitor menu screen)
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed
System configuration screen
[] key
[End] key
[Sys. Conf] key
The Q motion monitor is started. (Example: Monitor menu screen)
Application startup (for the first time) Select the target function.
User-created screen (special function switch (Q motion monitor))
System configuration screen
[] key
[End] key
Application startup for the second time or later
[Sys. Conf] key
4 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.3 Operations for Display
7
7.4 Operation Procedures This section explains screen operations to be performed when using the Q motion monitor.
The display screen of the Q motion monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
Page 285 System configuration screen layout
Page 286 Setting method for other station monitoring
Page 288 Monitor Menu screen
Page 289 Present Value Monitor screen
Page 291 SFC Error History screen
Page 293 Error List screen
Page 295 Error List Designated-Axis screen
Page 297 Positioning Monitor screen
Page 299 Servo Monitor screen
Page 300 Present Value History Monitor screen
Page 302 Parameter setting screen
Page 305 Hard copy output
System configuration screen layout This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the Q motion monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the Q motion
monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Motion CPU status display
The CPU numbers are displayed for CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed module.
To choose the Motion CPU for servo monitor/servo parameter setting, touch the respective display position.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys used with the operation on the System Configuration screen.(Touch input)
1)
2) 2)
2)
2)2)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 285
28
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1)Motion CPU status display
Selects the Motion CPU where servo monitor/servo parameter setting is performed.
2)[ch:2] key
Displays the communication setting window.
3)[END] key
Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
4)[Motion Monitor] key
Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen.
Page 288 Monitor Menu screen
5)[Parameter set.] key
Changes the System Configuration screen to parameter setting screen.
Page 302 Parameter setting screen
6)Scroll key
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage immediately
before/after the currently displayed stage.
Setting method for other station monitoring The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with Q motion monitor.
1. In the communication setting window, select one from channels No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer to the following.
Page 287 Communication setting window
4)
5)
6)
6)
3)2)1)
6 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
2. The following window appears after the channel No. is selected.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU station number.
3. After selecting the station number, touch the [Enter] key. The communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
Communication setting window
Displayed screen
1)CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2)Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
The following shows the setting ranges.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), and serial communication connection: [0]
Ethernet connection and CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [239]
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (Host loop) or [1] to [255] (Specified loop)
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]
3)Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The following shows the setting ranges.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), and serial communication connection: [FF] (Host station)
Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
MELSECNET/H connection and MELSECNET/10 connection: [0] (Control station) or [1] to [64] (Local station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120]
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (Master station) or [1] to [64] (Local station)
4)CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
5)Keys
The keys used for the operations in the communication setting window.
5)4)
1) 2)3) 1) 2)3)
When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 287
28
Key functions
1)[] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
2)Input area movement key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
3)[Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the
communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
5)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Monitor Menu screen The Q motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens.
To display any of the monitor screens, make a selection on the monitor menu screen.
1)[Present Value Mon.] key
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
Page 289 Present Value Monitor screen
2)[SFC Error History] key
Displays the history of errors that occurred in SFC programs from when the motion CPU was powered on or reset.
Page 291 SFC Error History screen
3)
2)
1)
4) 5)
1)
2)
3)
5)
6)
7)
4)
8 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
3)[Error List] key
Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready (M2000).
Page 293 Error List screen
4)[Error List Axis] key
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
Page 295 Error List Designated-Axis screen
5)[Positioning Monitor] key
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
Page 297 Positioning Monitor screen
6)[Servo Monitor] key
Monitors the servo monitor/servo amplifier.
Page 299 Servo Monitor screen
7)[Present Value Hist.] key
Displays the history of encoder present values, servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis at servo
amplifier power-on/off or at home position return.
Page 300 Present Value History Monitor screen
Present Value Monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the display data of the Present Value Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Ax]
The axis numbers of the running axes being monitored are displayed.
2)[Feed PV], [Actual PV]
The feed present values or actual present values of the running axes are displayed.
Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the positioning monitor screen of the touched axis number.
Page 297 Positioning Monitor screen
3)[SV RDY], [ERR DT], [SV ERR]
Whether the servo ready signals, major/minor errors and servo error detection signals are ON (lit) or OFF (not lit) are
displayed.
Touching the error indication part "" switches to the Error List Designated-Axis screen of the touched axis number.
Page 295 Error List Designated-Axis screen
1) 2) 3) 4)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 289
29
4)Bit device screen
The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed.
Bit devices for error detection: marked with a red circle
Bit devices for general status display: marked with a green circle
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the present value monitor screen.
1)[Feed PV] key, [Actual PV] key
The key is displayed in the real mode or the advanced synchronous control mode.
Each touch switches between [Feed PV] and [Actual PV].
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
4)Keys for switching the displayed axis numbers
Switches the displayed axis number.
The keys are displayed for monitoring Q173CPU, Q173HCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print]
The operation of this key is invalid.
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
5) 6)
0 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
SFC Error History screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations on the SFC error history screen.
SFC Error History screen The following describes the display data of the SFC error history screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents SFC Error History screen displays the history of error which occurs in the motion SFC programs.
1)[M/D H:M]
Displays the dates and time when SFC errors occurred.
The eight latest errors are displayed for the history of errors.
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
2)[Program No.SECF/G/KBNo.]
Displays the SFC program numbers where SFC errors occurred.
3)[Err Code]
Displays the error codes of the errors that occurred.
4)[Error Definition]
Displays the definitions of the SFC errors that occurred.
5)Page
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the SFC error history.
This item is displayed only when Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU is used.
1) 2) 3) 4)
5)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 291
29
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the SFC error history screen.
1)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
2)[END] key
Exits the SFC Error History screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
3)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
4)[Cancel Print]
The operation of this key is invalid.
5)[History Clear]
Clears the error history.
This item is displayed only when Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU is used.
6)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the SFC error history is displayed.
This item is displayed only when Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU is used.
1) 2)
5)
6)
3) 4)
2 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
Error List screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations on the error list screen.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the display data of the Error List screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents The error list screen displays the error which occurs in the Motion CPU.
Errors occurred in motion SFC programs are also displayed.
1)[M/D H:M]
The dates and time when errors occurred are displayed.
The eight latest errors are displayed.
The 128 errors are displayed for Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, and Q173DSCPU.
2)[Ax]
The axis numbers and axis types of the axes where errors occurred are displayed.
Virtual axis: Virtual
Synchronous encoder axis: Sync
3)[SV P. No.]
The servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred are displayed.
The execution destination of the servo program in error is not displayed.
Using the servo program number, refer to the execution destination.
4)[Err Code]
Displays the types and error codes of the errors that occurred.
The error types are displayed as indicated below.
Minor error: Minor
Major error: Major
Servo error: Servo
Servo program setting error: Servo P
Real, virtual switching: Switch
Test mode request error: Test
Manual pulse generator setting error: Manual
PCPU ERROR: P-WDT
SSCNET ERROR: Communication error
5)[Error Definition]
The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed.
1) 2) 3) 5)4)
7)
6)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 293
29
6)[Set Data]
The program number in error is displayed if the set data has any errors.
7)[Page]
Displays the page number and the total number of pages of the error list.
This item is displayed only when Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU is used.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the error list screen.
1)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
2)[END] key
Exits the Error List screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
3)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
4)[Cancel Print]
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
5)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the history display up and down by eight histories when the error list is displayed.
This item is displayed only when Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, Q172DSCPU, or Q173DSCPU is used.
1) 2)
5)
3) 4)
4 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
Error List Designated-Axis screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the error list designated-axis is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the display data of the Error List Designated-Axis screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Axis No.
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2)Out Module
Displays the output module axis number currently being monitored.
3)Virt. Axis
Displays the virtual axis number currently being monitored.
4)Sync. Enco.
Displays the synchronous encoder axis number currently being monitored.
5)[Program No.]
Displays the servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred.
6)[Err Code]
Displays the error codes of the minor, major, servo error, servo program setting error, real, virtual switching error information
(error code: hexadecimal), personal computer link communication error code and motion CPU WDT error that are currently
occurring.
7)[Error Definition]
Displays the definitions of the errors that occurred.
8)[MAN-PLS Axis ERR]
9)[Test REQ ERR]
Displays the axis numbers that are being started at a test mode request.
Item Description
[Each 1-Pulse 1M Error] Displays the axes where a 1-pulse input magnification setting error occurred.
[MAN-PLS Ax ERR] Displays the errors of the axis numbers set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3.
[Each MAN-PLS SM ERR] Displays the errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse generators P1 to P3.
1)
5)
8)
2)
3)
4)
9)
6) 6)7)
In the real mode or the advanced synchronous control mode In virtual mode
7)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 295
29
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the error list designated-axis screen.
1)[1Ax] key
Switches the axes to be monitored.
This item is available only in the real mode.
2)[Out Module 1Ax] key, [Virt. Axis 1Ax] key, [Sync. Enco. 1Ax] key,
Switches the axes to be monitored.
These items are available only in the virtual mode.
3)[RET] key
Returns to the previous screen.
4)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
5)[END] key
Exits the Error List Designated-Axis monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
6)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
7)[Cancel Print]
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
1)
2)
2)
2)
3) 4) 5) 3) 4) 5)
In the real mode or the advanced synchronous control mode In virtual mode 6) 7) 6) 7)
6 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
Positioning Monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the positioning monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the display data of the Positioning Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Data Item
Displays the axis numbers of the running axes being monitored.
For the virtual axis, the axis type is displayed.
Roller
Ballscrew
Rotary table
Cam
2)Positioning control data
Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU.
3)[EXE Cam No.]
Displays the cam number currently controlled.
4)[EXE Stroke]
Displays the stroke amount currently controlled.
5)[Cam Ax. 1 Rev.]
Displays the present value within one cam axis revolution pulse.
6)[Status]
Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the axis-by-axis control statuses.
In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
At error or servo error detection, the symbol is lit red.
7)[CMD Signal]
Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signals.
In the ON status, the signal is lit green.
Item Description
[Feed PV] Target address output to the servo amplifier (value of the roller surface speed for the roller axis)
[Actual PV] Actually traveled present value (no value is displayed for the roller axis)
[Dvt. Counter] Difference between feed present value and actual present value
[EXE Prog No.] Servo program number in execution
[Min/Major SV ERR] Error code of the latest minor/major/servo error
[M Code T Limit] The M code and torque limit of the servo program in execution
1)
2) 2)
1)
3)
5) 4)
In the real mode or the advanced synchronous control mode In virtual mode
6) 7) 6) 7)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 297
29
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the positioning monitor screen.
1)[Data Item 1Ax]
Changes the axes to be monitored.
2)[RET] key
Returns to the previous screen.
3)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
4)[END] key
Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print]
The operation of this key is invalid.
1) 1)
In the real mode or the advanced synchronous control mode In virtual mode
2) 3) 4) 2) 3) 4)
5) 6) 5) 6)
8 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
Servo Monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the servo monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions This section describes the display data of the Servo Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Ax
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2)[Motor Speed]
Displays the actual speed of the servo motor.
3)[Motor Current]
Displays the motor current value at the rated current of 100%.
4)[Servo Alarm]
Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the servo monitor screen.
1)[1Ax] key
Changes the axes to be monitored.
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
2) 1)
3) 4)
2)
1)
3)
4) 5)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 299
30
3)[END] key
Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print]
The operation of this key is invalid.
Present Value History Monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value history monitor is
executed.
Present Value History Monitor screen This section describes the display data of the Present Value History Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Ax
Displays the axis number of the axis currently being monitored.
2)[HP Data]
Displays the following values monitored at home position return.
Home position return completion time
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of absolute position reference point data
Within-one-revolution position of absolute position reference point data
Servo command value
Monitor present value
3)[MON Val]
Displays the following present monitor values.
Present time
Encoder present value
Present multi-revolution data of encoder present value
Present within-one-revolution position of encoder present value
Present servo command value
Present monitor present value
2)
1)
3)
4)
0 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
4)PWR ON, PWR OFF
Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power-on/off.
At power-on
Power-on time
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of initial encoder
Single-revolution data of initial encoder
Servo command value after recovery
Monitor present value after recovery
Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery (error code of minor, major error)
At power-off
Servo amplifier power-off time
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
Single-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
Servo command at servo amplifier power-off
Monitor present value at servo amplifier power-off
Key functions
1)[1Ax] key
Changes the axes to be monitored.
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the Present Value History Monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print]
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
2)
1)
3)
4) 5)
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 301
30
Parameter setting screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when you configure the parameter setting.
Display contents and key functions You can set the servo parameters (basic parameters/adjustment parameters) of the connected Motion CPU.
This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed screen
1)Parameter setting screen
Displays the servo parameter of the selected item.
Key functions
1)[AxNo.] key
Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made.
2)[Sys. Conf] key
Returns to the System Configuration screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started.
4)Item selection key
Selects the servo parameter setting item.
5)[CHG] key
Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item.
1)
2)
4)
3)1)
5)
6) 7)
2 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
6)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 305 Hard copy output
7)[Cancel Print]
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Inputting the password If you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key window
appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor.
For the details of the password setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Function If the password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
If the password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching the [Sys. Conf] key returns to the System Configuration screen.
Up to 8 characters (A to F, 0 to 9) can be used for the password setting.
Operations Enter a password.
Touch the key window and enter a password.
After entering the password, touch the [Enter] key to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch the [Del] key to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
To cancel the password entry, touch the [] key to return to the monitor screen.
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 303
30
Parameter setting operation As an example of the parameter setting operation, the following describes how to change the setting of [Auto tuning].
1. Select the item whose parameter is to be set with the item selection keys, and touch the [CHG] key.
2. In the parameter setting window, enter the parameter setting with the key window.
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch the [] key at the top right of the screen to close the parameter setting
window.
3. In the confirmation window touch the [OK] key to write the parameter setting to the Motion CPU.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting, touch the [Cancel] key.
4. After writing is completed, the parameter setting screen whose display has been updated to the new parameter setting is
displayed.
4 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures
7
Hard copy output This section describes how to output the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
Touching the [Print Screen] key outputs the data.
The output target of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.4 Operation Procedures 305
30
7.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during Q motion monitor operation and their corrective
action.
How to clear a displayed error message
For the error that occurs during the communication with a controller (such as a communication error), the error
message does not disappear even after the cause of the error has been removed.
To clear the error message, restart the GOT.
Error message Error definition Corrective action
No. PLC Communications Communication cannot be established with the
PLC CPU of the monitor target.
Check the status of the connection between the controller and the
GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
This PLC type is not supported An unsupported Motion CPU has been selected
on the system configuration screen.
Select a supported Motion CPU on the system configuration screen.
Page 279 Target controller
Controller's OS type is different The motion controller OS other than SV13 or
SV22 is installed on the Motion CPU (Q172CPU
or Q173CPU) of the monitor target.
The motion controller OS other than SV13 or SV22 is installed on the
Motion CPU (Q172CPU or Q173CPU) of the monitor target.
It is not a version for GOT The version of the motion controller OS, which
is installed on the Motion CPU of the monitor
target, does not support the Q motion monitor.
Install a motion controller OS that is compatible with the Q motion
monitor in the Motion CPU.
Page 279 Target controller
Monitor data not found The monitor data was not installed or was
deleted.
Download the monitor data of the motion monitor.
Unused axis selected The axis number selected has not been set. Select the axis number that has been set.
Set the axis using the relevant software.
It is not possible to select During servo parameter setting, an item that
cannot be set has been selected.
Select an item that can be set.
Incorrect setting range A value that is outside the setting range has
been set.
Set the value within the setting range.
Unmatched password The entered password is invalid. Input the correct password.
Communication channel setup
error
A communication driver that is compatible with
the Q motion monitor is not installed.
Install a compatible communication driver.
Unsupport amp. selected The number of the axis, which is set to a servo
amplifier having no settable parameter, has
been selected.
Select the number of the axis, which is set to a servo amplifier having
the settable parameter.
6 7 Q MOTION MONITOR 7.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
8
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
Page 307 Features
Page 309 Specifications
Page 313 Operations for Display
Page 317 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
Page 343 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
Page 344 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
Page 347 Error Messages and Corrective Action
8.1 Features With the intelligent module monitor, you can use dedicated screens to monitor the buffer memory of the intelligent function
module and make changes to the data.
In addition, you can monitor the signal statuses of the I/O modules.
The features of the intelligent module monitor are described below.
Realized monitoring with dedicated screens You can monitor the intelligent function module(s) and I/O module(s) and make changes to the data using dedicated screens.
There is no need to create screens for monitoring or data changes, thereby reducing the drawing workload.
For intelligent function module As a menu of monitor items is displayed, select an item from the menu, and the corresponding monitor screen is then
displayed.
Details of the buffer memory and the I/O signal statuses between the buffer memory and the PLC CPU are displayed in text,
numerical values, and graphs on the monitor screens.
Monitor screenSelect a monitor from the menu
Select a menu
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.1 Features 307
30
For I/O module The status of I/O signals to and from an external module is monitored.
Enabled data change by write operations The values are written into the buffer memory of the intelligent function module by writing values from the monitor screen.
Monitor screen
When changing a change-permitted channelMonitor screen
Select writing
8 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.1 Features
8
8.2 Specifications Page 309 System configuration
Page 311 Access range
Page 312 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the intelligent module monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Targeted equipments for the intelligent module monitor
PLC CPU, Motion CPU, C Controller module, and robot controller
*1 Only the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) can be monitored. The PERIPHERAL I/F does not support the Ethernet connection.
*2 When a redundant system is configured, the intelligent module monitor is not supported.
Intelligent function module and I/O module
*1 The intelligent function module mounted on the RQ extension base unit cannot be monitored.
To monitor modules other than the above ones, use the BM monitor.
Controller Model
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
R08PCPU *2, R16PCPU *2, R32PCPU *2, R120PCPU *2
R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, R120PSFCPU
QCPU Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU,
Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU,
Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU,
Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU,
Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU
Motion CPU (Q series) *1 Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
C Controller module (Q Series) Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-VG, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS
QSCPU QS001CPU
LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT,
L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P
Robot controller CR800-R(R16RTCPU)
Controller Intelligent function module *1 I/O module
RCPU R60AD4, R60ADV8, R60ADI8, R60DA4, R60DAV8,
R60DAI8, RD62P2, RD62P2E, RD62D2, RD75P2,
RD75P4, RD75D2, RD75D4, RD77MS2, RD77MS4,
RD77MS8, RD77MS16, RD77GF4, RD77GF8,
RD77GF16
RX10, RX40C7, RX41C4, RX42C4, RY40NT5P,
RY41NT2P, RY42NT2P, RY10R2,
RH42C4NT2P
QCPU Q62DA, Q64AD, Q64DA, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, QD62,
QD62E, QD62D, QD65PD2, QD73A1, QD75P1,
QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4,
QD75MH1, QD75MH2, QD75MH4, QD75M1, QD75M2,
QD75M4, QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16,
QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16
MELSEC-Q series input modules,
MELSEC-Q series output modules,
QH42P, QX48Y57, QX41Y41P Motion CPU (Q series)
C Controller module (Q Series)
QSCPU
LCPU L60AD4, L60DA4, LD62, LD62D, LD75D1, LD75D2,
LD75D4, LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75P4, LD77MH4,
LD77MH16, LD77MS2, LD77MS4, LD77MS16
LX40C6, LX41C4, LX42C4, LY10R2, LY41NT1P,
LY42NT1P,
LH42C4NT1P, LH42C4PT1P
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.2 Specifications 309
31
Connection type (: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, and QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later.
*2 The QSCPU does not support the connection type. *3 The LCPU does not support the connection type. *4 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2. *5 Intelligent module monitor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter. *6 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *7 Indicates CC-Link IE field network connection. *8 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *9 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *10 The RCPU does not support the connection type.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the intelligent module monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor To check the required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The memory space required for storing data into the internal memory of the GOT is the same as the memory space required
for storing data into the hard disk of a personal computer.
Function Connection type between GOT and PLC CPU
Name Description Bus connecti on *2*3*10
Direct CPU connecti on (serial) *2*4*10
Serial communi cation connecti on *2
Ethernet connecti on *5
MELSECNET/H connection *3*10, MELSECNET/ 10 connection *3*10
CC-Link IE TSN connection
CC-Link IE controller connection *3*6, CC- Link IE field connection *7
CC-Link connection
ID *2*8
G4 *2*9*10
Intelligent
module
monitor
Monitors buffer
memory of
intelligent
function
module and
signal statuses
of I/O modules
*1
0 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.2 Specifications
8
Access range
When using the bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), or serial communication connection The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the connected station and other
stations.
In the serial communication connection, the intelligent module monitor is available only for the systems that use the following
combinations.
*1 For details of module names, refer to the GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1.
The following restrictions apply when monitoring other stations of MELSECNET/II data link systems.
Only the host and master stations can be monitored when the connected station is a local station.
Regardless of the type of connected station, no stations other than ACPU can be monitored.
When connected to a remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system, the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/
H network system is displayed as QCPU in the system configuration display of the intelligent module monitor.
A diagnosis of the remote I/O station on the MELSECNET/H network system is not performed.
Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations other than those on the MELSECNET/H network system are
not monitored.
When using MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10, or CC-Link IE controller network connection The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the control station and normal
stations.
To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
(Only with the MELSECNET/H communication unit or CC-Link IE controller network communication unit)
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
For MELSECNET/H communication unit
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
For CC-Link IE controller network communication unit
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
When using CC-Link IE field network connection The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and local stations.
To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
The User's Manual of the CC-Link IE field network system master/local module to be used
When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4) The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the master station and local stations.
PLC CPU used Serial communication module used *1
QCPU (Q mode) QJ71C24
LCPU LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.2 Specifications 311
31
When using Ethernet connection The intelligent module monitor can monitor the intelligent function module on the base of the PLC CPU assigned the IP
address.
(The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3 (GOT2000) can be monitored.)
To monitor another network, routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side.
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting for the GOT
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network)
When the intelligent module monitor monitors the master station of the MELSECNET/II network on which any remote I/O station exists Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I/O stations are not monitored.
Precautions
Special function modules that cannot be monitored Modules displayed as "SP" on the System Configuration screen cannot be monitored using the intelligent module monitor.
To monitor these modules, use the system monitor function [BM MONITOR].
Editing and reusing intelligent module monitor data The project data for the intelligent module monitor cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object.
Display provided when the QA1S6 extension base unit is used with the QCPU (Q mode) This precaution pertains to a situation where the QA1S6 extension base unit is connected to the QCPU (Q mode) in a station
connected to the GOT.
In this case, the abbreviated format is displayed for the following intelligent function modules on the System Configuration
screen.
You can use the unit detail information to check the full format of the module displayed with the abbreviated format.
Unsupported intelligent function modules are displayed as "SP", and the corresponding modules cannot be monitored.
Installed module Model name displayed
A1S63ADA 63ADA
A1SJ71PT32-S3 J71PT32-
A1SJ71ID1-R4 J71ID
A1SJ71ID2-R4-S1
A1S64TCTT(BW)-S1 64TCTT/R
A1S64TCRT(BW)-S1
2 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.2 Specifications
8
8.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the intelligent module monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the Intelligent module monitor screen.
The display methods include the following two types.
Starting from the special function switch (Intelligent module monitor) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [Intelligent module monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number, network number, station number.
Set the channel number, network numberand station number of the PLC CPU connected to the GOT.
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the intelligent module monitor
only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [ChNETPCNo] key on the intelligent
module monitor screen.
Page 317 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
4. Starts the intelligent module monitor.
The module format and related data are not displayed at the intelligent module monitor startup.
When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is complete, the module format and related data is displayed.
When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU,you can check the PLC CPU status (PC information monitor
screen),and the module error information and others (Unit Detail Info Screen).
Page 317 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
When [END] key is selected, the intelligent module monitoring ends and the display moves to the original screen where the
intelligent module monitor function was begun.
5. Specify the module to be monitored.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
Page 340 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
6. Display the intelligent module monitor menu.
Page 340 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
Communication setting window
Display the System Configuration screen.
NET
Y 0 Y 40
AJ71 PT32-S3
X,Y 80 Y 40
AJ71 PT32-S3
X,Y 80
SP
X,Y A0
AJ71
X,Y150
A62LS
X,Y180
A616DA
X,Y100
A616TD
X,Y260
A616AD
X,Y200
SP
X,Y230
Ext.1
Ext.2
MAIN
System Configuration NETWK No. [0] PLC STATION [FF] PC No. END
CPU OUT64 IN64
IN16 OUT32
Y120 Y130
IN64
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.3 Operations for Display 313
31
7. Select from the menu.
The Intelligent Module Monitor Screen is displayed by selecting it from the menu.
Page 340 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
8. Display the monitor screen for the intelligent module.
Check the data for the module with the displayed contents.
Page 338 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions
Page 343 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
9. Change the data.
Carry out the following operation when changing the current values of the buffer memory that is displayed on the monitor
screen.
Page 341 Testing of the intelligent function module
Change the current value of the specified area.
Return to step 8 and check the data for the module.
4 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.3 Operations for Display
8
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
When using RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), Q series Motion CPU, QSCPU, or LCPU
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
System configuration screen
At the first startup
System configuration screen PC information screen
Error details screen
Continuous error release screenI/O module monitor screen
Monitor menu
Intelligent module monitor screen
Data area No. setting window
Unit detail info screen
I/O monitor screen High-speed counter monitor screen
Positioning monitor screen
Communication setting window
Operation details screen
Error cause/ Error record
[RET] key
Data change window
Icon of PLC CPU
Icon of intelligent function module
Set/Reset window
Icons of the I/O module
Icon
(RCPU, QCPU, or LCPU)
(QSCPU only) (RCPU, and LCPU only)
(LCPU only)
(LCPU only)
(LCPU only)
Menu
(info. mode)(Basic mode)
Current value
[ChNETPCNo] key
[Basic mode] key
[Info. mode] key
[RET] key
[RET] key
[RET] key
[Positioning] key
[HS Counter] key
[Data Chg.] key
Operation log
[RET] key
[I/O moniter] key
[MONIT MENU] key
[RET] key
[] key
[] key
[] key [set/ reset] key
[AREA CHG] key [] key
[Cont. Error] key
[Sys. Conf.] key
[Sys. Conf.] key
[Sys. Conf.] key
[Sys. Conf.] key
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.3 Operations for Display 315
31
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the intelligent module monitor from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special
function switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Starting from the special function switch of a system application (Extended function) that has a system configuration screen
When the system application set as a connection destination of the special function switch supports the system launcher
function, the system launcher switching notification dialog appears at the first startup, and the system configuration screen of
the system launcher function appears.
At the second or later startup, the set function screen appears when the system application is started from the user-created
screen.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the set connection destination does not support the system launcher function, a dialog appears at the
startup and the system configuration screen of the set connection destination appears.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed
[] key [Sys. Conf] key
The intelligent module monitor is started. (Example: Monitor menu screen)
System configuration screen
[End] key
Select the target function.
User-created screen (special function switch (intelligent module monitor))
[] key [Sys. Conf] key
The intelligent module monitor is started. (Example: Monitor menu screen)
System configuration screen
Application startup (for the first time)
[End] key
6 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.3 Operations for Display
8
8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
This section describes the operations of the screens when using the intelligent module monitor.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
Page 319 Setting method for other station monitoring
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
Page 332 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
Page 338 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions
Page 340 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
Page 341 Testing of the intelligent function module
Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the intelligent
module monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU
Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Display of modules installed in the monitored station
Displays the model name, I/O points, and start I/O number for the modules installed in the monitored station.
The model name of the module and related data are displayed at the end of the module data readout from the PLC CPU.
For an intelligent function module that cannot be monitored, the model name is displayed as "SP".
The module icon becomes the key to switch to the screen where the monitoring of that module is performed.
The communication setting window is displayed for the MELSECNET/H connection or MELSECNET/10 connection.
Page 319 Setting method for other station monitoring
Displays the CPU Nos. for the CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed modules when there are multiple CPU
systems.
3)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
3)
3)
1)
2)
3)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 317
31
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the entry monitor screen.
1)[ChNETPCNo.] key
Displays the communication setting window.
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)Icon of PLC CPU, Icon of intelligent function module
If the icon of a PLC CPU is touched, the screen switches to the PC information monitor screen.
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
If the icon of an intelligent function module is touched in the intelligent module monitor mode, the screen switches to the
intelligent module monitor screen of the touched module.
4)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage immediately
before/after the currently displayed stage.
Operations can be performed when the system configuration has three or more extension bases.
5)[Info. mode] key
Switches the System Configuration screen to Info. mode.
Page 332 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
6)[Basic mode] key
Switches the System Configuration screen to Basic mode.
4)
3)
5) 6)
1) 2)
4)
8 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Setting method for other station monitoring The following shows the setting methods for monitoring other stations with intelligent module monitor.
1. When the intelligent module monitor is started for the first time, the communication setting window is automatically
opened by displaying the system configuration screen.
Otherwise, touch the [ChNETPLCNo.] key in the System Configuration screen to display the communication setting window.
2. In the communication setting window, select one from channels No.1 to 4.
For the operation on the communication setting screen, refer to the following.
Page 320 Communication setting window
3. When the channel No. is selected, the screen below is displayed.
Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU station number.
4. After selecting the station number, touch the enter key. The communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
For further operations, refer to the following.
Page 340 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 319
32
Communication setting window
Displayed screen
1)CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2)Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
The setting range differs according to the connection type.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), and serial communication connection: [0]
Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [1] to [239]
MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10: [0] (Host loop) or [1] to [255] (Specified loop)
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0]
3)Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The setting range differs according to the connection type.
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), and serial communication connection: [FF] (Host station)
Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10: [0] (Control station) or [1] to [64] (Normal station)
CC-Link IE TSN connection: [0] (Master station) or [1] to [120] (Local station)
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection: [1] to [120]
CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [0] (Master station), [1] to [120] (Local station)
CC-Link (ID/G4) connection: [0] (Master station) or [1] to [64] (Local station)
4)CH No. selection key
Set the CPU No.
5)Touch key
The keys used for the operations in the communication setting window.
1) 3)
4) 5)
2) 1)3) 2)
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)
0 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Key functions
1)[] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
2)Input area movement key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
3)[Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the
communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
5)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
1)
2)
3) 4) 5)
1)
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 321
32
Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the PC Information monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on screen.
The PC Information monitor screen is displayed by specifying the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), QSCPU, or LCPU on the system
configuration screen.
The GOT displays the PC Information monitor screen only when using the following controllers.
RCPU
QCPU (Q mode)
QSCPU
LCPU
When using the RCPU, QCPU (Q mode), or LCPU
PC information monitor screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the PC information monitor screen.
3)[CPU Working State]
Displays the operating status of the PLC CPU.
4)Error display
Displays the currently occurring errors.
When using the LCPU, touch the error cause to display the error detail screen.
Page 324 Error details screen
5)[Error Record]
Displays the error record.
The number of error events to be displayed varies depending on the monitored PLC CPU.
When monitoring the RCPU
Up to 16 error events can be displayed.
When monitoring the QCPU (Q mode) or LCPU
Up to 100 error events can be displayed.
When using the LCPU, touch the error record to display the error detail screen.
Page 324 Error details screen
2)
2)
2)
1)
3)
5)
4)
2 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the PC information monitor screen.
1)[Sys. Conf.] key
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the display one page up or down.
4)[Cont. Error] key
This key is displayed when the RCPU or LCPU is monitored.
Shifts to the Continuation error clear screen.
Page 325 Continuation error clear screen
1) 2)
3)
4)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 323
32
Error details screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the error details screen.
3)[Error details]
Displays the common error information and individual error information based on the information stored in SD4 and SD5 of
the LCPU.
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Key functions
1)[RET] key
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
2)1)
3)
1) 2)
4 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Continuation error clear screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the Continuation error clear screen.
3)Continuation error list
Displays the status of removable continuation errors , and error messages.
The following shows the continuous error status.
Specification: User specification error
Minor: Minor error
When monitoring the LCPU, touch the check box of each continuation error to switch the status between selected and
unselected for removing the error.
2)
2)
2)
1)
3)
2)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 325
32
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the continuation error clear screen.
1)[RET] key
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Select all] key
Targets all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
4)[Cancel all] key
Unselects all continuous errors for the continuous error releasing.
5)[Error Clear] key
The operation performed by pressing this key differs depending on the monitored PLC CPU.
When monitoring the RCPU
All the continuation errors which have occurred are removed.
When monitoring the LCPU
The selected continuation errors are removed.
6)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the display one stage up or down.
Precautions for releasing continuous errors
If the error messages are the same, the errors are released regardless of the error code.
Therefore, some error codes may be released even without the user intend to.
The annunciator memorizes the number of annunciators detected in the CPU modules.
When canceling multiple annunciators, perform the error releasing multiple times.
Even after executing the error releasing, the detected error record is not deleted.
4) 5)
6)
3)
1) 2)
6 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
When using the QSCPU
PC Information monitor screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
3)[CPU working state]
Displays the QSCPU operation status.
The following items are displayed.
[RUN]
[STOP]
4)[Safety CPU operation mode]
Displays the safety CPU operation mode.
The following items are displayed.
[Safety mode]
[Test mode]
5)Error information
Displays the error being occurred.
Touching the error displays the Error details screen.
Page 330 Error details screen
6)Operation key for history description display
Set the items to be displayed in the log list.
Key functions
Item Description
[No.] Displays the error code.
[Detail] Displays the detail code of the error log.
[----] is displayed when no detail code exists.
[Error cause] Displays the error details.
Touching the item displays the Error details screen.
[Date], [Time] Displays the date and the time that the error occurs.
2)
4)
2)
1)
7)
3)
5)
6)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 327
32
7)Log list
Displays the operation status, error information, and others of the monitored PLC CPU.
Touching an operation log displays the Operation details screen.
Page 329 Operation details screen
Touching an error log displays the Error details screen.
Page 330 Error details screen
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1)[Sys. Conf.] key
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Display Filter] key
Switches the log types to be displayed in the log list.
The following items are displayed.
[All log]
Displays all the logs (error logs, operation logs).
[Error log]
Displays the error logs only.
[Operation log]
Displays the operation logs only.
Item Description
[Type] Displays the log types.
The following items are displayed.
[Ope]
Operation log
[Err]
Error log
[No.] Displays the operation codes or error codes.
[Detail] Displays the 4-digit detail codes of the operation logs or the error logs for the errors occurred in the CC-
Link Safety system remote I/O module.
[----] is displayed when no detail code exists.
[Operation/Error message] Displays the operation details or error messages.
Displays "BROKEN OPERATION/ERROR LOG" when the log data is damaged.
[Date], [Time] Displays the dates and the time of operations or the dates and time that errors occur.
4)
6) 5)
7)
4) 3)
1) 2)
8 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
4)[Order display] key
Sorts the log list in ascending or descending order.
5)[Log] key
Switches the number of events displayed in the log list.
The number of events to be displayed is changeable by switching between the following items.
[32 items]
Displays the latest 32 events.
[100 items]
Displays the latest 100 events.
When the number of displayed events is switched from 100 to 32, 100 events are displayed before the [Update] key is
touched.
6)[Update] key
Obtains the latest log information from the PLC CPU and updates the log list.
The displayed log data before touching the Update key is deleted.
7)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the display one page up or down.
Operation details screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
3)Error information
Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
4)[Operation attached information]
Displays the detailed operating information according to the operation log information stored in the QSCPU.
2)
4)
1)
3)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 329
33
Key functions
1)[RET] key
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
Error details screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number, and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
3)Error information
Displays the information of the error touched in the PC information monitor screen.
1) 2)
1)
3)
4)
2)
1)
2)
3)
2)
(Example) Error details screen for safety CPU error (Example) Displaying individual error information for safety remote I/O station
0 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
4)[Common error information], [Indvidual error information]
Displays the common error information and the individual error information according to the information stored in SD4 and
subsequent devices of the QSCPU.
For the common error information and the individual error information, refer to the following.
QSCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
When the individual error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed, the numerical notation of the displayed
data can be switched between decimal and hexadecimal numbers.
(When the CC-Link Safety system master module cannot receive the error information from the safety remote I/O station,
[****] is displayed for unreceived items.)
Key functions
1)[RET] key
Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen.
Page 322 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Display switch] key
Switches the numerical notation of the displayed data between decimal and hexadecimal numbers. (Only when the individual
error information for the safety remote I/O station is displayed)
(Example) Error details screen for safety CPU error
3)
1) 2) 1) 2)
(Example) Displaying individual error information for safety remote I/O station
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 331
33
Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the Unit Detail Info screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System
Configuration screen at Info. mode, and the key functions displayed on the screen.
The GOT displays the Unit Detail Info screen only when using the following controllers.
RCPU
QCPU (Q mode)
QSCPU
LCPU
Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen.
3)[Unit Detail Info]
Displays the information of the error touched on the PC information monitor screen.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the unit detail info screen.
1)[Sys. Conf.] key
Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
2)
3)
2)
1)
1) 2)
3) 4) 5)
2 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Positioning] key
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
This button is available when [Positioning axis 1] or [Positioning axis 2] is set to [Use] in the parameter.
Shifts to the positioning monitor screen.
Page 333 Positioning monitor screen
4)[HS Counter] key
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
This button is available when [High-speed counter 1] or [High-speed counter 2] is set to [Use] in parameter.
Shifts to the high-speed counter monitor screen.
Page 334 High-speed counter monitor screen
5)[I/O monitor] key
Displayed only when displaying information of the LCPU built-in I/O module.
Shifts to the I/O monitor screen.
Page 337 I/O monitor screen.
Positioning monitor screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys used for the operations in the positioning monitor screen.
3)[Positioning monitor]
Displays the operation status of the positioning function.
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
2)
2)
1)
2)
3)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 333
33
Key functions
1)[RET] key
Return to the unit detail info screen.
Page 332 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Axis1] key, [Axis2] key ([Error Reset])
Resets the error of the [Axis1] or [Axis2].
4)[Axis1] key, [Axis2] key ([Zero Request OFF])
Turns off the home position return request for [Axis1] or [Axis2].
Precautions for using the positioning monitor screen.
When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the
connecting device during the positioning monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen and
display the position monitor screen again.
High-speed counter monitor screen Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys used for the operation in the high-speed counter monitor screen.
1) 2)
3) 4)
2)
2)
1)
4)
3)
4 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
3)[High-speed counter monitor]
Displays the operation status of the high-speed counter function.
The operation status is displayed or hidden according to the parameter settings of built-in functions.
4)[Preset value set]
Displays the current value of the CH1 and CH2.
Touch the current value and the data change window is displayed.
Page 336 Data change window
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the high-speed counter monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Return to the unit detail info screen.
Page 332 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[Exec.] key
Reflects the preset value entered in the data change window to the PLC CPU.
4)[CH1] key, [CH2] key
Reset the error of CH1 or CH2.
Precautions for using the high-speed counter monitor screen.
When the parameter settings of a built-in function is changed by programming software or others of the
connecting device during the high-speed counter monitor screen display, return to the unit detail info screen
and display the high-speed counter monitor screen again.
The preset value preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen is valid for the subsequent presets,
unless it is set again in the sequence program.
If the preset from the high-speed counter monitor screen and the preset by the sequence program are
executed simultaneously, the setting value by the sequence program may be preset.
1) 2)
3)3) 4)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 335
33
Data change window Displayed contents
1)Entered value display area
Displays the entered value.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys used in the operation of the data change window.
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the data change window.
1)[] key
Closes the data change window.
2)Data input key
Changes the data change target.
3)[Enter] key
Sets the entered value to the preset value.
4)[Del] key
Deletes one character of the entered value.
5)[AC] key
Deletes all entered values.
2)
1)
2)
1)
2)
3) 4) 5)
6 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
I/O monitor screen. Displayed contents
1)Monitored station display
Displays the channel number, network number and station number of the monitored station.
2)Touch key
Displays the keys used for the operations in the I/O monitor screen.
3)[Input signal], [Details]
Displays the status and values of functions assigned to the input signal.
4)[Output signal]
Displays the status of functions assigned to the output signal.
5)[Error time output mode]
Displays the setting status of the output mode during error, for the output signal.
Key functions
The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the I/O monitor screen.
1)[RET] key
Return to the unit detail info screen.
Page 332 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
2)
4)
1)
5)
3)
1) 2)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 337
33
Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen. The monitor
screen is displayed by specifying a module on the system configuration screen in basic mode when the RCPU, QCPU (Q
mode), QSCPU, or LCPU is used.
Displayed contents
1)Module model
Displays the model name of the module being monitored.
2)Touch key
Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
3)Data display area
Displays the buffer memory data of the module in its current form or in a graph.
The status of I/O signals to and from PLC CPU is monitored.
All data are displayed when the readout from the intelligent function module is completed.
When testing, execute testing after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data.
2)1)
3)
8 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
1)[SET/RESET] key
Starts testing (SET/RST) of the I/O signal between the PLC CPU and the intelligent function module.
2)[Data Chg.] key
Starts changing (writing) the current values of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module displayed on the screen.
3)[MONIT MENU] key
Closes the current monitor and returns to the screen displaying monitor menu.
This operation can only be used when the intelligent function module has a monitor menu.
4)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
1) 2) 3) 4)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 339
34
Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu This section uses the positioning module as an example to describe the operations when starting the intelligent module
monitor to monitor a desired module.
1. Display System Configuration screen.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
2. Touch the display position of a module to be monitored to specify the module.
From among the modules installed in the corresponding base unit, specify the intelligent function module whose format is
displayed.
To monitor any module whose model name is not displayed, use the device monitor.
Page 55 DEVICE MONITOR
For specifying an input module or output module, refer to the following.
Page 344 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
3. Display screen that shows monitor menu.
Specify the menu corresponding to the type of data to be monitored.
4. Display monitor screen of specified menu.
For information on how to check the display contents and the rest of the procedure, refer to the following.
Page 343 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens
For the test of the displayed data, refer to the following.
Page 341 Testing of the intelligent function module
Change current value of buffer memory
Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off
0 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
Testing of the intelligent function module
Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data displayed on the current monitor screen.
This section describes the operations for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning on and off the output
signal from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module.
PLC signals used for the test
Perform testing for the buffer memory that can be written from the PLC CPU and output signals that are output
from the PLC CPU.
Status of the PLC CPU for the test
It is recommended that testing be performed with the PLC CPU in STOP status.
If the PLC CPU is tested during RUN status, the test monitor display returns to display values output from the
sequence program and output statuses.
1. Display monitor screen.
2. Touch the [Data Chg.] or [SET/RESET] key.
3. Display key window on monitor screen.
WARNING When testing the operation (changing a current buffer memory value) of the intelligent module monitor, read this manual carefully to fully understand the operation. For devices that perform significant operations for the system, never perform test operation to change data. Doing so can cause accidents due to false outputs or malfunctions.
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 341
34
When [Data Chg.] is touched (changes current value of buffer memory)
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys in the displayed key window.
When you touch [] key at the upper left of the key window, the key window closes and the display returns to the monitor
screen.
Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested is displayed.
Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed.
The [DEL] key can be used to clear individual characters among those input.
When [SET/RESET] key is touched (tests the I/O signal)
All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keysin the displayed key window.
When you touch [] key at the upper left of the key window, the key windowcloses and the display returns to the monitor
screen.
Specify a device name to be tested by touching alphabet keys.
After the specification, touch a cursor key.
Specify a device number by touching numeric character keys.
After the specification, touch a cursor key.
Use the numeric keys to specify "Set" or "Reset".
When the [0] key is touched, the signal turns off. When the [1] key is touched, the signal turns on.
4. Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the entry.
5. To continue the test, return to step 3.
To end the test, touch the [] key and return to step 1.
Precautions for executing the test
Do not perform the following tests.
If these tests are performed, the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory/input signal may
return to the output value/output status from the intelligent function module.
Testing of read-only buffer memory from the PLC CPU.
Testing of input signals from the intelligent function module to the PLC CPU.
Precautions for executing the test for buffer memory data
For data where 16, 32 bits are displayed with one number, specify a new value in decimal format.
For data where one number of 16, 32 bits is displayed as a percent, such as with an A/D conversion module,
specify a new value corresponding to the percentage in decimal format.
(Example)
When the set value of the offset or gain is 0 to 2000 and you intend to change it to "50%", input "1000".
For data where 16 bits are displayed with "0" or "1" for each bit, specify a new value with changing the data to
a decimal.
2 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen
8
8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens To display the intelligent module monitor screen on the GOT, write special data (intelligent module monitor data) to be
monitored.
For the capacity of the special data to be written to the GOT and the writing procedure, refer to the following.
Page 309 System configuration
The intelligent module monitor screen differs depending on the connected module.
This section describes the screen using a typical intelligent module monitor screen.
The screen configuration may differ depending on the intelligent module monitor used.
For the buffer memory address of the module and others, refer to the following.
User's Manual of the intelligent function module used
Example) QD73A1 Positioning & Parameter Data Monitor Screen
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 343
34
8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen This section describes the operation of the various screens in the intelligent module monitor function, when monitoring input
or output modules.
Page 344 Specifying the module to be monitored
Page 345 Monitor screen configuration and key functions
Specifying the module to be monitored This section describes how to start monitoring for an input or output module with the intelligent module monitor function.
1. Display the System Configuration screen.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
2. Touch the display position of a module to be monitored.
From among the modules installed in the corresponding base unit, specify the module whose Input or Output is displayed.
For specifying an intelligent function module, refer to the following.
Page 317 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions
3. Display the monitor screen for the specified module.
For information on how to check the display contents and the rest of the procedure, refer to the following.
Page 345 Monitor screen configuration and key functions
Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules.
4 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
8
Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
The monitor screen is displayed by specifying an input module or output module on the system configuration screen.
This section uses an input module for explanation.
Displayed contents
1)Module name
Displays the type of object module (input or output module).
2)Touch key
Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen.
3)Signal name
Displays the name of the signal being monitored (X or Y).
4)Status display
Displays the number and status of the I/O signal.
The status of input and output signals is displayed after they are read out from the corresponding module.
Displays up to 64 points.(Black circle: ON, white circle: OFF)
2)1)
3)
4)
2)
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen 345
34
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
1)[Sys. Conf.] key
Closes the current monitor and returns to the System Configuration screen.
2)[END] key
Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor.
3)[X/Y] key
Switches between the display contents (for an input module and for an output module) when an I/O combined module is used.
1) 2)
3)
6 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.6 Operating I/O Module Monitor Screen
8
8.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed when the intelligent module monitor is executed, and corrective action.
Error message Description Corrective action
Communication channel setup error There is no channel for communication. The intelligent module monitor does not support
the selected PLC CPU.
Communications error Communication could not be established with the
PLC CPU.
Check the connection status between the PLC
CPU and the GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
Check if an error has occurred in the PLC CPU.
Monitor Data Can Not Find The special data (intelligent module monitor data)
has not been downloaded to the GOT.
Write the special data (intelligent module monitor
data) to the GOT.
This PLC type is not supported The intelligent module monitor selected an
unsupported PLC CPU.
Use the PLC CPU supported by the intelligent
module monitor.
Page 309 System configuration
8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action 347
34
MEMO
8 8 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8.7 Error Messages and Corrective Action
9
Page 350 Features
Page 353 Specifications
Page 357 Operations of Display
Page 359 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
Page 397 Error Messages and Corrective Action
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 349
35
9.1 Features Various monitor functions, changes to the parameter settings and test operations can be performed on the servo amplifier
connected to the GOT.
The features of the servo amplifier monitor are described below.
Real-time display of the servo amplifier status Page 362 Monitor functions
Page 365 Alarm function
A list of the status of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT and the alarm details can be displayed in real-time.
Display example of monitored data
Displays monitor data of the servo amplifier in a list.
Display example of alarm information
Displays the details (number, name, occurrence time and cause of alarm) of the alarm currently occurring in the servo
amplifier.
The alarm can also be reset.
0 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.1 Features
9
There are multiple diagnostics functions to enable various diagnostics of the servo amplifier to be performed.
Display example of DI/DO signal status
Displays a list of the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals of the servo amplifier.
Display example of servo amplifier information
Displays the servo amplifier software number and servo motor information (model name, ID and encoder resolution).
Writing of the servo parameters is enabled Page 380 Parameter setting
The servo amplifier parameters can be read, changed and written to the servo amplifier.
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.1 Features 351
35
Various test operations can be performed Page 387 Test operations
Various test operations can be performed on the connected servo amplifier.
JOG operation
The servo amplifier rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched.
Motor less operation
Simulates motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the servo motor is not connected.
2 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.1 Features
9
Page 356 Access range
Page 356 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the servo amplifier monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Connection type (: Available, : Unavailable)
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the servo amplifier monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Servo amplifier Model
MELSERVO-J2-Super series MR-J2S-A, MR-J2S-CP
MELSERVO-J2M series MR-J2M-P8A
MELSERVO-J3 series MR-J3-A
MELSERVO-J4 series MR-J4-A, MR-J4-A-RJ
Function Connection type between GOT and servo amplifier
Name Description Direct connection
Servo amplifier monitor Servo amplifier monitor, changing the servo
parameter settings and test operations
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.2 Specifications 353
35
List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions The list of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and their functions is shown below.
MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2M series (: Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor : Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - :
Function unavailable)
Function Servo amplifier
MELSERVO-J2-Super series MELSERVO-J2M series
MR-J2S-A MR-J2S-CP MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M-DU
Setup Model selection
Baud rate *1
Station No. Selection *1 - -
Station selection
Axis selection - -
Automatic demo - -
Monitor Display all - -
High speed monitor
Multi-axis listing - -
Trend graph -
I/O Input/Output display - - - -
Alarm Display
History
Amplifier data
Diagnostic I/O display -
Function device display -
No motor rotation - -
Total power-on time
Software number display
Motor data display -
Tuning data -
Amplifier information
Absolute encoder data -
Automatic voltage control - - -
Axis name setting -
Unit composition listing - -
Parameters Parameter list - -
Tuning -
Change list
IFU parameter - -
DRU parameter - -
Parameter copy - - - -
Device setting -
Basic setting - - - -
Gain/Filter - - - -
Extension setting - - - -
I/O setting - - - -
Test Jog -
Positioning -
Operation w/o motor -
Forced output -
Program test - -
Single-step feed - - -
Point-data Point table - - -
4 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.2 Specifications
9
*1 Set the baud rate and station number setting with Communication Settings. For how to set the connecting device settings, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
MELSERVO-J3 series and MELSERVO-J4 series (: Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor : Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor - :
Function unavailable)
*1 It is displayed with "DI/DO display screen" in "Diagnostic". *2 It is displayed with "Amplifier information display screen" in "Diagnostic".
Advanced-function Machine analyzer - -
Gain search - -
Machine simulation - -
Robust disturbance
compensation
- - - -
Function Servo amplifier
MELSERVO-J3 series MELSERVO-J4 series
MR-J3-A MR-J4-A
Setup Model selection
Station selection
Connection Setting
Monitor Display all
I/O Monitor *1
Trend graph
Diagnostic Display
History
Alarm Onset Data
Drive Recorder -
No motor rotation
System Configuration *2
Life Diagnosis
Machine Diagnosis -
Amplifier information *2
Absolute encoder data
DI/DO Display *1
Parameters Parameter Setting
Axis Name Setting
Test Jog
Positioning
Operation w/o motor
Forced output
Program test
Test Mode Information
Adjustment One-touch Tuning -
Tuning
Machine Analyzer
Advanced Gain Search
Function Servo amplifier
MELSERVO-J2-Super series MELSERVO-J2M series
MR-J2S-A MR-J2S-CP MR-J2M-P8A MR-J2M-DU
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.2 Specifications 355
35
Required special data Download the package data in the servo amplifier monitor data above to the GOT.
The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to download the servo amplifier monitor to
the GOT.
For the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user
areas, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Before using the servo amplifier monitor Read the manual of the connected servo amplifier carefully and make sure you understand the contents before performing
servo amplifier monitoring.
Test operation Be sure to read the precautions listed below before performing a test operation.
Page 387 Test operations
Time displayed on the servo amplifier monitor If the time data of the GOT is incorrect, the time on the servo amplifier monitor will not be displayed correctly.
Refer to the following for the GOT clock data.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Setting details Use the same settings for the servo amplifier monitor on the GOT (Setup screen) and the servo amplifier.
Page 360 Setup
If the settings are different, proper communications may not be performed.
Servo amplifier monitored One servo amplifier can be selected to be monitored among 32 servo amplifiers.
If multiple servo amplifiers are connected, select one servo amplifier to monitor.
Background processing during parameter being input or output While parameters are being input or output, do not monitor the devices of the servo amplifier parameters with any function
executing in the background. (Example: Device data transfer, logging, and recipe)
Data may not be written or read normally or a communication error may occur.
6 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.2 Specifications
9
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the servo amplifier monitor screen by one of the following methods.
Starting from the special function switch (Servo Amplifier Monitor) set in the project data
For information on how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Servo amplifier monitor] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
After the GOT is turned on, the communication setting window is displayed automatically only at the first startup of the servo
amplifier monitor.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [Ch: ] key on the servo amplifier monitor screen.
Page 359 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
4. Set the model of the servo amplifier to be monitored and other items.
5. Select a function of the servo amplifier monitor.
Communication setting window
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.3 Operations of Display 357
35
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
For the details of each function, refer to the following.
Page 360 Setup
Page 362 Monitor functions
Page 365 Alarm function
Page 368 Diagnostics function
Page 380 Parameter setting
Page 387 Test operations
To exit by touching the [End] key
At next startup of the servo amplifier monitor, the last exited screen is displayed.
If using the same screen frequently, exiting with the [End] key is convenient.
However, the last exited screen is not displayed if the servo amplifier monitor screen data was deleted due to
an installation of package data, turning the GOT power from off to on, or a reset.
Start
At the second or later startup Utility
or usear-created monitor screen
At the first startup
Communication setting window
Setup
MENU
[Ch: ] key
[End] key
[Fix] key
[Setup] [Monitor ] [Alarm ] [Diagnostics] [Parameters ] [Test ]
[Menu] key
[Setup] key
[End] key
Touch any of the functions.
8 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.3 Operations of Display
9
The display screen of the servo amplifier monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
Page 359 Servo amplifier monitor
Page 360 Setup
Page 362 Monitor functions
Page 365 Alarm function
Page 368 Diagnostics function
Page 380 Parameter setting
Page 387 Test operations
Page 396 Hard copy output
Servo amplifier monitor With the servo amplifier monitor, various monitor functions, parameter setting changes and test operations can be performed
on the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
To display a function, make a selection on the function selection menu screen.
Function selection menu screen)
1)[Setup] key
Selects the servo amplifier type to monitor, the station number setting (station number selection), and the IFU station number.
Page 360 Setup
2)[Monitor] key
Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.
Page 362 Monitor functions
3)[Alarm] key
Displays the occurring alarm information or the alarm history.
You can reset an alarm, and clear the alarm history.
Page 365 Alarm function
5) 6)
1) 2) 3) 4)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 359
36
4)[Diagnostics] key
Performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
DI/DO display
Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
Function device display
Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
Amplifier information display
Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
ABS data display
Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
Unit composition list display
Displays a list of servo amplifier unit composition.
Page 368 Diagnostics function
5)[Parameters] key
Displays the parameter data and changes the parameter settings.
Page 380 Parameter setting
6)[Test ]
Performs various test operations (JOG operation, positioning operation, motor-less operation and DO forced output).
Page 387 Test operations
Setup This is used to set the communication with the servo amplifier.
Before making the settings on the setup screen, also make the same settings on the servo amplifier side.
If the settings on this screen and the settings on the servo amplifier do not match, proper communications may not be
performed.
The settings on the setup screen return to the initial state when the GOT is turned off or reset.
After turning on the power to the GOT, perform the settings on the setup screen again.
Setup screen This section describes the display data of the setup screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
[Axis number] and [Capacity setting] cannot be set.
1)[Model]
Displays the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
2)[Station]
Displays the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
3)[IFU Station]
Displays the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
1)
2)
3)
0 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the setup screen.
1)[Ch:2] key
Displays the communication setting window.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Model] key
Sets the model of the servo amplifier to be connected.
4)[Station] key
Sets the station number (00 to 31) of the servo amplifier to communicate with.
5)[IFU Station] key
Sets the serial communication station number of the IFU (interface unit).
This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
6)[Fix] key
Sets the setup details and returns to the function selection menu screen.
3)
4)
5)
6)
1) 2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 361
36
Monitor functions Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real-time.
Monitor screen The following describes the display data of the monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Cumulative feedback pulses]
Counts the feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder and displays the result.
When the set value exceeds "9999999", counting begins from "0".
During reverse rotation, the sign is added.
2)[Servo motor speed]
Displays the speed of the servo motor.
The value is displayed with the 0.1r/min unit rounded off.
During reverse rotation, the sign is added.
3)[Droop pulses]
Displays the droop pulses of the deviation counter.
During reverse rotation, the sign is added.
4)[Cumulative command pulses]
Counts the position command input pulses and displays the result.
Since the value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed, it may not match the cumulative feedback
pulse display.
During reverse rotation command, the sign is added.
5)[Command pulse frequency]
Displays the frequency of the position command input pulse.
The value before multiplication of the electrical gear (CMX/CDV) is displayed.
During reverse rotation command, the sign is added.
6)[Analog speed command voltage], [Analog speed limit voltage]
This is displayed only when the MR-J2S-A is connected.
[Analog speed command voltage] is displayed in the speed control mode.
Displays the input voltage of the analog speed command (VC).
[Analog speed limit voltage] is displayed in the torque control mode.
Displays the input voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA).
7)[Analog torque command voltage], [Analog torque limit voltage]
This is displayed only when the MR-J2S-A is connected.
[Analog torque command voltage] is displayed in the position/speed control mode.
Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA).
[Analog torque limit voltage] is displayed in the torque control mode.
Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit (TC).
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15)
7) 8) 9)
2 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
8)[Regenerative load ratio]
Displays the ratio of the regenerative power to the permissible regenerative power in %.
The permissible regenerative power differs depending on the presence/absence of the regenerative brake option.
Set parameter No. 0 correctly according to the regenerative brake option.
Set to 80% or lower as a guide.
9)[Effective load ratio]
Displays the continuous effective load torque.
The effective value is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
10)[Peak load ratio]
Displays the maximum torque generated.
The maximum value for the past 15 seconds is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
11)[Instantaneous torque]
Displays the instantaneous torque.
The value of the generated torque is displayed in real time on the assumption that the rated torque is 100%.
12)[Within one-revolution position]
Displays the within one-revolution position in the servo motor in pulse units of the encoder.
When the value exceeds the maximum pulse count, it returns to 0.
13)[ABS counter]
Displays the distance from the home position (0) in the absolute position detection system as the multi-revolution counter
value of the absolute position encoder.
14)[Load inertia moment ratio]
Displays the estimated ratio of the servo motor shaft-equivalent load inertia moment to the servo motor's inertia moment.
15)[Bus voltage]
Displays the voltage (between P and N) of the main circuit converter.
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 363
36
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Clear] key
Clears the values of [Cumulative feedback pulses] and [Cumulative command pulses] to 0.
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
3)
1) 2)
4) 5)
4 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Alarm display: Displays the alarm that is currently occurring.
Page 366 Alarm display screen
Alarm history: Displays the history of alarms that occurred.
Page 367 Alarm history screen
The screen changes as follows after [Alarm] is selected on the function selection menu screen.
If the alarm display screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, the message "Monitor data not found" is displayed and
the subsequent screens are not displayed.
Function selection menu screen
Alarm display screen
Alarm history screen
Touch the [Menu] key
Touch the [Alarm] key
Touch the [Alarm Disp] key
Touch the [Alarm Hist] key
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 365
36
Alarm display screen The following describes the display data of the alarm display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Alarm Number]
Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
2)[Alarm Name]
Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
3)[Time of Alarm]
Displays the date and time when the alarm occurred.
The alarm occurrence time is displayed on the basis of the clock data of the GOT.
If there is an error in the servo amplifier before it is connected to the GOT, an alarm is displayed when the servo amplifier is
connected to the GOT.
In this case, the time when the servo amplifier is connected to the GOT is displayed as the alarm occurrence time.
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm display screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Reset] key
Resets the alarm.
The reset alarm is stored as the latest alarm.
1) 2) 3)
4)
5) 6)
3)
1) 2)
6 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
4)[AlarmHist] key
Changes to the alarm history screen.
Page 367 Alarm history screen
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Alarm history screen The following describes the display data of the alarm history screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Seq No.]
Displays the alarm history, starting from the latest alarm, in order.
Later alarms have smaller Seq Nos.
0 indicates the latest alarm
Up to six alarms can be displayed in the alarm history.
2)[Alarm No.]
Displays the number of the alarm that occurred.
3)[Alarm Name]
Displays the name of the alarm that occurred.
4)[Time (hour)]
Displays the energization time of the servo amplifier until alarm occurrence on the assumption that the time at factory
shipment is "0".
5)[Detail (hex)]
Displays the code for detailed alarm information.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 367
36
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm history screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Clear] key
Clears the alarm history stored in the servo amplifier.
4)[AlarmDisp] key
Changes to the Alarm Display screen
Page 366 Alarm display screen
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Diagnostics function This function performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier.
DI/DO display
Displays the ON/OFF status of the external I/O signals.
Page 370 DI/DO display screen
Function device display
Displays the ON/OFF status of the I/O function devices.
Page 372 Function device display screen
Amplifier information display
Displays the model name, ID and encoder resolution of the servo motorconnected to the servo amplifier.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
ABS data display
Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
Unit composition list display
Displays a list of servo amplifier unit compositions.
Page 378 Unit composition list display screen
4)
5) 6)
3)
1) 2)
8 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
Page 354 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
If the DI/DO display screen data or function device display screen data (only when monitoring the MR-J2M-DU) has not
been downloaded to the GOT, Monitor data not found is displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed.
DI/DO display screen
[DI/DO] key
[DI/DO] key
[DI/DO] key
Function selection menu screen [Diagnostics] keyMR-J2M- DU monitor
[function device] key
[function device] key
[function device] key
[unit composition] key
[unit composition] key
[unit composition] key
[unit composition] key
[function device] key
[amplifier information] key
[amplifier information] key
Function device display screen Amplifier information display screen Unit composition list screen
ABS data display screen
[amplifier information] key
[amplifier information] key[ABS data] key
[ABS data] key
[ABS data] key
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 369
37
DI/DO display screen The following describes the display data of the DI/DO display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Input Signal], [Output Signal]
Displays whether the DI/DO signal is ON (lit) or OFF (not lit).
1)
0 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the DI/DO display screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Key to call a screen
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[DO1] key Displays the DI/DO signal of the extension IO unit.
This is valid only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
[Func.Dev.] key Changes to the function device screen.
Page 372 Function device display screen
[Amp.Inf] key Changes to the amplifier information screen.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
[ABSdata] key Changes to the ABS data screen.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
[UnitCompo.] key Changes to the unit composition list screen.
Page 378 Unit composition list display screen
3)
4) 5)
1) 2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 371
37
Function device display screen The following describes the display data of the function device display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Input Function], [Output Function]
Displays the ON or OFF status for each I/O signal.
1) 1)
When MR-J2S-CP is monitored
2 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the function device display screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Key to call a screen
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[DI/DO] key Changes to the DI/DO display screen.
Page 370 DI/DO display screen
[Amp.Inf] key Changes to the amplifier information screen.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
[ABSdata] key Changes to the ABS data screen.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
[UnitCompo.] key Changes to the unit composition list screen.
Page 378 Unit composition list display screen
3)
When MR-J2S-CP is monitored4) 5)
1) 2)
4) 5)
1) 2)
3)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 373
37
Amplifier information display screen The following describes the display data of the amplifier information display screen and the key functions displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Display area
Displays the amplifier information.
Item Description
[Servo amplifier model.] Displays the model name of the servo amplifier.
This is displayed only for MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A.
[Amplifier Firmware Version] Displays the software number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT.
[Accumulated power-on time] Displays the cumulative time of the control power-on after the product was shipped from the factory.
This is displayed only for MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A.
[Num. of inrush cur. sw. time] Displays the number of times the rush relay has been turned on/off after the product was shipped from the
factory.
This is displayed only for MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A.
[Optional card model] Displays the model name of the option card installed in the servo amplifier.
If no option card is installed, then "No connection" is displayed.
This is displayed only for MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A.
[Motor model] Displays the model name of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A.
[Motor ID] Displays the ID of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A.
[Encoder resolution] Displays the encoder resolution of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier.
This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A.
1)
4 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Key to call a screen
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[DI/DO] key Changes to the DI/DO display screen.
Page 370 DI/DO display screen
[Amp.Inf] key Changes to the amplifier information screen.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
[ABSdata] key Changes to the ABS data screen.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
[UnitCompo.] key Changes to the unit composition list screen.
Page 378 Unit composition list display screen
4) 5)
1) 2)
3)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 375
37
ABS data display screen The following describes the display data of the ABS data display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Absolute position data]
Displays the absolute position data in the absolute position detection system with the following items.
Motor edge pulse value
Command pulse value
2)[Encoder data]
Displays the encoder data with the following items.
Current position
Absolute encoder data
CYC (Motor edge pulse value)
CYC (Command pulse value)
Number of motor rotations ABS
Position at power loss
Absolute encoder data
CYC0 (Motor edge pulse value)
CYC0 (Command pulse value)
Number of motor rotations ABS0
1)
2)
6 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the ABS data display screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Key to call a screen
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[DI/DO] key Changes to the DI/DO display screen.
Page 370 DI/DO display screen
[Amp.Inf] key Changes to the amplifier information screen.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
[ABSdata] key Changes to the ABS data screen.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
[UnitCompo.] key Changes to the unit composition list screen.
Page 378 Unit composition list display screen
4) 5)
1) 2)
3)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 377
37
Unit composition list display screen The following describes the display data of the unit composition list screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Type name]
Displays the model name of the drive unit (DRU), interface unit (IFU) and option unit installed in each slot.
2)[AxNo.]
Displays the axis number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
3)[State]
Displays status of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) and the alarm/warning number.
4)[Motor model]
Displays the model name of the motor connected to the drive unit (DRU).
5)[S/W version]
Displays the software number of the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU).
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
8 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the unit composition list screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Key to call a screen
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[DI/DO] key Changes to the DI/DO display screen.
Page 370 DI/DO display screen
[Func.Dev.] key Changes to the function device screen.
Page 372 Function device display screen
[Amp.Inf] key Changes to the amplifier information screen.
Page 374 Amplifier information display screen
[ABSdata] key Changes to the ABS data screen.
Page 376 ABS data display screen
4) 5)
1) 2)
3)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 379
38
Parameter setting You can use the parameter setting function to set the servo parameters (basic parameters/expansion parameter 1, 2) of the
connected servo amplifier.
If you have set a password in [Servo Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key window
appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the servo amplifier monitor.
For the details of the password setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The screen changes as follows after [Parameters] is selected on the function selection menu screen.
For the details of the function selection menu screen, refer to the following.
Page 360 Setup
For the operating procedure of the password input, refer to the following.
Page 381 Password input operation procedure
Enter the parameter changing password.
Yes
No
Parameter setting screen
Function selection menu screen
Have you registered the servo amplifier parameter
changing password?
Password input key window
0 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Functions If the input password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
If the input password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching the [] key returns to the function selection menu screen.
Numerical numbers and letters A to F can be used for a password.
Operations Inputting the password
Touch [0] key to [9] key and [A] key to [F] key to input the password.
After inputting the password, touch [Enter] key to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch [Del] key to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
Canceling password input
Touch the [] key to return to the monitor screen.
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 381
38
Parameter setting screen The following describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Parameters with an asterisk (*) preceding the name become valid after the parameters are set and the power of the servo
amplifier is turned off and then on again.
Display screen
1)[Pr.]
Displays the parameter number.
2)[Name]
Displays the parameter name.
3)[Value]
Displays the present set value of the parameter.
4)[Unit]
Displays the setting unit for each parameter.
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operations on the parameter setting screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Setting key
4)Cursor keys
Select a servo parameter setting item, or scroll the parameter item display area by one page.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
[Change] key Changes the servo parameter settings read to the GOT internal memory.
[Write] key Writes the servo parameter settings of the selected items to the servo amplifier.
[Verify] key Matches all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT with the servo amplifier parameter values.
[Write All] key Writes all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT to the parameters of the servo amplifier.
[Read All] key Reads all parameter values from the servo amplifier to the GOT and displays those values.
[default] key Returns all parameter values to their initial values.
[Param. DRU] key, [Param. IFU] key Switches between the parameter display for the drive unit (DRU) and interface unit (IFU) each time this is
touched.
This is displayed only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
[Slot:1] key Selects the slot number of the drive unit (DRU).
This is displayed only when MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
[Gain/Filter] key Changes the gain filter parameter.
This is displayed only when MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A is connected.
[Extension] key Changes the extension setting parameter.
This is displayed only when MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A is connected.
[Extension-2] key Changes the extension setting 2 parameter.
This is displayed only when MR-J4-A is connected.
[Extension-3] key Changes the extension setting 3 parameter.
This is displayed only when MR-J4-A is connected.
[I/O setting] key Changes the I/O setting parameter.
This is displayed only when MR-J3-A or MR-J4-A is connected.
5) 6)
1)
3)
2)
4)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 383
38
Operations of when [default] is executed for the MR-J3-A parameters
The operation when [default] is executed differs depending on the displayed parameter screen as shown
below.
Basic setting, gain/filter or extension setting parameter screen
The 000BH processing (reference/writing is possible only for basic setting, gain/filter and extension setting
parameter) is performed.
I/O setting parameter screen
The 000CH processing (reference/writing is possible for all parameters) is performed.
Parameter setting operation The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the "Auto tuning" item as an example of the parameter
setting operation.
1. Touch the [Read All] key.
The parameter values within the servo amplifier are displayed on the screen.
2. The parameter read confirmation window is displayed.
Touch the [OK] key to read the parameter values within the servo amplifier to the GOT.
4 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
3. The read parameter values within the servo amplifier are displayed on the screen.
Parameters that cannot be written or read are not displayed on the parameter setting screen.
4. Select a parameter setting item to be set by using the cursor keys, and touch the [Change] key.
5. As the parameter setting window appears, enter the parameter setting with alphanumeric keys, and touch the [Enter]
key to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch [] key to close the parameter setting window.
Parameter name setting field (Setting
range)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 385
38
6. The parameter setting is changed on the parameter setting screen.
Select the changed parameter item, and touch the [Write] key.
If there are multiple parameter items with changed settings, touch the [Write All] key to write all parameter items with changed
settings.
7. A confirmation window appears.
Touch the [OK] key to write the parameter setting(s) to the servo amplifier.
To cancel writing of the parameter setting(s), touch [Cancel] key.
This completes the writing operation of the parameter setting.
Storage destination of new parameter settings
New parameter settings are written to the E2PROM of the servo amplifier.
Consequently, the written parameter setting is retained even if the power of the amplifier is off.
Precautions for changing the parameter setting
If the following parameter settings are changed on the servo amplifier, also change the settings on the GOT
setup screen in the same way.
Page 360 Setup
If the settings on the setup screen and the servo amplifier do not match, normal communications with the
servo amplifier may not be performed.
Station number setting
IFU station number setting
6 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
JOG operation
The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched.
Page 389 JOG operation screen
Positioning operation
This operation starts when the Forward or Reverse key is touched, and the servo motor rotates by the preset distance.
Page 390 Positioning operation screen
Motor-less operation
Simulates the motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even when the servo motor is not connected.
Page 392 Motor-less operation screen
DO forced output
Forcibly turns the output signals ON/OFF regardless of the output conditions of the servo amplifier output signals.
Page 394 DO forced output screen
Changing screens The screen changes as follows after [Test] is selected on the function selection menu screen.
Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier, some screens may not be displayed.
Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed.
Page 354 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions
If the JOG operation screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT, "Monitor data not found" is displayed and the
subsequent screens are not displayed.
*1 This is not displayed when monitoring the MR-J2M-P8A. *2 This is not displayed when MR-J2M-DU is monitored.
[Motor-less operation] key
[Motor-less operation] key
Function selection menu screen
[Menu] key
*1 *1
*2
*1
[Test] key
[DO forced output] key
[DO forced output] key
[DO forced output] key
JOG operation screen
Motorless operation screen DO forced output screenPositioning operation screen
[JOG operation] key
[JOG operation] key
[JOG operation] key
[Motor-less operation] key
[Positioning operation] key
[Positioning operation] key
[Positioning operation] key
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 387
38
Precautions for test operations The following describes the precautions when performing a test operation of the servo amplifier monitor.
Servo on For test operation of JOG operation/positioning operation, the SON digital input signal of the servo amplifier is turned on
automatically in the servo amplifier to start operation, regardless of the ON/OFF status of the SON signal of the digital I/O
signal of the servo amplifier.
In addition, the servo amplifier does not accept any external command pulses and input signals (excluding emergency stop)
until the test operation screen is exited.
The SON automatically turns on when touching the [Forward] key or [Reverse] key on the JOG operation screen or
positioning operation screen of the servo amplifier monitor.
Stop To perform an emergency stop, turn off the emergency stop signal of the servo amplifier or turn off the input power.
Use the following procedure to stop test operation from the servo amplifier monitor.
JOG operation
Release the [Forward] key or [Reverse] key.
Positioning operation
Touch the [Pause] key.
The servo motor stops if any of the following states occurs during test operation.
The communication cable is disconnected.
The screen is switched to another servo amplifier monitor screen or the servo amplifier monitor is exited.
However, during motor-less operation, the test mode is not canceled until the servo amplifier is powered off.
Preparations for test operations When performing test operations, it is necessary to make the test operation settings on the connected servo amplifier.
Refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier for details of making settings on the servo amplifier to perform test
operations.
Do not operate the servo amplifier switches with wet hands. Doing so can cause an electric shock. Do not perform operations with the front cover of the servo amplifier removed. Doing so can cause an electric shock since the high-voltage terminals and live parts are exposed. Do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier when the power is on or during operation. Doing so can cause an electric shock.
WARNING
Check parameters of the servo amplifier before starting operation. Unexpected operations may occur depending on the machine. The heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, servo motor and other parts of the servo amplifier may be hot while the power is on or for a period after the power is turned off; therefore, do not touch or bring parts (cables etc.) close to them. Doing so can cause fire or damage to the parts.
CAUTION Be sure to read the precautions for test operation in the manuals of the servo amplifier before performing a test operation.
8 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Displayed contents
1)[Motor speed]
Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2)[Acc/dec time]
Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3)Momentary Switch Operation
Displays how to operate the JOG operation.
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the JOG operation screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Forward] key
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
4)[Reverse] key
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
5)[Motor speed] key
Changes the speed of the servo motor.
6)[Acc/dec time] key
Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
1)
2)
3)
5)
6)
7)
8) 9)
10)
11) 12)
1)
3)
4)
2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 389
39
7)[Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary] key, [Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary] key
Touching this changes the operation mode (momentary operation/no momentary operation).
[Momentary Switch Operation: Selecting Momentary]
The servo motor rotates while the [Forward] key or [Reverse] key is touched.
Releasing your finger from these keys stops the operation.
[Momentary Switch Operation: Not Selecting Momentary]
The servo motor rotates while the [Forward] key or [Reverse] key is touched, stops when the [Pause] key is touched.
8)[Positioning] key
Changes to the positioning operation screen.
Page 390 Positioning operation screen
9)[Without Motor] key
Changes to the motor-less operation screen.
Page 392 Motor-less operation screen
10)[DO ForcedOutput] key
Changes to the DO forced output screen.
Page 394 DO forced output screen
11)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
12)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Positioning operation screen The following describes the display data of the positioning operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Motor speed]
Displays the set speed of the servo motor.
2)[Acc/dec time]
Displays the set acceleration/deceleration time constant.
3)Move distance
Displays the set distance.
1)
2)
3)
0 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the positioning operation screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Forward] key
Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction.
4)[Reverse] key
Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation (CW) direction.
5)Operation key
The displayed key varies depending on the connected servo amplifier.
6)[Motor speed] key
Changes the rotation speed of the servo motor.
7)[Acc/dec time] key
Changes the acceleration/deceleration time constant.
8)[Move distance] key
Changes the distance.
9)[JOG] key
Changes to the JOG operation screen.
Page 389 JOG operation screen
10)[Without Motor] key
Changes to the motor-less operation screen.
Page 392 Motor-less operation screen
11)[DO ForcedOutput] key
Changes to the DO forced output screen.
Page 394 DO forced output screen
Item Description
[Pause] key Stops the rotation of the servo motor temporarily.
This is displayed only when MELSERVO-J2-Super series or MELSERVO-J2M series is connected.
[Restart] key Resumes the rotation of the paused servo motor.
This is displayed only when MR-J3-A series or MR-J4-A is connected.
[Clear] key Deletes the remaining distance of the paused servo motor.
This is displayed only when MR-J3-A series or MR-J4-A is connected.
6)
7)
8)
9) 10) 11)
12) 13)
1)
3)
4)
5)
2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 391
39
12)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
13)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Operation MELSERVO-J2-Super series and MELSERVO-J2 series
Start operation
Touch the [Forward] or [Reverse] key
To resume operation that has been paused, touch the [Forward] key to resume forward rotation or the [Reverse] key to
resume reverse rotation.
Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the [Pause] key pauses the operation.
If touch the [Pause] key again after the operation is paused, the remaining distance is erased.
MR-J3-A and MR-J4-A
Start operation
Touch the [Forward] or [Reverse] key.
To resume the operation that has been paused, touch the [Restart] key to resume the rotation.
Stop operation
When the set distance has been reached, operation stops.
Touching the [Pause] key pauses the operation.
If touch the [Clear] key again after the operation is paused, the remaining distance is erased.
Motor-less operation screen The following describes the display data of the motor-less operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Start and end of the motor-less operation with MR-J4-A.
Changing the parameter PC60 (*COPD) starts and ends the motor-less operation.
PC60 (*COPD) can be changed by [Ext. setting] in the parameter setting screen.
Page 382 Parameter setting screen
Start:
After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 1, turn on the servo amplifier again.
End:
After setting PC60 (*COPD) to 0, turn on the servo amplifier again.
2 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Displayed contents
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the motor-less operation screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)[Start] key
Starts motor-less operation.
4)[JOG] key
Changes to the JOG operation screen.
Page 389 JOG operation screen
5)[Positioning] key
Changes to the positioning operation screen.
Page 390 Positioning operation screen
6)[DO ForcedOutput] key
Changes to the DO forced output screen.
Page 394 DO forced output screen
7)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
8)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
4) 5) 6)
7) 8)
1)
3)
2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 393
39
DO forced output screen The following describes the display data of the DO forced output screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)ON/OFF status of output signals
Displays the ON/OFF status of the servo amplifier output signals.
After this screen has been switched to another screen, all external I/O signals are turned off.
1)
4 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DO forced output screen.
1)[Menu] key
Returns to the function selection menu screen.
2)[End] key
Exits the servo amplifier monitor.
3)Output signal key
4)[JOG] key
Changes to the JOG operation screen.
Page 389 JOG operation screen
5)[Positioning] key
Changes to the positioning operation screen.
Page 390 Positioning operation screen
6)[Without Motor] key
Changes to the motor-less operation screen.
Page 392 Motor-less operation screen
7)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 396 Hard copy output
8)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of this key is invalid.
Item Description
Output signal name key Touching the signal name of an output signal sets or resets the status for that signal.
If the present output signal is ON, then the signal is turned off (RESET).
If the present output signal is OFF, the signal is turned on (SET).
[DO1] Displays the external output signals of the extension I/O unit.
This is displayed only when the MR-J2M-P8A is connected.
3)
4) 5) 6)
7) 8)
1) 2)
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 395
39
Hard copy output This section describes how to output the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
Touching the [Print Screen] key outputs the data.
The output target of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
6 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens
9
action.
Error message Error definition Corrective action
Monitor data not found The monitor data have not installed or have
been deleted.
Download the monitor data of the servo amplifier monitor.
It is not possible to set. An item that cannot be set was selected. Select an item that can be set.
No AMP Communications Communication can not be established with the
servo amplifier set as the monitor destination.
Check the connection state between the servo amplifier and the GOT
(connector disconnection, cable wire break).
Check if an error has occurred in the servo amplifier.
Set the same values to the setup screen on the servo amplifier
monitor and the parameter setting on the servo amplifier.
This test mode cannot be
selected. Operation without Motor
rotation.
Another test operation function has started. Exit the other test operation function.
SON
Make sure that operation is at a
stop.
The servo amplifier SON signal is ON. Turn off the servo amplifier SON signal.
Incorrect setting range A value outside the setting range was set when
setting the servo parameter of the servo
amplifier.
Set the servo parameter of the servo amplifier within the setting range.
Servo alarm has occurred.
Alarm:**
An alarm occurred on the connected servo
amplifier.
Reset the alarm on the servo amplifier.
Unit not found The drive unit is not installed in the selected
slot.
Select the slot where the drive unit is installed.
Unmatched password The entered password is invalid. Input the correct password.
Can't write to servo amp.
Normally.
Failed to write the parameter. Check the write data.
Check the setup information.
Please confirm forward or
reversal stroke end (LSP or LSN)
The servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal is OFF. Turn on the servo amplifier LSP/LSN signal.
Communication channel setup
error
The channel No. setting or communication
driver setting is incorrect.
Check the communication settings.
It is not possible to select. MR-J2M-P8A, MR-J3-A, or MR-J4-A was
selected with the station No. selection setting
set to [No].
A channel with no station number was
selected for the MR-J2M-P8A.
Set the station No. selection setting to [Yes].
Select a channel with a station number.
9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 397
39
MEMO
8 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
10
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION
Page 399 Features
Page 401 Specifications
Page 425 Precautions
Page 450 Network batch backup/restoration
Page 457 Individual restoration screen (Restoration)
Page 462 Precautions
For using the backup/restoration function on GT21, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
10.1 Features Setting data, including a sequence program, parameters, and setting values, for a controller connected to the GOT can be
saved (backed up) in a memory card or USB memory in the GOT.
The following shows features of the backup/restoration function.
GOT backup
For backing up the GOT setting data, use the GOT data package acquisition function.
For the GOT data package acquisition function, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Backing up or restoring system without personal computer for reducing downtime Setting data for a controller connected to the GOT can be backed up, and the data can be restored to the controller.
With backing up setting data for a controller, the data can be restored to the controller with the GOT connected to the
controller even though the controller has to be replaced because of problems, including failures. As a result, the system can
be easily restored.
Enabling creating the same system without personal computer With restoring the backed up setting data to controllers in other systems, the same system can be created without a personal
computer.
Data storage
Backing up setting data to a data storage
Restore the backup data to the controller.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.1 Features 399
40
Improving security When the backup/restoration function is used, browsing and changing setting data is limited with a password and the security
is improved.
Automatically backing up data with trigger By setting the trigger device or the days and time, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers.
By controlling the backup with the set trigger device, the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers after the
data are changed.
By setting the days and time, the GOT can back up setting data for controllers periodically.
Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network Batch backup/restoration can be performed to multiple controllers on the network per channel.
Target controllers for the backup/restoration can be specified per station.
Page 445 Network batch backup/restoration
File register information at restoration When restoration is executed, the PLC retains the data in the file register.
For the QCPU, the memory card ROM (Flash) cannot be set to save the file register.
Data storage
Password authentication
Password authentication
Backing up setting data to a data strage
Trigger device: X100
X100: OFF ON
X100: ON Detected
Backing up setting data to a data strage
Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
Tuesday 17:30
Ethernet
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 2
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 3
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 1
Batch backup/restoration for controllers on the network
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.1 Features
10
10.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration for the backup/restoration function.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Controller *1 Model
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU,
R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series) R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ
QCPU (Q mode) Basic model *2 Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
High Performance model *2 Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
Universal model Q00UJCPU, Q00UJCPU-S8, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU,
Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU,
Q26UDEHCPU, Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU,
Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
Motion CPU (Q series) *3*4 Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU,
Q172DCPU, Q172DCPU-S1, Q173DCPU, Q173DCPU-S1, Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU,
Q170MCPU, Q170MCPU-S1, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
LCPU L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P, L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT,
L26CPU-PBT
FXCPU *5 FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U, FX3UC, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3S
CNC C80 R16NCCPU
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU
MELSERVO-J4 series MR-J4-GF
FR-A series FR-A800series *6*7, FR-A800 Plus series *6*8
FR-F series FR-F800 series
Robot controller *9 CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU), CR750-Q (Q172DRCPU), CR751-Q (Q172DRCPU),
CRnD-700, CR750-D, CR751-D,
CR800-R (R16RTCPU), CR800-D, CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 401
40
*1 When executing the network batch backup/restoration, use controllers compatible with the Ethernet connection. For the controllers compatible with Ethernet connection, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
*2 Use a PLC CPU with the function version of B or later. *3 Use the following production number Motion CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU.
For bus connection and direct CPU connection (serial) Q172CPU: Production number K******* or later Q173CPU: Production number J******* or later For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection (serial) Q172CPU: Production number N******* or later Q173CPU: Production number M******* or later
*4 The operation system software of SV13 and SV22 are available only. Use a Motion CPU with the following OS installed when using the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN. SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later (00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial)) SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later (00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial))
*5 To restore the backup data containing a special parameter, use the following version of CPU. FX3U(C) version: 3.10 or later FX3G(C) version: 2.00 or later
*6 This controller is supported only when it is equipped with an FR-A8NCE. *7 FR-A800-GF does not require an FR-A8NCE because the FR-A800-GF has a built-in communication board for the CC-Link IE Field
Network. *8 FR-A800-R2R is not supported. *9 For using CRnQ-700 or CRnD-700, use robot controllers with the following versions or later.
Robot controller Version
CRnQ-700 N8 or later
CRnD-700 P8 or later
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
PLC CPU, Motion CPU, CNC, and robot controller
(: Applicable, : Inapplicable)
*1 Backup/restoration cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter. *2 For direct CPU connection (serial), use L6ADP-R2.
Restoration cannot be performed depending on the communication status between the GOT and target
controllers.
For the availability of restoration depending on the communication status of the controllers, refer to the
following.
Page 418 Communication status between GOT and target controllers
Target controller Connection type between the GOT and controller
Ethernet connection *1 Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection
Bus connection
RCPU
Motion CPU(MELSEC iQ-R Series)
MELSEC iQ-F
QCPU(Q mode)
Motion CPU(Q Series)
LCPU *2
FXCPU
CNC C80
CNC C70
Robot controller
GOTTarget controller
Ethernet connection Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection Bus connection
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 403
40
Inverter and servo amplifier The backup/restoration is usable for an inverter or servo amplifier that is connected to the GOT through a PLC CPU (master
station). The inverter or servo amplifier must be connected to the PLC CPU on the CC-Link IE Field Network.
Connect the GOT and the PLC CPU by Ethernet.
Target controller Intelligent function module PLC GOT
FR-A series *9*12
FR-F series *9*12 RJ71GF11-T2 *1, RJ71EN71 *1 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU,
R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU
GT27, GT25
RD77GF4 *2, RD77GF8 *2, RD77GF16 *2,
RD77GF32
-
(Ethernet port built in the PLC CPU)
R04ENCPU *3, R08ENCPU *3, R16ENCPU *3,
R32ENCPU *3, R120ENCPU *3
QJ71GF11-T2 *10, QD77GF4, QD77GF8,
QD77GF16 *8 Q00UJCPU *4, Q00UCPU *4, Q01UCPU *4,
Q02UCPU *4, Q03UDCPU *4, Q04UDHCPU *4,
Q06UDHCPU *4, Q10UDHCPU *4,
Q13UDHCPU *4, Q20UDHCPU *4,
Q26UDHCPU *4, Q03UDECPU *4,
Q04UDEHCPU *4, Q06UDEHCPU *4,
Q10UDEHCPU *4, Q13UDEHCPU *4,
Q20UDEHCPU *4, Q26UDEHCPU *4,
Q50UDEHCPU *4, Q100UDEHCPU *4,
Q03UDVCPU *4, Q04UDVCPU *4,
Q06UDVCPU *4, Q13UDVCPU *4,
Q26UDVCPU *4, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU, Q06CCPU-V *5, Q06CCPU-V-B *5,
Q12DCCPU-V *6, Q24DHCCPU-V,
Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS
LJ71GF11-T2 *11 L02SCPU *7, L02SCPU-P *7, L02CPU *7,
L02CPU-P *7, L06CPU *7, L06CPU-P *7,
L26CPU *7, L26CPU-P *7, L26CPU-BT *7,
L26CPU-PBT *7
GOTInverter Servo Amplifier
CC-Link IE Field Network connection
PLC
Ethernet connection
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
*1 Use a module with version 09 or later. *2 Use a module with version 02 or later. *3 Use a module having version 09 or later of the network part. *4 The serial number must start with 12012 or later. *5 The serial number must start with 12082 or later. *6 For a basic mode, the serial number must start with 12042 or later. *7 The serial number must start with 13012 or later. *8 The serial number must start with 17102 or later. *9 For connection to a MELSEC-Q or MELSEC-L series, the inverter must be version *83****** or later. *10 The serial number must start with 17062 or later. *11 The serial number must start with 16072 or later. *12 For connection to a MELSEC iQ-R series, the inverter must be version *62****** or later. *13 For MR-J4-GF, its OS version must be A1 or later.
Required hardware A data storage is required to use the backup/restoration.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the backup/restoration to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
MELSERVO-J4 series *13 RJ71GF11-T2 *1, RJ71EN71 *1 R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU,
R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU,
R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, R120PCPU
GT27, GT25
RD77GF4 *2, RD77GF8 *2, RD77GF16 *2,
RD77GF32
-
(Ethernet port built in the PLC CPU)
R04ENCPU *3, R08ENCPU *3, R16ENCPU *3,
R32ENCPU *3, R120ENCPU *3
QJ71GF11-T2 *10, QD77GF4, QD77GF8,
QD77GF16 *8 Q00UJCPU *4, Q00UCPU *4, Q01UCPU *4,
Q02UCPU *4, Q03UDCPU *4, Q04UDHCPU *4,
Q06UDHCPU *4, Q10UDHCPU *4,
Q13UDHCPU *4, Q20UDHCPU *4,
Q26UDHCPU *4, Q03UDECPU *4,
Q04UDEHCPU *4, Q06UDEHCPU *4,
Q10UDEHCPU *4, Q13UDEHCPU *4,
Q20UDEHCPU *4, Q26UDEHCPU *4,
Q50UDEHCPU *4, Q100UDEHCPU *4,
Q03UDVCPU *4, Q04UDVCPU *4,
Q06UDVCPU *4, Q13UDVCPU *4,
Q26UDVCPU *4, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU,
Q26UDPVCPU, Q06CCPU-V *5, Q06CCPU-V-B *5,
Q12DCCPU-V *6, Q24DHCCPU-V,
Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS
LJ71GF11-T2 *11 L02SCPU *7, L02SCPU-P *7, L02CPU *7,
L02CPU-P *7, L06CPU *7, L06CPU-P *7,
L26CPU *7, L26CPU-P *7, L26CPU-BT *7,
L26CPU-PBT *7
Target controller Intelligent function module PLC GOT
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 405
40
Required software to be installed To restore the C language module backed up from the CNC C70, Remote Monitor Tool is required.
How to obtain the software Contact your local distributor.
Operating environment For the operating environment of the software, refer to the following.
MITSUBISHI CNC C70 / C64 Series Remote monitor tool Operating Manual
How to install For the installation instructions, refer to the following.
MITSUBISHI CNC C70 / C64 Series Remote monitor tool Operating Manual
Data to be backed up and restored The following shows data to be backed up and restored.
Data other than the the following data cannot be backed up and restored.
Basic model RCPU
*1 Numbers are assigned for the "mmmnn" part automatically. *2 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
Item Description File name
Parameter CPU parameter CPU.PRM
System parameter SYSTEM.PRM
Unit parameter UNIT.PRM
Unit expansion parameter UEXmmmnn.PRM *1
Sequence program Sequence program *.PRG
FB file] *.PFB
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller *.DCM
Device initial value Setting the device initial value *.DID
Device memory *2 File register *.QDR
General-purpose file Files created by users Optional
Device data file File for storing device data DEVSTORE.QST
Global label setting file File for storing the data related to global labels GLBLINF.IFG
Label initial value File for storing the label initial value *.LID
Restoration information File for storing the restoration information *.CAB
Logging setting file Logging individual setting file LOG01.LIS to LOG10.LIS
Remote password Remote password settings 00000001.SYP
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Basic model QCPU
*1 The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving. Whether the file register in the SRAM card or standard RAM is restored or not can be selected in a dialog displayed at restoration. When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted. Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally. If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
*2 The target is only parameters of the intelligent function modules controlled by the CPU module. The parameters stored in the intelligent function module are not included.
*3 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable. Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
High Performance model QCPU
*1 The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving. Whether the file register in the SRAM card or standard RAM is restored or not can be selected in a dialog displayed at restoration. When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted. Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally. If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
*2 The item can be backed up only. *3 The target is only parameters of the intelligent function modules controlled by the CPU module.
The parameters stored in the intelligent function module are not included. *4 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data *5 Only available to QnUD(P)VCPU.
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module parameter *2 Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM.QPA
Sequence program Program that the CPU operates MAIN.QPG
SFC program Sequence program with the SFC programming format MAIN-SFC.QPG
File register *1*3 Data stored in file registers MAIN.QDR
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller MAIN.QCD
Device initial value Setting the device initial value MAIN.QDI
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module parameter *3 Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM.QPA
Program Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program) ***.QPG
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller ***.QCD
Boot operation specification file Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value Setting the device initial value ***.QDI
File register *1*4 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR
Sampling trace file *2 Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously collected
with the specified timing
***.QTD
Failure history data *2 Failure history data that are recorded self-diagnostic results ***.QFD
Programmable controller user data Any user-created data stored in a memory card ***.*** (Optional)
Operation history file *5 Operation history data that are collected by the operation history function OPERATE.QOL
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 407
40
Universal model QCPU
*1 The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving. Whether to restore the file register stored in the SRAM card or standard RAM is selectable in a dialog appearing at restoration. When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted. Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally. If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
*2 The item can be backed up only. *3 The target is only parameters of the intelligent function modules controlled by the CPU module.
The parameters stored in the intelligent function module are not included. *4 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
LCPU
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module parameter *3 Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM.QPA
Program Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program) ***.QPG
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller ***.QCD
Boot operation specification file Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value Setting the device initial value ***.QDI
File register *1*4 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR
Sampling trace file *2 Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously collected
with the specified timing
***.QTD
Programmable controller user data Any user-created data stored in a memory card ***.*** (Optional)
File for storing device data Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading The heading of the drive QN.DAT
Remote password Remote password settings 00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations. MONITOR.Q0*
Latch data backup file Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the standard
ROM.
LCHDAT00.QBK
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM.QPA
Intelligent function module parameter *3 Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM.QPA
Program Program that the CPU operates (Including SFC program) ***.QPG
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller ***.QCD
Boot operation specification file Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC.QBT
Device initial value Setting the device initial value ***.QDI
File register *1*4 Data stored in file registers ***.QDR
Sampling trace file *2 Sampling trace data that the specified device data is continuously collected
with the specified timing
***.QTD
Programmable controller user data Any user-created data stored in a memory card ***.*** (Optional)
File for storing device data Device data used for the SP.DEVST and S.DEVLD instructions DEVSTORE.QST
Drive heading The heading of the drive QN.DAT
Remote password Remote password settings 00000000.QTM
Monitor sequence extension Data to increase the speed of monitors from other stations. MONITOR.Q0*
Latch data backup file Stores the backup data for the latch data backup function to the standard
ROM.
LCHDAT00.QBK
Data logging setting file Setting the data logging LOGCOM.QLG
LOG01.QLG to
LOG10.QLG
Menu definition file Menu defining files MENUDEF.QDF
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
*1 The file register in the Flash card installed in the CPU is always restored without confirming saving. Whether the file register in the SRAM card or standard RAM is restored or not can be selected in a dialog displayed at restoration. When the file register is not restored, the existing file register is deleted. Therefore, programs of the controller may not work normally. If a problem occurs in the operation of the controller after restoration, perform the restoration again, including to the file register.
*2 The item can be backed up only. *3 The target is only parameters of the intelligent function modules controlled by the CPU module.
The parameters stored in the intelligent function module are not included. *4 Whether to retain the file register of a PLC at restoration is selectable.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
MELSERVO-J4 series
*1 When the simple cam function is disabled, cam data can only be restored. *2 Cam data cannot be restored to a servo amplifier having software version A2 or earlier that does not support the simple cam
function. *3 Restore cam data after the network communication between a servo amplifier and the controller is established.
Set the servo parameter [Pr. PN03 Station-specific mode setting] to 1 to select the I/O mode. *4 Power off and on the servo amplifier before restoring cam data again.
Otherwise, [AL.F5.2 Cam data - Area miswriting warning] occurs.
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R Series)
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a servo amplifier ***.CP1
Point table Point table data ***.PTB2
Cam data *1*2*3*4 Cam data ***.cam
Item Description File name
Common parameter CPU parameter CPU.PRM
System parameter SYSTEM.PRM
Unit parameter UNIT.PRM
Motion CPU common parameter Basic setting mot_sys.csv
Servo network setting motnet01.csv to motnet02.csv
High-speed input request signal setting fsinput.csv
Mark detection setting markdt.csv
Limit output data setting limitout.csv
Manual pulse generator connection setting mpulser.csv
Vision system parameter vs_sys.csv
vs_prg.csv
Head module setting rioref.csv
Multiple CPU refresh (main cycle, operation cycle) setting fastref.csv
Motion control parameter Axis setting parameter axpara01.csv to axpara64.csv
Servo parameter (servo amplifier axis) svpara01.csv to svpara64.csv
Servo parameter (sensing module (RIO axis)) svpara91.csv to svpara98.csv
Parameter block para_blk.csv
Machine common parameter file mcn_com.csv
Machine parameter file mcn01.csv to mcn08.csv
Cam data cam0001.csv to cam1024.csv
Servo input axis parameter in_servo.csv
Synchronous encoder axis parameter in_enc.csv
Command generation axis parameter in_cmgen.csv
Synchronous parameter out01.csv to out64.csv
Machine CPU advanced synchronous control setting file cpu_sync.csv
Program Online change file (arithmetic control program) df_f0000.prg to df_f4095.prg
Online change file (transition program) df_g0000.prg to df_g4095.prg
Online change file (servo program) df_k0000.prg to df_k8191.prg *2
Online change file (motion SFC diagram) df_sf000.prg to df_sf511.prg *3
Servo program servo2.prg *4
Motion SFC parameter motsfcpr2.bin *5
Motion SFC program motsfc2.prg *6
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 409
41
*1 Numbers are assigned for the "***" part automatically. *2 For version 09 or earlier of the operating system software, files df_k0000.prg to df_k4095.prg are applied. *3 For version 09 or earlier of the operating system software, files df_sf000.prg to df_sf255.prg are applied. *4 For version 09 or earlier of the operating system software, servo.prg is applied. *5 For version 09 or earlier of the operating system software, motsfcpr.bin is applied. *6 For version 09 or earlier of the operating system software, motsfc.prg is applied. *7 For version 02 or earlier of the operating system software, DEVCMNT.IFG is applied. *8 For version 02 or earlier of the operating system software, GL_LABEL.DCM is applied.
MELSEC iQ-F
*1 If the file is password-protected, the file cannot be backed up.
Other data Digital oscilloscope sampling data ***.csv *1
Digital oscilloscope setting osc01.csv
Boot log bootlog.txt
bootlog.bak (previous boot log)
Event history EVENT.LOG
Device comment file DEVCMNT.DC2 *7
Label and structure file GL_LABEL.IF2 *8
Item Description File name
Parameter CPU parameter CPU.PRM
System parameter SYSTEM.PRM
Unit parameter UNIT.PRM
Unit expansion parameter UEXmmmnn.PRM
Sequence program Sequence program *.PRG
FB file *.PFB
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller *.DCM
Device initial value Setting the device initial value *.DID
Global label setting file File for storing the data related to global labels GLBLINF.IFG
Restoration information File for storing the restoration information *.CAB
Logging setting file *1 Logging individual setting file LOG**.LIS
Memory dump setting file *1 Memory dump function setting file MEMDUMP.DPS
Remote password *1 Remote password settings 00000001.SYP
Module extension parameter (for protocol
setting)
File for storing the parameters of the predefined protocol support setting .PPR
Firmware update prohibited file File for prohibiting the firmware update of the PLC FWUPDP.SYU
Item Description File name
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Q series Motion CPU
*1 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or Q170MSCPU. *2 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN. *3 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU. *4 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN. *5 The data can be backed up or restored with the SV22 operating system software only. *6 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU, Q173HCPU, Q172DCPU, Q173DCPU, Q170MCPU, or Q170MSCPU.
FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series
Item Description File name
Motion SFC program conversion file
(control code)
File where SFC code, G-code and F/FS code files are combined and
converted into CPU's Motion SFC program code memory storage format
sfcprog.cod
Motion SFC program conversion file (text) File where G list and F/FS list files are combined and converted into CPU's
Motion SFC program text memory storage format
sfcprog.bin
Motion SFC parameter file Motion SFC control parameter setting information files sfcprmD.bin *1
sfcprm.bin *2
K code file Internal code files of servo program svprog.bin
System setting data file System setting data information files svsystemD.bin *1
svsystemH.bin *3
svsystem.bin *4
High speed read setting file High speed read setting information files svlatchD.bin *1
svlatch.bin *2
Optional data monitor setting file Optional data monitor information files svsysmonD.bin *1
svsysmon.bin *2
Servo data file Axis data parameter block information files svdataD.bin *1
svdataH.bin *3
Servo parameter information files svparaH.bin *3
Servo parameter information files svdata.bin *4
svdata2.bin *4
Limit switch setting data information files svls.bin
Mechanical system program conversion file File after conversion of mechanical system program edit information file into
internal codes
svmchprm.bin *5
Cam data conversion file Cam data files of cam No.1 to 64 svcamprm.bin *5
Cam data files of cam No.101 to 164 svcampr2.bin *5
Cam data files of cam No.201 to 264 svcampr3.bin *5
Cam data files of cam No.301 to 364 svcampr4.bin *5
Cam Edit data Cam Edit data files svcameditD.bin
Vision sensor parameter Vision sensor parameter setting information files visionD.bin
User safety sequence program Safety sequence program files safetyD.bin
Mark detection setting data Mark detection setting data svmarkD.bin
Q series PLC common parameter file Data files of Multiple CPU setting, I/O assignment, and others param.wpa
Multiple CPU high speed refresh setting Multiple CPU high speed refresh setting information files svrefresh.bin *1
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating an inverter ***.CP1
Parameter file PLC function parameter ***.QPA
Program file Sequence program ***.QPG
Function block source information Function block source information ***.C32
Global text comment information Global text comment information ***.QCD
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 411
41
FX CPU
*1 The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series and FX3G(C) series. *2 The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series only. *3 The data are stored in the FX3U-32MT-LT-2 only. *4 The data can be backed up or restored with the FX3U(C) series, FX3G(C) series, and FX3S series.
CNC C70
*1 The data can be backed up or restored only when the version C4 or later of the CNC C70 is used. To restore the data, use the version C0 or later of Remote Monitor Tool.
CNC C80
*1 The item can be backed up only. *2 This data cannot be restored when the safety observation function of the CNC is enabled and a safety password is set for the CNC.
Even though you cancel the safety password of the CNC, a write error occurs when the safety passwords of the CNC and the restoration target file are mismatched.
*3 The CNC C80 with version B0 or later supports this file. Any backup data containing unsupported data by the CNC C80 cannot be restored. Restore the backup data after updating the CNC C80 to the version that supports the data.
Item Description File name
Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller INFO.FPG
Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
Sequence program Program that the CPU operates
Special program *1 Positioning setting/Initial value parameter
File register Data stored in file registers
Extension file register *2 Data stored in extension file registers
Built-in CC-Link/LT setting *3 CC-Link/LT parameter
Special parameter *4 Special adapter/special block parameter saved in the main unit
Item Description File name
Machining program Program for running the CNC ALL.PRG
Parameter Parameter for operating the CNC ALL.PRM
Tool offset Offset of the tool length compensation and tool radius compensation TOOL.OFS
Workpiece offset Offset of the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate
system
WORK.OFS
Common variable Common macro variables that can be used in different machining programs COMMON.VAR
User PLC Ladder program created by users USERPLC.LAD
C language module *1 C language module created by users APLC.O
Item Description File name
System file File used for the system SYSPRM.BIN
Parameter Parameter for operating the CNC ALL.PRM
Machining program Program for running the CNC ALL.PRG
Program for running the CNC (extended area) ALL2.PRG *3
Machine manufacturer macro Machine manufacturer macro program file MACROALL.BIN
MDI program MDI program file MDIALL.PRG
Tool offset *1 Offset of the tool length compensation and tool radius compensation TOOL.OFS
All tool data All tool data including tool life and tool length compensation data TOOLALL.DAT
Workpiece offset Offset of the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate
system
WORK.OFS
Common variable Common macro variables that can be used in different machining programs COMMON.VAR
Safety parameter *2 Safety parameter file SAFEPARA.BIN
Safety ladder *2 Safety PLC program file (for the host station) SAFEPLC1.LAD
Safety PLC program file (for other stations) SAFEPLC2.LAD
APLC load module APLC load module APLC.BIN
SRAM data *1 SRAM data files SRAM.BIN
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Robot controller
Data for software
Item Description File name
Error log Error log (all levels) AError.LOG
Error log (low level) LError.LOG
Error log (caution level) CError.LOG
Error log (high level) HError.LOG
Error count Total errors TTLERROR.DAT
Common parameter Common parameters COMMON.PRM
Mechanical parameter Parameter for robots (Machine name) # (Machine No. 1
to 3).PRM
Backup information Setting information on backup BKUP.SYS
Mechanical information Information on the robot MECHA.SYS
System program System based program files sysalgn.MB6/MB5/MB4
sysimac.MB6/MB5/MB4
Sysorg.MB6/MB5/MB4
Syssafe.MB6/MB5/MB4
Systembase.MB6/MB5/MB4
User program User-created robot programs ***.MB6/MB5/MB4
Robot serial Serial No. for robots RobotSerial.ser
Maintenance forecast information Information on maintenance forecast MFInfo.mfb
Item Description File name
Label program Data for GX Developer PROJINFO.CAB
Symbolic data Symbolic data for PX Developer #FBDQINF.BIN
Source
information
Simple project (with label) GX Works2 data SRCINFOM.CAB
SRCINFOM.C32
Structured project GX Works2 data SRCINFOI.CAB
SRCINFOI.C32
New source
information
Simple project (with label) GX Works2 data SRCINF1M.CAB
SRCINF2M.CAB
SRCINF1M.C32
SRCINF2M.C32
Structured project GX Works2 data SRCINF1I.CAB
SRCINF2I.CAB
SRCINF1I.C32
SRCINF2I.C32
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 413
41
Backup setting Backup settings are created when executing the backup, and are stored in a data strage with the following folder structure.
For how to set the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Backup data
Storing backup data When backups for the same channel are executed several times, the backup data are stored in a data strage. (Backup data
stored in the data strage are not overwritten.)
Storage location for backup Backup data are stored in a data strage with the following folder structure.
For how to set the storage location for backup data, refer to the following.
Page 429 Setting storage location for backup data
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Folders for backup data Backup data are stored by the folder, and a folder name (YYMMDDXX) is set as follows.
Example) Folder name for the 10th backup data for Ch.1 on September 15th, 2013
Folder name: 13091509
When names of folders for backup data include XX of 99, the backup data cannot be stored.
Up to 100 backups can be executed per channel in a day.
Data strage Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for the backup setting
Backup setting file for CH No.1
Backup setting file for CH No.2
BKUPLIST
SYS1BKUP.G2B
SYS2BKUP.G2B
Data strage Data strage in the drive set as the storage location for backup data
BACKUP
SYS1BKUP
SYS2BKUP
YYMMDDXX Folder for storing backup data
YYMMDDXX Serial number (00 to 99)
Backup date (01 to 31)
Backup month (01 to 12)
Backup year (the last two digits of the year)
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Log files for backing up or restoring When backing up or restoring, the controllers and files to be baked up or restored are recorded in log files (When backing up
or restoring, they are overwritten.)
Log files are created in the folder where each backup data is stored.
Page 414 Backup data
File format
Format
*1 For RCPU, the long file names specified on GX Works3 are displayed in an abbreviated form
Item Setting
File name, extension result.txt
File format SJIS format
Item Setting
Header Displays the executed operation type. ([BACKUP]: Backup, [RESTORE]: Restore
Backup setting Displays the backup setting name.
Start time Displays the start time for backing up or restoring.
Target devices Displays the CH No., network No., station No., CPU No., unit type, and model of the target device when
backing up or restoring.
The following shows the display contents for unit types.
PLC: PLC CPU
MC : Motion controller
SV : Servo Amplifier
INV : Inverter
RC : Robot controller
Files Displays the backed up or restored flies. *1
Backup/restoration status Recorded only when network batch backing up or restoring.
Displays the number of controllers which the backup/restoration is completed, the number of all target
controllers, the number of controllers which backup/restoration is completed, and the number of errors, by
station.
Header Backup setting Start time
Target devices
Files
Backup/restore status
Backup/restore status
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 415
41
Access range
Access range with connection types The following shows a target controller of the backup/restoration with each connection type.
PLC CPU, Motion CPU, CNC, and robot controller
Inverter and servo amplifier The backup/restoration is usable for an inverter or servo amplifier that is connected to the GOT through a PLC CPU (master
station). The inverter or servo amplifier must be connected to the PLC CPU on the CC-Link IE Field Network.
Connect the GOT and the PLC CPU by Ethernet.
If the inverter or servo amplifier is connected to the RCPU on any other network, the backup/restoration is not usable.
With multi-channel function With the multi-channel function, the backup/restoration is executed per channel.
Backing up/restoring data for multiple CPU system For the backup, the batch backup for all CPUs or specified backup of CPU No. 1 to 4 can be selected with the utility setting.
The restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4.
When the backup/restoration is executed with specifying CPU No. 1 to 4, multiple CPUs (CPU No. 1 to 4) can be specified.
Connection type Target controller
Bus connection, direct CPU connection (serial), serial communication connection Host station
Ethernet connection Host station, Other station
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Precautions
Precautions for backup
Data that cannot be backed up The GOT cannot back up device current values and data stored in device memories.
For collecting device current values, use the recipe function.
For how to use the recipe function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
For collecting data stored in device memories, use GX Developer.
Names of files to be backed up When characters other than the characters defined in the shift JIS code and ASCII code are used for file names, the file
names may not be correctly displayed with the data backed up on the GOT.
For using the backup/restoration function, use characters in the JIS code and ASCII code for file names.
Backing up data stored in file registers Because backing up data stored in file registers takes a long time, some file register data may have different time stamps in
one backup data. Therefore, synchronism of the data is not assured.
Backing up intelligent function module parameters
Backing up intelligent function module parameters For backing up an intelligent function module parameter (IPARAM.QPA), only the parameters that can be stored in the PLC
CPU are the target parameters.
To store other intelligent function module parameters than those, GX Configurator applied to GX Works2 and the intelligent
function module is required.
For the intelligent function module parameters that can be stored in the PLC CPU, refer to the following.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Backing up in a multiple CPU configuration The backup operation in a multiple CPU configuration varies depending on whether the backup/restoration function of CPU
No.1 is supported.
When CPU No.1 does not support the backup/restoration function
When connected to an RCPU, the GOT skips CPU No.1 and determines whether the CPUs after No.2 are the backup target.
When the CPUs after No.2 do not support the backup/restoration function, the GOT skips backing up data for the CPUs and
backs up data for the next CPU.
When connected to a CPU other than RCPU, the GOT does not acquire information about the multiple configuration from
CPU No.1; therefore the GOT does not back up data for the CPUs after No.2 as well.
When CPU No.1 supports the backup/restoration function
Determine whether the CPUs after No.2 are backup targets.
When the CPUs after No.2 do not support the backup/restoration function, the GOT skips backing up data for the CPUs and
backs up data for the next CPU.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 417
41
Precautions for restore
Communication status between GOT and target controllers For restoring data, enable the target controllers of the restoration to communicate with the GOT.
When the target controllers of the restoration cannot communicate with the GOT, the restoration cannot be executed.
The following shows the availability of restoration depending on the connection type and controller status.
RCPU
(: Available, : Not available)
*1 Parameter errors of the Ethernet communication are excluded.
Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU
(: Available, : Not available)
*1 Parameter errors of the Ethernet communication are excluded. *2 For the multiple CPU system, connect the GOT to the CPU No.1.
Universal model QCPU
(: Available, : Not available)
*1 Parameter errors of the Ethernet communication are excluded. *2 For the multiple CPU system, connect the GOT to the CPU No.1. *3 The setting data of the following CPUs cannot be restored.
Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU: Software version A or earlier Q02UCPU: Software version K or earlier Q03UD(E)CPU, Q04UD(E)HCPU, Q06UD(E)HCPU: Software version N or earlier Q10UD(E)HCPU, Q13UD(E)HCPU, Q20UD(E)HCPU, Q26UD(E)HCPU: Software version F or earlier
Connection type
CPU No.1 status Single CPU system Multiple CPU system
CPU No.1 CPU No.1 CPU No.2 or later
Parameter normal Parameter error Factory default
Ethernet
connection
Parameter normal
Parameter error *1
Factory default
Connection type
CPU No.1 status Single CPU system Multiple CPU system
CPU No.1 CPU No.1 CPU No.2 or later
Parameter normal Parameter error Factory default
Ethernet
connection
Parameter normal
Parameter error *1
Factory default
Direct CPU
connection
(serial) *2
Parameter normal
Parameter error
Factory default
Bus connection Parameter normal
Parameter error
Factory default
Connection type
CPU No.1 status Single CPU system Multiple CPU system
CPU No.1 CPU No.1 CPU No.2 or later
Parameter normal Parameter error Factory default
Ethernet
connection
Parameter normal
Parameter error *1
Factory default
Direct CPU
connection
(serial) *2
Parameter normal
Parameter error
Factory default
Bus connection Parameter normal
Parameter error *3
Factory default
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
STOP status during restoration CPUs for the programmable controller and motion are in the STOP status with the remote STOP before the restoration.
For the CNC C70, the CNC ladder is in the STOP status.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is completed.
Restart the controllers.
When restoration is canceled When the restoration is canceled, all the data are not restored to the controllers and the controllers may not correctly operate.
When the restoration is canceled, be sure to execute the restoration again.
The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is canceled.
Restart the controllers.
System configuration with controllers for restoration Set the same system configuration with the controllers for the restoration as those for the backup.
Failure to do so disables the GOT to restore data to the controllers.
When the system configuration with the controllers for the restoration is the same as those for the backup, the GOT can
restore data to the controllers even if the connection type and CH No. for the restoration differ from those for the backup.
Controller operations Controllers may malfunction by changing set values, device values, and others during the restoration.
Check that data to be restored is the appropriate data, and then execute the restoration with paying attention to the controller
operations.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 419
42
Common precautions for backup and restore
Password for backup/restoration When a password for a controller is changed after setting the password for the backup/restoration, set a new
password for the backup/restoration.
For setting the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Page 430 Security and password
Precautions for GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Do not execute the following operations with GT Designer3 (GOT2000) during the backup/restoration.
BootOS installation
package data, the communication driver, the standard monitor OS, and the extended function system application download
When the above operations are executed, the backup/restoration is stopped.
Precautions for GX Developer Do not access the target controller of the backup/restoration with GX Developer during the backup/restoration.
Doing so stops the backup/restoration.
Do not execute the backup/restoration on the GOT while the target controller of the backup/restoration is accessed by GX
Developer.
Doing so causes a communication error on GX Developer. (The backup/restoration is executed.)
Precautions for using multiple GOTs Do not access the target controller of the backup/restoration with multiple GOTs at the same time.
Doing so stops the backup/restoration.
CPU with a security key When RCPU or the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is used
The backup/restoration can be executed even for a CPU module to which a security key is set.
When QnUDVCPU, QnUDPVCPU, Q17nDSCPU, or Q170MSCPU is used
The backup/restoration cannot be executed on the CPU on which the security key is set.
(The RCPU and the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) are excluded.)
To execute the backup/restoration, check the setting of the CPU.
When the target controllers of the backup/restoration include both the CPU with the security key and the CPU without the
security key, the backup/restoration is executed only for the CPU without the security key.
Precautions for using the Flash card In the Flash card, all pieces of backup data created by the backup/restoration function are saved in one file (FlashCard.dat).
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Precautions for QCPU
Restoring data to QCPU The restoration to QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted is available only in the following cases.
For a single CPU system: When the connection type is the bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial)
For a multiple CPU system: When the connection type is the direct CPU connection (serial)
However, in a multiple CPU system which includes a QCPU with the factory-settings or whose memory is formatted, batch
restoration to multiple controllers cannot be performed.
Restore each controller with the following procedure.
QnUD(P)VCPU for which [Disable clearing operation history] is selected Data cannot be restored to the QnUD(P)VCPU for which [Disable clearing operation history] is selected.
To restore data, deselect [Disable clearing operation history].
Even if [Disable clearing operation history] is selected, data will be restored to the QnUD(P)VCPU when an SD card is
specified as the storage destination of the operation history file.
You can back up the data of the QnUD(P)VCPU for which [Disable clearing operation history] is selected.
Precautions for MELSERVO-J4 series
Restoration procedure Use the rotary switch of a servo amplifier to set the network number and station number that are specified in the controller list
file.
For the setting method, refer to the manual of the servo amplifier used.
After the setting, turn off and then on the servo amplifier.
Perform restoration on the GOT.
Engineering tool The GOT backup/restoration function backs up the data of a servo amplifier to the data storage installed in the GOT.
You can read the data from the data storage by using the engineering tool (MR Configurator2 Ver1.52E or later).
However, the GOT backup/restoration function cannot restore the data edited with the engineering tool.
Backup The GOT collectively backs up the data of all the MELSERVO-J4 series servo amplifiers that are specified by their network
numbers and station numbers in the controller list file.
Restoration To restore data to MELSERVO-J4 series servo amplifiers, select target servo amplifiers based on the network numbers and
station numbers. All the data for the selected servo amplifiers are restored.
In the absolute position detection system, if you replace a servo amplifier and then restore data to the new one, set the home
position again.
After restoration is performed, turn off and then on the servo amplifier.
Backup/restoration availability The backup/restoration is available in the cases shown below.
(: Available, : Not available)
Operation While the servo amplifier is in servo-off state
While the servo motor is at a standstill
Other cases
Backup
Restoration
Restoring data to controller No.1
Resetting controller No.1
Restoring data to controller No.2
Resetting controller No.2
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 421
42
Precautions for MELSEC iQ-F If you enter an incorrect password 20 times consecutively, the controller will be locked.
To unlock the controller, restart it.
For the trigger backup, if you enter an incorrect password 20 times consecutively, a message saying that the controller has
been locked will not appear.
Precautions for Motion CPUs
OS for Motion CPU The OS for the Motion CPU cannot be backed up or restored.
For backing up or restoring setting data for the Motion CPU, install an appropriate OS on the Motion CPU in advance.
Backup/restoration target The GOT backs up or restores data stored in the SRAM built in the Motion CPU, regardless of the operation mode.
For writing data to the FLASH ROM built in the Motion CPU, restore the data to the SRAM, and then write the data in the
SRAM to the FLASH ROM with MT Developer.
Backup For backing up data for controllers including the Motion CPU, do not set the Motion CPU to the installation mode.
When the Motion CPU is set to the installation mode, the GOT does not back up data for the Motion CPU. (The GOT backs up
data for the other controllers on the same base unit.)
Restoration For restoring data to controllers including the Motion CPU, do not set the Motion CPU to the installation mode or test mode.
Doing so stops the restoration operation of the GOT.
When the restoration is stopped, be sure to execute the restoration again.
Failure to do so causes the GOT not to write all the data into the controllers, resulting in incorrect operations of the controllers.
Compatibility of the backup data from the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) Restore the following backup data with the operating system software version that operates the Motion CPU properly after the
restoration.
*1 The Motion CPU may not operate properly when its operating system software version differs between the backup execution and restoration execution. Use the same version operating system software for the Motion CPU to execute the backup and restoration.
Backup data Operating system software version that operates the Motion CPU properly after the restoration *1
Name File name
Online change file (servo program) df_k0000.prg to df_k4095.prg All versions
df_k4096.prg to df_k8191.prg 03 or later
Online change file (motion SFC diagram) df_sf000.prg to df_sf255.prg All versions
df_sf256.prg to df_sf511.prg 03 or later
Servo program servo.prg All versions
servo2.prg 03 or later
Motion SFC parameter motsfcpr.bin All versions
motsfcpr2.bin 03 or later
Motion SFC program motsfc.prg All versions
motsfc2.prg 03 or later
Device comment file DEVCMNT.IFG All versions
DEVCMNT.DC2
Label and structure file GL_LABEL.DCM All versions
GL_LABEL.IF2
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
Precautions for FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series
Restoration procedure Use the parameter unit (PU) to set the network number and station number that are specified in the controller list file.
For the setting method, refer to the manual of the inverter used.
After the setting, turn off and then on the inverter.
Perform restoration on the GOT.
Engineering tool The GOT backup/restoration function backs up the data of an inverter to the data storage installed in the GOT.
You can read the data from the data storage by using the engineering tool (FR Configurator2 Ver1.10L or later).
After editing the backup data with the engineering tool, you can restore the data to the servo amplifier by using the GOT
backup/restoration function.
Do not change the file name and the extension, or you cannot restore the data.
Backup The GOT collectively backs up the data of all the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series inverters that are
specified by their network numbers and station numbers in the controller list file.
Restoration To restore data to the FR-A800 series, FR-A800 Plus series, and FR-F800 series inverters, select target inverters based on
the network numbers and station numbers. All the data for the selected inverters are restored.
Backup/restoration availability The backup/restoration is available in the cases shown below.
(: Available, : Not available)
Target parameters for the backup/restoration For the target parameters for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
FR-A800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
FR-F800 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (DETAILED)
Precautions for FXCPU
Attaching a memory cassette When a memory cassette is attached to a FXCPU, data in the memory cassette is backed up.
When a memory cassette is not attached to the FXCPU, data in the built-in memory is backed up.
Keyword setting The following table shows whether the backup/restoration function is executed or not by each keyword setting.
(Executed: Not executed:)
Operation While the inverter is being reset
While a password is being registered
While a parameter is being copied
While the start command signal (STF/ STR) is on
When writing parameters is disabled
While the PLC function is being executed
Other cases
Backup
Restoration
Function Protection that cannot be disabled by keyword
With keyword Without keyword
Write protection
Read/ Write protection
All operation protection
Write protection Read/Write protection
All operation protection
Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled
(Trigger)
Backup
Restore
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications 423
42
Keyword for restoring data When data are restored to a target FXCPU, a keyword in the FXCPU is held.
For setting or disabling a keyword for the FXCPU, refer to the following manual.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Programming manual for the FXCPU used
Backup data which contains source information When the target FXCPU of the restoration does not support source information, the backup data which contains source
information cannot be restored.
Precautions for using the CNC C70
Handling backup data Although some backup data can be checked with a text editor, do not change the contents.
If the contents are changed, the data cannot be restored.
Individual restoration of the C language module The C language module cannot be restored on the individual restoration screen of the GOT.
To restore the C language module individually, use Remote Monitor Tool whose version is C0 or later.
For Remote Monitor Tool, refer to the following.
MITSUBISHI CNC C70 / C64 Series Remote monitor tool Operating Manual
Precautions for using the CNC C80
Handling backup data Although some backup data can be checked with a text editor, do not change the contents.
If the contents are changed, the data cannot be restored.
Precautions for robot controller
Restoration during program execution The restoration cannot be performed during program execution.
Confirmation before restoring Confirm the error cause in advance, since the error record is deleted by restoring.
Confirm that the error C7500 "No battery voltage" does not occur when restoring.
Restoration when replacing a robot If models of robots are different, the restoration cannot be performed.
If a robot, motor, reducer, or belt is replaced, configure the origin setting.
If a robot controller is compatible with the maintenance forecast, reset the maintenance forecast when replacing the robot or
belt.
Operations during backing up or restoration on the GOT Do not execute [Program read], [Program save], [Backup/Restore] or others for robot controllers to be backed up or restored
from RT ToolBox2 or R56TB, while backing up or restoring on the GOT.
Doing so causes lack of consistency of data in a robot controller or acquired from RT ToolBox2.
Version of the robot controller The backed up data of the robot controller version R1d/S1d or later cannot be restored in the robot controller version R1c/S1c
or earlier.
Edit and restoration of backup data The data backed up on the GOT can be edited and restored with RT ToolBox3 or RT ToolBox2.
To edit and restore data with RT ToolBox3 or RT ToolBox2, copy the data backed up on the GOT to the Backup folder in the
project folder in RT ToolBox3 or RT ToolBox2.
However, the following data cannot be restored on the GOT.
Data edited with RT ToolBox3 or RT ToolBox2 after the backup on the GOT
Data backed up with RT ToolBox3, RT ToolBox2, or R56TB
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.2 Specifications
10
10.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the backup/restoration screen after the GOT is turned on.
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 465 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual
When GOT has no project data
The backup/restoration can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
Starting from the utility
Starting from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Display the utility.
Starting from a special function switch (Backup/Restore) set in the project data
Touch the special function switch.
After the utility is displayed, touch [Data control] [Backup/restore] from the Main Menu.
Activate [Backup/restoration] on the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Backup/restoration
End
Touch [Backup /restoration].
*1 *2
*3
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 425
42
Changing screens
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 430 Security and password
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Main menu
Progress screen (backup)
Backup function
GOT data package acquisition
Progress screen (restoration)
Input the password*1
Input the password*1
Restoration function
GOT data package
Controller selection screen (Restoration)
Controller list screen
Restoration function (with controller list file)
/
Restoration function (with controller list file)
(Without controller list file)
(Without controller list file)
Data list (restoration) When the controller other than
CNC C70 is selected
Individual restoration (restoration) When the CNC C70 is selected
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Starting from the special function switch of the system launcher functio You can start the backup/restoration from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special
function switch to which [System Launcher] is set.
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The backup/restoration is started.
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed
System configuration screen
[] key
[End] key
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 427
42
Background processing stop By the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0), background processing by other functions (alarm, logging, device
monitoring) can be stopped during the backup/restoration.
When background processing is performed, the backup/restoration and other functions are alternately performed.
Therefore, backup/restoration takes much time, but the monitoring of the controller continues.
When background processing is not performed, processing of other functions stop until the backup/restoration is completed.
Therefore, the monitoring of the controller stops, but the backup/restoration takes less time.
Log file save setting
Before background processing is stopped, set the file saving for the functions that collect log data such as the
alarm and logging.
Without setting the file saving, all log data such as alarm data and logging data are lost after backup/
restoration is completed.
Functions disabled during background processing stop
When background processing is stopped, in the backup/restoration, all functions stop except for the backup/
restoration.
Therefore, the following functions that collect log data cannot acquire the data in the backup/restoration.
Alarm function
Operation log function
Logging function
Recipe function
Background processing stop for trigger backup
During the trigger backup, turning on the background processing stop signal (GS522.b0) does not stop
background processing.
Background processing is always performed.
GOT special register Description
Background processing stop signal
(GS522.b0)
OFF In the backup/restoration, background processing is performed.
ON In the backup/restoration, background processing is not performed.
Backup/ restoration
Other functions (alarm, logging, device monitoring, etc.)
When background processing is performed
Backup/restoration and other functions alternately perform communication.
Backup/ restoration
Other functions (alarm, logging, device monitoring, etc.)
When background processing is stopped
Other functions stops communication until backup/restoration is completed.
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Setting storage location for backup data Set the storage location that backup data are stored.
Set the storage location for backup data in the backup/restoration setting of the utility.
Display procedure Select [Utility] [Ext. func. set] [Backup restoration].
Settings
Retain file register inf during restor
Executing restoration in the following cases may cause the PLC to operate incorrectly.
Delete all data in the PLC before the restoration.
The file register backed up in the GOT data storage is changed.
The size of the file register backed up in the GOT data storage differs from that stored in the PLC.
The file space of the PLC is insufficient at restoration.
Setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
The backup/restoration setting can also be set in the GOT setup on GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For the GOT setup of GT Designer3 (GOT2000), refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Item Description
Drive for backup setting Specify the drive for storing backup settings, including parameters and passwords for controllers.
Drive for backup data Specify the drive for storing backup data.
Trigger backup setting The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers (Rise, Time) specified for each backup setting are met.
Max. of backup data Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored.
(When 0 is specified, the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored.)
Enable CPU No. setting Set whether to enable the CPU No. setting or not.
(When [Enabled] is selected, the GOT starts to communicate with only the specified PLC. Therefore the
network batch backup/restoration on the multiple PLCs cannot be executed.)
Retain file register inf during restor Set whether to retain the file register at restoration.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 429
43
Security and password By setting the passwords, the password authentication is available when the backup/restoration is executed.
The password authentication uses the password for the backup/restoration and passwords for controllers.
The following shows the passwords used for the backup/restoration.
After the first backup (after setting the password for the backup/restoration), the user has no need to input the passwords for
the controllers. (The passwords for the controllers are automatically verified.)
The following shows the security advantages.
Before setting password for backup/restoration
When the user forgets the password for the backup/restoration, the backup/restoration cannot be executed.
In that case, execute the backup again by using a formatted or new data strage.
For how to set the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Page 431 Setting password for backup/restoration
How to use the password for the backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Page 433 How to use password for backup/restoration
Password Description
Password for backup/restoration Password for the backup/restoration function
Set the password on the GOT at the first backup.
Before setting the password, set passwords for controllers in advance.
Passwords for controllers Passwords set for the files for the target controllers of the backup/restoration
Set the passwords with software for the controllers when writing the files to the controllers.
User Advantage
Administrator No need to disclose the passwords for the controllers to the operator
(Preventing anyone other than the administrator to browse or edit setting data for the controllers.)
Operator The backup/restoration is executed by using the password for the backup/restoration only.
(No need to input passwords for the controllers)
Data strage
Restore
Backup
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore
Authentication of the password for the backup/restore
Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Setting password for backup/restoration The password for the backup/restoration can be set only when the following condition is satisfied at the first backup.
When passwords are set for the files for the backup target controller
At the first backup, the password authentication for the controller is required.
The following shows the operating procedure at the first backup.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 450 Operation Procedures
No
No
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on the GOT. (The first backup)*1
Is a password set for the file to be backed up?
Is the password correct?
The file is backed up.
Is there another file?
Is there another controller to be backed up? (when with controller list file)
Set the password for the backup/restore. (Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters for the password.)
Backup completed
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Is there another unit? (In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes
Yes
Input the password for the controller. (When the password for the first file is verified, the other files are automatically verified using the password for the first file. When the automatic verification fails, input the corresponding password.)
When a keyword is set, disable the keyword.
FXCPU
Other than the FXCPU
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 431
43
Setting password
For ensuring the security, setting a password of 8 or more characters that cannot be easily guessed is
recommended.
When the password is leaked, the same system can be created. Pay enough attention to managing the
password.
Inputting a password for the Motion CPU
When a password for a Motion CPU data is input, the GOT does not display the file name.
The GOT displays the data type only.
Setting a password for the Motion CPU
When contents of the following Motion CPU data do not exist, do not set any passwords for the data.
SFC program
Mechanical system program
Cam data
When passwords are set for the data without any contents, the automatic password authentication is
unavailable when the GOT executes the backup.
As a result, the user must input the passwords each time.
FXCPU keyword
To back up or restore data in the FXCPU, disable a keyword in advance.
Page 450 Key functions
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
How to use password for backup/restoration
Backup The following shows the operating procedure for the backup after setting the password for the backup/restoration.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 450 Operation Procedures
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the backup is stopped, the backed up files until the backup is
stopped are all deleted.
Start
Touch [Backup function] in the main menu on the GOT. (The second or later backup)*1
Input the password for the backup/restore.
The passwords for the controller stored as the backup setting data are automatically verified for each file.
The file is backed up.
Input the correct password for the controller.
Backup completed
No
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is a password set for the file to be backed up?
Is there another unit? (In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes Is there another controller to be backed up? (when with controller list file)
Have the passwords for the controllers ever been changed?
Is the password correct?
Is the password correct?
Is there another file?
Set the password for the backup/restore. (Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters for the password.)
Yes(FXCPU) When a keyword is set, disable the keyword.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 433
43
Restoration The following shows the operating procedure for the restoration after setting the password for the backup/restoration.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 450 Operation Procedures
Start
Touch [Execute] in the data list (restoration).*1
Input the password for the backup/restore.
The passwords for the controller contained in the backup data are automatically verified.
Input the correct password for the controller.
The file is restored.
Restoration completed
No
Yes(Other than the FXCPU)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is the password correct?
Is the password correct?
Is there another file?
Is a password set for the file to be restored?
Is there another unit? (In the multiple CPU system)
No
Yes Is there another controller to be backed up? (when with controller list file)
When a keyword is set, disable the keyword. When a programmable controller is the RUN status, change the status to the STOP status.
Yes(FXCPU)
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
When passwords for controllers are changed
When the password input is cancelled and the restoration is stopped, the restored files until the restoration is
stopped remain in the controller.
When only any of the files are restored, the data can be inconsistent in the entire system.
CF card/ USB memory
File 1 File 1 File 2 File 2 File 3 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
File 1 File 2 File 3
CF card/ USB memory
CF card/ USB memory
CF card/ USB memory
Start the restoration. When a password for the controller is changed, the password verification is required.
Input the password.
Controller Controller
Controller
Controller
When the password input is cancelled The restoration is stopped, and the restored file remains in the controller.
When the correct password is input The restoration is completed.
Not matched
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 435
43
Trigger backup The GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers with the trigger device or the days and time set.
Setting the trigger type selects whether to execute the backup with the trigger device or with the days and time.
When trigger type is set to [Rise] The GOT executes the backup when the set trigger device turns on.
Use the backup with the trigger device for automatically backing up setting data for controllers after the setting data are
changed.
When trigger type is set to [Time] The GOT executes the backup at the specified time on the specified days.
Use the backup with the time for backing up setting data periodically.
Maximum number of backup data With the trigger backup, the maximum number of backup data to be stored can be specified.
When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum number of backup data, the GOT automatically deletes the oldest
backup data.
Therefore, the GOT does not fail to store the latest backup data.
Checking backup data changes When performing backup, the GOT compares the previous backup data with the setting data, for each controller.
When the current setting data for any of the controllers differ from the previous backup data, the GOT backs up setting data
for all the controllers on the same base unit.
When the current setting data for all the controllers are the same as the previous backup data, the GOT does not execute the
backup.
Therefore, the GOT does not store the same backup data.
Backing up setting data to a data strage
Trigger device: X100
X100: OFF ON
X100: ON Detected
Backing up setting data to a data strage
Setting GOT to back up data at 17:30 on Tuesdays
Tuesday 17:30
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
How to set trigger backup
Flow of settings The following shows the flow of settings for using the trigger backup.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 430 Security and password
Inputting password for backup/restoration
The GOT automatically executes the backup when the trigger condition is met.
The password authentication with the password for the backup/restoration is not executed.
By executing the password authentication with the password for the backup/restoration when setting the
trigger backup with the GOT utility, unauthorized users cannot execute the backup.
Without inputting the password for the backup/restoration when setting the trigger backup, an error occurs
and the GOT does not execute the backup even if the trigger condition is met.
Input the password for the backup/restoration in the trigger backup setting of the GOT utility.
For setting the trigger backup with the GOT utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Setting items for trigger backup Set the trigger backup with GT Designer3 (GOT2000) and the GOT utility.
For the setting items for GT Designer3 (GOT2000), refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
For the setting items for the GOT utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Execute the first backup. Set the password for the backup/restore.*1
Set the trigger backup with GT Designer3.
The trigger backup settings are completed.
Download package data to the GOT.
Set the trigger backup with the GOT utility.
Set the devices to be used for the trigger backup.
Trigger type: [Rise]
Trigger type: [Time]
For setting the trigger backup for the first time, input the password for the backup/restore.
Set the days and time that the GOT executes the backup.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 437
43
Controlling backup with devices The GOT controls the trigger backup with devices.
The following shows the devices to be used for the trigger backup.
Trigger device
Process notification device
Backup error notification device
Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
Trigger backup data send delay (GS521)
For the devices and how to set the devices, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
When normal backup is executed When trigger type is set to [Rise]
Turn on the trigger device, and then the GOT starts the backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on.
Turn off the trigger device right after the process notification device turns on. (The trigger device does not automatically turn
off.)
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
When trigger type is set to [Time]
The GOT starts the backup at the time specified for the trigger backup.
When the backup is started, the process notification device turns on, and the time trigger automatically turns off.
When the backup is completed, the process notification device turns off.
Trigger device
Process notification device
Backup processing
Time
Process notification device
Backup processing
The time trigger automatically turns off when the backup is started. Specified time
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Error handling When an error occurs during the trigger backup, the backup error notification device stores the trigger ID corresponding to the
trigger setting set for the backup with the error, and a system alarm occurs.
Check the system alarm, and then remove error causes.
For system alarms and corrective actions, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The backup error notification device stores 0 when the next trigger backup is executed.
Setting send delay time The backup/restoration function can set the delay time for backup communication intervals.
Setting of the delay time can reduce the load of other processes (such as monitoring objects) with the backup process.
The actually time set by the set value is listed as follows.
Setting of trigger backup data send delay
Backup communication times are longer than a default when the trigger backup data send delay is set.
Set the suitable delay time to match the processing condition of backup function and others (such as
monitoring objects).
GOT data package acquisition at the timing of the trigger backup Turn on b6 of the Special Control During Specific Function Execution (GS522), to execute the GOT data package acquisition
at completion of the trigger backup of the backup/restoration function.
When any backup trigger condition of any channel is satisfied, the GOT data package acquisition is executed.
Save destination A copy destination drive applies to the save destination that is set for the backup/restoration function.
For information on how to set the save destination for the backup data, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
The latest data is saved in the copy destination drive.
If the latest data has been saved, the process completes the GOT data package acquisition.
Timing at which 0 is stored in the Trigger Backup Processing Setting No. Notification (GS657) When the trigger backup is not processed, 0 is stored in the Trigger Backup Processing Setting No. Notification (GS657).
When the GOT data package acquisition is used, 0 is stored after the GOT data package acquisition.
Set value Delay time
0 None
1 to100 Set value 5(ms)
101 or more 500(ms)
Backup error notification device
Trigger device 1
Process notification device 1
Backup processing 1 Error occurs
Storing trigger ID corresponding to backup with error
Storing 0 when the next trigger backup is executed
Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
10 0
11 0
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 439
44
Trigger Backup Error Notification device If there is an error in the GOT data package acquisition, the system alarm is displayed and 1000 is stored in the Trigger
Backup Error Notification device.
For the system alarm, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
When the error still occurs after taking the action described in the system alarm, the possible causes are as follows.
The copy destination drive and project startup drive are the same.
A security key is set.
Data transfer security is set.
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Precautions for trigger backup The following shows precautions for the trigger backup.
GOT operations during trigger backup The GOT may take a long time to monitor devices and to operate during the trigger backup.
Execute the trigger backup when the operator does not operate the GOT.
Updating data with the functions that collect device values, including the logging function, may also take a long time.
Displaying device name on GOT When the trigger device is set to [Rise], the GOT displays the device name of [??] without the device name converter
installed.
For displaying the device name correctly, install the device name converter on the GOT.
First backup The trigger backup is unavailable for the first backup.
Manually execute the first backup, and then set the password for the backup/restoration and passwords for controllers. After
the settings, set the trigger backup.
Passwords for controllers When passwords for controllers stored in the backup setting differ from current passwords for the controllers, the backup
operation is canceled.
For executing the trigger backup, check that passwords for controllers have no changes.
When the backup operation is canceled, manually execute the backup again, and then input correct passwords.
File register backup To check if the file register has been changed, the date of the last file update and the date of writing data to the controller are
compared.
If the device values in the file register is changed, backup is not executed.
Set the backup data not to be checked for changes so that all data in the file register is backed up.
For the details, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Checking file register changes When the trigger backup is frequently executed, set [Check the file register changes] to [Not execute] with the GOT utility
because data stored in file registers frequently changes.
When [Check the file register changes] is set to [Execute], the GOT backs up data stored in the file registers every time the
trigger condition is met even if the other setting data for the controller are not changed.
As a result, the number of backup data increases in the SD card. When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum
number of backup data, old backup data are deleted.
For obtaining data stored in file registers only, use the recipe function.
For how to use the ecipe function, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Backup on a Motion CPU, robot controller or FXCPU If the following are to be backed up, the GOT does not compare the previous backup data with the controller setting data.
A Motion CPU and robot controller are mounted on the same base unit.
FXCPU
As a result, the GOT executes the backup even if the setting data for the controllers have no changes.
For backing up setting data only when the data are changed, set the trigger type to [Rise].
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns on only when the setting data are changed. Therefore, the
number of backup data can be minimized.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 441
44
Backup on a robot controller The robot controller is not compatible with checking changes. Therefore, if the backup is executed in the following way, the
communication speed and program execution speed may slow.
The trigger backup is frequently executed.
Multiple robot controllers are connected.
Backup data is large, due to the large number of programs.
Screens that trigger backup can be executed The trigger backup can be executed only when the GOT displays a monitor screen.
When the trigger condition is met while the GOT displays a screen other than monitor screens, including the utility screen
and ladder monitor screen, the GOT does not execute the backup.
When a screen other than monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup.
When a monitor screen is switched to a screen other than monitor screens during the trigger backup, the GOT stops the
backup and the GOT deletes the data in process.
When the screen is switched to a monitor screen, the GOT executes the backup again.
When the following are operated, the GOT does not execute the backup even if a screen other than monitor screens is
switched to a monitor screen.
Restarting the GOT
Changing the trigger backup setting with the GOT utility
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
When another trigger condition is met during backup The GOT cannot detect that another trigger condition is met.
For ensuring the trigger backup, establish a handshake with the trigger device and the process notification device.
An example of a handshake is shown on the next page.
1. The trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and then the GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 1).
2. When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 1) turns on, and the trigger backup processing
setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 1) turns off.
3. When the backup (Trigger ID: 1) is completed, the GOT recognizes that the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) is on and the
GOT starts the backup (Trigger ID: 2).
4. When the backup is started, the process notification device (Trigger ID: 2) turns on, and the trigger backup processing
setting No. notification (GS657) stores the trigger ID.
When the process notification device turns on, the trigger device (Trigger ID: 2) turns off.
Backup processing (Trigger ID: 2)
Process notification device (Trigger ID: 2)
Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
1 0
Trigger device (Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device (Trigger ID: 2)
Backup processing (Trigger ID: 1)
Process notification device (Trigger ID: 1)
not detected
Backup processing (Trigger ID: 2)
Trigger backup processing setting No. notification (GS657)
1 2
Trigger device (Trigger ID: 1)
Trigger device (Trigger ID: 2)
Backup processing (Trigger ID: 1)
Process notification device (Trigger ID: 1)
Process notification device (Trigger ID: 2)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 443
44
When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met The GOT executes the backup with the smallest trigger ID first.
When trigger device is on at GOT startup The GOT recognizes that the trigger condition is met, and then the GOT executes the backup.
Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns off after the GOT checks that the process notification device turns
on.
GOT power
Backup trigger device
Backup processing
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Network batch backup/restoration The backup/restoration can be executed to multiple controllers on the network system.
To backup or restore multiple controllers on the network, create a controller list file.
Before performing network batch backup/restoration
When backing up or restoring to controllers on the network, set the parameters to the controllers for
communicating with the GOT.
If the controller cannot communicate with the GOT, the backup/restoration cannot be performed.
For how to connect controllers with the GOT, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Flow to perform the network batch backup/restoration
For the operation after executing the network batch backup/restoration, refer to the following.
Page 448 Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration
Create a controller list file with a personal computer. Page 446 Creating a controller list file
Store the controller list file in the BKUPLIST folder. Page 446 Creating a controller list file
Install a SD card or USB memory, in which the controller list file is stored, on the GOT. GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Display the Main Menu of backup/restoration Page 425 Operations for Display
Select a channel to be backed up or restored. Page 450 Main menu
Execute the backup/restoration. Page 450 Main menu
CC-Link IE Field Network
Inverter Servo Amplifier
Ethernet
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 2
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 3
NW No. : 1 Station No. : 1
Batch backup/restoration for controllers on the network
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 445
44
Creating a controller list file For the controller list file, set the network No. and the station number of the controller to be backed up or restored.
The controller list file can be set to each backup setting file.
Controller list file specification Specification
Format
Up to 64 controllers to be backed up or restored can be set. (The 65th or later are invalid.)
When performing the backup/restoration, the controller list file settings are executed from the top.
Precautions for creating a controller list file
When " is entered
Even if " is entered in the memo, it is not treated as a quotation mark for the character string, the text to the
line feed is considered a character string.
If numerical values are put in "s, a format error occurs.
When creating with a text editor
When the controller list file is created with a text editor, delimit data with tabs.
If unnecessary tabs are entered, a format error occurs.
Item Setting
File name, extension SYSnNET.INI
(Assign the CH No. to be backed up or restored to "n" in the file name.)
File format Unicode text format
Encode format Little endian with UTF-16 BOM
No. Item Setting
1) Header Indicates that it is the controller list file.
2) Data version Displays the data version of the controller list file.
Set the version to 1.
3) Controller list Indicates the title of the controller list.
4) Execution/non-execution Set whether to execute or not the backup/restoration.
For controllers other than servo amplifiers and inverters
0: Not executed, 1: Executed
For servo amplifiers and inverters (connected through an RCPU on the master station)
2: Not executed, 3: Executed
For servo amplifiers and inverters (connected through a QCPU or LCPU on the master station)
4: Not executed, 5: Executed
5) Network No. Set the network No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 239)
6) Station No. Set the station No. of controllers to be backed up or restored. (0 to 120)
If the network No. is 0, 255 (host) can also be set.
7) Memo Both 2-byte and 1-byte characters can be set.
Up to 30 characters are displayed in the controller list screen.
4)
1) 2) 3)
7)6)5)
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Controller list file creation The controller list file must be created by the user. The following shows how to create it with Microsoft Excel
1. Start Microsoft Excel and set the controllers to be backed up or restored, according to the format.
For the format of the file, refer to the following.
Page 446 Controller list file specification
2. Select [File] [Save As...] to display the [Save As...] dialog box.
3. Select [Unicode Text (*.txt)] in [Save as type].
4. Enter the file name according to the CH No. to be used and press the [Save] button with the extension INI.
For the specification of the file name, refer to the following.
Page 446 Controller list file specification
Controller list file storage Store the created controller list file in the same folder as the backup setting.
For the storage location for the backup setting, refer to the following.
Page 401 System configuration
1. Check whether a storage folder for the backup (BKUPLIST) exists in the SD card or not.
(If the backup is executed, the folder is automatically created)
If no storage folder exists, create it.
2. Store the created controller list file in the storage folder for the backup.
Backup setting file
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 447
44
Operation after executing the network batch backup or restoration When the network batch backup/restoration is executed, the following operations are performed.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 425 Operations for Display
Operations if an error occurs during backup If an error occurs, the backup being executed is canceled and the error dialog box is displayed. (The error is displayed by the
controller set in the controller list file.)
After the error dialog box is closed, the backup to the next controller set in the controller list file is continued.
However, the backup data cannot be written because a SD card is not installed or does not have sufficient capacity, the
backup to all controllers is canceled.
Handling of the backup data when the backup is canceled Backup data of controllers canceled for an error occurrence or a cancellation of password input on the controller is deleted by
the controller set in the controller list file.
Backup data backed up normally remains by the controller set in the controller list file.
Operations if a password on the controller is set to the backup target If the password input on the controller is canceled, the backup being executed is canceled and the backup to the next
controller set in the controller list file is continued.
If a password for backup or restoration is set on the GOT, a password on the controller can be input to the controller, for which
the password input was canceled, at the next time.
By inputting the correct password, password input is not required at the next execution.
For the password for backup or restoration, refer to the following.
Page 430 Security and password
Start backing up or restoring after preparing a controller list file*1
The controller list file of the channel selected from the Main Menu is read.
Start backing up or restoring to the controller set in the controller list file.
Execute the backup or restoration to each controller.
Notify errors and skip the backup or restoration of the target controller.
Backup/restoration completed
No
No
Yes
Yes
Can the GOT communicate with controllers?
Is the controller list file setting normal?
No
Yes Is there any controller not backed up or not restored in the controller list file?
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display
10
Operation for trigger backup The backup does not executed if the GOT cannot communicate with controllers because of a communication error or others.
If no previous backup data to be compared exists, the backup is executed.
Even if the backup being executed is canceled for an error occurrence, the backup to the next controller set in the controller
list file is continued.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.3 Operations for Display 449
45
10.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the backup/restoration display details and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
Main menu The following describes the display and the key functions on the Bakcup/restoration function : Main menu screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
Key Function
[Next chnnl] Switches the target channels of the backup/restoration.
[Device list] Available when the controller list file is stored in the same folder as the backup setting.
Page 445 Network batch backup/restoration
Shifts to the controller list screen.
If a SD card which stores the controller list file is installed on the GOT after displaying the Main Menu or
switching a channel, the [Device List] button is not valid.
To validate the [Device List] button, switch a channel and select the same channel again.
[Backup function] Starts the backup.
[Restoration function] Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
[GOT data package] Switches the screen to the setting screen of the GOT data package acquisition.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
[Delete backup data] Deletes the oldest data among backup data already stored in a SD card or USB memory in the GOT.
[Close] Ends the backup/restoration, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restoration startup screen.
[FX keyword] Displays the FX keyword screen.
(This key is displayed only when the FXCPU is connected.)
For the operation of a keyword including disabling a keyword, refer to the following manual.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
1)
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures
10
Progress screen (backup) This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Backup function: Progress screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays the backup data name.
3) Displays the channel No., network No., station No., CPU No., and module name for the target controller in a list.
When the CPU No. setting is enabled, select the controller to be backed up by touching it.
Displays also the progress situation of each station when the network batch backup is executed. ([Progression: (Number of completed
controllers)/(Number of set controllers) NG = (Number of error controllers)])
4) Displays the target controller status of the backup.
: Backup target
: Not backup target
: Access disabled
5) Displays the backup progress status.
Backing up: The backup is in processing.
Aborting: The backup cancellation is in processing.
Completed: The backup is completed.
6) Displays the file name in processing.
Key Function
[Return] Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
[Cancel] Cancels the backup.
[Close] Ends the backup/restoration, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restoration startup screen.
2)
1)
6)3) 4) 5)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures 451
45
Data list (restoration) The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Data list screen.
Display detail
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays backup data stored in a SD card or USB memory.
Select a backup data to be restored with touching the data.
3) Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
4) Displays the target controller status of the restoration.
Select a target controller of the restoration with touching the controller.
: Restoration target
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled
Key Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
[Multiple selection] / [Single selection] Switches the number of target controllers of the restoration.
Single selection: Select [Single selection] when selecting only one target controller of the restoration.
Multiple selection: Select [Multiple selection] when selecting multiple target controllers of the restoration.
[Return] Return to the previous screen, before shifting to the Data list screen.
[Execute] Starts the restoration.
2)
1)
4) 3)
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures
10
Progress screen (restoration) This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function: Progress screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays the backup data name.
3) Displays the channel No., network No., station No., module No., and unit name for the target controller of the restoration.
4) Displays the target controller status of the restoration.
: Restoration target
: Not restoration target
: Access disabled
?: Restoration failed
5) Displays the restoration progress status.
Restoring: The restoration is in processing.
Aborting: The restoration cancellation is in processing.
Completed: The restoration is completed.
Abort: The restoration cancellation is completed.
Comm.error: The restoration is failed with the communication failed.
Data error: The restoration is failed with backup data errors.
6) Displays the file name in processing.
Key Function
[Return] Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
[Cancel] Cancels the restoration.
For servo amplifiers and inverters, this key is ineffective.
[Close] Ends the backup/restoration, and then the screen is switched to the backup/restoration startup screen.
2)
1)
6)3) 4) 5)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures 453
45
Controller list screen The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Controller list screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restoration and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Switches execution/non-execution of all settings.
3) Switches execution/non-execution of each setting.
4) Displays the network number.
5) Displays the station number.
6) Displays the memo.
7) Displays the target number of the backup/restoration. (Executed/all settings)
Key Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
[OK] Saves the edited information in the controller list file and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration
function: Main menu screen.
[Cancel] The edited information is deleted and switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu
screen.
4)
2)
1)
3)
5) 6)
7)
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures
10
Controller selection screen (Restoration) The following describes the display and the key functions on the Restoration function: Controller selection screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the target channel No. of the backup/restoration and the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays all settings in the controller list file.
By touching a line, whether restore or not each controller can be switched.
The controller in the highlighted line to be restored.
Key Function
Scrolls the data list up and down by one line.
Scrolls the data list up and down by one page.
[OK] Switches the screen to the Restoration function: Data list screen.
[Cancel] Switches the screen to the Backup/restoration function: Main menu screen.
2)
1)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures 455
45
Individual restoration screen (Restoration) This section describes the display data of the individual restoration screen (Restoration) and the key functions displayed on
the screen.
Display details
Key functions
No. Display details
1) Displays the setting name for the backup/restoration (Fixed).
2) Displays the backup data name.
3) Select files to be restored.
When the target backup file does not exist, the circle of the file is displayed in gray.
4) Displays the type of the data to be restored.
5) Displays the restoration progress status.
Restoring: The restoration is in processing.
Aborting: The restoration cancellation is in processing.
Completed: The restoration is completed.
Abort: The restoration cancellation is completed.
6) Displays the names of the files to which the restoration processing is completed.
Key Function
[Return] Returns to the screen displayed before the screen was shifted to the individual restoration screen.
[Cancel] Cancels the restoration.
[Sec./Can. All] Selects all files or deselects the selected files.
[Execute] Starts the restoration.
1) 2)
3) 6)
4) 5)
6 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.4 Operation Procedures
10
10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
The backup/restoration function backs up the data of a controller to a data storage in the GOT. With Backup Data Conversion
Tool, you can convert the backup data to and from the file format editable with GX Works2 or GX Developer.
For performing edits on GX Works2, use ver.1.73B or later of GX Works2.
Data to be converted
Only backup data created by the backup/restoration function can be converted with Backup Data Conversion
Tool.
The following data cannot be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool.
Data created with GX Works2 or GX Developer
Backup data to which a new file is added with GX Works2 or GX Developer
Backup data for the Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU
Operating environment Use Backup Data Conversion Tool in the following operating environment.
Item Description
Personal computer Personal computer that Windows runs on.
OS (English) Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3
Microsoft Windows 10 Pro (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3
Microsoft Windows 10 Home (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 8.1 (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*4
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 8 Pro (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*3*4
Microsoft Windows 8 (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*4
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*5
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*5
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2*5
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium (32 bit, 64 bit) *1*2
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter (32 bit) *1
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate (32 bit) Service Pack1 or later *1
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise (32 bit) Service Pack1 or later *1
Microsoft Windows Vista Business (32 bit) Service Pack1 or later *1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium (32 bit) Service Pack1 or later *1
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic (32 bit) Service Pack1 or later *1
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32 bit) Service Pack2 or later *1
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition (32 bit) Service Pack2 or later *1
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack4 or later
CPU Use the CPU which the above OSs run on.
Memory Use the memory which the above OSs run on.
Display Resolution 640 480 dots or higher
Hard disk space 500KB or more
Display color High Color (16 bits) or higher
Others Mouse, keyboard, data storage (SD card, USB memory, and etc)
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 457
45
*1 The following functions are not supported. Application start in Windows compatibility mode Fast user switching Change your desktop themes (fonts) Remote desktop DPI setting other than the normal size (For Windows Vista and Windows XP) Setting the size of text and illustrations on the screen to any size other than [Small-100%] (For Windows 10, Windows 8.1, Windows 8, and Windows 7)
*2 The touch feature is not supported. *3 Hyper-V is not supported. *4 Modern UI Style is not supported. *5 Windows XP Mode is not supported.
8 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
10
How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool Installing Backup Data Conversion Tool is not required.
Start Backup Data Conversion Tool with the following procedures.
1. Copy BkupRstrDataConv.exe to the hard disk and others on the personal computer.
Get the above file from one of the followings.
GTD3 folder on the personal computer *1
Contact your local distributor.
2. Double-click the copied BkupRstrDataConv.exe, and then the tool starts. Refer to the following, and set the tool.
*1 If you run BkupRstrDataConv.exe in the folder where the software is installed, the settings in the setting dialog are not retained when you run the file next time. To retain the settings, copy and run BkupRstrDataConv.exe in any location other than in the folder where the software is installed.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 459
46
How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool
Setting items The following shows the setting items of Backup Data Conversion Tool.
*1 The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below. Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters. The user can set the folder name and file name only. (Other than the folder and file names are automatically set.) Example) Path of QPG file to be stored in memory card
Item Description
Conversion Target Specify data to be converted.
Backup Data Folder *1 Specify the storage location of the backup data (setting data: UNITINFO.G2B) created with the backup/
restoration function by clicking the [Browse] button.
Target Drive Select the PLC drive that has setting data to be converted.
Workspace Drive Setting Configure the settings for performing edits on GX Works2 or GX Developer.
Drive Name Specify the IC memory card drive to be set for the IC memory card reading/writing on GX Works2 or GX
Developer.
Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive *1 Specify the target folder of [Drive Name] by clicking the [Ref.] button.
[Drive Assignment] Click the item, and then [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is assigned to [Drive Name].
([Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive] is automatically assigned to [Drive Name] normally. Use the
button when the drive assignment setting is canceled by clicking the [Drive Release] button and a drive is
assigned again.)
[Drive Release] Click the item, and then the drive assignment setting is canceled.
[Import (GOT GX Developer)] Converts the backup data into the file format editable with GX Works2 or GX Developer.
[Export (GX Developer GOT)] Converts the backup data edited with GX Works2 or GX Developer into the file format applicable to the
backup/restoration function.
[End] Ends Backup Data Conversion Tool.
Max. 78 characters
Folder name .QPG\A :\
Extension (4 characters)
Drive name (1 character)
(1 character)(2 characters)
File name
0 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool
10
Operation flow The following shows the operation flow for Backup Data Conversion Tool.
Editing the backup data with GX Works2 or GX Developer
Restoring the backup data edited with GX Works2 or GX Developer to the controller
Precautions
Precautions for the backup data conversion
Backup data of a PLC CPU not compatible with the integrated circuit memory card The Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, and FXCPU do not support the read/write IC memory card function of GX Developer.
Therefore, backup data converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool cannot be edited.
GOT Back up setting data with the backup/restoration function on the GOT.
Copy the backup data to the personal computer.
Backup Data Conversion Tool Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].
Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].
Specify [Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive].
Click the [Import (GOT GX Developer)] button.
GX Works2 or GX Developer Perform the IC memory card reading on GX Works2 or GX Developer.
GX Works2 or GX Developer Perform the IC memory card writing on GX Works2 or GX Developer.
Backup Data Conversion Tool Specify [Backup Data Folder].
Specify [Target Drive].
Specify [Drive Name] in [Workspace Drive Setting].
Click the [Export (GX Developer GOT)] button.
Store the backup data in a memory card or others, and then insert the card into the GOT.
GOT Restore the backup data with the backup/restoration function on the GOT.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 461
46
10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
Common to backup and restoration
Error Cause Corrective action
The backup/restoration function cannot be used. The system application (Extended function) of the
backup/restoration is not installed on the GOT.
Install the system application (Extended function)
on the GOT.
The backup setting is not found. The backup setting is not stored in the data strage
in the GOT.
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for
storing the backup setting.
Install data strage with the backup setting stored.
Check the storage location for the backup setting
with the utility.
The backup data are not found. The backup data are not stored in the data strage
in the GOT.
No data strage is installed to the drive specified for
storing the backup data.
Install data strage with the backup data stored.
Check the storage location for the backup data
with the utility.
The backup/restoration cannot be executed
because the user does not know the password for
the backup/restoration.
The user does not remember the password.
The password is incorrect.
Check with the administrator of the system
regarding the password for the backup/
restoration.
Execute the backup again by using a formatted
or new data strage.
The backup/restoration cannot be completed
because a communication error occurs between
the GOT and a controller during the backup/
restoration.
The communication settings and communication
driver for the GOT are incorrectly set.
Check if the communication settings and
communication driver for the GOT are correctly
set.
Because parameters for the controller are
incorrectly set, the controller dose not recognize
the GOT.
Check if the parameters for the controller is
correctly set with tools, including GX Developer, for
the controller.
The controller is turned off. Turn on the controller.
The cable is not correctly connected. Check the cable.
The controller list file is abnormal. The description in the header part of the controller
list file is abnormal.
Check the format of the controller list file and
describe following the format.
Page 445 Network batch backup/restoration
The controller list file is invalid. The description in the controller list file is invalid.
The network number and station number are
outside the range.
The network number and station number are
overlapped.
Check the format of the controller list file and
describe following format.
Page 445 Network batch backup/restoration
Describe the network number and the station
number so that they are not overlapped in the
available setting range.
2 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
10
Backup
Restoration
Error Cause Corrective action
The backup data cannot be written into
data strage.
No data strage is installed to the GOT. Install a data strage to the drive specified for storing the backup
setting or backup data.
The data strage does not have free space. Install a data strage with enough free space.
Delete unnecessary files in the data strage.
The data strage is set to write-protect. Set the data strage to writable.
The attributes of backup data files stored in the data strage cannot
be changed with the GOT. Set the files to writable with a personal
computer.
The drive does not exist. Check if the drive specified for storing the backup setting or
backup data exists. (Check if the data strage is connected on the
GOT.)
Setting data (files and data) cannot be
obtained from the controller.
The GOT cannot communicate with the
controller.
Check the following.
GOT
Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
GOT.
Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Controller
Check if the parameters are set.
Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
Check if the controller is turned on.
The backup cannot be executed
because passwords for files of the
controller are set.
The user does not remember the password.
The password is incorrect. (The first backup)
Passwords for files of the controller are
changed.
Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
passwords for files of the controller.
Error Cause Corrective action
Setting data (files and data) cannot be
written into the controller.
The GOT cannot communicate with the
controller.
Check the following.
GOT
Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT.
Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the
GOT.
Check if the communication settings are correctly set.
Controller
Check if the parameters are set.
Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller.
Check if the controller is turned on.
The target controller of the restoration is a
different kind of controller from the target
controller of the backup.
Check if the system configuration for the restoration is the same
as that for the backup.
Check if the target controller of the restoration is the same as
that of the backup or the same kind of controller.
The restoration cannot be executed
because passwords for files of the
controller are set.
The passwords for files written in the
controller are changed.
Check with the administrator of the system regarding the
passwords for files of the controller.
The restoration to the robot controller
cannot be executed because the
Initialization of the robot program is
failed.
A program name that does not exist in the robot
controller may be set to the slot.
Check the parameter [SLTn] or [Online] [Parameter] [Slot list]
in the workspace of RT ToolBox2 and to check if a program name
that does not exist in the robot controller is set or not to the slot.
If it is set, set a blank space for the program name and restore
again after restarting.
Restoration cannot be executed
because the function version of the
target controller does not satisfy the
condition at the time of restoration.
The function version of the target controller is
older than the one at the time of backup.
Replace the target controller with a controller with its function
version later than the one at the time of backup.
10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions 463
46
MEMO
4 10 BACKUP/RESTORATION 10.6 Errors and Corrective Actions
11
11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING
Page 465 Features
Page 466 Specifications
Page 468 Operation for Display
Page 470 Operation Procedures
Page 471 Error Messages and Corrective Action
11.1 Features MELSEC-L troubleshooting enables you to display the status and errors of the LCPU connected to the GOT and the errors of
the GOT.
In addition, you can start the sequence program monitor or others from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.1 Features 465
46
11.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-L troubleshooting.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *2 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *3 When the GOT is connected to LCPU, use L6ADP-R2. *4 MELSEC-L troubleshooting cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting to the
GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Controller
LCPU
Function Connection type between GOT and LCPU
Name Description Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *4
CC-Link connection
ID *1 G4 *2
MELSEC-L
troubleshooting
Displays the status and errors of the LCPU
and starts various monitor functions.
*3
6 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Specifications
11
Access range
When using the direct CPU connection (serial) or serial communication connection The LCPU of the host station can be monitored.
When using Ethernet connection The LCPU of the host and other stations can be monitored.
When using CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station/via G4) The LCPU of the master and local stations can be monitored.
11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.2 Specifications 467
46
11.3 Operation for Display This section explains how to display the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen after the GOT is turned on.
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For the details, refer to the following. Page 471 Communication setting window
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 470 Operation Procedures
Starting from the utility
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Display the utility.
Set the channel No., network No., station No., of the LCPU connected to the GOT.
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting starts.
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [MELSEC-L troubleshooting] from the Main Menu.
End
Communication setting window
*2
*3
*1
8 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.3 Operation for Display
11
How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC-L
troubleshooting only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [ChNET PLCNo]
button on the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Page 470 Operation Procedures
If the project data has not been downloaded
The MELSEC-L troubleshooting can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been
downloaded to the GOT.
Changing screens This section describes how to change the screen.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 307 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Page 55 DEVICE MONITOR Page 111 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY) Page 187 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC) Page 399 BACKUP/RESTORATION Page 473 LOG VIEWER
Communication setting window
Back Touch any of the functions.
Start
At the second or later startup
Utility
At the first startup
ChNET PLCNo
MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen
*1[Intelligent module monitor]
[Device monitor] *1
[Seq. program monitor]*1
[Seq. program monitor (SFC)] *1
[Backup/restoration]*1
[Log viewer] *1
11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.3 Operation for Display 469
47
11.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the display details for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) CPU status Displays the LCPU status. (Only LED of BAT, RUN, and ERR is lit.)
The LED on the screen and the LED display on the PLC body may not match depending on the error status.
2) Channel information Displays the set channel number, network number, and station number.
3) CPU Info Displays the model and the operation status of the LCPU.
4) CPU Error Info Displays error information of the LCPU.
5) GOT Error Info Displays error information of the GOT.
The alarm can be canceled with the [Reset] button on the System alarm display screen.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
6) Monitor/Diagnosis Displays buttons to start the intelligent module monitor and device monitor (ladder).
7) Ladder Check Displays buttons to start the sequence program monitor.
8) Backup/restoration Displays buttons to start the backup/restore and log viewer.
Key Function
[ChNET PLCNo] Displays the communication setting window.
Page 471 Communication setting window
[Intelligent module monitor] Starts the intelligent module monitor.
Page 307 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
[Device monitor] Starts the device monitor.
Page 55 DEVICE MONITOR
[Seq. program monitor] Starts the sequence program monitor (ladder).
Page 111 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (LADDER DISPLAY)
[Seq. program monitor (SFC)] Starts the sequence program monitor (SFC).
Page 187 SEQUENCE PROGRAM MONITOR (SFC)
[Backup/restoration] Starts the backup/restore.
Page 399 BACKUP/RESTORATION
[Log viewer] Starts the log viewer.
Page 473 LOG VIEWER
[Back] Closes the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and returns the screen to the one for starting the MELSEC-L troubleshooting.
1)
6)
2)
3)
4)
7)
5)
8)
0 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.4 Operation Procedures
11
Communication setting window Display monitor
Key functions
11.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action The following shows the error messages for the MELSEC-L troubleshooting and the corrective actions.
No. Item Display contents
1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.
3) Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.
5) Keys Displays the keys used in the operation in the communication setting window.
Key Function
[] Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., and station No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
Input area move Moves the cursor among the input areas.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
Error message Description Corrective action
Communications error Communication could not be established with the
PLC CPU.
Check the connection status between the PLC
CPU and the GOT. (Check if the connector is
disconnected or the cable is broken.)
Check if an error has occurred in the PLC CPU.
1) 2)3)
4)
1) 2)3)
5)
11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 471
47
MEMO
2 11 MELSEC-L TROUBLESHOOTING 11.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
12
12 LOG VIEWER
Page 473 Features
Page 474 Specifications
Page 481 Operations for Display
Page 486 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
Page 495 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
Page 503 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
12.1 Features With the log viewer function, the GOT displays the logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the PLC
CPU, and the BOX data logger, and controls the files.
The features of the log viewer are shown below.
Displaying logging data without a personal computer Using the log viewer function, the logging data stored in the CF card attached to the high speed data logger module or the
BOX data logger, or the SD card attached to the PLC CPU is viewed on the GOT.
The logging data can be stored in a SD card or USB memory attached to the GOT, and displayed on the GOT.
Logging data can be retrieved from GOT The logging data acquired from the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU, and the BOX data logger can be retrieved
from the GOT to the personal computer.
Logging data is displayed
Trend graph is displayed
Logging data
Ethernet
Logging data is displayed with GX LogViewer
Data strage
USB cable or LAN cable
Trend graph and event list are displayed
Logging data
12 LOG VIEWER 12.1 Features 473
47
12.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the log viewer.
Target controller
*1 The PLC CPU must be connected by using the built-in Ethernet port. *2 The PLC CPU must be connected by using port CPU P1. *3 For FX5U and FX5UC, the data logging function is available for the products that satisfy all the following conditions.
The firmware version is 1.040 or later. The serial number of the CPU module is 16Y**** or later.
Type Model
High speed data logger module (MELSEC iQ-R series) RD81DL96
High speed data logger module (Q series) QD81DL96
BOX Data Logger NZ2DL
PLC CPU RCPU R01CPU *1, R02CPU *1, R04CPU *1, R08CPU *1, R16CPU *1, R32CPU *1, R120CPU *1,
R04ENCPU *2, R08ENCPU *2, R16ENCPU *2, R32ENCPU *2, R120ENCPU *2,
R08SFCPU *1, R16SFCPU *1, R32SFCPU *1, R120SFCPU *1
FX5CPU *3 FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS, FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MT/DS,
FX5U-32MT/DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS, FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS,
FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-64MT/ES, FX5U-64MT/ESS, FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MT/DS,
FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5U-80MR/DS,
FX5U-80MT/DS, FX5U-80MT/DSS, FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-32MT/DSS,
FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-96MT/D, FX5UC-96MT/DSS
FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS, FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ES,
FX5UJ-40MT/ESS, FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
QCPU *1 Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU, Q04UDPVCPU,
Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
LCPU *1 L02CPU, L02CPU-P,
L06CPU, L06CPU-P,
L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT, L26CPU-PBT
CNC C80 R16NCCPU
CNC C70 Q173NCCPU-S01
4 12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications
12
Connection type
When using the standard Ethernet interface or the extended Ethernet interface
*1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*2 A straight cable is available. When the GOT is directly connected to a controller via an Ethernet cable, a cross cable is applicable. However, the GOT does not support the direct connection for the controller. Set the IP address on the controller side.
*3 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*4 For the system configuration of high speed data logger module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Startup) High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
*5 For the system configuration of the BOX data logger, refer to the following manual. BOX data logger Users Manual
*6 For the system configuration of the PLC CPU with the built-in Ethernet interface, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5U User's Manual (Hardware) QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
*7 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection For the system configuration for the CNC C80 side, refer to the following manual. C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual
*8 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection For the system configuration for the CNC C70 side, refer to the following manual. C70 Setup Manual
Controller Connection cable *1*2 Maximum segment length *3
GOT Number of connectable equipment
Model Connection type
Option device Model
RD81DL96 *4
QD81DL96 *4
NZ2DL *5
RCPU *6
FX5CPU *6
QnUDVCPU *6
LCPU *6
R16NCCPU *7
Q173NCCPU-S01 *8
Ethernet
connection
100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP)
or unshielded twisted pair cable
(UTP) of category 5 or higher
10BASE-T
Shielded twisted pair cable (STP)
or unshielded twisted pair cable
(UTP) of category 3 or higher
100m - (Built into GOT) GT27
GT25
16 GOTs
GT25-J71E71-100
Connection cable
GOT
High Speed Data Logger Module/ BOX Data Logger/ PLC CPU/ CNC C80/CNC C70
12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications 475
47
When using the wireless LAN extension interface
*1 Set [Operation Mode] to [Station] in [Wireless LAN Setting] in the [GOT Setup] window. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*2 Set [Operation Mode] to [Access Point] in [Wireless LAN Setting] in the [GOT Setup] window. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system. Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver, or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use cables, connectors, and hubs that meet the IEEE802.3 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX standard.
*4 A straight cable is available. When the GOT is directly connected to a controller via an Ethernet cable, a cross cable is applicable. However, the GOT does not support the direct connection for the controller. Set the IP address on the controller side.
*5 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used. 10BASE-T: Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a cascade connection (205m) When switching hubs are used, the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades. For the limit, contact the switching hub manufacturer.
*6 For the system configuration of high speed data logger module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Startup) High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
*7 For the system configuration of the BOX data logger, refer to the following manual. BOX data logger Users Manual
*8 For the system configuration of the PLC CPU with the built-in Ethernet interface, refer to the following manual. MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual MELSEC iQ-F FX5U User's Manual (Hardware) QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
*9 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection For the system configuration for the CNC C80 side, refer to the following manual. C80 Series Connection and Setup Manual
*10 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection For the system configuration for the CNC C70 side, refer to the following manual. C70 Setup Manual
Controller Connection cable *3*4
Maximum segment length *5
Wireless LAN access point or station
GOT Number of connectable equipmentModel Connection
type Model name Option
device Model
RD81DL96 *6
QD81DL96 *6
NZ2DL *7
RCPU *8
FX5CPU *8
QnUDVCPU *8
LCPU *8
R16NCCPU *9
Q173NCCPU-S01 *10
Ethernet
connection
100BASE-TX
Shielded twisted
pair cable (STP) or
unshielded twisted
pair cable (UTP) of
category 5 or
higher
10BASE-T
Shielded twisted
pair cable (STP) or
unshielded twisted
pair cable (UTP) of
category 3 or
higher
100m Wireless access point For the
connectable access point and
system devices, refer to the
following Technical News
List of Valid Devices Applicable
for GOT2000 Series and GOT
SIMPLE Series (for Overseas)
(GOT-A-0160)
GT25-WLAN GT27 *1
GT25 *1 16 GOTs
Use a wireless LAN 16 GOTs
station that conforms to the
specifications of the wireless LAN
communication unit.
For the specifications of the
wireless LAN communication unit,
refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's
Manual (Hardware)
GT25-WLAN GT27 *2
GT25 *2
Wireless LAN access point or station GOT
Wireless LAN Communication
Unit
High Speed Data Logger Module/ BOX Data Logger/ PLC CPU/ CNC C80/CNC C70
Connection cable
6 12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications
12
Required hardware A data strage is necessary in the following cases.
Displaying or managing logging data stored in a data strage
Reading out and displaying logging data of 4MB or more from the controller
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
GOT side settings
Setting communication interface To use the log viewer function, assign an IP address to the GOT by one of the following methods.
After completing the setting on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), write the package data to the GOT.
When using the standard Ethernet interface
When using the extended Ethernet interface Set [GOT Extended IP Address] in the [GOT Standard Ethernet Setting] dialog.
For the details of the [GOT Standard Ethernet Setting] dialog, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
When using the wireless LAN extension interface For the setting to use the wireless LAN extension interface, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the log viewer to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Setting method Reference
Set [Destination I/F] of [Ethernet Download] in the [PC (Data Transfer)] dialog box. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Set the Ethernet driver in [Driver] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi
Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Select [Communication Setting] of [Gateway] in the [Controller Setting] dialog box and select the
[Use the function of Gateway] check box.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications 477
47
Access range The high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU module, or the BOX data logger which is connected to the GOT via the
HUB using the Ethernet cable, can be monitored.
Monitoring via the Internet cannot be performed.
For details of the high speed data logger module, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Startup)
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
For details of the PLC CPU module, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
For the details of the BOX data logger, refer to the following.
BOX data logger Users Manual
Precautions
Handling data strage during the access Do not remove the data strage and do not open the SD card slot during the access.
Doing so may damage files in the GOT or in the data strage.
Connection to the PLC CPU To use the log viewer function using the PLC CPU, the FTP setting is required on the PLC CPU.
The FTP setting methods for GX Works3 and GX Works2 are described below.
In case of GX Works3
Display the module parameter window of the CPU used, and select [FTP Server Setting] from the [Application Setting] tree.
Select [Use] in [FTP Server Use or Not].
In case of GX Works2
Display the parameter setting window of the CPU used, and select the [Built-in Ethernet Port setting] tab.
Click the [FTP Setting] button and select [Use] in [FTP].
For the details of GX Works3 and GX Works2, refer to the following.
GX Works3 Operating Manual
GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual (Common)
MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
Connection to the MELSEC iQ-R high speed data logger module The GOT cannot connect to the MELSEC iQ-R high speed data logger module on which no SD card is installed or the
installed SD card is inaccessible.
Make sure that an accessible SD card is installed on the high speed data logger module.
8 12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications
12
Access to storing files [Storing file] is for use in temporarily storing the data currently collected by the high speed data logger module, the PLC CPU,
or the BOX data logger.
Precautions for accessing to [Storing file] are different according to the controller.
High speed data logger module and BOX data logger During the file switching from [Storing file] to [saved file], [Storing file] and [saved file] may not exist temporarily.
When [Storing file] is selected and an error message saying that the file cannot be found appears, select [Storing file] again.
Since data is stored in [Storing file] as needed, the copied file size may be larger than the size of when [Storing file] is
selected.
The data is also stored as needed even when [Storing file] is being copied, so the copying file size may appear larger than the
file size of when selected.
MELSEC iQ-R High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual (Startup)
High Speed Data Logger Module User's Manual
PLC CPU Reference and copying are not available since [Storing file] cannot be selected.
When [Storing file] is full, the data cannot be browsed until the file is switched to [saved file].
MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)
QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging Function)
The following shows the storage location of [Storing file] and [saved file].
*1 Operations such as referring or copying are not enabled. (Only confirmation of the file name is enabled.)
/LOGGING Folder for log viewer function (the folder name is fixed) Folder for setting No.1 (the folder name is specified by the user) [Storing file] (saved just below the user specified folder) [saved file] storage folder (automatically created in serial number) [saved file] (moved to the [saved file] storage folder when [Storing file] becomes full)
/LOG01 LOG01.CSV /00000001
00000001.CSV 00000002.CSV Referring and copying are enabled. 00000003.CSV
/00000101
/LOG02 Folder for setting No.2 [Storing file]
Folder for setting No.3 [Storing file]
LOG02.CSV
/LOG03 LOG03.CSV
*1
*1
*1
12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications 479
48
Creation date and time of the log data in FX5CPU
Date and time format Use the format [hh:mm
If [YYYY
Date and time of the GOT and the creation date and time of the log data To display the log data of FX5CPU on the GOT, set the same date and time for the GOT and FX5CPU.
Otherwise, the date and time is displayed as shown below.
When the date and time difference between the GOT and FX5CPU is one month or less
The GOT displays the date and time on which the log data was actually created.
When the date and time difference between the GOT and FX5CPU is more than one month
The GOT displays the date and time one year earlier than when the log data was actually created.
Date on the FX5CPU: 2017/10/31Date on the GOT: 2017/09/15
Log data
Created date: 2017/10/31 The GOT displays the date on which the log data was
actually created.
Display on the GOT
Displayed date: 2017/10/31
Date on the FX5CPU: 2017/11/01Date on the GOT: 2017/09/15
Log data
Created date: 2017/11/01
Display on the GOT
Displayed date: 2016/11/01 The GOT displays the date one year earlier than when the log data was actually
created.
0 12 LOG VIEWER 12.2 Specifications
12
12.3 Operations for Display This section describes how to display the log viewer screen after the GOT is turned on.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT
Activate [Log viewer] on the MELSEC-L troubleshooting screen.
Starting from the utility
Display the utility.
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [Log viewer] from the Main Menu.
Starting from the special function switch (Log viewer) set in the project data
Starting from the MELSEC-L troubleshooting
Touch the special function switch.
For [View logged device] For [Manage log file]
The main menu of log viewer is displayed.
When no password is registered for the target controller at first start-up, or [Offline (view file)] is selected
Input the password.
[Select files] screen is displayed.[Log viewer] screen is displayed.
End
Connection processing
When logging data saved in the programmable controller is displayed, and a password is registered for the target controller
*3
*4
*5
*6 *7
*1 *2
The connection destination is not specified.
The connection destination is specified.
Connection destination: Main menu
Connection destination: File Selection Screen
Touch [Log viewer].
12 LOG VIEWER 12.3 Operations for Display 481
48
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 470 Operation Procedures
*4 For the details, refer to the following. Page 487 How to operate target selection screen
*5 For the details, refer to the following. Page 491 How to operate Main Menu screen
*6 For the details, refer to the following. Page 495 Data log viewer screen
*7 For the details, refer to the following. Page 492 How to operate file selection screen
How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Displaying target setting window
For displaying the target setting window, touch the [Change CPU] button on the Main Menu screen of log
viewer.
To display the target selection screen, touch the [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger], [RCPU],
or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] button.
Touch the [Offline (view file)] button to display the file selection screen.
If the project data has not been downloaded
The log viewer can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data.
2 12 LOG VIEWER 12.3 Operations for Display
12
Screen transition when [View logged device] is selected
*1 Displayed only when LCPU is selected and the remote password is set.
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Access authentication window
Remote password authentication window *1
Data selection screen
Main menu screen
Data log viewer screen
Target setting window
Target selection screen
File selection screen
12 LOG VIEWER 12.3 Operations for Display 483
48
Performing the access authentication and the remote password authentication automatically When the Store Previous Password signal (GS1797.b0) is turned on, the access authentication and the remote password
authentication set for the connected controller are performed automatically if the controller IP address is identical to the one
connected in the last session.
Cases in which the access authentication and the remote password authentication must be performed manually
In the following cases, the access authentication and the remote password authentication must be performed manually even
when the Store Previous Password signal (GS1797.b0) is on.
The log viewer is started for the first time.
The controller IP address differs from the one connected in the last session.
When the authentication has failed.
Startup with the special function switch (Log viewer) When you start the log viewer with the special function switch, the access authentication setting or remote password
authentication setting of the switch is used for authentication even though the Store Previous Password signal (GS1797.b0) is
on.
Saving the password When you start the log viewer after the Store Previous Password signal (GS1797.b0) is on, the saved password remains even
if you turn off GS1797.b0.
When you turn on GS1797.b0 again, the automatic authentication is performed with the saved password.
4 12 LOG VIEWER 12.3 Operations for Display
12
Screen transition when [Manage log file] is selected
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Main menu screen
Data selection screen Data log viewer screenFile selection screen
Recently opened files screen
12 LOG VIEWER 12.3 Operations for Display 485
48
12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens This section describes each screen contents displayed in log viewer and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
How to operate target setting window Touch the [Change CPU] button in [Main Menu] to display the following screen.
Key Function
[] / [Return] Closes the target setting window and returns to the Main Menu screen.
[High speed data logger / BOX Data Logger] Displays the target selection screen.
Page 487 How to operate target selection screen
To connect the GOT with Q173NCCPU-S01, touch [QnUDVCPU/LCPU]. [RCPU]
[FX5CPU]
[QnUDVCPU / LCPU]
[Offline (view file)] Displays the Main Menu screen.
Page 491 How to operate Main Menu screen
6 12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
12
How to operate target selection screen When [High speed data logger/BOX data logger], [RCPU], or [QnUDVCPU / LCPU] is selected in the target setting window,
the following screen appears.
Target selection screen
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Connection target list
display area
Displays the list of the high speed data logger modules or the PLC CPUs which can be accessed from the GOT.
To select a high speed data logger module or a PLC CPU, touch it in the list.
This area does not list the high speed data logger modules and PLC CPUs that are connected through a wireless
LAN.
Touch the IP address display area to display the IP address input window, and enter the IP address of an applicable
high speed data logger module or PLC CPU.
2) IP address display area Displays the selected IP address.
Page 488 IP Address input window
3) Timeout time display
area
Displays the Timeout time.
Page 489 Timeout time input window
Key Function
[] / [Return] Closes the target selection screen and returns to the target setting screen.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Update] Updates the displayed content of the connection target list.
[Connect] Connects to the high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU selected from the connection target list or the IP
address.
When the password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the access
authentication window appears.
Page 489 Access authentication window
When no password is set on the connected high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU, the Main Menu screen
appears.
Page 491 How to operate Main Menu screen
When [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] is selected
When [RCPU], [FX5CPU] or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] is selected
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens 487
48
IP Address input window Touch the IP address input display area to display the following window.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) IP address input area Set the IP address.
2) Input keys Keys for operations in the IP address input window.
Key Function
[] / [Cancel] Closes the IP address input window and cancels the IP address input operation.
[OK] The IP address of the input numerical value is reflected.
[Del] Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
1)
2)
8 12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
12
Timeout time input window Touch the Timeout time display area to display the following window.
Displayed contents
Key functions
Access authentication window When the password is set to the connection target, touch the [Connect] button on the target selection screen to display the
following window.
Displayed contents
No. Item Display contents
1) Timeout time input area Set the Timeout time.
2) Input keys Keys for operations in the Timeout time input window.
Key Function
[] / [Cancel] Closes the Timeout time window and cancels the Timeout time input operation.
[OK] The Timeout time of the input numerical value is reflected.
[Del] Deletes one character of the entered numerical value.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
No. Item Display contents
1) User name input area Enter the user name (login name) of the FTP setting registered to the connection target.
2) Password input area Enter the password of the FTP setting registered to the connection target.
3) Keys Keys for operations in the user name input area and password input area shown in Key functions.
1)
2)
For numerical input For alphabet input (upper case characters)
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens 489
49
Key functions
Remote password authentication window When the remote password is set, the following window appears after access authentication is completed.
Displayed contents
Key functions The key functions are the same as those of [Access authentication].
For details of key functions, refer to the following.
Page 490 Key functions
Key Function
[] Closes the Access authentication window and cancels the user name and password input operation.
[Sign] Switches the key type to the symbol.
[0-9] Switches the key type to the value.
[A-Z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
[a-z] Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
[SP] A space is input at the cursor position.
[AC] Deletes all the input values and characters.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
[Enter] Verifies the user name and password set in the user name input area and password input area.
When the remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the remote password authentication window appears.
Page 490 Remote password authentication window
When no remote password is set on the connected PLC CPU, the Main Menu screen appears.
Page 491 How to operate Main Menu screen
No. Item Display contents
1) Password input area Set the password to input.
2) Keys Keys for operations in the password input area shown in Key functions.
1)
2)
0 12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
12
How to operate Main Menu screen After the target is selected, the following screen appears.
Displayed contents The following screen appears when [High speed data logger module / BOX data logger] is selected.
A similar screen also appears when [RCPU] or [QnUDVCPU/LCPU] is selected.
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Target controller display
area
Displays the target device name and IP address.
When Q173NCCPU-S01 is connected, [Q03UDVCPU] is displayed.
2) View logged device Displays the logging data stored in the target device as a graph.
Page 495 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
3) Manage log file Controls the logging data stored in the target device.
Page 492 How to operate file selection screen
Key Function
[] / [Exit] Closes the Main Menu and returns to the target setting screen.
Page 487 How to operate target selection screen
[Change CPU] Displays the target setting window.
Page 481 Operations for Display
1)
2)
3)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens 491
49
How to operate file selection screen Select in the following procedure to display the file selection screen.
Touch [View logged device] in the Main Menu screen
Touch the folder icon on the data log viewer screen.
File selection screen
Displayed contents
*1 Logging data acquired from the high speed data logger, LCPU, QnUDVCPU, or the BOX data logger can be displayed as a graph in the data log viewer.
*2 The logging data acquired from the high speed data logger, BOX data logger, RCPU, and FX5CPU can be displayed as a graph on the data log viewer.
*3 Cannot be displayed as a graph in data log viewer. *4 Only the logging data acquired from the MELSEC iQ-R series high speed data logger and RCPU can be displayed as a graph on the
data log viewer.
No. Item Display contents
1) Target drive list The corresponding drive can be selected.
2) Check box If the check box is selected, up to 512 files can be selected.
3) Path name Displays the path name of drive/folder which is currently displayed.
4) File list Displays the files stored in the selected drive in a list.
The files in the CSV *1, BIN *2, XLS *3, or TXT *4 format are displayed.
5) The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection.
Not displayed when [Z:Target device] is selected.
6) Number of folders and
files
Displays the total number of displayed folders and files.
When [A:Built-in SD card] is selected When [Z:Target device] is selected
1)
2)
5)
6)
3) 4)
1)
2)
5)
6)
3) 4)
2 12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
12
Key functions
*1 For how to operate, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
*2 If [Z:Target device] is selected in select drive, the key functions are disabled.
Key Function
[] Closes the file selection screen and returns to the target setting window.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Select all files] / [Cancel selection] Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once.
Touch the [Select all files] button to select all files.
If the number of the displayed files is exceeds 513, the first 512 files are selected.
[Recently opened files] Displays a list of recently opened files.
Page 494 Recently opened files screen
[Display] Displays the selected file in log viewer.
Page 495 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
[Copy] Copies the selected file. *1
However, the files stored in the GOT data storage cannot be copied to [Z:Target device].
[Move] Moves the selected file. *1*2
[Rename] Renames the selected file. *1*2
[Create Folder] Creates a folder. *1*2
[Del] Deletes the selected file. *1*2
12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens 493
49
Recently opened files screen Touch the [Recently opened files] button in the file selection screen to display the following screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
Recently opened files screen history specifications
Up to 10 files are saved, and when the 11th file is saved, the oldest file is deleted.
Even if opening the same file multiple times, it is counted as one file.
If files with the same path and file name are stored in multiple controllers, the history of opening each file is
counted as one file.
The history is deleted when restarting GOT or when turning the GOT power supply OFF.
The size at the last time the file was opened is displayed in the file list.
If the selected drive is [Z:Target device], connection operation is performed to controllers which are not
connected to other devices. Also, if the controller is connected to another device, the connection operation is
performed to the newly selected controller.
No. Item Display contents
1) File list Displays a list of recently opened files.
From the recently opened files, the latest one is displayed in the first line, and the oldest one is displayed in the last
line.
(Up to 10 files)
2) Target drive display area Displays the path of the selected drive.
Files in [Z:Target device] have also the information of connected controllers displayed.
Key Function
[] / [Return] Closes the recently opened files screen and returns to the file selection screen.
[Display] Displays the selected file in log viewer.
Page 495 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
When [A:Built-in SD card] is selected When [Z:Target device] is selected
2)
1)
2)
1)
4 12 LOG VIEWER 12.4 How to Operate Various Selection Screens
12
12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer On the data log viewer screen, the logging data stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger or CF
card/USB memory is displayed as a graph.
The following describes how to operate the data log viewer screen.
Data log viewer screen
Displayed contents This section describes the screen configuration displayed on the data log viewer screen and the functions of the keys
displayed on the screen.
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations in the data log viewer screen.
2) Legend display area Data to be displayed in the graph display area can be selected.
The line type and logging data name displayed in the graph display area are displayed.
Page 497 Legend display
3) Trigger mark display
area
The trigger mark appears when the target data is the logging data to which the trigger is set.
When the trigger conditions are satisfied, it is displayed as [Occurred] in blue. When the trigger is restored, it is
displayed as [Cancel] in red.
The trigger mark appears only when the target data is trigger logging.
4) Graph display area Displays the data name, graph, and cursor of the target data.
The background of the selected graph is displayed in gray.
The maximum number of sampling points that are displayable on the graph differs according to the GOT resolution. *1
5) Scale display area Displays the scale of the target data.
Touch the scale display area to display the upper and lower limit values change window. Then the upper and lower
limit values can be changed.
Page 498 Upper and lower limit values setting
6) Cursor position
information display area
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button in the cursor position information display area to move [Blue cursor]/[Red
cursor] displayed in the graph display area to any position. The time and value at the selected position of the graph
are displayed.
The changed amount of the time and difference from [Blue cursor] to [Red cursor] is also displayed.
Page 499 Cursor position information
1) 1)
3)
4)
1)
1)
2)
5)
6)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer 495
49
*1 For the details, refer to the following.
Graph display
Graph display when missing some logging data When some logging data is missing, the corresponding part in the graph line is displayed with an interruption.
A long and short dash-alternate vertical line is displayed before and after the missing part.
The cursor position information will not be displayed when the missing part is between [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] or at the
cursor.
Graph horizontal axis display When the logging data includes time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in time (hour: minute: second).
When the logging data does not include time information, the horizontal axis is displayed in index number (integer).
Graph display of the logging data stored in [Z:Target device]. If the file size of logging data stored in the high speed data logger module, PLC CPU, or BOX data logger is 4 MB or larger,
the data cannot be displayed as a graph.
To display logging data whose file size is 4 MB or larger as a graph, copy the data to the GOT data storage in advance.
Key functions
Resolution (dots) With legend display Without legend display
WXGA (1280 800)
XGA (1024 768)
705 897
SVGA (800 600) 481 673
WVGA (800 480)
VGA (640 480)
321 513
Key Function
[] Closes the data log viewer screen, and returns to the previous screen.
Displays the target setting screen.
Page 487 How to operate target selection screen
Opens the file selection screen and displays the list of the files stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU
or SD card/USB memory.
Page 492 How to operate file selection screen
Select the data to view.
Page 500 Selecting data
Enlarges vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
Reduces vertically the graph selected in the graph display area.
Arranges the graph selected in the graph display area horizontally.
Cascades the graph selected in the graph display area.
Displays or hides the legend display area.
Page 497 Legend display
Searches the time/index data specified by the graph which is selected in the graph display area.
Page 501 Searching data
Displays the help screen for icon.
Page 502 Help
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one sampling.
Scrolls the display area right and left by one page.
6 12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
12
Legend display The following explains the legend display.
Displayed contents
Key functions
Scrolls the display area to the beginning or end of the selected graph.
Enlarges/reduces the display area horizontally.
Moves the selected cursor right and left.
Switches the selected graph up or down.
No. Item Display contents
1) Check box Select the checkbox to display the corresponding graph.
2) Line type display area Displays the line type of the target graph.
3) Data name display area Displays the data name of the target graph.
If the data name does not fit in the display area, the characters at the end of line are displayed as [..].
4) Keys Keys for operations in the legend display window.
Key Function
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Select all] / [Cancel all] Displays or hides all graphs.
Key Function
1) 2) 3) 4)
4)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer 497
49
Upper and lower limit values setting The following explains the upper and lower limit values setting.
Touch the scale display area to display the following window.
The scale can be changed by changing the upper and lower limit values.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Target data display area Displays the data name and line type of the target data.
If the data name does not fit in the display area, the characters at the end of line are displayed as [..].
2) Upper limit value display
area
Set the value and exponent of the target data upper limit value.
3) Lower limit value display
area
Set the value and exponent of the target data lower limit value.
4) Keys Keys for operations in the upper and lower limit values setting window.
Key Function
[] / [Cancel] Closes the upper and lower limit values setting window and cancels the upper and lower limit values input operation.
[OK] The values which are input as upper and lower limits are displayed on the scales.
[Del] Deletes an input value or character.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
1)
2)
3)
4)
8 12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
12
Cursor position information The display screen shows the status that the red cursor is selected.
Time and value of the blue cursor/red cursor whose graph is selected are displayed in the graph area.
Displayed contents
No. Item Display contents
1) Selecting cursor color Displays the color of the selected cursor.
The above chart shows the status that [Red cursor] button is touched.
2) Cursor read value Displays the value of the intersection of graph and cursor selected in the graph display area.
The above chart shows the value that [Red cursor] button is touched.
3) Program name Displays the program name executed in the PLC CPU.
If the program name exceeds 32 one-byte characters, the characters at the end of line are displayed as [..].
The program name is not displayed when the high speed data logger, BOX data logger, or FX5CPU is selected.
4) Step number Displays the step number of the program executed in the PLC CPU.
The program name is not displayed when the high speed data logger, BOX data logger, or FX5CPU is selected.
5) Cursor display area Select a graph in the graph display area, to display the time at the cursor position and the value of the intersection of
the selected graph.
Touch the [Blue cursor]/[Red cursor] button to select the target cursor for operating.
The target cursor can be moved by touching the graph display area or the cursor moving buttons.
For [ Difference(blue red)], the changed amount of [Red cursor] is displayed from [Blue cursor].
Page 495 Data log viewer screen
4)3)
5)
2)1)
12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer 499
50
Selecting data Data selection screen displays the data list of the files stored in the selected high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX
data logger or CF card/USB memory.
Up to 16 pieces of data can be selected in the data selection screen.
The following explains the data selection screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Check box Graph is displayed in the data log viewer by selecting the check box.
2) Data name list display
area
Displays the data names.
If the data name does not fit in the display area, the characters at the end of line are displayed as [..].
3) Keys Keys for operations in the data selection screen.
Key Function
[] / [Cancel] Closes the data selection screen, and returns to the log viewer screen.
[OK] The logging data selected in the data selection screen is displayed on the data log viewer.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
Scrolls the display area up and down by one page.
[Auto selection] Selects up to 16 logging data displayed in the data name list display area, from the top.
[Cancel all] Cancels all the selected data.
1) 2) 3)
3)
0 12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
12
Searching data On the data search screen, input the time/index to search the data in the graph which is displayed in the data log viewer
screen and shows the data of the files stored in the high speed data logger module/PLC CPU/BOX data logger or CF card/
USB memory.
The following explains the data search screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Date input area Input the date to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the date on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
2) Time input area Input the time to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the time on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
3) Index number input area Input the index number to be searched.
When this screen is displayed, the index on the right of the graph at screen opening is displayed.
4) Keys Displays the key to be used at the operation in the data search screen.
Key Function
[] / [Cancel] Closes the data search screen.
[Search] Searches the graph displayed in the data log viewer screen with the values input in the data search screen.
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
When the logging data includes time information When the logging data does not include time information
12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer 501
50
Help The following explains the help window.
Help window displays the contents of icons.
No. Item Display contents
1) Help window display
area
Displays functions of the icons in the window.
Help window closes by touching any place in the help window display area.
While the help window is displayed, touching other than the help window display area is invalid.
1)
2 12 LOG VIEWER 12.5 How to Operate Data Log Viewer
12
12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages for the log viewer and the corresponding corrective actions.
Error message Error Corrective action
Failed to communicate with the specified
destination (IP address).
Confirm the IP address and communication line.
The GOT cannot communicate with the high
speed data logger module or the PLC CPU.
(1) Check the communications between the GOT and
the high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU,
and make sure that the GOT communicates with the
high speed data logger module or the PLC CPU.
(2) Check that the GOT and the high speed data logger
module or the PLC CPU are connected in a connection
type that can be communicated.
Authentication failed.
Please enter operator name and password again.
The GOT cannot authenticate because the
operator name and password are incorrect in
access authentication.
Enter the correct operator name and password.
Authentication failed.
Please enter password again.
The GOT cannot authenticate because the
password is incorrect in remote password.
Enter the correct password.
Failed to obtain the data. The GOT cannot access the file in which the
logging data is stored.
Select the file in which the logging data is stored on the
log viewer screen.
The selected data is not the data of data logging.
Please check the file.
The GOT cannot display the selected data
because it does not comply with data log
viewer.
Select a file which complies with log viewer.
The size of the log file is too large to view with this
function.
The log file cannot be viewed because the file
size of the view target log file is larger than the
file maximum size that can be viewed with log
viewer.
Select a logging data with a file size compatible with log
viewer.
The selected file was not found.
The file structure may have been changed since
the file was previously viewed.
Select a file from the file selection screen.
The file selected in the recently opened files list
screen does not exist.
Select a file from the file selection screen.
Data has not been selected.
Select data.
No data is selected. Select the data to display in log viewer.
The maximum number of data has already been
selected and additional data cannot be selected.
Cancel unnecessary data and select data again.
Data cannot be selected additionally because
the number of selected data reaches the upper
limit (16) on the data selection screen.
Cancel unnecessary data and select data again.
The entered value is invalid.
Review the value of year, month, date, hour,
minute, and second.
The GOT cannot search because the entered
date and time value is invalid.
Enter the correct value.
Error
The entered value is invalid.
The result should be as follows.
Upper limit > lower limit
The GOT cannot display the value because it is
invalid during the upper and lower limit values
setting.
Enter numerical values that comply with the following.
Upper limit > lower limit
12 LOG VIEWER 12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 503
50
MEMO
4 12 LOG VIEWER 12.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
13
13 FX LADDER MONITOR
Page 505 Features
Page 507 Specifications
Page 510 Operation for Display
Page 516 Common Operation
Page 519 Switching the Display Format
Page 522 Search Operation
Page 533 Test Operation
Page 534 Error Messages and Corrective Action
13.1 Features The FX ladder monitor enables you to monitor the sequence program within the target controller and change device values.
It is intended to troubleshoot and maintain the PLC system efficiently.
The features of the FX ladder monitor are shown below.
The program with ladder symbols can be monitored You can monitor PLC CPU programs in ladder format and save displayed screens in BMP or JPEG format.
Page 516 Common Operation
(Display example)
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.1 Features 505
50
The display format, device comment display and language can be switched The following can be switched.
Page 519 Switching the Display Format
Display format of device values, timer and counter values
Comment display/non-display of the target device
(Display example)
Switching the display format The present value of a word device is displayed in a decimal of hexadecimal number in the lower area of the screen.
Page 520 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
Device comment display Comments of the devices used in the sequence program (comments written in the controller) are displayed.
Page 521 Switching comment/no-comment display
6 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.1 Features
13
13.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the FX ladder monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Partly restricted, : Unavailable)
*1 The present value of V and Z cannot be changed. *2 The set values of T and C cannot be changed.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the FX ladder monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Display screen for the FX ladder monitor A sequence program of up to 8 lines (one line: up to 11 contacts (12 or more contacts will be looped back)) is displayed on a
single screen.
In addition, the current values of up to 8 word devices (9 or more devices are displayed by switching the display with the arrow
key) etc. are displayed.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Controller Model
FXCPU FX3U, FX3UC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3S
Function Connection form between GOT and controller Reference section
Name Description Direct CPU connection (serial)
Ethernet connection
Search operation Device search, defect search, etc. Page 522 Search Operation
Display switching Displaying word devices in DEC or
HEX
Page 519 Switching the Display
Format
Displaying device comments, etc.
Test operation Changing device values, etc. *1*2 *1*2 Page 533 Test Operation
Hard copy Storing FX ladder monitor screen in
BMP/JPEG format
Page 518 Hard copy output
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.2 Specifications 507
50
Devices and range that can be monitored (: Possible, : Impossible)
Access range For the FX ladder monitor can monitor only the host station.
Precautions
Ladder display Up to 24 lines can be displayed per ladder block.
If a sequence program is written in which 24 or more lines are used in a ladder block, the ladder cannot be correctly displayed.
It is advisable to divide such programs.
During PLC reading During PLC reading, only the host station is read.
Device Device range Ladder display Device monitor display Search operation
Input X000 to X337 (octadecimal)
Output Y000 to Y337 (octadecimal)
Auxiliary relay M0 to M8511
State S0 to S4095
Timer contact T0 to T511
Counter contact C0 to C255
Data register D0 to D8511
Index register V0 to V7
Index register Z0 to Z7
Nesting N0 to N7
Pointer P0 to P4095
Interrupt pointer I00* to I30* (four points) : Fx0
I00* to I50* (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
I6** to I8** (three points) : Fx1, Fx2
I010 to I060 (six points) : Fx1, Fx2
Extension register R0 to R32767
8 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.2 Specifications
13
Notes on reading the contents An STL (step ladder) command, a dedicated command for the FXCPU, is displayed as shown below.
How an INV command is displayed
When searching an STL command, use "S (state)" in a device search.
The 32-bit counters are displayed in 32-bit fixed display in the device monitor.
When using FX3U(C), if the memory capacity is set to 32,000 or higher with the GX Developer PLC parameters, sequence
programs cannot be displayed.
When displaying a sequence program with the GOT, set the memory capacity to 16,000 or less.
Changes to T/C set values are reflected on the ladder monitor display only when they are made with the device monitor or test
function.
When a value is changed by numerical input or other object, the change is reflected on the display after the GOT is restarted.
Reading comment files Only files with the file names (program names) with one-byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the GOT.
When project data are created on GX Developer, use only one-byte alphanumeric characters for file names (program names).
Reflecting value changes in display of FX ladder monitor screen
For opening the test menu screen from the device monitor screen or user-created screen, even if the set
values of the timer and counter are changed, the changed values are not reflected in the display of the ladder
monitor screen.
For reflecting the changed values in the display of the ladder monitor screen, read the program again.
The following shows the GOT operation when the program in a safety function block has the target of the search operation.
Search operation GOT operation
Device search
Contact point search
Coil search
The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application instruction format in the last row.
For the continuous search, when the program in the safety function block has multiple target devices, the ladder block is added to
the last row only one time.
Step search The GOT displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application instruction format corresponding to the
searched step.
Defect search The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application instruction format in the last row
and ends the defect search.
(The operaiton is the same as that when all the defective devices are searched.)
SET S21
SET S20
Y0000
STL S0
X0000
X0000
Ladder monitoring by GOT
Display example of STL command
Y0000 X000
Ladder monitoring by GOT
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.2 Specifications 509
51
13.3 Operation for Display This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to ladder monitor function display.
Start operation for the FX ladder monitor
Normal operation This subsection describes the flow until the FX ladder monitor operation screen is displayed after an FX ladder monitor is
installed in the GOT.
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 510 Operation for Display
How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
If the project data has not been downloaded
The FX ladder monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the
GOT.
Starting from the utility
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Display the utility.
Starting from the special function switch (ladder monitor) set in the project data
Touch the special function switch.
Read the PLC and display the sequence program.
End
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [FX Ladder monitor] from the Main Menu.
*3
*1 *2
0 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display
13
Screen transition The following shows the screen transition for normal operation.
*1 For the details, refer to the following. Page 510 Operation for Display
*2 For the details, refer to the following. Page 512 Display
Start the Start the ladder monitor.
Switches to the Main Menu screen.
Switches to the user-created screen.
When performing the FX ladder monitor first after starting the GOT
PLC reading screen
When ladder data has already been read after the GOT was started
Display format change/ search/Menu window screen display
When the FX ladder monitor has been started from the utility
When the FX ladder monitor has been started by the special function switch
Exit Exit
ExitExitExit
PLCRD.Enter Ladder
PLCRD.
PLC reading setting window display
Menu
*1
*1 *1
*2
*1
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display 511
51
Display This subsection describes the procedure for reading the PLC to read the sequence program from the target controller when
the FX ladder monitor is executed, and until the FX ladder monitor screen is displayed.
1. Touch the [], [], [], and [] keys to specify the following items listed under "READ SECTION."
SETTING/NON SETTING for comment reading
Displaying the FX ladder monitor screen
The MELSEC-FX ladder monitor screen displays the sequence program that was executed when the PLC
was read. If any of the set values of the sequence program is changed, re-read the PLC.
2. Touch the [Keyword] key to enter the keyword registered in the target PLC CPU.
For the FX CPU keyword, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Users Manual (Utility)
Utility display procedure
PLC reading screen
When a keyword is registered in the target controller
When no keyword is registered in the target controller
2 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display
13
3. The sequence program is read.
The message "EXECUTING" is displayed.
The entire size of the program and the portion already read are displayed.
Portion already read/entire program size
The reading of the PLC stops by touching the [Break] key.
4. The reading of the sequence program is completed.
The message "OPERATION COMPLETE" is displayed.
EXIT
Touch
Ladder
Touch
The screen switches to the user-created screen.
The screen switches to the main menu.
When the ladder monitor is activated from the utility
When the ladder monitor is activated by the special function switch Ladder monitor screen
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display 513
51
Reading the PLC in the following operations
Once the PLC is read, you do not have to read it in the following operations.
However, it must be re-read after you read it and then downloaded project data and when the power to the
GOT is turned on again.
Deleting specific ladder data You can delete specific ladder data from the ladder monitor screen.
For the details, refer to the following.
Page 510 Operation for Display
Deleting ladder data
Ladder monitor data is deleted every time the GOT is restarted.
Ladder data cannot be saved.
Searching from the monitor screen When starting an FX ladder monitor with object, coil-search/defect search can be automatically performed to the read
sequence program and the result can be displayed on the monitor.
Usable objects and functions list The following table shows the types of objects can be searched from a monitor screen and functions usable in each object.
For object setting to display searching result on ladder monitor, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
(: Applicable : Inapplicable)
Object Function
Automatic PLC read Specify Search File Coil Factor
Special Function Switch
Alarm Display
Simple Alarm Display
4 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display
13
Searching operation The following explains the procedure from touching the Key Code Switch for advanced alarm display or Special Function
Switch and performing coil-search or defect search to display of a ladder block.
1. Touch a key in monitor screen.
2. After the read program is searched, the result is displayed.
3. Touching the button searches consecutively.
Touching the [Exit] button completes searching halfway.
4. If the searched device is not found in the read program, the message "DEVICE NOT FOUND" appears and searching is
completed.
After searching, the program that has been read first is displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When the searched device is found
When the searched device is not found
The user-created screen is displayed.
The ladder monitor screen is displayed.*
Exit
Touch
Equipment
After coil-search, monitoring of the displayed ladder starts automatically.
*
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.3 Operation for Display 515
51
13.4 Common Operation This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
Information and key functions displayed on the screen
After executing PLC reading, if the controller comment or comment capacity is changed, the comment may
not be correctly displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen.
When changing the comment or comment capacity, re-start the GOT.
When the FX ladder monitor is executed
Display monitor
The information shown in the table below is displayed.
Key functions
No. Description
1) Sequence program is displayed.
A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder; for 12 contact points or more, move to the next line.
When a comment display is specified, a comment is also displayed; expanded comments are given priority.
For the method of displaying comments, see the following:
Page 521 Switching comment/no-comment display
2) A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value, timer and counter current value (upper row), and set value
(lower row). When the set value is an indirect specification, the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed.
To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value, see the following:
Page 520 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
3) Display the keys used with the operation on the FX ladder monitor screen shown in (b)
(Touch input).
4) The display step number (left) and the remaining step number (right) are displayed.
Key Function
[Exit] Returns the screen to the one displayed when the FX ladder monitor was activated.
[PLCRD.] Switches the screen to the PLC reading screen to read from the controller the sequence program to be monitored.
For further information about PLC reading, see the following:
Page 512 Display
[Mon.] Starts monitoring the displayed sequence program.
[Menu] Displays the Menu window for FX ladder monitor.
Page 517 Menu window for the FX ladder monitor
[List] Starts the list editor for FX.
For details on the FX list editor, refer to the following.
Page 555 FX LIST EDITOR
[] Scrolls the information upward by a ladder block.
When comment is not displayed :maximum 8 lines When comment is displayed :maximum 3 lines
4)
1)
2)
3)
ON status ON/OFF status display for ladder monitor
* The MCR command is normally displayed as .
OFF status
6 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.4 Common Operation
13
Menu window for the FX ladder monitor
Display screen
Key functions
[] Scrolls the information downward by a ladder block.
[], [] When the number of devices whose present and set values are within the display range shown in 2) on the preceding page is nine or
more, the devices to be displayed are switched.
Scrolls the information downward by a screen.
In search operation, a search is continuously performed under the same conditions.
[Print Screen] Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, see the following.
Page 518 Hard copy output
[Cancel Print] The operation of this key is invalid.
Key Function
Search operation [Dev.Sea.] Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.
Page 522 Device search
[Cont.Sea.] Displays the ladder block containing the specified device.
Page 524 Contact point search
[Coil.Sea.] Displays the ladder block containing the specified coil.
Page 526 Coil search
[Step.Sea.] Displays the ladder block containing the specified step number.
Page 528 Step search
[End.Sea.] Displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.
Page 529 Ladder end search
[Xref.] Searches the ladder blocks for the status of continuity/non-continuity of the contact point that turned on or off the
coil on the sequence program.
Page 530 Defect search
Display format
switching
[16/32Bit] Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor
screen to the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module.
Page 519 Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules
[Dec.Hex.] Switches the word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen to decimal or
hexadecimal numbers.
Page 520 Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers
[Cmnt.] Switches whether to display the comments added to the word and bit devices displayed on the FX ladder monitor
screen.
Page 521 Switching comment/no-comment display
Test operation [TEST] Changes device values on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed. For further information, see the
following:
Page 533 Test Operation
Key Function
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.4 Common Operation 517
51
Hard copy output This section describes how to output the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
The output target of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
When outputting a hard copy, the display can be inverted between white and black.
For invert colors setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Touch [Print Screen]
A BMP/JPEG file will be stored on the standard CF card inserted in the GOT.
8 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.4 Common Operation
13
13.5 Switching the Display Format You can switch the display format (16-bit (one-word) module/32-bit (two word) module or decimal number/hexadecimal
number) of word device and timer/counter values displayed on the FX ladder monitor screen, and whether to display the
comments to the target devices.
Display switching of 16-bit (one-word)/32-bit (two-word) modules During monitoring, the present values of word devices (except timers and counters) are displayed in the 16-bit or 32-bit
module. These modules switch alternately each time you press the [16/32Bit] key.
Displaying timers and counters
You cannot switch the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-word) module with regard to the present and set values
of timers and counters. The GOT automatically selects to display them in the 16-bit (one-word) or 32-bit (two-
word) module.
(Operation example: Switch 16-bit (one-word) module display to 32-bit (two-word) module display.)
1. Touch [Mon.].
2. Touch [Menu].
3. Touch [16/32Bit].
4. The word devices are displayed in the 32-bit (two-word) module.
Touch "Mon."
Touch "Menu"
Device values displayed
Touch "16/32Bit"
Menu window
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.5 Switching the Display Format 519
52
Display switching of decimal numbers/hexadecimal numbers During monitoring, the present values of word devices and the present values (upper values) and set values (lower values) of
timers/counters are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers. The display formats switch alternately each time you press
the [Dec.Hex.] key.
(Example of operation: Switching the decimal display to the hexadecimal display.)
1. Touch [Mon.].
2. Touch [Menu].
3. Touch [Dec.Hex.].
4. The values are displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
Touch "Mon."
Touch "Menu"
Device values displayed
Touch "Dec.Hex."
Menu window
0 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.5 Switching the Display Format
13
Switching comment/no-comment display Comments written in the target controller are displayed. Comment display and no-comment display switch alternately each
time you press the [Cmnt.] key.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [Cmnt.].
3. Comments are displayed.
Each comment is displayed in five characters on three lines.
Touch "Menu"
Touch "Cmnt."
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.5 Switching the Display Format 521
52
13.6 Search Operation This section describes device search, contact point search, coil search, step search, ladder end search, defect search, and
touch search.
Device search Device search displays the ladder block that contains a specified device.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [Dev.Sea.].
3. Using the and keys, switch the input area, and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify D0.
After the device name and its number are entered, touch the [Enter] key. Input is completed, and the keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys: [Del] key: Used to delete a character of the entered information. [AC] key: Used to delete all characters entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified device is displayed.
The device is highlighted as shown in the display example below.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Dev.Sea."
Menu window
2 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
Continuous read based on the same device
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same device by touching on the
screen.
If you touch another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched device is displayed.
The ladder is displayed on the following line.
2) When the same search is continued
Example) 1) When the entered device you want to search is "D0"
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation 523
52
Contact point search Contact search displays the ladder block that contains a specified contact point.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [Cont.Sea.].
3. Using the and keys, switch the input area, and enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify X1.
After the device name and its number are entered, touch the [Enter] key. Input is completed, and the keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys: [Del] key: Used to delete a character of the entered information. [AC] key: Used to delete all characters entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified contact point is displayed.
The contact point is highlighted as shown in the display example below.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Cont. Sea."
Menu window
4 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
Continuous read based on the same contact point
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same contact point by touching on
the screen.
If you touch another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched contact point is displayed.
The ladder is displayed on the following line.
2) When the same search is continued
Example) 1) When the entered contact point you want to search is "X1"
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation 525
52
Coil search Coil search displays the ladder block that contains a specified coil.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [Coil.Sea.].
3. Using the and keys, switch the input area, and Enter a device name and its number. *1
Example: Specify T0.
After the device name and its number are entered, touch the [Enter] key. Input is completed, and the keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys: [Del] key: Used to delete a character of the entered information. [AC] key: Used to delete all characters entered.
4. The ladder block containing the specified coil is displayed.
The coil name is highlighted as shown in the display example below.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Coil Sea."
Menu window
6 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
Continuous read based on the same coil
After a search, a continuous search can be performed based on the same coil by touching on the
screen.
If you touch another key, the continuous read function will be canceled.
FX ladder monitor display after a search
The ladder block containing the searched coil is displayed.
The ladder is displayed on the following line.
2) When the same search is continued
Example) 1) When the entered coil you want to search is "M120"
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation 527
52
Step search Step search displays the ladder block that contains a specified step number.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [Step.Sea.].
3. Enter a step number. *1
Example: Specify step No. 40.
After the step number is entered, touch the [Enter] key. Input is completed, and the keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys: [Del] key: Used to delete a character of the entered information. [AC] key: Used to delete all characters entered.
4. The ladder block is displayed with the specified step number at the top.
(Display example)
The ladder block of step No. 40 is displayed.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Step.Sea."
Menu window
8 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
Ladder end search Ladder end search displays the last ladder block of the sequence program.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [End.Sea.].
3. The last ladder block is displayed (the end command is not displayed).
The message "CIRCUIT_END" will be displayed.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "End.Sea."
Menu window
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation 529
53
Defect search Defect search searches the ladder block for the status of conductive/non-conductive of the contact point that turned on or off
the coil on the sequence program.
1. Touch [Mon.].
2. Touch [Menu].
3. Touch [Xref.].
4. Select a coil, if necessary.
Using the and keys, switch the input area, and enter the device name and its number of the selected coil. *1
Example: Specify M120.
After the device name and its number are entered, touch the [Enter] key. Input is completed, and the keyboard closes.
*1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys: [Del] key: Used to delete a character of the entered information. [AC] key: Used to delete all characters entered.
5. A search for the device begins, and the research result is displayed.
To cancel a defect search, touch [ESC].
During a defect search, all key operations except [ESC] and [Exit] are invalid.
Operation before a defect search
In the case of the FX ladder monitor, touch [Mon.] before starting a defect search.
If you touch [Xref.] without touching [Mon.], the message "NO MONITORING" will be displayed.
Touch "Mon."
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Xref."
0 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
Search result Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device. They are useful when you determine whether a defective device
is conductive or nonconductive.
If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search, a message appears on-screen, telling that
"PROGRAM NOT FOUND."
When an occurrence of the search device is found: If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search, the search for another defective device will
automatically be started.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" will be displayed as a device that caused a failure. After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state,
"M669" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, a device that is conductive is
displayed. The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on-screen.
Example:
After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state,
"M111" is displayed as a device that is not conductive.
Example:
When there is no more defect, the "FACTOR SEARCH STOP" will be displayed, and
the defect search will end.
The next defect is automatically searched.
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation 531
53
When two occurrences of the search device are found. If there are two or more devices that caused a failure, the "the defect search is interrupted" message appears and the defect
search is terminated.
Example: After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state, "M669" and "M23" will be displayed as devices that
caused a failure.
When resuming the defect search, specify either of the found contacts M669 and X0025. After touching [ESC] to change it
into [Menu], execute the defect search.
Precautions for making defect search
When the contact point searched is a b contact point
If a B-contact is found defective as a result of the defect search, a search for the cause of the ON/OFF state
will be automatically switched.
Screen display after a defect search
After the end of the defect search, the GOT stops monitor and displays the search result.
Hence, the monitor screen of the GOT shows the result retained during the defect search.
Display of defect search results
While the search result is displayed after the end of the defect search, the searched ladder can be displayed
backwards by pressing [] [] (single ladder block scroll) or [JUMP] [JUMP].
Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on-screen. The following messages will appear at the start or the end of
the search results.
When viewing the start of search results: "This is the start of search results."
When viewing the end of the search results: "This is the end of search results."
Display of contact point and coil ON/OFF
During automatic search execution
Displays ON/OFF in the entire ladder displayed on the screen.
During search result display
The ON/OFF of the ladder block searched last and the monitor results of word devices are displayed.
Switching the [Menu]/[ESC] key switch
When the defect serch starts, [Menu] change into [ESC].
Touch [ESC] during the defect search to stop the defect search and display the search result.
Further, touch [ESC] to change [ESC] into [Menu] and display the normal ladder.
Screen display during a defect search
If the display data exceeds one screen during the defect search
The screen is scrolled automatically.
If the ladder step searched during the defect search exceeds one screen
The screen is scrolled automatically to the last line of the ladder step.
Screen display when you touch the [ESC] key
Touching [ESC] can stop the defect search. Search results are continuously displayed on-screen until [ESC] is
touched.
The ladder step searched last is displayed as described below.
ON/OFF display is not provided.
After searching for coil M120 that is in the OFF state, M669 and M23 are displayed
as devices that are not conductive.
Example: ,
* After searching for a device that is in the ON state, devices that are conductive are
displayed. The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on-screen.B
Example: ,
2 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.6 Search Operation
13
13.7 Test Operation You can change device values and turn on and off bit devices on the screen when the FX ladder monitor is executed. This
section describes how to display the test menu screen.
For the procedure for changing device values and turning on and off bit devices, see the following.
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
Displaying the test menu screen
Displaying the test menu screen The procedure for displaying the test menu screen during FX ladder monitoring is described below.
1. Touch [Menu].
2. Touch [TEST].
3. The test menu screen is displayed.
Change device values by operating the window.
For further information about the operation procedure, see the following:
Page 88 Test operation for the monitor device ([Test])
The present and set values of word devices are hidden behind the test menu screen.
You can display hidden present and set values by scrolling them to the right or left using the [] or [] key.
Touch "MENU"
Touch "Test" Word device values displayed
Test menu screen
13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.7 Test Operation 533
53
13.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed when the FX ladder monitor function is executed, and corrective action.
Error message Description Corrective action
ENTRY CODE MISMATCH The specified keyword is different from the
keyword that is registered in the object PLC
CPU.
Check the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU
and specify again.
FILE NOT FOUND An attempt was made to switch to the FX
ladder monitor screen when a sequence
program had not been read.
When the file is selected and the "Read" key
is pressed, the selected file does not exist in
the PLC drive.
Read the sequence program that written in the object PLC
CPU.
PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of the
specified network No. or station No.
The specified drive does not exist.
Check and correct the following:
Does the specified PLC CPU exist?
Is it online? (Data communication status?)
Has an error occurred?
Power on the GOT again.
and so on.
No END instruction. The sequence program has no END
instruction.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Instruction code abnormal. The sequence program has an abnormal
command code.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Ladder creation bad. The sequence program has an abnormal
circuit.
Check the sequence program with the peripheral device (GX
Developer).
Please release the keyword. Communication is not possible because a
keyword is registered in the target PLC. (For
FX3U(C) only)
Release the keyword for the target PLC.
The keyword is registered. A keyword is set to the PLC that is targeted to
the PLC reading on the PLC reading screen.
Release the keyword for the target PLC.
PLC is protected. The sequence program is protected by a block
password at the PLC reading. (For FXCPU
only)
Release the block password for the sequence program.
4 13 FX LADDER MONITOR 13.8 Error Messages and Corrective Action
14
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR
Page 535 Features
Page 536 Specifications
Page 539 Operations for Display
Page 543 Operation Procedures
14.1 Features With the Q motion SFC monitor, the GOT can monitor motion SFC programs in the Motion CPU (Q series) connected to the
GOT and device values.
The following describes the features of the Q motion SFC monitor.
SFC diagram display SFC diagrams of motion SFC programs can be displayed.
Starting from the special function switch With a touch of the special function switch placed on the user-created screen, automatic read of motion SFC programs at a
start of the Q motion SFC monitor, and SFC diagram display of the set motion SFC program are performed.
For the required settings for the special function switches, refer to the following.
Page 540 Start operation using the special function switch
Touch the special function switch with the following settings.
Q MOTION SFC monitor startup
(User-created screen) (SFC diagram monitor screen)
Display Screen: SFC Diagram File Name: MainProgram
Motion SFC programs are read automatically from the Motion CPU, and the motion SFC programs with the set file name are displayed.
Special function switch setting
Q MOTION SFC
MONITOR
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.1 Features 535
53
14.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the Q motion SFC monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions for the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
*1 Use the following production number Motion CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU. For bus connection and direct CPU connection (serial) Q172CPU: Production number K******* or later Q173CPU: Production number J******* or later For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection (serial) Q172CPU: Production number N******* or later Q173CPU: Production number M******* or later
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Applicable, : Inapplicable)
*1 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *2 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *3 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *4 Q motion SFC monitor cannot be used when a CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter is used.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the following system applications (extended functions) to the GOT.
Q motion SFC monitor
GOT Platform Library
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Controller OS software package OS version
Motion CPU(Q Series) *1 SV13, SV22 Install the following operating system version when using the Q172CPU, Q173CPU,
Q172CPUN, or Q173CPUN.
SW6RN-SV13Q: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU
with a bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial))
SW6RN-SV22Q: 00H or later (00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU
with a bus connection or direct CPU connection (serial))
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection
Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *4
MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection
CC-Link IE controller *1
CC-Link connection
ID *2 G4 *3
Q motion
SFC
monitor
Motion SFC
program
monitoring
6 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.2 Specifications
14
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware The following hardware is required.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Devices and range that can be monitored The following lists the devices and the ranges that can be monitored with the Q motion SFC monitor.
(: Possible, : Inapplicable)
*1 To monitor the motion register, the following should be set in the [Controller Setting] dialog box of GT Designer3 (GOT2000). Select a type compatible to the motion controller to be used in the [Controller Type] of the CH to connect the motion controller. For the setting methods of the [Controller Setting] dialog box and the types compatible to Motion CPUs, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Readable motion SFC programs With the Q motion SFC monitor, the GOT can read the following motion SFC programs.
Control codes (SFC diagram. F/FS and G)
Text (F/FS and G)
Hardware
Data storage (Such as an SD card and USB memory)
Device Device range Program display Current value monitor
Input relay (X/PX) X0 to 1FFF
Output relay (Y/PY) Y0 to 1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to 12287
Special relay (M) M9000 to 9255
Latch relay (L) L0 to 8191
Link relay (B) B0 to 1FFF
Annunciator (F) F0 to 2047
Special relay (SM) SM0 to 2255
Data register (D) D0 to 8191
Special register (D) D9000 to 9255
Link register (W) W0 to 1FFF
Special register (SD) SD0 to 2255
Motion register (#) *1 #0 to 8191
Coasting timer (FT) FT
Multiple CPU area device (U3E\G) U3E\G10000 to 24335
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.2 Specifications 537
53
Displayable character codes The character code of comments and program names displayable on the Q motion SFC monitor differs according to the
language selected in the utility.
*1 Traditional Chinese supports characters displayable in the ASCII code only.
For details on switching the language of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Precautions
SD card cover opening/closing operation Do not open or close the SD card cover of the GOT while the Q motion SFC monitor is being used.
Doing so may delete stored data or cause the Q motion SFC monitor to operate incorrectly.
Motion SFC programs with soft security key When Q17nDSCPU or Q170MSCPU is protected with a security key, the GOT cannot read the motion SFC program.
For the security key, refer to the following.
MT Developer2 Help
Character code of motion SFC programs Name motion SFC programs using the characters that are included in the character code of the GOT's system language.
Otherwise, when one of the programs is specified, its SFC diagram may not be displayed.
If a motion SFC program is created with unsupported character code, unintended characters may be displayed.
For the character codes that motion SFC programs support, refer to the following.
Page 538 Displayable character codes
Displaying a label The Q motion SFC program monitor does not support displaying a label.
When a label is used in a program, the following may occur on the detailed program window.
A device name not used in the program is displayed.
The current value of the device is not displayed correctly.
On the detailed program window, devices are displayed in the following formats depending on the model.
Q172DSCPU and Q173DSCPU: The label name is displayed, but the current value is not displayed.
Other than the above: The device name is displayed.
Displayable character code Language of utility
SJIS Japanese
ASCII English, Chinese (Traditional) *1
GB Chinese (Simplified)
KS Korean
8 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.2 Specifications
14
14.3 Operations for Display This section describes how to display the Q motion SFC monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Operations for starting the Q motion SFC monitor
Normal operation The following explains how to display the Q motion SFC monitor operation screen after the GOT is turned on. The GOT must
have the required system application (extended function) installed on it.
Starting from the utility
Starting from an extended function switch (Q motion SFC monitor) set in the project data
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch.
Set the channel No., network No. and station No. for the Motion CPU, which is connected to the GOT.
The SFC diagram monitor screen is displayed.
After the utility screen is displayed, select [Monitor] [Q Motion SFC Monitor] from the main menu.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Select a motion SFC program to display the SFC diagram.
End
Communication setting window
Program batch monitor window
*3
*4
*5
*1 *2
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.3 Operations for Display 539
54
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 552 Communication setting window
*4 For the details, refer to the following. Page 551 Program batch monitor window
*5 For the details, refer to the following. Page 543 SFC diagram monitor screen
Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT
When the Q motion SFC monitor is used, the GOT stores motion SFC programs in the SD card.
Reading motion SFC programs is not required when the GOT is restarted.
Page 542 Setting motion SFC program storage location
Start operation using the special function switch Touch the special function switch for which the following settings are configured to start the Q motion SFC monitor.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Setting item of the special function switch Description
[SP Function] tab [Switch Action] Select [Q Motion SFC Monitor].
[Use Program Batch Monitor Window/
SFC Diagram display function]
Select this item.
[Display Screen] Select [Program Batch Monitor Window] or [SFC Diagram].
Depending on the selection, the GOT operates as follows.
When [Program Batch Monitor Window] is selected
The Q motion SFC monitor is started, and the motion SFC programs are
read automatically.
After the reading, the program batch monitor window is displayed.
When [SFC Diagram] is selected
The Q motion SFC monitor is started, and the motion SFC programs are
read automatically.
After the reading, the motion SFC program having the specified file
name is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
0 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.3 Operations for Display
14
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
Screen transition when using the special function switch
For the screen transition when using the special function switch for the automatic read of the motion SFC
program and the display of the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.
Page 540 Start operation using the special function switch
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
The program is locked.
The program is locked.
Password for reading or writing is set for the motion SFC program.
Communication setting window
Active step list window
Password input window
program batch monitor window
Step list window
Password input window
SFC diagram monitor screen
Password input window
Detailed program window
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.3 Operations for Display 541
54
Setting motion SFC program storage location The motion SFC program read from a Motion CPU and the ladder data for the sequence program monitor (Ladder) are stored
in the same destination.
Only drive A (standard SD card) or drive B (USB drive) is usable for storing motion SFC programs.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3(GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
2 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.3 Operations for Display
14
14.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the display contents of the SFC diagram monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
SFC diagram monitor screen
When the SFC diagram monitor is executed
Display screen
No. Item Display contents
1) Target controller display area Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the Motion CPU set as the target.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
2) Keys Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
3) Program switching tab Displays the program name of the program displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Touching a tab displays the corresponding program in the SFC diagram display area.
Tabs displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.
If the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be closed.
4) SFC diagram display area Displays the SFC diagram of the motion SFC program.
Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
Inactive : Gray
Active : Pongee
Waiting : Dark red
For displayed motion SFC diagram symbols, refer to the following.
Page 544 Motion SFC diagram symbol
The followings can be selected in the SFC diagram display area.
Comment display: Valid or invalid
Automatic scroll: Valid or invalid
Display menu
5) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
6) Automatic scroll status display area Displays [Scrolling automatically] when the automatic scroll mode is valid.
Nothing is displayed when the automatic scroll mode is invalid.
When the automatic scroll is valid, the automatic scroll turns invalid by touching the automatic scroll status
display area.
7) Number of active steps display area Displays the number of active steps.
Active step list window is displayed by touching this area.
Page 550 Active step list window
1)
2)
2)
2)
5) 6) 7)
4)
3)
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 543
54
Motion SFC diagram symbol The following describes the motion SFC diagram symbols displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
*1 Touching the locked step or transition displays the password input window. Page 553 Password input window
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Classification Name Symbol Function
Program start/
end
START Indicates the program entrance by the program name.
END Indicates the program end (exit).
Step Motion control step -
Once execution type
operation control step *1 Detailed program window is displayed by touching this area.
Page 547 Detailed program window
Scan execution type
operation control step *1
Subroutine call/start step *1 Touch this to add a tab with the name of the program which is set for the
subroutine call/start step, to the right of the program switching tab.
The program corresponding to the added program switching tab is displayed
in the SFC display area.
If the detailed program window is open, the tab will be closed. Clear step *1
Transition Shift *1 Touch this to display the detailed program window.
Page 547 Detailed program window
The device name of the set bit device is displayed on WAITON and
WAITOFF.
Even if the label is set to the bit device, the device name is displayed.
Shift Y/N *1
WAIT *1
WAIT Y/N *1
WAITON
WAITOFF
Jump Normal Touch one of these to search for the jump or pointer of the same number.
The jumps or pointers that are found are displayed in the SFC diagram
display area.
Coupling
Pointer Normal
Coupling
Program name
END
Kn
Fn
FSn
Program name
Program name CLR
Gn
Gn
ON bit device
OFF bit device
Pn
Pn
Pn
Pn
4 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
14
Motion SFC diagram monitor screen
Key functions The following describes key functions for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Menus The following shows the operations for menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Search menu
Display menu
Key Function
[Find] Displays the Find menu.
Page 545 Menus
[Display] Displays the Display menu.
Page 545 Menus
Exits the Q motion SFC monitor.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
Scrolls the display up or down one page.
Scrolls the display right or left one column.
Scrolls the display right or left one page.
Key Function
[Step list] Displays the step list window.
Page 549 Step list window
Key Function
[Comment] Switches the comment display between valid and invalid.
Comment display valid Comment display invalid
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 545
54
[Automatic scroll] Switches the automatic scroll between valid and invalid.
When the automatic scroll is valid and all the following conditions are satisfied, the active steps are displayed
on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically scrolling the screen.
No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The displayed motion SFC program has an active step.
Displays [Scrolling automatically] in the automatic scroll status display area of the SFC diagram monitor
screen when the automatic scroll is valid.
Page 543 SFC diagram monitor screen
[Active step list] Displays the active step list window
Page 550 Active step list window
[Program batch monitor] Displays the program batch monitor window.
Page 551 Program batch monitor window
[Select CPU] Displays the communication setting window.
Page 552 Communication setting window
Key Function
An active step in the block is displayed by automatically scrolling the screen.
The step status becomes inactive.
6 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
14
Detailed program window
Displayed contents The following describes the contents of the detailed program window and the key functions displayed on the screen.
No. Item Display contents
1) Number display area Displays the step number or transition number.
2) Keys Displays the keys for operations on the detailed program window.
3) Program display area Displays the arithmetic control program or transition program.
When the automatic scroll is valid and the active step is changed, the arithmetic control program/transition program of
the active step is displayed.
When the locked step becomes active, the displayed contents do not change in the detailed program window.
Display menu
The arithmetic control program/transition program of the touched step/transition is displayed by touching the step/
transition on the step list window or active step list window.
Page 549 Step list window
Page 550 Active step list window
4) Device display area Displays the devices (device name, device number, and data type) which are used in the arithmetic control program or
transition program displayed in the program display area.
Data type is only displayed when the device is the word device (32-bit integer type/64-bit floating point number type).
The number of displayable devices differs according to the device type.
Up to 288 points can be displayed when the devices are counted in the following way.
Bit device (1 bit): 1 point
Bit device (16 bits): 2 points
Bit device (32 bits): 4 points
Word device (16-bit integer type): 2 points
Word device (32-bit integer type): 4 points
Word device (64-bit floating point number type): 8 points
5) Current value display area Displays the current value of the device which is used in the arithmetic control program or transition program displayed
in the program display area.
If the current value cannot be acquired from the Motion CPU, the value will not be displayed.
The following shows the displayed contents of each device.
Bit device (1 bit): Yellow is displayed at ON, and is displayed at OFF.
Bit device (16 bits/32 bits): The lowest digits of 16-bit/32-bit portion of the initial device are displayed side-by-side.
The contents are displayed only when the device No. of the specified initial device is a multiple of 16.
When the device is ON, the background of the device No. is displayed in yellow.
Example) The current value display of Bit device X18 (16 bits)
Word device: Displays in the display format set in the display format display area.
1)
3)
4)
2)
5) 6)
D2012L
Device name Device number Data type (L: 32 bits, F: 64 bits)
7654 3210 FEDC BA98
X27, X26, , X19, X18
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 547
54
Key functions
6) Display format display
area
Displays the display format of the word devices used in the arithmetic control program or transition program displayed in
the program display area. (Not displayed when bit devices are used.)
The following shows the display format types.
K (): Signed decimal
K (+): Unsigned decimal
H: Hexadecimal (H is displayed on the head of the value in the current value display area.)
BIN: Binary
FLOAT: Floating-point number (The current value is displayed in the exponential representation.)
Display format can be changed by touching the display format display area.
By touching the area, display format changes in the following order.
Item Display contents
Close the detailed program window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
Scrolls the display right or left one column.
No. Item Display contents
16/32Bit :
64Bit :
K() K(+) H BIN
FLOAT H
8 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
14
Step list window Step list window displays the steps and transitions.
Displayed contents
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations on the step list window.
2) Step display area Displays the step numbers or transition numbers and the comments set in the steps or transitions.
Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
Inactive : Gray
Active : Pongee
Waiting : Dark red
Touch a step or transition to display it on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The program is also displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is locked, the
authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
Kn: Motion control step
Fn: Once execution type operation control step
FSn: Scan execution type operation control step
GSUB: Subroutine call/start step
Gn: Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
WAITON: WAITON
WAITOFF: WAITOFF
Depending on the step or transition, the displayed comments may be as follows.
GSUB (Subroutine call/start step): Call destination/startup destination program name
WAITOFF and WAITOFF: Bit device name
Key Function
[Active step list] Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Page 550 Active step list window
Closes the step list window
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1)
2) 1)
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 549
55
Active step list window The active step list window displays active steps.
Displayed contents
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations on the active step list window.
2) Active step display area Displays the active step numbers and comments set in the active step.
The step or transition is displayed as below.
Not locked: Yellow
Locked: Pongee
Touch a step or transition to display it on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The program is also displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is locked, the
authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
Kn: Motion control step
Fn: Once execution type operation control step
FSn: Scan execution type operation control step
GSUB: Subroutine call/start step
Gn: Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
WAITON: WAITON
WAITOFF: WAITOFF
Depending on the step or transition, the displayed comments may be as follows.
GSUB (Subroutine call/start step): Call destination/startup destination program name
WAITOFF and WAITOFF: Bit device name
Key Function
[Step list] Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Page 549 Step list window
Closes the active step list window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1)
2) 1)
0 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
14
Program batch monitor window The following shows the operation for selecting the motion SFC program to display on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Program status display area Displays the program No., program name and program status of the motion SFC program read from the
Motion CPU.
The program is displayed as below.
Unlocked and running program: Yellow
Locked program: Gray
Locked and running program: Pongee
Touching a program name closes the program batch monitor window and displays the corresponding
program on the SFC diagram monitor screenIf the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be
closed.)
Page 543 SFC diagram monitor screen
Touching the locked program displays the password input window.
Page 553 Password input window
2) Keys Keys for operations on the program batch monitor window.
Key Function
Closes the program batch monitor window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1) 2)
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 551
55
Communication setting window Set the Motion CPU to be monitored.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.
3) Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4) CPU No. input area Set the CPU No.
5) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.
6) Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set,
the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
The operation differs depending on the status at touch.
When the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area:
Moves the cursor.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are
completed:
The communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
Displays the password input window when the read motion SFC program requires a password.
Page 553 Password input window
When the program does not require any password, the program batch monitor window appears.
Page 551 Program batch monitor window
Deletes an input value or character.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)
1) 3) 4) 2)
5)
1) 3) 4) 2)
6)
2 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
14
Password input window Execute the password authentication of the motion SFC program.
After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically with the same password for
the following time. (The password input window is not displayed.)
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window.
2) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input.
SFC program password: The password for writing or reading
Unlock password: The password for unlocking the program
3) Password input area Set the password.
Key Function
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the symbol.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Authenticates the password set in the password input area.
(For numerical input)(For alphabet input )
1) 1) 3)
1)
3)2) 2)
1)
14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures 553
55
MEMO
4 14 Q MOTION SFC MONITOR 14.4 Operation Procedures
15
15 FX LIST EDITOR
Page 555 Features
Page 557 Specifications
Page 560 Operations for Display
Page 563 Operation Procedures
Page 584 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
GT25-W is not supported.
To use the FX list editor on GT21, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
15.1 Features The MELSEC-FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC.
This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations.
The features of the MELSEC-FX list editor are described below.
Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain. You can check or partly correct, change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys.
You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT.
Combination with the FX ladder monitor You can open the MELSEC-FX List Editor window from the Ladder Monitor screen with a single touch.
You can edit PLC program while checking the ladder.
You can also display a list from the step line displayed by the ladder monitor.
Changed (Example of changing sequence program commands)
LD X000 OUT Y020 LD X001
LDX000 OUTY030 LDX001
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.1 Features 555
55
Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily. Error messages, error codes, and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked.
Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing.
Commands and devices can be searched and displayed. Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched.
The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device.
Searched device M800
Displays the searched device.
LD M 800 OUT T 10
K 100 LD X 002
6 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.1 Features
15
15.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC-FX list editor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 MELSEC-FX list editor cannot be used when using CC-Link IE field network Ethernet adapter.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the FX list editor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Controller Model
FXCPU FX3U, FX3UC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3S
Function Connection type between GOT and PLC
Name Description Direct CPU connection (serial)
Ethernet connection *1
MELSEC-FX list editor Sequence program writing, parameter setting, PLC
diagnostics and keyword registration, etc.
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.2 Specifications 557
55
Functions list and monitor conditions The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC-FX list editor and the FX PLC status conditions.
(: Can be monitored : Can be monitored under certain conditions : Cannot be monitored)
*1 The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF. *2 The available memory differs depending on the FX PLC being used.
For further information, see the following. The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used
Function Memory that can be monitored *2 FX PLC status
Reference
Built-in memory
RAM memory cassette
EEPROM memory cassette, flash memory cassette
EPROM memory cassette
Reading
sequence
programs
Displaying sequence
programs
RUN/STOP Page 566
Sequence program
display
Searching commands/
devices
Page 568
Searching commands
and devices
Writing
sequence
programs
Writing commands *1 For Stop
only
Page 570 Writing
commands
Changing operands/set
values
Page 573
Changing operands,
set values
Inserting commands Page 570 Writing
commands
Deleting commands Page 574
Deleting commands
Sequence program all clear Page 575
Sequence program all
clear
PLC diagnostics RUN/STOP Page 576 PLC
diagnostics
Parameter
setting
Display Page 578
Parameter settingSet *1 For Stop
only
Keyword RUN/STOP Page 580
Keywords
8 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.2 Specifications
15
Access range For the FXCPU in Ethernet connection, the GOT can monitor only the host station.
The access range other than the above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program/parameter change When using the MELSEC-FX list editor, do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other peripheral
equipment.
If you make a change, temporarily exit the MELSEC-FX list editor after the change is made, then start the MELSEC-FX list
editor again.
If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment (including GOT), the contents of
the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same, resulting in an unintended operation of the
PLC CPU.
Sequence program change Stop the FX PLC before changing (writing, inserting, deleting) a sequence program or changing parameters.
Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running.
If you press the [GO] key but the system does not proceed to the next operation (for example, a search) Check the input contents (applied instruction number, device value, etc.).
When used together with the FX ladder monitor Even if you execute the MELSEC-FX list editor with the FX ladder monitor activated, edited information will not be reflected on
the FX ladder monitor screen.
To reflect such edited information, perform the PLC reading of the FX ladder monitor again.
When using list monitor Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored.
The status of devices (word, bit) to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored.
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.2 Specifications 559
56
15.3 Operations for Display This section describes how to display the FX list editor screen after the GOT is turned on.
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 Refer to the following for the FX ladder monitor. Page 505 FX LADDER MONITOR
*4 For the details, refer to the following. Page 580 Keywords
Communication setting window
Set the Channel No.
The MELSEC-FX list editor is started.
End
Enter the keyword.
Set the channel number of the controller targeted to the MELSEC-FX list editor.
When no keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC
When a keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC
When starting the List editor for MELSEC-FX from the ladder monitor
Start
Turn on the GOT.
Activate the MELSEC-FX list editor on the Ladder monitor screen.
Touch "List"
Starting from the utility
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch.
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [MELSEC-FX List editor] from the Main Menu.
Starting from the special function switch (MELSEC-FX list editor) set in the project data
*1 *2
*3
*4
0 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.3 Operations for Display
15
How to display the utility
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Displaying communication setting window
After turning on the GOT, the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC-
FX list editor only.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch [ChNo.] on the
MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
Page 563 Operation Procedures
If the project data has not been downloaded
The MELSEC-FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to
the GOT.
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.3 Operations for Display 561
56
Change screens This section describes how to change the screen.
*1 With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen. When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used. For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Communication setting window [ChNo.]
[PLC diagnostics]
[Parameter setting]
MORE
MORE
CLR OP
GO
[Keyword setup]
[List Monitor]
OP
CLR
GO
GO
GO
*1
2 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.3 Operations for Display
15
15.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the contents of the MELSEC-FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Key arrangement and a list of key functions The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC-FX List Editor window are described below.
Displayed contents
No. Item Description
1) Channel No. Displays the currently selected channel number.
Touching "ChNo." displays the communication setting window.
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from the FX ladder monitor.
2) Mode Displays a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor.
Page 565 Selection and operation of modes
[Monitor] is displayed when the list monitor is executed.
Page 582 List monitor
3) Error message Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
Page 584 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
4) List display area Displays the sequence program in list format (12 digits).
The position (line) that can be edited is displayed with a bar.
5) Key area Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor.
4)
1)
5)
3) 2)
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 563
56
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
Keyboard switching Touching the [MORE] button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.
When you touch the button for a keyboard function, the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed
automatically.
Key Function
[ChNo.[1]] Displays the communication setting window.
The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC-FX list editor is started from the FX ladder
monitor.
[MODE] Selects a mode for MELSEC-FX list editor.
Page 565 Selection and operation of modes
[OP] Displays the PLC diagnostics, parameter setting, and keyword selection menu.
[MORE] Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2.
Page 564 Keyboard switching
[CLR] When inputting commands: Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input.
Page 584 Action for an incorrect key input
When option menu is displayed: Closes the option menu.
Commands cannot be deleted with this key.
Page 574 Deleting commands
[SP] Space key.
This key is used when setting timers and counters, writing applied commands, etc.
[STEP] Displays the list from a specified step No. when the step No. is input.
Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited.
[GO] Determines the key operation.
[LD] to [INV], [0] to [9], etc. Inputs commands, device names, etc.
The key contents depend on the input contents.
The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC.
Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used.
[] Exits the MELSEC-FX list editor.
Touch [MORE]
Touch [MORE]
Command keyboard 1 Command keyboard 2
4 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Selection and operation of modes The MELSEC-FX list editor has four modes: READ, WRITE, INSERT, and DELETE.
Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation.
For more information on the mode to select, refer to the function operations from subsection 5.4.3 onward.
How to change modes Touch the [MODE] button.
Each time you touch this button, the mode changes.
In the case the mode cannot be changed In the following cases, only READ mode is allowed.
If you try to change to other than READ mode, an error message is displayed.
To change to other than READ mode, take the action below.
Error Message Description Corrective action
PLC is running The FX PLC is in the RUN status. Stop the FX PLC.
Can not write. The protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette is on. Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM memory
cassette.
The EPROM memory cassette is enabled. Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory to write to.
Touch the [MODE] button.
The current mode is displayed.
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 565
56
Sequence program display Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed.
There are two displaying methods: specifying the step number, and scrolling one screen at a time.
Display using cursor keys
Operation
Example Scroll one line upward or downward.
Display specifying the step number
Operation
Example Displaying step number 123.
When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction
If the specified step number is a timer (T) or counter (C) set value or the operand of an applied instruction, that
command section is displayed at the head.
Scroll with or .
128 MPP 129 DIV 23 D56 K200
128 MPP 129 DIV 23 D56 K200
128 MPP 129 DIV 23 D56 K200
Scrolling one line upward Scrolling one line downward
STEP GOInput the step number.
STEP
GO
Input the step number
Step number
0 LD X 000 1 OUT Y 000 2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12
123 MOV 12 K 200 D 58 128 MPP
123
3 MOV 12
6 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Display scrolling one screen at a time
Operation
Example Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time.
MODE GO (Read mode)
ChNo.[1]
ChNo.[1]
MODE
GO
Set the READ mode.
Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time.
123 MOV 12 K 200 D 58 128 MPP
< WRITE >
< READ >
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 567
56
Searching commands and devices Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0.
Command search
Operation
*1 If the command you want to search for is not on the keyboard, touch the [MORE] key to switch to the other keyboard. When searching for an applied instruction, touch the [FNC] key and input the applied instruction number. When searching for a label, touch [P] or [I] and input the pointer number. Page 571 Writing applied instructions
*2 Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number. *3 After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the [GO] key.
Touching any key other than the [GO] key ends the search.
Example Searching for LD M8000
Pointer (P, I) searches
For pointer searches, only labels are searched.
Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched.
MODE (Read mode)
*1 *2 *3 Select the command to search for.
Input the device name and device number.
GO GO
M 8 0 0 0 GO
GO (Continue to search with the same conditions)
ChNo.[1]
ChNo.[1]
MODE
LD
< WRITE >
< READ >
Search command
Select the command to search for.( )
Set the READ mode.
3 MOV 12
8 LD M 8000 9 OUT T 10 K 100 12 LD X 002
24 LD M 8000 25 OUT T 0 K 100 28 OUT T 1
LD
8 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Device search
Operation
*1 After the search results are displayed, you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the [GO] key. Touching any key other than the [GO] key ends the search.
Example Searching for LD M8000
Devices that cannot be searched
The following devices cannot be searched.
Pointers, interrupt pointers
Constant K, constant H, constant E
Bit devices with specifying numbers only
Special function unit/block buffer memory
Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction
Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches.
Page 568 Command search
* 1 MODE SP GO GOInput the device name and
device number. (Read mode)
GO (Continue to search with the same conditions)
GO
MSP 8 0 0 0
ChNo.[1]
ChNo.[1]
MODE
Search device
Set the READ mode.
3 MOV 12
8 LD M 8000 9 OUT T 10 K 100 12 LD X 002
24 LD M 8000 25 OUT T 0 K 100 28 OUT T 1
M8000< WRITE >
< READ >
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 569
57
Writing commands Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC. (Overwrite/Insert)
Writing basic commands
Operations Inputting command only (Ex.: ANB, ORB command etc.)
Inputting command and device (LD, AND commands etc.)
Inputting command, No. 1 device, No. 2 device (MC, OUT (T, C) commands, etc.)
Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number
is displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line.
Example Writing ORB command
MODE GOStop the FX PLC Input the command
For overwriting: (WRITE mode) For insertion: (INSERT mode)
MODE
GO
Stop the FX PLC
Input the device name and device number
Input the command
For overwriting: (WRITE mode) For insertion: (INSERT mode)
GOSP
MODEStop the FX PLC Input the device name and device numberInput the command
For overwriting: (WRITE mode) For insertion: (INSERT mode)
Input the device name and device number
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12 D 0 D 10
ORB GO
ChNo.[1]
MODE
ChNo.[1] Set the WRITE or INSERT mode
With or , move the cursor to the position to overwrite/insert the command.
Stop the FX PLC
4 LDI X 004 5 AND X 005 6 NOP 7 NOP
4 LDI X 004 5 AND X 005 6 ORB 7 NOP
< WRITE >
< READ >
0 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Inputting LD X000
Inputting OUT T100 K19
Writing applied instructions
Operations
*1 [D] (double word command) and [P] (pulse execution format command) can also be input after the applied instruction number is input. Inputting in the order [P] [D] is also possible.
*2 When a command specifies multiple devices for operations, input the [SP] key followed by the device name and device number.
0XLD GO
ChNo.[1]
MODE
ChNo.[1] Set the WRITE or INSERT mode.
Stop the FX PLC
0 NOP 1 NOP 2 NOP 3 NOP
0 LD X 000 1 NOP 2 NOP 3 NOP
< WRITE >
< READ >
With or , move the cursor to the position to overwrite/insert the command.
OUT
SP K 19 GO
100T
100 OUT M 100 101 NOP 102 NOP 103 NOP
100 OUT M 100 101 OUT T 100 103 NOP
100 OUT M 100 101 OUT T 100 K 19 104 NOP
ChNo.[1]
MODE
ChNo.[1]
< WRITE >
< READ >
With or , move the cursor to the position to overwrite/insert the command.
Set the WRITE or INSERT mode.
Stop the FX PLC
Applied instruction number *1
*1
*2
Stop the FX PLC
Input the device name and device number.
MODE
P SP GO
FNC D
For overwriting: (WRITE mode) For insertion: (INSERT mode)
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 571
57
Moving the cursor to the position to write the command
When starting to write a command, place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number
is displayed).
You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line.
Commands using a text string constant for a command operand (such as ASC command)
With the MELSEC-FX list editor, text string constants cannot be written as operands. (such as ASC
commands)
Use GX Developer for writing such commands.
Example Input "DMOVP D0 D2".
*1 The MOV command is FNC12.
2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12 D 0 D 10
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
SPD 1 2 P
SPD 0 D 2 GO
ChNo.[1]
MODE
FNC
ChNo.[1]
200 NOP 201 NOP 202 NOP 203 NOP
200 FNC 201 NOP 202 NOP 203 NOP
200 DMOVP 12 203 NOP
200 DMOVP 12 D 0 D 2 209 NOP
*1
< WRITE >
< READ > Set the WRITE or INSERT mode.
With or , move the cursor to the position to overwrite/insert the command.
Stop the FX PLC
2 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Changing operands, set values Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT (T, C) command set value.
Operation
*1 For decimal numbers, input K, then the number. For hexadecimal numbers, input H, then the number.
Moving the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed
When starting to change an operand or a set value, place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to
be changed (the line on which the step number is not displayed).
If you place the cursor on the command line, the input operation is not possible.
Example Changing "MOV D0 D10" to "MOV D0 D123"
MODE SP GO Read mode
Stop the FX PLC Input the device name and device number
2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12 D 0 D 10
Command line (Cannot operate on this line.) Operand, set value line (Place the cursor on this line.)
D 1 2 3SP
ChNo.[1]
MODE
ChNo.[1]
3 MOV 12 D 0 D 10 8 LD M 10
3 MOV 12 D 0 D 123 8 LD M 10
< WRITE >
< READ >
Set the WRITE or INSERT mode.
Stop the FX PLC
Move the cursor to the changed location with or
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 573
57
Deleting commands Deletes one command at a time from a sequence program.
Operation
When moving the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted.
Place the cursor on the command line (the line on which the step number is displayed).
You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value.
Example Deleting "OUT T10 K100"
MODE GOStop the FX PLC Move the cursor to the command to be deleted. (DELETE mode)
2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12
D 0 D 10
Command line (Place the cursor on this line.)
Operand, set value line (Cannot operate on this line.)
GO
*1
8 LD M 10 9 OUT T 10
K 100 12 LD X 002
8 LD M 10 9 LD X 002
10 OR X 020Z1 13 AND D 1500.F
ChNo.[1]
MODE
STEP
ChNo.[1] Set the WRITE or INSERT mode.
Move the cursor to the command to be deleted with , or the key.
< WRITE >
< READ >
Stop the FX PLC
4 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Sequence program all clear Clears all the sequence programs.
Operation
Example Clears all the sequence programs.
Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed
When All Clear is executed, the parameters before program execution are initialized and Latch Clear is
executed.
The memory space becomes the default value, the comment area a 0 block, the file register space a 0 block,
and keywords unregistered.
After All Clear, set the above parameters etc. again.
(WRITE mode)
MODE NOP A GOStop the FX PLC
ChNo.[1]
MODE OK
OK
Cancel
NOP
A GO
ChNo.[1]
! Caution The program will be erased. Press "OK" to continue.
0 NOP 1 OUT Y 000 2 LDI M 100 3 MOV 12
0 NOP 1 NOP 2 NOP 3 NOP
< WRITE >
< READ >
Stop the FX PLC
Set the WRITE mode.
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 575
57
PLC diagnostics Displays the FX PLC error message, error code, and step at which the error occurred.
Operation
OP GO [PLC diagnostics]
OP
GO
Select [PLC diagnostics] with or
6 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
PLC diagnostics screen The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen key.
Displayed contents
Error details
For details on an FX PLC error, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX CPU used
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen.
No. Item Display contents
1) Error message Displays the error message. (I/O configuration error/PLC hardware error/PC/HPP communication error/
Serial communication error/Parameter error/Syntax error/Circuit error/Operation error)
2) Detail Displays the error code.
3) Step Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred.
(This is displayed only for a syntax error, circuit error, or operation error.)
Key Function
[] Exits the PLC diagnostics.
1) 2) 3)
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 577
57
Parameter setting Sets FX PLC parameters.
Parameters that can be changed and change targets
Parameters that can be changed The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC-FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows.
(: Can be set/changed : Cannot be set/changed)
*1 When connecting an FX0(S), set "0". Setting other than "0" causes a parameter error.
*2 When the parameters are initialized, the display on the MELSEC-FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values, but do not change the latch range. Changing the latch range causes an error.
Change targets When a memory cassette is mounted, the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes.
Operation
*1 When checking parameters (not changing), it is not necessary to stop the PLC.
Item Target CPU
FX0(S) /FX0N
FX1 FX2(C) FX1S FX1N(C) FX2N(C) FX3S FX3G(C) FX3U(C)
Memory space setting
File register space setting *1
Latch range setting *2 *2 *2
RUN terminal setting
Initialization of parameters
Stop the FX PLC [Parameter setting] OP GO *1
OP
GO
Select [Parameter setting] with or .
*1 Stop the FX PLC
8 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Parameter setting screen The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on-screen keys.
Displayed contents
Memory space for kana comments after changing memory space, file register space
If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana comment space, the kana
comment space is automatically reduced.
(With the MELSEC-FX list editor, the kana comment space is not displayed.)
Note that if any setting as described below is made, the kana comment space is reduced.
(Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after setting change)
Settings resulting in Nm < Nf 500 + Nk 500 + 500
Nm : Memory space after change (steps)
Nf : File register space after change (blocks)
Nk : Comment space before change (blocks)
Settable range and default value
The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type.
For details of the settable range and the default value, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used
Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter setting screen.
No. Item Display contents
1) Memory capacity Sets the memory space (number of steps).
If you touch the [*K] section, you can change the memory space.
2) File reg. capacity Sets the memory space (number of blocks) allocated to the file register.
Touch the section and input the number of blocks.
3) Latch range Sets the latch range (power failure hold area).
Touch the number display section and input the value.
4) RUN terminal input Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input.
Touch the section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal.
5) Default Initializes the parameters
Key Function
[Default] Initializes the parameters
[OK] Completes the changed setting contents.
[] Ends parameter setting.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Nm - Nf x 500 - 500
500 Kana comment space (steps) after setting change =
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 579
58
Keywords Registers, deletes, releases protection for, and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords.
Function usability of the MELSEC-FX list editor for keyword protection levels The functions that can be used with the MELSEC-FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword, it becomes "" (cannot be used). *2 The names within the parentheses ( ) are for when a keyword + 2nd keyword is set.
Function Keyword protection level Reference
All operation protect (All on-line operation protect) *2
Read/Incorrect write protection (Read/write protect) *2
Incorrect write protect (Write protect) *2
Keyword not registered/ keyword protection canceled
Reading
sequence
programs
Displaying sequence
programs
Page 566
Sequence program
display
Searching commands/
devices
Page 568
Searching commands
and devices
Writing
sequence
programs
Writing commands Page 570 Writing
commands
Changing operands/set
values
Page 573
Changing operands,
set values
Inserting commands Page 570 Writing
commands
Deleting commands Page 574
Deleting commands
Sequence program all clear Page 575
Sequence program all
clear
PLC diagnostics *1 Page 576 PLC
diagnostics
Parameter setting Page 578
Parameter setting
0 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Operation
Keyword screen and protection level When [Keyword setup] is selected with the MELSEC-FX list editor, the keyword screen is displayed.
For the keyword operation, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Keywords
For details of the keyword, refer to the following.
Programming manual for the FX PLC used
OP GO[Keyword setup]
OP
GO
Select [Keyword setup] with or .
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 581
58
List monitor The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed.
Operation
Starting list monitor with special function switches (FX list monitor)
With setting special function switches (FX list monitor), the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen.
When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen, the list editor cannot be used.
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
OP GO[ List Monitor ]
OP
GO
Select [List Monitor] with or .
When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen, the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is displayed on the list monitor screen.
2 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures
15
Displays and key functions The following describes the displays for the list monitor.
*1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below.
Hard copy output This section describes how to output the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
Refer to the following for the hard copy.
Starting the MELSEC-FX list editor from the FX ladder monitor
Page 518 Hard copy output
Setting the hard copy with GT Designer3 (GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
No Item Display contents
1) List display area *1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays.
2) Keys The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed.
Page 566 Sequence program display
3) [] Ends the list monitor.
When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen, the screen is switched to the FX list editor
screen.
Type of instructio Description Status
Displayed Not displayed
LD, AND, ORC(ontact instruction (Normal open)) Contact ON OFF
LDI, ANI, ORI(Contact instruction (Normal close)) Contact OFF ON
OUT, SET TC: Coil ON OFF
Except TC: Contact ON OFF
RST TC: Reset ON OFF
Word device Value: 0 Value: Except 0
Except TC and word device:
Contac
OFF ON
MC, STL Contact ON OFF
LDP, ANDP, ORP, LDF, ANDF, ORF
(Rise or fall contact instruction)
Not monitored Always not displayed
2)
3)
1)
15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.4 Operation Procedures 583
58
Action for an incorrect key input If an incorrect key is input, cancel the input contents.
Operation
Before touching the [GO] key (before reading/writing the input contents) Before touching the [GO] key, touch the [CLR] key.
After touching the [GO] key (after reading/writing the input contents) Write the command again.
Page 570 Writing commands
Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised (overwritten) with the program writing.
15.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC-FX list editor is executed, and corrective action.
How to erase an error message
An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated.
To erase an error message, touch a key on the MELSEC-FX list editor screen.
Error Messeage Description Corrective action
Can not display while protected. The all-operation protect, anti-plagiarism, or
incorrect write protect keyword is set.
Check the protected operation.
Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword.
Page 580 Keywords Can not operate while protected.
PLC parameter error. An FX PLC parameter is defective. Set correct parameters in the FX PLC.
PLC communications error. The communication with the FX PLC is
defective.
Check the FX PLC, cable, and GOT for abnormality.
Check whether the communication settings are correct or not.
PLC is running. A writing operation etc. has been made while
the FX PLC is running.
Stop the FX PLC.
Can not write. The memory to write to is EPROM.
The protect switch of the EEPROM is on.
Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to.
Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM.
Step number is out of a range. The specified step number exceeded the
maximum number.
Specify a step number below the maximum value.
Not found. The specified command cannot be found. Proceed to the next operation.
Not found. The specified device cannot be found. Proceed to the next operation.
Step overflow. The program may exceed the available space.
(Writing is not executed.)
Check the program memory space and delete commands to keep
it within the space.
Page 574 Deleting commands
Command error. An invalid command (non-existent command)
was specified.
Input the correct command.
Protected by a block password. The sequence program is protected by a block
password at the PLC reading.
Release the block password for the sequence program.
4 15 FX LIST EDITOR 15.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
16
16 R MOTION MONITOR
Page 585 Features
Page 587 Specifications
Page 589 Operations for Display
Page 592 Operation Procedures
Page 614 Error Messages and Corrective Action
16.1 Features The R motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
The following are the features of the R motion monitor.
Various servo monitoring on multiple monitor screens The R motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens, on which you can monitor servo data in a variety of patterns.
(Display examples)
Present Value Monitor
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
Page 598 Present value monitor screen
Positioning Monitor
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
Page 604 Positioning monitor screen
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.1 Features 585
58
Error List Designated-Axis
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
Page 602 Error list designated-axis screen
Servo parameter setting by writing operation Write example: Changing the setting of the auto tuning function
1. By performing writing from the parameter setting screen, write the servo parameter setting (Basic parameters and
adjustment parameters) to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
2. To change a servo parameter setting, enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the automatically
displayed key window, and write it to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Parameter setting screen Parameter setting window appears
Change the auto tuning mode from "1" to "2".
Parameter setting screen
Parameter setting is changed
6 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.1 Features
16
16.2 Specifications Page 587 System configuration
Page 588 Access range
Page 588 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the R motion monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target Motion CPU of the R motion monitor For the compatible operating system software versions of the Motion CPU, refer to the following.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
When the GOT is connected to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) : Available, : Unavailable
*1 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *2 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4). *3 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, the R motion monitor cannot be used.
Operating system software version of the Motion CPU
Controller Device assignment method
Version 05 or earlier R32MTCPU, R16MTCPU Q series motion-compatible device assignment
Version 06 or later R64MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R16MTCPU Q series motion-compatible device assignment
MELSEC iQ-R motion device assignment
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection
Direct CPU connecti on (serial)
Serial communic ation connection
Ethernet connection *3
MELSECNET/ H connection, MELSECNET/ 10 connection
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection
CC-Link IE Field Network connecti on
CC-Link connecti on
ID *1
G4 *2
Servo
monitor
Monitors the
present value,
positioning
error, and
other servo-
related items
on a variety of
monitor
screens.
Parameter
settings
Changes the
setting of the
servo
parameter.
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.2 Specifications 587
58
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the R motion monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required special data Write the package data, which contains the R motion monitor data, to the GOT.
The required space of the user area for writing depends on the R motion monitor data to be used.
For the R motion monitor data size and how to write the data to the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Servo amplifiers whose parameter can be set The R motion monitor allows you to set the parameter of servo amplifiers shown below.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Operating system software package for the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) The usable OS software package is SW10DNC-RMTFW only.
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) Servo amplifier
R64MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R16MTCPU MR-J4-B, MR-J4W-B, MR-J4-B-RJ, MR-J3-B, MR-J3-B-RJ006, MR-J3-B-RJ004, MR-J3-B-RJ080,
MR-J3W-B, MR-J3-BS
8 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.2 Specifications
16
16.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the R motion monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the R motion monitor screen.
Use either of the following display methods.
Starting from the special function switch (R motion monitor) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [R Motion monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the controller for which the R motion monitor is performed.
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed automatically only at the first startup of the R
motion monitor.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [ChNET PCNo] key on the R motion monitor
screen.
Page 592 Operation Procedures
4. Start the R motion monitor.
The System Configuration screen is displayed after the channel number is selected.
Touch a Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) to monitor.
Touching the [Parameter Set.] key displays the parameter setting screen.
Touching the [Motion Monitor] key displays the monitor menu.
Communication setting window
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.3 Operations for Display 589
59
5. Touch the [Parameter Set.] key to display the parameter setting screen.
When you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), enter the password.
Page 610 Parameter setting screen
Select the servo parameter to be set.
Change the servo parameter setting and write the new servo parameter setting to the motion.
6. Display the R motion monitor screen.
Select an item on the menu to display the selected monitor function.
[Present Value Mon.]
Page 598 Present value monitor screen
[Error History]
Page 600 Motion error history monitor screen
[Error List Axis]
Page 602 Error list designated-axis screen
[Positioning Monitor]
Page 604 Positioning monitor screen
[Servo Monitor]
Page 606 Servo monitor screen
[Present Value Hist.]
Page 608 Present value history monitor screen
0 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.3 Operations for Display
16
Changing screens
At next startup, the last exited screen is displayed.
However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted after package data is written or the GOT is
powered on, off, or reset.
When the function is started with a special function switch to which a connection destination different from the one at the last
exit is set, the system configuration screen appears.
Start
Communication setting windowEND
END
ENDEND
Mon. Menu Sys. Conf(Menu selection)
END
System Configuration screen
Monitor menu screen Password input key window
Parameter setting screenMonitor screen of selected function
Sys. Conf Motion Monitor
Sys. Conf Parameter Set. (Select the Motion CPU to be monitored.)
Ch:
Utility Main Menu
or
user-created monitor screen
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.3 Operations for Display 591
59
16.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the operations of the screens when using the R motion monitor.
The display screen of the R motion monitor varies depending on the GOT used.
Page 592 System configuration screen
Page 594 Setting procedure for monitoring other stations
Page 597 Monitor menu screen
Page 598 Present value monitor screen
Page 600 Motion error history monitor screen
Page 602 Error list designated-axis screen
Page 604 Positioning monitor screen
Page 606 Servo monitor screen
Page 608 Present value history monitor screen
Page 610 Parameter setting screen
Page 613 Hard copy output
System configuration screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the R motion monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions of the R motion monitor The following describes the structure of the system configuration screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen
after the R motion monitor is started.
Displayed contents
1)Motion CPU status display
The CPU numbers are displayed for the CPUs, and the control CPU numbers are displayed for the installed modules.
To choose the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) for servo monitor/servo parameter setting, touch the respective display
position.
2)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1)
2) 2)
2)
2)2)
2 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the system configuration screen.
1)Motion CPU status display
Select the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) where servo monitor/servo parameter setting is performed.
2)[ChNET PCNo] key
Displays the communication setting window.
3)[END] key
Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4)[Motion Monitor] key
Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen.
Page 597 Monitor menu screen
5)[Parameter Set.] key
Changes the System Configuration screen to the parameter setting screen.
Page 610 Parameter setting screen
6)Scroll key
Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage immediately
before/after the currently displayed stage.
4)
5)
6)
6)
3)2)1)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 593
59
Setting procedure for monitoring other stations The following shows the setting procedure for monitoring other stations with R motion monitor.
1. In the communication setting window, select one from channel No.1 to 4.
For the operations of the communication setting screen, refer to the following.
Page 595 Communication setting window
2. When the channel No. is selected, the screen below is displayed.
Set the network number and the station number of the target controller.
3. After selecting the station number, touch the [Enter] key. The communication setting window closes and the system
configuration of the set monitor destination is displayed.
4 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Communication setting window
Displayed screen
1)CH No. input area
Set the CH No. for the target controller.
The setting range is [1] to [4].
2)Network No. input area
Set the network No. for the target controller.
The following shows the setting range for each connection type.
Serial communication connection: [0]
Ethernet connection, CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [1] to [239]
CC-Link (ID) connection: [0]
3)Station No. input area
Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
The following shows the setting range for each connection type.
Serial communication connection: [FF] (Host station)
Ethernet connection: [1] to [64]
CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, CC-Link IE Field Network connection: [1] to [120]
CC-Link (ID) connection: [0] (master station), [1] to [64] (local station)
4)CH No. selection key
Select a CH No.
5)Keys
Keys used for operations in the communication setting window
4) 5)
3) 2)1) 3) 2)1)
When the CH No. is input When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 595
59
Key functions
1)[] key
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set, the
communication setting window does not close.
2)Input area move key
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
3)[Enter] key
Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are completed, the
communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
4)[Del] key
Deletes an input value or character.
5)[AC] key
Deletes all the input values and characters.
3)
2)
1)
4) 5)
6 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Monitor menu screen The R motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens.
To display any of the monitor screens, make a selection on the monitor menu screen.
1)[Present Value Mon.] key
Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes.
Page 598 Present value monitor screen
2)[Error History] key
Displays the history of errors that occurred in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Page 600 Motion error history monitor screen
3)[Error List Axis] key
Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis.
Page 602 Error list designated-axis screen
4)[Positioning Monitor] key
Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis.
Page 604 Positioning monitor screen
5)[Servo Monitor] key
Monitors the servo monitor/servo amplifier.
Page 606 Servo monitor screen
6)[Present Value Hist.] key
Displays the history of encoder present values, servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis at servo
amplifier power-on/off or at home position return.
Page 608 Present value history monitor screen
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 597
59
Present value monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following describes the display data of the present value monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Ax]
Displays the axis numbers of the operating axes being monitored.
2)[Feed PV] and [Actual PV]
Displays the feed present values or actual present values of the operating axes.
Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the positioning monitor screen of the touched axis number.
Page 604 Positioning monitor screen
3)[SV RDY], [ERR DT], and [SV ERR]
Displays the ON (lit)/OFF (not lit) status of the servo ready signal, major/minor error and servo error detection signal.
Touching the error indication part [] switches to the Error List Designated-Axis screen of the touched axis number.
Page 602 Error list designated-axis screen
4)Bit device screen
The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed.
Bit devices for error detection: marked with a red circle
Bit devices for general status display: marked with a green circle
1) 2) 3) 4)
8 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Key functions The following describes the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the present value monitor screen.
1)[Feed PV] key, [Actual PV] key
Touching the key alternates the monitor item between the "feed present value" and "actual present value".
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4)Keys for switching displayed axis numbers
Switches the displayed axis number.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
1) 2) 3)
4)
4)
5) 6)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 599
60
Motion error history monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the motion error history monitor is
executed.
Motion error history monitor screen The following describes the display data of the motion error history monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen.
Displayed contents The motion error history monitor screen displays the history of error which occurs in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Up to 128 errors are displayed from the latest one in the order of [M/D H:M].
1)[M/D H:M]
Displays the date and time when the error occurred in the Motion CPU.
2)[Err Class]
Displays the classifications of the errors that occurred.
The following shows the error classifications to be displayed.
[Wrng]
[Min.]
[Mid.]
[Maj.]
3)[Err Code]
Displays the error code of the error occurred.
4)[Error Definition]
Displays the definition of the error that occurred in the Motion CPU.
5)Title display area
Displays the screen name.
Displays the page number of the currently displayed page and total number of pages.
Up to eight pages can be displayed.
If no error history exists, "1/1" is displayed.
1) 2) 3) 4)
5)
0 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the motion error history monitor screen.
1)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
2)[END] key
Exits the motion error history monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
3)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
4)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
5)[History Clear] button
Clears the error history.
6)Scroll buttons
Scrolls the motion error history up or down by 16 error events.
If no further error event exists, the history is not scrolled.
1) 2)
3) 4) 6) 6)
5)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 601
60
Error list designated-axis screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations used when executing the error list designated-
axis.
Display contents and keys functions This section describes the display data of the error list designated-axis screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Axis No.
Displays the axis number currently being monitored.
2)[Err Code]
Displays the error codes of the errors that occurred.
3)[Error Definition]
Displays the error definitions that occurred.
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the error list designated-axis screen.
1)[Ax] key
Opens the axis No. selection screen.
Page 603 Axis No. selection screen
2)[RET] key
Returns to the previous screen.
1)
2) 3)
1)
2) 3) 4)
5) 6)
2 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
3)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
4)[END] key
Exits the error list designated-axis monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
Axis No. selection screen The following shows the operation keys on the axis No. selection screen.
1)[] key
Closes the axis No. selection screen.
2)Axis No. key
Select an axis number.
The selectable numbers range from [1] to [64].
1)
2) 3) 4)
5) 6)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 603
60
Positioning monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the positioning monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following describes the display data of the positioning monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Data Item
Displays the number of the operating axis being monitored.
2)Positioning control data
Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU.
3)[Status]
Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the control status by axis.
In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
Upon detection of an error or servo error, the symbol is lit red.
4)[CMD Signal]
Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signal.
In the ON status, the symbol is lit green.
Item Description
[Feed PV] Target address output to the servo amplifier
[Actual PV] Actually traveled present value
[Dvt.Counter] Difference between feed present value and actual present value
[EXE Prog No.] The number of the servo program being executed
[Min/Major SV ERR] The error code of the latest minor/major servo error
[M Code T Limit] The M code and torque limit of the servo program in execution
1)
2)
3) 4)
4 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the positioning monitor screen.
1)[Data Item Ax]
Switches the axes to be monitored.
2)[RET] key
Returns to the previous screen.
3)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
4)[END] key
Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
5)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
6)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
1)
2) 3) 4)
5) 6)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 605
60
Servo monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the servo monitor is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following describes the display data of the servo monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Axis
Displays the number of the axis being monitored.
2)[Motor Speed]
Displays the actual speed of the servo motor.
3)[Motor Current]
Displays the motor current value by using the rated current as 100%.
4)[Servo Alarm]
Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier.
2) 1)
3) 4)
6 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the servo monitor screen.
1)[Ax] key
Switches the axes to be monitored.
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
2)
1)
3)
4) 5)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 607
60
Present value history monitor screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations when the present value history monitor is
executed.
Present value history monitor screen The following describes the display data of the present value history monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed
on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Axis
Displays the number of the axis being monitored.
2)[HP Data]
Displays the following values monitored at home position return.
Home position return completion time
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of absolute position reference point data
Within one-revolution position of absolute position reference point data
Servo command value
Monitor present value
3)[MON Val]
Displays the following present monitor values.
Present time
Encoder present value
Present multi-revolution data of encoder present value
Present within one-revolution position of encoder present value
Present servo command value
Present monitor present value
2)
1)
3)
4)
8 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
4)PWR ON/PWR OFF
Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power-on/off.
At power-on
Power-on time
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of initial encoder
One-revolution data of initial encoder
Servo command value after recovery
Monitor present value after recovery
Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery (error code of a minor/major error)
At power-off
Time immediately before servo amplifier power-off
Encoder present value
Multi-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
One-revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power-off
Servo command immediately before servo amplifier power-off
Monitor present value immediately before servo amplifier power-off
Key functions
1)[Ax] key
Switches the axes to be monitored.
2)[Mon. Menu] key
Returns to the monitor menu screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the present value history monitor and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
5)[Cancel Print] key
The touch operation of the key is disabled.
2)
1)
3)
4) 5)
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 609
61
Parameter setting screen This section describes the structure of the screen and the common operations used when executing the parameter setting.
Display contents and keys functions You can set the servo parameters (basic parameters/adjustment parameters) of the connected Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R
series).
This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)Parameter setting screen
Displays the servo parameter of the selected item.
Key functions
1)[AxNo.] key
Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made.
2)[Sys. Conf] key
Returns to the System Configuration screen.
3)[END] key
Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the R motion monitor was started.
4)Item selection key
Selects the servo parameter setting item.
5)[CHG] key
Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item.
1)
2)
4)
3)1)
5)
6) 7)
0 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
6)[Print Screen] key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For further information about hard copies, refer to the following.
Page 613 Hard copy output
7)[Cancel Print] key
The operation of this key is invalid.
Inputting the password If you have set a password in [Motion Parameter Display] on GT Designer3 (GOT2000), the password input key window
appears when you try to access the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor.
For the details of the password setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Function If the password matches, the parameter setting screen is displayed.
If the password does not match, an error message is displayed.
Touching the [Sys. Conf] key returns to the System Configuration screen.
Only numbers and letters A to F can be used for the password setting. (Up to 8 characters)
Operations Enter a password.
Touch the key window and enter a password.
After entering the password, touch the [Enter] key to set the password.
To edit the input characters, touch the [Del] key to delete the characters, and then input the new characters.
To cancel the password input, touch the [] key to return to the monitor screen.
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 611
61
Parameter setting operation The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the [Auto tuning] item as an example of the parameter setting
operation.
1. Select the item whose parameter is to be set with the item selection keys, and touch the [CHG] key.
2. As the parameter setting window appears, enter the parameter setting with the key window.
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the setting.
To cancel the parameter setting operation, touch [] at the top right of the screen to close the parameter setting window.
3. As the confirmation window appears, touch the [OK] key to write the parameter setting to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-
R series).
To cancel writing of the parameter setting, touch the [Cancel] key.
4. After writing is completed, the parameter setting screen whose display has been updated to the new parameter setting is
displayed.
2 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures
16
Hard copy output This section describes how to output the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
Touching the [Print Screen] key outputs the data.
The output target (data storage) of hard copy can be set in [Hard Copy] of GT Designer3 (GOT2000).
For details of hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.4 Operation Procedures 613
61
16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during R motion monitor operation and their corrective
action.
How to clear a displayed error message
For the error that occurs during the communication with a controller (such as a communication error), the error
message does not disappear even after the cause of the error has been removed.
To clear the error message, restart the GOT.
Error message Description Corrective action
Communication error Communication cannot be established with the
PLC CPU of the monitor target.
Check the communication setting.
Check the status of the connection between the controller and the
GOT (disconnected or cut cables).
Check if an error has occurred in the controller.
Check if the R motion monitor supports the PLC CPU.
This PLC type is not supported An unsupported Motion CPU has been selected
on the system configuration screen.
Select a supported Motion CPU on the system configuration screen.
Page 587 Target Motion CPU of the R motion monitor
Controller's OS type is different An operating system other than
SW10DNCRMTFW is installed on the
monitored Motion CPU (R64MTCPU,
R32MTCPU, or R16MTCPU).
Install the SW10DNC-RMTFW operating system on the Motion CPU
(R64MTCPU, R32MTCPU, or R16MTCPU).
It is not a version for GOT The version of the motion controller OS, which
is installed on the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R
series) of the monitor target, does not support
the R motion monitor.
Install a motion controller OS supporting the R motion monitor to the
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Monitor data not found The monitor data is not installed, or was
deleted.
Download the motion monitor data.
Unused axis selected The axis number selected has not been set. Select the axis number that has been set.
Set the axis using the relevant software.
It is not possible to select. During servo parameter setting, an item that
cannot be set has been selected.
Select an item that can be set.
Incorrect setting range A value that is outside the setting range has
been set.
Set the value within the setting range.
Unmatched password The entered password is invalid. Input the correct password.
Communication Channel Setup
Error.
A communication driver supporting the R
motion monitor is not installed.
Install a communication driver that supports the R motion monitor.
Unsupport amp. selected The number of the axis, which is set to a servo
amplifier having no settable parameter, has
been selected.
Select the number of the axis, which is set to a servo amplifier having
the settable parameter.
4 16 R MOTION MONITOR 16.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
17
Not available to GT25HS-V.
Page 616 Features
Page 617 Specifications
Page 620 Operations for Display
Page 622 Operation Procedures
Page 624 Error Messages and Corrective Action
17 CNC MONITOR 615
61
17.1 Features For the MELDAS and other CNCs connected to the GOT, the CNC monitor enables the functions equivalent to the MELDAS
dedicated display as follows: the position display monitor, alarm diagnosis monitor, tool compensation parameter monitor,
program monitor, and the APLC release screen display.
Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor
Tool Compensation Parameter Monitor
APLC Release Screen
Program Monitor
6 17 CNC MONITOR 17.1 Features
17
Page 619 Access range
Page 619 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the GOTs that support the CNC monitor, the target CNCs, and the connection types between the GOT
and the CNC.
For connection type settings, precautions regarding the communication unit/cable, and connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The CNC monitor is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 Available only for CNC C70. *2 Available only for MELDAS C6/C64. *3 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, this function cannot be used. *4 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the CNC monitor to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Space for the system application (Extended function) To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Controller
CNC C70, MELDAS C6/C64
Function Connection type between GOT and CNC
Name Description Bus connection
Ethernet connection *3
MELSECNET/10 connection
CNC monitor Monitors CNC C70 or MELDAS C6/C64, and changes its parameter. *1 *4 *2
17 CNC MONITOR 17.2 Specifications 617
61
CNC function that can be monitored The following functions can be monitored with the CNC monitor.
For the details of each function, refer to the manual of each CNC.
Item Description CNC C70 MELDAS C6/C64
Position display Position
Coordinate
Command
Program search
PLC switch
Common variable
Local variable
Alarm diagnosis Alarm message
Servo monitor
Spindle monitor
PLC interface diagnosis
Absolute position monitor
Adjustment
NC data sampling
Operation history
Configuration
Data input
Data output
Program erase
Program file
Program copy
Flash ATA card I/F
Auxiliary axis parameter
Auxiliary axis monitor
Tool compensation parameter Wear data (L system)
Tool length data (L system)
Tool nose data (L system)
Tool life management (L system)
Tool compensation (L system/M system)
Tool registration (L system)
Workpiece coordinate
Machining parameter
I/O parameter
Other parameters
Program MDI
Edit
APLC release screen APLC release screen
8 17 CNC MONITOR 17.2 Specifications
17
For bus connection With a single GOT, up to 2 CNCs can be switched for monitoring.
Up to 5 GOTs can simultaneously monitor a single CNC.
For Ethernet connection With a single GOT, up to 64 CNCs can be switched for monitoring.
Up to 8 GOTs can simultaneously monitor a single CNC.
For MELSECNET/10 connection GOT can monitor only the control station.
Precautions
Before using the CNC monitor Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC monitor.
Available controllers The CNC monitor can be used with CNC C70 and MELDAS C6/C64.
CNC C70 Use a CNC C70 with the system software version BND-1006W000-A0 or later.
MELDAS C6/64 Use a MELDAS C6/C64 with the system software version BND-377W010-D0 or later.
17 CNC MONITOR 17.2 Specifications 619
62
17.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the CNC monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the CNC monitor screen.
Use either of the following display methods.
Starting from the special function switch (CNC monitor) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [CNC monitor] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the controller to be monitored with the CNC monitor.
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the CNC monitor.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [ch:] key on the CNC monitor
screen.
Page 622 Operation Procedures
4. Start the CNC monitor.
The CNC monitor screen is displayed after the channel number is selected.
Communication setting window
0 17 CNC MONITOR 17.3 Operations for Display
17
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC monitor screen of the set controller can be
displayed.
Select [CNC Monitor] in [Switch Action] and select [Specify the destination to connect the screen of CNC Monitor].
For Q buss connection, input 2 or larger for [CPU No.] in [Network].
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Changing screens
At next startup, the last exited screen is displayed.
However, the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted after package data is written or the GOT is
powered on, off, or reset.
Utility or
user-created monitor screen
Start
RET
When exiting the CNC monitor function by touching RET , the last exited screen will be displayed when the CNC monitor function is started next time.
At the second or later startup
Communication setting window
At the first startup
17 CNC MONITOR 17.3 Operations for Display 621
62
17.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the display data of the CNC monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
1)[MONITOR] key
Switches the monitor screen to the position display monitor screen.
2)[DIAGN IN/OUT] key
Switches the monitor screen to the alarm diagnosis monitor screen.
3)[TOOL PARAM] key
Switches the monitor screen to the tool compensation parameter monitor screen.
4)[EDIT MDI] key
Switches the monitor screen to the program monitor screen.
5)[F0] key
Switches the monitor screen to the APLC release screen.
When the monitoring target CNC does not have the APLC release function, the screen becomes blank (Nothing is displayed
in the black screen.).
(When the screen is blank, switch the screen to the one for other functions with the keys of the function switching section.)
6)[Ch:] key
Displays the communication setting window.
7)[CNC CHG] key
For bus connection
The key does not function. (Specify the monitoring target in the communication setting window.)
For Ethernet connection
This key switches CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The target CNCs are switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
For MELSECNET/10 connection
The key does not function because the monitoring target is the control station only (switching not required).
8)[RET] key
Exits the CNC monitor and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
10)
9)
11)
Alphanumeric/symbol key Cursor moving key
12)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
2 17 CNC MONITOR 17.4 Operation Procedures
17
9)Monitor screen
The position display, alarm diagnosis, tool compensation parameter, and program functions, which are equivalent to the
MELDAS dedicated display, are available.
The graphic trace function and ladder edit function are not available.
The [Menu1] to [Menu5] keys switch the monitor screens that correspond to each item in the menu.
When the above screen is displayed, touching each key displays the following contents.
When the CNC-dedicated HMI is enabled, the message [Other display operating] and [Key operation right] menu appear.
To operate the keys with the GOT, select the [Key operation right] menu.
10)Next page key
Displays the next page when multiple pages exist on the display screen.
11)Previous page key
Displays the previous page when multiple pages exist on the display screen.
12)Software key board
Used to configure the data setting on the monitor screen.
Item Description
[Menu1] key Position
[Menu2] key Coordinate
[Menu3] key Command
[Menu4] key Program search
[Menu5] key Menu switching
Item Description
Alphanumeric and symbol keys Input alphabets (capital letters only), numbers, spaces, and symbols.
To input a symbol displayed in gray, touch the [Shift] key and then the symbol key.
Cursor movement keys Move the cursor (The repeat function is enabled.).
[INS] key Switches the insert mode.
[DEL] key Deletes one character at the cursor position.
[CAN C-B] key Deletes one block while editing the machining program.
To delete all the blocks displayed on the screen, touch the [Shift] key and then the [CAN C-B] key.
[EOB] key Inputs EOB (;) to the machining program.
[Input] key Confirms the input.
[SHIFT] key Switches the key functions.
17 CNC MONITOR 17.4 Operation Procedures 623
62
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC monitor is executed, and corrective action.
When multiple errors described below occur, a higher-priority error is displayed.
Priority Error message Description Corrective action
Support communication driver is
not installed. (CNC MONITOR)
The compatible communication driver
is not installed in the GOT.
Install the compatible communication driver in the GOT.
For bus connection
Bus(Q)
For Ethernet connection
Ethernet (MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700, Gateway
For MELSECNET/10 connection
MELSECNET/H (used in the MNET/10 mode)
The IP address of CNC to monitor
is not setup. (CNC MONITOR)
The IP address of the CNC has not
been set.
After setting the IP address of the CNC to be monitored in the
Ethernet setting of GT Designer3, write the project data to the
GOT.
Communication channel setup
error
There is no channel for
communication.
Check that the channel No. is correctly set in the communication
settings.
Higher
Lower
4 17 CNC MONITOR 17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Action
18
18 CNC DATA I/O
Not available to GT25HS-V.
Page 625 Features
Page 625 Specifications
Page 629 Operations for Display
Page 631 Operation Procedures
Page 645 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
18.1 Features With the CNC data I/O function, the GOT can copy, compare, and delete machining programs, parameters, and others in the
CNC connected to the GOT.
18.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the GOTs that support the CNC data I/O, the target CNC, and the connection types between the GOT
and the CNC.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The CNC data I/O is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection. *2 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, this function cannot be used.
Controller
CNC C70
Function Connection type between GOT and CNC
Name Description Bus connection Ethernet connection *2
CNC data I/O Data I/O between the CNC and GOT *1
Data strage
Copy, compare or delete the CNC data.
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.1 Features 625
62
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the CNC data I/O to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware Data storage is required for the CNC data I/O.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
CNC data which can be handled The following data can be input, output, or compared with the CNC data I/O.
For details of each function, refer to the manual of the CNC to be used.
*1 PLC collection data file (PLCSAMPH.CSV) and CNC collection data file (NCSAMPH.CSV) can be input when the sampling related package file (ALL.SMP) is selected.
*2 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, machining programs cannot be compared. *3 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, the parameter files in type ll cannot be compared.
Target data Description File name File unit
Input Output Compare
Machining program Machining program ALL.PRG, O_.PRG *2
Parameter Parameter ALL.PRM *3
Tool offset data Tool offset data TOOL.OFS
Workpiece offset data Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS
Common variable Common variable COMMON.VAR
Maintenance data CNC ladder USERPLC.LAD
R resister data RREG.REG
C resister data CREG.REG
T resister data TREG.REG
Operation history data TRACE.TRC
CNC sampling data NCSAMP.CSV
SRAM data files SRAM.BIN
Cycle monitor data Sampling related package file ALL.SMP
Sampling setting file SAMPLING.PRM
PLC data collection setting file FLCSAMP.CTF
PLC draw setting file PLCSAMP.MMG
PLC collection data file PLCSAMPH.CSV *1
CNC collection data file NCSAMPH.CSV *1
6 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.2 Specifications
18
Access range
For bus connection One GOT can execute the CNC data I/O on up to two CNCs by switching the CNCs.
For Ethernet connection One GOT can execute the CNC data I/O on up to 64 CNCs by switching the CNCs.
Precautions
Before using the CNC data I/O Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC data I/O.
File name and folder name
Setting a hierarchy to a folder When setting [Folder Name], enter \ between folder names.
\ is counted as one character.
Up to 20 hierarchy levels can be created.
Example)
[Folder Name]: PROJECT1\ABC
Number of characters set for folder and file names The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below.
Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters.
The user can set the folder name and file name only.
(Other than the folder and file names are automatically set.)
PROJECT1
ABC
Max. 78 characters
Folder name .PRG\A :\
Extension (4 characters)
Drive name (1 character)
(1 character)(2 characters)
File name
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.2 Specifications 627
62
Characters which can be used in folder names and file names Character strings which can be used in folder names and file names
The following character strings can be used.
Capital of one-byte alphanumeric characters
Symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}.)
A one-byte space cannot be used.
Character strings which cannot be used in folder names and file names
The following character strings cannot be used regardless of capital or small letters.
COM1 to COM9
LPT1 to LPT9
AUX
CON
NUL
PRN
CLOCK$
Folder names and file names which cannot be used
The following folder names and file names cannot be used.
Folder name starting with G2
Folder and file names starting with . (period) or \
Folder and file names ending with . (period) or \
Folder and file named as only . (one period) or .. (two periods)
The following folder and file names are not displayed correctly.
Multi-byte code
Kanji, hiragana, katakana, one-byte katakana
Machining program edit protection When the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the edit lock B and C are enabled, the data I/O is restricted.
Comparison can be performed even though the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the edit lock B and C are enabled.
However, when the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, cancel the data protection key 1, 2, and 3 and edit lock B
and C before performing the comparison.
For the data protection key 1 to 3 and edit lock B and C, refer to the following.
C70 Series Instruction Manual
Changing CNC file names When outputting a file in the CNC and changing the file name, do not change the extension of a maintenance data file.
If the extension is changed, the maintenance data file is not recognized.
Page 631 Displayed contents
Highlight display in the comparison error detail window The comparison of parameter files is performed not only for the parameter values but also the values of the format.
Therefore, the part which is not a parameter value may be highlighted when the values are different between the data storage
side and CNC side.
Page 635 Compare
8 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.2 Specifications
18
18.3 Operations for Display
Start operation of the CNC data I/O The following explains how to display the CNC data I/O screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the CNC data I/O screen.
Use either of the following display methods.
Starting from the special function switch (CNC data I/O) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [CNC data I/O] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the CNC connected to the GOT.
If [] is touched to close the communication setting window without setting a channel number, the channel number is set to [1].
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the CNC data I/O.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the CNC data I/O
screen.
Page 631 Operation Procedures
Communication setting window
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.3 Operations for Display 629
63
4. The CNC data I/O starts after the channel number is selected.
Start operation using the special function switch The CNC data I/O can be started using special function switches.
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC data I/O screen of the set controller can be
displayed.
Selecting [CNC Data I/O] in [Switch Action], and checking [Specify the destination to connect the screen of CNC Data I/O]
For Q buss connection, input 2 or larger for [CPU No.] in [Network].
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Changing screens
Utility or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Rtn
For exiting the CNC data I/O by touching Rtn, the last exited screen is displayed when the CNC data I/O starts next time.
At the second or later startup
Communication setting window
At the first startup
0 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.3 Operations for Display
18
18.4 Operation Procedures
Displayed contents This section describes the display data of the CNC data I/O list screen and the key functions displayed on the screen.
1)Channel key
Displays the communication setting window.
2)[CNC Chg] key
This key switches CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The switching order differs depending on the connection type used.
For bus connection
The monitoring target is switched in order of the module number.
For Ethernet connection
The monitoring target is switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
3)[Rtn] key
Exits the CNC data I/O and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
4)CNC device name
Each connection type displays different contents.
For bus connection
Displays the CPU number and module name.
For Ethernet connection
Displays the station number and module name.
5)[Function] key
Displays the function selection window. Select a function to be executed.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[Copy]
Copies a file between the CNC and data storage.
Page 633 Copy
[Compare]
Compares files between the CNC and data storage.
Page 635 Compare
[Delete]
Deletes a file in the CNC or data storage.
Page 638 Delete
1) 2) 3)
9)
6)
7)
6)
7)
8)
5)
14)
13)12)
15)
10)
11)
4)
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 631
63
[Create a directory]
Creates a directory in the data storage.
Page 640 Creating a directory
[USB Driver Stop]
Stops the USB drive selected in the [Device] key.
6)[Device] key
Displays the device selection window. Select the target to which the function selected with the [Function] key is executed.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[CNC]
[A:Standard SD card]
[B:USB drive]
[E:USB drive]
[F:USB drive]
[G:USB drive]
7)[Directory] key
The operations and display contents differ depending on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [CNC] is selected
The CNC data selection window is displayed. Select the target to which the function selected with the [Function] key is
executed.
When an item other than [CNC] is selected
The [Directory] key cannot be touched.
The directory of the file selected in the list is displayed on the right side of the [Directory] key.
Up to 28 characters can be displayed.
8)[File name]
Displays the file name selected in the list.
9)Status display
Displays the information of the item selected with the [Device] key.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [CNC] is selected
[Entry], [Remain]:
Displays the number of the programs registered as the user's machining programs and the remaining number of the programs
that can be registered.
[Character], [Remain]:
Displays the number of the characters registered in the user's machining programs and the remaining number of the
characters that can be registered.
The remaining number is displayed in increments of 250 characters.
When an item other than [CNC] is selected
[Used], [Remain]:
Displays the used space and the available space of the data storage.
10)List
Displays files of the item selected with the [Device] key.
When an item other than [CNC] is selected with the [Device] key, the directory is displayed with < >.
Touching < > displays the files in the touched directory.
Touching <...> displays the files in the upper directory.
11)Scroll key
Scrolls up or down the contents in the list in increments of 10 or 50 items.
12)[Area chg] key
Switches the setting targets (frame on the left side of the screen) up and down.
The files in the directory in the frame are displayed in the list.
When [Delete] is selected with the [Function] key, the setting targets cannot be switched.
13)[Refresh] key
Updates the list.
2 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
14)[Disp Filename] key
Changes the display contents in the list each time the key is touched.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [CNC] is selected
The contents can be switched only when [Machine program] is selected with the [Directory] key.
The following shows the contents to be switched.
When an item other than [CNC] is selected
The following shows the contents to be switched.
15)[Exec] key
Executes the settings.
Copy Files can be copied between [CNC] of the monitoring target and data storage.
Select a copy source and copy destination as follows.
When [CNC] is selected for the copy source, only the data storage can be selected for the copy destination.
Also, when a data storage is selected for the copy source, only [CNC] can be selected for the copy destination.
The following describes the copy procedure.
Example)
When copying the machining program [1.PRG] of [CNC] into [A:Standard SD card]
1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
2. Touch the [Copy] key on the function selection window.
File name and comment File name and number of characters
File name File name and file size File name and date and hour
Copy source
Copy destination
1. 2.
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 633
63
3. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy source target.
4. Touch the [Device] key of the copy source target to display the device selection window.
5. Select [CNC] in the device selection window.
6. Select the copy source file [1.PRG] in the list.
7. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy destination target.
8. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.
3.
5. 4.
6.
7.
4 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
9. Select [A:Standard SD card] in the device selection window.
10. Touch the [Exec] key to display the copy confirmation window.
11. Touching the [OK] key copies [1.PRG] to [A:Standard SD card].
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed.
Compare Files in the data storage can be compared with the files in the CNC of the monitoring target.
The following describes the comparison procedure.
Example)
When comparing the file [ALL.PRG] in the data storage with a file in the CNC
1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
2. Touch the [Compare] key on the function selection window.
8. 9.
10.
11.
1.
2.
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 635
63
3. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.
4. Touch [A:Standard SD card] on the device selection window.
5. Select the file to be compared from the list.
6. Touch the [Exec] key to start the comparison.
When the files match
A completion message is displayed.
When the files do not match
The comparison error detail window is displayed.
Page 637 Comparison error detail window
When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D2, the comparison error detail window does not appear.
3. 4.
5.
6.
6 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
Comparison error detail window The line number of the mismatched data is displayed.
The method for displaying line numbers differs between the GOT side and CNC side.
GOT side
A head line (0 number) is displayed as the first line.
CNC side
A head line (0 number) is displayed as the zeroth line since the head line (0 number) is treated as a file name.
1)Compared file information (GOT side)
Displays the device name on the GOT side, compared file name, and line number of the mismatched data.
2)Compared file information (CNC side)
Displays the device name on the CNC side, compared file name, and line number of the mismatched data.
The line number is displayed only when the machining programs are compared.
3)Details display
Displays the contents of the line which is found to be inconsistent in comparison.
The first inconsistent character is highlighted.
Up to 250 characters can be displayed in a single line.
However, characters are not highlighted in the following cases.
The first inconsistent character is the 251st character or later.
The corresponding line does not exist in the comparison source file or comparison target file.
4)[Continue] key
Closes the window and continues the comparison.
5)[Cancel] key
Closes the window and stops the comparison.
1)
2) 3)
4) 5)
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 637
63
Delete Files stored in [CNC] of the monitoring target or the data storage can be deleted.
The following describes the deletion procedure.
Example)
Deleting the machining program files [1.PRG], [2.PRG], and [3.PRG] of [CNC]
1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
2. Touch the [Delete] key on the function selection window.
3. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.
4. Touch the [CNC] key on the device selection window.
5. Select the file [1.PRG] at the head of the list to delete.
To delete one file only, follow the procedure in Step 7.
1.
2.
3. 4.
8 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
6. Select the file [3.PRG] in the list to delete.
Then, the files [1.PRG], [2.PRG], and [3.PRG] are all selected.
In addition, when [ALL.PRG] is selected, only [ALL.PRG] is selected.
7. Touch the [Exec] key to display the deletion confirmation window.
8. Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected files.
When the deletion is completed, a completion message is displayed.
Precaution for deleting files
When [ALL.PRG] displayed in the list is deleted, files to be deleted differ depending on the selected [Device].
For [CNC]
When [ALL.PRG] is deleted, all files displayed in the list are deleted.
For data storage
When [ALL.PRG] is deleted, only [ALL.PRG] is deleted.
7.
8.
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 639
64
Creating a directory Creates a directory in the data storage.
The following describes the procedure for creating a directory.
Example)
Creating the directory "SAMPLE01" in [A:Standard SD card]
1. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy source target.
For the copy source target, refer to the following.
Page 633 Copy
2. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.
3. Touch [A:Standard SD card] on the device selection window.
4. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
5. Touch the [Create a directory] key on the function selection window to display the key window.
6. Input SAMPLE01 on the key window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
0 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
7. Touch the [ENTER] key to determine the directory name and close the key window.
Key operation using a USB keyboard is also available.
Page 641 Inputting characters using a USB keyboard
8. The list is updated, and the SAMPLE01 directory is created.
When the directory creation is completed, a completion message is displayed.
Inputting characters using a USB keyboard When the key window is displayed, a USB keyboard can be used for key input.
For the corresponding keys, refer to the following.
For how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Key Description
Characters, numbers, symbols Press the key on the USB keyboard corresponding to the key displayed in the key window to input it into
the input value display area.
Shift + Delete Deletes all characters in the input value display area.
Backspace Deletes one character to the left of the cursor in the input value display area.
Delete Deletes one character to the right of the cursor in the input value display area.
Esc Closes the key window without reflecting the values in the input value display area.
Enter Closes the key window after reflecting the values in the input value display area.
Input value display area
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 641
64
Changing a file name when outputting the file When a file is copied to the data storage, the file name in the copy destination can be changed.
The following describes the procedure for changing the file name at the file output.
Example)
Changing the machining program name [ALL.PRG] of [CNC] to [SAMPLE.PRG] and outputting the program to [A:Standard
SD card]
1. Touch the [Area chg] key to switch the frame to the copy destination target.
For the copy destination target, refer to the following.
Page 633 Copy
Set [A:Standard SD card] for the copy destination device.
2. Touch the [Device] key to display the device selection window.
Select the following items using the [Device] key and [Directory] key of the copy source.
[Device] key: [CNC]
[Directory] key: [Machine program]
3. Touch [ALL.PRG] in the list and the [Exec] key to display the copy confirmation window.
2.
1.
1.
2.
2 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
4. Touch the [Name Change] key on the copy confirmation window to display the key window.
Touch the [AC] key to delete the existing file name from the input value display area.
Key operation using a USB keyboard is also available.
Page 641 Inputting characters using a USB keyboard
5. Input "SAMPLE.PRG".
Touch the [ENTER] key. The key window closes and the copy confirmation window appears.
Touching the [OK] key starts copying the file with the new file name.
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed.
Input value display area
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures 643
64
Contents displayed in the list The following describes the file names displayed in the list of the CNC data I/O screen.
*1 When the base specifications parameter of #1166 fixpro is set to 1, the fixed cycle program is the target data. When the CNC has machining programs, ALL.PRG is displayed at the top of the list.
*2 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D1, machining programs cannot be compared. *3 When the software version of the CNC is earlier than D1, the parameter files in type ll cannot be compared.
Target data Description File name displayed in the list
Machining program *1*2 Machining program ALL.PRG, O_.PRG
Parameter *3 Parameter ALL.PRM
Tool offset data Tool offset data TOOL.OFS
Workpiece offset data Workpiece offset data WORK.OFS
Common variable Common variable COMMON.VAR
Maintenance data CNC ladder USERPLC.LAD
R resister data RREG.REG
C resister data CREG.REG
T resister data TREG.REG
Operation history data TRACE.TRC
CNC sampling data NCSAMP.CSV
SRAM data files SRAM.BIN
Cycle monitor data Sampling related package file ALL.SMP
Sampling setting file SAMPLING.PRM
PLC data collection setting file FLCSAMP.CTF
PLC draw setting file PLCSAMP.MMG
PLC collection data file PLCSAMPH.CSV
CNC collection data file NCSAMPH.CSV
4 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.4 Operation Procedures
18
18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC data I/O is executed, and the corrective actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
Communication error The CNC is powered OFF, the cable is disconnected,
or the connected controller is not a CNC.
The communication failed when a communication
driver is selected in the communication setting
window, or when the [CNC Chg] button is touched.
Correct the connection and settings.
Turn on the CNC again.
Unable to exec : PLC built in CNC
running
The PLC CPU built in the CNC is in operation. Stop the operation of the PLC CPU built in the CNC, and
execute the CNC data I/O again.
CNC is busy The CNC is busy because it is executing the other input/
output.
Please wait a moment and execute it again.
Failed to stop USB drive The GOT fails to stop the USB drive. Check the USB memory.
Unable to exec : Program running The GOT cannot execute the CNC data I/O because the
CNC is in operation.
Stop the CNC operation, and execute the CNC data I/O
again.
Out of memory The size of the data to be written exceeds the CNC
memory capacity.
Reserve enough space of the memory by operations
such as deleting unnecessary machining programs, and
then execute the CNC data I/O again.
The same name exists The directory name cannot be created because the
same name already exists.
Enter another name.
In sampling The CNC data I/O cannot be executed because
sampling is in execution.
Stop sampling and execute the CNC data I/O again.
File not found The copy source file does not exist. Correct the settings, and then execute the CNC data I/O
again.
The file cannot be compared The file cannot be used for comparison because of any
of the following reasons:
The file is not the target of the comparison function.
The software of the CNC does not support the
comparison function.
Check the file type and select a file again.
Page 626 CNC data which can be handled
Update the software version of the CNC.
Timeout The GOT fails to communicate with the CNC. Check the connection.
Communication Channel Setup Error. The specified channel does not exist. Correct the communication settings.
Can't create a directory The directory cannot be created. Directories cannot be created when the device is set
to the CNC.
The data storage is not ready to write.
The number 99 exists in the serial number when a
sampling related package file (ALL.SMP) is output.
Example)
A directory named SMP14041999 exists on April 19th,
2014.
Directory illegal The directory cannot be displayed because it is invalid. Correct the directory settings, and then execute the CNC
data I/O again.
Data protect The data is protected. Check that the data protection key and the edit lock are
set to be invalid, and execute the CNC data I/O again.
No. of registration over The maximum number of registration allowed for
programs is exceeded.
Delete unnecessary machining programs, and execute
the CNC data I/O again.
Path is too long The directory name cannot be created because the path
is too long.
Reconsider the directory/file name.
Too many files Files cannot be displayed because the number of files
and directories in the data storage is too large.
Reduce the number of files/directories to 1024 or less.
File is not specified The [Exec] key is pressed even though a file is not
specified.
Specify a file, and execute the CNC data I/O again.
Some error found in file system An error occurred in the file system. A file system error occurred.
Format the NC memory.
Can not write file The file cannot be written to the copy destination device. Check if the copy destination device is ready for data
writing.
TRACE.TRC and NCSAMP.CSV cannot be copied to
the CNC.
Can not write file
Format Error
The file cannot be written because of invalid parameter
formats.
Check the parameter formats.
Can not write file
Range Over
The file cannot be written because of invalid parameter
values.
Check the parameter values.
18 CNC DATA I/O 18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 645
64
Can not write file
In sampling
The file cannot be written to the CNC because sampling
is in execution.
Write the file to the CNC after sampling is completed.
Can not write file
Can't set superposition waveform
The superposition waveform cannot be set because the
parameters of the wave type 1 and the wave type 2 are
not matched when the wave type 2 is input. For
example, [Superposition] is set to [OFF] in the
parameters of the cycle monitor.
Correct the parameter settings and input data.
Can not read out file The copy source file cannot be read. Check if the copy source device is ready for data
reading.
Filename illegal The file name is invalid. Check the file name, and execute the CNC data I/O
again.
Memory Card not exist No data storage is inserted into the GOT. Check that the data storage is inserted into the GOT.
The Ethernet settings of the monitoring
target CNC are not correct.
The CNC cannot be connected because the combination
of N/W No. and station No., which are specified in the
project data created with GT Designer3, does not exist in
the Ethernet settings.
Correct the settings of the special function switch and
Ethernet.
Error Other errors Turn off the GOT and CNC. Check data in the data
storage and the connection status. Then, execute the
CNC data I/O again.
Error message Description Corrective action
6 18 CNC DATA I/O 18.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
19
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT
Not available to GT25HS-V.
Page 647 Features
Page 647 Specifications
Page 649 Operations for Display
Page 652 Operation Procedures
Page 658 Error Messages and Corrective actions
19.1 Features The machining program and MDI program of the CNC connected with the GOT can be edited.
19.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the GOT for which the CNC machining program edit is available, the target CNC, and the connection
type between the GOT and CNC.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The CNC machining program edit is available on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Available, : Unavailable)
*1 Applicable only with the Display I/F connection. *2 When the CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module is used, this function cannot be used.
Controller
CNC C70
Function Connection type between GOT and CNC
Name Description Bus connection Ethernet connection *2
CNC machining program edit Editing CNC matching programs *1
Edit the machining programs
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.1 Features 647
64
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the CNC machining program edit to the
GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Space for the system application (Extended function) To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Access range
For bus connection With a single GOT, up to 2 CNCs can be switched for editing processing programs.
For Ethernet connection With a single GOT, up to 64 CNCs can be switched for editing processing programs.
Precautions
Before using the CNC machining program edit Carefully read the manual of the connected CNC and fully understand the operating procedures before using the CNC
machining program edit.
Machining program edit protection When the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C are enabled, the machining program edit is restricted.
Even when the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C are enabled, the machining program can be opened.
For the data protection key 3, edit lock B and C, refer to the following.
C70 Series Instruction Manual
Software version of the CNC used (: Available, : Unavailable)
Software version of CNC Function
Display of the machining program list Machining program edit
BND-1006W000-D6 or earlier
BND-1006W000-D6 or later
8 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.2 Specifications
19
19.3 Operations for Display
Start operation of the CNC machining program edit The following explains how to display the CNC machining program edit screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the power to the GOT.
2. Display the CNC machining program edit screen.
Use either of the following display methods.
Starting from the special function switch (CNC machining program edit) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
After the utility is displayed, touch [Monitor] [CNC machining program edit] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the CNC connected to the GOT.
If [] is touched to close the communication setting window without setting a channel number, the channel number is set to [1].
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the CNC machining
program edit.
For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the CNC machining
program edit screen.
Page 652 Operation Procedures
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.3 Operations for Display 649
65
4. The CNC machining program edit starts after the channel number is selected.
Start operation using the special function switch The CNC machining program edit can be started using special function switches.
If a special function switch with the following settings is touched, the CNC machining program edit screen of the set controller
can be displayed.
Selecting [CNC Manufacturing Program Editor] in [Switch Action], and checking [Specify the destination to connect the screen
of CNC Manufacturing Program Editor]
For Q buss connection, input 2 or larger for [CPU No.] in [Network].
Operation at start differs depending on the setting contents of the special function switch.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
0 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.3 Operations for Display
19
Changing screens
Utility or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Rtn
At the second or later startup
Communication setting window
At the first startup
When exiting CNC machining program edit by touching Rtn, the last exited screen will be displayed at the next startup of CNC machining program edit.
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.3 Operations for Display 651
65
19.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the screen and software keyboard used in the CNC machining program edit.
For how to edit machining programs and MDI programs, refer to the following.
C70 Series Instruction Manual
List screen The following describes the display data of the CNC machining program edit list screen and the functions of the keys
displayed on the screen.
1)Channel key
Displays the communication setting window.
2)[CNC Chg] key
Switches the CNCs for monitoring when multiple CNCs are connected.
The switching order differs depending on the connection type used.
For bus connection
The monitoring target is switched in order of the module number.
For Ethernet connection
The monitoring target is switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer3.
3)[Rtn] key
Exits the CNC machining program edit and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
4)CNC device name
The display contents differ according to the connection type.
For bus connection
Displays the CPU number and module name.
For Ethernet connection
Displays the station number and module name.
5)Software key board
Used to input the machining program name.
Inputting [.PRG] in the CNC machining program name is not required.
For details of the software key board, refer to the following.
Page 656 Software key board
6)Capacity
Item Description
[Entry], [Remain] Displays the number of the programs registered as the user's machining programs and the remaining
number of the programs that can be registered.
[Character], [Remain] Displays the number of characters registered in the user's machining programs and the remaining number
of characters that can be registered.
1) 2) 3)
4)6)
5) 7)
8) 9)
10) 11)
2 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures
19
7)Machining program list
Displays the CNC machining program list.
The machining programs are displayed in ascending order of the program numbers.
Machining programs are not displayed correctly if the program comment contains multibyte codes (such as shift JIS codes).
8)Scroll key
Scrolls up or down the contents of the machining program list in increments of 10 or 50 items.
9)Message
Displays the guide or error messages.
For the details of error messages, refer to the following.
Page 658 Error Messages and Corrective actions
10)Input section
Input a machining program name.
11)Menu
Item Description
[Open] key Opens an existing machining program.
When a machining program is selected or a machining program name is input in the input section and the
[INPUT] key is touched, the machining program is opened.
Jumping to the block number of a sequence number is enabled at the same time as the machining program
is opened.
Input characters in the "Machining program name/Sequence number/Block number" format into the input
section, and touch the [INPUT] key.
Example)
When jumping into the position of the sequence number 110 and block number 0 of 123.PRG
Input 123/110/0 or 123/110 in the input section and touch the [INPUT] key.
[New] key Creates a new machining program.
When a machining program name is input into the input section and the [INPUT] key is touched, the new
machining program opens.
[Delete] key Deletes an existing machining program.
When a machining program is selected or a machining program name is input in the input section and the
[INPUT] key is touched, the confirmation dialog box is displayed.
Touch the [OK] key to delete an existing machining program.
[MDI] key Opens an MDI program.
The screen is switched to the edit screen to start the MDI program edit.
[Refresh] key Updates and displays the program list.
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures 653
65
Edit screen
1)[Rtn] key
Exits the CNC machining program edit and returns to the monitor screen or the utility of the GOT.
2)CNC device name
The display contents differ according to the connection type.
For bus connection
Displays the CPU number and module name.
For Ethernet connection
Displays the station number and module name.
3)Software key board
Used to edit the program.
For details of the software key board, refer to the following.
Page 656 Software key board
A key code can be sent with the USB keyboard.
For information on how to input a key code with the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
Page 657 Inputting characters using a USB keyboard
4)Program name
Displays the name of the edited program.
The program name is displayed as MDI.PRG when an MDI program is edited.
5)System name display
Displays a system name when the MDI program is displayed and the MDI setting system can be switched.
6)Program comment
Displays the comment of the edited program.
No program comment is displayed for MDI programs.
The following program comments are not displayed correctly.
A comment containing multibyte codes
A comment containing Kanji, hiragana, katakana, or one-byte katakana
7)Editing mode
Indicates that the program is being edited.
This item appears only when the program is being edited.
1)
2)
3)
4) 5) 6)7) 9) 10)8)
11)
12) 13)
15) 14)
4 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures
19
8)MDI status
Displays the status of the MDI when the MDI program is opened.
No MDI setting
Indicates that the MDI program cannot be operated.
To complete the setting, move the cursor to any position of the program, and then touch the [INPUT] key.
MDI setting completed
Indicates that the MDI program can be operated.
The background color of the set line number becomes light blue.
When you start editing, the background color disappears.
MDI in operation
Indicates that the MDI program is being operated.
9)Insert or overwrite
Indicates that the insert mode or overwrite mode is being selected.
10)Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the editing area up or down by 10 or 50 items.
11)Line number
Displays the line numbers.
Start line: Displays the display start line in the editing eara.
Line number: Displays the last four digits of the line numbers.
12)Editing area
Used to display and edit a program.
The display size is 22 lines 40 characters.
When the editing area is touched, the cursor moves to the touched position.
When a position with no character is touched, the cursor moves to the nearest position where characters can be input.
When any key on the menu is on, touching the editing area turns off the key.
However, the cursor moves to the beginning of the inverted characters during the string search.
13)Message
Displays the guide or error messages.
For the details of error messages, refer to the following.
Page 658 Error Messages and Corrective actions
14)Input section
Whether inputting characters is available depends on the mode of each menu.
15)Menu
Item Description
[Program Comment] key Used to input the comment of the machining program.
When a comment is input into the input section and the [INPUT] key is touched, the input value is
reflected.Up to 18 characters can be input as a program comment.
A comment cannot be input into the MDI program.
[Line Jump] key Used to move to a specified line.
When you enter a line number in the input area and touch the [INPUT] key, the specified line is displayed at
the start of the editing area.
When you enter a line number that does not exist in the program, E, or EOR in the input area, you jump to
the last line.
[NB Jump] key Used to move to the block number of a sequence number.
When you enter characters in the form of "Sequence number/Block number" in the input area and touch
the [INPUT] key, the specified block is displayed at the start of the editing area.
When a block number is not input, 0 is applied as the block number.
Example)
When jumping into the position of the sequence number 110 and block number 0
Enter "110/0" or "110", and then touch the [INPUT] key.
[String Search] key Searches for the text and moves to it.
When you enter the text in the input area and touch the [INPUT] key, the text is searched for from the
position where the cursor is placed.
If the search reaches the end of the program without locating the target text, the search continues from the
start of the program.
Up to 11 characters can be searched for.
[System Change] key Switches the system to configure the MDI setting.
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures 655
65
Software key board
1)Alphanumeric and symbol keys
Used to input alphabets, numbers, spaces, and symbols.
Symbols shown in gray can be input when the [SHIFT] key is turned on.
2)Cursor movement keys
Moves the cursor.
3)Left tab key
The key operation differs according to the cursor position.
When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
The cursor moves to the beginning of a word.
When the cursor is placed at the beginning of a word, the cursor moves to the beginning of the previous word.
When the cursor is displayed in the input area
The cursor moves to the first character.
4)Right tab key
The key operation differs according to the cursor position.
When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
The cursor moves to the beginning of the next word.
When the cursor is displayed in the input area
The cursor moves to the last character.
[MDI Register] key Registers the MDI program as the CNC machining program.
To perform the MDI registration, enter a machining program number in the input area, and then touch the
[INPUT] key.
An MDI program can be registered only when the program is opened.
[INSERT] key Switches between the insert mode (ON) and the overwrite mode (OFF).
ON: Insert mode
OFF: Overwrite mode
[To Lists] key Switches the screen to the list screen.
Item Description
[EOB] key Inputs EOB (;).
Item Description
1)
2)
4)
3) 5) 6) 7)
5) 6) 7)
8) 9) 8) 9)
1)
[SHIFT] OFF [SHIFT] ON
2)
4)
3)
6 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures
19
5)[C.B] key, [CAN] key
The [CAN] key is enabled when the [SHIFT] key is turned on.
The key operation differs according to the cursor position.
6)[DEL] key
Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
7)[BS] key
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
8)[SHIFT] key
Switches between different character sets in the display.
9)[INPUT] key
The key operation differs according to the cursor position.
When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
Saves the contents being edited during the machining program edit.
Saves the contents being edited and completes the setting during the MDI program edit.
When the cursor is displayed in the input area
Confirms the entry and executes it.
Inputting characters using a USB keyboard A USB keyboard and software keyboard may have different key operations.
For how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Item Description
[C.B] key When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
Deletes all characters of the block at the cursor position.
When the cursor is displayed in the input area
Deletes all characters in the input area.
[CAN] key When the cursor is displayed in the editing area
Deletes all characters on the displayed page.
When the cursor is displayed in the input area
Deletes all characters in the input area.
Key USB keyboard operation
Shift+Tab
Tab
Shift+Delete, Home
Shift+Home
Enter
Shift+Page Up
Shift+Page Down
Page Up, Page Down
Menu List screen
F1: Open, F2: New, F3: Delete, F4: MDI, F9: Refresh
Edit screen
F1: Program comment, F2: Line No. jump, F3: NB jump, F4: String search, F5: MDI registration, F7: System switching, F8: INSERT,
F9: Move to the list
No corresponding key
19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.4 Operation Procedures 657
65
19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC machining program edit is executed, and the corrective
actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
CNC version not compatible The CNC version does not support the CNC machining
program edit.
Update the CNC version.
Cannot execute except in MDI mode The parameter value set for the MDI setting lock (#1144
mdlkof) is 0 (MDI setting disabled). The MDI setting
cannot be configured unless in the MDI mode.
Change the operation mode to the MDI mode, or correct
the parameter setting.
Unable to execute: Program running The CNC machining program edit cannot be executed
for the machining program being run.
Stop running the machining program, and execute the
CNC machining program edit again.
NB not found A block number that does not exist is specified for the
NB jump.
Input the correct block number.
Program not designated The INPUT key is touched before the machining
program is specified.
Specify the machining program, and touch the [INPUT]
key.
Program does not exist The machining program that does not exist is specified. Input the correct machining program number.
Program No. duplicate The specified machining program number cannot be
registered since the same number already exists.
Input the correct machining program number.
Program No. illegal The specified machining program number is invalid. Input the correct machining program number.
Memory over The memory capacity is exceeded. Reserve enough space of the memory by operations
such as deleting unnecessary machining programs, and
then execute the CNC machining program edit again.
Data protected Since even one of the data protection key 1, 2, and 3,
and the edit lock B and C is valid, the CNC machining
program edit cannot be executed.
Check that the data protection key 1, 2, and 3, and the
edit lock B and C are set to be invalid, and execute the
CNC machining program edit again.
No. of registrations over The maximum number of registration allowed for
programs is exceeded.
Delete the unnecessary machining programs, and
execute the CNC machining program edit again.
Input error The data is input in the incorrect format. Input the data in the correct format.
An error found in file system An error occurred in the file system. Format the CNC memory.
Cannot write file A machining program cannot be written. Format the CNC memory.
Cannot read file A machining program cannot be read. Format the CNC memory.
Program display locked The machining program cannot be displayed due to the
program display lock C (#1122pglk_c).
Check the parameter values.
Unable to execute: Editing While the machining program is edited, the change of
the program comment, NB jump, string search, MDI
registration, and the scrolling outside the editing area
cannot be executed.
Cancel the editing mode, and execute those operations
again.
Unable to execute: Another device is
connecting
The editing screen is displayed on the monitored CNC
side.
Switch the editing screen to another screen on the
monitored CNC side.
The same program is displayed on the other GOT. Close the program on the other GOT.
While the machining program is edited by the other
device, the GOT is turned on and immediately the same
program is attempted to be opened.
After 60 seconds have passed since the GOT was
turned on, open the program again.
The number of machining programs opened by the
target CNC has reached the maximum number allowed
(10 programs).
Close the program on the other GOT.
The other GOT is executing the file access, including the
input/output and verification of the target file.
After the process is completed on the other GOT,
execute CNC machining program edit again.
No. of characters over The maximum number of characters allowed for the
input area is exceeded.
Reduce the input characters, and then execute the CNC
machining program edit again.
Time-out The GOT fails to communicate with the CNC. Check the connection.
Communication error The GOT fails to establish the initial communication with
the CNC.
Check that the CNC is powered on, the cable is
connected, and the connection target is the CNC.
Configure the proper connection and settings.
Error Other errors Turn off the GOT and the CNC, and check the
connection.
Check the format of the CNC memory, and execute the
CNC machining program edit again.
8 19 CNC MACHINING PROGRAM EDIT 19.5 Error Messages and Corrective actions
20
20 CNC MONITOR 2
Page 660 Features
Page 661 Specifications
Page 664 Operations for Display
Page 666 Operating Procedure
Page 673 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
20 CNC MONITOR 2 659
66
20.1 Features The CNC monitor 2 function enables you to monitor the information required for the operation, setup, diagnosis, and
maintenance of the CNC C80 connected to the GOT. You can also use this function to set and input or output the data of the
CNC C80.
The following screenshots are from GT27-S or GT25-S.
Page 670 Using a USB keyboard
Monitor screen Edit screen
Alarm screen Input/Output screen
Menu list screen
0 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.1 Features
20
20.2 Specifications Page 661 System configuration
Page 663 Access range
Page 663 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the GOTs that support the CNC monitor 2, the target controllers, and the connection types between the
GOT and the controller.
For connection type settings, precautions regarding the communication unit/cable, and connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The following shows the GOT models that support the CNC monitor 2.
GT27
GT25 (except GT25-W)
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 Available only when the Display I/F connection is used.
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the CNC monitor 2 to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Space for the system application (Extended function) To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB keyboard and USB mouse are usable.
A software keyboard does not appear on GT27-V and GT25-V.
For these models, use a USB keyboard instead of the software keyboard.
Page 670 Using a USB keyboard
Controller
CNC C80 (R16NCCPU)
Function Connection type between the GOT and CNC C80
Name Description Ethernet connection *1
CNC monitor 2 Operates and monitors CNC C80, inputs and outputs data, and
edits machining programs.
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.2 Specifications 661
66
CNC C80 screens that can be monitored With the CNC monitor 2, you can view screens and perform operations as shown below.
For the details of the following screens, refer to the manual of the CNC C80.
Type Screen No. Screen name Description
Monitor
screen
100 Monitor screen Display operation information such as the axis counter, speed display, and M, S, T, B
commands.
101 Operation search Call a program for automatic operation.
102 Restart search Restart machining from a selected block.
103 Edit (Operation search) Edit the searched machining program.
106 Counter displays Display the counter for all axes. The type of the counter is selectable from the menu.
107 Tool offset Set and display tool compensation data.
108 Work offset Set and display the workpiece coordinate offset.
109 Counter set Set the relative position counter to an arbitrary value.
110 Manual numerical value command Set and display each command for the spindle function, miscellaneous function, tool
function, and 2nd miscellaneous function.
111 Modal display Display the execution modal value of the machining program.
112 Program tree Display the program, MDI interrupt, and user macro call in the nesting structure.
113 Integrated time Set and display the integrated time (such as date, time, power-on time).
114 Common variable Set and display the details of common variables.
115 Local variable Specify a nesting level of the subprogram control, and display local variables.
116 Buffer correction Apply a block stop and correct or change the next command during the automatic
operation or MDI operation.
118 Origin set Set or cancel the origin.
119 Verify stop Register a verification stop position where a single block stop is applied.
120 Load meter Display the spindle load and Z axis load in meter.
121 Spindle standby Display the spindle tool number and the standby tool number.
123 All spindles' rotation speed Display the commanded rotation speed and actual rotation speed of all spindles.
Setup screen 201 Setup screen (Tool offset) Configure the tool and workpiece related settings.
The tool compensation amount screen is selected.
Set and display tool compensation data.
202 Tool measurement Measure the length and radius of a tool manually, and set the data as the tool offset
amount.
203 Tool registration Register a tool number according to the magazine pot, spindle, and standby position.
204 Tool life management Set and display tool life management data including the tool usage conditions.
205 Work coordinate system offset Set and display the workpiece coordinate offset.
206 Workpiece measurement Measure the face, hole center, and width center of a workpiece manually, and set the
data as the coordinate system offset amount.
207 User parameters Set and display user parameters.
208 MDI program editing Display and edit the MDI programs in the NC memory.
209 Counter set Set the relative position counter to an arbitrary value.
210 Manual numerical value command Set and display each command for the spindle function, miscellaneous function, tool
function, and 2nd miscellaneous function.
213 Tool management Set and display the tool data used for preventing machine collisions.
217 Machining condition selection I Define multiple sets of high-accuracy parameters according to machining applications
and processes.
218 Barrier data Set and display the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier.
(Only for the L system)
Edit screen 301 Edit screen Edit (add, delete, or change) programs, and create new ones.
305 Input/Output (Edit screen) Perform data input or output between the NC memory and an external I/O device.
2 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.2 Specifications
20
Access range One GOT can monitor up to 64 CNC C80 modules by switching between them.
Up to eight GOTs can simultaneously monitor one CNC C80 module.
Precautions
Before using the CNC monitor 2 Carefully read the manual of the connected CNC C80 and fully understand the operating procedures before using the CNC
monitor 2.
CNC C80 parameters that affect the CNC monitor 2 Some CNC C80 parameters affect the display and operation of the CNC monitor 2.
Example)
For the details of CNC C80 parameters, refer to the manual of the CNC C80.
Diagnosis
screen
401 Diagnosis screen (System
Configuration)
Set and display NC diagnosis data.
The configuration screen is selected.
Display the configurations of hardware and software (software No. and version).
402 Option display Display the details of the options registered to the CNC.
403 I/F diagnosis Set and display the input and output signals of a ladder program.
404 Drive monitor Display drive diagnosis information (about the servo axis, spindle, and power supply
unit).
405 NC memory diagnosis Set and display NC internal data.
406 Alarm List the current active alarms and their messages.
411 Self diagnosis Display the hardware status and operation stop status.
412 Data sampling Set the sampling parameters, and sample the NC internal data.
Maintenance
screen
501 Maintenance screen Format the NC memory, and set the absolute position parameters.
502 Parameter Set and display the user parameters and machine parameters.
503 Input/Output (Maintenance
screen)
Perform data input or output between the NC memory and an external I/O device.
554 Absolute position setting Set the absolute position of servo axes (NC axes and PLC axes).
556 Servo diagnosis Display information about a servo/spindle drive unit, including the number of alarms, DA
output information, PLG diagnosis (spindle), and alarm cause counter.
557 Diagnosis data collection setting Configure the history data collection settings, and start or stop collecting the history data
(about NC keys, alarms, and others).
Others - Menu list List the menu configurations of all screens.
- Specify the screen No. Set a screen number.
No. Name Description
#1043 lang Select language displayed
#1135 unt_nm Unit name
#1251 (bit3) set23 Selects whether to display a message after successful connection.
Type Screen No. Screen name Description
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.2 Specifications 663
66
20.3 Operations for Display The following explains how to display the CNC monitor 2 screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Display the CNC monitor 2 screen.
The display methods include the following two types.
Using the special function switch (CNC monitor 2) set in the project
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [CNC monitor2] from the main menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number of the controller for which the CNC monitor 2 is performed.
After the GOT is turned on, the communication setting window is displayed automatically only at the first startup of the CNC
monitor 2.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the CNC monitor 2 screen.
For the details of the CNC monitor 2 screen operations, refer to the following.
Page 666 Operating Procedure
4. Start the CNC monitor 2.
The CNC monitor 2 screen appears after the channel number is selected.
Communication setting window
GT27-S and GT25-S
GT27-S and GT25-S
4 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.3 Operations for Display
20
Start operation using the special function switch The CNC monitor 2 can be started by using a special function switch.
To display the CNC monitor 2 screen for the set controller by touching the special function switch, configure the following
settings for the switch.
Specifying a keyboard
Specifying the connection destination
Specifying the initial screen
Specifying a system number
The operation at startup differs according to the special function switch settings.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Changing screens
The initial screen specified with the special function switch appears at the next startup.
If the initial screen is not specified, the last displayed screen appears at the next startup.
For the details of the special function switch setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Utility or
user-created monitor screen
Start
[Rtn] key
At the second or later startup
Communication setting window
At the first startup
[] key
At the second or later startup
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.3 Operations for Display 665
66
20.4 Operating Procedure This section describes the CNC monitor 2 screen layout, data input, authorization acquisition, and CNC C80 parameters.
CNC monitor 2 screen layout The following describes the display data of the CNC monitor 2 screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen.
1)Connected CNC C80
Displays the network No., PLC No., and module name of the connected CNC C80.
The module name depends on the parameter setting of the CNC C80.
For the details of CNC C80 parameters, refer to the manual of the CNC C80.
2)Message display area
Displays messages.
For the details of messages, refer to the following.
Page 673 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
3)Select channel key
Displays the selected channel number.
Touch this key to display the communication setting window.
When a CNC C80 is connected, touching this key disconnects the CNC C80.
6)
8)
2) 3)1) 4)9) 10)
GT27-S and GT25-S GT27-V, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V
1)
2) 3) 4) 5)
6)
7)
7)
GT27-X
3) 4) 5)2)
6)
7)
1)
6 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure
20
4)[CNC Chg] key
Switches between the CNC C80 modules in the order set in [Ethernet Setting].
5)[Rtn] key (for GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S)
Returns to the utility or user-created screen.
6)Monitor screen
Displays the operation, setup, edit, diagnosis, or maintenance screen of the CNC C80.
Touch this screen to switch the screen.
The display language depends on the parameter setting of CNC C80.
For the details of CNC C80 parameters, refer to the manual of the CNC C80.
7)Software keyboard (for GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S)
Touch a key to send a key code to the CNC C80.
For the details of the software keyboard, refer to the following.
Page 668 Using a software keyboard
A key code can be sent with the USB keyboard.
For information on how to input a key code with the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
Page 670 Using a USB keyboard
8)Function window (for GT27-V, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V)
Displays a message and connected CNC and allows you to select a channel and switch the CNC.
9)Display function window key (for GT27-V, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V)
Displays the function window.
10)[] key (for GT27-V, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V)
Returns to the utility or user-created screen.
Function window
If the displayed message wraps to the next line, the information about the connected CNC C80 is not
displayed.
The function window appears for some errors, such as a communication error.
If you touch an area outside the function window or input data with a keyboard or mouse, the function
window closes.
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure 667
66
Key input
Using a software keyboard The CNC monitor 2 screen displays a software keyboard on GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S.
For the models other than the above, use a USB keyboard instead of the software keyboard.
Page 670 Using a USB keyboard
The following describes the software keyboard displayed on the CNC monitor 2 screen.
1)System switching key
When multiple systems are used, touching this key displays the data of the subsequent system.
If a common system screen is displayed or only one system is used, touching this key does not change the display.
2)Help key
Displays the parameter guidance and alarm guidance.
3)[LIST] key
Lists the menu configurations of all screens.
4)Tab switching keys
Switch the tabs.
7)
6)
3)
8)
2) 1) 14) 10) 10)9) 9) 13) 12)
GT27-S and GT25-S
4) 11)
GT27-X
1) 2) 3)
4)
5)
6)
7) 8) 9) 10) 9)
11) 12) 11) 13)
14)
8 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure
20
5)Screen switching keys (for GT27-X)
Switch the screens.
The following shows the keys and the corresponding screens.
[MONITR] key: Monitor screen
[SETUP] key: Setup screen
[EDIT] key: Edit screen
[DIAGN] key: Diagnosis screen
[MAINTE] key: Maintenance screen
6)Data setting keys
Input alphabets, numbers, spaces, and symbols.
Touching each key inputs the character on the upper half of the key. To input a character on the lower half of a key, touch the
[SHIFT] key.
7)[SHIFT] key
Selects the character or function on the lower half of each key.
8)[INPUT] key
Confirms the setting and writes the data to the CNC C80.
9)Move cursor keys (within a displayed item)
Move the cursor left or right one character within a displayed item on the screen.
10)Move cursor keys
Move the cursor up, down, right, or left one item.
11)[DELETE], [INSERT], or [DELETE INSERT] key
Deletes a character, or switches to the insert mode.
GT27-X
[DELETE] key: Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
[INSERT] key: Switches to the insert mode.
To insert a character to the left of the cursor, touch a data setting key in the insert mode.
GT27-S and GT25-S
[DELETE INSERT] key: Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
To switch to the insert mode, touch the [SHIFT] key and then the [DELETE INSERT] key.
12)[C.B CAN] key
Deletes the row under the cursor on the edit screen.
Clears the value under the cursor on a screen other than the edit screen.
To delete all of the contents on the edit screen, touch the [SHIFT] key and then the [C.B CAN] key.
13)Lowercase character input key
Shifts back and forth between uppercase and lowercase characters.
A case shift is available only on the software keyboard.
14)Page switching key
Displays the previous or next page.
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure 669
67
Using a USB keyboard You can input data using a USB keyboard.
For how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
The following table lists the function of each key on a USB keyboard.
Key Description
Characters, numbers, symbols Input characters, numbers, and symbols.
Shift + Letter Inputs a lowercase letter.
Shift + F1 Switches the screen to the monitor screen.
Shift + F2 Switches the screen to the setup screen.
Shift + F3 Switches the screen to the edit screen.
Shift + F4 Switches the screen to the diagnosis screen.
Shift + F5 Switches the screen to the maintenance screen.
Ctrl + F1 Switches between the systems.
Ctrl + F2 Displays or hides the guidance.
Ctrl + F8 Displays or hides the menu list.
Ctrl + F9 Moves the tab left.
Ctrl + F10 Moves the tab right.
PageUp Switches the page to the previous page.
PageDown Switches the page to the next page.
F1 Selects the leftmost menu key.
F2 Selects the second menu key from the left.
F3 Selects the third menu key from the left.
F4 Selects the fourth menu key from the left.
F5 Selects the fifth menu key from the left.
F6 Selects the sixth menu key from the left.
F7 Selects the seventh menu key from the left.
F8 Selects the eighth menu key from the left.
F9 Selects the ninth menu key from the left.
F10 Selects the tenth menu key from the left.
F11 Returns to the previous menu.
F12 Goes to the next menu.
Delete Deletes one character.
Insert Switches to the insert mode.
Shift + Home Clears a target value within a display item on the screen.
Esc Deletes all of the contents on the edit screen.
Enter Confirms the setting and writes the data to the CNC C80.
Moves the cursor up one display item on the screen.
Moves the cursor down one display item on the screen.
Moves the cursor left within a display item on the screen.
Moves the cursor right within a display item on the screen.
Shift + Tab Moves the cursor left one display item on the screen.
Tab Moves the cursor right one display item on the screen.
0 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure
20
Authorization To operate the CNC monitor 2 screen, the authorization of CNC C80 is required.
When a CNC C80 module is connected to multiple GOTs, the CNC monitor 2 screen is operable on the authorized GOT only.
On an unauthorized GOT, the CNC monitor 2 screen is viewable.
Obtaining the authorization
GT27-X, GT27-S, and GT25-S On an unauthorized GOT, the [Acquire Op.Right] key is displayed instead of the keyboard.
To operate the CNC monitor 2 screen, touch the [Acquire Op.Right] key on the GOT to obtain the authorization of CNC C80.
GT27-X GT27-S and GT25-S Unauthorized state
GT27-X GT27-S and GT25-S Authorized state
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure 671
67
GT27-V, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V On an unauthorized GOT, the display function window key appears in yellow, and the [Acquire Op.Right] key appears in the
function window.
Automatic transfer of the authorization When you perform the following operations on the authorized GOT, the authorization is transferred to another GOT
automatically.
Closing the CNC monitor 2 screen
Powering off the authorized GOT
The authorization is transferred to a GOT according to the connection order.
Unauthorized state Authorized state
2 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.4 Operating Procedure
20
20.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the CNC monitor 2 is executed, and the corrective actions.
Message Description
Unable to move to the designated screen. The screen was not switched to the specified screen.
The CNC C80 does not have the specified screen, or the specified screen No. may be incorrect.
Correct the settings of the special function switch.
For information on how to set a special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Unable to move to the designated system. The system was not switched to the specified system.
The CNC C80 may not have the specified system.
Correct the settings of the special function switch.
When this error and the screen switching error occur at the same time, the error message of this
error is not displayed.
For information on how to set a special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The Ethernet settings of the monitoring target CNC are
not correct.
The specified connection destination setting does not exist.
Correct the Ethernet setting of the GOT.
Unable to do drawing. Use the latest OS. The monitor screen cannot be displayed because the OS version of the CNC C80 is not compatible
with the version of the CNC monitor 2.
Install the latest OS on the CNC C80.
Communication error The GOT is under one of the following conditions.
The GOT cannot be connected with the CNC C80.
The GOT is connected with the CNC C80, but the communication between them becomes
disabled.
Check the connection setting of the GOT, and check that the connection cable is connected
correctly.
When the communication with the CNC C80 is recovered, a message saying [Connection
complete] appears on the screen.
20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 673
67
MEMO
4 20 CNC MONITOR 2 20.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
21
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY
Page 675 Features
Page 675 Specifications
Page 676 Operations for Display
Page 677 Display Contents
21.1 Features The network status display function monitors the network status using a communication unit mounted on the GOT.
You can check the LED status, error status, and others of the network module.
21.2 Specifications
Target communication units The network status display function monitors the network status using the following communication units.
CC-Link IE TSN communication unit (GT25-J71GN13-T2)
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit (GT15-J71GP23-SX)
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit (GT15-J71GF13-T2)
CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13)
MELSECNET/H communication unit (GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13)
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.1 Features 675
67
21.3 Operations for Display
Starting the network status display The following describes how to display the network status display screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Display the network status display screen by one of the following methods.
Starting from the special function switch (Network status display) set in the project
For how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Network status display] from the Main Menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Changing screens
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Network status display
[] key
6 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.3 Operations for Display
21
21.4 Display Contents The following describes the display data of the network status display screen.
CC-Link IE TSN communication unit For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
User's manual of the master/local module for the CC-Link IE TSN system
1)LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.
Page 678 LED status
2)Unit information
Displays the unit information of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.
Page 678 Unit information
3)Host station line status
Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.
Page 678 Host station line status
4)Unit error information
Lists the error codes.
Page 678 Unit error information
5)Current error information
Displays the currently occurring errors.
Page 678 Current error information
6)Host Station Connection Status
Displays the connection status of the host station.
Page 679 Host station line status
7)Data link stop factor
Displays the causes that stopped the data link of the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.
Page 679 Data link stop factor
5)
2)
1)
3) 4)
5)
3)
6)
7)
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 677
67
LED status
*1 This is available only in multicast mode. Note that the LED remains off when there is a data link error on a remote station of CC-Link IE TSN Class A (Realtime Communication) while a data link is established.
Unit information
Host station line status
Unit error information
Current error information
Item LED color
Lit Not lit Blink
[RUN] Green Operating normally Communication unit error -
[P1 SD/RD] Green PORT1: Sending or receiving
data
PORT1: Not sending or
receiving data
-
[P2 SD/RD] Green PORT2: Sending or receiving
data
PORT2: Not sending or
receiving data
-
[ERR] Red Unit error or errors in all stations Operating normally Blink (high speed): Error
Blink (medium speed): Data
link faulty station detected *1
Item Description
[Network No.] 1 to 239
[ST] 1 to 120 and 255 (No station number)
[F/W Version] 01 or later (2-byte ASCII code)
[Mode] [Online]
[Multi-cast Mode]
[Offline]
[Module Communication Test]
[Data Link Status] [Data linking]
[Data linking stop]
[Data not linking]
[Offline]
[GOT R/W] [Online]
[Offline]
[Testing Module Comm]
[duplicate IPs] [None]
[Exists]
[Module Communication test status] [Module Communication not tested]
[Testing Module Communication]
[Module Communication test complete]
[Module Communication test results] [Normal]
[Internal LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT1)]
[External LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT1)]
[External LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT1)]
[Internal LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT2)]
[External LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT2)]
[External LoopBK Test Abnormal End(PORT2)]
Item Description
[PORT1: cable disconnct count] [0]: No error
[1] or larger: Number of accumulated errors[PORT1: line err count]
[PORT2: cable disconnct count]
[PORT2: line err count]
Item Description
[ErrCode] A history of 16 errors is displayed in 16 rows, starting from the latest one.
Item Description
[Current error] Displays the currently occurring errors.
8 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
Host station line status
Data link stop factor
CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual
1)LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
Page 680 LED status
2)Loop information
Displays the loop status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
Page 681 Loop information
Item Description
[Host Station Connection Status] Displays the connection status of the host station.
[Normal (PORT1:OK, Port2:OK)]
[Normal (PORT1:OK, PORT2:Disconnected)]
[Loopback on PORT1 Side (Cable Disconnected on PORT2 side)]
[Normal (PORT1:Disconnected, PORT2:OK)]
[Disconnecting (PORT1, PORT2 :Disconnected)]
[Disconnecting (PORT1:Disconnected, PORT2: Connecting)]
[Disconnecting (PORT1:Connecting ,PORT2:Disconnected)]
[Disconnecting (PORT1:Connecting ,PORT2:Connecting)]
[Loopback on PORT2 Side (Cable Disconnected on PORT1 side)]
Item Description
[Data Link Stop Factor] [Normal Communication or Power On]
[Monitoring Time Up]
[Parameter not Received]
[Out of Host Station No. Range]
[Host Reserved Station Setting]
[Station No. Unassigned]
[Parameter Error]
[Parameter Communicating]
[CPU Module Moderate/Major Error]
6)
5)
4)
1)
2)
3)
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 679
68
3)Data link information
Displays the data link information of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, including the communication
status, cause of a communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.
Page 681 Data link information
4)Transient status
Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes.
Page 681 Transient status
5)Link scan time information
Displays the link scan time information.
Page 682 Link scan time information
6)Host station line status
Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit.
Page 682 Host station line status
LED status
*1 The monochrome display shows the LED statuses as follows: Lit: Not lit:
Item LED color *1
Lit Not lit Blink
[RUN] Green Operating normally Hardware failure or WDT error -
[PC] CC-Link IE Controller Network
established
CC-Link IE Controller Network
not established
Communication error in a
station, or station numbers
duplicated
[ONLINE] Online mode Other than online mode -
[TEST] Test mode Other than test mode
[OFFLINE] Offline mode Other than offline mode
[M/S.ERR] Red Duplicate control station or
station No. detected
Not detected
[MANAGER] Green Control station in operation Other than control station
[S.MANAGER] Sub-control station in operation Other than sub-control station
[NORMAL] Normal station in operation Other than normal station
[PARAM.ERR] Red Parameter error detected Not detected -
[F LOOP ERR] IN-side error detected
[SD] Green Data being sent Data not sent
[RD] Data being received Data not received
[TOKEN PASS] Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed
[DATA LINK] Data link being executed
(Cyclic transmission in
progress)
Data link not executed Data link being executed
(Cyclic transmission stopped)
[GOT R/W] Hardware test in progress
Offline
Self-loopback test in progress
Internal self-loopback test in
progress
Station-to-station test in
progress
Online
Line test in progress
-
[R LOOP ERR] Red OUT-side error detected Not detected
0 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
Loop information
Data link information
Transient status
Item Description
[IN: Loop Sts.] Displays the connection status of the host station on the IN side.
[Normal]
[Rev connect]
[IN: LoopBK Sta] Displays the station number of the IN-side loopback station.
No loopback executing station: [---]
Station No.: [1] to [120]
[IN: LoopBK factor] Displays the cause of the loopback.
[No LoopBK Sta.]
[OUT: cable disconnection]
[OUT: connecting a line]
[OUT: wrong cable connection]
[OUT: Loop Sts.] Displays the connection status of the host station on the OUT side.
[Normal]
[Rev connect]
[OUT: LoopBK Sta] Displays the number of the station that is executing a loopback on the OUT side.
No loopback executing station: [---]
Station No.: [1] to [120]
[OUT: LoopBK factor] Displays the loopback factor on the OUT side.
[No LoopBK Sta.]
[IN: cable disconnection]
[IN: connecting a line]
[IN: wrong cable connection]
Item Description
[Com Status] Displays the communication (Data link) status of the host station.
[D-Link in prog.]
[D-Link stopped]
[B-Pass exec]
[B-Pass stopped]
[Testing Offline]
[Offline]
[Cause of Ssp] Displays the cause for which the communication (Transient transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal Comm]
[Cable disconnection]
[Wrong cable connection]
[Checking cable IN/OUT]
[Disconnecting/returning to system]
[Offline]
[Offline test]
[Self-check mode]
[Cause of Stop] Displays the cause for which the data link (Cyclic transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal Comm]
[StopOrder]
[D-Link observation timer time up]
[Testing Line]
[Param not rcvd]
[Host out of range]
[Host reservation]
[Dup Host No.]
[Dup CtrlSta]
[Sta.No. not set]
[Invalid Network No.]
[Param Err]
[Params in comm.]
[CPU stop error]
[CPU pwr stp err]
Item Description
[Transmission Err] Displays the number of transient transmission errors.
[ErrCode] A history of 16 errors is displayed in 16 rows, starting from the latest one.
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 681
68
Link scan time information
Host station line status
CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
User's manual of the CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module used
Item Description
[Current LS time] Displays the current link scan time.
[Max. LS time] Displays the maximum link scan time.
[Min. LS time] Displays the minimum link scan time.
[Constant LS time] Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.
Item Description
[Connction] Displays the connection status of the host station.
[Normal]
[IN: Loop Back (OUT: cable disconnection)]
[IN: Loop Back (OUT: connecting a line)]
[IN: Loop Back (OUT: wrong cable connection)]
[OUT: Loop Back (IN: cable disconnection)]
[OUT: Loop Back (IN: connecting a line)]
[OUT: Loop Back (IN: wrong cable connection)]
[Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: cable disconnection)]
[Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: connecting a line)]
[Disconnect (IN: cable disconnection, OUT: wrong cable connection)]
[Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: cable disconnection)]
[Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: connecting a line)]
[Disconnect (IN: connecting a line, OUT: wrong cable connection)]
[Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: cable disconnection)]
[Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connection, OUT: connecting a line)]
[Disconnect (IN: wrong cable connction, OUT: wrong cable connction)]
[IN: cable disconnct count] [0]: No error
[1] or larger: Number of accumulated errors[IN: line err count]
[OUT: cable disconnct count]
[OUT: line err count]
6)
5)
3)
4)
1)
2)
2 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
1)LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
Page 683 LED status
2)Link information
Displays the link status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
Page 684 Link information
3)Data link information
Displays the data link information of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit, including the communication status,
cause of a communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.
Page 684 Data link information
4)Unit error information
Displays the number of unit errors and the error codes.
Page 684 Unit error information
5)Link scan time information
Displays the link scan time information.
Page 684 Link scan time information
6)Host station line status
Displays the connection status of the CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit.
Page 685 Host station line status
LED status
*1 The monochrome display shows the LED statuses as follows: Lit: Not lit:
Item LED color *1
Lit Not lit Blink
[RUN] Green Operating normally Hardware failure
WDT error occurred
Communication unit being
reset
-
[MST] Operating as master station Operating as a station other
than master station
[DLINK] For online mode:
Data link in progress
For test mode:
Test completed
For online mode:
Data link stopped
For test mode:
Test being executed
Data link being executed
[ERR] Red Communication error occurred Normal
Unit being reset
Data link faulty station detected
[LERR] Receive data error Receive data normal -
[SD] Green Data being sent Data not sent
[RD] Data being received Data not received
[MODE] Online mode Offline mode Test mode
[LER1] Red PORT1 side receive frame error PORT1 side receive frame
normal
-
[LER2] PORT2 side receive frame error PORT2 side receive frame
normal
[LINK1] Green PORT1 side linking up PORT1 side linking down
[LINK2] PORT2 side linking up PORT2 side linking down
[GOT R/W] Access from GOT No access from GOT
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 683
68
Link information
Data link information
Unit error information
Link scan time information
Item Description
[Host PORT1 link info.] Displays the link up status of the host station PORT1 side.
[Linking up]
[Linking down]
[Host PORT2 link info.] Displays the link up status of the host station PORT2 side.
[Linking up]
[Linking down]
Item Description
[Com Status] Displays the communication (Data link) status of the host station.
[D-Link in prog.]
[D-Link stopped]
[B-Pass exec]
[B-Pass stopped]
[Testing Offline]
[Offline]
[Cause of Ssp] Displays the cause for which the communication (Transient transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal Comm]
[Cable disconnection]
[Disconnecting/returning to system]
[Offline]
[Offline test - H/W test]
[Offline test - self-loopback test]
[Offline test - shipping test]
[Cause of Stop] Displays the cause for which the data link (Cyclic transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal Comm]
[StopOrder]
[D-Link observation timer time up]
[Slave stations do not exist]
[Param not rcvd]
[Host out of range]
[Dup Host No.]
[Dup Master Sta.: Master detected]
[Sta.No. not set]
[Param Err(Other)]
[Params in comm.]
[CPU stop error]
[Invalid ring configuration]
Item Description
[Unit error] Displays the number of unit errors.
[ErrCode] A history of 16 errors is displayed in 16 rows, starting from the latest one.
Item Description
[Current LS time] Displays the current link scan time.
[Max. LS time] Displays the maximum link scan time.
[Min. LS time] Displays the minimum link scan time.
[Constant LS time] Displays the link scan time set in the parameter.
4 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
Host station line status
CC-Link communication unit For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual used
1)LED status
Displays the operation status of the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
Page 686 LED status
2)Data link information
Displays the data link startup status and errors of the CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13).
Page 686 Data link information
Item Description
[Connction] Displays the connection status of the host station.
[Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: communicating)]
[Normal (PORT1: communicating, PORT2: cable disconnected)]
[Normal (PORT1: in loopBK communication, PORT2 cable disconnected)]
[Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: communicating)]
[Normal (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: in loopBK communication)]
[Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: cable disconnected)]
[Disconnect (PORT1: cable disconnected, PORT2: connecting a line)]
[Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: cable disconnected)]
[Disconnect (PORT1: connecting a line, PORT2: connecting a line)]
[PORT1: cable disconnct count] [0]: No error
[1] or larger: Number of accumulated errors[PORT1: line err count]
[PORT2: cable disconnct count]
[PORT2: line err count]
2)
1)
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 685
68
LED status
*1 The monochrome display shows the LED statuses as follows: Lit: Not lit:
Data link information
Item LED color *1
Lit Not lit Blink
[RUN] Green Operating normally WDT error
Unit being reset
-
[ERR.] Red All station communication error No communication error
Unit being reset
Communication error in a
station, or station numbers
duplicated
[TIME] Cable disconnection
No responses from all stations
due to transmission path
affected by noise
Responses from all stations -
[MST] Green Operating as master station Operating as a station other
than master station
[SW] Red Switch setting error No switch setting error
[LINE] Cable disconnection error No cable disconnection error
[S MST] Green Operating as standby master
station
Operating as a station other
than standby master station
[M/S] Red Master station duplication error No master station duplication
error
[LOCAL] Green Operating as local station Operating as a station other
than local station
[PRM] Red Parameter error No parameter error
[GOT R/W] Green Access from GOT No access from GOT
Item Description
[D-Link Boot Status] Displays the data link startup status.
[D-Link in prog.]: Data link being executed
[D-Link Offline]: Data link stopped
[Initialize]: Set to the initial status
[Parameter wait]: Parameter not received
[Disconnect (No Polling)]: In cut-off status with no inquiry from master station
[Disconnect (Line Err)]: In cut-off status due to line error
[Disconnect (Other)]: In cut-off status due to other causes
[Testing Line]: Line test being executed
[Testing Pram Setup]: Parameter setting test being executed from master station
[Auto Reconnecting]: Return processing being executed automatically
[Reset. in prgr.]: CC-Link communication unit being reset (GOT reset status)
[Error Status] Displays the status of the current error.
[Normal]: Normal status
[Invalid TransPath]: Transmission path error detected
[Invalid Parameter]: Parameter error detected
[CRC Error]: Receive data error detected
[Time Out Error]: Timeout error detected in data reception
[Abort Error]: Error detected in data communication
[Invalid Setup]: Invalid station number, station type, transmission speed, or mode setting detected
[Other Abnormality]: Error due to some other cause detected
6 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
MELSECNET/H communication unit For the corrective actions for errors, refer to the following.
Reference manual of the MELSECNET/H network system (PLC to PLC network) used
1)LED status
Displays the operation status of the MELSECNET/H communication unit.
Page 688 LED status
2)Loop information
Displays the loop status of the MELSECNET/H communication unit.
Page 688 Loop information
3)Data link information
Displays the data link information of the MELSECNET/H communication unit, including the communication status, cause of a
communication suspension, and cause of a communication stop.
Page 689 Data link information
4)
2)
1)
3)
4)
2)
1)
3)
GT15-J71LP23-25
GT15-J71BR13
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 687
68
4)Transient status
Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes.
Page 689 Transient status
LED status
*1 The monochrome display shows the LED statuses as follows: Lit: Not lit:
Loop information
*1 For the GT15-J71BR13, [---] is displayed.
Item LED color *1
Lit Not lit
[RUN] Green Data link normal Data link error
[MNG] Operating as control station Operating as a station other than control station
[S.MNG] Operating as sub-control station Operating as a station other than sub-control
station
[D.LINK] Data link being executed Data link stopped
[T.PASS] Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed
[SW.E.] Switch setting error Normal
[M/S.E.] Station No. or control station duplication error
[PRM.E.] Parameter error
[GOT R/W] Access from GOT No access from GOT
[CRC] Red Code check error Normal
[OVER] Data entry delay error
[AB.IF] All receive data: 1
[TIME] Time limit exceeded
[DATA] Receive data error
[UNDER] Send data error
[LOOP] Forward/reverse loop receive error
[SD] Green Data being sent -
[RD] Data being received -
Item Description
[F loop] *1 Displays the status of the F loop.
[Normal]
[NG]
[R loop] *1 Displays the status of the R loop.
[Normal]
[NG]
[FLoopBK Sta] *1 Displays the F loopback execution status.
[No per]
Number of the loopback executing station
[RLoopBK Sta] *1 Displays the R loopback execution status.
[No per]
Number of the loopback executing station
[Loop Back] *1 Displays the loopback status.
[No per]: Loop normal, forward loop error, reverse loop error, data link not possible
[Perf]: During loopback
8 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
21
Data link information
Transient status
Item Description
[Com Status] Displays the communication (Data link) status of the host station.
[D-Link in prog.]: Data link in progress
[D-Link Stop(A)ss]: Cyclic transmission stopped from other station
[D-Link Stop (H)]: Cyclic transmission stopped by host station
[B-Pass exec (No Area)]: Host B/W send no allocation
[B-Pass exec (Param Err)]: Error in host parameters
[B-Pass exec (Param unreceived)]: Common parameters not received
[Disconnect (No B-Pass)]: Station numbers duplicated, cable not connected
[Disconnect (Line Err)]: Cable not connected
[Testing]: Testing online/offline
[Reset. in prgr.]: Hardware failure
[Cause of Ssp] Displays the cause for which the communication (Transient transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal Comm]: Communicating normally
[Offline]: Offline
[Offline test]: Testing offline
[Initialize]: Error (error code: F101, F102, F105)
[Change Ctrl Sta]: Error (error code: F104, F106)
[Testing Online]: Error (error code: F103, F109, F10A)
[Baton Missing]: Error (error code: F107)
[Baton Duplicated]: Error (error code: F108)
[Dup Sta No]: Error (error code: F10B)
[Dup Ctrl Sta]: Error (error code: F10C)
[Rcv Retry Err]: Error (error code: F10E)
[Send Retry Err]: Error (error code: F10F)
[Time Out Err]: Error (error code: F110)
[Abnormal Line]: Error (error code: F112)
[Disconnection]: Error (error code: F11B)
[No Own Sta Baton]: Error (error code: F11F)
[Other (error code)]: Error (error code: displayed)
[Cause of Stop] Displays the cause for which the data link (Cyclic transmission) of the host station is disabled.
[Normal]: Communicating normally
[StopOrder]: Cyclic transmission of all stations stopped from host station or other stations
[No Shared Param]: Parameters not received
[Bad Shared Param]: Set parameter error
[Bad Self Sta CPU]: A medium/critical error occurred in the host CPU
[Com Aborted]: Host data link error occurred
Item Description
[Transmission Err] Displays the number of transient transmission errors.
[ErrCode] A history of 16 errors is displayed in 16 rows, starting from the latest one.
21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents 689
69
MEMO
0 21 NETWORK STATUS DISPLAY 21.4 Display Contents
22
22 iQSS UTILITY
Page 691 Features
Page 692 Specifications
Page 695 Preparing profile data
Page 696 Operations for Display
Page 699 Operating Procedure
Page 709 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
22.1 Features With the iQSS utility function, the GOT can display information of the selected iQSS-compatible device by mounting a data
storage having profile data of iQSS-compatible devices on the GOT.
You can also start, operate, and maintain the selected iQSS-compatible devices.
Mount a data storage in which profile data is stored on the GOT.
Centralized management with an engineering tool, such as GX Works2
computer
PLC
GOT
iQSS-compatible devices
The GOT displays the information of the selected device and allows startup, operation, and maintenance.
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.1 Features 691
69
22.2 Specifications Page 692 System configuration
Page 694 Access range
Page 694 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the GOTs that support the iQSS utility, the target PLCs, and the connection types between the GOT and
PLC.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
For the connection between iQSS-compatible devices and a PLC, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual (Startup)
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual
Target controller
PLC CPU
AnyWireASLINK master module
*1 Devices whose first two digits of the manufacturing information are 03 or later are supported. *2 When using word data, use devices which support AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1 for both master and slave modules.
Controller Model
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU,
R120PCPU, R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
QCPU (Q mode) Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q02PHCPU, Q06PHCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, Q01UCPU, Q02UCPU,
Q03UDCPU, Q04UDHCPU, Q06UDHCPU, Q10UDHCPU, Q13UDHCPU, Q20UDHCPU, Q26UDHCPU,
Q03UDECPU, Q04UDEHCPU, Q06UDEHCPU, Q10UDEHCPU, Q13UDEHCPU, Q20UDEHCPU, Q26UDEHCPU,
Q50UDEHCPU, Q100UDEHCPU, Q03UDVCPU, Q04UDVCPU, Q06UDVCPU, Q13UDVCPU, Q26UDVCPU,
Q04UDPVCPU, Q06UDPVCPU, Q13UDPVCPU, Q26UDPVCPU
LCPU L02CPU, L06CPU, L26CPU, L26CPU-BT, L02CPU-P, L06CPU-P, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-PBT, L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P
Controller Model Supported AnyWireASLINK version
RCPU RJ51AW12AL AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0
AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1*1*2
QCPU (Q mode) QJ51AW12AL AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0
LCPU LJ51AW12AL AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0
2 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.2 Specifications
22
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 The RCPU and LCPU do not support the connection type. *2 When connecting the GOT with the LCPU, use L6ADP-R2. *3 L02SCPU or L02SCPU-P cannot be used. *4 For the MELSECNET/10 connection, use a QCPU and network module (QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, and
QJ71BR11) with the function version B or later. *5 This connection type indicates the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. *6 This connection type indicates the CC-Link IE Field Network connection. *7 This connection type cannot be used to connect a Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU or
Q25HCPU. *8 This connection type indicates the CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *9 This connection type indicates the CC-Link connection (via G4).
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the iQSS utility to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Settings of the special function switch (iQSS utility special control function) The settings of the special function switch are supported by the iQSS utility special control function only in the following cases.
A connected CPU is specified.
The object name is set to a name that contains "
Required hardware A data storage is required to use the iQSS utility.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection *1
Direct CPU connection (serial) *2
Serial communication connection
Ethernet connection *3
MELSECNET/H connection *1, MELSECNET/10 connection *1*4
CC-Link IE Controller connection *1*5, CC-Link IE Field connection *6*7
CC-Link connection
ID *8 G4 *9
iQSS
utility
Displaying the
status of iQSS-
compatible
devices
Changing
parameters
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.2 Specifications 693
69
Applicable non-Mitsubishi equipment The iQSS utility can monitor the devices of non-Mitsubishi Electric controllers by using profile data.
For target controllers, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The target controllers support the following functions.
Acquiring the device list
Monitoring the device
Reading/writing parameters from/to the device
Multiple-language display For profile data that contains information in multiple languages, multiple-language display is supported.
Some parts of profile data support multiple languages and some parts do not.
To the parts that do not support multiple languages, the system language of the GOT is applied.
When the data storage has no profile data supporting multiple languages, the language is not switched.
For the details of system language switching, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Access range The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Precautions for the device list information screen and parameter information screen While the following operations are in progress, do not perform operations that use the control signal (Y signal).
Updating information by using the [Update list] key on the device list information screen
Reading or writing parameters by using the [Read parameters] key or [Write parameters] key on the parameter information
screen
4 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.2 Specifications
22
22.3 Preparing profile data To display iQSS-compatible devices with the iQSS utility, store profile data in a data storage with GT Designer3 and mount the
storage on the GOT.
For information on how to store profile data, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.3 Preparing profile data 695
69
22.4 Operations for Display This section explains the procedure to display the operation screen of the iQSS utility.
1. Mount a data storage in which profile data is stored on the GOT.
2. Turn on the GOT.
3. Display the iQSS utility screen by one of the following methods.
Starting from the special function switch (iQSS utility) set in the project
For information on how to set special function switches, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [iQSS utility] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
4. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the iQSS utility.
Set the channel number of the PLC connected to the GOT.
When the channel number is not set, touching the [] key closes the [Select channel] window and sets the channel number to
[1].
5. The iQSS utility screen appears.
To change the connection destination, touch the select channel key on the iQSS utility screen.
Page 699 Operating Procedure
[Select channel] window
Select channel key
6 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.4 Operations for Display
22
iQSS utility special control function The iQSS utility special control function specifies a GD device with a GS device, and displays the screen of the target sensor
device specified by the parameter set in the GD device.
After configuring the following settings and touching the special function switch, specify the screen of the target sensor device
to display the screen.
Turn on b0 of the Special Function Switch Special Control (GS1810).
Set the iQSS Utility Special Control Start GD Device No. Specification (GS1811).
Set the iQSS Utility Special Control Number of Parameters (GS1812).
Set the connected CPU and object name for the special function switch.
Set the parameter for the GD device specified by the iQSS Utility Special Control Start GD Device No. Specification
(GS1811).
For how to set the parameter, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
iQSS utility special control GS device The following shows the devices used for the iQSS utility special control.
For how to set each device, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Precautions In the following cases, since the conditions of the iQSS utility special control are not satisfied, the operation is the same as
when the special function switch is touched on a user screen.
Touching the special function switch when b0 of the Special Function Switch Special Control (GS1810) is off
Touching the special function switch when the iQSS Utility Special Control Number of Parameters (GS1812) is 0
Setting a value outside the valid range of the iQSS utility special control parameter, and then touching the special function
switch
GS device Description
b0 of Special Function Switch Special Control (GS1220) Notifies the execution error of the iQSS utility special control.
It turns on when an error occurs during the execution of the iQSS utility special control.
The next time the iQSS utility special control is executed, it will turn off.
iQSS Utility Special Control Error Sensor Device No. (GS1221) Stores the sensor device number where an error occurs during the execution of the
iQSS utility special control.
When an error has occurred during the execution of the iQSS utility special control, the
affected sensor device number is stored.
When no error has occurred, the reset value (65535) is stored.
b0 of Special Function Switch Special Control (GS1810) Enables the iQSS utility special control function.
The iQSS utility special control is executed by turning on this signal and touching the
special function switch for which the connected CPU is specified to start the iQSS
utility.
iQSS Utility Special Control Start GD Device No. Specification
(GS1811)
Specifies the start number of the GD device used for the iQSS utility special control.
iQSS Utility Special Control Number of Parameters (GS1812) The number of parameters set for iQSS utility special control.
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.4 Operations for Display 697
69
Screen transition
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
Start
[] key
[OK] key
At the second and subsequent
startups
[Select channel] window
Select channel key
Select channel key
At the first startup
[Monitor info.] key
[Monitor info.] key
[Device list info.] key
[Parameter info.] key
[Parameter info.] key
[Device list info.] key
[N/W mod. list] key
[N/W mod. list] key
[] key
[] key
[] key
Select channel keySelect channel key
[N/W mod. list] key
8 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.4 Operations for Display
22
22.5 Operating Procedure This section explains screen operations for the iQSS utility.
The display screen of the iQSS utility differs depending on the GOT used.
Page 699 iQSS utility screen
Page 701 Device list information screen
Page 703 Monitoring information screen
Page 707 Parameter information screen
iQSS utility screen This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations when the iQSS utility is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the system configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen
after the iQSS utility is started.
Displayed contents
1)Title display area
Displays the title and the number of modules on the connection destination.
2)Module list display area
Lists modules that can be monitored.
3)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the iQSS utility screen
2)
3)
3)
1)
3) 3)
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure 699
70
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the iQSS utility screen.
1)Select channel key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
2)[] key
Exits the iQSS utility.
3)Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down by one item.
4)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
5)[OK] key
Displays the device list information screen of the selected device.
3)
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
Knob
0 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure
22
Device list information screen This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the device list information screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the display data of the device list information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the device list information screen
2)Network information display area
Displays the network information of the connection destination.
3)Device list display area
Lists devices that can be monitored.
4)Selected device information display area
Displays the information of the device selected in the device list display area.
3)
4)
1)
2)
1)
1)
1) 1) 1)
1) 1)
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure 701
70
Key functions
1)Select channel key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
2)[] key
Exits the iQSS utility.
3)[Update list] key
Updates the information in the device list display area.
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down by one item.
5)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
6)[Monitor info.] key
Switches the screen to the monitoring information screen.
7)[Parameter info.] key
Switches the screen to the parameter information screen.
8)[Next err/alarm] key
Moves the cursor to the device in which an error or alarm has occurred.
9)[N/W mod. list] key
Switches the screen to the iQSS utility screen.
5)
9)
3)
6) 7) 8)
4)
Knob
4)
1) 2)
2 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure
22
Monitoring information screen This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the monitoring information screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the display data of the monitoring information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the monitoring information screen
2)Monitored device status display area
Displays the status of the device being monitored.
Monitored device status display area
3)Error status display area
Displays the error code, content, and corrective action if an error occurs in the device being monitored.
1)
2)
1) 1) 1)
3)
1) 1)
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure 703
70
Monitored device status display area
The following explains the display data of the monitored device status display area and the functions of the keys displayed in
the area.
1)[Model name]
Displays the model of the device being monitored.
2)[Status]
Displays the status of the device being monitored.
The following shows the items displayed in [Status].
If multiple states are detected, the state having the highest priority is displayed.
3)[Sensing level]
Displays the current sensing level in a numerical value and bar graph when an ASLINKAMP or ASLINKSENSOR is selected
on the device list information screen.
In the bar graph, the current value is always refreshed while the monitoring information screen is being displayed and the left
side from the current value is filled in green.
The display of [Sensing level] differs depending on the AnyWireASLINK version of the slave module.
When AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0 or AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1 is used and [Sensing level display mode] is set to 0 to 100%
display
A decimal value from 0 to 100 is displayed for [Sensing level].
An alarm judgment value line (Hi), alarm judgment value line (Lo), and threshold line are displayed on a bar graph.
If the value of [Sensing level] is out of the range, [0%] is displayed.
When AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1 is used and [Sensing level display mode] is set to AD value (raw value) display
A decimal AD value (raw value) is displayed for [Sensing level].
For devices which can switch a channel to output the sensing level, such as CH0 or CH1, the alarm judgment
value line (Hi), alarm judgment value line (Lo), and threshold line for the CH0 value will be displayed,
regardless of the outputting channel.
Displayed item Priority
[Slave module voltage drop] High
Low [Sensing level drop]
[I/O disconnection]
[I/O short-circuit]
[I/O volt. drop]
[Normal]
AnyWireASLINK Ver. Sensing level display mode
Display of [Sensing level]
AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0 -
AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1 0 to 100% display
AD value (raw value) display
1)
3) 2)
4)
Alarm judgment (Lo) Alarm judgment (Hi)Threshold
Sensing level display unit
4 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure
22
4)[I/O status]
Displays the I/O status of the device being monitored.
When the device being monitored has no I/O, no item is displayed.
The display of [I/O status] differs depending on the AnyWireASLINK version of the slave module and [Address setting].
Bit address setting with AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0 or AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1
For a device that has nine I/Os or more, touching the left key or the right key scrolls the display left or right eight I/Os.
For a device that has eight I/Os or less, the left key and the right key do not appear.
Word address setting with AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1
For a device that has five words or more, touching the left key or the right key scrolls the display left or right four words.
For a device that has four words or less, the left key and right key do not appear.
Word address setting (bit display and word display) with AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1
Touching the [Switch] key switches between bit display and word display.
The initial display is bit display.
When the bit display or word display is switched to the other with the beginning of the displayed information scrolled, the
status is maintained after the display is switched back.
For parameters whose number of bits or words is to be changed, update the list on the device list display
screen after changing the parameters.
If the list is not updated, the number of bits and words before change is displayed.
AnyWireASLINK Ver. Address setting Display of [I/O status]
AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.0 -
AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1 Bit address setting
Word address setting
Word address setting (bit
display and word display)
Right keyLeft key
Right keyLeft key
[Switch] key
Bit display
Word display
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure 705
70
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the monitoring information screen.
1)Select channel key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
2)[] key
Exits the iQSS utility.
3)Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down by one item.
4)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
5)[Parameter info.] key
Switches the screen to the parameter information screen.
6)[Device list info.] key
Switches the screen to the device list information screen.
7)[N/W mod. list] key
Switches the screen to the iQSS utility screen.
5) 6) 7)
1) 2)
4)
3)
Knob
3)
6 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure
22
Parameter information screen This section explains the structure of the screen and the common operations on the parameter information screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the display data of the parameter information screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
Displayed contents
1)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the parameter information screen
2)Parameter display area
Lists the parameters of the device being monitored. Parameter change is available.
Up to 128 parameters are displayed.
The 129th parameter and later are not displayed.
3)Detailed parameter information display area
Displays the details of the parameter selected in the parameter display area.
3)
1)
1) 1)
1)
2)
1) 1) 1) 1)
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure 707
70
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the parameter information screen.
1)Select channel key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
2)[] key
Exits the iQSS utility.
3)Scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down by one item.
4)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
5)[Monitor info.] key
Switches the screen to the monitoring information screen.
6)[Read parameters] key
Reads the parameter information of the device being monitored and refreshes the parameter display area.
7)[Write parameters] key
Writes the parameter information changed in the parameter display area to the device being monitored.
8)[Device list info.] key
Switches the screen to the device list information screen.
9)[N/W mod. list] key
Switches the screen to the iQSS utility screen.
1) 2)
5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
4)
3)
Knob
3)
8 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.5 Operating Procedure
22
22.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions For the error messages displayed in the iQSS utility and the corrective actions, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual (Application)
MELSEC-Q/L AnyWireASLINK Master Module User's Manual
22 iQSS UTILITY 22.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 709
71
MEMO
0 22 iQSS UTILITY 22.6 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
23
23 DRIVE RECORDER
Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000.
Page 711 Features
Page 712 Specifications
Page 718 Operations for Display
Page 723 [Drive recorder information list] screen
Page 748 [Graph waveform] screen
Page 765 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
23.1 Features The drive recorder function reads the data prior to and subsequent to an alarm from a connected servo amplifier, and displays
the data (including motor current values and position commands) in waveform or list form on the GOT.
When an alarm occurs in the connected servo amplifier, you can check the data prior to and subsequent to the alarm with the
GOT instead of MR Configurator2.
The data read from the connected servo amplifier can be output to a file.
The file is viewable on the GOT or MR Configurator2.
Trigger setting is changeable on the GOT. In this setting, you can specify an alarm to save data only when the specified alarm
occurs in the connected servo amplifier.
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series, the GOT acquires and checks data not
only at an alarm occurrence but also at any timing by changing the sampling cycle or trigger condition on the GOT.
Servo amplifierGOT
Data prior to and subsequent to an alarm (including motor current values and position commands)
Servo amplifierGOT
Trigger setting
Servo amplifierGOT
Sampling cycle or trigger condition setting
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.1 Features 711
71
23.2 Specifications Page 712 System configuration
Page 716 Access range
Page 716 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration when the drive recorder function is used.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Target controller The drive recorder supports the following servo amplifiers.
*1 To monitor the servo amplifier through a simple motion module (CC-Link IE Field Network) on the PLC, the following connections cannot be used. The GOT and RCPU are connected by using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection. The GOT and RCPU are connected by using the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. The GOT and RCPU are connected through an Ethernet module (or the network part of an RnENCPU).
*2 To monitor the servo amplifier through a CC-Link IE Field Network module on the PLC, the following connections cannot be used. The GOT and RCPU are connected by using the CC-Link IE Field Network connection. The GOT and RCPU are connected by using the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection. The GOT and RCPU are connected through an Ethernet module (or the network part of an RnENCPU).
*3 To monitor the servo amplifier through a simple motion module (SSCNET III/H or CC-Link IE Field Network) or a CC-Link IE Field Network module on the PLC, the following connections cannot be used. The GOT and the Motion CPU (Q series) are directly connected by Ethernet. The GOT and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) are directly connected by Ethernet.
*4 When connecting the PLC and servo amplifier through a Motion module, only direct connection with the built-in Ethernet port of the CPU is supported.
*5 Use firmware version B2 or later.
Connect a target servo amplifier to the GOT through a Motion CPU, simple motion module, CC-Link IE Field Network module,
or Motion module.
Servo amplifier Model
MELSERVO-J4 series*3 MR-J4-B, MR-J4-B-RJ, MR-J4W2-B, MR-J4W3-B, MR-J4-GF *1*2, MR-J4-GF-RJ *1*2
MELSERVO-JE series MR-JE-B
MELSERVO-J5 series*4*5 MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W2-G, MR-J5W3-G
MELSERVO-JET series*4*5 MR-JET-G
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications
23
Applicable Motion CPUs, simple motion modules, CC-Link IE Field Network modules, and Motion modules
*1 Use a module with version 02 or later. *2 On MR Configurator2, set [Motion mode] in [CC-Link IE Communication mode setting for communication] in [Operation mode]. *3 Use a module having a serial number starting with 17102 or later. *4 To connect to the CC-Link IE Field Network through the module, the PLC connected to the GOT must be a master station. *5 Use a module with version 09 or later of the network part. *6 Use a module with version 09 or later. *7 On MR Configurator2, set [IO mode] in [CC-Link IE Communication mode setting for communication] in [Operation mode]. *8 To connect the GOT and PLC CPU by using the CC-Link IE TSN connection, use a CC-Link IE TSN master/local module with its
firmware version 03 or later. *9 When a redundant system of the control CPU is configured, the drive recorder is not supported. *10 The Motion modules can be connected with the MR-J5-G(-RJ), MR-J5W2-G, MR-J5W3-G, or MR-JET-G.
Controller Model
Motion CPU(MELSEC iQ-R Series) *9 R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
Motion CPU(Q Series) *9 Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MSCPU, Q170MSCPU-S1
Simple motion module *8*9 RD77GF4 *1, RD77GF8 *1, RD77GF16 *1, RD77GF32,
RD77MS2, RD77MS4, RD77MS8, RD77MS16,
FX5-40SSC-S,FX5-80SSC-S,
QD77GF4 *2, QD77GF8 *2, QD77GF16 *2*3,
QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16,
LD77MS2, LD77MS4, LD77MS16
CC-Link IE Field Network PLC CPU module with built-in CC-Link IE *4*5 R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module *4*8*9 RJ71GF11-T2 *6, RJ71GF11-T2(MR) *6, QJ71GF11-T2 *7, LJ71GF11-T2 *7
Ethernet module *4 RJ71EN71 *6
Motion module*10 RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, RD78G64, RD78GHV,
RD78GHW
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications 713
71
Connection type
When connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier through a Motion CPU or simple motion module (SSCNET III/H)
When a servo amplifier is connected to the GOT through a Motion CPU (Q series), use a connection type other than the CC-
Link IE Field Network connection between the CPU and the GOT.
For the connection method, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
When connecting the GOT to a servo amplifier through a simple motion module (CC-Link IE Field Network) or CC-Link IE Field Network module
For the connection method between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
SSCNET/H
Motion CPU, or PLC CPU
Varies according to the connection type.
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier PLC CPU
CC-Link IE Field Network
Varies according to the connection type.
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications
23
When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a Motion module
For the connection method between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the drive recorder to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware Data storage is required for the following operations.
Saving the data read from a servo amplifier in a file
Displaying the data of a file that is read from the data storage
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
CC-Link IE TSN
PLC
Ethernet
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications 715
71
Access range The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Precautions
Sending commands from pieces of equipment Do not send commands from pieces of equipment to one servo amplifier simultaneously.
Doing so may cause the servo amplifier to exhibit unintended behavior.
Network number duplication When the GOT is connected to the routed PLC by Ethernet, do not overlap the network number in the controller settings and
the network number of the CC-Link IE Field Network where the servo amplifier is connected.
Otherwise, the GOT cannot communicate with the servo amplifier.
Functions that cannot be used together The drive recorder and servo amplifier graph cannot be used together if the functions are started with the special function
switch.
When the servo amplifier graph is used, exit it and start the drive recorder.
When the GOT resolution is higher than the resolution of the target screen The following screens are started as base screens. If the GOT resolution is higher than the resolution of these screens, the
screens are displayed at the center of the GOT screen.
In that case, the margin around the target screen will be filled with black.
The following shows the target screens.
[Drive recorder information list] screen
[Graph waveform] screen
[(At alarm occurrence)] screen
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications
23
When displaying with GT SoftGOT2000 In the case of GT SoftGOT2000, target screens in the following table are displayed according to the following conditions:
The screens are displayed so that they fit with the GOT screen resolution and orientation set in GT Designer3.
If the screens fit both in vertical display and horizontal display, they are displayed horizontally.
Any screens other than the target screens are displayed in the same way as the GOT2000 series.
The following shows the sizes of the target screens displayed with GT SoftGOT2000.
*1 This setting is available only when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used.
Target screen GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3
Horizontal (X)
480 600 640 to 767 768 to 799 800 to 1023
1024 to 1279
1280 to 1920
MELSERVO-J4
series
[Drive
recorder
information
list] screen
[Graph
waveform]
screen
[(At alarm
occurrence)]
screen
MELSERVO-J5
series,
MELSERVO-
JET series
[Drive
recorder
information
list] screen
[Graph
waveform]
screen
[Instantaneous
monitor]
window
[Parameter]
window
Vertical (Y) 480 to 599 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
600 to 767 VGA
(vertical)*1 - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
768 to 799 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
800 to 1023 WVGA
(vertical)*1 SVGA
(vertical)*1 SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1024 to 1200 - - SVGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1280 - - - - WXGA
(vertical)*1 - -
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.2 Specifications 717
71
23.3 Operations for Display The following explains how to display the drive recorder screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Perform one of the following operations.
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Drive recorder] from the main menu.
For how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Touch the special function switch (Drive recorder) set in the project.
Touch a module on the system configuration screen of the system launcher, and then touch [Drive recorder] on the
extended function selection screen.
Touch a module on the servo network configuration screen of the system launcher (servo network), and then touch [Drive
recorder] in the context menu.
Touch a device icon on the system configuration screen of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and
then touch [Drive recorder] in the context menu.
3. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the drive recorder.
(When the connection destination is set for the special function switch or only one channel is applicable, the [Select channel]
window does not appear.)
Touch the key corresponding to the channel No. to be used.
Page 731 [Select channel] window
4. The [Select station] window appears only at the first startup.
(When the connection destination is set for the special function switch, the [Select station] window does not appear.)
Touch a history key or the [Input station number] key.
Page 731 [Select station] window
When you touch the [Input station number] key, the [Input station No.] window appears.
In the [Input station No.] window, set the network number and the station number, and then touch the [OK] key.
Page 731 [Input station No.] window
5. The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears.
(When the connection destination is set for the special function switch, drive recorder information is read from the connected
servo amplifier automatically. Thus, the following operations are not required.)
Touch the connection destination (servo) key.
Page 723 [Drive recorder information list] screen
6. The [Select connection destination (servo)] window appears.
Specify a servo amplifier to be connected, and touch the [OK] key.
Page 733 [Select connection destination (servo)] window
7. The [Select connection destination (servo)] window closes.
Touch the [Read] key on the [Drive recorder information list] screen to read drive recorder information from the servo amplifier.
The method of displaying the drive recorder screen determines the type of the screen.
Method Description
Using a special function switch The drive recorder screen appears as a system window.
For information on how to display the drive recorder screen with a special function switch, refer to the following.
Page 719 Displaying the drive recorder screen with a special function switch
Using the utility, system launcher, system
launcher (servo network), or CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
The GOT screen is switched to the drive recorder screen.
For the details of the system launcher, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
For the details of the system launcher (servo network), refer to the following.
Page 809 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK)
For the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following.
Page 767 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS
8 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.3 Operations for Display
23
Displaying the drive recorder screen with a special function switch To use a special function switch, place the switch on a user-created screen.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Settings of the special function switch Set the following items for the special function switch.
Settings for using the system window When the drive recorder screen is displayed with a special function switch, the screen appears as a system window.
Displaying such a system window requires an overlap window.
Set an overlap window to be used as the system window in the project.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the drive recorder from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with a special function
switch (System launcher).
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Item Description
Window size Specify the window size for the [Graph waveform] screen.
Graph waveform size Specify the size of the graph display area on the [Graph waveform] screen.
Page 748 [Graph waveform] screen
Connection destination Specify a servo amplifier to be connected, and specify a controller through which the servo amplifier is connected
to the GOT.
Thus, upon displaying the drive recorder screen, the GOT reads drive recorder information automatically.
Touch an equipment icon. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed System configuration screen
[] key
The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears.
[End] key
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.3 Operations for Display 719
72
Starting the drive recorder by using the system launcher (servo network) You can start the drive recorder from the system launcher (servo network) by selecting [Drive recorder] in the context menu of
the system launcher (servo network).
For the details of the system launcher (servo network), refer to the following.
Page 809 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK)
Starting the drive recorder by using the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics You can start the drive recorder from the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics by selecting [Drive recorder]
in the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
For the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following.
Page 786 Context menu
Touch the equipment icon. Select the drive recorder.
Servo network configuration diagram (System launcher (Servo network)) Context menu
[] key
The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears.
Touch the equipment icon. Select the drive recorder.
Network configuration diagram (CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics)
Context menu
[] key
The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears.
0 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.3 Operations for Display
23
Screen transition
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
*1 The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears from the first-time startup of the drive recorder function, if the function is started with the special function switch in which the connection destination is specified.
Start
Utility or user-created screen
[Drive recorder information list] screen
[(At alarm occurrence)] screen
[Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window
First-time startup
From the second-time startup
[File storage destination] window
[Open] window
[File name] window
*1
[Select channel] window
[Select station] window
[Select connection destination (servo)] window
[Graph waveform] screen
[Graph setting] window
[Input station No.] window
[Input N/W No.] window
[Input PLC No.] window
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.3 Operations for Display 721
72
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series
*1 The [Drive recorder information list] screen appears from the first-time startup of the drive recorder function, if the function is started with the special function switch in which the connection destination is specified.
*2 When the connection route setting is not [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)], the [Drive recorder information list] screen of the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series is displayed.
[Trigger setting] window
[Input station No.] window
[Input N/W No.] window
[Input PLC No.] window
[Instantaneous monitor] window
[Parameter] window
[System configuration] window
*2
[Collection, trigger setting]
window
[Graph setting] window
[Graph waveform] screen
[Select connection destination (servo)] window
[Drive recorder information list] screen
[Select channel] window
[Select station] window
Start
Utility or user-created screen
First-time startup*1
From the second-time startup
[File storage destination] window
[Open] window
[File name] window
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.3 Operations for Display
23
23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen This screen displays drive recorder information that is read from a target servo amplifier or file.
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
1)[Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Open a drive recorder information file.
Page 727 [Open] window
2)[Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Save the data of an alarm selected in the alarm history list in a file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
3)[Save all] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Collectively save the data of each alarm in a file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
4)Connection destination key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
Switch between the connected PLC CPUs.
Page 731 [Select channel] window
5)Connection destination (servo) key
Displays the [Select connection destination (servo)] window.
Switch between the connected servo amplifiers.
Page 733 [Select connection destination (servo)] window
6)Axis number or station number
The relevant axis number is displayed when [Motion CPU] or [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] is selected for [Via].
The relevant station number is displayed when [Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)] or [CC-Link IE Field module] is selected for
[Via].
Displays [-] before data is read.
7)[Read] key
Reads drive recorder information from the axis selected in the [Select connection destination (servo)] window.
5)
8)
7)
9) 10) 11) 12)
1) 2) 3) 4)
6)
13)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 723
72
8)Alarm history list
Displays the list of read alarms.
Touch the row of an alarm to select the alarm.
9)[Waveform] key
Switches the screen to the [Graph waveform] screen.
Displays the waveform data of an alarm selected in the alarm history list. The data was collected at the alarm occurrence.
Page 748 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
10)[Onset data] key
Switches the screen to the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen.
Lists the data of an alarm selected in the alarm history list. The data was collected at the alarm occurrence.
Page 765 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
11)[Trigger setting] key
Displays the [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window.
Set the drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger.
Page 735 [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window
12)[Clear history] key
Deletes the drive recorder information in the connected servo amplifier.
13)[Axis label name]
Displays the axis label name only when the axis label is set.
Item Description
History No. Numbers assigned to the alarms that are listed in reverse chronological order
[No.] Alarm number
[Name] Alarm name
[Occurred] Time between the instant when the monitored servo amplifier starts operating and the instant when an alarm
occurs
[Detail] Alarm detail number
History No.
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series
1)[Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Open a drive recorder information file.
Page 727 [Open] window
2)[Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Saves the history data selected in the drive recorder information list in a gpf2 file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
3)[Save all] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Collectively saves the history data of the drive recorder information list in a gpf2 file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
4)Connection destination key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
Switch between the connected PLC CPUs.
Page 731 [Select channel] window
5)Connection destination (servo) key
Displays the [Select connection destination (servo)] window.
Switch between the connected servo amplifiers.
Page 733 [Select connection destination (servo)] window
6)Axis number or station number
Displays the station number and the axis type of the currently connected servo amplifier.
Example)
Station No. 1, single-axis amplifier: 1
Station No. 1, B-axis (two-axis) servo amplifier: 1-B
Displays [-] at a communication error or before data is read.
7)[Read] key
Reads drive recorder information from the axis selected in the [Select connection destination (servo)] window.
5)
8)
7)
9) 10) 11) 12)
1) 2) 3) 4)
6)
13) 14)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 725
72
8)Drive recorder information list
This list is displayed with the first row highlighted when the GOT acquires the drive recorder information at starting up the
drive recorder function.
If the GOT cannot acquire the drive recorder information, nothing is displayed in the list.
9)[Waveform] key
Switches the screen to the [Graph waveform] screen.
Displays the waveform data at an alarm occurrence for the item selected in the drive recorder information list.
Page 751 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series
10)[Instant. monitor] key
Switches to the [Instantaneous monitor] window.
Displays the instantaneous monitor data saved around the time when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Page 765 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
11)[Parameter display] key
Switches to the [Parameter] window.
Displays saved servo parameters.
Page 735 [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window
12)[System config.] key
Switches to the [System configuration] window.
Displays information of the connected servo amplifier.
Page 735 [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window
13)[Trigger setting] key
Switches to the [Trigger setting] window.
Set the trigger condition and write the settings to a target servo amplifier.
14)[Clear history] key
Deletes the drive recorder information in the connected servo amplifier.
Item Description
History No. Numbers assigned to the alarms that are listed in reverse chronological order
Up to 16 items are displayed.
The [New] item is displayed in the first row and the items [1] to [15] are displayed from the second row in
ascending order.
[Occurred time] Time after the start of drive recorder information collection
Power-on time Cumulative power-on time
[Trigger overview] Overview of the trigger of the drive recorder information collection.
In the following cases, [Unsupported] is displayed.
Parameters that are not available for analog channels or digital channels are set in [Trigger setting].
[Vacancy] is selected for an analog channel in the [Trigger setting] window.
History No.
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Open] window Open a drive recorder information file.
1)[DRV] key
Switches the window to the [Select drive] window.
Change the GOT drive from which files are read.
Page 728 [Select drive] window
2)File path
Displays the path to the files displayed in the list.
3)File list
Lists the files in the selected drive.
Up to 200 folders and files in the same path are displayed.
Because the 201st or subsequent folders and files are not displayed, make sure to store a maximum of 200 folders and files
in the same path.
You can open a file having the extension .gpf2 or .amo2.
However, the following *.gpf2 files are not supported.
Files that are saved with the servo amplifier graph function
Files that are not saved with the drive recorder function of MR Configurator2
To scroll the file list up or down, touch and slide the list.
4)File information
Displays the file size and creation date and time of the file selected in the file list.
5)Scroll keys
Scroll the file list up or down one row.
6)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the file list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
7)[OK] key
Opens the file selected in the file list.
When a GPF2 file is opened, the [Graph waveform] screen appears.
Page 748 [Graph waveform] screen
If the GPF2 file contains multiple waveform data saved with MR Configurator2, the GOT displays the latest waveform data in
the file.
When an AMO2 file is opened, the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen appears.
Page 765 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
1) 2)
3)
4)
6)
5)
5)
7)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 727
72
[Select drive] window Change the target drive from which files are read or to which files are stored.
1)Drives
Select a GOT drive from which files are read or to which files are stored.
2)[OK] key
Changes the target drive to the selected drive.
[File storage destination] window Select the file save destination.
1)[DRV] key
Switches the window to the [Select drive] window.
Change the GOT drive to which files are stored.
Page 728 [Select drive] window
2)Folder path
Displays the path to the folders displayed in the list.
3)Folder list
Lists the folders in the drive.
Up to 200 folders in the same path are displayed.
Because the 201st or subsequent folders are not displayed, make sure to store a maximum of 200 folders in the same path.
To scroll the folder list up or down one row, touch and slide the list.
4)Scroll keys
Scroll the folder list up or down one row.
1)
2)
1) 2)
3) 5)
4)
4)
6)
7)
8 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
5)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the folder list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
6)[New folder] key
Switches the window to the [Folder name] window.
Create a folder.
Page 729 [Folder name] window
7)[OK] key
Confirms the file save destination selected, and switches the window to the [File name] window.
Set the name of the file to be saved.
Page 730 [File name] window
[Folder name] window Create and name a new folder.
1)Folder name
Set the name of the folder to be created.
Make sure that the path (including the file extension) consists of 78 characters or less.
For the restrictions on the folder name and file name used in the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
2)[OK] key
Creates a folder.
1)
2)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 729
73
[File name] window Name a file and save it in the specified format.
1)File name
Set the name of the file to be created.
Make sure that the path (including the file extension) consists of 78 characters or less.
For the restrictions on the folder and file names used with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
For MELSERVO-J4 series and MELSERVO-JE series, when the [File name] window is displayed with the [Save all] key, all
the data collected at alarm occurrences are saved in waveform data files (*.gpf2) and data view files (*.amo2).
For MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, when the [File name] window is displayed with the [Save all] key, all
the waveform data are saved in relevant files (*.gpf2).
The date and time at which drive recorder information was read to the GOT and an alarm history number (indicating the
occurrences of alarms in reverse chronological order) are appended to each file name.
Example) Waveform data (*.gpf2)
2)[Format]
Select a file format.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[gpf2 (graph)]
[amo2 (onset data)]
When the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series is connected, [amo2 (onset data)] is grayed out.
When the [File name] window is displayed from the [Graph waveform] screen or the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen, the file
format is fixed.
3)[OK] key
Saves the file.
1)
3)
2)
File name_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_**.gpf2
Alarm history number
Date and time at which drive recorder information was read
0 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Select channel] window Select a channel.
1)Channel key
Confirms the channel selection, and switches the window to the [Select station] window.
[Select station] window Select a network number and station number from the connection history.
1)History key
Confirms the selection of the network number and station number, and establishes communication with the target servo
amplifier.
The history keys of the last three connections are displayed.
2)[Input station number] key
Switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
Set a network number and a station number.
Page 731 [Input station No.] window
[Input station No.] window Set a network number and a station number.
1)[N/WNo.]
Touch the entry field to display the [Input N/W No.] window.
Set a network number.
Page 732 [Input N/W No.] window
2)[PCNo.]
Touch the entry field to display the [Input PLC No.] window.
Set a PLC station number.
Page 732 [Input PLC No.] window
3)[CPUNo.]
Displays the CPU number.
This number cannot be changed.
1)
1)
2)
1)
2)
4)
3)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 731
73
4)[OK] key
Confirms the entry of the network number and PLC station number, and establishes communications with the target servo
amplifier.
[Input N/W No.] window Set a network number.
1)Network number
Network number to be set
2)Input keys
Input keys for entering a network number.
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the entry of the network number and switch the window to the [Input station No.] window.
[Input PLC No.] window Set a station number.
1)PLC station number
PLC station number to be set
2)Input keys
Input keys for entering a PLC station number
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the entry of the PLC station number and switch the window to the [Input station No.] window.
3)[Host] key
Specifies the PLC station number with the host station number, and switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
[0] is set for the network number and [FF] is set for the PLC station number.
4)[Control station] key
Specifies the PLC station number with the control station number, and switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
The setting values differ depending on the communication driver.
CC-Link (G4) or CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)
[0] is set for the PLC station number.
Other communication drivers
When [0] is set for the network number, it is changed to [1].
[0] is set for the PLC station number.
2)
1)
2)
1)
3) 4)
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Select connection destination (servo)] window Set a servo amplifier from which data is read.
1)[Via]
Select the type of a controller through which a target servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[Motion CPU]
[Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)]
[Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)]
[CC-Link IE Field module]
[Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)]
In the following cases, [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is not displayed in [Via].
No servo amplifier is connected to the Motion module.
The connection type is not direct connection with the built-in Ethernet port of the CPU.
Routing information is not set.
2)[CPU No.]
This item is displayed when [Motion CPU] is selected for [Via].
Select the CPU No. of a Motion CPU through which a target servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
3)[First I/O]
This item is displayed when [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)], [Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)], [CC-Link IE Field module], or
[Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via].
1)
2)
4)
1)
3)
5)
8)8)
When [Motion CPU] is selected for [Via] When [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] is selected for [Via]
1)
3)
6)
1)
3)
6)
8)8)
When [Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)] is selected for [Via]
When [CC-Link IE Field module] is selected for [Via]
When [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via]
1)
6)
7)
3)
8)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 733
73
Select the start I/O number of a simple motion module, CC-Link IE Field Network module, or Motion module through which a
servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
4)[Axis (Axis label name)]
Select an axis from which data is read when [Motion CPU] is selected for [Via].
Displays the axis label name only when the axis label is set.
5)[Axis]
Select an axis from which data is read when [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] is selected for [Via].
6)[Sta.]
Select the number of the station from which data is read when [Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)], [CC-Link IE Field module],
or [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via].
7)[Multi-axis setting]
This item is displayed when [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via].
When the axis number in a servo amplifier is selected for [Sta.], selectable items differ depending on the servo amplifier type.
The following shows selectable items.
Single-axis servo amplifier: [No setting (single axis)]
Two-axis servo amplifier: [Axis A] or [Axis B]
Three-axis servo amplifier: [Axis A], [Axis B], or [Axis C]
8)[OK] key
Confirms the settings that specify a servo amplifier to be connected.
Touch the [Read] key on the [Drive recorder information list] screen to read drive recorder information from the set axis.
Touching the [OK] key updates the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window Set the drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger and write the settings to a target servo amplifier.
The [Drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J4 series
MELSERVO-JE series
1)[Alarm number setting]
Specify an alarm number so that the drive recorder function saves data only when the relevant alarms occur on a target servo
amplifier.
The following shows the details of a servo amplifier alarm.
If you set this item to 0, the drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger is disabled.
2)[Alarm detail number setting]
Specify an alarm detail number so that the drive recorder function saves data only when a specific alarm occurs on a target
servo amplifier.
If you set this item to 0, the alarms targeted for saving data are determined only by the specified alarm number.
3)Alarm name
Displays the name of the specified alarm.
4)[Write] key
Writes the settings to a target servo amplifier.
Upon completion of the writing, the display returns to the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
The following shows examples of drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger settings.
Example 1) Specifying AL.10.1 as the target alarm
Set the alarm number to 10, and set the alarm detail number to 1.
Example 2) Specifying AL.10 as the target alarm
Set the alarm number to 10, and set the alarm detail number to 0.
1)
2)
3)
4)
AL.**.** Alarm detail number
Alarm number
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 735
73
[Instantaneous monitor] window Set the drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger and write the settings to a target servo amplifier.
The [Instantaneous monitor] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J5 series
MELSERVO-JET series
1)[sequential No.]
Displays the sequential number.
2)[Name]
Displays the alarm name or trigger name.
3)Accumulated power-on time
Displays cumulative power-on time when the drive recorder data is saved.
4)[Occurred time]
Displays the time when the drive recorder data is saved.
5)Instantaneous monitor list
Displays instantaneous monitor data in a list.
Displays the selected row in blue.
When you touch and hold an item in the list and move the finger, the list is scrolled accordingly.
6)Scroll keys
Scroll the instantaneous monitor list up or down one row.
7)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the instantaneous monitor list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
1)
2)
3)
4)
7)
5)
6)
6)
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Parameter] window Displays the details of parameters.
The [Parameter] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J5 series
MELSERVO-JET series
1)[sequential No.]
Displays the sequential number.
2)Parameter group tag
Touch a tab to switch between parameter groups.
3)Parameter list
Displays the list of parameter data.
Displays the selected row in blue.
When you touch and hold an item in the list and move the finger, the list is scrolled accordingly.
4)Scroll keys
Scrolls the parameter list up or down one row.
5)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the parameter list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
1)
3)
4)
5)
4)
2)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 737
73
[System configuration] window Displays information of the connected servo amplifier.
The [System configuration] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J5 series
MELSERVO-JET series
1)[sequential No.]
Displays the sequential number.
2)System configuration list
Displays data of the connected servo amplifier.
Displays the selected row in blue.
When you touch and hold an item in the list and move the finger, the list is scrolled accordingly.
3)Scroll keys
Scrolls the system configuration list up or down one row.
4)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the system configuration list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
1)
2)
4)
3)
3)
8 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Trigger setting] window Set the trigger condition and write the settings to a target servo amplifier.
The [Trigger setting] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J5 series
MELSERVO-JET series
1)Setting item switching tab
Touch a tab to switch between setting items.
When a tab is selected, values read from the servo amplifier are initially displayed.
For details on the setting items, refer to the following.
Basic setting
Page 740 [Basic setting] tab
Trigger setting
Page 741 [Trigger setting] tab
Channel setting
Page 744 [Channel setting] tab
2)Setting item area
Displays setting items according to the selected tab.
3)[OK] key
Writes the settings to a target servo amplifier.
Upon completion of the writing, the display returns to the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
When a value not provided in the pull-down list is set, [Manufacturer setting value] is displayed.
When the value is changed from [Manufacturer setting value] and the [OK] button is touched, the previous
value cannot be restored.
To change the preset value, change the parameter setting in MR Configurator2.
1)
2)
3)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 739
74
[Basic setting] tab
1)[Operation mode selection]
Select the operation mode of the drive recorder.
[0: Auto setting mode]: When an alarm occurs, the status of the servo amplifier before and after the alarm is recorded.
[1: Manual setting mode]: By setting conditions such as the trigger condition and sampling cycle, waveform data under
specific conditions is acquired.
2)[Sampling period selection]
Set a sampling cycle.
3)[Sampling start selection]
Use this item when [1: Manual setting mode] is selected for [Operation mode selection].
4)[Switching time setting]
Specify the drive recorder switching time in seconds.
After the graph function is used, the function is automatically switched to the drive recorder function after the specified time
period.
Setting range: -1 to 32767
When the setting value is 0 to 9, the function is switched to the drive recorder function after 10 seconds.
When the setting value is -1, the drive recorder function is disabled.
5)[History clear selection]
When [1: Valid] is selected, the drive recorder history will be cleared at the next power-on, software reset, or controller reset.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
0 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Trigger setting] tab
[Trigger setting (1/3)]
1)Page switching keys
Switches between the pages in the trigger setting tab.
2)[Trigger mode selection]
Select the trigger mode.
[0: Alarm trigger]
[1: Analog trigger/digital trigger]
3)[Trigger join condition selection]
Select the trigger join condition.
[0: Invalid]
[1: Trigger logical AND]
[2: Trigger logical OR]
4)[Trigger axis common selection]
For a multi-axis servo amplifier, select whether the drive recorder information of all axes is stored in the following condition: a
trigger condition is satisfied when the manual setting mode with the analog trigger setting or the digital trigger setting is
selected.
[0: Invalid]
[1: Valid]
When [1: Valid] is selected, if a trigger condition is satisfied for any of the axis A, axis B, or axis C, it is considered that the
trigger condition is satisfied for all the axes.
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-JET series, [Trigger axis common selection] is not available.
5)[Trigger position setting]
The trigger position relative to the sampling time as a whole is set in hexadecimal.
Setting range: 00h (0%) to 64h (100%)
When the value is set to 100% or more, it is set as 100%.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 741
74
[Trigger setting (2/3)]
1)[Trigger operation selection 1]
Select the sampling start timing for the channel set for [Trigger channel selection 1].
[0: Rising]: (When the value exceeds the trigger level setting value)
[1: Falling]: (When the value falls below the trigger level setting value)
2)[Trigger channel selection 1]
Set the trigger channel number 1.
01 to 07: Analog channel
81 to 88: Digital channel
3)[Trigger level setting 1]
Set the trigger level in decimal for [Trigger channel selection 1].
Setting range: -2147483648 to 2147483647
4)[Trigger operation selection 2]
Select the sampling start timing for the channel set for [Trigger channel selection 2].
[0: Rising]: (When the value exceeds the trigger level setting value)
[1: Falling]: (When the value falls below the trigger level setting value)
5)[Trigger channel selection 2]
Set the trigger channel number 2.
01 to 07: Analog channel
81 to 88: Digital channel
6)[Trigger level setting 2]
Set the trigger level in decimal for [Trigger channel selection 2].
Setting range: -2147483648 to 2147483647
2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
6)
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
[Trigger setting (3/3)]
1)[Alarm number setting]
In the following cases, set an alarm number.
[0: Auto setting mode] is selected for [Operation mode selection].
[1: Manual setting mode] is selected for [Operation mode selection], and [0: Alarm trigger] is selected for [Trigger mode
selection] to use a user-selected alarm to trigger the function.
Setting range: 000h to FFFh
When 000h is set, the drive recorder arbitrary alarm trigger is disabled.
2)[Alarm detail number setting]
In the following cases, set an alarm number.
[0: Auto setting mode] is selected for [Operation mode selection].
[1: Manual setting mode] is selected for [Operation mode selection], and [0: Alarm trigger] is selected for [Trigger mode
selection] to use a user-selected alarm to trigger the function.
Setting range: 00h to FFh
When 00h is set, only the arbitrary alarm number specification is enabled.
2)
1)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 743
74
[Channel setting] tab
[Channel setting (1/4)], [Channel setting (2/4)]
1)Page switching keys
Switches between the pages in the channel setting tab.
2)Analog channel
Set the data assigned to analog channels.
The following table shows availability of data assigned to analog channels.
: Available, : Not available
No. Name Connection to MELSERVO-J5 series
Connection to MELSERVO-JET series
000 Vacancy
001 Servo motor speed
002 Torque/Instantaneous torque
003 Current command
005 Command pulse frequency (by speed)
007 Servo motor side droop pulse(by 1pulse)
008 Speed command
009 Bus voltage
00C Effective load ratio
00D Regenerative load ratio
00E Within one-revolution position
00F Servo motor encoder ABS counter
010 Load inertia moment ratio
011 Torque equivalent to disturbance
012 Overload alarm margin
014 Settling time
015 Overshoot amount
01C Load side droop pulses (by 1 pulse)
01E Motor/load side position difference (by 1 pulse)
020 Servo motor/load side speed difference
021 Servo motor speed (by 0.1 r/min)
022 Command pulse frequency (0.1 r/min by spd.)
023 Speed command (by 0.1 r/min)
024 Torque command
025 Speed limit value
026 Speed limit value (by 0.1 r/min)
035 Encoder inside temperature
03B Load side encoder information 1
03C Load side encoder information 2
2)
1)
2)
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
049 Operation mode
201 Servo motor speed+
202 Command pulse frequency+
203 Command pulse frequency (by speed)+
204 Droop pulses (by 1 pulse)+
205 Speed command+
206 Within one-revolution position+
207 Load side encoder information 1+
208 Load side encoder information 2+
209 Load side droop pulses+
20B Position F/B+
20C Error excessive alarm margin+
218 Droop pulses (by 100 pulses)+
219 Load side droop pulses (by 100 pulses)+
21A Error excessive alarm margin+
21B Droop pulses (Model position deviation)+
220 Speed command 2+
23C Droop pulses (by command)+
No. Name Connection to MELSERVO-J5 series
Connection to MELSERVO-JET series
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 745
74
[Channel setting (3/4)], [Channel setting (4/4)]
1)Digital channel
Set the data assigned to digital channels.
The following table shows availability of data assigned to digital channels.
: Available, : Not available
No. Name Connection to MELSERVO-J5 series
Connection to MELSERVO-JET series
0000 Servo-on command
0001 Forward stroke
0002 Reverse stroke
0005 Proportion control
0006 Alarm reset
0012 Forced stop
0013 Ready ON command
0016 STO1 *1
0017 STO2 *1
001A Gain changing selection 2
001B Gain changing selection
001C Fully closed loop selection
0034 Touch probe signal 1
0035 Touch probe signal 2
0036 Touch probe signal 3
0049 Inputting controller forward rotation stroke end signal
004A Inputting controller reverse rotation stroke end signal
8000 Ready
8001 Speed reached
8002 Zero speed detection
8003 Limiting torque
8004 Limiting speed
8005 In-position completion
8007 Warning
8008 Trouble
8009 Z-phase output
800A Electromagnetic brake interlock
800B External dynamic brake
800F Battery warning
8010 Trouble 2
8013 Ready ON
8015 In STO state *1
8016 Magnetic pole detection completion
1) 1)
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen
23
*1 Data cannot be acquired from the servo amplifier by selecting this signal.
8017 Already passed Z-phase
8018 Variable gain selection 2
8019 Variable gain selection
801A Fully closed loop control
801B Absolute position erase
801D Instantaneous power failure
801E Proportion controlling
801F Tough drive operating
8032 Inputting dog signal
8043 Rough match
8045 Position range
8049 OPR completed 2
No. Name Connection to MELSERVO-J5 series
Connection to MELSERVO-JET series
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.4 [Drive recorder information list] screen 747
74
23.5 [Graph waveform] screen This screen displays the drive recorder information in waveform.
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
1)Alarm information
Information on the alarm being displayed
When data is read from a servo amplifier, an alarm number is displayed.
When data is read from a file, the name of the file is displayed.
2)[Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Open a drive recorder information file.
Page 727 [Open] window
3)[Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
The displayed waveform data can be saved as a file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
Data read from a file cannot be saved.
4)Scale optimization key
Returns the enlarged or repositioned graph display area to its original state when the [Graph waveform] screen was
displayed.
5)Zoom in mode key
Enables or disables the zoom in mode for waveform data.
While using the zoom in mode, you cannot enable the move mode.
Page 761 Zoom in mode
6)Move mode key
Enables or disables the move mode for waveform data.
While using the move mode, you cannot enable the zoom in mode.
Page 762 Move mode
2)
1)
4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11)
13)
13)
14) 18)
17)
20) 20)21)
19)
12)
15) 16)
3)
8 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
7)Cursor key
Displays or hides cursors on the graph display area.
To display the maximum and minimum values within a range, use the cursors to define the range.
Page 763 Cursor display
8)[Display item name] key (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Displays or hides analog and digital data names.
9)[Tools] key
Displays the [Graph setting] window.
Select the items to be displayed, and set the positions of scales.
Page 753 [Graph setting] window
10)[Onset data] key
Switches the screen to the [(At alarm occurrence)] screen.
Page 765 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
This key is disabled when data is read from a file.
11)[Recorder info.] key
Switches the screen to the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
Page 723 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
12)Unit of measure
Unit in which analog data is measured.
For the unsupported item, the unit does not appear.
13)Analog data scroll keys
Scroll the waveform data of an analog channel up or down one scale mark.
To continue scrolling the waveform data, touch and hold a scroll key.
14)Scale
Scale of waveform data
Scroll the analog waveform data up or down one scale mark.
To change the display position or scale, touch the [Tools] key.
15)Analog data names (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Display analog waveform data names.
The background color of each item matches the line color of the corresponding analog waveform data.
Only the items selected in the [Graph setting] window are displayed.
Page 754 [Item setting] tab
16)Digital data names (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Display analog waveform data names.
The background color of each item matches the line color of the corresponding analog waveform data.
Only the items selected in the [Graph setting] window are displayed.
Page 754 [Item setting] tab
17)Sampling time
Sampling time of the drive recorder function on the servo amplifier side
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 749
75
18)Graph display area
Displays digital and analog waveform data.
An arrow is displayed on the right edge of a digital waveform.
The digital waveform data displayed at the same height as the arrow is in the OFF state, and the data displayed above the
arrow is in the ON state.
To change the display position of digital waveform data, touch the [Tools] key.
To change the display position of analog waveform data, use the analog data scroll keys or the [Tools] key.
19)Trigger point
Timing at which data is saved by the drive recorder function on the servo amplifier side
20)Scroll keys
Scroll the graph display area up or down one scale mark.
21)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar left or right of the knob to scroll the graph display area left or right one scale mark.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
Digital waveform data
Analog waveform data
OFF
ON
0 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series
1)[Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Open a drive recorder information file.
Page 727 [Open] window
2)[Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
The displayed waveform data can be saved as a file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
Data read from a file cannot be saved.
3)Scale optimization key
Returns the enlarged or repositioned graph display area to its original state when the [Graph waveform] screen was
displayed.
4)Zoom in mode key
Enables or disables the zoom in mode for waveform data.
While using the zoom in mode, you cannot enable the move mode.
Page 761 Zoom in mode
5)Move mode key
Enables or disables the move mode for waveform data.
While using the move mode, you cannot enable the zoom in mode.
Page 762 Move mode
6)Cursor key
Displays or hides cursors on the graph display area.
To display the maximum and minimum values within a range, use the cursors to define the range.
Page 763 Cursor display
7)[Display item name] key (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Displays or hides analog and digital data names.
For the [Display item name] key, refer to the following.
Page 748 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)
11) 12)
13) 15)
14)
16) 16)17)
9)1) 2)
12)
16)
16)
10)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 751
75
8)[Tools] key
Displays the [Graph setting] window.
Select the items to be displayed, and set the positions of scales.
Page 753 [Graph setting] window
9)[Collect, trigger] key
Displays the [Collection, trigger setting] window.
Page 759 [Collection, trigger setting] window
This key is disabled when data is read from a file.
10)[Recorder info.] key
Switches the screen to the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
Page 725 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series
11)Unit of measure
Unit in which analog data is measured.
For the unsupported item, the unit does not appear.
When [Vacancy] is selected for an analog channel, [LSB] is displayed.
12)Analog data scroll keys
Scroll the waveform data of an analog channel up or down one scale mark.
To continue scrolling the waveform data, touch and hold a scroll key.
13)Scale
Scale of waveform data
Scroll the analog waveform data up or down one scale mark.
To change the display position or scale, touch the [Tools] key.
When there is an item that is [unselected] or [Unsupported], the graph line is not displayed.
14)Sampling time
Sampling time of the drive recorder function on the servo amplifier side
15)Graph display area
Displays digital and analog waveform data.
An arrow is displayed on the right edge of a digital waveform.
The digital waveform data displayed at the same height as the arrow is in the OFF state, and the data displayed above the
arrow is in the ON state.
To change the display position of digital waveform data, touch the [Tools] key.
To change the display position of analog waveform data, use the analog data scroll keys or the [Tools] key.
When there is an item that is [unselected] or [Unsupported], the graph line is not displayed.
16)Scroll keys
Scroll the graph display area up or down one scale mark.
17)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar left or right of the knob to scroll the graph display area left or right one scale mark.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
Digital waveform data
Analog waveform data
OFF
ON
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
[Graph setting] window Set the display contents of the [Graph waveform] screen.
Switch between tabs and set each item.
*1 When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series and there is an item that is [unselected] or [Unsupported], operation is disabled.
Item Description
[Item setting] tab *1 Set the graph line type, and set whether to display an item.
Page 754 [Item setting] tab
[Display position] tab *1 Set the display position of a scale.
Page 755 [Display position] tab
[Scale setting] tab *1 Set the scale increment (interval between scale marks).
Page 756 [Scale setting] tab
[Cursor setting] tab Switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, and set an item for which the cursors are displayed.
Define a range by the cursors to display the maximum and minimum values within the range.
Page 757 [Cursor setting] tab
[Icons legend] tab Displays the description of each icon on the [Graph waveform] screen.
Tab
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 753
75
[Item setting] tab Set the graph line type, and set whether to display an item.
1)[Line type]
Select a graph line type.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[1pt]
[2pt]
[1pt (dotted)]
[2pt (dotted)]
2)Target item
Displays the item to be set.
To switch between the items, touch the item switching key.
[Graph line: analog item]
[Graph line: digital item]
[Graph V-axis: analog item]
[Graph V-axis: digital item]
3)Item switching keys
Switch between target items.
4)Display selection
Set whether to display an item.
The characters of an item appear in the same color as the corresponding line in the waveform.
Select the items to be displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
For the unsupported item, the item name appears as [Unsupported].
When the GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series and [Vacancy] is selected for an analog
channel, [unselected] is displayed.
5)Axis number, station number
Displays the axis number and the station number of the servo amplifier whose graph waveform is displayed.
Example)
MR-J4-B, axis number 64: [Graph: Axis64]
MR-J4-GF, station number 120: [Graph: Sta.120]
MERLSERVO-J5 series, station number 1, single-axis: [Graph: Axis1]
MERLSERVO-J5 series, station number 2, axis C (three-axis): [Graph: Axis2-C]
1)
2) 3)
4)
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
[Display position] tab Sets the display position of each scale.
1)Target item
Displays the item to be set.
To switch between the items, touch the item switching key.
[Analog display]
[Digital display]
2)Item switching keys
Switch between target items.
3)Item list
Lists the display positions and units of all items.
Touch the display position of an item and set a value.
The set value is applied as the minimum scale value for the item.
However, if the set value is between two scale values, the smaller scale value becomes the minimum.
Example) When the set value is 30 and the set scale increment is 20 (scale values: 0, 20, 40...)
In this case, the minimum scale value becomes 20.
For the unsupported item, the item name appears as [Unsupported], and the unit does not appear for the analog display.
1) 2)
3)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 755
75
[Scale setting] tab Set the scale increment (interval between scale marks).
1)Item switching keys
Switch between the contents in the item list.
2)Item list
Lists the scale increments and units of all items.
Each item has a different setting range.
You can set a value with up to two decimal places. (The value set for [Time] must be an integer.)
For the unsupported item, the item name appears as [Unsupported] and the unit does not appear.
2)
1)
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
[Cursor setting] tab Switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, and set an item for which the cursors are displayed.
Define a range by the cursors to display the maximum and minimum values within the range.
1)Cursor orientation
Displays the current orientation of cursors.
To switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, touch the [Switch cursor] key.
[Cursor setting (vertical)]
[Cursor setting (horizontal)]
2)[Switch cursor] key
Switches between the vertical and horizontal cursors.
3)[Waveform]
Select the item for which the cursors are displayed.
For the unsupported item, the item name appears as [Unsupported].
4)[Following waveform]
Turn on or off the waveform following function.
When the waveform following function is on, the cursors follow the waveform movements.
When the waveform following function is off, the cursors do not follow the waveform movements.
5)Display target
Displays the display target of the cursor value list.
To switch between the targets, touch the item switching key.
The display target is fixed to [V-axis] for horizontal cursors.
[V-axis]
[H-axis]
[Interval A-B]
6)Item switching keys
Switch between the display targets of the cursor value list.
This key is displayed for vertical cursors.
7)
2) 3)
4)
1)
6)5)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 757
75
7)Cursor value list
Set the positions of cursors A and B, and display the maximum and minimum values within the range defined by the cursors.
Operation is disabled in the following case.
The GOT is connected to the MELSERVO-J5 series or MELSERVO-JET series and [Waveform] is [unselected] or
[Unsupported].
Different items are displayed for horizontal and vertical cursors.
*1 For the unsupported item, the unit does not appear.
Cursor orientation
Display target
Item Description
Horizontal [V-axis] *1 [A] Displays the position of cursor A.
To change the set value of [A], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor A moves accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B] Displays the position of cursor B.
To change the set value of [B], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor B moves accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[A-B] Displays the difference between cursor A and cursor B.
Vertical [H-axis] [A] Displays the position of the cursor A.
To change the set value of [A], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor A moves accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B] Displays the position of the cursor B.
To change the set value of [B], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor B moves accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B-A] Displays the difference between cursor A and cursor B.
[V-axis] *1 [A] Displays the value under cursor A for the item selected in [Waveform].
[B] Displays the value under cursor B for the item selected in [Waveform].
[A-B] Displays the difference between the values under cursor A and cursor B.
[Interval A-B] [Eff. val.] Displays the effective value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
[Max val.] Displays the maximum value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
[Min val.] Displays the minimum value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
Cursor A
Cursor B
Horizontal cursors Vertical cursors
Cursor A Cursor B
8 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
[Collection, trigger setting] window Displays the measurement time and trigger settings.
The [Collection, trigger setting] window appears when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J5 series
MELSERVO-JET series
1)Display switching tabs
Touch a tab to switch the display.
2)Display area
Displays items according to the selected tab.
[Collection setting] tab
1) [Setting Method]
Displays the setting method used when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
It is fixed to [Div specification].
2) [ms/div]
Displays the time per division used when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
3) [Number of collection Div]
Displays the number of divisions collected when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
It is fixed to [10 Div].
2)
1)
2)
1)
3)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 759
76
[Trigger setting] tab Displays the trigger condition written to the target servo amplifier.
The trigger condition can be set in the [Trigger setting] window.
1)Trigger data
Displays the data when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
When the graph waveform acquisition is triggered by an alarm, [Alarm trigger] is displayed for [Data 1], and the items from
[Level 1] to [Condition 2] are grayed out.
2)Trigger level
Displays the trigger level when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
In the following cases, the item is grayed out.
[Level 1]: [Data 1] is a digital channel or not selected.
[Level 2]: [Data 2] is a digital channel or not selected.
3)Trigger type
Displays the type selected when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
In the following cases, the item is grayed out.
[Condition 1]: [Data 1] is not selected.
[Condition 2]: [Data 2] is not selected.
4)[Trigger join condition]
Displays the condition when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
When [Trigger join condition] is [Invalid], [Data 2], [Level 2], and [Condition 2] are grayed out.
5)[Trigger position axis]
Displays the trigger position (0 to 100%) when the displayed graph waveform is acquired.
3)
1)
1)
2)
2) 3) 5)
4)
0 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
Operating procedure This section describes the operations on the graph display area.
The screen shown when the MELSERVO-J4 series is connected is used for description.
Page 761 Zoom in mode
Page 762 Move mode
Page 763 Cursor display
Zoom in mode Enlarge a part of the graph display area by the following procedure.
1. Touch the zoom in mode key.
2. Touch the start point of an area to be enlarged.
3. Slide your finger on the display and release the finger at the end point.
A square with the start point on the top left corner and the end point on the bottom right corner appears to indicate the area to
be enlarged.
1.
2.
3.
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 761
76
4. To enlarge the area, touch inside the square.
To cancel the enlarging and dismiss the square, touch outside the square.
To return to the original state, touch the scale optimization key.
Move mode Move the waveform on the graph display area by the following procedure.
1. Touch the move mode key.
Two lines crossing at right angles appear on the graph display area.
4.
1.
2 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
2. Touch the start point of a movement.
3. Slide your finger on the display and release the finger at the end point.
The waveform travels the distance from the start point to the end point, in the direction opposite to the movement of your
finger.
To return to the original state, touch the scale optimization key.
Cursor display Display the maximum and minimum values within a range defined by cursors.
To display cursors on the graph display area, touch the cursor key.
To switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, touch the [Tools] key.
Vertical cursors
2.
3.
1)
2)
1)
3)
4)4)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen 763
76
Horizontal cursors
1)Cursor
Define a range by cursor A and cursor B.
2)Values of vertical axes and horizontal axes
The values of vertical axes and horizontal axes are displayed according to the positions of cursor A and cursor B.
The characters of an item appear in the same color as the corresponding line in the waveform.
3)Effective value, maximum value, and minimum value
Indicates the effective value, maximum value, and minimum value within the range defined by the cursors.
These items are displayed when vertical cursors are used.
4)Cursor movement keys
Move the cursors with the distance between cursor A and cursor B unchanged.
To continue moving the cursors, touch and hold a cursor movement key.
The cursor movement keys do not appear when the zoom in mode or the move mode is enabled.
To change the distance between cursor A and cursor B, touch the [Tools] key.
4)
4)
1)
1)
2)
4 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.5 [Graph waveform] screen
23
23.6 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen This screen lists the data that was collected at the occurrence of an alarm.
The [(At alarm occurrence)] screen is displayed when the GOT is connected to the following servo amplifiers.
MELSERVO-J4 series
MELSERVO-JE series
1)Alarm information
Displays the information on the selected alarm.
When data is read from a servo amplifier, an alarm number is displayed.
When data is read from a file, the name of the file is displayed.
2)[Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Open a drive recorder information file.
Page 727 [Open] window
3)[Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Save the data in a file.
Page 728 [File storage destination] window
Data read from a file cannot be saved.
4)[Waveform] key
Switches the screen to the [Graph waveform] screen.
Page 748 [Graph waveform] screen
This key is disabled when data is read from a file.
5)[Recorder info.] key
Switches the screen to the [Drive recorder information list] screen.
Page 723 [Drive recorder information list] screen
2)
1) 3) 4) 5)
6)
7)
8)
8)
9)
23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.6 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen 765
76
6)Alarm detail information
7)List of data at occurrence of an alarm
8)Scroll keys
Scroll the list up or down one row.
9)Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
Item Description
[No.] Alarm number
[Occurred] Time between the instant when the monitored servo amplifier starts operating and the instant when an alarm
occurs
[Detail] Alarm detail number
[Axis], [Sta.] When [Motion CPU] or [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] is selected for [Via]
Number of the axis from which data is read.
Only when the axis label is set, the axis label name is also displayed.
When data is read from a file, [-] is displayed.
When [Simple Motion (CC-Link IE Field)] or [CC-Link IE Field module] is selected for [Via]
Number of the station from which data is read.
[Name] Alarm name
Item Description
[No.] Data numbers by servo amplifier
[Item] Items corresponding to each data number
When data is read from a file, the data is displayed in the same language as the file.
[Unit] Unit of each item
[Value] Values at occurrence of an alarm
6 23 DRIVE RECORDER 23.6 [(At alarm occurrence)] screen
24
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS
Page 767 Features
Page 768 Specifications
Page 776 Operations for display
Page 780 Operation Procedure
Page 806 Error Message and Corrective Actions
24.1 Features The CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics function monitors and diagnoses the status of the CC-Link IE TSN
or CC-Link IE Field Network.
The following describes the features of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
Diagnosing the CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network on the GOT The function enables you to diagnose the status of the CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network and check errors on the
GOT instead of using a personal computer.
Displaying the event history and outputting the data to a CSV file (CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics) With the function, you can display the acquired event history and event details in chronological order, and output the data to a
CSV file.
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.1 Features 767
76
24.2 Specifications Page 768 System configuration
Page 770 Station types and transition to extended functions available for the target modules
Page 774 Supported diagnostics items and station types
Page 774 Access range
Page 775 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit/cable and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller The following shows the PLC CPUs that support the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
*1 Use the Universal model QCPU that has a serial number starting with 12012 or later in the first 5 digits. *2 Use the LCPU that has a serial number starting with 13012 or later in the first 5 digits. *3 When a redundant system is configured, the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is not supported. *4 CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics is not supported.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 The RCPU and MELSEC iQ-F do not support this connection. *2 The MELSEC iQ-F does not support this connection during the CC-Link IE Filed Network diagnostics. *3 The QCPU (Q mode), C Controller module (Q series), and LCPU do not support this connection.
Controller Model
RCPU R00CPU, R01CPU, R02CPU, R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU,
R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU, R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU, R08PCPU *3*4, R16PCPU *3*4, R32PCPU *3*4, R120PCPU *3*4
C controller module (MELSEC iQ-R Series)*4 R12CCPU-V
MELSEC iQ-F FX5U, FX5UC, FX5UJ
QCPU (Q mode)*4 Q00UJCPU *1, Q00UCPU *1, Q01UCPU *1, Q02UCPU *1, Q03UDCPU *1, Q04UDHCPU *1, Q06UDHCPU *1,
Q10UDHCPU *1, Q13UDHCPU *1, Q20UDHCPU *1, Q26UDHCPU *1, Q03UDECPU *1, Q04UDEHCPU *1,
Q06UDEHCPU *1, Q10UDEHCPU *1, Q13UDEHCPU *1, Q20UDEHCPU *1, Q26UDEHCPU *1,
Q50UDEHCPU *1, Q100UDEHCPU *1, Q03UDVCPU *1, Q04UDVCPU *1, Q06UDVCPU *1, Q13UDVCPU *1,
Q26UDVCPU *1, Q04UDPVCPU *1, Q06UDPVCPU *1, Q13UDPVCPU *1, Q26UDPVCPU *1
C controller module (Q Series)*4 Q12DCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-V, Q24DHCCPU-LS, Q26DHCCPU-LS
LCPU *2*4 L02SCPU, L02SCPU-P, L02CPU, L02CPU-P, L06CPU, L06CPU-P, L26CPU, L26CPU-P, L26CPU-BT,
L26CPU-PBT
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Direct CPU connection (serial) *1
Serial communication connection *2
Ethernet connection (Ethernet port built in the CPU)
CC-Link IE TSN connection*3
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE
Field Network diagnostics
Diagnosing the status of the CC-Link IE
TSN and CC-Link IE Field Networks,
displaying the event history, and
outputting data to a CSV file
8 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications
24
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
Network diagnostics to the GOT.
To use an extended function that can be started from the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, also
incorporate the applicable system application (extended function) into the package data.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications 769
77
Station types and transition to extended functions available for the target modules The following shows the station types and transition to extended functions available for the modules that support the CC-Link
IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics : Available, : Not available
Target module Station type Extended function
Master station
Submaster station
Local station
Remote device station
Intelligent device station
System launcher function
Drive recorder function*1
PLC CPU module with built-in CC-Link
IE
R04ENCPU
R08ENCPU
R16ENCPU
R32ENCPU
R120ENCPU
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local
module
RJ71GF11-T2
QJ71GF11-T2
LJ71GF11-T2
Multi-network supporting Ethernet
module
RJ71EN71
CC-Link IE Field Network Simple
Motion module
RD77GF4
RD77GF8
RD77GF16
RD77GF32
QD77GF4
QD77GF8
QD77GF16
CC-Link IE Field Network remote head
module
RJ72GF15-T2
CC-Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15-T2
CC-Link IE Field
Network Block
type remote
module
Main input module NZ2GF2B1-16D
NZ2GF2B1N-16D
NZ2GF2S1-16D
NZ2GFCE3-16D
NZ2GFCE3-32D
NZ2GFCE3-16DE
NZ2GFCM1-16D
NZ2GFCM1-16DE
NZ2GFCF1-32D
NZ2GFSS2-32D
Main output
module
NZ2GF2B1-16T
NZ2GF2B1N-16T
NZ2GF2B1-16TE
NZ2GF2B1N-16TE
NZ2GF2S1-16T
NZ2GF2S1-16TE
NZ2GFCE3-16T
NZ2GFCE3-32T
NZ2GFCE3-16TE
NZ2GFCM1-16T
NZ2GFCM1-16TE
NZ2GFCF1-32T
0 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications
24
*1 This is selectable when the connected station is a master station.
CC-Link IE Field
Network Block
type remote
module
Main I/O
combined module
NZ2GFCF1-32DDT
NZ2GFCE3-32DT
Extension input
module
NZ2EX2B1-16D
Extension output
module
NZ2EX2B1-16T
NZ2EX2B1-16TE
Main A/D
converter module
NZ2GF2B-60AD4
NZ2GF2BN-60AD4
Main D/A
converter module
NZ2GF2B-60DA4
NZ2GF2BN-60DA4
Extension A/D
converter module
NZ2EX2B-60AD4
Extension D/A
converter module
NZ2EX2B-60DA4
Temperature
control module
NZ2GF2B-60TCTT4
NZ2GF2B-60TCRT4
High-speed
counter module
NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
CC-Link IE Field Network interface
board
Q80BD-J71GF11-T2
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet
adapter module
NZ2GF-ETB
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
bridge module
NZ2GF-CCB
CC-Link IE Field Network intelligent
device station module
FX5-CCLIEF
CC-Link IE Field Network compatible
servo amplifier
MR-J4-GF
MR-J4-B-RJ010
(+MR-J3-T10)
GOT
communication
unit
CC-Link IE Field
Network
communication
unit
GT15-J71GF13-T2
Target module Station type Extended function
Master station
Submaster station
Local station
Remote device station
Intelligent device station
System launcher function
Drive recorder function*1
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications 771
77
CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics : Available, : Not available
Target module Station type Extended function
Master station
Local station
Remote station
System launcher function
Drive recorder function*1
Servo amplifier graph function*1
CC-Link IE TSN master/local module RJ71GN11-T2
FX5-CCLGN-MS
CC-Link IE TSN compatible Motion module RD78G4
RD78G8
RD78G16
RD78G32
RD78G64
RD78GHV
RD78GHW
CC-Link IE TSN Block
type remote module
Input module NZ2GN2B1-32D
NZ2GN2B1-32D
NZ2GNCF1-32D
NZ2GNCE3-32D
NZ2GNSS2-8D
Output module NZ2GN2S1-32T
NZ2GN2B1-32T
NZ2GNCF1-32T
NZ2GN2S1-32TE
NZ2GN2B1-32TE
NZ2GNSS2-8TE
I/O combined module NZ2GN2S1-32DT
NZ2GN2B1-32DT
NZ2GNCE3-32DT
NZ2GN2S1-32DTE
NZ2GN2B1-32DTE
NZ2GNSS2-16DTE
A/D converter module NZ2GN2S-60AD4
NZ2GN2B-60AD4
D/A converter module NZ2GN2S-60DA4
NZ2GN2B-60DA4
CC-Link IE TSN compatible servo amplifier MR-J5-G
MR-J5-G-RJ
MR-J5W2-G
MR-J5W3-G
MR-JET-G
CC-Link IE TSN compatible inverter FR-A80-GN
FR-A82-GN
FR-A80(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-A82(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-A86(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-F80(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-F82(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-F86(+FR-A8NCG)
FR-E80-E
FR-E80-SCE
2 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications
24
*1 This is selectable when the connected station is a master station.
GOT communication
unit
CC-Link IE TSN
communication unit
GT25-J71GN13-T2
Target module Station type Extended function
Master station
Local station
Remote station
System launcher function
Drive recorder function*1
Servo amplifier graph function*1
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications 773
77
Supported diagnostics items and station types The following shows the station types supported by the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and the
available diagnostics items by station type.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 The status of an unsupported module is not displayed. *2 Not available when the connection destination is an RCPU or MELSEC iQ-F. *3 Only available for the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. *4 Only available for the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
Access range The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Item Type of the target station
Master station Local station Submaster station
Network configuration
diagram monitor
Display system configuration diagram function
(Acquiring connection information)
Displaying the cable disconnection
Selecting a module on another network to be
diagnosed upon startup of the diagnostics function
Deleting the disconnected station
Selected station
communication status
monitor *1
Displaying the status of the selected station
Displaying the MAC address
Displaying the IP address
Displaying the error details (troubleshooting)
Disconnected station
status monitor
Displaying the disconnected station
Network event history *2*3
Displaying the events that have occurred on the own
station
Displaying all network events
Saving the event history
Clearing the own station event history
Clearing the whole network event history
Displaying the network event details
Station information list*4 Station information list display function
4 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications
24
Precautions
Monitoring other networks To monitor other networks, configure the routing parameter setting on the GOT and PLC sides.
For the routing parameter setting, refer to the following.
Routing parameter setting on the GOT side
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Routing parameter setting on the PLC side
User's manual of the CC-Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module used
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.2 Specifications 775
77
24.3 Operations for display This section explains how to display the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics screen after the GOT is turned
on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Display the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics screen.
Perform one of the following operations.
Using the special function switch (CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics) set in the project
For information on how to set a special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [CC-Link IE diagnostics] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Starting from the system launcher
Touch a module on the system configuration screen of the system launcher, and then touch [CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
Network diagnostics] on the extended function selection screen.
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the controller for which the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is performed.
After the GOT is turned on, the [Select channel] window is displayed automatically only at the first startup of the network
monitor.
To display the [Select channel] window after the first startup, touch the change connection destination key on the CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics screen.
Page 780 Operation Procedure
[Select channel] window
Change connection destination key
6 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.3 Operations for display
24
4. Start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
Select a channel number to start the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.3 Operations for display 777
77
Screen transition
*1 Only available for the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics. *2 Only available for the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
[Select channel] window Change connection destination key
[Network Event History] window
[Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window
[Legend] window
[Select Diagnostics Destination] window
[] key
[] key
[Error Details] window[] key
[] key
[] key
[] key
Utility main menu
or
user-created monitor screen
Network configuration diagram
Selected station communication status monitor window
[] key
[] key
[Change Module] key
[Legend] key
[Monitor D Link Unperformed St.] key
[Event History] key*1
[PORT1 Comm. Err.] key, [PORT2 Comm. Err.] key, [PORT1 Cable Disconnected] key, [PORT2 Cable Disconnected] key, [Module Error] key, and [CPU Stop Error] key
[Monitor Selected St. Comm. Status] key
[Station information list] window
[Station list] key*2
8 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.3 Operations for display
24
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination
with a special function switch (System launcher).
When the system launcher does not support the connection destination
When the system launcher does not support the set connection destination, a dialog appears at the startup.
For the details of the system launcher function, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed
[] key
The CC-Link IE TSN/ CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is started.
[] key
System configuration screen
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.3 Operations for display 779
78
24.4 Operation Procedure This section explains the contents of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics screen and the functions of
the keys displayed on the screen.
The display screen of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics varies with the GOT model.
Page 780 Network configuration diagram screen
Page 784 [Select Diagnostics Destination] window
Page 786 Context menu
Page 788 [Legend] window
Page 790 Communication status monitor window
Page 793 [Error Details] window
Page 795 [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window
Page 797 [Network Event History] window
Network configuration diagram screen This section explains the screen layout and the common operations when the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network
diagnostics is performed.
Display contents and key functions
Displayed contents The following explains the structure of the network configuration diagram screen and the functions of the keys displayed on
the screen after the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is started.
1)[Selected Station]
Select a monitoring target station in the list box.
The network configuration diagram of the selected station appears in the network configuration diagram display area.
2)Network status display area
Displays the status of the network being monitored.
The following shows the display items.
[Comm. mode]
Displays the communication mode set by the parameter of the master station during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
The display range is [Unicast] or [Multicast].
Monitoring status
Displays the current monitoring status.
[Monitoring], [Stop Monitor], or [Communication error] is displayed.
[Total Slave Stations(Parameter)]
Indicates the total number of slave stations specified with parameters.
The displayed value ranges from [1] to [120].
3)
1) 2)
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics
0 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
[Total Slave Stations(Connected)]
Indicates the number of slave stations connected in the network configuration diagram.
The master station and disconnected station are not included.
The displayed value ranges from [1] to [120].
[Current Link Scan Time(ms)]
Indicates the link scan time of the network being monitored during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
The displayed value ranges from [0] to [65535].
[Comm. cycle intv. set value (us)]
Displays the setting value of the communication cycle for the network being monitored during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
The displayed value ranges from [0] to [10000].
[Number of Station Errors Detected]
Indicates the total number of stations where errors have occurred in the network configuration diagram.
3)Network configuration diagram display area
Displays the network configuration diagram of the diagnostics target network.
The following shows the display items.
a)Station connected with the GOT
Displays the IP address of the connected station during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
b)Port where a cable is connected
P1: PORT1
P2: PORT2
c)Equipment icon
The station type and station number, or the device name and station number are displayed above each equipment icon.
Displays the IP address of the slave station during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
To switch the display between station type and device name, use the [Alias] key.
The background color of text varies with the station type as shown below.
Turquoise: Reserved station
Orange: Reserved station that is temporarily canceled
Yellow: Temporary error invalid station
Gray: Error invalid station
Red: Master station that is operating as a submaster station
a) b) c)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 781
78
Key functions
1)[Change Module] key
Displays the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window.
While the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window is being displayed, monitoring of the network configuration diagram has
stopped.
Page 784 [Select Diagnostics Destination] window
2)Change connection destination key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
3)[] key
Closes the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and returns to the screen where the diagnostics was
started.
4)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the network configuration diagram display area up or down one row.
5) Up/down scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the network configuration diagram display area up or
down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
6)Left/right scroll key
Scrolls the network configuration diagram display area left or right one column.
7)Left/right scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the network configuration diagram display area left or
right one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
8)[Alias] key
Switches the display between the station type and device name during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
Switches the display to the station type, device name, IP address (decimal), or IP address (hexadecimal) during the CC-Link
IE TSN diagnostics.
9)[Update] key
For the master station that has the serial number starting with 17022 or later in the first 5 digits Updates the network
configuration diagram if it differs from the actual one.
For the master station that has the serial number starting with 17021 or earlier in the first 5 digits Deletes disconnected
stations from the network configuration diagram.
The deleted stations are displayed in the [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window.
Page 795 [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window
1) 3)2)
5)
4)
4)
6)6)
8) 9) 10) 11) 7) 13) 14)12)
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics
2 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
10)[Legend] key
Displays the [Legend] window.
Page 788 [Legend] window
11)[Monitor Selected St. Comm. Status] key
Displays the window for monitoring the communication status of the selected station.
Page 790 Communication status monitor window
12)[Monitor D Link Unperformed St.] key
Displays the [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window.
Page 795 [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window
13) [Event History] key
Displays the [Network Event History] window during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
While the [Network Event History] window is being displayed, monitoring of the network configuration diagram has stopped.
Page 797 [Network Event History] window
14) [Station list] key
Displays the station information list window during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
Page 804 [Station information list] window
Case where the configuration information cannot be acquired from the module to be diagnosed If the configuration information cannot be acquired from the module to be diagnosed, the message is displayed in the network
configuration diagram.
The selected station is fixed to the connected station, and the following windows can be displayed.
Communication status monitor window
Legend window
Network event history window (only for the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics)
The following shows an example of display status during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
Message
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 783
78
[Select Diagnostics Destination] window When multiple CC-Link IE TSN modules or CC-Link IE Field Network modules are connected to the CPU in the connected
station, select a module to be diagnosed.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window and the functions of the keys displayed on
the window.
Displayed contents
1) Module selection list
Lists the CC-Link IE TSN modules or CC-Link IE Field Network modules that are connected to the CPU in the connected
station.
The following shows the display items.
Module number
Displays the module number of each CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network module.
The displayed value ranges from [1] to [64].
Network number
Displays the network number of each CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network module.
The displayed value ranges from [1] to [239].
Station type
Displays the station type of each CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network module.
[Master Station], [Local Station], or [Sub-Master Station] is displayed.
Station number
Displays the station number of each CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network module.
The displayed value ranges from [0] to [120], or [Sta.No. not set] is displayed.
1)
4 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions The following shows the operation keys in the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window.
1)[] key
Closes the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down one row.
3)Up/down scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
4)[OK] key
Closes the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window and displays the selected diagnostics destination in the network
configuration diagram display area.
5)[Cancel] key
Cancels the selected item, closes the [Select Diagnostics Destination] window, and returns to the network configuration
diagram.
1)
3)
2)
2)
4) 5)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 785
78
Context menu Touch an equipment icon in the network configuration diagram to display the context menu.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the context menu and the functions of the keys displayed on the menu.
Displayed contents
1)Title bar
Displays the model of the module in the selected station.
2)[Alias]
Displays the user-specified name of the module in the selected station.
Displays nothing when no model name is specified.
3)[Station Type]
Displays the station type of the selected station.
4)[Station No.]
Displays the station number of the selected station.
3)
2)
4)
1)
6 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions
1) [] key
Exits the context menu and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2) [Monitor Selected St. Comm. Status] key
Displays the window for monitoring the communication status of the selected station.
This key can be used for all selected stations.
3) [System Launcher] key
Exits the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics and starts the system launcher.
During the CC-Link IE Field network diagnostics, when one of the following stations is selected, the system launcher is not
started.
CC-Link IE Field Network interface board
Remote device station
During the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics, when a remote station is selected, the system launcher is not started.
4) [Servo amplifier graph] key
During the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics, exits the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics and starts the servo amplifier graph when a
master station is monitored and MR-J5 or MR-JET is selected.
5) [Drive recorder] key(s)
During the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, exits the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics and starts the drive recorder
when a master station is monitored and MR-J4-GF is selected.
During the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics, exits the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics and starts the drive recorder when a master
station is monitored and MR-J5 or MR-JET is selected.
For a multi-axis servo amplifier, keys are displayed according to the number of axes.
Select an axis to start the drive recorder.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
5)
Single-axis servo amplifier Multi-axis servo amplifier
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 787
78
[Legend] window This window lists the descriptions of the icons appearing on the network configuration diagram.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Legend] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the window.
Displayed contents
1)Legend display area
Lists the descriptions of the icons that indicate the equipment status and the communication status between stations.
The following shows the display items.
1)
[Legend] window (2/5)
[Legend] window (4/5) [Legend] window (5/5)
[Legend] window (1/5) [Legend] window (3/5)
8 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions The following shows the operation keys in the [Legend] window.
1)[] key
Exits the [Legend] window and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2)Left key
Moves to the previous page.
3)Right key
Moves to the next page.
1)
2) 3)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 789
79
Communication status monitor window This window displays the communication status of the module that is selected in the network configuration diagram.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the communication status monitor window and the functions of the keys displayed on
the window.
Displayed contents
1)Title bar
Displays the module type of the selected station.
2)[Station No.]
Displays the station number of the selected station.
3)Error notification
Displays [Error] when an error has occurred in the selected station.
4)[Mode]
Displays the mode of the selected station during the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
The following shows the display items.
[Online]
[Online (Normal Mode)]
[Online (High-Speed Mode)]
[Online (High-Speed Remote Net Mode)]
[Loop Test]
5)[Class]
Displays the CC-Link IE TSN Class of the selected station during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
The following shows the display items.
[A (Realtime Communication)]
[B (Synchronized Realtime Communication)]
6)[Network]
Displays the network type.
The following shows the display items.
[CC IE Field]
[CC IE TSN]
7)[MAC Address]
Displays the MAC address of the selected station.
1)
9)
2) 4)
7) 8)
1) 3)
2) 5)
7) 8)
3)
10)
6)6)
11) 11)
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics
0 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
8)[IP Address]
Displays the IP address set for the CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network module.
In the following cases, no IP address is displayed.
Station where no IP address has been set
Station where no station number has been set
Remote device station
Bridge module
Counter module
Motion module
Displays the IP address in hexadecimal on the selected station communication status monitor window during the CC-Link IE
TSN diagnostics, if the IP address is displayed in hexadecimal in the network configuration diagram.
9)Extension module name display area
Displays the type and number of points of each extension module that is connected to the selected main module during the
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
Displays nothing when no extension module is connected.
Displays nothing when the extension module information cannot be acquired from the connected station.
10) Network synchronous communication in-progress message
Appears while the selected station is performing network synchronous communication during the CC-Link IE TSN
diagnostics.
It does not appear when network synchronous communication is not being performed.
11)Communication status of the selected station
Displays the communication status of the selected station.
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 791
79
Key functions The following shows the operation keys on the communication status monitor window.
1)[] key
Closes the communication status monitor window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2)[PORT1 Comm. Err.] key
Appears when the line status of PORT1 in the selected station is abnormal.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
3)[PORT1 Cable Disconnected] key
Appears when the cable connected to PORT1 in the selected station is faulty.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
4)[PORT2 Comm. Err.] key
Appears when the line status of PORT2 in the selected station is abnormal.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
5)[PORT2 Cable Disconnected] key
Appears when the cable connected to PORT2 in the selected station is faulty.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
6)[Module Error] key
Appears when an error has occurred in the module.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
7)[CPU Stop Error] key
Appears when a CPU stop error has occurred.
Touch this key to display the [Error Details] window.
Page 793 [Error Details] window
1)6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
7)
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
7)
1)
2 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
[Error Details] window This window displays the error details when an error has occurred in the module that is selected in the network configuration
diagram.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Error Details] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the window.
Displayed contents
1) [Selected station]
Displays the station number of the selected station.
2) Display area for detailed information, error factors, or troubleshooting
Displays detailed information, error factors, or troubleshooting for the generated error.
To switch the display, touch the [Detailed Information] key, [Error Factor] key, or [Troubleshooting] key.
The following lists the display items of [Detailed Information].
[Total Number of Received Data on PORT1 side]
[Total Number of Received Data on PORT2 side]
[Own Station Connection Status]
[Reason for Transmission Interruption]
[Disconnected Cable Detecting Count on PORT1 side]
[Disconnected Cable Detecting Count on PORT2 side]
[Data Link Stop Factor]
1)
2)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 793
79
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the other station CPU operation status monitor screen.
1)[] key
Closes the [Error Details] window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2)[Detailed Information] key
Displays the error details in the display area.
3)[Error Factor] key
Displays the error factors in the display area.
4)[Troubleshooting] key
Displays the troubleshooting in the display area.
When [Error Factor] is selected
When [Detailed Information] is selected
When [Troubleshooting] is selected
1)2)
3) 4)
4 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
[Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window This window lists the stations where data link is not performed.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window and the functions of the keys
displayed on the window.
Displayed contents
1) Data link unperformed station display area
Lists the icons of the stations where data link is not performed.
The station type and station number are displayed above each icon.
The background color of text varies with the station type as shown below.
Turquoise: Reserved station
Orange: Reserved station that is temporarily canceled
Yellow: Temporary error invalid station
Gray: Error invalid station
During the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, when the master station has the serial number starting with 17021 or earlier
in the first 5 digits, updating the network configuration diagram deletes the disconnected stations.
The deleted stations are displayed as data link unperformed stations.
1)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 795
79
Key functions The following shows the operation keys on the [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window.
1)[] key
Closes the [Data Link Unperformed Station Monitor] window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2)Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down one row.
3)Up/down scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
1)
2)
2)
3)
6 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
[Network Event History] window During the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, this window displays the history of network events and the event details in
chronological order.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Network Event History] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the
window.
Displayed contents
1) Collection target display area
Displays the collection target.
2) Network event history list display area
Displays the network event history list.
The following shows the display items.
Network event number
[Detc. St.]
[Occurrence Date]
[HistoryContents]
3) Display area for event details
Displays the number and details of the event selected in the network event history list.
2)
3)
1)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 797
79
Key functions The following shows the operation keys in the [Network Event History] window.
1) [] key
Closes the [Network Event History] window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2) Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down one row.
3) Up/down scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
4) [Detailed Info.] key
Displays the [Detailed Information] window.
Page 799 [Detailed Information] window
5) [Clear history] key
Deletes the network event history that the module retains.
6) [Refresh] key
Acquires the latest network event history from the module and updates the network event history list.
7) [History Setting] key
Displays the [History Acquisition Setting] window.
Page 800 [History Acquisition Setting] window
8) [Create File] key
Displays the [Create File] window.
Page 802 [Create File] window
1)
8)7)6)5)4)
2)
2)
3)
8 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
[Detailed Information] window The following explains the structure of the [Detailed Information] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the
window.
Displayed contents
1)Collection target display area
Displays the collection target.
2)Detailed information display area
Displays the details of the event selected in the network event history list.
Key functions
1)[] key
Exits the selected station communication status monitor window.
2)
1)
1)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 799
80
[History Acquisition Setting] window The following explains the structure of the [History Acquisition Setting] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the
window.
Displayed contents
1)Event history acquisition setting list
Lists the collection target events.
Select the event to save it in the history.
The following table lists the collection target events..
Display item Details
Events on the own
station
Linkup/Linkdown Detection Indicates that the linkup or linkdown is detected on PORT1 or PORT2
of the own station.
Baton pass status variation Indicates that the baton pass status of the own station is changed.
Data link status variation Indicates that the data link status of the own station is changed.
Reception of Data Link Start/Stop instruction Indicates that the own station receives the data link start/stop
instruction.
Execution of Data Link Start/Stop instruction Indicates that the own station sends the data link start/stop instruction
to the own station or another station.
Reception of Enable/Disable temporary Error Invalid Station
instruction
Indicates that the own station receives the enable/disable temporary
error invalid station instruction from the master station.
Execution of Enable/Disable temporary Error Invalid Station
instruction
Indicates that the own station sends the enable/disable temporary error
invalid station instruction to the slave station.
Reception of Enable/Restore reserved station instruction Indicates that the own station receives the enable/restore reserved
station instruction from the master station.
Execution of Enable/Restore reserved station instruction Indicates that the own station sends the enable/restore reserved
station instruction to the slave station.
Reception of station No. setting Indicates that the own station receives the station number setting
instruction from the master station.
Execution of station No. setting Indicates that the own station sends the station number setting request
to a station where no station number is set.
Parameter changes Indicates that the parameter setting of the module in the own station is
changed.
Own station PLC run status change Indicates that the RUN status of the CPU in the own station is changed.
Received Frame Error Indicates that a frame error occurs on PORT of the own station.
Error in own station module Indicates that an error occurs in the module of the own station.
Error in own station PLC Indicates that an error occurs in the PLC of the own station.
1)
0 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions
1)[] key
Discards the setting and exits the [History Acquisition Setting] window.
2)[Select All] key
Selects all items of the own station events and other stations events.
3)[Cancel All] key
Clears all items of the own station events and other stations events.
4)Left key
Moves to the previous page.
5)Right key
Moves to the next page.
6)[End Setting] key
Ends the setting.
7)[Cancel] key
Discards the setting and exits the [History Acquisition Setting] window.
Events on other
stations
Baton pass status variation Indicates that the baton pass status is changed.
Data link status variation Indicates that the data link status of a station is changed.
Temporary Error Invalid Station setting status change Indicates that the setting status of a temporary error invalid station is
changed by the enable/disable temporary error invalid station
instruction.
Reserved station status change Indicates that the setting status of a reserved station is changed by the
enable/restore reserved station instruction.
Own station PLC run status change Indicates that the RUN status of the CPU in a station is changed.
Received Frame Error Indicates that PORT1 or PORT2 in another station receives a faulty
frame.
Error in PLC Indicates that a CPU error (continuation/stop) occurs in another station.
Parameter Error Indicates that the parameter analysis result contains an error.
Master station overlap/station No. overlap Indicates that a master station duplication error or station number
duplication error occurs on the network.
Path was switched while using Loopback function Indicates that path switching occurs when the loopback function is
used.
Display item Details
2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
1)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 801
80
[Create File] window The following explains the structure of the [Create File] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the window.
Displayed contents
1)File path
Displays the path where a CSV file is to be saved.
The drive that has been selected in [Select drive] is used.
The following shows an example of a CSV file name.
1)
NetworkEventHistory_YYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv
Year Month
Date Hour
Minute Second
2 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions
1) [] key
Cancels the setting, and closes the [History Acquisition Setting] window.
2) [Drive selection]
Select the drive to save the CSV file.
Select a drive that the GOT can access when the [Create File] window is displayed.
3) [Language selection]
Select the language for the CSV file.
The following shows the selectable languages.
Japanese
English
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
Korean
4) [OK] key
Creates a CSV file with the set language in the selected drive.
5) [Cancel] key
Cancels the setting, and closes the [Create File] window.
2)
1)
5)4)
3)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 803
80
[Station information list] window This window lists the information of the stations in the whole network during the CC-Link IE TSN diagnostics.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the [Station information list] window and the functions of the keys displayed on the
window.
Displayed contents
1) [Total stations]
Displays the number of slave stations displayed in the station information list.
2) Station information list area
Displays the station information list.
The following shows the display items.
[No.]
[Model]
[F/W version]
[IP address]
[Mfg. info.]
[MAC address]
[Module fixed info]
When IP address in the network configuration diagram is displayed in hexadecimal, [IP address] in the station information list
is also displayed in hexadecimal.
2)
1)
4 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure
24
Key functions
1) [] key
Closes the [Station information list] window, and returns to the network configuration diagram.
2) Up/down scroll key
Scrolls the contents in the list up or down one station.
3) Up/down scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the list.
1)
2)
2)
3)
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.4 Operation Procedure 805
80
24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is
executed, and the corrective actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
Failed to access the : drive.*1
Check for the memory card and the access switch
status.
The GOT cannot access the drive where the file
saved.
Check that a memory card has been installed to
the drive.
Check that the access switch is on.(Only when
drive A is used)
The : drive format is not correct.*1
Please use a memory card in the correct format.
The format of the memory card (file storage
destination drive) is invalid.
Format the memory card so as to be compatible
with the GOT.
The drive is write protected.
The file cannot be saved.
Check the write destination drive (*:).
The memory card (file storage destination drive) is
write-protected.
Check that the memory card is not write-protected.
Otherwise, remove the write protection.
Free space in the : drive is insufficient.*1
Failed to save the file.
Select the drive with sufficient free space.
The memory card (file storage destination drive)
does not have enough space.
Use a memory card having enough space.
Delete unnecessary files to free up space on the
memory card.
Failed to create a file.
Check if the write destination memory card is
correct and try the operation again.
The file creation has failed due to factors other
than those above.
Check the memory card, install it again, and create
the file.
Communication error occurred.
Please confirm that cables and communication
routes are correct.
Please also check that the PLC is running and the
routing information is set.
The communication with the connected PLC CPU
cannot be established.
Check the connection between the PLC and the
GOT. (No disconnected connectors and no
broken cables)
Check that no error occurs in the PLC.
When using the Ethernet connection, check that
the routing parameter setting on GT Designer3 is
correct.
Cannot access the connection destination.
Please select the connection destination again.
The communication with the connected PLC CPU
cannot be established.
Check the connection between the PLC and the
GOT. (No disconnected connectors and no
broken cables)
Check that no error occurs in the PLC.
When using the Ethernet connection, check that
the routing parameter setting on GT Designer3 is
correct.
The device set to the connection destination is not
supported by this function.
The CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network
diagnostics does not support the PLC CPU that is
specified as the connection destination.
Specify a PLC CPU that is supported by the CC-
Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
This function can not be performed using the
current connection target setting.
Please change the Current Connection Destination
and try again.
For the serial connection, another station has been
specified as a connection destination of the PLC
CPU.
For the serial connection, specify the own station
as a connection destination of the PLC CPU.
Selected module does not exist.
Please select again.
The module selected in the [Select Diagnostics
Destination] window does not exist in the
connected station.
While the module monitored in the last session is
not mounted on the connected station, the CC-
Link IE Field Network diagnostics is started by
using a special function switch with no module
specified.
While the module monitored in the last session is
not mounted on the connected station, the CC-
Link IE Field Network diagnostics is started from
the utility.
A module nonexistent in the connected station is
specified in the setting of the special function
switch with which the CC-Link IE Field Network
diagnostics is started.
Mount the target CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-
Link IE Field Network module on the connected
master station.
The connection destination station does not have
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field modules.
The connected station has no CC-Link IE TSN
module or CC-Link IE Field Network module
when the [OK] button in the [Select Diagnostics
Destination] window is touched.
The connected station has no CC-Link IE TSN
module or CC-Link IE Field Network module
when the [Change Module] key is touched.
Add a CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field
Network module as a station controlled by the
connection destination PLC CPU.
6 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions
24
*1 ":" indicates the name of the selected drive.
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics
cannot be started.
Possible causes are as follows.
The target module in the connection destination
is not in online mode.
A communication mode not supported by this
version is specified.
Set the module operation mode of the module
parameter to online.
The CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field
Network module to be diagnosed is not in the
online mode or loop test mode.
Set the online mode or line test mode for the CC-
Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field Network
module to be diagnosed.
Select station No. is not set.
Please execute again after setting station No.
The user has attempted to start the system
launcher or the drive recorder from the context
menu of a station that has no station number.
Use peripheral software to set a station number for
the selected station.
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field diagnostics
cannot be started.
Possible causes are as follows.
The target module does not exist in the
connected station.
I/O assignment of system parameters does not
match the actual config.
Check the actual configuration using peripheral S/
W and set I/O assignment in programmable
controllers correctly.
The connected station has no CC-Link IE TSN
module or CC-Link IE Field Network module, or the
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network
diagnostics is started when the connected PLC has
the incorrect I/O assignment setting.
Add a CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE
Field Network module as a station controlled by
the connection destination PLC CPU.
Use peripheral software to check if the I/O
assignment setting of the PLC is correct.
This function can not be performed using the
current connection target setting.
Please change the current connection destination
and try again.
A connection type unsupported by the CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is
specified.
Specify a connection type (serial connection or
Ethernet connection) that is supported by the CC-
Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
The set port No. is not supported by this function.
Review the port No. in the Ethernet setting on the
GOT.
A port number unsupported by the CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is set
when the Ethernet connection is used.
Specify a port number supported by the CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics in the
Ethernet setting in GT Designer3.
RCPU: 5006 (fixed)
MELSEC iQ-F: 5562 (fixed)
QCPU: 5006
LCPU: 5006 (fixed)
The same network No. is used in the Ethernet
setting the diagnostics target.
Review the network No. of the Ethernet setting.
A network number registered in the Ethernet
setting is specified for the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link
IE Field Network diagnostics target module that is
connected by Ethernet.
Check the Ethernet setting on GT Designer3.
Specify a network number other than those
registered in the Ethernet setting for the CC-Link IE
TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics target
module.
The link module is not in the online mode.
Please set the link module's switch to the online
mode.
The CC-Link IE TSN module or CC-Link IE Field
Network module to be diagnosed is not in the
online mode.
Set the online mode for the CC-Link IE TSN
module or CC-Link IE Field Network module to be
diagnosed.
The network No. and the station No. of the
connection destination do not exist in the Ethernet
setting.
Please review the settings in the screen design
software.
The PLC CPU connected by Ethernet has the
network number and station number that are not
registered in the Ethernet setting.
Add the network number and station number of the
connected PLC CPU to the Ethernet setting on GT
Designer3.
This function does not support setting the Ethernet
unit as the connection destination.
An Ethernet interface module is specified in the
Ethernet setting when the Ethernet connection is
used.
Specify a Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the Ethernet
setting on GT Designer3.
Connected station No. has not been set.
Please set it.
No station number has been set for the module
selected in the [Select Diagnostics Destination]
window.
Set the station number for the selected station with
the peripheral software.
The specified function cannot be executed.
Check the manual of the connection destination
module.
The connected module cannot execute this
function.
Refer to the manual of the connected module to
check if the function is supported.
If the function is not supported, update the
firmware to support the function.
The network topology of the diagnostic target is not
supported.
Possible causes are as follows.
A network topology not supported by this version
is used.
Unsupported network topology is set to the
connected module.
Set the network topology that supports this function
to the connected module.
Error message Description Corrective action
24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions 807
80
MEMO
8 24 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS 24.5 Error Message and Corrective Actions
25
Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000.
Page 809 Features
Page 810 Specifications
Page 819 Operations for Display
Page 821 Operating Procedure
Page 835 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
25.1 Features The system launcher (servo network) function can be used when the system launcher is used.
For details of the system launcher, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
The system launcher (servo network) enables the following functions for the Motion CPU connected to the GOT and the servo
amplifier connected to the simple motion module.
Displaying the configuration of the servo system controller network The configuration of the servo system controller network can be displayed from the system launcher by using this function.
Each system application applicable to a module can be started.
Page 821 Servo network configuration diagram
Displaying the system configuration of a module The system configuration of a module in the servo system controller network can be displayed.
Page 827 System Configuration screen
Displaying an error that has occurred in a servo amplifier When an error occurs in the Motion CPU connected to the GOT or servo amplifier connected to the simple motion module, an
error icon appears on the controller and the communication error details can be displayed.
Page 830 Alarm Display screen
Saving information of the servo system controller network in a file The configuration of the servo system controller network, system configuration of all connected servo amplifiers, and alarm
information can be saved to a Unicode text file or CSV file in a data storage.
Page 833 Create file screen
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.1 Features 809
81
25.2 Specifications Page 810 System configuration
Page 817 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the system launcher (servo network).
For connection type settings and precautions concerning the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Target controller
*1 When a redundant system is configured, the system launcher (servo network) is not supported. *2 When using R00CPU, R01CPU, or R02CPU as the control CPU for the Motion module, use the following firmware.
RD78G: Version 12 or later RD78GH: Version 14 or later When using R04CPU, R08CPU, R16CPU, R32CPU, R120CPU, or RnENCPU as the control CPU for the Motion module, use the following firmware. RD78G: Version 44 or later RD78GH: Version 46 or later
*3 When RnSFCPU is used as the control CPU for the Motion module, use firmware version 21 or later. *4 RnPCPU is not available as the control CPU for the Motion module.
Target controllers of the servo amplifier and inverter For the Motion CPUs, simple motion modules, and Motion modules that can be connected to the servo amplifier and inverter,
refer to the following.
MR-J4(W)-B(-RJ)
MR-JE-B
MR-J4-B-LL
*1 Use a controller with software version 03 or later.
Controller
MELSEC iQ-R series *1*2*3*4
QCPU (Q mode) *1
LCPU
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
Motion CPU (Q series)
Operation mode Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
Standard SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU, Q170MSCPU, RnMTCPU, LD77MS, QD77MS, RD77MS
Fully closed
Linear
DD motor
Operation mode Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
Standard SSCNET III/H LD77MS, QD77MS, RD77MS
Operation mode Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
Standard SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU, Q170MSCPU, RnMTCPU *1
0 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications
25
MR-J5-G(-RJ)
MR-J5W2-G
MR-J5W3-G
MR-JET-G
FR-A800-1
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 0J or later. *3 Use a controller with software version 07 or later.
FR-A800-2
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 0J or later. *3 Use a controller with software version 07 or later.
FR-A800-GN
*1 Only the settings from the Motion module can be read.
FR-F800-GN
*1 Only the settings from the Motion module can be read.
Operation mode Connection method Motion module
Standard CC-Link IE TSN RD78G, RD78GH
Fully closed
Linear
DD motor
Operation mode Connection method Motion module
Standard CC-Link IE TSN RD78G, RD78GH
Fully closed
Linear
DD motor
Operation mode Connection method Motion module
Standard CC-Link IE TSN RD78G, RD78GH
Fully closed
Linear
DD motor
Operation mode Connection method Motion module
Standard CC-Link IE TSN RD78G, RD78GH
Linear
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, RnMTCPU *1*3, RD77MS *1*3
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, RnMTCPU *1*3, RD77MS *1*3
Connection method Motion module
CC-Link IE TSN RD78G *1, RD78GH *1
Connection method Motion module
CC-Link IE TSN RD78G *1, RD78GH *1
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications 811
81
FR-E800-E
*1 Only the settings from the Motion module can be read.
FR-E800-SCE
*1 Only the settings from the Motion module can be read.
LJ72MS15
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 0C or later. *3 Use a controller with software version 09 or later.
VCII series manufactured by Nikki Denso Co., Ltd.
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 0D or later. *3 Use a controller having a serial number stating with 16012 or later in the first 5 digits.
VPH series manufactured by Nikki Denso Co., Ltd
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 00H or later. *3 Use a controller with software version 07 or later. *4 Use a controller having a serial number stating with 17012 or later in the first 5 digits.
AlphaStep/5-phase series manufactured by ORIENTAL MOTOR Co., Ltd.
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 00H or later. *3 Use a controller having a serial number stating with 17012 or later in the first 5 digits.
STEP AZ series manufactured by ORIENTAL MOTOR Co., Ltd.
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read.
Connection method Motion module
CC-Link IE TSN RD78G *1, RD78GH *1
Connection method Motion module
CC-Link IE TSN RD78G *1, RD78GH *1
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, RnMTCPU *1*3
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, RnMTCPU *1, LD77MS *1*3, QD77MS *1*3,
RD77MS *1
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, RnMTCPU *1*3, LD77MS *1*4, QD77MS *1*4,
RD77MS *1*3
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1*2, Q170MSCPU *1*2, LD77MS *1*3, QD77MS *1*3
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H RnMTCPU *1, RD77MS *1
2 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications
25
5-phase ST series manufactured by ORIENTAL MOTOR Co., Ltd.
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read.
IAI electric actuator controller manufactured by IAI Corporation
*1 Only the settings from the Motion CPU and simple motion module can be read. *2 Use a controller with software version 08 or later.
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H RnMTCPU *1, RD77MS *1
Connection method Motion CPU and simple motion module
SSCNET III/H Q17nDSCPU *1, Q170MSCPU *1, RnMTCPU *1*2, LD77MS *1, QD77MS *1,RD77MS *1
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications 813
81
Servo motor The following table lists the servo motors that can be monitored by the system launcher (servo network)
*1 Supported by the MELSERVO-J4 and MELSERVO-JE series only. *2 Supported by the MELSERVO-J5 series only. *3 Not supported by the MELSERVO-JET series.
Type Model
Rotary servo motor MELSERVO-J4 series or MELSERVO-JE series
HG-KN053(J), HG-KN13(J), HG-KN23(J), HG-KN43(J), HG-KN73(J), HG-SN52(J), HG-SN102(J),
HG-SN152(J), HG-SN202(J), HG-SN302(J), HG-KR053, HG-KR13, HG-KR23, HG-KR43, HG-KR73,
HG-KR053W0C, HG-KR13W0C, HG-KR23W0C, HG-KR43W0C, HG-KR73W0C, HG-MR053, HG-MR13,
HG-MR23, HG-MR43, HG-MR73, HG-RR103, HG-RR153, HG-RR203, HG-RR353, HG-RR503,
HG-SR51, HG-SR52, HG-SR81, HG-SR102, HG-SR121, HG-SR152, HG-SR201, HG-SR202, HG-SR301,
HG-SR352, HG-SR421, HG-SR502, HG-SR524, HG-SR702, HG-SR1024, HG-SR1524, HG-SR2024,
HG-SR3524, HG-SR5024, HG-SR7024, HG-SR51W0C, HG-SR52W0C, HG-SR81W0C, HG-SR102W0C,
HG-SR121W0C, HG-SR152W0C, HG-SR201W0C, HG-SR202W0C, HG-SR301W0C, HG-SR352W0C,
HG-SR421W0C, HG-SR502W0C, HG-SR524W0C, HG-SR702W0C, HG-SR1024W0C, HG-SR1524W0C,
HG-SR2024W0C, HG-SR3524W0C, HG-SR5024W0C, HG-SR7024W0C, HG-UR72, HG-UR152,
HG-UR202, HG-UR352, HG-UR502, HG-JR53, HG-JR73, HG-JR103, HG-JR153, HG-JR203, HG-JR353,
HG-JR503, HG-JR601, HG-JR701M, HG-JR703, HG-JR801, HG-JR903, HG-JR11K1M, HG-JR15K1M,
HG-JR22K1M, HG-JR30K1M, HG-JR37K1M, HG-JR12K1, HG-JR15K1, HG-JR20K1, HG-JR25K1,
HG-JR30K1, HG-JR37K1, HG-JR534, HG-JR734, HG-JR1034, HG-JR1534, HG-JR2034, HG-JR3534,
HG-JR5034, HG-JR7034, HG-JR9034, HG-JR701M4, HG-JR11K1M4, HG-JR15K1M4, HG-JR22K1M4,
HG-JR30K1M4, HG-JR37K1M4, HG-JR45K1M4, HG-JR55K1M4, HG-JR6014, HG-JR8014, HG-JR12K14,
HG-JR15K14, HG-JR20K14, HG-JR25K14, HG-JR30K14, HG-JR37K14, HG-JR53W0C, HG-JR73W0C,
HG-JR103W0C, HG-JR153W0C, HG-JR203W0C, HG-JR353W0C, HG-JR503W0C, HG-JR703W0C,
HG-JR903W0C, HG-JR11K1MW0C, HG-JR15K1MW0C, HG-JR22K1MW0C, HG-JR534W0C,
HG-JR734W0C, HG-JR1034W0C, HG-JR1534W0C, HG-JR2034W0C, HG-JR3534W0C, HG-JR5034W0C,
HG-JR7034W0C, HG-JR9034W0C, HG-JR11K1M4W0C, HG-JR15K1M4W0C, HG-JR22K1M4W0C, HG-AK0136, HG-
AK0236, HG-AK0336
MELSERVO-J5 series
HK-KT053(W), HK-KT13(W), HK-KT1M3(W), HK-KT13U(W), HK-KT23(W), HK-KT43(W), HK-KT63(W), HK-KT23U(W),
HK-KT43U(W), HK-KT7M3(W), HK-KT103(W), HK-KT7M3U(W), HK-KT103U(W), HK-KT153(W), HK-KT203(W),
HK-KT202(W), HK-KT434(W), HK-KT634(W), HK-KT7M34(W), HK-KT1034(W), HK-KT1534(W), HK-KT2034(W),
HK-KT2024(W), HK-ST52(W), HK-ST102(W), HK-ST172(W), HK-ST202A(W), HK-ST302(W), HK-ST202(W),
HK-ST352(W), HK-ST502(W), HK-ST702(W), HK-ST524(W), HK-ST1024(W), HK-ST1724(W), HK-ST2024A(W),
HK-ST3024(W), HK-ST2024(W), HK-ST3524(W), HK-ST5024(W), HK-ST7024(W), HK-RT103(W), HK-RT153(W),
HK-RT203(W), HK-RT353(W), HK-RT503(W), HK-RT703(W)
MELSERVO-JET series
HG-KNS13(J), HG-KNS23(J), HG-KNS43(J), HG-KNS73(J), HG-SNS52(J), HG-SNS102(J), HG-SNS152(J),
HG-SNS202(J), HG-SNS302(J)
Linear servo motor (primary side) LM-FP2B-06M(U518), LM-FP2B-06M(U519), LM-FP2D-12M(U520), LM-FP2D-12M(U521),
LM-FP2F-18M(U522), LM-FP2F-18M(U523), LM-FP4B-12M(U524), LM-FP4B-12M(U525),
LM-FP4D-24M(U526) *1, LM-FP4D-24M(U527), LM-FP4F-36M(U528) *1, LM-FP4F-36M(U529) *1,
LM-FP4H-48M(U530) *1, LM-FP4H-48M(U531) *1, LM-FP5H-60M(U532) *1, LM-FP5H-60M(U533) *1,
LM-U2PAB-05M(U512), LM-U2PBB-07M(U515), LM-H3P2A-07P(U850), LM-H3P3A-12P(U851),
LM-K2P1A-01M-2SS1, LM-U2PAD-10M(U513), LM-U2PAF-15M(U514), LM-U2PBD-15M(U516),
LM-H3P3B-24P(U852), LM-H3P3C-36P(U853), LM-H3P7A-24P(U855), LM-K2P2A-02M-1SS1,
LM-U2PBF-22M(U517), LM-H3P3D-48P(U854), LM-H3P7B-48P(U856), LM-H3P7C-72P(U857),
LM-K2P1C-03M-2SS1, LM-U2P2B-40M(U509), LM-H3P7D-96P(U858), LM-K2P2C-07M-1SS1,
LM-K2P3C-14M-1SS1, LM-U2P2C-60M(U510), LM-K2P2E-12M-1SS1, LM-K2P3E-24M-1SS1,
LM-U2P2D-80M(U511)
Direct drive motor *3 TM-RFM002C20, TM-RFM004C20, TM-RFM006C20, TM-RFM006E20, TM-RFM012E20, TM-RFM012G20,
TM-RFM040J10, TM-RFM018E20, TM-RFM048G20, TM-RFM072G20, TM-RFM120J10, TM-RFM240J10 *1,
TM-RG2M002C30 *2, TM-RG2M004E30, TM-RG2M009G30, TM-RU2M002C30 *2, TM-RU2M004E30, TM-RU2M009G30
4 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications
25
Connection type between the GOT and controller The connection type between the GOT and controller that can be connected to the GOT is the same as that of the system
launcher.
For details of the connection type, refer to the following.
Page 42 Target controller
When connecting the GOT to the servo amplifier through the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module
For the connection method between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a Motion module
For the connection method between the GOT and the PLC, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
SSCNET III/H
Motion CPU, or PLC
Varies according to the connection type.
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
CC-Link IE TSN
PLC
Ethernet
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications 815
81
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the system launcher (servo network) to
the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, sufficient free space is required in the user area.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Extended function that can be started from the system launcher (servo network) The following table lists the extended functions that can be started from the system launcher (servo network)
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Extended function Description
System launcher The system launcher can be started by touching the motion icon or return key.
Drive recorder The drive recorder can be started from the context menu of the system launcher (servo network) function.
Servo amplifier graph
6 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications
25
External synchronous encoder information cannot be acquired. When the Motion CPU is connected, the external synchronous encoder information cannot be acquired.
Operation mode information cannot be acquired for the servo amplifier that is set to the axis No. 0. The servo amplifier for which axis No. 0 is set cannot acquire the operation mode information.
[-] is displayed regardless of the operation mode setting.
When an external synchronous encoder is connected to the MR-J4-B(-RJ), the operation mode information cannot be acquired. When the RnMTCPU and an external synchronous encoder are to the MR-J4-B(-RJ), the operation mode information cannot
be acquired.
[Scale] is displayed regardless of the operation mode setting.
The display order of the servo network configuration diagram varies depending on the software version used. When the RnMTCPU is connected, the display order of the servo network configuration diagram varies depending on the
software version of the PLC used.
The display order of the servo network configuration diagram is as follows.
When the software version is 10 or later: The connected controllers are displayed in the order of hardware connected.
Controllers that are not connected but set are displayed after the connected controllers in order of station number.
When the software version is earlier than 10: The controllers are displayed in order of station number.
Simultaneous access to Motion module Only one device can access the Motion module.
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications 817
81
When displaying with GT SoftGOT2000 In the case of GT SoftGOT2000, target screens in the following table are displayed according to the following conditions:
The screens are displayed so that they fit with the GOT screen resolution and orientation set in GT Designer3.
If the screens fit both in vertical display and horizontal display, they are displayed horizontally.
Any screens other than the target screens are displayed in the same way as the GOT2000 series.
The following shows the sizes of the target screens displayed with GT SoftGOT2000.
*1 If the GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3 is higher than the resolution of the target screen, the target screen will be displayed at the center of the GT SoftGOT2000 screen. In that case, the margin around the target screen will be filled with black.
*2 This setting is available only when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used.
Target screen*1
GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3
Horizontal (X)
480 600 640 to 767 768 to 799 800 to 1023
1024 to 1279
1280 to 1920
[Servo network
configuration]
screen
Vertical (Y) 480 to 599 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
600 to 767 VGA
(vertical)*2 - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
768 to 799 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
800 to 1023 WVGA
(vertical)*2 SVGA
(vertical)*2 SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1024 to 1200 - - SVGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1280 - - - - WXGA
(vertical)*2 - -
8 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.2 Specifications
25
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Display the System configuration screen of the system launcher.
For the display operation of the system launcher, refer to the following.
Page 45 Operations for Display
3. Touch the Motion CPU or simple motion module on the System configuration screen to display the function list.
4. Touch the system launcher (servo network) from the function list to display the servo network configuration diagram.
Page 821 Operating Procedure
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.3 Operations for Display 819
82
Screen transition
System launcher function (System configuration screen)
System application (extended function)
[] key
Select the system launcher (servo network) from the function list.
Touch [Legend].
Touch [Save].
Select the extended function in the context menu.
Touch [Cancel] or [] key.
Select [Alarm Display] in the context menu.
Select [System Configuration] in the context menu.
[] key
[] key
Touch the return key or motion icon.
Utility[] key
Servo network configuration diagramSystem configuration screen
Alarm display screen
Create file screen
Legend key
0 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.3 Operations for Display
25
The display screen of the system launcher (servo network) varies depending on the GOT used.
Page 821 Servo network configuration diagram
Page 827 System Configuration screen
Page 830 Alarm Display screen
Page 833 Create file screen
Servo network configuration diagram This section explains the screen layout and the common operations when the system launcher (servo network) is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the servo network configuration diagram and the function of the keys displayed on the
screen after the system launcher (servo network) is started.
Displayed contents (when a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected)
1)Controller icon
The icon of the Motion CPU or simple motion module of the configuration diagram.
4)
2)
5) 3)
5)
5) 5)
5)
1)
5)
5)
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 821
82
2)Servo amplifier information display area
Displays information of composing modules.
The number of lines and modules to be displayed depend on the GOT model.
The displayed items are as follows.
[Number of steps]
[Connection system] *1
[Axis No./Sta. No.d] *1
[Servo amp. model] *1
[Alarm No.]
[Ext. sync. encoder] *1
[Servo icon] *1
[Error icon]
*1 Once the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected. To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
3)Number of setting axes display area
Displays the number of axes set in the Motion CPU or simple motion module.
When the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected.
To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
4)[Axis label name]
Displays the axis label name only when the axis label is set for the selected servo amplifier.
When the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected.
To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
5)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the servo network configuration screen.
GOT resolution Number of lines Number of modules (horizontal) Number of modules (vertical)
VGA 2 8 5
SVGA 2 10 6
XGA 3 12 10
WVGA 2 10 5
WXGA 3 16 10
2 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
Displayed contents (when a Motion module is selected)
1)Controller icon
The icon of the Motion module of the configuration diagram.
2)Servo amplifier information display area
Displays information of composing modules.
The number of lines and modules to be displayed depend on the GOT model.
The displayed items are as follows.
[Number of steps]
[Connection type] *1
[Station] *1: For a multi-axis servo amplifier, [station No. - axis] is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.5 and axis A: [5-A]
[Axis No.] *1
[Servo amp. model] *1: For a multi-axis servo amplifier, [model name/axis] is displayed.
Example)
When an axis A is used in MR-J5W2-G: [MR-J5W2-G/A]
When the servo amplifier has never been connected to the Motion module, [???] is displayed.
[Alarm No.]
[Ext. sync. encoder] *1
[Servo icon] *1
[Error icon]
*1 Once the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected. To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
GOT resolution Number of lines Number of modules (horizontal) Number of modules (vertical)
VGA 2 8 5
SVGA 2 10 6
XGA 3 12 10
WVGA 2 10 5
WXGA 3 16 10
4)
2)
5) 3)
5)
5) 5)
5)
1)
5)
5)
5)
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 823
82
3) Number of setting stations display area
Displays the number of stations set in the Motion module.
In the amplifier display status, the number of set servo amplifiers and inverters is displayed.
In the show all status, the number of all set modules is displayed.
When the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected.
To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
4)[Axis name]
Displays the axis name only when the axis name is set for the selected servo amplifier.
When the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected.
To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
5)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the servo network configuration screen.
4 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the Servo network configuration screen.
1)Servo amplifier information display
Touch the display position of a module to be operated to display the context menu.
2)Return key
Closes the system launcher (servo network) and displays the system configuration of the system launcher.
3)[] key
Closes the system launcher (servo network) and displays the main menu of the utility.
4)Scroll key
Scrolls the display up or down one stage.
5)Scroll bar
Touch an area above or below the knob to scroll one page up or down.
You can also scroll the page by sliding the knob.
Context menu
Knob
7)
2)1) 3)
6)
6)
8)
4)
4)
5)
When a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected
Context menu
Knob
7)
2)1) 3)
6)
6)
8)
4)
4)
5)
When a Motion module is selected (Amplifier display)
9)
When a Motion module is selected (Show all)
9)
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 825
82
6)List display button
Displays the detailed information of each module on the target base unit.
The following shows the display items.
[Servo amplifier ID information] *1
[Servo amplifier serial number] *1
[Motor model] *1
[Motor ID] *1
[Axis label name] *1: When a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected
[Axis name] *1: When a Motion module is selected
[Communication status information]
*1 Once the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected. To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
7)[Legend] key
Displays the [case] window.
8)[Save] button
Saves the configuration of the servo system controller network, system configuration of all connected servo amplifiers, and
alarm information in a data storage as a Unicode text file.
Page 833 Create file screen
9) [Show all]/[Amplifier display] button
In the amplifier display status, only the information of the servo amplifiers and inverters connected to the Motion module is
displayed.
In the show all status, information of all stations connected to the Motion module is displayed.
Touch the [Show all] button or [Amplifier display] button while the modules are selected to cancel the selections.
[] key
Exits the [case] window and returns the screen to the system configuration screen.
Legend display area
Lists the descriptions of the icons appearing on the system configuration diagram.
Legend display area
[] key
6 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the System Configuration screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents (when a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected)
1) [Axis]
Displays the displayed axis number.
Displays the axis number and axis label name when the Motion CPU is selected and the axis label is set.
Displays only the axis number when the Motion CPU is selected and the axis label is not set.
Displays the axis number when the Simple Motion module is selected.
2) List of system configuration information
The following shows the system configuration of the servo amplifier.
The items to be displayed are as follows.
Servo amplifier identification information *1
Servo amplifier serial number *1
Servo amplifier S/W No. *1
Option unit identification information *1
Option unit serial number *1
Option unit S/W No. *1
Converter identification information *1
Converter serial number *1
Converter S/W No. *1
Motor model *1
Motor ID *1
Motor serial number *1
Encoder resolution *1
Accumulated power-on time [h]
Num. of inrush cur. sw. times [times]
LED display (Displays the character on the servo amplifier LED.)
*1 Once the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected. To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
3) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen.
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
When the Motion CPU is selected When the Simple Motion module is selected
3) 3)
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 827
82
Displayed contents (when a Motion module is selected)
1) [Sta.]
Displays the displayed station number.
When the axis name is set, the station number and axis name are displayed.
For a multi-axis servo amplifier, [station No. - axis] is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.5 and axis A: [5-A]
2) List of system configuration information
The following shows the system configuration of the servo amplifier.
The items to be displayed are as follows.
Servo amplifier identification information *1
Servo amplifier serial number *1
Servo amplifier S/W No. *1
Option unit identification information *1
Option unit serial number *1
Option unit S/W No. *1
MAC address *1
IP address *1
Motor model *1
Motor ID *1
Motor serial number *1
Encoder resolution *1
Encoder maximum multi revolution times [rev]
Accumulated power-on time [h]
Num. of inrush cur. sw. times [times]
Num. of dynamic brake rly. sw. times [times]
LED display (Displays the character on the servo amplifier LED.)
*1 Once the information is acquired, it will not be acquired again even if the servo amplifier is reconnected. To acquire the information again, restart the system launcher (servo network).
3) Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen.
1)
2)
3)3)
8 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
Key functions
1)Axis number key
Sets the axis number to be displayed.
2) Station number key
Set the station number to be displayed.
3)[] key
Returns to the servo network configuration diagram.
2)1)
3)2)
When the Motion CPU is selected
When a Motion module is selected
2)1)
When the Simple Motion module is selected
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 829
83
Alarm Display screen This screen is started from the context menu of the servo network configuration diagram.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the Alarm Display screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Axis]
Displays the displayed axis number.
Displays the axis number and axis label name when the Motion CPU is selected and the axis label is set.
Displays only the axis number when the Motion CPU is selected and the axis label is not set.
Displays the axis number when the Simple Motion module is selected.
2)[No.]
Displays an alarm number.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred or an unsupported alarm has occurred.
3)[Name]
Displays an alarm name.
Displays [Not generated] when no alarm has occurred.
Displays [----] when an unsupported alarm has occurred.
4)[Est. occurrence time]
Displays the estimated time when an alarm occurs.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred.
Displays [----] when an unsupported alarm has occurred.
5)[Est. elapsed time (h)]
Displays the elapsed time after an alarm occurred.
The unit is time.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred.
Displays [----] when an unsupported alarm has occurred.
10)10)
1) 2) 3)
4) 5) 6)
10)
When the Motion CPU is selected
7) 2) 3)
4) 5)
10)
10)10)
When a Motion module is selected (occurrence time is not acquired)
8) 9)
When a Motion module is selected (occurrence time is acquired)
When the Simple Motion module is selected
10)10)
1) 2) 3)
4) 5) 6)
10)
0 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
6)[Detailed information]
Displays the detailed information.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred.
7)[Sta.]
Displays the displayed station number.
When the axis name is set, the station number and axis name are displayed.
For a multi-axis servo amplifier, [station No. - axis] is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.5 and axis A: [5-A]
8)[Occurrence time]
Displays the time when an alarm occurs.
If the occurrence time cannot be acquired, the estimated occurrence time is displayed.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred.
Displays [----] when an unsupported alarm has occurred.
9)[Accumulated power-on time [h]]
Displays the accumulated power-on time when the alarm occurred.
If the occurrence time cannot be acquired, the estimated elapsed time is displayed.
Displays [-] when no alarm has occurred.
Displays [----] when an unsupported alarm has occurred.
10)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the Alarm Display screen.
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 831
83
Key functions
1) Axis number key
Sets the axis number to be displayed.
2) [Alarm Reset] key
Deletes the alarm information that has been occurred.
3) Station number key
Set the station number to be displayed.
4) [] key
Displays the servo network configuration diagram.
4)1)
2)
When the Motion CPU is selected
3) 4)
2)
When a Motion module is selected
4)1)
2)
When the Simple Motion module is selected
2 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
Touch the [Save] key of the servo network configuration diagram and start the screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the structure of the Create file screen and the function of the keys displayed on the screen.
Displayed contents
1)[Select drive]
Displays selectable drives to save a file.
2)[Select language]
Displays the language of the file.
3)[File path]
Displays the path to the file.
4)[Change extension to CSV]
Saves the file in CSV format.
5)Touch key
The keys used for the operations on the Create file screen.
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5) 5) 5)
5)
5)
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure 833
83
Key functions
1)[] key
Exits the Create file screen and returns the screen to the servo network configuration diagram.
2)Drive keys
Select a drive to save a file.
3)Language selection key
Select the language of a file.
4)[Change extension to CSV]
Saves the file in CSV format.
5)[Rename file] key
Rename the file.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.4 Operating Procedure
25
*1 ":" indicates the name of the selecteds drive.
Error message *1 Description Corrective action
Failed to access the : drive.
Check for the memory card and the access switch
status.
The GOT cannot access the drive where the file
saved.
Check that the data storage is mounted correctly
on the drive.
Check if the SD card cover has been
closed.(Only when drive A is used)
The drive is write protected.
The file cannot be saved.
Check the write destination drive (*:).
The memory card (file storage destination drive) is
write-protected.
Check if the data storage mounted on the drive of
the write destination is not write-protected.
Free space in the : drive is insufficient.
Failed to save the file.
Select the drive with sufficient free space.
The memory card (file storage destination drive)
does not have enough space.
Use a data storage having enough space.
Delete unnecessary files to free up space on the
memory card.
The drive is write protected. The file cannot be
saved.
Check the write destination drive (:).
The format of the memory card (file storage
destination drive) is invalid.
Format the data storage so as to be compatible
with the GOT.
The file name including the path name is too long.
The file cannot be created.
Correct the file name or the path name.
The file name including the path is too long. Set the file name so that the total number of
characters in the path is within 78 characters.
Failed to access the specified connection
destination.
Check the connection type.
The communication error has occurred during the
acquisition of the information necessary for file
saving.
Change the connection destination settings of the
programmable controller and servo amplifier, and
connect them again.
Failed to create a file.
Check if the write destination memory card is
correct and try the operation again.
The file creation has failed due to factors other
than those above.
Check that the data storage is correct, and mount it
on the drive again.
25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 835
83
MEMO
6 25 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK) 25.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
26
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR
Not available to GT27-V, GT2507-W, GT2507T-W, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V.
Page 837 Features
Page 838 Specifications
Page 840 Operations for Display
Page 843 Operating Procedure
Page 851 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
26.1 Features The motion program editor lists the programs of a Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), and allows you to edit each program.
The following shows the features of the motion program editor.
Viewing the G-code program list on the GOT The GOT lists the G-code programs stored in the connected Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Editing a G-code program on the GOT You can edit G-code programs listed on the GOT in the line editor format.
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.1 Features 837
83
26.2 Specifications Page 838 System configuration
Page 839 Access range
Page 839 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the motion program editor.
For connection type settings and precautions concerning the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The following shows the GOT models that support the motion program editor.
GT27-X
GT27-S
GT2512-WX
GT2510-WX
GT25-S
Target controller
*1 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the motion program editor is available. The operating system software is SW10DNC-RMTFW Ver.14 or later. The add-on library is Gcode_Ctrl.adm Ver.0102 or later. Any item other than [Not Used] is set in the G-code control setting in the basic setting.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the motion program editor to the GOT.
For the communication method between GT Designer3 and the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For the information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Controller *1
R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
Name Description Ethernet connection
Motion program editor Listing and editing G-code programs
8 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.2 Specifications
26
Access range The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Precautions
Operating system software for the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) The usable operating system software is SW10DNC-RMTFW only.
Setting up the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) To use the motion program editor, set up the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) as shown below.
Install the operating system software to the add-on library.
Set the G-code control setting to an item other than [Not Used] in the basic setting.
Language switching When the system language is switched in the utility, the language of the motion program editor is switched accordingly.
However, as the following items are obtained from the Motion CPU, they are displayed on the GOT as is. The language does
not change.
Comments in a G-code program
Entry in the program display area, error display area, or program edit area on the [Program Editor] screen
Case where the motion program editor is unusable When no G-code program is written in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), the [program list] screen cannot be displayed.
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.2 Specifications 839
84
26.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the motion program editor screen after the GOT is powered on.
1. Power on the GOT.
2. Display the motion program editor screen.
Display the screen by one of the following methods.
Using the special function switch (Motion program editor) set in the project
For information on how to set a special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Motion program editor] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number in the communication setting window.
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the motion program
editor.
To display the communication setting window after the first startup, touch the [Ch:] key on the motion program editor screen.
Page 843 Operating Procedure
4. On the system configuration screen, select a Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) and touch the [Program List] key.
Communication setting window
0 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.3 Operations for Display
26
5. On the [Program List] screen, select a program to be edited and touch the [Select] key.
6. The program is displayed on the [Program Editor] screen.
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.3 Operations for Display 841
84
Screen transition
At the next startup, the last displayed screen appears.
However, the last displayed screen does not appear when the GOT is restarted by writing the package data, turning off and
then on the GOT, or resetting the GOT.
Utility main menu or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Communication setting window
System configuration screen (Select the Motion CPU to be monitored.)
[Program List] screen
[Program Editor] screen
[Ch:] key
[END] key
[Select] key
[Program List] key
[Exit Edit] key
[System Conf.] key
Find Ono. search window
[Ono.] key
[Enter] key [END] key
2 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.3 Operations for Display
26
26.4 Operating Procedure This section explains screen operations for the motion program editor.
Page 843 System configuration screen
Page 845 [Program List] screen
Page 848 [Program Editor] screen
System configuration screen This section explains the screen layout and the common operations when the motion program editor is executed.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the layout of the system configuration screen displayed upon startup of the motion program editor and
the functions of the operation keys on the screen.
Displayed contents
1) Error notification area
Displays a message when an error occurs.
For the details of the error messages, refer to the following.
Page 851 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
2) Base type display area
Displays the base unit types and the level number of each extension base unit in the system displayed in the module
information display area.
3) Module information display area
Displays the modules of the connected system in the configuration diagram and the information on each module.
4) Touch keys
Keys for the operations on the system configuration screen.
2)
4)
3)
4)
4)4)1)
4)
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure 843
84
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the system configuration screen.
1) Module information display area
Touch a CPU icon to select the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) that has the program to be edited.
2) [Ch:] key
Displays the communication setting window.
3) [END] key
Exits the motion program editor and returns to the screen where the motion program editor was started.
4) [Program List] key
Switches the system configuration screen to the [Program List] screen.
Page 845 [Program List] screen
5) Scroll key
Scrolls the display up or down one stage.
4) 5)
5)
3)2)1)
4 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure
26
[Program List] screen This screen lists the programs stored in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) that has been selected on the system
configuration screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the layout of the [Program List] screen and the functions of the operation keys on the screen.
Displayed contents
1) Title bar
Displays the program size and the number of programs.
2) Program information display area
Displays the information on each program.
3) Touch keys
Keys for the operations on the [Program List] screen.
2)
1)
3)
3)
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure 845
84
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the [Program List] screen.
1) [END] key
Exits the motion program editor and returns to the screen where the motion program editor was started.
2) [Prev] key
Scrolls up one page.
3) [Next] key
Scrolls down one page.
4) [Ono.] key
Displays the Find Ono. window.
Page 847 Searching for a program by program number (Ono.)
5) [Select] key
Displays the contents of the program under the cursor on the [Program Editor] screen.
Page 848 [Program Editor] screen
6) Arrow keys
Move the cursor in a specified direction.
7) [System Conf.] key
Exits the [Program List] screen and displays the system configuration screen.
Page 843 System configuration screen
1)
7)5)4)3)2) 6)
6 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure
26
Searching for a program by program number (Ono.) Specify an Ono. to search for the corresponding program on the [Program List] screen.
1. Touch the [Ono.] key to display the Find Ono. window.
2. Enter an Ono. and touch the [Enter] key.
3. The cursor moves to the corresponding row.
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure 847
84
[Program Editor] screen Edit the program selected in the [Program List] screen.
Display contents and key functions The following explains the layout of the [Program Editor] screen and the functions of the operation keys on the screen.
Displayed contents
1) Title bar
Displays the Ono. of the program to be edited.
2) Program display area
Displays the contents of the program.
3) Error display area
Displays an editing error.
4) Editor mode display area
Displays the editor mode.
The following shows the available editor modes.
[View]: View program mode
[Edit]: Edit program mode
[LDel]: Delete line mode
[Srch]: Search mode
5) Text-entering mode display area
Displays the text-entering mode when the edit program mode is used.
The following shows the available text-entering modes.
[OVR]: Overtype mode
[INS]: Insert mode
6) Program edit area
Displays the source code in the selected line upon switching from the view program mode to the edit program mode.
Up to 126 characters are displayed in two lines: 94 characters in the first line and 32 characters in the second line.
7) Touch keys
Keys for the operations on the [Program Editor] screen.
2)
1)
7)
5) 4)
3)
6)
8 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure
26
Key functions The following shows the functions of the operation keys on the [Program Editor] screen.
1) Menu keys
The menu key set is switched with the [Change Menu] key.
[Prev] key
Scrolls up one page.
The cursor moves to the top of the page.
[Next] key
Scrolls down one page.
The cursor moves to the top of the page.
[Edit] key
Enters the edit program mode.
[Ins. Line] key
Inserts a line above the selected line and enters the edit program mode.
[Del. Line] key
Enters the delete line mode.
[Search Char] key
Enters the search mode.
[Change Menu] key
Switches between menu 1 and menu 2.
[Exit Edit] key
Saves edits, exits the motion program editor, and returns to the [Program List] screen.
If the save operation fails, the screen will not return to the [Program List] screen.
If a save operation is performed while the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is running under the following conditions, the
save operation will fail and an error message will appear.
The motion program CPU has insufficient free space.
A program is running.
The program format is invalid.
Check the error message and corrective action.
Page 851 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
2)
1)
Menu 1
Menu 2
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure 849
85
2) Software keyboard
Use the software keyboard to edit a program.
The usable keys and their functions vary depending on the editor mode.
*1 The key is unusable in the view program mode.
Key Mode Function
Up and down arrows View program mode
Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Move the cursor up or down.
Touch each key moves the cursor up or down one line.
Search mode Up arrow key: Search for a string upward from the selected line.
Down arrow key: Search for a string downward from the selected line.
Right and left arrows *1 Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Search mode
Move the cursor to the right or left.
Touch each key moves the cursor to the right or left one character.
Characters *1 Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Search mode
Input each one-byte alphanumeric character.
[INS] *1 Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Search mode
Switch between the insert mode and the overtype mode.
In the insert mode, new text is inserted to the left of the cursor.
In the overtype mode, the text under the cursor is overwritten.
[DEL] *1 Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Search mode
Delete a character.
Touch the key deletes the character under the cursor.
[CLR] *1 Edit program mode
Delete line mode
Search mode
Reset an editing error.
The error display area goes blank.
[FIX] *1 Edit program mode Reflect the entry in the program edit area to the program display area.
The program edit area goes blank, and the edit program mode switches to the view program mode.
Delete line mode Delete the selected line. The delete line mode switches to the view program mode.
Search mode Search for a string downward from the selected line.
[CAN] *1 Edit program mode Delete the entry in the program edit area. The edit program mode switches to the view program mode.
Delete line mode Cancel the deletion of the selected line. The delete line mode switches to the view program mode.
Search mode Delete the entry in the program edit area. The search mode switches to the view program mode.
0 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.4 Operating Procedure
26
26.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section explains the error messages displayed when the motion program editor is executed, and the corrective actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
Impossible to save.
SD card is in write protect.
Saving a G-code program has failed because the SD
card in the motion controller is write-protected.
Unprotect the SD card, and save the G-code program.
Impossible to save.
The capacity of SD card is
insufficient.
Saving a G-code program has failed because the SD
card in the motion controller has insufficient free
space.
Check the free space of the SD card.
Impossible to save.
SD card is not inserted, or in
unusable status.
Saving a G-code program has failed because no
SD card is inserted in the motion controller.
Saving a G-code program has failed because the
SD card was disabled by turning on SM606 (SD
memory card forced disable instruction).
Saving a G-code program has failed because
accessing the SD card in the Motion CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series) was disabled by pressing
the SD memory card access control switch on the
front of the controller.
Insert a SD card and save the G-code program.
Check that SM606 (SD memory card forced disable instruction)
is off, and save the G-code program.
Check that accessing the SD card is enabled, and save the G-
code program.
G-code program does not exist.
Please execute again after writing
G-code program.
The [Program List] screen cannot be brought up
from the system configuration screen because no G-
code program exists in the connected Motion CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series).
Write a G-code program to the Motion CPU.
Page 838 Target controller
Impossible to save
Program size is over.
Saving a G-code program has failed because the
program is larger than the available memory of the
connected Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Reduce the size of the program.
Impossible to save
The operating program is being
edited.
Failed to save the G-code program file because the
program to be edited is running.
Stop the program, and save it.
Impossible to save
The format of the program is
incorrect.
Saving a G-code program has failed because the
program format is invalid.
Check that the program format is correct.
No PLC Communications The GOT cannot communicate with the connected
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQR series).
Check the communication setting.
Check the connection between the controller and the GOT
(disconnected or cut cables).
Check that no error has occurred in the controller.
Check that the connected Motion CPU is supported by the
motion program editor.
This PLC type is not supported An unsupported Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
has been selected on the system configuration
screen.
Select a supported Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) on the
system configuration screen.
Page 838 Target controller
Controller's OS type is different An operating system software other than
SW10DNC-RMTFW is installed on the connected
Motion CPU (MELSEC iQR series).
Install the SW10DNC-RMTFW operating system software on the
Motion CPU.
Page 838 Target controller
GOT-Motion Program Editing
Function is not available in this
version.
The version of the operating system software in the
connected Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is not
supported by the motion program editor.
Install a supported version of the operating system software on the
Motion CPU.
Page 838 Target controller
Communication Channel Setup
Error.
The required communication driver is not installed
on the GOT.
Install an applicable communication driver.
26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 851
85
MEMO
2 26 MOTION PROGRAM EDITOR 26.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
27
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O
Not available to GT27-V, GT2507-W, GT2507T-W, GT25-V, and GT25HS-V.
Page 853 Features
Page 854 Specifications
Page 856 Operations for Display
Page 858 Operating Procedure
Page 872 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
27.1 Features With the motion program I/O, the GOT can copy or delete a G-code program in the connected Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R
series).
Data storage
Copy or delete a G-code program.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.1 Features 853
85
27.2 Specifications Page 854 System configuration
Page 855 Access range
Page 855 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the motion program I/O.
For connection type settings and precautions concerning the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GOT The following shows the GOT models that support the motion program I/O.
GT27-X
GT27-S
GT2512-WX
GT2510-WX
GT25-S
Target controller
*1 When all the following conditions are satisfied, the motion program I/O is available. The operating system software is SW10DNC-RMTFW Ver.14 or later. The add-on library is Gcode_Ctrl.adm Ver.0102 or later. Any item other than [Not Used] is set in the G-code control setting in the basic setting.
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
: Available, : Unavailable
Controller *1
R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
Function Connection type between the GOT and controller
Name Description Ethernet connection
Motion program I/O Copying or deleting a G-code program
4 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.2 Specifications
27
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the motion program I/O to the GOT.
For the communication method between GT Designer3 and the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For the information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Required hardware A data storage is required to use the motion program I/O.
Applicable hardware A USB keyboard is usable.
Access range One GOT can execute the motion controller I/O on up to three Motion CPUs (MELSEC iQ-R series) by switching between
them.
Precautions
Precautions for using the motion program I/O
Executing the motion program I/O while the Motion CPU is running A G-code program can be copied or deleted while the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is running.
However, the G-code program cannot be copied in the following cases.
When the program running is the copy destination
When the total data size of G-code programs to be copied to the Motion CPU exceeds 2 MB
When the format of the G-code program to be copied to the Motion CPU is invalid
If you delete a G-code program, the program file will be deleted, but its contents loaded into the Motion CPU will not be
deleted.
Copying a G-code program from the data storage to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) Multiple G-code programs cannot be copied in a batch.
Editing a G-code program while any G-code program is being copied to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
Do not edit any G-code program in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) with engineering software while any G-code
program is being copied to the CPU.
Folder names and file names which cannot be used The following folder names and file names cannot be used.
Kanji, hiragana, katakana, one-byte katakana
Folder names starting with G2
Folder and file names starting with a period (.) or backslash (\)
Folder and file names ending with a period (.) or backslash (\)
Folder and file named consisting of one period (.) or two periods(..) only
~TEMP.GCD
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.2 Specifications 855
85
27.3 Operations for Display
Starting the motion program I/O This section explains how to display the motion program I/O screen after the GOT is powered on.
1. Power on the GOT.
2. Display the motion program I/O screen.
Display the screen by one of the following methods.
Using the special function switch (Motion program input/output) set in the project
For information on how to set a special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting from the utility
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Motion program I/O] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
3. Set the channel number.
Set the channel number of the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) connected to the GOT in the communication setting
window.
When the channel number is not set, touching the [] key closes the communication setting window and sets the channel
number to [1].
After the GOT is powered on, the communication setting window is displayed only at the first startup of the motion program I/
O.
To display the communication setting window at the second or later startup, touch the channel key on the [Motion Program In/
Out] screen.
Page 858 Operating Procedure
Communication setting window
6 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.3 Operations for Display
27
4. The motion program I/O starts after the channel number is selected.
Screen transition
Utility or
user-created monitor screen
Start
Rtn
If the motion program I/O is exited with the [Rtn] key, the last displayed screen will appear at the next startup of the motion program I/O.
At the second or later startup
Communication setting window
At the first startup
[Motion Program In/Out] screen
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.3 Operations for Display 857
85
27.4 Operating Procedure
Displayed contents This section explains the display data of the [Motion Program In/Out] screen and the functions of the operation keys on the
screen.
1) Channel key
Displays the communication setting window.
The channel number set in the communication setting window appears on the key.
2) [CPU Chg] key
Switches between the Motion CPUs (MELSEC iQ-R series) to be monitored.
The CPU numbers other than those of the Motion CPUs are ignored.
3) [Rtn] key
Exits the motion program I/O and returns to the monitor screen or the utility screen.
4) [Function] key
Displays the function selection window. Select a function to be executed.
For the details of the function selection window, refer to the following.
Page 860 Function selection window
5) Area
The current device area is enclosed in a blue frame, and the files stored in the specified device are displayed in the list.
6) [Device] key
Displays the device selection window.
Select the target to which the function selected with the [Function] key is executed.
For the details of the device selection window, refer to the following.
Page 860 Select device window
7) [Directory]
The operations and display contents differ depending on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [Motion Controller] is selected
The root directory of the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is displayed.
When an item other than [Motion Controller] is selected
The directory of the G-code program selected in the list is displayed.
8) [File name]
Displays the name of the file selected in the list.
Up to 28 characters can be displayed.
9) [CPU No.]
Displays the CPU No. of the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
1) 2) 3)
10)
6)
5)
7)
6)
7)
8)
4)
15)
14)13)
16)
11)
12)
9)
8 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
10) Status display
Displays the information of the item selected with the [Device] key.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [Motion Controller] is selected
[Entry] and [Remain]:
Displays the number of registered G-code programs and the remaining number of programs that can be registered. [Used]
and [Remain]:
Displays the used space and the available space of the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
When an item other than [Motion Controller] is selected
[Used] and [Remain]:
Displays the used space and the available space of the data storage.
11) List
Displays the files of the item selected with the [Device] key.
When an item other than [Motion Controller] is selected with the [Device] key, the directory name is enclosed in
angle brackets < >.
Touching < > displays the files in the touched directory.
Touching <..> displays the files in the parent directory.
Up to 1024 directories and files can be listed.
12) Scroll keys
Scroll the list up or down by 10 or 50 items.
13) [Area chg] key
Switches the device areas.
The files in the specified directory in the blue frame are displayed in the list.
When [Delete] is selected with the [Function] key, the areas cannot be switched.
14) [Refresh] key
Updates the list.
15) [Disp Filename] key
Changes the display contents of the list each time when the key is touched.
The display contents depend on the item selected with the [Device] key.
When [Motion Controller] is selected
The following shows the contents to be switched.
When an item other than [Motion Controller] is selected
The following shows the contents to be switched.
16) [Exec] key
Executes the specified operation.
Area change
Disp Comment Disp Size
Disp Filename Disp Date Disp Size
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 859
86
Function selection window The following shows the key functions on the function selection window.
1) [Copy] key
Copies a G-code program between the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) and the data storage in the GOT.
Page 861 Copying a G-code program
2) [Delete] key
Deletes a G-code program from the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) or the data storage in the GOT.
Page 864 Deleting a file
3) [Create a directory] key
Creates a directory in the data storage.
When [Motion Controller] is selected with the [Device] key, a directory cannot be created.
Page 866 Creating a directory
4) [USB Driver Stop] key
Stops the operation of the USB drive selected in the [Device] key.
Select device window The following shows the key functions on the select device window.
1) [Motion Controller] key
The Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is selected as the target to which the function is executed.
2) [A:Standard SD card] key
The SD card is selected as the target to which the function is executed.
3) USB drive keys
The USB drive is selected as the target to which the function is executed.
A USB drive in which no data storage is inserted cannot be selected.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
2)
3)
0 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
Copying a G-code program Copy a G-code program between the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) and the data storage in the GOT.
Select a copy source and copy destination as follows.
When [Motion Controller] is selected for the copy source, only a data storage can be selected for the copy destination.
When the data storage is selected for the copy source, only [Motion Controller] can be selected for the copy destination.
The following shows the copy procedure.
Example)
When copying the G-code program [O123.GCD] of [Motion Controller] to [A:Standard SD card]
1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
2. Touch the [Copy] key on the function selection window.
3. Touch the [Area chg] key to move the frame to the copy source.
Copy source
Copy destination
1. 2.
3.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 861
86
4. Touch the [Device] key of the copy source to display the select device window.
5. Select [Motion Controller] in the select device window.
6. Select the G-code program [O123.GCD] in the list.
7. Touch the [Device] key to display the select device window.
8. Select [A:Standard SD card] in the select device window.
5. 4.
6.
8.7.
2 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
9. Touch the [Exec] key to display the copy confirmation window.
10. Touch the [OK] key to copy [O123.GCD] to [A:Standard SD card].
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed.
When the copy destination already has the same file
In this case, touching the [OK] key in the copy confirmation window displays the overwrite confirmation
window.
To overwrite the file, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the copy, touch the [Cancel] key.
Copying a G-code program from the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) to the data storage
Copying a G-code program from the data storage to the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
10.
9.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 863
86
Deleting a file Delete a G-code program from the motion controller or the data storage.
The following shows the deletion procedure.
Example)
When deleting the G-code program files [O001.GCD], [O002.GCD], and [O003.GCD] of [Motion Controller]
1. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
2. Touch the [Delete] key on the function selection window.
3. Touch the [Device] key to display the select device window.
4. Touch the [Motion Controller] key on the select device window.
5. Select the file [O001.GCD] in the list to delete.
1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
4 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
6. Select the last target file [O003.GCD] in the list to delete.
The files [O001.GCD], [O002.GCD], and [O003.GCD] are all selected.
7. Touch the [Exec] key to display the deletion confirmation window.
8. Touch the [OK] key to delete the selected files.
When the deletion is completed, a completion message is displayed.
6.
7.
8.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 865
86
Creating a directory Create a directory in the data storage.
The following shows the procedure for creating a directory.
Example)
Creating the directory SAMPLE01 in [A:Standard SD card]
1. Touch the [Area chg] key to move the frame to the copy source.
For the copy source, refer to the following.
Page 861 Copying a G-code program
2. Touch the [Device] key to display the select device window.
3. Touch [A:Standard SD card] on the select device window.
4. Touch the [Function] key to display the function selection window.
5. Touch the [Create a directory] key on the function selection window to display the key window.
For the details of the key window, refer to the following.
Page 870 Entering characters
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
6. Input SAMPLE01 on the key window.
7. Touch the [ENTER] key to confirm the entered directory name and close the key window.
Key input using a USB keyboard is also available.
Page 870 Entering characters
8. The list is updated, and the SAMPLE01 directory is created.
7. 6.
Input value display area
8.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 867
86
Renaming a file when copying a G-code program Rename a file when the file is copied to the data storage.
The following shows the procedure for renaming a file at the file output.
Example)
Renaming the G-code program file of [Motion Controller] from [O001.GCD] to [O123.GCD], and outputting the file to
[A:Standard SD card]
1. Copy the G-code program [O001.GCD] of [Motion Controller] to [A:Standard SD card].
For the copy procedure, refer to the following.
Page 861 Copying a G-code program
2. Touch the [Name Change] key on the copy confirmation window to display the key window.
For the details of the key window, refer to the following.
Page 870 Entering characters
3. Touch the [AC] key to delete the existing file name from the entry display area.
Key input using a USB keyboard is also available.
Page 870 Entering characters
2.
3.
Entry display area
8 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
4. Input O123.GCD.
Touch the [ENTER] key to close the key window and display the copy confirmation window.
For the details of the copy confirmation window, refer to the following.
Page 861 Copying a G-code program
5. Touch the [OK] key to start copying the renamed file.
When the copy is completed, a completion message is displayed.
4.
5.
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 869
87
Entering characters Input characters with the key window or a USB keyboard for creating a directory or changing a file name.
Key window The following shows the layout of the key window and the key functions.
1) [] key
Cancels the entry and closes the key window.
2) Message
Displays a message.
3) Entry display area
Displays the entry.
Up to 28 characters can be displayed.
4) Software keyboard
Inserts a character at the cursor position.
Up to 28 characters can be input.
5) Cursor keys
Move the cursor.
6) [AC] key
Clears the entry.
7) [BS] key
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
8) [DEL] key
Deletes one character to the right of the cursor.
9) [CANCEL] key
Cancels the entry and closes the key window.
10) [ENTER] key
Confirms the entry and closes the key window.
When a file is renamed, the copy confirmation window appears.
8) 7) 6)
10)
9)
2)
4)
3)
1)
5)
0 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure
27
USB keyboard A USB keyboard is usable to enter characters in the key window.
For the corresponding keys, refer to the following.
For information on how to set the USB keyboard, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Contents displayed in the list The following shows the file name displayed in the list on the [Motion Program In/Out] screen.
Key Description
Characters, numbers, symbols The key corresponding to the one in the key window enters the character in the entry display area.
Shift + Delete Delete the entry.
Backspace Delete one character to the left of the cursor.
Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor.
Esc Cancel the entry and close the key window.
Enter Confirm the entry and close the key window.
Target data Description File name displayed in the list
G-code program G-code program O***.GCD ("***" represents a number.)
27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.4 Operating Procedure 871
87
27.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section explains the error messages displayed when the motion program I/O is executed, and the corrective actions.
Error message Description Corrective action
Communication error The Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is powered
off, the cable is disconnected, or the connected
controller is not a Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R
series).
Correct the system configuration and
communication settings.
Failed to stop USB drive The GOT has failed to stop the USB drive. Check the data storage in the USB drive.
Unable to exec : Program running The GOT cannot execute the motion program I/O
because the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) is
in operation.
Stop the operation of the Motion CPU, and execute
the motion program I/O again.
Out of memory The size of the data to be written exceeds the Motion
CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series) memory capacity.
Make enough free space by operations such as
deleting unnecessary G-code programs from the
Motion CPU, and then execute the motion program I/
O again.
The same name exists The directory name cannot be created because the
same name exists.
Specify a different name.
File not found The copy source file does not exist. Check the copy source file and execute the motion
program I/O again.
Timeout The GOT has failed to communicate with the Motion
CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
Correct the system configuration and
communication settings.
Can't create a directory The directory cannot be created. The directory cannot be created when the
destination device is set to the Motion CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series).
The data storage is not ready to write.
Directory illegal The directory cannot be displayed because it is
invalid.
Correct the directory settings, and then execute the
motion program I/O again.
No. of registration over The maximum number of programs has been
exceeded.
Make enough free space by deleting unnecessary
Gcode programs, and then execute the motion
program I/O again.
Path is too long The directory name cannot be created because the
path is too long.
Specify the directory or file name so that the number
of characters in the path is 78 characters or less.
Too many files As the data storage has too many files and
directories, they cannot be listed accordingly.
Reduce the number of files and directories to 1024
or less.
File is not specified The [Exec] key is touched even though a file is not
specified.
Specify a file and touch the [Exec] key again.
Filename illegal The file name is invalid. Check that the file name includes no invalid
character, and execute the motion program I/O
again.
Memory card not exist No data storage is inserted into the GOT. Insert a data storage into the GOT.
Format Error The G-code program cannot be copied because its
format is invalid.
Use a valid G-code program format and execute the
motion program I/O again.
The Ethernet settings of the monitoring target
motion controller are not correct.
The GOT cannot communicate with the motion
controller because the Ethernet settings made with
GT Designer3 are incorrect.
Correct the Ethernet settings on GT Designer3, and
write the project data to the GOT.
Error Other errors Turn off the GOT and Motion CPU, check the data
and connection status of the data storage, and then
execute the motion program I/O again.
2 27 MOTION PROGRAM I/O 27.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
28
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH
Only available to GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) for GT SoftGOT2000.
Page 873 Features
Page 875 Specifications
Page 880 Operations for Display
Page 884 [Graph waveform] screen
Page 905 [Setting, management] screen
28.1 Features The servo amplifier graph is a function that reads waveform data measured by the servo amplifier and displays the data on the
graph.
You can check the waveform data and parameter information of the servo amplifier without using a personal computer.
The measured waveform data can be output to a file as well.
You can analyze the output file in detail by using MR Configurator2.
Displaying the waveform data measured by the servo amplifier on the graph The waveform data measured by the servo amplifier can be read and displayed on the graph by operating the GOT.
The measured waveform data is saved as a history.
Up to 64 waveform data can be displayed simultaneously.
You can compare a normal waveform with an abnormal one by superimposing multiple waveforms.
Displaying the parameter information of the servo amplifier The parameter information of the servo amplifier acquired at waveform data measurement can be displayed.
Servo amplifier
The waveform data is measured and buffered.
Reading
GOT
The waveform data is read and displayed on the graph.
Servo amplifier
Reading
GOT
The parameter information of the servo amplifier is displayed.
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.1 Features 873
87
Changing the measurement condition setting You can change the measurement conditions of waveform data such as the connection destination, via destination, axis to be
measured, collection time, and trigger condition.
Inputting/outputting waveform data to a file The waveform data and parameter information read from the connected servo amplifier can be output to a file.
The file is viewable on the GOT or MR Configurator2.
Also, the file output from MR Configurator2 can be input to the GOT.
The waveform data input from the file can be displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen as history data.
Servo amplifier GOT
Change the measurement conditions of the waveform data such as the connection destination, via destination, axis, collection time, and trigger condition.
Servo amplifier GOT
File input/output
Data storage
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.1 Features
28
28.2 Specifications Page 875 System configuration
Page 878 Access range
Page 878 Precautions
System configuration This section explains the system configuration of the servo amplifier graph.
For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the
following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Target controller The servo amplifier graph supports the following servo amplifiers.
*1 The MR-J3-B compatibility mode is not supported. *2 To monitor the servo amplifier through a simple motion module (SSCNET III/H) on the PLC, the following connections cannot be used.
The GOT and the Motion CPU (Q series) are directly connected by Ethernet. The GOT and CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU) are directly connected by Ethernet.
*3 MR-J5-A(-RJ), MR-J5-G(-RJ)N1, MR-J5W2-G-N1, MR-J5W3-G-N1, and MR-JET-G-N1 are not supported. *4 When connecting the PLC and servo amplifier through a Motion module, only direct connection with the built-in Ethernet port of the CPU
is supported.
For the servo motor connectable to the servo amplifier, refer to the following.
Instruction manual for the servo amplifier to be used
Connect a target servo amplifier to the GOT through a Motion CPU, Simple Motion module, or Motion module shown below.
Applicable Motion CPUs, simple motion modules, and Motion module
*1 When a redundant system of the control CPU is configured, the servo amplifier graph is not supported.
Servo amplifier Model
MELSERVO-J4 *2 MR-J4-B *1, MR-J4-B-RJ *1, MR-J4W2-B, MR-J4W3-B
MELSERVO-JE MR-JE-B
MELSERVO-J5 *3*4 MR-J5-G, MR-J5-G-RJ, MR-J5W2-G, MR-J5W3-G
MELSERVO-JET *3*4 MR-JET-G
Controller Model
Motion CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series) *1 R16MTCPU, R32MTCPU, R64MTCPU
Motion CPU (Q series) *1 Q172DSCPU, Q173DSCPU, Q170MSCPU
Simple motion module *1 RD77MS2, RD77MS4, RD77MS8, RD77MS16
FX5-40SSC-S, FX5-80SSC-S
QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16
LD77MS2, LD77MS4, LD77MS16
Motion module RD78G4, RD78G8, RD78G16, RD78G32, RD78G64, RD78GHV, RD78GHW
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.2 Specifications 875
87
Connection type
Connecting a servo amplifier and the GOT through a Motion CPU or simple motion module (SSCNET III/H)
To connect a servo amplifier and the GOT through a Motion CPU (Q series), use a connection type other than the CC-Link IE
Field Network connection.
To connect a Motion CPU and the GOT by the CC-Link connection (intelligent device station), set the transmission method to
[MELSEC (compatible)].
For the connection method, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
When connecting the GOT and servo amplifiers through a Motion module
For the connection method, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the system application (extended function) for the servo amplifier graph to the GOT.
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
SSCNET III/H
Motion CPU or
simple motion module
Varies according to the connection type.
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
CC-Link IE TSN
PLC
Ethernet
GOT or GT SoftGOT2000
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.2 Specifications
28
Required hardware Data storage is required for the following operations.
Saving the waveform data read from a servo amplifier in a file
Displaying the waveform data read from the file
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Applicable file A file having the extension .gpf2 can be read, written, and imported.
The following settings are required for the gpf2 file.
Setting method: [Div specification]
Number of collection Div: [10 Div]
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.2 Specifications 877
87
Access range The access range is the same as when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For the details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) For GT Works3 Version1
GT SoftGOT2000 Version1 Operating Manual
Precautions
Functions that cannot be used together The drive recorder and servo amplifier graph cannot be used together if the functions are started with the special function
switch.
When the drive recorder is used, exit it and start the servo amplifier graph.
Sending commands from pieces of equipment Do not access the servo amplifier from multiple GOTs and PLCs simultaneously.
Doing so may measure invalid waveform data, or cause a communication timeout.
Measuring waveform data while machine analyzer function is running The GOT cannot acquire waveform data while the servo amplifier is running the machine analyzer function.
Acquire waveform data after exiting the machine analyzer function.
Waveform data collection time The settings of waveform data collection time are fixed as follows.
Use MR Configurator2 to collect waveform data with any settings other than the following.
Setting method: [Div specification]
Number of collection Div: [10 Div]
Unmatched measurement condition of the file to be imported If the measurement condition between the displayed graph and gpf2 file to be imported does not match, the file cannot be
imported.
No history data at import If no history data exists, imports may fail.
In such cases, read a file in the [Open] window.
Changing the settings of the routed Motion CPU When changing the following settings of the routed Motion CPU or simple motion module, set the via destination again in the
[Via (motion) setting] window.
Not doing so may fail to acquire waveform data.
Servo network setting
Connection status of the servo amplifier
When the resolution of GOT is larger than that of the target screen Since the following screens are started as base screens, the target screen will be displayed at the center of the GOT screen if
the resolution of GOT is larger than that of the target screen.
In that case, the margin around the target screen will be filled with black.
The following shows the target screens.
[Graph waveform] screen
[Setting, management] screen
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.2 Specifications
28
When displaying with GT SoftGOT2000 In the case of GT SoftGOT2000, target screens in the following table are displayed according to the following conditions:
The screens are displayed so that they fit with the GOT screen resolution and orientation set in GT Designer3.
If the screens fit both in vertical display and horizontal display, they are displayed horizontally.
Any screens other than the target screens are displayed in the same way as the GOT2000 series.
The following shows the sizes of the target screens displayed with GT SoftGOT2000.
*1 This setting is available only when the SoftGOT-GOT link function is used.
Target screen GT SoftGOT2000 resolution set in GT Designer3
Horizontal (X)
480 600 640 to 767 768 to 799 800 to 1023
1024 to 1279
1280 to 1920
[Graph
waveform]
screen
[Setting,
management]
screen
[Parameter
Display]
window
Vertical (Y) 480 to 599 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
WVGA
(horizontal)
600 to 767 VGA
(vertical)*1 - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
768 to 799 - - VGA
(horizontal)
VGA
(horizontal)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
800 to 1023 WVGA
(vertical)*1 SVGA
(vertical)*1 SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(vertical)
SVGA
(horizontal)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1024 to 1200 - - SVGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(vertical)
XGA
(horizontal)
WXGA
(horizontal)
1280 - - - - WXGA
(vertical)*1 - -
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.2 Specifications 879
88
28.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the servo amplifier graph screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT.
2. Perform one of the following operations.
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Servo amplifier graph] from the main menu.
For information on how to display the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Touch the special function switch (Servo amplifier graph) set in the project.
Touch a module on the system configuration screen of the system launcher, and then touch [Servo amplifier graph] on the
extended function selection screen.
Touch a module on the servo network configuration screen of the system launcher (servo network), and then touch [Servo
amplifier graph] in the context menu.
Touch a device icon on the system configuration screen of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, and
then touch [Servo amplifier graph] in the context menu.
3. The [Select channel] window appears only at the first startup of the servo amplifier graph.
(When the connection destination is set for the special function switch, the [Select channel] window does not appear.)
Touch the key corresponding to the channel No. to be used.
4. The [Select station] window appears only at the first startup.
(When the connection destination is set for the special function switch, the [Select station] window does not appear.)
Touch the [Input station number] key.
Page 907 [Select station] window
5. In the [Input station No.] window, set the network number and station number, and then touch the [OK] key.
Page 908 [Input station No.] window
6. Touch the [OK] key to display the [Graph waveform] screen.
Page 884 [Graph waveform] screen
The method of displaying the servo amplifier graph screen determines the operation screen.
Method Description
Using a special function switch The servo amplifier graph screen appears as a system window.
For information on how to display the servo amplifier graph screen with a special function switch,
refer to the following.
Page 881 Displaying the servo amplifier graph screen with a special function switch
Using the utility, system launcher, system launcher
(servo network), or CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field
Network diagnostics
The GOT screen is switched to the servo amplifier graph screen.
For the details of the system launcher, refer to the following.
Page 41 SYSTEM LAUNCHER
For the details of the system launcher (servo network), refer to the following.
Page 809 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK)
For the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following.
Page 767 CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network DIAGNOSTICS
0 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.3 Operations for Display
28
Displaying the servo amplifier graph screen with a special function switch To use a special function switch, place the switch on a user-created screen.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Settings of the special function switch Set the following items for the special function switch.
Settings for using the system window When the servo amplifier graph screen is displayed with a special function switch, the screen appears as a system window.
Displaying such a system window requires an overlap window.
Set an overlap window to be used as the system window in the project.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Starting the function by using the special function switch (System launcher) You can start the servo amplifier graph from a user-created screen by selecting the connection destination with the special
function switch (System launcher).
Starting the drive recorder by using the system launcher (servo network) You can start the servo amplifier graph from the system launcher (servo network) by selecting [Servo amplifier graph] in the
context menu of the system launcher (servo network).
For the details of the system launcher (servo network), refer to the following.
Page 809 SYSTEM LAUNCHER (SERVO NETWORK)
Item Description
[Window size] Specify the window size for the servo amplifier graph.
[Graph waveform size] Specify the size of the graph display area on the [Graph waveform] screen.
[Specify Connected Station] Specify a servo amplifier to be connected and a controller through which the servo amplifier is connected to the
GOT.
[Specify the file to be read at the time of
startup]
Specify a file to be read upon startup of the servo amplifier graph.
Start the system launcher. Select the target function.
User-created screen having a special function switch (System Launcher) placed
[] key
The [Graph waveform] screen appears.System configuration screen
[End] key
The [Graph waveform] screen appears.
Touch the equipment icon. Select the servo amplifier graph.
Servo network configuration diagram (System launcher (Servo network)) Context menu
[] key
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.3 Operations for Display 881
88
Starting the drive recorder by using the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics You can start the servo amplifier graph from the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics by selecting [Servo
amplifier graph] in the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics.
For the context menu of the CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, refer to the following.
Page 786 Context menu
Touch the equipment icon.
Network configuration diagram (CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics)
Context menu
[] key
Select the servo amplifier graph.
The [Graph waveform] screen appears.
2 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.3 Operations for Display
28
Screen transition
*1 The [Graph waveform] screen appears at the first startup of the servo amplifier graph function, if the function is started with the special function switch in which the connection destination is specified.
Start
Utility
or
user-created screen
[Select station] window
First startup
Second startup or later
[Select channel] window
*1
[Display axis setting] window
[Graph setting] window
[Parameter Display] window
[Graph waveform] screen
[Setting, management] screen
[Via (motion) setting] window
[Collection, trigger setting] window
[Measurement axis setting] window
[Memo] window
[Open] window
[Import] window
[File storage destination] window
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.3 Operations for Display 883
88
28.4 [Graph waveform] screen This screen displays waveform data read from a target servo amplifier or file.
1) Start measurement key or stop measurement key
Start or stop measuring waveform data.
2) [Setting management] key
Displays the [Setting, management] window.
Set the waveform data to be acquired, and manage the history of waveform data.
The [Setting management] key is disabled during measurement of waveform data.
Page 905 [Setting, management] screen
3) Scale optimization key
Returns the enlarged or repositioned graph display area to its original state when the [Graph waveform] screen was
displayed.
4) Zoom in mode key
Enables or disables the zoom in mode for waveform data.
While using the zoom in mode, you cannot enable the move mode.
Page 900 Zoom in mode
5) Move mode key
Enables or disables the move mode for waveform data.
While using the move mode, you cannot enable the zoom in mode.
Page 902 Move mode
6) Cursor key
Displays or hides cursors on the graph display area.
To display the maximum and minimum values within a range, use the cursors to define the range.
Page 903 Cursor display
Key Description
Start measurement key
Touch this key to start measuring waveform data by the servo amplifier.
Stop measurement key
Touch this key to stop measuring waveform data by the servo amplifier.
The measured waveform data before the stop is deleted.
21)
3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
22)
9) 10)
2) 24)
1)
13) 14)
15)
14)
23)
18)
19)
20)
23)
8) 11) 12)
16) 17)
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
7) Overwrite mode key
Enables or disables the overwrite mode.
Enable the overwrite mode to display the history data specified in the [Setting, management] screen over the acquired
waveform data in the graph display area.
Page 904 Overwrite mode
8) Hard copy key
Outputs the current screen data to an image file or a printer.
For the details of the hard copy, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
9) [Display item name] key (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Displays or hides analog and digital data names.
10) [Axis setting] key
Displays the [Display axis setting] window.
Set the axes to be displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
Page 887 [Display axis setting] window
11) [Graph setting] key
Displays the [Graph setting] window.
Set a display style of the graph.
Page 893 [Graph setting] window
12) [Parameter display] key
Displays the [Parameter Display] window.
Displays the parameter information of the servo amplifier acquired at waveform data measurement.
Page 899 [Parameter Display] window
13) Unit of measure
Unit in which analog data is measured.
14) Analog data scroll keys
Scroll the analog waveform data up or down one scale mark.
To continue scrolling the waveform data, touch and hold a scroll key.
15) Scale
Scale of waveform data
The color of each line on the right of scale values corresponds to the color of each line in the waveform.
The display position and scale can be changed in the [Graph setting] window.
Page 893 [Graph setting] window
16) Analog data names (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Display analog waveform data names.
The background color of each item matches the line color of the corresponding analog waveform data.
The following items are not displayed.
Items deselected in the [Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting)
Page 918 [Analog waveform] tab
Items deselected in the [Display axis setting] window
Page 889 [Display axis setting] window (detail setting)
17) Digital data names (for GT27-X, GT27-S, GT2510-WX, and GT25-S)
Display analog waveform data names.
The background color of each item matches the line color of the corresponding analog waveform data.
The following items are not displayed.
Items deselected in the [Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting)
Page 918 [Digital waveform] tab
Items deselected in the [Display axis setting] window
Page 889 [Display axis setting] window (detail setting)
18) Sampling cycle
Sampling cycle of the waveform data
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 885
88
19) Graph display area
Displays the waveform data acquired by the servo amplifier.
An arrow is displayed on the right edge of a digital waveform.
The digital waveform data displayed at the same height as the arrow is in the OFF state, and the data displayed above the
arrow is in the ON state.
The display position of digital waveform data can be changed in the [Graph setting] window.
Page 893 [Graph setting] window
To change the display position of analog waveform data, use the analog data scroll keys or the [Graph setting]
key.
20) Trigger point
Timing at which the waveform data is acquired.
[T] is displayed at the position where the trigger condition is satisfied.
21) Select history
Select the history data to be displayed in the graph display area with color.
22) Scroll keys
Scroll the graph display area up or down one scale mark.
23) Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar left or right of the knob to scroll the graph display area left or right one scale mark.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob to scroll through the area.
24) [] key
Closes the servo amplifier graph and returns to the screen where the servo amplifier graph was started.
The [] key is disabled during measurement of waveform data.
Digital waveform data
Analog waveform data
OFF
ON
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Display axis setting] window Set the axes to be displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
1) [Select all] key
Selects all items of [Select] in the display axis list.
2) [Cancel all] key
Clears all items of [Select] in the display axis list.
3) Number of displayed waveforms
The number of waveform data displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
4) Display axis list
Lists the axes displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
5) [Detail setting] key
Displays the [Display axis setting] window (detail setting).
Set the line type of each axis, display setting items, and display colors.
Page 889 [Display axis setting] window (detail setting)
6) [Copy setting] key
Displays the [Copy setting] window.
Copy the display axis setting of the selected axis.
Page 891 [Copy setting] window
7) [Close] key
Closes the [Display axis setting] window.
Item Description
[Axis] Axis number of the servo amplifier.
For the MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, the axis number is displayed as the
servo amplifier station number (1 to 120) + axis.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is
displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
[Select] Axis displayed on the [Graph waveform] screen.
Select the axis to be displayed.
[Axis label name]
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is
selected)
Axis label name set for the axis.
[Axis name]
(When the Motion module is selected)
Axis name set for the axis.
5)
2) 3)
4)
1)
6) 7) 5)
2) 3)
4)
1)
6) 7)
When a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected When a Motion module is selected
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 887
88
For the MELSERVO-J4 series and MELSERVO-JE series, up to 64 axes can be measured simultaneously.
The information of up to 64 axes is displayed in the display axis list.
For the MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, up to eight axes can be measured
simultaneously.
The information of up to 8 axes is displayed in the display axis list.
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Display axis setting] window (detail setting)
1) [Target axis]
Select a target axis to set the details.
For the MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, the axis number is displayed as the servo amplifier station
number (1 to 120) + axis.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
2) [Line type]
Select a graph line type.
The following shows the items to be selected.
[1pt]
[2pt]
[1pt (dotted)]
[2pt (dotted)]
3) Item type
Displays the type of setting items.
To switch between the types of setting items, touch the item type switching keys.
[Graph line: analog item]
[Graph line: digital item]
4) Item type switching keys
Switch between the types of setting items.
5) Item list
Lists the setting items.
6) Display selection
Set whether to display each item.
Select the items to be displayed on the [Graph waveform ] screen.
7) Color selection key
Displays the [Colors] window.
Select a graph line color of each item.
Page 890 [Colors] window
8) [Default] key
Initializes the display axis setting.
9) [Back] key
Closes the [Display axis setting] window (detail setting), and returns to the previous screen.
2)
6)
4)
8)
1)
3)
9)
7)
5)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 889
89
[Colors] window
1) Color palette
Select a color to be set.
2) [Set color]
Current set color
3) [Default] key
Initializes the set color.
4) [OK] key
Applies the color, and returns to the previous screen.
5) [Cancel] key
Cancels the change, and returns to the previous screen.
2) 4) 5)
1)
3)
0 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Copy setting] window Copy the display axis setting to other axes.
1. Touch the axis row to be copied on the copy screen.
The selected row turns blue.
2. Touch the [Copy] key to switch the screen to the paste screen.
3. Select an item of [Copy to] to which the copied row is pasted.
4. Touch the [Paste] key to paste the copied row.
1) Axis list
Lists the axes to be copied or pasted.
Item Description
[Copy to] Axis to be copied to.
[Axis] Axis number of the servo amplifier.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is
displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
[Axis label name]
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is
selected)
Axis label name set for the axis.
[Axis name]
(When the Motion module is selected)
Axis name set for the axis.
7) 7)
Copy screen Paste screen
2)
Selected row
1) 1)
5) 6)
3) 4)
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected) (When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected)
Copy screen (When the Motion module is selected)
Paste screen (When the Motion module is selected)
7) 7)2)
Selected row
1) 1)
5) 6)
3) 4)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 891
89
2) [Copy] key
Copies the row selected in the axis list.
3) [Paste] key
Pastes the copied row to the [Copy to] row selected in the axis list.
4) [Cancel] key
Cancels copying, and switches the screen to the copy screen.
5) [Select all] key
Selects all items of [Copy to] in the axis list.
6) [Cancel all] key
Clears all items of [Copy to] in the axis list.
7) [Back] key
Closes the [Copy setting] window, and returns to the previous screen.
2 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Graph setting] window Set a display style of the graph.
Switch between the tabs and set each item.
1) Tab
Touch each tab to switch the setting screens.
2) Tab page switching key
Switches between the tab pages.
3) [Close] key
Closes the [Graph setting] window.
Tab name Description
[V-axis selection] tab Set a scale (vertical axis) of the graph.
Page 894 [V-axis selection] tab
[Display position] tab Set the display position of a scale.
Page 895 [Display position] tab
[Scale setting] tab Set the scale increment (interval between scale marks).
Page 896 [Scale setting] tab
[Cursor setting] tab Switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, and set an item for which the cursors are displayed.
Define a range by the cursors to display the maximum and minimum values within the range.
Page 897 [Cursor setting] tab
[Basic color] tab Set the background color, grid color, and clamp color of the graph.
Page 899 [Basic color] tab
[Icons legend] tab Displays the description of each icon on the [Graph waveform] screen.
1) 2)
3)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 893
89
[V-axis selection] tab Set a scale (vertical axis) of the graph.
1) [Axis]
Set an axis whose scale (vertical axis) is displayed.
Select a target axis from the pull-down menu.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
2) Item type
Displays the type of setting items.
Analog items are displayed in the item list.
3) Item list
Lists the setting items.
4) Display selection
Set whether to display the scale (vertical axis) for each item.
Select the item which displays the scale (vertical axis).
5) Display color of the scale (vertical axis)
Display color of the scale (vertical axis) for each item
Set the display color of a scale (vertical axis) in the [Display axis setting] window (Detail setting).
Page 889 [Display axis setting] window (detail setting)
1)
2)
4)
3)
5)
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Display position] tab Set the display position of a scale.
1) Item type
Displays the type of setting items.
To switch between the item types, touch the item type switching keys.
[Analog scale]
[Digital scale]
2) Item type switching keys
Switch the setting item type.
3) Item list
Lists the display positions and units of all items.
Touch the display position of an item and set a value.
The set value is applied as the minimum scale value for the item.
However, if the set value is between two scale values, the smaller scale value becomes the minimum.
Example) When the set value is 30 and the set scale increment is 20 (scale values: 0, 20, 40...)
In this case, the minimum scale value becomes 20.
2)1)
3)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 895
89
[Scale setting] tab Set the scale increment (interval between scale marks).
1) Item switching keys
Switch between the contents in the item list.
2) Item list
Lists the scale increments and units of all items.
Each item has a different setting range.
You can set a value with up to two decimal places.
(The value set for [Time] must be an integer.)
1)
2)
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Cursor setting] tab Switch between the vertical and horizontal cursors, and set an item for which the cursors are displayed.
Define a range by the cursors to display the maximum and minimum values within the range.
1) Cursor orientation
Displays the current orientation of cursors.
To switch between the cursor orientations, touch the [Switch cursor] key.
[Cursor setting (vertical)]
[Cursor setting (horizontal)]
2) [Switch cursor] key
Switches between the vertical and horizontal cursors.
3) [Waveform]
Select the item for which the cursors are displayed.
4) [Following waveform]
Turn on or off the waveform following function.
When the waveform following function is on, the cursors follow the waveform movements.
When the waveform following function is off, the cursors do not follow the waveform movements.
5) Display target
Displays the display target of the cursor value list.
To switch between the display targets, touch the item switching keys.
The display target is fixed to [V-axis] for horizontal cursors.
[V-axis]
[H-axis]
[Interval A-B]
6) Item switching keys
Switch between the display targets.
This key is displayed for vertical cursors.
3)
4)
6)
2)1)
5)
7)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 897
89
7) Cursor value list
Set the positions of cursors A and B, and display the maximum and minimum values within the range defined by the cursors.
Different items are displayed for horizontal and vertical cursors.
Cursor orientation
Display target Item Description
Horizontal [V-axis] [A] Displays the position of cursor A.
To change the set value of [A], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor A moves
accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B] Displays the position of cursor B.
To change the set value of [B], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor B moves
accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[A-B] Displays the difference between cursor A and cursor B.
Vertical [H-axis] [A] Displays the position of the cursor A.
To change the set value of [A], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor A moves
accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B] Displays the position of the cursor B.
To change the set value of [B], touch the value and set a new one. Cursor B moves
accordingly.
Alternatively, change the set value using the keys on the right of the value.
[B-A] Displays the difference between cursor B and cursor A.
[V-axis] [A] Displays the value under cursor A for the item selected in [Waveform].
[B] Displays the value under cursor B for the item selected in [Waveform].
[A-B] Displays the difference between the values under cursor A and cursor B.
[Interval A-B] [Eff. val.] Displays the effective value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
[Max val.] Displays the maximum value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
[Min val.] Displays the minimum value within the range defined by cursor A and cursor B.
Cursor A
Cursor B
Horizontal cursors Vertical cursors
Cursor A Cursor B
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
[Basic color] tab Set the background color, grid color, and clamp color of the graph.
Display the [Colors] window with the color selection key of each item, and set the color.
Page 890 [Colors] window
1) [Background color]
Set the background color of the graph display area.
2) [Grid color]
Set the scale color of the graph display area.
3) [Clamp color]
Set the graph line color where the measurement value is more than the upper limit or less than the lower limit.
[Parameter Display] window This windows displays the parameter information acquired from the servo amplifier.
1) Parameter list
Lists the parameter information acquired from the servo amplifier.
2) [Close] key
Closes the [Parameter Display] window.
Item Description
[No.] Device number of the parameter.
[Abbr.] Abbreviation of the parameter.
[Name] Parameter name.
[Unit] Unit of the parameter value.
[Setting range] Setting range of the parameter value.
[Value] Parameter value.
1)
2)
3)
Color selection key
1)
2)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 899
90
Operating procedure This section describes the operations on the graph display area.
Page 900 Zoom in mode
Page 902 Move mode
Page 903 Cursor display
Page 904 Overwrite mode
Zoom in mode Enlarge a part of the graph display area by the following procedure.
You can use the zoom in mode when the waveform data measurement is stopped.
1. Touch the zoom in mode key.
2. Touch the start point of an area to be enlarged.
3. Slide your finger on the display and release the finger at the end point.
A square with the start point on the top left corner and the end point on the bottom right corner appears to indicate the area to
be enlarged.
1.
2.
3.
0 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
4. To enlarge the area, touch inside the square.
To cancel the enlarging and dismiss the square, touch outside the square.
To return to the original state, touch the scale optimization key.
4.
Scale optimization key
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 901
90
Move mode Move the waveform on the graph display area by the following procedure.
You can use the move mode when the waveform data measurement is stopped.
1. Touch the move mode key.
Two lines crossing at right angles appear on the graph display area.
2. Touch the start point of a movement.
3. Slide your finger on the display and release the finger at the end point.
The waveform travels the distance from the start point to the end point, in the direction opposite to the movement of your
finger.
To return to the original state, touch the scale optimization key.
1.
2.
3.
Scale optimization key
2 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
Cursor display Display the maximum and minimum values within a range defined by cursors.
You can use the cursor display when the waveform data measurement is stopped.
To display cursors on the graph display area, touch the cursor key.
The cursor orientation (vertical and horizontal) can be changed in the [Graph setting] window.
Page 897 [Cursor setting] tab
Vertical cursors
Horizontal cursors
1) Cursor
Define a range by cursor A and cursor B.
2) Values of vertical axes and horizontal axes
The values of vertical axes and horizontal axes are displayed according to the positions of cursor A and cursor B.
The characters of an item appear in the same color as the corresponding line in the waveform.
3) Effective value, maximum value, and minimum value
Indicate the effective value, maximum value, and minimum value within the range defined by the cursors.
These items are displayed when vertical cursors are used.
4) Cursor movement keys
Move the cursors while keeping the distance between cursor A and cursor B.
To continue moving the cursors, touch and hold a cursor movement key.
The cursor movement keys do not appear when the zoom in mode or move mode is enabled.
The distance between cursor A and cursor B can be changed in the [Graph setting] window.
Page 897 [Cursor setting] tab
2)
3)
4)4)
Cursor key
1) 1)
4)
1)
1)
4) 2)
Cursor key
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen 903
90
Overwrite mode Display the waveform data read from the servo amplifier over the history data selected in the [Setting, management] screen.
You can use the overwrite mode when the waveform data measurement is stopped.
Up to 64 waveform data can be displayed simultaneously.
1. Touch the [Setting management] key in the [Graph waveform] screen.
2. Select an item of [Overwrite] to be displayed over the history data in the [Setting, management] screen.
Page 905 [Setting, management] screen
3. Touch the [Waveform display] key.
4. Touch the overwrite mode key in the [Graph waveform] screen to overwrite the history data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.4 [Graph waveform] screen
28
28.5 [Setting, management] screen Set the waveform data to be collected, and manage the history of waveform data.
1) [Via setting] key
Displays the [Via (motion) setting] window.
Switch the routed controller between Motion CPU and simple motion module.
Page 910 [Via (motion) setting] window
2) [Collect, trigger] key
Displays the [Collection, trigger setting] window.
Set the measurement conditions and trigger conditions of waveform data.
Page 911 [Collection, trigger setting] window
3) [Axis setting] key
Displays the [Measurement axis setting] window.
Set an axis whose waveform data is acquired.
Page 915 [Measurement axis setting] window
4) [Initialize] key
Initializes all the settings and history data of the servo amplifier graph.
5) [Open] key
Displays the [Open] window.
Read the settings such as the measurement condition and history data from a file.
The display of the [Graph waveform] screen is replaced with the read waveform data.
Page 922 [Open] window
6) [Import] key
Displays the [Import] window.
Imports the history data from a file.
The imported history data is added to the top of the history list.
Page 924 [Import] window
7) [Save] key
Displays the [File storage destination] window.
Saves the history data in a data storage.
Page 925 [File storage destination] window
1)
10) 11) 12) 13) 14)
9)
8) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 905
90
8) Connection destination setting key
Displays the [Select channel] window.
Switch between the connected servo amplifiers.
Page 907 [Select channel] window
9) History list
Lists the history data.
Touch the row to select the data.
Each history data is added to the top of the list every time waveform data measurement is completed.
When new history data is added and the saved history data exceeds 20, unprotected history data is deleted from the one with
the largest [No.].
10) [Memo] key
Displays the [Memo] window.
Edit the memo of the selected history data in the history list.
Page 927 [Memo] window
11) [Delete] key
Deletes the selected history data in the history list.
12) [Delete all] key
Deletes all the unprotected history data.
13) [Waveform display] key
Returns to the [Graph waveform] screen, and displays the history data selected in the history list.
Page 884 [Graph waveform] screen
14) [Back] key
Returns to the [Graph waveform] screen.
The [Graph waveform] screen displays the waveform data that has been displayed in the previous [Graph waveform] screen.
Item Description
[No.] History data number.
[Protect] Protects the history data from being deleted.
Up to 10 history data can be protected.
Select the history data to be protected.
[Overwrite] Displays the history data over waveform data in the [Graph waveform] screen, when the overwrite mode is
enabled.
Select the history data to overwrite.
[Memo] History data memo.
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Select channel] window Select a channel.
1) Channel key
Confirms the channel selection, and switches the window to the [Select station] window.
Page 907 [Select station] window
[Select station] window Select a network number and station number from the connection history.
1) History key
Confirms the selection of the network number and station number, and establishes communication with the target servo
amplifier.
The history keys of the last three connections are displayed.
2) [Input station number] key
Switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
Set a network number and a station number.
Page 908 [Input station No.] window
1)
1)
2)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 907
90
[Input station No.] window Set a network number and a station number.
1) [N/WNo.]
Touch the entry field to display the [Input N/W No.] window.
Set a network number.
Page 908 [Input N/W No.] window
2) [PCNo.]
Touch the entry field to display the [Input PLC No.] window.
Set a PLC station number.
Page 909 [Input PLC No.] window
3) [CPUNo.]
Displays the CPU number.
This number cannot be changed.
4) [OK] key
Confirms the entry of the network number and PLC station number, and establishes communications with the target servo
amplifier.
[Input N/W No.] window Set a network number.
1) Network number
Network number to be set
2) Input keys
Input keys for entering a network number.
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the entry of the network number and switch the window to the [Input station No.] window.
1)
2)
4)
3)
2)
1)
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Input PLC No.] window Set a station number.
1) PLC station number
PLC station number to be set
2) Input keys
Input keys for entering a PLC station number
Touch the [Enter] key to confirm the entry of the PLC station number and switch the window to the [Input station No.] window.
3) [Host] key
Specifies the PLC station number with the host station number, and switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
[0] is set for the network number and [FF] is set for the PLC station number.
4) [Control station] key
Specifies the PLC station number with the control station number, and switches the window to the [Input station No.] window.
The setting values differ depending on the communication driver.
CC-Link (G4) or CC-Link Ver.2 (ID)
[0] is set for the PLC station number.
Other communication drivers
When [0] is set for the network number, it is changed to [1].
[0] is set for the PLC station number.
2)
1)
3) 4)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 909
91
[Via (motion) setting] window Set a Motion CPU or simple motion module through which a target servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
1) [Via]
Select the type of a controller through which a target servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
The following shows selectable items.
[Motion CPU]
[Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)]
[Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)]
2) [CPU No.]
This item is displayed when [Motion CPU] is selected for [Via].
Select the CPU No. of a Motion CPU through which a target servo amplifier is connected to the GOT.
3) [First I/O]
This item is displayed when [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] or [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via].
Select the start I/O No. of a Simple Motion module or Motion module through which a target servo amplifier is connected to
the GOT.
4) [OK] key
Sets the via destination, and closes the [Via (motion) setting] window.
5) [Cancel] key
Deletes the input data, and closes the [Via (motion) setting] window.
1)
2)
4)
1)
3)
5) 4) 5)
When [Motion CPU] is selected for [Via] When [Simple Motion (SSCNET III/H)] is selected for [Via]
1)
3)
4) 5)
When [Motion module (CC-Link IE TSN)] is selected for [Via]
0 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Collection, trigger setting] window Set the measurement conditions and trigger conditions of waveform data.
1) Tab
Touch each tab to switch the setting screens.
2) [Close] key
Closes the [Collection, trigger setting] window.
[Collection setting] tab
1) [Setting Method]
The setting method of waveform data collection time.
It is fixed to [Div specification].
Tab name Description
[Collection setting] tab Set the method of collecting waveform data.
Page 911 [Collection setting] tab
[Trigger setting] tab Set the trigger to acquire waveform data.
Page 912 [Trigger setting] tab
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 911
91
2) [ms/div]
Set the time per division (Div).
One division (1Div) is the interval of a grid in the graph.
The setting range is [1] ms to [24000] ms.
3) [Number of collection Div]
The number of divisions collected per measurement.
It is fixed to [10 Div].
4) [Auto reading]
Set whether to automatically read the parameter information at waveform measurement.
ON: Parameter information is automatically read.
OFF: Parameter information is not read.
[Trigger setting] tab
1) [Trigger axis]
Select an axis to be monitored.
When a Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected, the axis number and axis label name are displayed in the list.
When a Motion module is selected, the axis name is displayed in the list.
1Div
1)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1)
2)
6)
7)
3)
4)
5)
3)
4)
5)
8) 8)
When the MELSERVO-J5 or MELSERVO-JET series is connected
When the MELSERVO-J4 or MELSERVO-JE series is connected
2 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
2) [Combining condition]
Select the trigger join condition.
[Invalid]: The settings are invalid.
[AND]: Trigger logical AND
[OR]: Trigger logical OR
3) [Data]
Select data to be monitored.
When [Not sel.] is selected, measuring and acquiring waveform data start at the same time.
In the following cases, the item is grayed out.
[Data 2]: The trigger join condition is [Invalid].
4) [Level]
Select the analog channel data in [Data] to set the value for starting waveform data measurement.
When [Condition]/[Type] is set to [Rising], the measurement starts when the trigger data value becomes the set value of the
trigger level or higher.
When [Condition]/[Type] is set to [Falling], the measurement starts when the trigger data value becomes the set value of the
trigger level or lower.
In the following cases, the item is grayed out.
[Level 1]: [Data 1] is a digital channel or not selected.
[Level 2]: The trigger join condition is [Invalid], or [Data 2] is a digital channel or not selected.
5) [Condition]/[Type]
Select the trigger type for starting the waveform measurement.
[Rising]
[Falling]
In the following cases, the item is grayed out.
[Type 1]: [Data 1] is not selected.
[Type 2]: The trigger join condition is [Invalid] or [Data 2] is not selected.
6) [Trigger position axis]
Select a position (trigger position) to display where the trigger condition is satisfied.
[T] is displayed at the trigger position in the graph display area.
[10%]
[20%]
[30%]
[40%]
[50%]
[60%]
[70%]
[80%]
[90%]
Start measurement
(Trigger condition satisfied)
Start measurement
(Trigger condition satisfied)
When [Condition]/[Type] is set to [Rising] When [Condition]/[Type] is set to [Falling]
Trigger level Trigger level
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 913
91
Example) When [Rising] is set to [Condition], and [30%] is selected for [Trigger position axis]
7) [Mode]
Select the mode for collecting waveform data.
[Single]
Acquires the waveform data once when the trigger condition is satisfied.
[Repeat]
Acquires the waveform data every time the trigger condition is satisfied.
Continues acquiring the data until the measurement stop key in the [Graph waveform] screen is touched.
The acquired waveform data and parameter information are added to the history data list.
8) Page switching keys
Switches between the pages of the trigger setting.
Trigger condition satisfied
Before measurement Measurement in progress
30% 70%
Total measurement time (100%)
Trigger level
TTrigger position
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Measurement axis setting] window Set an axis whose waveform data is acquired.
1) [Select all]
Selects all items of [Select] in the measurement axis list.
2) [Cancel all]
Clears all items of [Select] in the measurement axis list.
3) Measurement axis list
Lists the axes whose waveform data are acquired.
4) [Detail setting]
Displays the [Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting)
Set the data to be acquired for each measurement axis.
Page 917 [Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting)
5) [Copy setting]
Displays the [Copy setting] window.
Copies the measurement axis setting to other axes.
Page 920 [Copy setting] window
6) [Close] key
Closes the [Measurement axis setting] window.
Item Description
[Axis] Axis number of the servo amplifier.
For the MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, the axis number is displayed as the servo amplifier
station number (1 to 120) + axis.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
[Select] Axis whose waveform data is acquired.
Select an axis whose waveform data is acquired.
[Axis label name]
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion
module is selected)
Axis label name set for the axis.
[Axis name]
(When the Motion module is selected)
Axis name set for the axis.
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected When the Motion module is selected
1) 2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 915
91
For the MELSERVO-J4 series and MELSERVO-JE series, up to 64 axes can be measured simultaneously.
The information of up to 64 axes is displayed in the measurement axis list.
For the MELSERVO-J5 series and MELSERVO-JET series, up to eight axes can be measured
simultaneously.
The information of up to 256 axes is displayed in the measurement axis list.
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Measurement axis setting] window (axis by axis setting) Set the data to be acquired for each axis.
1) Tab
Touch each tab to switch the setting screens.
2) [Target axis]
Select a target axis to be measured.
Select [All] to measure all the axes.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
3) [Default] key
Initializes the measurement axis setting of the axis selected in [Target axis].
4) [Back] key
Saves the change, and returns to the previous screen.
Tab name Description
[Analog waveform] tab Set the measurement data of an analog waveform to be acquired.
Page 918 [Analog waveform] tab
[Digital waveform] tab Set the measurement data of a digital waveform to be acquired.
Page 918 [Digital waveform] tab
[Detail setting] tab Set the details of the measurement data set in the [Analog waveform] tab or [Digital waveform] tab.
Page 919 [Detail setting] tab
1) 2)
3) 4)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 917
91
[Analog waveform] tab Set the analog waveform data to be measured.
1) Page switching key
Switches between the pages of the measurement data list (analog waveform).
2) Measurement data list (analog waveform)
Lists the data to be measured.
Up to seven measurement data can be set.
Select the measurement data from the list.
[Digital waveform] tab Set the digital waveform data to be measured.
1) Page switching key
Switches between the pages of the measurement data list (digital waveform).
2) Measurement data list (digital waveform)
Lists the data to be measured.
Up to eight measurement data can be set.
Select the measurement data from the list.
2)
1)
2)
1)
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Detail setting] tab Set the details of the measurement data set in the [Analog waveform] tab or [Digital waveform] tab.
1) [Setting time]
When [Settling time] is set for the measurement data in the [Analog waveform] tab, select the measurement method of the
setting time.
[Time until INP is turned ON]
[Time that drp. pls. comes into settle wd.]
2) [Settling width]
When [Time that drp. pls. comes into settle wd.] is selected for [Setting time], set the setting width.
The setting range is [0] pulses to [65535] pulses.
3) [Overshoot amount]
When [Overshoot amount] is set for the measurement data in the [Analog waveform] tab, select the measurement method of
the overshoot amount.
[Droop pulse maximum value [pulse]]
4) [Wait time]
When [Droop pulse maximum value [pulse]] is selected for [Overshoot amount], set the waiting time.
The setting range is [0] ms to [65535] ms.
1)
2)
3)
4)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 919
92
[Copy setting] window Copy the measurement axis setting to other axes.
1. Touch the axis row to be copied on the copy screen.
The selected row turns blue.
2. Touch the [Copy] key to switch the screen to the paste screen.
3. Select an item of [Copy to] to which the copied row is pasted.
4. Touch the [Paste] key to paste the copied row.
1) Axis list
Lists the axes to be copied or pasted.
Item Description
[Copy to] Axis to be pasted.
[Axis] Axis number of the servo amplifier.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (single-axis) and MR-JET-G (single-axis), the station number is displayed.
For MR-J5-G(-RJ) (multi-axis) and MR-JET-G (multi-axis), the station number-axis A/B/C is
displayed.
Example)
In the case of the station No.100 and axis C: [100-C]
[Axis label name]
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected)
Axis label name set for the axis.
[Axis name]
(When the Motion module is selected)
Axis name set for the axis.
2)
Copy screen Paste screen
7) 3)
1)1)
7) 4)
5) 6)
Selected row
(When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected) (When the Motion CPU or Simple Motion module is selected)
Copy screen (When the Motion module is selected)
Paste screen (When the Motion module is selected)
2) 7) 3)
1)1)
7) 4)
5) 6)
Selected row
0 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
2) [Copy] key
Copies the row selected in the axis list.
3) [Paste] key
Pastes the copied row to the [Copy to] row selected in the axis list.
4) [Cancel] key
Cancels copying, and switches the screen to the copy screen.
5) [Select all] key
Selects all items of [Copy to] in the axis list.
6) [Cancel all] key
Clears all items of [Copy to] in the axis list.
7) [Back] key
Closes the [Copy setting] window, and returns to the previous screen.
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 921
92
[Open] window Read the settings such as a measurement condition and history data from a file.
1) [DRV] key
Switches the window to the [Select drive] window.
Change the GOT drive from which files are read.
Page 923 [Select drive] window
2) File path
Displays the path to the folders displayed in the file list.
3) File list
Lists the files in the selected drive.
Up to 500 folders and files in the same path are displayed.
Because the 501st or subsequent folders and files are not displayed, make sure to store a maximum of 500 folders and files
in the same path.
You can open a file having the extension .gpf2.
To scroll the file list up or down, touch and slide the list.
4) File information
Displays the file size and creation date and time of the file selected in the file list.
5) [OK] key
Opens the file selected in the file list.
When a file is opened, the [Graph waveform] screen appears.
The collection and trigger setting, measurement axis setting, display axis setting, and graph setting are replaced with those of
the history data.
Page 884 [Graph waveform] screen
6) [Cancel] key
Closes the window without opening any file.
1) 2)
6)
3)
4)
5)
2 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[Select drive] window Change the target drive from which files are read or to which files are stored.
1) Drives
Select a GOT drive from which files are read or to which files are stored.
2) [OK] key
Changes the target drive to the selected drive.
3) [Cancel] key
Close the window without changing any target drive.
1)
2) 3)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 923
92
[Import] window Import history data from a file.
1) [DRV] key
Switches the window to the [Select drive] window.
Change the GOT drive to which files are imported.
Page 923 [Select drive] window
2) File path
Displays the path to the folders displayed in the file list.
3) File list
Lists the files in the selected drive.
Up to 500 folders and files in the same path are displayed.
Because the 501st or subsequent folders and files are not displayed, make sure to store a maximum of 500 folders and files
in the same path.
You can import a file having the extension .gpf2.
To scroll the file list up or down, touch and slide the list.
4) File information
Displays the file size and creation date and time of the file selected in the file list.
5) [OK] key
Imports the file selected in the file list.
When a file is imported, new history data is added to the top of the history list in the [Setting, management] screen.
Page 905 [Setting, management] screen
6) [Cancel] key
Closes the window without importing any file.
3)
1)
5) 6)
2)
4)
4 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[File storage destination] window Select the file storage destination.
1) [DRV] key
Switches the window to the [Select drive] window.
Change the GOT drive to which files are stored.
Page 923 [Select drive] window
2) Folder path
Displays the path to the folders displayed in the list.
3) Folder list
Lists the folders in the drive.
Up to 500 folders in the same path are displayed.
Because the 501st or subsequent folders are not displayed, make sure to store a maximum of 500 folders in the same path.
To scroll the folder list up or down one row, touch and slide the list.
4) [New folder] key
Switches the window to the [Folder name] window.
Create a folder.
Page 926 [Folder name] window
5) [OK] key
Confirms the file storage destination selected, and switches the window to the [File name] window.
Set the name of the file to be saved.
Page 927 [File name] window
6) [Cancel] key
Deletes the input file storage destination, and closes the window.
3)
1)
4) 5)
6)
2)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 925
92
[Folder name] window Create and name a new folder.
1) Folder name
Set the name of the folder to be created.
Up to 53 characters can be set for the folder name.
Make sure that the path consists of 78 characters or less including the file extension.
For the restrictions on the folder name and file name used in the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
2) [OK] key
Creates the folder, and closes the window.
3) [Cancel] key
Closes the window without creating any folder.
1)
2) 3)
6 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
28
[File name] window Set the file name and save options.
1) File name
Set the first character string of the file name.
Up to 55 characters can be set for the first character string.
Make sure that the path consists of 78 characters or less including the file extension.
For the restrictions on the folder and file names used with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
The file is saved under the following name.
2) [Save only the histories that "overwrite" is selected in the history list]
Saves only the history data for which [Overwrite] is selected in the history list on the [Setting, management] screen.
3) [File path]
Displays the path to the save destination of the file
4) [File size (estimate)]
Size of the file to be saved
5) [Default] key
Initializes the setting of [File name].
6) [OK] key
Saves the file, and closes the window.
7) [Cancel] key
Closes the window without saving any file.
[Memo] window Edit the memo in the history data.
1) Memo
Set a memo to be added to the history data.
Up to 100 characters can be set in the memo.
2) [Close] key
Closes the window.
1)
5)
2)
3)
4)
7) 6)
First character string_yyyymmddhhmmss.gpf2
Date and time when the history data is created Character string set in [File name]
1)
2)
28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen 927
92
MEMO
8 28 SERVO AMPLIFIER GRAPH 28.5 [Setting, management] screen
29
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR
Page 929 Features
Page 930 Specifications
Page 933 Operations for Display
Page 937 Operation Procedures
29.1 Features With the R motion SFC monitor, the GOT can monitor motion SFC programs in the Motion CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series)
connected to the GOT and device values.
The following describes the features of the R motion SFC monitor.
SFC diagram display SFC diagrams of motion SFC programs can be displayed.
Starting from the special function switch With a touch of the special function switch placed on the user-created screen, automatic read of motion SFC programs at a
start of the R motion SFC monitor, and SFC diagram display of the set motion program are performed.
For the required settings for the special function switches, refer to the following.
Page 934 Start operation using the special function switch
Touch the special function switch with the following settings.
R MOTION SFC monitor startup
(User-created screen) (SFC diagram monitor screen)
Display Screen: SFC Diagram File Name: MainProgram
Motion SFC programs are read automatically from the Motion CPU, and the motion SFC programs with the set file name are displayed.
Special function switch setting
R MOTION SFC
MONITOR
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.1 Features 929
93
29.2 Specifications
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the R motion SFC monitor.
For connection type settings and precautions for the communication unit, cable, and connection type, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Target controller
Connection type This function can be used in the following connection types.
(: Applicable, : Inapplicable)
*1 Indicates the CC-Link IE controller network connection. *2 Indicates the CC-Link IE Field Network connection. *3 Indicates the CC-Link IE TSN connection. *4 Indicates CC-Link connection (Intelligent device station). *5 Indicates CC-Link connection (via G4).
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the following system applications (extended functions) to the GOT.
R motion SFC monitor
GOT Platform Library
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Controller OS software package OS type
Motion CPU
(MELSEC iQ-R series)
SW10DNC-RMTFW Standard function OS
G-code controlled add-on library
Function Connection type between GOT and controller
Name Description Bus connection
Direct CPU connection (serial)
Serial communicat ion connection
Ethernet connection *4
MELSECNET /H connection, MELSECNET /10 connection
CC-Link IE CC-Link connection
Cont *1
Field *2
TSN *3
ID *2 G4 *3
R motion
SFC
monitor
Motion SFC
program
monitoring
0 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.2 Specifications
29
Required hardware The following hardware is required.
Applicable hardware A USB mouse is usable.
Devices and range that can be monitored The following lists the devices and the ranges that can be monitored with the R motion SFC monitor.
(: Possible, : Inapplicable)
*1 represents the CPU number (0 to 3). *2 represents the module number (0h to FFh).
Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller.
For details of the access range, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
Readable motion SFC programs With the R motion SFC monitor, the GOT can read the following motion SFC programs.
Control codes (SFC diagram. F/FS and G)
Text (F/FS and G)
Hardware
Data storage (Such as an SD card and USB memory)
Device Device range Program display Current value monitor
Input (X) X0 to X2FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y2FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M131071
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF
Annunciator (F) F0 to F131071
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM4095
Data register (D) D0 to D116479
Link register (W) W0 to W176FF
Motion register (#) #0 to #108287
Special register (SD) SD0 to SD4095
CPU buffer memory (U3E\G) *1 U3E\G0 to U3E\G268435455
CPU buffer memory (fixed-cycle communication
area) (U3E\HG) *1 U3E\HG0 to U3E\HG12287
Module access device (U\G) *2 U\G0 to U\G268435455
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.2 Specifications 931
93
Displayable character codes The character code of comments and program names displayable on the R motion SFC monitor differs according to the
language selected in the utility.
*1 Traditional Chinese supports characters displayable in the ASCII code only.
For details on switching the language of the utility, refer to the following.
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
Precautions
SD card cover opening/closing operation Do not open or close the SD card cover of the GOT while the R motion SFC monitor is being used.
Doing so may delete stored data and cause the R motion SFC monitor to operate incorrectly.
Motion SFC program with a security key If motion SFC programs are protected with security keys, the GOT cannot read the motion SFC programs.
For the security key, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-R Motion Controller Programming Manual (Common)
Character code of motion SFC programs Name motion SFC programs using the characters that are included in the character code of the GOT's system language.
Otherwise, when one of the programs is specified, its SFC diagram may not be displayed.
If a motion SFC program is created with unsupported character code, unintended characters may be displayed.
For the character codes that motion SFC programs support, refer to the following.
Page 932 Displayable character codes
When it takes time to read motion SFC programs If online program change files exist in the Motion CPU, it takes time to read motion SFC programs.
To shorten the read time, perform one of the following operations.
Write motion SFC programs to the Motion CPU with MT Developer2.
Then, there will be no online program change file, which shortens the read time for motion SFC programs.
Read motion SFC programs from the Motion CPU to the data storage of the GOT.
The GOT can start monitoring using motion SFC programs stored in its data storage from the next startup.
Read source of motion SFC programs With the R motion SFC monitor, the GOT can read motion SFC programs only from the standard ROM in the Motion CPU.
The programs cannot be read from an SD card.
Displaying a label The R motion SFC program monitor does not support displaying a label.
When a label is used in a program, the following may occur on the detailed program window.
A device name not used in the program is displayed.
The current value of the device is not displayed correctly.
On the detailed program window, the label name is displayed, but the current value is not displayed.
Displayable character code Language of utility
SJIS Japanese
ASCII English, Chinese (Traditional) *1
GB Chinese (Simplified)
KS Korean
2 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.2 Specifications
29
29.3 Operations for Display This section describes how to display the R motion SFC monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
Operations for starting the R motion SFC monitor
Normal operation This section describes how to display the R motion SFC monitor operation screen after the GOT is turned on. The GOT must
have the required system application (extended function) installed on it.
Starting from the utility
Starting from an extended function switch (R motion SFC monitor) set in the project data
Display the utility. Touch the special function switch.
Set the channel No., network No. and station No. for the Motion CPU, which is connected to the GOT.
The SFC diagram monitor screen is displayed.
After the utility screen is displayed, select [Monitor] [R Motion SFC Monitor] from the main menu.
Start
Turn on the power to the GOT.
Select a motion SFC program to display the SFC diagram.
End
Communication setting window
Program batch monitor window
*3
*4
*5
*1 *2
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.3 Operations for Display 933
93
*1 For how to display the utility, refer to the following. GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
*2 For how to set special function switches, refer to the following. GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
*3 For the details, refer to the following. Page 946 Communication setting window
*4 For the details, refer to the following. Page 945 Program batch monitor window
*5 For the details, refer to the following. Page 937 SFC diagram monitor screen
Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT
When the R motion SFC monitor is used, the GOT stores motion SFC programs in the SD card.
Reading motion SFC programs is not required when the GOT is restarted.
Page 936 Setting motion SFC program storage location
Start operation using the special function switch Touch the special function switch for which the following settings are configured to start the R motion SFC monitor.
For the setting items for the special function switch, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Setting item of the special function switch Description
[SP Function] tab [Switch Action] Select [R Motion SFC Monitor].
[Use Program Batch Monitor Window/
SFC Diagram display function]
Select this item.
[Display Screen] Select [Program Batch Monitor Window] or [SFC Diagram].
Depending on the selection, the GOT operates as follows.
When [Program Batch Monitor Window] is selected
Starts the R motion SFC monitor and reads motion SFC programs
automatically.
After the reading, the program batch monitor window is displayed.
When [SFC Diagram] is selected
Starts the R motion SFC monitor and reads motion SFC programs
automatically.
After the reading, the motion SFC program having the specified file
name is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
4 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.3 Operations for Display
29
Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen.
Screen transition when using the special function switch
For the screen transition when using the special function switch for the automatic read of the motion SFC
program and the display of the SFC diagram monitor screen, refer to the following.
Page 934 Start operation using the special function switch
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
At the first startup
The program is locked.
The program is locked.
Password for reading or writing is set for the motion SFC program.
Communication setting window
Active step list window
Password input window
program batch monitor window
Step list window
Password input window
SFC diagram monitor screen
Password input window
Detailed program window
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.3 Operations for Display 935
93
Setting motion SFC program storage location The motion SFC program read from a Motion CPU and the ladder data for the sequence program monitor (Ladder) are stored
in the same destination.
Only drive A (standard SD card) or drive B (USB drive) is usable for storing motion SFC programs.
For the ladder data storage destination setting, refer to the following.
When setting with GOT utility
GOT2000 Series User's Manual (Utility)
When setting with GT Designer3(GOT2000)
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
6 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.3 Operations for Display
29
29.4 Operation Procedures This section describes the display contents of the SFC diagram monitor screen and the functions of the keys displayed on the
screen.
SFC diagram monitor screen
When the SFC diagram monitor is executed
Display screen
No. Item Display contents
1) Target controller display area Displays CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. of the Motion CPU set as the target.
CH No. network No.-station No./CPU No.
2) Keys Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
3) Program switching tab Displays the program name of the program displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
Touching a tab displays the corresponding program in the SFC diagram display area.
Tabs displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed.
If the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be closed.
4) SFC diagram display area Displays the SFC diagram of the motion SFC program.
Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
Inactive : Gray
Active : Pongee
Waiting : Dark red
For displayed motion SFC diagram symbols, refer to the following.
Page 938 Motion SFC diagram symbol
The followings can be selected in the SFC diagram display area.
Comment display: Valid or invalid
Automatic scroll: Valid or invalid
Display menu
5) Message display area Displays error messages and others.
6) Automatic scroll status display area Displays [Scrolling automatically] when the automatic scroll mode is valid.
Nothing is displayed when the automatic scroll mode is invalid.
When the automatic scroll is valid, the automatic scroll turns invalid by touching the automatic scroll status
display area.
7) Number of active steps display area Displays the number of active steps.
Active step list window is displayed by touching this area.
Page 944 Active step list window
1)
2)
2)
2)
5) 6) 7)
4)
3)
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 937
93
Motion SFC diagram symbol The following describes the motion SFC diagram symbols displayed in the SFC diagram display area.
*1 Touching the locked step or transition displays the password input window. Page 947 Password input window
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Classification Name Symbol Function
Program start/
end
START Indicates the program entrance by the program name.
END Indicates the program end (exit).
Step Motion control step -
Once execution type
operation control step *1 Detailed program window is displayed by touching this area.
Page 941 Detailed program window
Scan execution type
operation control step *1
Subroutine call/start step *1 Touch this to add a tab with the name of the program which is set for the
subroutine call/start step, to the right of the program switching tab.
The program corresponding to the added program switching tab is displayed
in the SFC display area.
If the detailed program window is open, the tab will be closed. Clear step *1
Transition Shift *1 Touch this to display the detailed program window.
Page 941 Detailed program window
The device name of the set bit device is displayed on WAITON and
WAITOFF.
Even if the label is set to the bit device, the device name is displayed.
Shift Y/N *1
WAIT *1
WAIT Y/N *1
WAITON
WAITOFF
Jump Normal Touch one of these to search for the jump or pointer of the same number.
The jumps or pointers that are found are displayed in the SFC diagram
display area.
Coupling
Pointer Normal
Coupling
Program name
END
Kn
Fn
FSn
Program name
Program name CLR
Gn
Gn
ON bit device
OFF bit device
Pn
Pn
Pn
Pn
8 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
29
Motion SFC diagram monitor screen
Key functions The following describes key functions for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Menus The following shows the operations for menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Search menu
Display menu
Key Function
[Find] Displays the Find menu.
Page 939 Menus
[Display] Displays the Display menu.
Page 939 Menus
Exits the R motion SFC monitor.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
Scrolls the display up or down one page.
Scrolls the display right or left one column.
Scrolls the display right or left one page.
Key Function
[Step list] Displays the step list window.
Page 943 Step list window
Key Function
[Comment] Switches the comment display between valid and invalid.
Comment display valid Comment display invalid
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 939
94
[Automatic scroll] Switches the automatic scroll between valid and invalid.
When the automatic scroll is valid and all the following conditions are satisfied, the active steps are displayed on the SFC diagram
monitor screen by automatically scrolling the screen.
No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The displayed motion SFC program has an active step.
Displays [Scrolling automatically] in the automatic scroll status display area of the SFC diagram monitor screen when the automatic
scroll is valid.
Page 937 SFC diagram monitor screen
[Active step list] Displays the active step list window
Page 944 Active step list window
[Program batch
monitor]
Displays the program batch monitor window.
Page 945 Program batch monitor window
[Select CPU] Displays the communication setting window.
Page 946 Communication setting window
Key Function
An active step in the block is displayed by automatically scrolling the screen.
The step status becomes inactive.
0 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
29
Detailed program window
Displayed contents The following describes the contents of the detailed program window and the key functions displayed on the screen.
No. Item Display contents
1) Number display area Displays the step number or transition number.
2) Keys Displays the keys for operations on the detailed program window.
3) Program display area Displays the arithmetic control program or transition program.
When the automatic scroll is valid and the active step is changed, the arithmetic control program/transition program of
the active step is displayed.
When the locked step becomes active, the displayed contents do not change in the detailed program window.
Display menu
The arithmetic control program/transition program of the touched step/transition is displayed by touching the step/
transition on the step list window or active step list window.
Page 943 Step list window
Page 944 Active step list window
4) Device display area Displays the devices (device name, device number, and data type) which are used in the arithmetic control program or
transition program displayed in the program display area.
Data type is only displayed when the device is the word device (32-bit integer type/64-bit floating point number type).
The number of displayable devices differs according to the device type.
Up to 288 points can be displayed when the devices are counted in the following way.
Bit device (1 bit): 1 point
Bit device (16 bits): 2 points
Bit device (32 bits): 4 points
Word device (16-bit integer type): 2 points
Word device (32-bit integer type): 4 points
Word device (64-bit floating point number type): 8 points
5) Current value display area Displays the current value of the device which is used in the arithmetic control program or transition program displayed
in the program display area.
If the current value cannot be acquired from the Motion CPU, the value will not be displayed.
The following shows the displayed contents of each device.
Bit device (1 bit): Yellow is displayed at ON, and is displayed at OFF.
Bit device (16 bits/32 bits): The lowest digits of 16-bit/32-bit portion of the initial device are displayed side-by-side.
The contents are displayed only when the device No. of the specified initial device is a multiple of 16.
When the device is ON, the background of the device No. is displayed in yellow.
Example) The current value display of Bit device X18 (16 bits)
Word device: Displays in the display format set in the display format display area.
1)
3)
4)
2)
5) 6)
D2012L
Device name Device number Data type (L: 32 bits, F: 64 bits)
7654 3210 FEDC BA98
X27, X26, , X19, X18
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 941
94
Key functions
6) Display format display
area
Displays the display format of the word devices used in the arithmetic control program or transition program displayed in
the program display area. (Not displayed when bit devices are used.)
The following shows the display format types.
K (): Signed decimal
K (+): Unsigned decimal
H: Hexadecimal (H is displayed on the head of the value in the current value display area.)
BIN: Binary
FLOAT: Floating-point number (The current value is displayed in the exponential representation.)
Display format can be changed by touching the display format display area.
By touching the area, display format changes in the following order.
Item Display contents
Close the detailed program window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
Scrolls the display right or left one column.
No. Item Display contents
16/32Bit :
64Bit :
K() K(+) H BIN
FLOAT H
2 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
29
Step list window Step list window displays the steps and transitions.
Displayed contents
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be highlighted in yellow.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations on the step list window.
2) Step display area Displays the step numbers or transition numbers and the comments set in the steps or transitions.
Active steps are displayed in yellow, and waiting steps are displayed in red.
The locked step or transition is shown as below.
Inactive : Gray
Active : Pongee
Waiting : Dark red
Touch a step or transition to display it on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The program is also displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is locked, the
authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
Kn: Motion control step
Fn: Once execution type operation control step
FSn: Scan execution type operation control step
GSUB: Subroutine call/start step
Gn: Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
WAITON: WAITON
WAITOFF: WAITOFF
Depending on the step or transition, the displayed comments may be as follows.
GSUB (Subroutine call/start step): Call destination/startup destination program name
WAITOFF and WAITOFF: Bit device name
Key Function
[Active step list] Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Page 944 Active step list window
Closes the step list window
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1)
2) 1)
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 943
94
Active step list window The active step list window displays active steps.
Displayed contents
Precautions for changing the Motion CPU to the debug mode
When MT Developer or MT Works2 changes the Motion CPU to the debug mode, Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N in
active status may not be displayed in the active step display area.
Check the active status of Shift Y/N and WAIT Y/N with MT Developer or MT Works2.
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations on the active step list window.
2) Active step display area Displays the active step numbers and comments set in the active step.
The step or transition is displayed as below.
Not locked: Yellow
Locked: Pongee
Touch a step or transition to display it on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
The program is also displayed on the detailed program window. (When the step or transition is locked, the
authentication is needed on the password input window.)
The following shows the types of steps and transitions.
Kn: Motion control step
Fn: Once execution type operation control step
FSn: Scan execution type operation control step
GSUB: Subroutine call/start step
Gn: Shift, Shift Y/N, WAIT and WAIT Y/N
WAITON: WAITON
WAITOFF: WAITOFF
Depending on the step or transition, the displayed comments may be as follows.
GSUB (Subroutine call/start step): Call destination/startup destination program name
WAITOFF and WAITOFF: Bit device name
Key Function
[Step list] Closes the step list window and displays the active step list window.
Page 943 Step list window
Closes the active step list window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1)
2) 1)
4 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
29
Program batch monitor window The following shows the operation for selecting the motion SFC program to display on the SFC diagram monitor screen.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Program status display area Displays the program No., program name and program status of the motion SFC program read from the
Motion CPU.
The program is displayed as below.
Unlocked and running program: Yellow
Locked program: Gray
Locked and running program: Pongee
Touching a program name closes the program batch monitor window and displays the corresponding
program on the SFC diagram monitor screenIf the detailed program window is open, the tabs will be
closed.)
Page 937 SFC diagram monitor screen
Touching the locked program displays the password input window.
Page 947 Password input window
2) Keys Keys for operations on the program batch monitor window.
Key Function
Closes the program batch monitor window.
Scrolls the display up or down one row.
1) 2)
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 945
94
Communication setting window Set the Motion CPU to be monitored.
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) CH No. input area Set the CH No. for the target controller.
2) Network No. input area Set the network No. for the target controller.
3) Station No. input area Set the station No. of the target controller.
When the station No. is set to the host station (FF), set the network No. to 0.
4) CPU No. input area Set the CPU No.
5) CH No. selection key Select a CH No.
6) Keys Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in (b). (Touch input)
Key Function
Closes the communication setting window.
When any of the CH No., network No., station No., and CPU No. is not input and the monitor target is not set,
the communication setting window does not close.
Moves the cursor among the input areas.
The operation differs depending on the status at touch.
When the cursor is in the CH No. input area, network No. input area, or station No. input area:
Moves the cursor.
When the cursor is in the CPU No. input area and settings for the CH No., network No., and station No. are
completed:
The communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears.
Displays the password input window when the read motion SFC program requires a password.
Page 947 Password input window
When the program does not require any password, the program batch monitor window appears.
Page 945 Program batch monitor window
Deletes an input value or character.
Deletes all the input values and characters.
(When the CH No. is input) (When the network No., station No., and CPU No. are input)
1) 3) 4) 2)
5)
1) 3) 4) 2)
6)
6 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
29
Password input window Execute the password authentication of the motion SFC program.
After the password authentication has succeeded, the password is authenticated automatically with the same password for
the following time. (The password input window is not displayed.)
Displayed contents
Key functions
No. Item Display contents
1) Keys Keys for operations in the password input window.
2) Password type Displays the type of the password to be input.
SFC program password: The password for writing or reading
Unlock password: The password for unlocking the program
3) Password input area Set the password.
Key Function
Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation.
Switches the key type to the value.
Switches the key type to the symbol.
Switches the key type to the alphabet (uppercase).
Switches the key type to the alphabet (lowercase).
Deletes all the input values and characters.
Deletes an input value or character.
Authenticates the password set in the password input area.
(For numerical input)(For alphabet input )
1) 1)
3)
1)
3) 2) 2)
1)
29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures 947
94
MEMO
8 29 R MOTION SFC MONITOR 29.4 Operation Procedures
30
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR
Page 949 Features
Page 952 Specifications
Page 958 Operations for Display
Page 961 [Sensor list display] Screen
Page 964 View Screen
30.1 Features The vision sensor monitor is used to perform monitoring, operation, and parameter change directly from the GOT by
connecting the GOT with the vision sensor by Ethernet.
Automatic detection of vision sensors Vision sensors connected to the same network as the GOT are automatically detected.
The detected vision sensors are displayed in a list from which you can select one to connect it to the GOT.
Multiple vision sensors can also be monitored by switching one to another.
GOT
EthernetEthernet
Vision sensor
Hub
Vision sensor
GOT
Vision sensor No.1Hub
Vision sensor No.2
Vision sensor No.3
Host name
VS_No.1
VS_No.2
VS_No.3
Host name
VS_No.1
VS_No.2
VS_No.3
Automatically detected and displayed in a list
Select one to monitor
Monitor
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.1 Features 949
95
Real-time monitor Data in a vision sensor such as captured images, inspection results, and parameters can be monitored in real time.
Switching the operation of the vision sensor, editing the parameters, or other operations can be performed during monitoring
according to the circumstances of the site.
GOT
EthernetEthernet
Hub
Vision sensor
Monitors the captured images, inspection results, or other data in real time.
Switches the behavior of the vision sensor.
Check and edit the parameter values.
0 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.1 Features
30
Adjusting and saving a job file When adjusting a job file is required, the parameters in the vision sensor can be adjusted from the GOT, and the changed job
file can be saved in a storage in the vision sensor.
To switch the job file, select a target job file from the job files stored in the vision sensor.
After editing the parameters, save the job file to the storage in the vision sensor.
Storage in the vision sensor
Job file
Select a job file stored in the vision sensor and switch to the job file.
Ethernet
Storage in the vision sensor
Job file 1
Ethernet
Job file 2
Switching
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.1 Features 951
95
30.2 Specifications Page 952 System configuration
Page 955 Restrictions depending on the access privilege of the account
Page 955 Access range
Page 956 Precautions
System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the vision sensor monitor.
GOT The vision sensor monitor can be used with the following GOTs.
GT27 *1
GT25 *1
*1 To use the vision sensor monitor, install CoreOS version L or later on the GOT.
GOT interface To connect the GOT and vision sensor, use the Ethernet standard port or Ethernet extension port.
The wireless LAN interface cannot be used.
Target controller The vision sensor monitor is available for the following vision sensors.
Mitsubishi Electric vision sensor
Cognex K.K. vision sensor
*1 G2 (Generation2) only
Cable and hub For details on the cable or hub used for connecting a vision sensor, refer to the following.
Manual of the vision sensor used
Series Model Firmware version
MELSENSOR VS series VS80 Ver. 5.7.5 or higher
VS70
VS20
Series Model Firmware version
In-Sight series In-Sight9000 Ver. 5.8.0 or higher
In-Sight8000
In-Sight7000 *1
In-Sight2000
2 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications
30
Connection type Connect the GOT and vision sensor by Ethernet to use the vision sensor monitor.
By using the Web HMI of the vision sensor, the vision sensor becomes a server and the GOT becomes a client.
In addition to the GOT, In-Sight Explorer and web browser are the clients.
If multiple clients are simultaneously connected to one vision sensor, the increased load may degrade the performance.
It is recommended that one client is connected to one vision sensor.
When connecting one GOT and one vision sensor One vision sensor on the same network can be monitored.
When connecting one GOT and multiple vision sensors When multiple vision sensors exist on the same network, the GOT can monitor one of the vision sensors.
When connecting multiple GOTs and one vision sensor When multiple GOTs exist on the same network, each GOT can monitor the same vision sensor.
The number of clients that can be connected to one vision sensor differs depending on the Web HMI settings of the vision
sensor.
For details on the Web HMI settings, refer to the following.
Help for In-Sight Explorer
GOT
Hub
Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
Vision sensor
GOT
Cognex Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
Ethernet cable
Hub
Vision sensor
Vision sensor
Vision sensor
Vision sensor Hub
GOT
GOT
GOT
Ethernet cable
Ethernet cable
Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications 953
95
When connecting multiple GOTs and multiple vision sensors When multiple GOTs exist on the same network, each GOT can monitor any one of the vision sensors.
The number of clients that can be connected to one vision sensor differs depending on the Web HMI settings of the vision
sensor.
For details on the Web HMI settings, refer to the following.
Help for In-Sight Explorer
Required system application (extended function) For the system application (extended function) required, refer to the following.
Page 39 System Applications (Extended Functions) Required for Each Function
System application (extended function) Write the package data that contains the following system applications (extended functions) to the GOT.
Vision sensor monitor
For the communication method with the GOT, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
System application (extended function) size To install a system application (extended function) to the GOT, enough space in the user area is required.
For information on how to check the available space of the user area and each data size, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Applicable hardware A USB keyboard and USB mouse are usable.
Ethernet cable
Ethernet cable
Ethernet cable
GOT
GOT
GOT
Vision sensor
Cognex Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
Cognex Ethernet cable
Vision sensor
Vision sensor
Hub
4 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications
30
Restrictions depending on the access privilege of the account Available functions are limited by the access privilege set for the account of the vision sensor.
The following shows the available functions depending on the access privilege.
: Available, : Unavailable
*1 The users with the protected access privilege can individually enable or disable mode switching.
Access range Vision sensors on the same network as the GOT can be accessed.
Function name Access privilege
Full Protected Locked
Sensor information display
Image display
Graphic display
Live view switching
Trigger
Parameter display
Parameter edit
Mode switching *1
Job list display
Job read
Job save
View switching
GOT
Ethernet (Net No. 1)
Ethernet (Net No. 2)
Vision sensor
Vision sensor
Router
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications 955
95
Precautions
Precautions for communication data size If an oversized communication data packet is sent from the vision sensor to the GOT, a message indicating suspended
communication appears.
When the message appears, the image of the vision sensor is not displayed on the GOT until the packet size of the received
data falls below 1 MB.
Cause In the following cases, this phenomenon may occur.
When a large number of positioning and/or inspection tools are placed
When a large number of positioning and/or inspection tools that include graphics with a large number of vertices are placed
Measure Take the following measures for the job file.
Hide unnecessary graphics.
Reduce the number of positioning and/or inspection tools.
Enlarge the model area with a positioning or inspection tool.
Reduce the search area with a positioning or inspection tool.
Precautions for display
Delayed display on the GOT The display of the inspection result on the GOT may be delayed depending on the settings of the vision sensor or job file.
In such a case, perform adjustment such as the following.
Set a longer judgment cycle for the vision sensor.
Reduce the number of inspection items in the job file.
Delayed response of the vision sensor If the vision sensor is overloaded, its response to the request from the GOT may be delayed.
If the message [Waiting for data] appears frequently in the lower part of the control panel, perform adjustment such as the
following.
Set a longer judgment cycle for the vision sensor.
Reduce the number of inspection items in the job file.
For details on the Web HMI settings, refer to the following.
Help for In-Sight Explorer
Precautions for Web HMI settings of vision sensor
Disabled functions The functions disabled in the Web HMI settings of In-Sight Explorer cannot be used on the GOT.
However, when [Allow View Selection] is disabled, switching views on the vision sensor monitor is not disabled.
For details on the Web HMI settings, refer to the following.
Help for In-Sight Explorer
Image transfer protocol The GOT does not support the HTTPS protocol.
Setting range of the vision sensor monitor The vision sensor monitor is used to perform simple adjustment at startup, during operation or maintenance, or to check the
adjustment results.
Use In-Sight Explorer to set the items that cannot be set with the vision sensor monitor.
6 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications
30
Precautions for job files The vision sensor monitor supports job files created with EasyBuilder and Spreadsheet.
However, graphics and parameters that can be created only with Spreadsheet are not supported.
Precautions for parameters
User label In In-Sight Explorer, you can set user labels when registering parameters. However, the vision sensor monitor, not supporting
user labels, cannot display user labels.
When a real number is entered as a parameter When a real number is entered as a parameter, the entered value may not be set due to the rounding error of the floating
point.
Example)
0.9 is input. 0.899 is set.
When a parameter is reconfigured in the online mode When a parameter is reconfigured while the vision sensor is executing inspections consecutively in the online mode or other
modes, the display may flicker immediately after the change.
This occurs due to the gap between the inspection timing of the vision sensor and the parameter change timing.
When the GOT receives the inspection result of the vision sensor after parameter change, the GOT displays the result after
the parameter change.
Precautions for access privilege When the vision sensor is accessed from In-Sight Explorer, the GOT is in the read-only mode regardless of the access
privilege of the logon account.
The access privilege of the read-only mode is the same as the locked access privilege.
For details on the functions that can be used with the locked access privilege, refer to the following.
Page 955 Restrictions depending on the access privilege of the account
Precautions for logon When the administrator account is set as follows, it is automatically logged on.
For security protection, you are recommended to set a password for the administrator account to prevent automatic logon.
Precautions for exiting the vision sensor monitor Exit this function with the [] key, and then turn off the GOT.
If you turn off the GOT without exiting the vision sensor monitor with the [] key, the response of the vision sensor may slow
down.
Restart the vision sensor if its response slows down.
User name Password
admin Not set
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.2 Specifications 957
95
30.3 Operations for Display This section explains how to display the vision sensor monitor screen after the GOT is turned on.
1. Turn on the GOT and vision sensor.
2. Perform one of the following operations.
In the utility, touch [Monitor] [Vision sensor monitor] from the main menu.
Touch the special function switch (vision sensor monitor) set in the project.
3. The [Sensor list display] screen is displayed.
Displaying the drive recorder screen with a special function switch To use a special function switch, place the switch on a user-created screen.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
8 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.3 Operations for Display
30
Screen transition
Start
Utility Main Menu or
user-created monitor screen
[Sensor list display] screen
[Connection setting] window
[Logon] window
View
[Image view] screen
[Graphic view] screen [Parameter view] screen
[Composite view] screen
[Sensor information display] window
[Read job] window
[Save job] window
Automatic logon as an administrator *1
Logon as a specified user
Log-off
Change the logon user
Switch view
Switch view *2
Switch view
Switch view
Graphic edit view screen
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.3 Operations for Display 959
96
*1 The automatic logon is performed with the administrator account. For the administrator account used for automatic logon, refer to the following. Page 963 [Logon] window
*2 When there is no parameter to display, the screen is switched to the [Image view] screen. To enable transition to the [Composite view] screen, set the parameter of the vision sensor with In-Sight Explorer.
0 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.3 Operations for Display
30
30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen Connected vision sensors are automatically detected and displayed in a list.
Up to 64 vision sensors can be detected with the automatic detection function.
If more than 64 vision sensors are connected, the detection ends when the 64th vision sensor is detected.
Undetected vision sensors are not displayed on the [Sensor list display] screen.
If the load on the vision sensor is heavy, the automatic detection may fail.
In this case, perform automatic detection again with the [Detect] button.
1) [Sensor list]
Displays the detected vision sensors in a list.
The following shows the display items.
[Host name]
Displays the host name of the vision sensor.
[Model No.]
Displays the model number of the vision sensor.
[IP address]
Displays the IP address of the vision sensor.
2) [Sensor information display]
Displays the detailed information of the selected vision sensor.
The following shows the display items.
[Host name]
Displays the host name of the selected vision sensor.
[MAC address]
Displays the MAC address of the selected vision sensor.
[IP address]
Displays the IP address of the selected vision sensor.
[F/W version]
Displays the firmware version of the selected vision sensor.
When the firmware version of the selected vision sensor does not support the vision sensor monitor, a warning icon is
displayed.
Page 952 Target controller
[Serial No.]
Displays the serial number of the selected vision sensor.
3) Message
When the firmware version of the selected vision sensor does not support the vision sensor monitor, a message is displayed.
2)
4)
1)
5)
5)
7) 8) 9)
6)
3)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen 961
96
4) [] key
Closes the [Sensor list display] screen.
5) Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
6) Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the sensor list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob or an area in [Sensor list] to scroll through the list.
7) [Detect] key
Detects vision sensors connected to the same network as the GOT by Ethernet.
8) [Setting] key
Configure the setting for connection with the vision sensor.
Touch this key to display the [Connection setting] window.
Page 962 [Connection setting] window
9) [Connect] key
Connects to the selected vision sensor.
When connection is established, the [Logon] window opens.
Page 963 [Logon] window
The [Connect] key is invalid under the following conditions.
No vision sensor is selected.
The firmware version of the selected vision sensor does not support the vision sensor monitor.
[Connection setting] window Change the settings of the connection with the vision sensor.
1) [Port number]
Set the port number for communication with the vision sensor.
Touch this field to display the key window and enter the port number.
The setting range is [1] to [65535].
However, the following port numbers reserved for the vision sensor cannot be used.
21, 22, 23, 80, 502, 1069, 1070, 2222, 44818, 50000
2) [Timeout time (s)]
Set the timeout period for communication between the vision sensor and GOT.
Touch this field to display the key window and enter the timeout period.
The setting range is [3] to [255].
3) [] key
Closes the [Connection setting] window.
4) [OK] key
Saves the connection setting, and closes the [Connection setting] window.
5) [Cancel] key
Closes the [Connection setting] window without saving the connection setting.
1)
2)
3)
5)4)
2 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen
30
[Logon] window Log on to the connected vision sensor with the specified account.
1) [User name]
Touch this field to display the key window and enter the user name.
For a user name, up to 15 alphanumeric characters (uppercase, lowercase), - (hyphens), and _ (underscores) can be
entered.
2) [Password]
Touch this field to display the key window and enter the password.
For a password, up to 15 alphanumeric characters (uppercase, lowercase), - (hyphens), and _ (underscores) can be entered.
3) [] key
Closes the [Logon] window.
4) [Logon] key
Logs on with the specified user account, and closes the [Logon] window.
When the logon is successful, the view screen last displayed is displayed.
If the logon attempt fails, an error message appears.
5) [Cancel] key
Closes the [Logon] window without logging on.
1)
3)
4) 5)
2)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.4 [Sensor list display] Screen 963
96
30.5 View Screen There are five types of view screens with different configurations.
In each view screen, the common control panel is displayed.
With the control panel, the information on the vision sensor can be displayed and operated.
Page 964 Control panel
The following shows the types of view screens.
[Image view] screen
Displays the image captured by the vision sensor.
Page 967 [Image view] screen
[Graphic view] screen
Superimposes the graphic of a job execution result on the image captured by the vision sensor.
Page 968 [Graphic view] screen
[Composite view] screen
Displays the contents of the [Graphic view] screen and [Parameter view] screen together.
Page 969 [Composite view] screen
[Parameter view] screen
Displays the parameters of a job acquired from the vision sensor in a list.
Page 971 [Parameter view] screen
Graphic edit view screen
Edit the graphic using the control parameter properties for editing the graphic.
Page 972 Graphic edit view screen
Control panel In each view screen, the information on the vision sensor can be displayed and operated with the control panel.
Control panel
4 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
The following shows the setting items in the control panel.
1) Host name
Displays the host name of the vision sensor that is logged on.
2) Sensor information key
Displays the [Sensor information display] window.
The [Sensor information display] window displays the information of the vision sensor that is logged on.
For details on the [Sensor information display] window, refer to the following.
Page 975 [Sensor information display] window
3) Mode
Displays the mode in which the vision sensor is running.
4) Log-on user name
Displays the name of the user logged on to the vision sensor.
5) Total judgment result
Displays the total judgment result of the job file through the inspection by the vision sensor.
[OK]: Judgement result accepted
[NG]: Judgement result not accepted
No display: No judgment result or waiting for the judgment result
6) Active job
Displays the job file read by the vision sensor.
7) [Read] key
Opens the [Read job] window.
In the [Read job] window, select the job file stored in the vision sensor to read it to the vision sensor.
For details on the [Read job] window, refer to the following.
Page 975 [Read job] window
8) [Save] key
Opens the [Save job] window.
In the [Save job] window, name the job file and save it to the storage in the vision sensor.
For details on the [Save job] window, refer to the following.
Page 976 [Save job] window
9) [Online] key, [Offline] key
Switches the mode of the vision sensor between the online mode and offline mode.
10) [Trigger] key
Captures the image currently displayed on the vision sensor
This key is valid only when the vision sensor is in the offline mode and live view is not used.
11) [Live] key
Switches the image captured by the vision sensor to live view.
1)
3) 4)
6)
15)
2)
5)
7) 8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 965
96
12) [Switch views] key
Touch this key to switch the view screens in the following order.
*1 When there is no parameter to display, the screen is switched to the [Image view] screen. To enable transition to the [Composite view] screen, set the parameter of the vision sensor with In-Sight Explorer.
13) [Logon] key
Opens the [Logon] window.
You can change the current logon account.
For details on the [Logon] window, refer to the following.
Page 963 [Logon] window
14) [Logoff] key
Logs off the account currently logged on to the vision sensor.
After the logoff, close the view screen to display the [Sensor list display] screen.
15) Received message
This item is displayed when received data are being analyzed or while waiting for data to be received.
[Image view] screen
[Graphic view] screen
[Parameter view] screen
[Composite view] screen
Switch view *1Switch view
Switch view
Switch view
6 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
[Image view] screen Displays the image captured by the vision sensor.
1) Image
Displays the image of the vision sensor.
The following shows the displayed images.
Image captured in the online mode
Image captured when a trigger condition is satisfied
Image captured in the live view mode
2) Control panel
Use this to display the status of the vision sensor or operate the vision sensor.
For details on the control panel, refer to the following.
Page 964 Control panel
3) [Hard copy] key
Captures a screenshot of the vision sensor monitor and saves the data to a file.
This key cannot be used when the file output of the hard copy is not set in GT Designer3.
For the details of the [Hard copy] key, refer to the following.
Page 977 Hard copy
4) [] key
Closes the [Image view] screen and logs off from the vision sensor.
1) 2)
4)3)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 967
96
[Graphic view] screen Superimposes the graphic of a job execution result on the image captured by the vision sensor.
1) Image
Superimposes the graphic of a job execution result on the image captured by the vision sensor.
Up to five images can be superimposed.
2) Control panel
Use this to display the status of the vision sensor or operate the vision sensor.
For details on the control panel, refer to the following.
Page 964 Control panel
3) [Hard copy] key
Captures the screen displayed on the vision sensor monitor and saves it in the file.
This key cannot be used when the file output of the hard copy is not set in GT Designer3.
For the details of the [Hard copy] key, refer to the following.
Page 977 Hard copy
4) [] key
Closes the [Graphic view] screen and logs off from the vision sensor.
Up to 2000 polygon vertices are displayed in an image.
A graphic having polygon vertices more than the limit will be displayed as a rounder graphic having polygon
vertices within the limit.
1) 2)
4)3)
8 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
[Composite view] screen Displays the contents of the [Graphic view] screen and [Parameter view] screen together.
1) Image
Superimposes the graphic of a job execution result on the image captured by the vision sensor.
Up to five images can be superimposed.
2) Parameter list
Displays the parameters set for the jobs or parameters for the tools in a list.
Touch the value of the parameter for editing.
Up to 100 parameters can be displayed on the GOT.
When the number of parameters registered to the vision sensor exceeds 100, the first 100 parameters received are displayed,
and the rest of the parameters are not displayed.
Touch the [Save] key to save the edited parameters in a job file.
3) Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
4) Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the parameter list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob or an area in the parameter list to scroll through the list.
5) Control panel
Use this to display the status of the vision sensor or operate the vision sensor.
For details on the control panel, refer to the following.
Page 964 Control panel
6) [Hard copy] key
Captures the screen displayed on the vision sensor monitor and saves it in the file.
This key cannot be used when the file output of the hard copy is not set in GT Designer3.
For the details of the [Hard copy] key, refer to the following.
Page 977 Hard copy
7) [] key
Closes the [Composite view] screen and logs off from the vision sensor.
1)
5)
7)6)
2)
3) 3)4)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 969
97
The vertex limit for the polygon displayed in the image is 2000 points.
The graphic that exceeds the vertex limit of the polygon will be displayed with the number of vertices rounded
to the vertex limit.
0 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
[Parameter view] screen Displays the parameters of a job acquired from the vision sensor in a list.
1) Parameter list
Displays the parameters set for the jobs or parameters for the tools in a list.
Touch the value of the parameter for editing.
Up to 100 parameters can be displayed on the GOT.
When the number of parameters registered to the vision sensor exceeds 100, the first 100 parameters received are displayed,
and the rest of the parameters are not displayed.
Touch the [Save] key to save the edited parameters in a job file.
2) Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
3) Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the parameter list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob or an area in the parameter list to scroll through the list.
4) Control panel
Use this to display the status of the vision sensor or operate the vision sensor.
For details on the control panel, refer to the following.
Page 964 Control panel
5) [Hard copy] key
Captures the screen displayed on the vision sensor monitor and saves it in the file.
This key cannot be used when the file output of the hard copy is not set in GT Designer3.
For the details of the [Hard copy] key, refer to the following.
Page 977 Hard copy
6) [] key
Closes the [Parameter view] screen and logs off from the vision sensor.
1) 4)
6)5)
2) 3)
2)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 971
97
Graphic edit view screen Touch the parameter of the graphic to be edited in the [Composite view] screen or [Parameter view] screen to display this
screen.
For the parameters available to edit graphics, refer to the following.
Page 973 Editable parameters
1) Image
Displays the image displayed in the [Composite view] screen or [Parameter view] screen.
2) Horizontal scroll bar
Scrolls the display left or right.
3) Vertical scroll bar
Scrolls the display up or down.
4) Property list
Enter the property values to edit the graphic.
Values can be entered to the first decimal place.
5) Shape selection key
For the composite area and mask area, select the shape to be edited.
6) [OK] key
Sends the edits to the vision sensor and returns to the view screen before transition to the graphic edit view screen.
7) [Cancel] key
Cancels the edits and returns to the view screen before transition to the graphic edit view screen.
8) Zoom
Enlarges the image.
The magnification range is 100 to 300% (25% increments).
9) [] key
Closes the graphic edit view screen and logs off from the vision sensor.
1)
4)
6)
9)8)
2) 7)3)
5)
2 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
Editable parameters The following shows the editable parameters and setting ranges.
Annulus (Annulus)
Circle (Circle)
Composite region (CompositeRegion)
Line (Line)
Masked region (MaskedRegion)
*1 When there are two or more masked regions, the positions cannot be replaced.
Point (Point)
Polygon (Polygon)
Path segment (PolylinePath)
Property Setting range
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Outer Radius Equal to Inner Radius or more
Inner Radius 0 or more, equal to or less than Outer Radius
Property Setting range
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Radius 0 or more
Property Setting range
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Width 0 or more
Height 0 or more
Angle 0 or more, 359.9 or less
Curve -360.0 or more, 360.0 or less
Property Setting range
Y1 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X1 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Y2 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X2 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Property Setting range*1
Location Equal to or less than the setting range of the region
Width Equal to or less than the setting range of the region
Property Setting range
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Property Setting range
Point No. 0 or more, equal to or less than the number of maximum points -1
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Property Setting range
Point No. 0 or more, equal to or less than the number of maximum points -1
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 973
97
Region (Region)
Precautions
Restrictions on the number of composite regions, masked regions, path segments, and polygons
The following parameters have restrictions on the number of graphics.
Composite region, masked region, and path segment: Up to 10 graphics
Polygon vertices: Up to 100
When the limit is exceeded, the parameters will be grayed out in the parameter list on the [Composite view] screen or
[Parameter view] screen, and the graphic edit view screen cannot be displayed.
Reduce the graphic elements to within the limit.
Automatic calculation after editing the property Although the value of a property cannot be edited beyond the input range, some properties may be automatically calculated
after being edited, and the image may extend beyond the graphic edit view.
In that case, [OK] key cannot be touched. Edit the parameter so that the image fits within the graphic edit view.
When a job is changed while a graphic is being edited If any of the following changes is made to a job in In-Sight Explorer while a graphic is being edited in the graphic edit view
screen, the editor is terminated and the screen returns to the view screen before transition to the graphic edit view screen.
Rotation of the image
Change of the selected item in the HMI view
Addition or deletion of the positioning tool
Addition or deletion of the inspection tool
Addition or deletion of the EasyView parameter
Property Setting range
Y 0 or more, equal to or less than the width of the image in the graphic edit view
X 0 or more, equal to or less than the height of the image in the graphic edit view
Width 0 or more
Height 0 or more
Angle 0 or more, 359.9 or less
Curve -360.0 or more, 360.0 or less
4 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
Displayed window
[Sensor information display] window The [Sensor information display] window displays the information of the vision sensor that is logged on.
1) Sensor information
Displays the information of the vision sensor.
2) [] key
Closes the [Sensor information display] window and returns to the view screen.
[Read job] window In the [Read job] window, select the job file stored in the vision sensor to read it to the vision sensor.
1) Job file list
Displays the job files stored in the vision sensor in a list.
In the list, touch to select a job file to be read.
2) Scroll key
Scrolls the display area up and down by one line.
3) Scroll bar
Touch an empty area of the scroll bar above or below the knob to scroll the job file list up or down one page.
Alternatively, touch and slide the knob or an area in the job file list to scroll through the list.
4) [Switch] key
Switches the reading source of job files.
When an SD card is inserted, the reading source can be switched between the vision sensor and SD card.
After switching, displays the job files in the reading source in a list.
1)
2)
1)
4)5) 8)
7)6)
3)
2)
2)
2)
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 975
97
5) Job reading source
Displays the reading source of job files.
[Read job (main unit)]: The reading source of job files is the vision sensor.
[Read job (SD card)]: The reading source of job files is the SD card inserted into the vision sensor.
6) [Read] key
Reads the job file selected in the job file list to the vision sensor.
After reading, closes the [Read job] window and returns to the view screen.
7) [Cancel] key
Cancels reading the job file.
After the cancellation, closes the [Read job] window and returns to the view screen.
8) [] key
Aborts the reading operation of the job file, closes the [Read job] window, and returns to the view screen.
[Save job] window In the [Save job] window, name the job file and save it in the vision sensor.
1) Job file name
Touch this field to display the key window.
Enter the file name of the job file to be saved in the vision sensor.
For the file name, up to 100 characters can be entered.
2) [Switch] key
Switches the saving destination of job files.
When an SD card is inserted, the saving destination can be switched between the vision sensor and SD card.
3) Saving destination
Displays saving destination for job files.
[Save job (main)]: The saving destination for job files is the vision sensor.
[Save job (SD)]: The saving destination for job files is the SD card inserted into the vision sensor.
4) [Save] key
Saves a job file as a specified file name to the vision sensor.
After saving the file, closes the [Save job] window and returns to the view screen.
5) [Cancel] key
Cancels saving the job file.
After the cancellation, closes the [Save job] window and returns to the view screen.
6) [] key
Aborts the saving operation of the job file, closes the [Save job] window, and returns to the view screen.
1)
2) 6)
5)4)
3)
6 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
30
Hard copy Touch the [Hard copy] key to capture a screenshot of the vision sensor monitor.
Save the screenshot as an image file to the data storage installed to the GOT or file server via network.
Settings in GT Designer3 If the output destination of the hard copy files is not set in the GOT project, hard copy operations cannot be performed.
Configure the hard copy settings (for image file output) in the project.
For the details of the hard copy setting, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen Design Manual
Status display The status of the hard copy is displayed on the title bar of the screen.
Precautions
Hard copy operation of the screen with high resolution The higher the resolution of the screen being displayed, the longer it will take to save the screen data to a file.
Hard copy operation during screen transition When the hard copy command is executed during screen transition, the screen displayed when the [Hard copy] key is
touched and the screen data saved to a file may differ.
Exiting the vision sensor monitor When the hard copy command is executed, the vision sensor monitor cannot exit until the file is saved.
Status Details
[Saving] The file is being saved.
Do not execute the hard copy command during the saving process.
[Succeeded] Displayed for five seconds when the file is saved successfully.
[Failed] Displayed for five seconds when the file is not saved.
30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen 977
97
MEMO
8 30 VISION SENSOR MONITOR 30.5 View Screen
REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Sep. 2013 SH(NA)-081196ENG-A First printing : GT Works3 Version1.100E
Nov. 2013 SH(NA)-081196ENG-B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.104J
Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
Abbreviations and generic terms changed
NZ2DL is added to the compatible models for the BOX data logger.
Apr. 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.112S
GT25 supported
Jun. 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.117X
Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
Network monitor supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
Intelligent module monitor supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
Backup/restoration supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, R04CPU, Q173NCCPU, and
Q172NCCPU.
Log viewer supports R120CPU, R32CPU, R16CPU, R08CPU, and R04CPU.
R motion monitor supported
CNC monitor supported
CNC data I/O supported
CNC machining program edit supported
Jul. 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.118Y
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
Backup/restoration supports R32MTCPU and R16MTCPU.
Oct. 2014 SH(NA)-081196ENG-F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.122C
Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed.
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications have been changed.
GT21 has been supported.
GT2512-S has been supported.
The CNC monitor, CNC data I/O, CNC machining program edit are now available on GT2512-S.
Jan. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.126G
Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS has been changed.
The system launcher is supported.
The iQSS utility is supported.
The backup/restoration function has been expanded.
Feb. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.127H
Descriptions of the sequence program monitor (ladder, R Ladder) have been partially changed.
Apr. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-I Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.130L
The motion program editor is supported.
The motion program input/output is supported.
Jun. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-J Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.134Q
The device monitor function supports R120PCPU, R32PCPU, R16PCPU, R08PCPU, and R12CCPU-V.
The Q motion monitor function supports MR-J4-B-RJ.
The log viewer supports Q173NCCPU-S01.
The R motion monitor supports MR-J4-B-RJ.
Jul. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.136S
The device monitor supports R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU.
The log viewer supports R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU.
Oct. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.144A
The device monitor supports R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, and R120SFCPU.
Dec. 2015 SH(NA)-081196ENG-M Writing errors have been corrected.
May 2016 SH(NA)-081196ENG-N Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.155M
Starting the drive recorder from the system launcher is supported.
The intelligent module monitor supports the I/O combined modules.
The backup/restoration function supports CNC C80.
The log viewer supports CNC C80.
The CNC monitor 2 is supported.
The drive recorder is supported.
Aug. 2016 SH(NA)-081196ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.160S
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The intelligent module monitor supports RD77MS8, RD77GF4, RD77GF8, RD77GF16, QD77GF4, and
QD77GF8.
The Q motion monitor supports the advanced synchronous control mode.
The drive recorder supports MELSERVO-JE.
979
98
Oct. 2016 SH(NA)-081196ENG-P Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.165X
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The ladder editor (R ladder) is available in the sequence program monitor.
The CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is supported.
The device monitor now supports CNC C80.
The log viewer now supports RD81DL96.
GT27-V and GT25-V now support the CNC monitor 2.
Jan. 2017 SH(NA)-081196ENG-Q Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.170C
The system launcher supports MELSEC iQ-R series, motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series), and CNC
C80.
The R motion monitor supports 64 axes.
A USB mouse is usable in the R motion monitor, network monitor, servo amplifier monitor, motion SFC monitor,
sequence program monitor (Ladder or R ladder), and sequence program monitor (SFC).
Apr. 2017 SH(NA)-081196ENG-R Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.175H
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
Starting the system launcher (servo network) from the system launcher is supported.
The backup/restoration function supports R64MTCPU.
The iQSS utility supports the RCPU.
The system launcher (servo network) is supported.
Jun. 2017 SH(NA)-081196ENG-S Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.180N
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The system launcher supports CR800-R (R16RTCPU).
The device monitor supports CR800-R (R16RTCPU) and CR800-D.
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) supports displaying comments.
The intelligent module monitor supports CR800-R (R16RTCPU).
The backup/restoration function supports CR800-R (R16RTCPU) and CR800-D.
The drive recorder supports displaying an axis label name.
The system launcher (servo network) supports displaying an axis label name.
Oct. 2017 SH(NA)-081196ENG-T Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.185T
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The sequence program monitor (R ladder) has been renamed the sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder).
The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) supports displaying a program using an FB or FUN.
The log viewer supports FX5CPU.
The drive recorder supports the CC-Link IE Field Network connection.
Starting the drive recorder from the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is supported.
The motion program editor is supported.
The motion program I/O is supported.
The FX ladder monitor supports FX3G, FX3GC, and FX3S.
The FX list editor supports FX3G, FX3GC, and FX3S.
Dec. 2017 SH(NA)-081196ENG-U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.190Y
The system launcher supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The device monitor supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The sequence program monitor (iQ-R ladder) supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The network monitor supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The intelligent module monitor supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The backup/restoration function supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The log viewer supports R01CPU and R02CPU.
The iQSS utility supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
The CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics supports R00CPU, R01CPU, and R02CPU.
Apr. 2018 SH(NA)-081196ENG-V Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.195D
Starting the servo amplifier graph from the system launcher is supported.
Target data for the backup/restoration has been added.
Starting the servo amplifier graph (servo network) from the system launcher is supported.
GT2506HS-V supports the CNC monitor 2.
The servo amplifier graph is supported.
Jul. 2018 SH(NA)-081196ENG-W Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.200J
The device monitor supports R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, and R120PSFCPU.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
0
Oct. 2018 SH(NA)-081196ENG-X Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1.205P
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The system launcher supports the following items.
CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)
Displaying the product information list
Outputting the product information list data to a CSV file.
The CNC monitor 2 supports the following items.
GT2505-VTBD, GT2505HS-V
QWERTY keyboard (GT27-X only)
The backup/restoration function supports the following items.
CR800-Q (Q172DSRCPU)
Connecting an inverter or servo amplifier through a QCPU or LCPU
Jan. 2019 SH(NA)-081196ENG-Y Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1.210U
The device monitor supports FX5UC.
The drive recorder supports displaying waveform data names.
The servo amplifier graph supports displaying waveform data names.
Apr. 2019 SH(NA)-081196ENG-Z Writing errors have been corrected.
Jul. 2019 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AA Writing errors have been corrected.
Oct. 2019 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AB Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1.225K
The system launcher supports the CC-Link IE TSN connection.
The network status display supports the CC-Link IE TSN communication unit.
Network monitor supports the following items.
CC-Link IE TSN connection
R08PCPU,R16PCPU,R32PCPU,R120PCPU,R08PSFCPU,R16PSFCPU,R32PSFCPU,R120PSFCPU
The intelligent module monitor supports the following items.
CC-Link IE TSN connection
R08PCPU,R16PCPU,R32PCPU,R120PCPU,R08PSFCPU,R16PSFCPU,R32PSFCPU,R120PSFCPU
CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics supports R08PSFCPU, R16PSFCPU, R32PSFCPU, and R120PSFCPU.
The backup/restoration function supports the GOT data package acquisition at the timing of the trigger backup.
Jan. 2020 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AC Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.230Q
The device monitor supports FX5UJ.
The backup/restoration function supports FX5UJ.
GT2510-WX supports the motion program editor.
GT2510-WX supports the motion program I/O.
GT27 and GT25 support the R motion SFC monitor.
Apr. 2020 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AD Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.235V
GT27 and GT25 support the vision sensor monitor.
Jun. 2020 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AE Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.240A
Abbreviations, generic terms, and icon indications changed
The device monitor supports the motion controller CPU (MELSEC iQ-R series).
The log viewer supports FX5UJ.
The CC-Link IE Field diagnostics supports FX5UJ.
The company name of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD. has been changed to SHIBAURA MACHINE CO., LTD.
Aug. 2020 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AF Partial corrections.
Oct. 2020 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AG Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.245F
The network monitor function supports ring topology of the CC-Link IE TSN connection.
The drive recorder function supports MR-J5-G and MR-JET-G.
Jan. 2021 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AH Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.250L
Description of SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed
Abbreviations, generic terms, and model icons have been changed.
GT2512-WX supports the motion program editor.
GT2512-WX supports the motion program I/O.
Apr. 2021 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AI Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.255R
The ladder editor (iQ-F ladder) is available in the sequence program monitor.
The drive recorder function supports FX5-ENET.
The system launcher (servo network) supports the Motion module.
The servo amplifier graph supports the MELSERVO-J5 and MELSERVO-JET series.
Jul. 2021 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AJ Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.260W
The log viewer supports the following models.
R08SFCPU, R16SFCPU, R32SFCPU, R120SFCPU
The servo amplifier graph supports displaying the axis name.
Changed the name of the direct CPU connection to the direct CPU connection (serial).
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
981
98
2013 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Oct. 2021 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AK Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.265B
CC-Link IE TSN/CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics supports CC-Link IE TSN.
iQSS utility supports AnyWireASLINK Ver.1.1.
GT SoftGOT2000 (Multiple channels) supports the following functions.
System launcher, drive recorder, system launcher (servo network), and servo amplifier graph
The vision sensor supports the graphic parameter editor.
Jan. 2022 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AL Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.270G
Partial corrections.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot
be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
2
WARRANTY Please check the following product warranty details before using this product.
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.
Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures,
judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
Replacing consumable parts such as a battery, backlight, and fuse. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as
earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage. Failure caused by reasons that could not be predicted by scientific technology standards at the time of shipment from
Mitsubishi. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
(1) Gratis Warranty Term
(2) Gratis Warranty Range (a) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customers expense. The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
(b) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods, and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(c) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged in the following cases.
Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range1.
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued. Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Mitsubishi shall not accept a request for product supply (including spare parts) after production is discontinued.
Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production2.
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.
Overseas service3.
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability4.
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals, or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice. Changes in product specifications5.
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications. In addition, applications in which human life or property could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical, railway applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment, recreation and amusement devices, safety devices, shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal. Even for the above applications, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required, after the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative.
Product application6.
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
983
984 SH(NA)-081196ENG-AL
Trademarks MELDAS, MELSEC, iQ Platform, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, and CC-Link IE are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows NT, Windows Server, SQL Server, Visual C++, Visual C#, Visual Basic, Excel,
and Access are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd. in the United States and other countries.
Unicode is a trademark or registered trademark of Unicode, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
PictBridge is a registered trademark of Canon Inc.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Oracle and JavaScript are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates in the United States and other
countries.
QR Code is a trademark or registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan, the United States, and/or
other countries.
Anybus is a registered trademark of HMS Industrial Networks AB.
Android and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the United States and other countries and is used under license.
Safari and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other countries. The iPhone trademark is
used under license from AIPHONE CO., LTD.
Intel and Intel Core are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
SH(NA)-081196ENG-AL(2201)MEE
MODEL: GOT2000-U-MONITOR-E
MODEL CODE: 1D7MJ7
Specifications subject to change without notice.
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUIL
Related manuals for Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the GOT2000 Series Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric GOT2000 Series v3 User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.